the optimisation of transfer chutes in the bulk materials
TRANSCRIPT
2009
The optimisation of transfer chutes in the bulk materials
industry
MN van Aarde
A dissertation submitted to the Faculty of Engineering in fulfilment of the
requirement for the degree
Magister Ingeneriae
In
Mechanical Engineering
At the North-West University Potchefstroom Campus
Promoter Dr M Kleingeld
Pretoria
ABSTRACT
ABSTRACT
Bulk materials handling is a rapidly growing global industry Immense challenges
exist to improve the efficiency and cost effectiveness of transporting and handling
bulk materials continuously The nature and scale of bulk materials handling
varies from country to country This study specifically focuses on the handling of
bulk materials in the mining sector
Within this industry transfer chutes are a key component used for transferring
bulk material from one conveyor to another Among other uses it can also be
used under hoppers or silos to transfer material to conveyors trains trucks or
ships In a continuous effort to improve the efficiency of processes the industry is
bombarded with transfer chute problems that include
bull blocked chutes
bull high wear of liner materials
bull spillage due to skew loading
bull conveyor belt wear at loading points
Thorough investigation of existing transfer points before modifying or replacing
them with another configuration gives better insight into the problems This aids
the designer to come up with the optimum solution for a speciAc transfer point In
this dissertation a study is done on the configuration of dynamic chutes or hood
and spoon chutes After completing a detailed investigation of existing problems
the study focuses on rectifying material transfer problems and designing for ease
of maintenance
Adding to the improved flow in the new design for the specific case study
discussed in this dissertation other design details are discussed which further
validates the new design This design improves the wear life of the liners inside
the chute and minimises down time by reducing maintenance shutdowns
The optimisation of transfer chutes in the bulk materials industry
MN van Aarde
ii
ABSTRACT
There are literally endless possibilities when it comes to chute configurations due
to the uniqueness of each plant material type and layout constraints It is
therefore beneficial to know what issues to address in the process of chute
design or optimisation
This study focuses on a specific case study with unique problems and solutions
It should however give further insight and a basic understanding of what a chute
designer must consider and the methods taken to optimise an existing material
transfer point The purpose of this document is therefore not to provide the
reader with a recipe for chute optimisation but rather with the knowledge to
comprehend the problems and solutions by discussing a specific industry case
study
The optimisation of transfer chutes in the bulk materials industry
MN van Aarde
iii
SAMEVATTING
SAM EVATTING
Materiaal handtering is n vinnig groeiende wereldwye industrie Hierdie industrie
word gekonfronteer deur groot uitdagings om die effektiwiteit van materiaal
handtering te verbeter en sodoende die koste daaraan verbonde te verminder
Die aard en skaal van materiaal handtering varieer van land tot land afhangende
van die vereistes wat gestel word deur daardie land se industriele sektor Hierdie
studie fokus spesifiek op materiaal handtering in die mynbou sektor waar
hoofsaaklik geprosesseerde erts handteer word
In hierdie industrie is oordrag geute n sleutel komponent en word dit hoofsaaklik
gebruik om erts te vervoer vanaf een vervoerband na n volgende Dit kan ook
onder andere gebruik word onder hoppers of sillos waar materiaal vervoer word
na vervoerbande treine vragmotors of skepe In die strewe om die effektiwiteit
van prosesse te verbeter word die industrie gekonfronteer met probleme wat
onder andere insluit
bull geblokkeerde oordrag geute
bull hoe slytasie op geut-voerring materiale
bull vermorsing van materiaal as gevolg van geute wat skeef aflaai op
vervoerbande
bull hoe slytasie van vervoerbande by uitlaai punte
Voordat bestaande probleem geute vervang word met n nuwe konfigurasie is dit
belangrik om n deeglike ondersoek te doen Hierdie ondersoek skep n beter
insig oor die probleme wat bestaan in die oordrag geute n Beter insig rondom
die probleme gee aan die ontwerper die vermoe om die optimale oplossing vir
die probleme te kry In hierdie skripsie is n studie gedoen oor die konfigurasie
van dinamiese geute of sogenaamde hood and spoon geute Bestaande
probleme word in ag geneem en die studie fokus op die verbetering van
materiaal vloei sowel as In ontwerp wat instandhouding vergemaklik ~~~~~~~~-
The optimisation of transfer chutes in the bulk materials industry
MN van Aarde
iv
SAMEVATTING
As n toevoegsel tot die verbeterde vloei binne die nuwe ontwerp vir die
spesifieke geut waarna gekyk word in hierdie studie word daar ook ander
ontwerp toevoegings bespreek wat die waarde van die nuwe ontwerp verder
bevestig Hierdie ontwerp verbeter die leeftyd van die geut-voerring en tyd wat
afgestaan moet word aan instandhouding word geminimeer
Daar is letterlik eindelose moontlikhede wanneer dit kom by die konfigurasie van
oordrag geute as gevolg van die uniekheid van elke aanleg materiaal tipe en
uitleg beperkings Daarom is dit voordelig om te weet waaraan aandag gegee
moet word in die proses om geute te ontwerp of te optimiseer
Hierdie studie fokus op n spesifieke oordrag geut binne n spesifieke industrie
met unieke probleme en oplossings Dit behoort die geut ontwerper te bekwaam
met die basiese kennis en insig oor waarna om te kyk wanneer geute ontwerp of
geoptimiseer word Die doel van hierdie skripsie is dus nie om die leser te
voorsien van n resep om geute te optimiseer nie maar wei die kennis om die
probleme en oplossings te verstaan deur gebruik te maak van n studie uit die
industrie
The optimisation of transfer chutes in the bulk materials industry
MN van Aarde
v
ACKNOWLEDGEMENTS
ACKNOWLEDGEMENTS
I would like to thank Prof EH Mathews for the opportunity to do my Masters
degree
Special thanks to Dr M Kleingeld for his guidance and effort in assisting me in
my attempt to deliver a dissertation of this standard
Thank you to Prof Lesley Greyvenstein for the language editing
To my family thank you for all your support and encouragement throughout the
execution of this study
------________--__------------shyThe optimisation of transfer chutes in the bulk materials industry
MN van Aarde
vi
TABLE OF CONTENTS ---~-------------------~----
TABLE OF CONTENTS
Abstract ii
Samevatting iv
Acknowledgements vi
Table of contents vii
List of figures ix
List of tables xii
Nomenclature xiii
Chapter 1 Introduction to transfer chutes in the bulk materials handling industry1
11 Introduction to transfer chutes 2
12 Various applications and configurations of transfer chutes 5
13 Recurring chute problems and countermeasures from industry 11
14 Purpose of this research 18
15 Synopsis of this dissertation 19
Chapter 2 Basic considerations in chute design 21
21 Preface 22
22 Design objectives 22
23 Integrating a more appropriate chute layout with the plant constraints 27
24 Investigating the correct chute profile for reduced liner wear 30
25 Feed chute geometry for reduced belt wear 34
26 Conclusion37
Chapter 3 Tests for the identification of recurring problems on existing chutes39
31 Preface 40
32 Test methodology 40
33 Chute performance acceptance criteria 42
34 Discussion of problem areas 42
35 Summary of test results 54
36 Conclusion55
The optimisation of transfer chutes in the bulk materials industry
MN van Aarde
vii
TABLE OF CONTENTS
Chapter 4 Dynamic chutes for the elimination of recurring problems 57
41 Preface 58
42 Consideration of the existing transfer point constraints 59
43 Design of the chute profile 61
44 Incorporating a dead box in the impact areas 67
45 Designing the chute for integration with system requirements 73
46 Conclusion75
Chapter 5 Testing and verification ofthe new solution 77
51 Preface 78
52 Selecting a test methodology 79
53 Determination of material properties 85
54 Verification of the selected test methodology for this application 88
55 Verification of new chute configuration and optimisation of the hood
location 92
56 Effect of the honeycomb structure in high impact zones 95
58 Conclusion 97
Chapter 6 Conclusions and Recommendations 99
61 Conclusions and recommendations 100
62 Recommendations for further study 103
References 1 05
Appendix A Material Tests And Liner Selection 111
Appendix B Chute Control Philosophy 116
The optimisation of transfer chutes in the bulk materials industry
MN van Aarde
viii
LIST OF FIGURES
LIST OF FIGURES
Figure 1 Growth in global crude steel production from 1996 to 2006 [2] 2
Figure 2 Typical in-line transfer point [6] 4
Figure 3 90deg transfer point [7J 4
Fig ure 4 Material lump sizes through a crushing plant 6
Figure 5 Stacker Reclaimer in reclaiming mode 7
Figure 6 Typical dead box [11J9
Figure 7 Typical cascade chute [11] 9
Figure 8 Typical dynamic chute [12] 10
Figure 9 Radial door used in chutes under ore passes or silos [11] 1 0
Figure 10 Flopper gate diverting material to different receiving conveyors [11J 11
Figure 11 Ch ute liner degradation 12
Figure 12 Results of continuous belt wear at transfer points 13
Figure 1 Dust from a transfer point onto a stockpie13
Figure 14 Ceramic composite liners [18]15
Figure 15 Benetech Inteliflow J-Glide transfer chute [19] 16
Figure 16 Flow simulation of the Benetech Ineliflo chute [19] 17
Figure 17 Four step process for plant design and commissioning [1] 27
Figure 18 Vertical curve on incline conveyor 28
Figure 19 Protective roller on a transfer chute 29
Figure 20 Geometry of the impact plate and material trajectory [30J30
Figure 21 Model for the impact of a particle on a flat surface [29] 31
Figure 22 Ore flow path in the curved chute onto the incline conveyor [31] 35
Figure 23 Gentle deceleration of the product before impact on the receiving belt
[32] 35
Figure 24 Typical feed chute discharge model [33] 37
Figure 25 Layout of conveyors for chute test work 43
Figure 26 Configuration of the existing transfer chute44
Figure 27 Clear chute indicating camera angle 46
The optimisation of transfer chutes in the bulk materials industry
MN van Aarde
ix
LIST OF FIGURES
Figure 28 Coarse material at 8 000 tlh 46
Figure 29 Fine material at 8 000 tlh 47
Figure 30 Blocked chute with coarse material at 8600 tIh 47
Figure 31 Damaged side skirt 49
Figure 32 View behind the chute of the receiving conveyor before loading 50
Figure 33 View behind the chute of the receiving conveyor during loading 50
Figure 34 Peak surges experienced during reclaiming operations 52
Figure 35 Stockyard head end layout 59
Figure 36 Dimensional constraints on the existing transfer configuration 60
Figure 37 Hood and spoon configuration for the 90deg transfer 63
Figure 38 Hood velocity profile 65
Figure 39 Spoon velocity profile 66
Figure 40 Chute cross section 67
Fig ure 43 Honeycomb wear box positioning 69
Figure 44 Wear box in the hood section 70
Figure 45 Spacing arrangement of honeycomb ribs inside the hood 71
Figure 46 Wear box in the spoon section 72
Figure 47 Liner detail of the spoon honeycomb wear box 73
Figure 41 Spoon in the operational position 74
Figure 42 Spoon in the non operational position 75
Figure 48 Flow analysis examples a) separation and screening b) hoppers
feeders [36J 80
Figure 49 Simulations results from Fluenttrade [4OJ 83
Figure 50 Simulation results from Bulk Flow Analysttrade [41J83
Figure 51 Determination of material properties for an accurate angle of repose88
Figure Actual material flow with coarse Sat 10 000 tIh 89
Figure 53 Material flow pattem through the existing chute 90
Figure 54 Cross sectional side view of material flow through the existing chute91
Figure 55 Material flow through hood at 10 000 tlh 92
Figure 56 Material flow through spoon at 10 000 tlh 93
Figure 57 Determination of the optimum hood location 94
The optimisation of transfer chutes in the bulk materials industry
MN van Aarde
x
OF FIGURES
Figure 58 Material behaviour through hood 96
Figure 59 Material behaviour through spoon 96
The optimisation of transfer chutes in the bulk materials industry
MN van Aarde
xi
LIST OF TABLES
LIST OF TABLES
Table 1 Design Input Reference Requirements [24J 24
Table 2 Iron are grades used for chute test work 45
Table 3 Results from test programme 54
The optimisation of transfer chutes in the bulk materials industry
M N van Aarde
xii
---------------------------------
CV
NOMENCLATURE
NOMENCLATURE
SCADA
CCTV
CEMA
DEM
kPa
mm
MSHA
ms
mt
MW
NIOSH
OSHA
RampD
tlh
3D
Supervisory Control And Data Acquisition
Closed Circuit Television
Conveyor Equipment Manufacturers Association
Conveyor
Discrete Element Method
Kilopascal
Millimetres
Mine Safety and Health Administration
Metres per second
Metric Tons
Megawatt
National Institute for Occupational Safety and Health
Occupational Safety and Health Administration
Radius of curvature
Research and Development
Tons per hour
Three Dimensional
The optimisation of transfer chutes in the bulk materials industry
MN van Aarde
xiii
CHAPTER 1
CHAPTER 1 INTRODUCTION TO TRANSFER CHUTES IN THE BULK
MATERIALS HANDLING INDUSTRY
The optimisation of transfer chutes in the bulk materials industry
MN van Aarde
1
CHAPTER 1
11 INTRODUCTION TO TRANSFER CHUTES
111 Bulk material handling industry
In order to comprehend the utilisation of transfer chutes fully it is imperative to
first understand the industry in which it is used Transfer chutes are most
commonly used in the bulk materials handling industry Bulk materials handling
operations perform a key function in a great number and variety of industries
throughout the world as stated in 1978 by Arnold McLean and Roberts [1 J
The nature of materials handling and scale of industrial operation varies from
industry to industry and country to country These variations are based on the
industrial and economic capacity and requirements of the specific industry or
country Regardless of the variations in industry the relative costs of storing
handling and transporting bulk materials are in the majority of cases very
significant
o
Figure 1 Growth in global crude steel production from 1996 to 2006 [2J
The optimisation of transfer chutes in the bulk materials industry
MN van Aarde
2
CHAPTER 1
The chart from BHP Billiton shown in Figure 1 provides a clear indication of the
actual drivers of global materials demand Figure 1 indicates the percentage
growth in crude steel production from all the major role players between 1996
and 2006 China accounted for 65 of the 494 million tonnes of global steel
production growth between 1996 and 2006 Europe grew by 6 while the other
countries grew by 20 [2]
These figures emphasise that bulk materials handling performs a key function in
the global industry and economy [1] Because of market requirements new
products continuously evolve This is also true for the field of bulk conveying
technologies [3] It can be assumed that the evolution of new technology is due
to the requirement for more efficient and cost effective operation
The case study which will be discussed from Chapter 3 onwards is an iron ore
export facility This facility exports approximately 50 million tonnes per annum
With each hour of down time the financial losses equate to approximately
R750 000 This highlights the fact that handling systems should be designed and
operated with a view to achieving maximum efficiency and reliability
112 Function of transfer chutes
BS2890 (Specification for Troughed Belt Conveyors) gives the definition for
transfer chutes as follows A straight curved or spiral open topped or enclosed
smooth trough by which materials are directed and lowered by gravity [4] For
any belt conveyor system to operate successfully the system requires that [5]
bull the conveyor belt be loaded properly
bull the material transported by the conveyor is discharged properly
The transfer of bulk material can either be from a belt bin hopper feeder or
stockpile and occurs at a transfer point In most cases this transfer point requires
optimisation of transfer chutes in the bulk materials industry
MN van Aarde
3
CHAPTER 1 - ----~--~--------------~--------
a transfer chute [5] In industry the most common use of transfer chutes is for
transferring bulk material from one conveyor belt to another This transfer of
material can be done in any direction as simplistically explained in Figure 2 and
Figure 3
Figure 2 Typical in-line transfer point [6J
Figure 2 shows a basic in-line transfer of material from the end of one conveyor
belt onto the start of another conveyor belt Figure 3 illustrates a more intricate
design where the direction of material transport is changed by an angle of 90 0 bull
This design or any other design entailing a directional change in flow normally
requires more detailed engineering [7
The optimisation of transfer chutes in the bulk materials industry
MN van Aarde
4
CHAPTER 1
Regardless of the direction or type of transfer there are some design
requirements that always need special attention Some of these requirements
are reduced wear on chute liners correct discharge velocity minimum material
degradation and minimum belt abrasion The correct design will also eliminate
blockages shape the load correctly and minimise the creation of dust [7]
12 VARIOUS APPLICATIONS AND CONFIGURATIONS OF TRANSFER CHUTES
The application of transfer chutes is central to any operation in the bulk handling
industry Whether it is mining operations storing stacking importing or
exporting of bulk material the transfer of material is always required On the
mining side the challenges involved with materials handling are probably some of
the most extreme
This is due to the great variation in lump sizes that must be catered for At
Sishen iron ore mine seven iron ore products are produced conforming to
different chemical and physical specifications The current mining process at
Sishen entails [8]
bull Removal of topsoil and stockpiling
bull Drilling and blasting of ore
bull Loading of iron ore and transporting to the crushers
bull Crushing and screening into size fractions
bull Beneficiation of all size fractions
bull Stockpiling onto various product beds
The processes with the most intricate and complex chute arrangements are
probably crushing and screening as well as stacking and reclaiming of material
The optimisation of transfer chutes in the bulk materials industry
11 N van Aarde
5
CHAPTER 1
121 Crushing
An excavator or wheeled loader transfers the rock to be crushed into the feed
hopper of the primary crusher The primary crusher breaks the large rock
boulders or run of mine material into smaller grain sizes Some of the bigger
crushers in the industry can crack boulders that are about one cubic meter in
size All the crushed material passes over a screen to separate the different
lump sizes The material that falls through the screen is transferred via a series
of transfer chutes and conveyor belts to the stockpile area [9]
Where the material does not pass through the screen another system of transfer
chutes and conveyor belts transfers this material to a secondary crusher The
material is fed into this crusher via a transfer chute from the discharge of a
conveyor belt All the processed material is then transferred to the stockpile area
via a separate series of transfer chutes and conveyor systems [9] Throughout
this whole process the material lump size changes and with it the transfer chute
requirements
Figure 4 Material lump sizes through a crushing plant
The optimisation of transfer chutes in the bulk materials industry
MN van Aarde
6
CHAPTER 1
Figure 4 shows some spillage from a conveyor between a primary and secondary
crusher The shovel in the picture provides a good reference as to the variation
in material lump size on the walkway
122 Stacking and Recaiming
Normally the stockyard area has an elongated yard conveyor for moving bulk
material in the longitudinal direction of the stockyard Straddling the yard
conveyor transversely is the rail mounted undercarriage of the stacker reclaimer
Three main chutes transfer material through the machine [10] Figure 5 shows
this machine in action while reclaiming material from a stockpile
Figure 5 Stacker Reclaimer in reclaiming mode
The first chute will transfer material to the incline conveyor of the machine when
the material has to be stacked on the stockpile In the case where the material
must bypass the machine this chute will transfer material from the tripper back
onto the yard conveyor [10]
The optimisation of transfer chutes in the bulk materials industry
MN van Aarde
7
CHAPTER 1
The second chute transfers material from the incline conveyor onto the boom
conveyor This is normally a difficult process because the boom conveyor is
never in the same direction as the incline conveyor From the end of the boom
conveyor the material is Simply discharged onto the stockpile [10]
When reclaiming stockpile material the bucket whee at the head end of the
boom conveyor scoops up material and deposits it back onto the boom conveyor
From here it is discharged into the centre chute of the machine This chute then
discharges the material onto the yard conveyor for further processing In some
cases the bottom section of this centre chute must be moved out of the way to
allow free passage of material discharged from the tripper chute onto the yard
conveyor [10]
123 Chute configurations
Various chute configurations are used in the bulk materials handling industry
These configurations depend on the specific requirements of the system layout
or material properties There are basically two main configurations consisting of
dead box chutes and dynamic chutes Both of these configurations have their
specific applications in industry The major difference is that dead box chutes
use the material being transferred as a chute liner whereas dynamic chutes are
lined with a high wear resistant material A combination of both can also be
used
If the material being transferred is relatively dry such as goid ore dead boxes
prove to be more beneficial One of the applications of a ded box is to absorb
the direct impact of material discharged from a conveyor into a head chute as
can be seen in Figure 6 Other applications are in long or high transfer points In
these transfers the momentum of falling material must be reduced before
reaching the receiving conveyor belt in order to reduce wear of the belt [11]
The optimisation of transfer chutes in the bulk materials industry
MN van Aarde
8
CHAPTER 1
Figure 6 Typical dead box [11]
As shown in Figure 7 dead boxes are also used to accomplish changes in the
vertical flow direction by inserting angled panels This configuration where dead
boxes are used as deflection plates or impact wear plates is known as a cascade
chute In this case the deflection plate or the impact wear plate hardness is
equal to that of the feed material [11]
Figure 7 Typical cascade chute [11]
The hood and spoon chute or dynamic chute is configured so that the hood
catches and changes the material trajectory path to exit with a vertical velocity
When the material impacts the spoon it slides down the smooth spoon surface
The material flow direction is changed to the direction of the receiving conveyor
as shown in Figure 8 [12]
The optimisation of transfer chutes in the bulk materials industry
MN van Aarde
9
CHAPTER 1
Figure 8 Typical dynamic chute [12J
Ancillary equipment used with this configuration of chutes is radial doors and
flopper gates Radial doors are used successfully below ore passes or silos for
an onoff feed control as shown by Figure 9 One drawback of radial doors is the
possibility of jamming while closing In order to counteract this problem a
knocker arm between the cylinder door and the rod can be added This helps to
close the door with full force open with reduced force or hammered open [11]
Figure 9 Radial door used in chutes under ore passes or silos [11J
The optimisation of transfer chutes in the bulk materials industry
MN van Aarde
10
CHAPTER 1
The function of a f10pper gate is to divert the flow of material in a chute when one
conveyor is required to feed either of two discharge points as shown in Figure 10
For this same purpose a diverter car can also be used where a section of the
chute moves in and out of the path of material flow The critical area in the
design of a flop per gate is the hinge point In order for the gate to be self
cleaning the hinge point should be placed above the apex of the double chute
This also prevents rock traps that can jam the gate [11]
COVERED
Figure 10 Flopper gate diverling material to different receiving conveyors [11J
13 RECURRING CHUTE PROBLEMS AND COUNTERMEASURES FROM INDUSTRY
Transfer chutes are a fundamental link when conveying ore and therefore it is
important to get it right at the outset of design and fabrication Design and
fabrication issues can cause numerous problems when transferring material
Historically conveyor system design focused on the systems overall structural
integrity while ensuring that the equipment would fit within the facilitys
constraints [13] [14] [15]
The optimisation of transfer chutes in the bulk materials industry
MN van Aarde
11
CHAPTER 1
Little attention was given to design analysis or consideration for material flow
characteristics Normally the solution for controlling flow was to implement
simple rock boxes [15] This type of chute configuration is still commonly used in
industry but with more emphasis on the flow of material The most recurrent
problems on transfer chutes are [13] [14]
bull Spillage
bull Blocked chutes
bull High wear on the receiving belt due to major differences between the
material velocity and the belt velocity
bull Rapid chute wear
bull Degradation of the material being transferred
bull Excessive generation of dust and noise
bull Miss tracking of the receiving conveyor belt due to skew loading from the
transfer chute
Figure 11 Chute liner degradation
Figure 11 shows the excessive wear on ceramic tiles where the material
trajectory from the feeding belt impacts the chute These tiles are replaceable
and a maintenance schedule normally specifies the replacement intervals A
The optimisation of transfer chutes in the bulk materials industry 12
MN van Aarde
CHAPTER 1
problem arises when the frequency of these maintenance intervals is too high
due to excessive wear on the liners
Figure 12 Results of continuous belt wear at transfer points
The conveyor belt can account for up to 60 of the capital cost of a bulk
materials handling plant This means that the cost implications of constant
replacement of a conveyor belt due to wear can become significantly higher
than the original capital investment [16] Figure 12 shows the extreme damage
on a conveyor belt caused by abrasion and gouging
Figure 13 Dust from a transfer point onto a stockpile
The optimisation of transfer chutes in the bulk materials industry
MN van Aarde
13
CHAPTER 1 --~ ---------------------------shy
The presence of dust is an indisputable fact in many industries concerned with
the handling or processing of products such as coal mineral ores and many
others [17] As in the case of spillage it is easy to identify transfer systems that
cause dust clouds Environmental regulations are in place to prevent excessive I
dust emissions
Government organisations such as the Occupational Safety and Health
Administration (OSHA) the Mine Safety and Health Administration (MSHA) and
the National Institute for Occupational Safety and Health (NIOSH) closely monitor
dust levels at all coal handling facilities [13] Therefore it is imperative that the
chute design process caters for limiting dust emissions
Systems normally used in industry are enclosed skirting systems bag houses
and dust collectors This however is only treating the symptom rather than
eliminating the primary cause In order to minimise dust generation the use of
low impact angles and minimal chute contact is required (14] One of the most
successful methods of controlling dust is atomised water spray systems using a
combination of high pressure water and chemical substances
Over the years considerable research has gone into minimising wear on transfer
chutes There are currently a few different liner types to choose from depending
on the configuration and application of the chute These include ceramic tiles
chrome carbide overlay materials and typi~al hardened steel plates such as
VRN A combination of liner materials can also be used similar to the one
shown in Figure 14
The opUmisation of transfer chutes in the bulk materials industry
MN van Aarde
14
CHAPTER 1
Figure 14 Ceramic composite liners [18J
This ceramic composite liner is an example of the new technology available in
chute lining materials It is a high wear resistant surface made from cylindrical
alumina ceramic pellets bound within a resilient rubber base The purpose of this
material is to provide wear resistance through the use of ceramics while the
rubber dampens the impact forces [18]
Some innovative concepts for chute design have been implemented since the
materials handling industry started to incorporate new ideas Benetech Inc
installed a new generation hood and spoon type chute at Dominions 1200 MW
Kincaid coal powered generating station as shown in Figure 15 This chute
replaced the conventional dead box chute [19] Their innovation is to use a pipe
configuration combined with the hood and spoon concept
The optimisation of transfer chutes in the bulk materials industry
MN van Aarde
15
CHAPTER 1
Figure 15 Benetech Inteliflow J-Gide transfer chute [19J
This chute has sufficient chute wall slope and cross sectional area to prevent
material build-up and blocked chutes Reduced collision forces in the chute
minimize material degradation and the creation of excessive dust The material
velocity in the chute is controlled by the wall angles to obtain a discharge velocity
with the same horizontal component as the belt velocity [19] Figure 16 shows a
flow simulation of the Benetech concept The simulation shows that this concept
will result in lower impact forces and reduce belt abrasion
The optimisation of transfer chutes in the bulk materials industry
MN van Aarde
16
CHAPTER 1
Figure 16 Flow simulation ofthe Benetech Ineliflo chute [19J
CBP Engineering Corp also considers the concept of pipe type sections to be
the answer to most of the transfer chute problems They describe it as a curved
or half round chute The modern perception is to gently guide the material in the
required direction rather than use a square box design or deflector doors which
turns or deflects the flow [20]
The industry is striving towards developing new technology in transfer chute
design One solution is to incorporate soft loading transfer chutes to alter the
material flow direction with minimum impact on the side walls of chute and
receiving conveyor As experienced by many industries these types of chutes
can transfer material onto the receiving conveyor at almost the same velocity as
the conveyor By doing so many of the problems with material transfer can be
eliminated [13]
Most of these solutions as proposed by industry only address a few of the
numerous problems experienced with transfer chutes The dynamic hood and
The optimisation of transfer chutes in the bulk materials industry
MN van Aarde
17
CHAPTER 1
spoon chute appears to afford the best opportunity for solving most of the
problems There are still however many unanswered questions surrounding this
design
Figure 11 shows the installation of a hood type chute in the iron ore industry It is
clear from this image that liner wear in the higher impact areas is still an area of
concern Improvements can still be made to this design in order to further
enhance its performance
14 PURPOSE OF THIS RESEARCH
The bulk materials handling industry is constantly facing the challenge of
implementing transfer chutes that satisfy all the system requirements Problems
such as high wear spillage blockages and the control of material flow are just
some of the major challenges faced by the industry
The objective of this research is to identify problems experienced with transfer
chutes of an existing bulk handling system and to apply current design solutions
in eliminating these problems In doing so the research aims to introduce a new
method of minimising liner wear caused by high impact velocities
Dynamic chutes are discussed in particular where the entire design process
addresses the problems identified on chutes in brown field projects Approaching
chute design from a maintenance point of view with the focus on reducing liner I
degradation will provide a fresh approach to transfer chute design The
concepts disc~ssed in this dissertation (dynamic and dead box chutes) are
commonly used in industry However some research is done to determine
whether a combination of these concepts can solve some of the problems
experienced by industry
The optimisation of transfer chutes in the bulk materials industry 18
MN van Aarde
CHAPTER 1
At the hand of all the information provided in this dissertation its purpose is to
enable the chute designers to better understand the process of chute
optimisation and design This is achieved through the discussion of a case study
where the chutes are evaluated and re-designed to achieve the desired
performance
15 SYNOPSIS OF THIS DISSERTATION
Chapter 1 gives an introduction to the bulk materials industry and the role that
transfer chutes plays in this industry Some of the problems that the industries
have been experiencing with transfer chutes were identified and the diverse
solutions to these problems discussed These solutions were reviewed to
identify whether improvement would be possible
Chapter 2 provides a better understanding of the functionality and the
conceptualisation of transfer chutes as well as investigating the theory behind
material flow through transfer chutes This theory reviews the research and
design objectives used as a guideline when approaching a new chute
configuration The guidelines for evaluating and designing transfer chutes are
used to verify the performance of these chutes in the iron ore industry
Chapter 3 identifies some practical problems experienced on transfer chutes a~
an existing bulk transfer facility These problems are identified through a series
of tests where the actual flow inside the chutes is monitored via CCTV cameras
The results obtained from these tests are specific to this facility but can provide
insight into the cause of some problems generally experienced in the industry
These results can provide helpful information when modifying or re-designing
new transfer chutes
Chapter 4 uses the theory discussed in Chapter 2 to conceptualise a new
transfer chute configuration for the transfer points that were tested All the facility
The optimisation of transfer chutes in the bulk materials industry 19
MN van Aarde
CHAPTER 1
constraints are taken into account during the process in order to obtain an
optimum solution to the problems identified during the chute test work The old
chutes did not have major problems with liner wear due to large dead boxes
However this remains a serious consideration for the new dynamic chute design
due to its configuration where there is continuous sliding abrasion of the chute
surface A new concept for the reduction of liner degradation is introduced in this
chapter
Before manufacturing and installing this new concept it is important to verify that
it will perform according to conceptual design Chapter 5 is a discussion on the
use of the Discrete Element Method as a verification tool A simulation of the
new transfer chute concept is done to visualise the behaviour of the material as it
passes through the new transfer chute configuration
Chapter 6 discusses the benefits of the new transfer chute configuration A
conclusion is made as to what the financial implications will be with the
implementation of this new concept Recommendations are made for future
studies in the field of bulk materials handling These recommendations focus on
the optimisation of processes and the reduction of maintenance cost to the
facility
The optimisation of transfer chutes in the bulk materials industry
MN van Aarde
20
CHAPTER 2
CHAPTER 2 BASIC CONSIDERATIONS IN CHUTE DESIGN
The optimisation of transfer chutes in the bulk materials industry
MN van Aarde
21
CHAPTER 2
21 PREFACE
In an economic driven world the pressure for production is often the cause of the
loss of production This is a bold statement and is more factual than what the
industry would like to admit This is also valid in the bulk materials handling
industry Production targets seldom allow time for investigation into the root
cause of the problems The quick fix option is often adopted but is frequently the
cause of even more maintenance stoppages
Existing chutes on brown field projects often fail due to an initial disregard for the
design criteria changes in the system parameters or lack of maintenance
These transfer points are often repaired on site by adding or removing platework
and ignoring the secondary functions of a transfer chute Therefore it is
imperative to always consider the basic chute specifications when addressing a
material transfer problem [21]
22 DESIGN OBJECTIVES
In the quest to improve or design any transfer point some ground rules must be
set This can be seen as a check list when evaluating an existing chute or
designing a new chute Transfer chutes should aim to meet the following
requirements as far as possible [21] [22] [23]
bull Ensure that the required capacity can be obtained with no risk of blockage
bull Eliminate spillage
bull Minimise wear on all components and provide the optimal value life cycle
solution
bull Minimise degradation of material and generation of excessive dust
bull Accommodate and transfer primary and secondary scraper dribblings onto
the receiving conveyor
The optimisation of transfer chutes in the bulk materials industry
MN van Aarde
22
CHAPTER 2
bull Ensure that any differences between the flow of fine and coarse grades are
catered for
bull Transfer material onto the receiving conveyor so that at the feed point onto
the conveyor
bull the component of the material now (parallel to the receiving conveydr) is as
close as possible to the belt velocity (at least within 10) to minimise the
power required to accelerate the material and to minimise abrasive wear of
the belt
bull the vertical velocity component of the material flow is as low as possible so
as to minimise wear and damage to the belt as well as to minimise spillage
due to material bouncing off the belt
bull The flow is centralised on the belt and the lateral flow is minimised so as
not to affect belt tracking and avoid spillage
With the design of a new chute there are up to 46 different design inputs with 19
of these being absolutely critical to the success of the design Some of the most
critical preliminary design considerations are shown in Table 1 [24]
The optimisation of transfer chutes in the bulk materials industry
MN van Aarde
23
CHAPTER 2
Table 1 Design Input Reference Requirements [24J
Aria Unit
Feed Conveyor
Belt Speed r ms
Belt Width mm
JibHead Pulley Dia mm
Pulley Width mm
Angle to Horizontal at the Head Pulley degrees
Belt Troughing Angle degrees
Sight Height Data
Feed Conveyor Top of Belt to Roof mm
Drop Height mm
Receiving Conveyor Top of Belt to Floor mm
Receiving Conveyor
Belt Speed ms
Belt Width mm
Belt Thickness mm
Angle of Intersection degrees
Angle to Horizontal degrees
Belt Troughing Angle degrees
Material Properties
Max Oversize Lump (on top) mm
Max Oversize Lump (on top) degrees
studies done by Jenike and Johanson Inc have identified six design principles
that can serve as a guideline in chute optimisation exercises These six
principles focus on the accelerated flow in the chute which they identified as the
most critical mode [25]
Within accelerated flow the six problem areas identified by Jenike and Johanson
Inc are [25]
The optimisation of transfer chufes in the bulk materials industry
MN van Aarde
24
CHAPTER 2
bull plugging of chutes at the impact points
bull insufficient cross sectional area
bull uncontrolled flow of material
bull excessive wear on chute surfaces
bull excessive generation of dust
bull attrition or breakdown of particles
221 Plugging of chutes
In order to prevent plugging inside the chute the sliding surface inside the chute
must be sufficiently smooth to allow the material to slide and to clean off the most
frictional bulk solid that it handles This philosophy is particularly important
where the material irnpacts on a sliding surface Where material is prone to stick
to a surface the sliding angle increases proportionally to the force with which it
impacts the sliding surface In order to minimise material velocities and excessive
wear the sliding surface angle should not be steeper than required [25]
222 Insufficient cross sectional area
The cross section of the stream of material inside the chute is a function of the
velocity of flow Therefore it is critical to be able to calculate the velocity of the
stream of material particles at any point in the chute From industry experience a
good rule of thumb is that the cross section of the chute should have at least two
thirds of its cross section open at the lowest material velocity [25] When the
materialis at its lowest velocity it takes up a larger cross section of chute than at
higher velocities Therefore this cross section is used as a reference
223 Uncontrolled flow of material
Due to free falling material with high velocities excessive wear on chutes and
conveyor belt surfaces are inevitable Therefore it is more advantageous to
The optimisation of transfer chutes in the bulk materials industry
MN van Aarde
25
CHAPTER 2
have the particles impact the hood as soon as possible with a small impact
angle after discharge from the conveyor With the material flowing against the
sloped chute walls instead of free falling the material velocity can be controlled
more carefully through the chute [25]
224 Excessive wear on chute surfaces
Free flowing abrasive materials do not normally present a large wear problem
The easiest solution to this problem is to introduce rock boxes to facilitate
material on material flow Chute surfaces that are subjected to fast flowing
sticky and abrasive materials are the most difficult to design
A solution to this problem is to keep the impact pressure on the chute surface as
low as possible This is done by designing the chute profile to follow the material
trajectory path as closely as possible By doing so the material is less prone to
stick to the chute surface and the material velocity will keep the chute surface
clean [25]
225 Excessive generation of dust
Material flowing inside a transfer chute causes turbulence in the air and
excessive dust is created In order to minimise the amount of dust the stream of
material must be kept in contact with the chute surface as far as possible The
material stream must be compact and all impact angles against the chute walls
must be minimised A compact stream of material means that the material
particles are flowing tightly together At the chute discharge point the material
velocity must be as close as possible to the velocity of the receiving belt [25]
The optimisation of transfer in the bulk materials industry
M N van Aarde
26
CHAPTER 2
226 Attrition or breakdown of particles
The break up of particles is more likely to occur when large impact forces are
experienced inside a chute than on smooth sliding surfaces Therefore in most
cases the attrition of material particles can be minimised by considering the
following guidelines when designing a transfer chute minimise the material
impact angles concentrate the stream of material keep the material stream in
contact with the chute surface and keep the material velocity constant as far as
possible [25]
23 INTEGRATING A MORE APPROPRIATE CHUTE LAYOUT WITH THE PLANT
CONSTRAINTS
According to Tunra Bulk Solids in Australia the process for design and
commissioning of a new plant basically consists of four steps The entire
process is based on understanding the properties of the material to be
handled [1]
RampD CENTRE CONSULTING CONTRACTOR ENGINEERING AND PLANT
COMPANY OPERATOR r-------------- I TESTING Of CONCEPTUAl I DETAILED DESIGN CONSTRUCTION amp
I BULKSOUDS - DESIGN COMMISSIONING- I shyI Flow Proper1ies Lining Material tuet Equipment
Selection Procurement _ I I
I I
I Flow Pat1erns SSlpment Quality Control I
I IFeeder Loads amp Process Performance
I Power I Optimisation Assessment I I
L J -
I IBin Loads I I I Wear Predictions I
FEEDBACK I I I IModel Studigt L _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ J
i ~ FEEDBACK r-shyFigure 17 Four step process for plant design and commissioning [1J
The optimisation of transfer chutes in the bulk materials industry
MN van Aarde
27
CHAPTER 2
Figure 17 illustrates this four step process These steps are a good guideline in
order to incorporate a more appropriate chute layout for the plant constraints
This is an iterative process where all the possible solutions to a problem are
measured against all the possible plant constraints This section focuses more
on the second column of Figure 17 and specifically on structures and equipment
During this stage of design the utilisation of 3D parametric modelling also creates
an intimate and very accurate communication between the designer and the
project engineer or client This effective communication tool will save time and
improve the engineering process [24]
A good example of obtaining an appropriate chute layout for the plant constraints
can be explained as follows On an existing plant a transfer point will have a
specific transfer height from the top of the feed conveyor to the top of the
receiving conveyor If the feed conveyor has an incline section to obtain the
required transfer height it will also have a curve in the vertical plane of that
incline section This curve has a certain minimum radius in order to keep the belt
on the idlers at high belt tensions [26]
Figure 18 Vertical curve on incline conveyor
The optimisation of transfer chutes in the bulk materials industry
MN van Aarde
28
CHAPTER 2
If the transfer height at a transfer point is changed the path of the feeding
conveyor should always be taken into consideration With an increase in transfer
height the vertical curve radius will increase as well in order to prevent the
conveyor from lifting off the idlers in the curve This will require expensive
modifications to conveyor structures and therefore in most cases be a pointless
exercise Figure 18 shows clearly the large radius required to obtain a vertical
curve in a belt conveyor
Other considerations on brown field projects might be lift off of the receiving
conveyor at start up before or after the vertical curve This is caused by peaks
in belt tension at start up which may cause the belt to lift off the idlers and chafe
against the chute In some cases this can be solved by fitting a roller as shown
in Figure 19 to the underside of the chute to protect it from being damaged by
the belt or to protect the belt from being damaged by the chute The position of
this specific chute is just after a vertical curve where the belt tends to lift off at
start up
Figure 19 Protective roller on a transfer chute
The optimisation of transfer chutes in the bulk materials industry
MN van Aarde
29
CHAPTER 2
24 INVESTIGATING THE CORRECT CHUTE PROFILE FOR REDUCED LINER WEAR
In order to reduce chute wear the curved-profile variable chute concept is
introduced [27] This concept was originally developed by Professor Roberts for
the grain industry in 1969 [28] After many years of research and investigation
CMR Engineers and Project managers (pty) Ltd came to the following
conclusion any improvement in coal degradation dust generation and chute
wear can only be achieved by avoiding high impact forces or reducing them as
much as possible [27]
At any impact point of material in a chute or conveyor kinetic energy is
dissipated This increases material degradation and wear on liners and conveyor
belt covers Therefore it is good practise to redirect the kinetic energy in a
useful manner This action will help to reduce liner and belt wear [32]
x
Vo
- ImpactPlate
Figure 20 Geometry of the impact plate and material trajectory [30J
The optimisation of transfer chutes n the bulk materials industry
MN van Aarde
30
CHAPTER 2
The path followed by the material discharged over the end pulley of a belt
conveyor is known as its trajectory and is a function of the discharge velocity of
the material from the conveyor [29] Figure 20 shows the material trajectory as
weI as the radius and location of the impact plate In the case of dynamic chutes
this impact plate represents the back plate of the chute
The correct chute profile to reduce wear must cater for the proper location of the
chute covers and wearing plates This location depends upon the path of the
trajectory which must be predicted as accurately as possible
Figure 21 Mode for the impact of a particle on a flat surface [29]
Figure 21 illustrates a material particle impinging on a flat chute surface at an
angle of approach 91 and with approach velocity V1 This particle will then
rebound off the chute plate at an angel 92 and velocity V2 The wear on the
chute liners or the surface shown in Figure 21 will be a function of the vector
change in momentum of the particle One component will be normal to and the
other component parallel to the flat surface The parallel component is referred
to as the scouring component along the surface [29]
It is important to determine the radius of curvature of material within the
trajectory It is now a simple exercise to determine the chute hood radius
depending on plant constraints Firstly the material trajectory must be calculated
The optimisation of transfer chutes in the bulk materials industry
MN van Aarde
31
CHAPTER 2 ---~----------------
According to the mechanical handling engineers association in Perth Australia it
is beneficial to keep the impact angle as small as possible Impact angle less
than 20deg are recommended for most liner materials This will ensure an
acceptably small impulse force component normal to the surface The r~te at
which the material is gouging away the chute liner at the impact point will be
reduced [29]
The material trajectory is determined by equation l
(1)
Where the origin of the x and y axis is taken at the mean material height h and
the discharge point on the pulley as shown in Figure 20 The variables involved
in the calculation of the material trajectory are [30]
y =vertical position on the grid where the trajectory is determined
x = position parallel to the receiving belt line where the trajectory is determined
v = material speed
g =gravitational constant
a =inclination angle of the feeding conveyor
After the material leaves the belt a simplified assumption can be made that it
falls under gravity It is quite clear that in order to minimise the impact angle
the impact plate must follow the path of the material trajectory as far as possible
It will almost never be possible to obtain a contact point between the material and
the chute where there is a smooth contact with no impact angle
This radius of curvature of the material tr~jectory is determined as follows [30
The optimisation of transfer chutes in the bulk materials industry i 32
MN van Aarde
CHAPTER 2
[1 + ( gx )]15 R = vcos8
c (2)
vcos8
Where
g == gravitational constant
v == material speed
8 == Angle at discharge
In order to simplify the manufacturing process of a curved chute the radius must
be constant For a relatively smooth contact between the material and the chute
plate the radius of the curved chute at the point of contact is as close as
possible to the material discharge curvature radius [30] This is rarely possible
on brown field projects due to facility constraints In this case there will be higher
probability for rapid liner wear Each situation must be individually assessed to
determine the best solution
Cross sectional dimensions of the transfer chute must be sufficient to collect the
material and ensure continuous flow without causing blockages At the same
time the chute profile must not result in excessive material speed Material
speed inside the chute will be considered to be excessive when it can not be
controlled to exit the chute at approximately the same velocity to that of the
receiving conveyor Chutes may block for the following reasons [29]
bull Mechanical bridging due to large lumps locking into one another
bull Insufficient cross section causing cohesive material to choke or bridge
bull Inadequate chute inclination causing fines build-up
bull Corner effects or cohesion causing material to stick to the chute walls
The optimisation of transfer chutes in the bulk materials industry
MN van Aarde
33
CHAPTER 2
For the handling of large lumps of material field experience has shown that the
chute cross sectional area should be 25 times the major dimension of the largest
lumps To avoid possible bridging of the material in the chute the
recommendation is to make the inner chute volume as large as possible This
will be guided by the support steelwork around the transfer point [29]
Field experience has shown that it is advisable depending on the material being
transferred that the chute inclination angles be no less than 65deg to 700 Cornerbull
effects should also be avoided where material gets stuck in the inner corners of
chute plate work These angles should preferably be no less than 70 0 bull
25 FEED CHUTE GEOMETRY FOR REDUCED BELT WEAR
The design parameters to reduce both chute and belt wear are interrelated
Research done at the Phalaborwa copper mine is a good case study to prove the
concept of a curved chute profile This mine had specific problems with high belt
wear at transfer points At this facility an in-pit 60 x 89 gyratory crusher and
incline tunnel conveyor was commissioned to haul primary crushed ore A
conventional dead box chute transfers ore from the crusher to a 1800 mm wide
incline conveyor [31]
The maximum lump size handled by this section of the facility is 600 mm (60 kg)
An 18 mm thick top cover was specified for this conveyor with an X grade
rubber according to DIN (abrasion value lt 100 mm) This belt had an original
warranty of 10 years After 35 years the top cover started to show signs of
excessive wear and the tensile cords of the 18 mm thick cover were visible [31]
In April 1994 Phalaborwa commissioned the curved chute concept and a new
belt on the incline conveyor Six months after commissioning no gouging or
pitting damage was evident The material velocity through this curved chute onto
the incline conveyor is shown in Figure 22 [31]
The optimisation of transfer chutes in the bulk materials industry
MN van Aarde
34
CHAPTER 2
VELOCITY ( m I aec ) _ nm _ bull m _ 1211 _ UTI _ U16
_ IIU _ Im _ I rn _ 171-111 _ u n _ ~ l
_ 4 ~
_ 41 _ 4
141 CJ UtiI 1bull-bull 1t5
~ 1m bull UI2
Material Flow Velocity Gradient
Figure 22 Ore flow path in the curved chute onto the incline conveyor [31]
TENDENCY TO FORM STAGNANT LAYER LEADING
TO INSTABILITY IN DEPTH OF FLOW
C8middotFLOW IN CURVED CHUTES
Figure 23 Gentle deceleration of the product before impact on the receiving belt [32]
The optimisation of transfer chutes in the bulk materials industry
MN van Aarde
35
CHAPTER 2
Figure 23 illustrates the gentle deceleration of material that is achieved with the
curved chute concept This helps to reduce belt wear because it is relatively
easy to discharge the material at the same velocity as the receiving conveyor
The material speed v can be calculated at any point in the chute using equation
3 and equation 4 [33]
v 2~R [(2ue2 -l)sin(O) +3ue cos(O)] + Ke 2uB (3) 4ue +1
This equation is only applicable if the curved section of the chute has a constant
radius Rand I-Ie is assumed constant at an average value for the stream [33]
I-Ie = friction coefficient
8 = angle between the horizontal and the section of the spoon where the velocity
is determined and
(4)
The optimisation of transfer chutes in the bulk materjas industry
MN van Aarde
36
CHAPTER 2
Mass Flow Rate Omh
Figure 24 Typical feed chute discharge model [33J
The velocity Ve at the discharge of the chute can be determined from equation 3
and equation 4 The components Vey and Vex of the discharge velocity as
shown in Figure 24 can now be calculated This investigation should aid the
optimisation of the chute profile in order to [33]
bull match the horisontal component Vex of the material exit velocity as close
as possible to the belt speed
bull reduce the vertical component Vey of the material exit velocity in order to
minimize abrasive wear on the receiving conveyor
26 CONCLUSION
This section discussed the technical background necessary for the optimisation
of transfer chutes on an existing iron ore plant which will be discussed in
Chapter 4 The focus is specifically aimed at reducing impact wear on chute liner
materials and abrasive wear on receiving conveyor belts Important to note from
The optimisation oftransfer chutes in the bulk materials industry
MN van Aarde
37
CHAPTER 2
this section is the acceptable limits of dynamic chute optimisation or design
These limits aremiddot
bull a material impact angle of less than 20deg
bull a variance of less than 10 between the receiving belt velocity and the
material discharge velocity component parallel to the receiving conveyor
An important aspect of chute optimisation is to consider the facility constraints
These constraints are in some cases flexible but in most cases the chute
optimisation process must be designed within these constraints This means that
any new concept will have to be measured against what is possible within the
facility limits
It is important to note that only the most common transfer chute problems were
mentioned in this chapter Other possible problems were not addressed in this
chapter as it is normally related to detail design issues Solutions to these
problems are unique to each type of chute and will be addressed for the specific
case study in Chapter 4
The optimisafjon of transfer chutes in the bulk materials industry
MN van Aarde
38
CHAPTER 3
The optimisation of transfer chutes in the bulk materials industry
MN van Aarde
CHAPTER 3 TESTS FOR THE IDENTIFICATION OF RECURRING
PROBLEMS ON EXISTING CHUTES
39
CHAPTER 3
31 PREFACE
Since the completion of a certain iron ore handling facility it has been
experiencing recurring material transfer problems at high capacities In order to
investigate the problem it was decided that performance testing of the chutes
should be carried out The purpose of these tests was to monitor chute
performance at transfer rates of up to the design capacity of 10 000 tlh for
various grades of iron ore handled by the facility Some of the methodologies
used in testing are only applicable to this specific facility
Due to variations and surges associated with the reclaim operations at the
facility performance testing focused on reclaim side chutes This means that all
the transfer points at the exit points of the stockyard conveyors were tested
Nineteen tests were conducted on various stockyard transfers Information such
as the specific facility or conveyor numbers cannot be disclosed due to the
confidentiality of information
To analyse SCADA data the stacker reclaimer scale is used to determine the
peak surges passing through the transfer under investigation The reason for
this is that the peaks in flow due to reclaiming operations flatten out when
passing through the transfer points This is due to chute throat limitations and
small variations in belt speeds If the down stream scales are used it would give
an inaccurate indication of the amount of ore that passed through the transfer
chute
32 TEST METHODOLOGY
A CCTV camera was installed in a strategic position inside the head chute of the
stockyard conveyors These cameras provided valuable information on the
physical behaviour of the material flow inside the transfer chutes Where
possible cameras were also placed on the receiving belt in front of and behind
The optimisation of transfer chutes in the bulk materials industry
MN van Aarde
40
CHAPTER 3
the chute This was done to monitor belt tracking and spillage A high frequency
radio link between the head chute and the control tower made it possible to
monitor the cameras at all times
SCADA data was used to determine and establish the condition of the material
transfer at the time of the test Data from various scales en route were obtained
as well as confirmation of blocked chute signals In analysing the SCADA data
the stacker reclaimer scale is used to determine the peak surges passing through
the transfer being tested
Data was recorded from a sampling plant at the facility This data provides the
actual characteristics of representative samples taken and analysed by the
sampling plant during the duration of the test The data gathered consist of
moisture content of the material sample as well as the size distribution of the ore
Where possible an inspector was placed at the transfer point being tested to
observe and record the performance The inspector had a two way radio for
communication with the test co-ordinator in the central control room He would
also be responsible for the monitoring of any spillage dust emissions etc that
may not be picked up by the cameras
Prior to commencing a test on a specific conveyor route the following checks
had to be performed on all the material conveying equipment
bull Clean out all transfer chutes and remove any material build-up from the
sidewalls
bull Check that feed skirts are properly in position on the belt
bull Check that the conveyor belt is tracking properly at no load
bull Check conveyor idlers are all in position and free to rotate
bull Check blocked chute detectors are operational and in the correct location
The optimisation of transfer chutes in the bulk materials industry
MN van Aarde
CHAPTER 3
bull Change the position of the blocked chute detector if required to improve its
fUnction
bull Test and confirm that the CCTV middotsystems are functioning correctly
bull Assign persons with 2 way radios and cameras to monitor and record the I
results at each transfer point on the route
33 CHUTE PERFORMANCE ACCEPTANCE CRITERIA
A material transfer chute performs to specification if it transfers a maximum of
10 000 tlh of a specific iron are grade without experiencing any of the following
problems
bull Material build up inside the chute or blocking the chute ie material is not
exiting the chute at the same rate as it is entering
bull Material spillage encountered from the top of the transfer chute
bull Material spillage encountered where material is loaded onto the receiving
conveyor
bull Belt tracking of the receiving conveyor is significantly displaced by the
loading of material from the transfer chute onto the conveyor
Tests were conducted over a period of one month and in such a short period
visible wear is difficult to quantify Due to the sensitivity of the information no
historical data in terms of chute or belt wear were made available by the facility
Therefore it is not part of the criteria for these specific tests Should a chute
however fail to perform according to the set criteria it validates the need for
modifications or new designs
34 DISCUSSION OF PROBLEM AREAS
The major concern during the test work is material flow at the transfer points
Secondary concerns are spillage tracking of the receiving belt and material
The optimisation of transfer chutes in the bulk materials industry
MN van Aarde
42
CHAPTER 3
loading onto the receiving belt One of the external factors that playa significant
role in material flow rate is the method and process of reclaiming This section
will highlight all the problem areas observed during the test work
Figure 25 shows the layout of the stockyard area This layout will serve as a
reference when the specific test results at each transfer point are discussed The
legends for Figure 25 are as follows
c=gt Transfer points where performance tests have been done
~ Direction that the conveyors are moving in
CV4 CV3 CV2 CV1
Figure 25 Layout of conveyors for chute test work
All four stockyard conveyors have a moving head arrangement This means that
the chutes are split up into two sections A moving head discharges material
onto either conveyor (CV) 5 or CV 6 via a static transfer chute The moving
head positions are shown by A Band C in Figure 25
The optimisation of transfer chutes in the bulk materials industry
MN van Aarde
43
CHAPTER 3
Position C is the purging or dump position This position is used when the
stacker reclaimer is in stacking mode and any material left on the stockyard
conveyor gets dumped The material does not end up on the stockpiles
preventing contamination
90 de-g TRANSFBt
OfAO BOX IN MOVING HEAD
Figure 26 Configuration of the existing transfer chute
Figure 26 shows the configuration of the existing transfer chutes These chutes
capture the trajectory from the head pulley in a dead box situated in the top part
of the chute The material then cascades down a series of smaller dead boxes
onto the receiving conveyor below
Various grades of iron ore were tested during the testing period These different
grades of iron ore are shown in Table 2 Three fine grades and four coarse
grades were used The coarse material is defined as particles with a diameter of
The optimisation of transfer chutes in the bulk materials industry
MN van Aarde
44
CHAPTER 3
between 12 mm and 34 mm and the fine material with diameters of between
4 mm and 12 mm
Table 2 Iron are grades used for chute test work
Material Predominant Lump Size
Fine K 5mm
Fine N 8mm
Fine A 8mm
Coarse K 25mm
Coarse D 34mm
Coarse S 12 mm
Coarse A 20mm
The CCTV cameras were placed inside the moving head pointing down into the
static chute overlooking the receiving conveyor Figure 27 shows the camera
angle used during testing This is a view of a clear chute before testing The
legends for clarification of all the video images are as follows
Front of the chute throat opening
Top of flowing material at the chute throat opening
Flow pattern of the material
Direction of the receiving belt
The optimisation of transfer chutes in the bulk materials industry
MN van Aarde
45
CHAPTER 3
Figure 27 Clear chute indicating camera angle
341 Coarse Material vs Fine Material
Differences in transfer rates between coarse material and fine material are
evident from the data gathered during the test programme These results are
discussed later in this chapter The area between the yellow arrows and the red
line is the amount of freeboard available Freeboard is the open space available
between the top of the flowing stream of material and the chute plate work
Figure 28 and Figure 29 shows the flow of coarse ore and fine ore respectively in
the same chute at 8 000 tlh
Figure 28 Coarse material at 8 000 tlh
The optimisation of transfer chutes in the bulk materials industry
MN van Aarde
46
CHAPTER 3
Figure 29 Fine material at 8 000 tlh
The amount of freeboard with fine material is much larger than with coarse
material It is therefore obvious that coarse material is more likely to block a
chute when peak surges occur This is due to particles that interlock in the small
discharge opening of the chute
Figure 30 Blocked chute with coarse material at 8 600 tIh
Figure 30 is a snap shot of a chute blocked with coarse ore due to the material
interlocking at the discharge opening The time from material free flowing to a
blocked chute signal was approximately 10 seconds This is determined by
comparing the CCTV camera time to the blocked signal time on the SCADA
The optimisation of transfer chutes in the bulk materials industry
MN van Aarde
47
CHAPTER 3
The high clay content in finer material can also cause problems in the long run
When wet Anes are fed through the chutes a thin layer of Anes builds up and
sticks to the sides of the chute As this layer dries out it forms a new chute liner i
and the next layer builds up This process occurs gradually and will eventually
cause the chute to block
342 Cross Sectional Area
Video images of a blocked chute on the receiving belts were analysed to
determine whether the blockage was caused by material build up on the belt
underneath the chute This indicated that with the occurrence of a blocked chute
the material keeps flowing out of the chute at a constant rate without build up
From this the assumption can be made that in the case of a blocked chute the
material enters the chute at a higher rate than it is discharged at the bottom
Therefore the conclusion can be made that the chute cross sectional area at the
discharge is insufficient to handle the volume of ore at high throughput rates
Tests with a certain type of coarse material yielded a very low flow rate requiring
adjustment to the chute choke plate on the transfer between CV 3 and CV 5
The chute choke plate is basically a sliding door at the bottom of the chute to
adjust the discharge flow of material Tests with another type of coarse material
shown in the summary of test results indicates how the choke plate adjustment
can increase the throughput of material in the chute
Data of all the different types of ore at the facility are obtained at the sampling
building This data shows that the material size distribution for the two types of
coarse material used in the tests mentioned above are the same This indicates
that the test results with the second coarse material are an accurate reflection of
what will be experienced with the first type of coarse material Special care
The optimisation of transfer chutes in the bulk materials industry
MN van Aarde
48
CHAPTER 3
should be taken when adjusting the choke plate to make sure that skew loading
is not induced by the modification
343 Spillag3
During one of the first tests on the transfer between CV 2 and CV 6 spillage
was observed at one of the side skirts on the receiving belt A piece of the side
skirt had been damaged and pushed off the belt as shown by Figure 31 This
caused some of the material to be pushed off the belt when skew loading from
the chute caused the belt to miss track In this case spillage was not caused by
the skirt but by skew loading from the chute onto the receiving conveyor
Figure 31 Damaged side skirt
A greater concern is spillage on the moving head chute of CV 3 and CV 4
loading onto CV 6 It appears as if the head chute creeps during material
transfer onto CV 6 As the chute creeps the horizontal gap between the
moving head chute and the transfer chute reaches approximately 180 mm
Facility operations proposed a temporary solution by moving the head chute to
the dumping or purging position and back to CV 5 before stopping over CV 6
The reason for this creep could be attributed to slack in the moving head winch
cable
The optimisation of transfer chutes in the bulk materials industry
MN van Aarde
49
CHAPTER 3
345 Belt Tracking and Material Loading
The only belt tracking and material loading problems observed occurred on the
transfer between CV 2 and CV 5 I CV 6 A diverter plate was installed at the
bottom of the chute in order to force material flow onto the centre of the receiving conveyor belt This plate now causes material to fall to the left of the receiving
belt causing the belt to track to the right
Figure 32 View behind the chute of the receiving conveyor before loading
Figure 32 shows the view from a CCTV camera placed over the receiving
conveyor behind the chute Note the amount of the idler roller that is visible
before loading
Figure 33 View behind the chute of the receiving conveyor during loading
The optimisation of transfer chutes in the bulk materials industry
MN van Aarde
50
CHAPTER 3
Figure 33 shows the view from a CCTV camera placed over the receiving
conveyor behind the chute during loading Note the difference between the
amount of the idler roller that is visible between Figure 33 and Figure 32 This is
a clear indication of off centre belt tracking due to skew loading I
At the same transfer point it appears as if the configuration of the chute causes
the material to be dropped directly onto the receiving belt from the dead box in
the moving head This will cause high impact wear on the belt in the long run
High maintenance frequencies will be required on the impact rollers underneath
the chute and the roller bearings will have to be replaced frequently
346 Reclaiming Operations
Reclaim operations are done from the stacker reclaimer that scoops up the
material with a bucket wheel from the stockpile The machine starts at the top
bench of the stockpile and reclaims sideways until it is through the stockpile
This sideways movement is repeated while the machine moves down the
stockpile If the machine digs too deep into the stockpile small avalanches can
occur that over fill the buckets This causes peak surges in the flow on the
conveyor system
With an increase in the peak digging or reclaim rate as requested for test work it
seemed that the peak surges increased as well In normal reclaiming operations
(average reclaim rate of 6 000 tlh to 7000 tlh) the peaks in reclaim surges do not
usually exceed 1 000 tlh This is however dependent on the level of the
stockpile from where the machine is reclaiming
At a peak digging or reclaim rate of 8 000 tlh peak surges of up to 2 000 tlh were
observed as can be seen from Figure 34 All stacker reclaimers are operated
manually and the depth of the bucket wheel is determined by monitoring the
The optimisation of transfer chutes in the bulk materials industry
MN van Aarde
51
CHAPTER 3
reclaimer boom scale reading (yellow line) This makes it difficult to reclaim at a
constant rate
The reason for the high peak surges is due to avalanches on the stockpile
caused by reclaiming on the lower benches without first taking away the top
material The blue line in Figure 34 represents a conveyor scale reading after
the material has passed through a series of transfer chutes It is clear that the
peaks tend to dissipate over time as the peaks on the blue line are lower and
smoother than that on the yellow line
IlmJ
bull I _ bull It bull bull bull bull
--ErI--E--~---h--E=+[J]--EiE ~ J~~~ middot middot -~L I-~f~1-1shyt~=tt~~J~~v5 i ~ ~ ~ ~ ~ i ~ 1 ~ ~ ~ s ~ ------ ~-- - ------ - _ - -------- -- -- - _---- -- -r - --- -_shyp
C)
~ 1r =r=l[=1 -It-1 -- -~ -t= --shy~ _middotmiddot -r middotr middot middot [middot _r _ _ r- middotmiddot rmiddot middotmiddot -r- rmiddot-- middot- middotmiddot -rmiddot -r-middotmiddot middotr lXgtO middotmiddotmiddotmiddotmiddotmiddotmiddotmiddot[middotmiddotmiddotmiddotmiddotmiddotmiddotlmiddotmiddotmiddotmiddotmiddotmiddotlmiddotmiddotmiddotmiddotmiddotmiddotmiddotmiddotimiddotmiddotmiddotmiddotmiddotmiddotmiddotmiddotr-middotmiddotmiddotmiddot j middotmiddot1middotmiddotmiddotmiddotmiddot1middotmiddotmiddotmiddotmiddotmiddotmiddot1middotmiddotmiddotmiddotmiddot middotlmiddotmiddotmiddotmiddottmiddotmiddotmiddotmiddotmiddotmiddotmiddotjmiddot I~ [ bullbullbullbullbullbullbull [ bullbullbull middotmiddotmiddot1middotmiddotmiddotmiddotmiddotmiddot1middotmiddotmiddotmiddotmiddotmiddotmiddotmiddot1middotmiddotmiddotmiddotmiddotmiddotmiddotmiddot middotmiddotmiddotmiddotmiddotmiddotmiddotmiddoti~middotmiddotmiddotmiddotmiddotmiddotmiddotmiddottmiddotmiddotmiddotmiddotmiddotmiddotmiddotrmiddotmiddotmiddot middotrmiddotmiddotmiddotmiddotmiddotmiddot~middotmiddotmiddotmiddotmiddotmiddotmiddotmiddot1middotmiddotmiddotmiddotmiddotmiddotmiddotmiddotimiddotmiddotmiddot
t) cent
~ i i l i i i i i i i it ~ 8 ~ ~ S l i
~~ Ii ~ ~ g i i ~ 4 1 J yen i
s a e 11 JI as $ $ ~ IS IS e It
Time
-Con~SCO=-E___S~ SCALE
Figure 34 Peak surges experienced during reclaiming operations
347 Other Problem Areas
Some blockages on other chutes at the facility occurred while testing the
stockyard chutes These blockages are also shown in Table 3 where the test
The optimisation of transfer chutes in the bulk materials industry
MN van Aarde
52
CHAPTER 3
results are discussed and to raise awareness that the bottlenecks on site are not
only caused by problems on the tested chutes
A chute downstream from the stockyards encountered a blockage with fine I
material when the flow rate reached 11 OOb tfh Although this is higher than the
test maximum of 10 000 tfh it still raises concern as to why the chute blocked so
severely that it took approximately two hours to clear
Another bottleneck is the transfer point between the feed conveyor of CV 2 and
the discharge chute on CV 2 This transfer point blocked with fine material at a
peak just below 10 000 tfh It should be even worse with coarse are as
previously discussed Due to the configuration of the head chute spillage of
scraper dribblings is also of great concern The main stream of material
interferes with the flow path of the dribbling material Therefore the carry back
scraped off the bottom of the feeding belt cannot i~ow down the chute and is
pushed over the sides of the chute
The optimisation of transfer chutes in the bulk maferias industry
MN van Aarde
53
CHAPTER 3
35 SUMMARY OF TEST RESULTS
Table 3 Results from test programme
Transfer Point Material Tested Test No Peak Capacity Blocked Chute
CV11 CV5 Yes
Fines N 14 10000 tlh No
Fines N 15 10000tlh No
CV 11 CV6 Coarse K 20 9300 tlh No
Fines K 4 10600tlh No
Fines A 19 9633 tlh No
CV31 CV5 Yes
Yes
Yes
Coarse A 17 9427 tlh No
CV31 CV6 Coarse K 7 10195t1h Yes
Coarse K 8 11 000 tlh Yes
CV41 CV5 Coarse A 16 10307 tlh No
No (Mech trip on
CV4CV6 Fines K 10 10815 tlh downstream conveyor)
Coarse K 11 8000 tlh No
Fines A 18 10328 tlh No
No (Feed to CV 2
CV21 CV5 Fines N 13 10 000 tlh blocked)
CV21 Coarse K 1 amp 2 10 153 tlh No
No (Blocked chute on
Fines K 3 11 000 tlh downstream transfer)
The optimisation of transfer chutes in the bulk materials industry
MN van Aarde
54
CHAPTER 3
Table 3 shows the results obtained from all the tests on the stockyard conveyor
discharge chutes Where possible the same material grade was tested more
than once on the same transfer in order to confirm the repetitiveness of the test
The tests shown in red indicate the transfers that blocked at a flow rate of less
than 10000 tlh
Coarse K and Coarse 0 are noted as the critical materials for blocked chutes
caused by a peak surge Tests with Coarse K and Coarse S where a blocked
chute occurred at just over 10 000 tlh can also be considered as failed tests
This is due to the lack of a safety margin freeboard inside the chute When
analysing the video images a build up can be seen at a flow rate of less than
10000 tlh
Table 3 indicates that the fine material did not cause blocked chutes but it was
seen that it did fill up the chute throat area in some cases Although the coarse
material grades are shown as being least suitable for high flow rates the fine
material should not be underestimated for its ability to cause blockages The
finer materials normally have higher clay contents than the coarse grades and
therefore stick to the chute walls more easily_
36 CONCLUSION
At lower capacities (7 000 tlh to 8 000 tlh) the material appear to flow smoothly
inside the chutes without surging or building up in the chute This flow rate
normally does not cause spillage or skew loading on the receiving conveyor belt
On average as the flow rate approaches 9 000 tlh the material in the chute
throat area starts packing together and finally blocks up the chute
At transfer rates greater than 9 000 tlh the available area inside the chutes is
completely filled up This causes material to build up or surge inside the chute
which eventually results in the chute choking and the inlet flow becomes greater
The optimisation of transfer chutes in the bulk materials industry
MN van Aarde
55
CHAPTER 3
than the outlet flow Depending on the volume of the chute the choked state can
only be maintained for a certain period of time If the inlet flow does not
decrease it will cause a blocked chute
Peak surges of up to 10 000 tfh were recorded in most tests which involved a
material surge inside the chute but without the occurrence of a blocked chute trip
Although no blocked chute signal was given in these cases the ability of the
chutes to transfer continuously at flow rates of between 9 000 tfh and 10 000 tfh
is not very reliable
Continuous transfer at flow rates approaching 9 000 tfh seems attainable in most
cases but due to the limited freeboard available in the chute throat area the
chutes will easily become prone to blocking Due to the high peak surges at an
increased maximum reclaim rate the amount of freeboard is critical If the
design criteria of the chute were intended to accommodate these large surges
then all the chutes failed this test This can be attributed to the fact that no
freeboard is left at a maximum reclaim rate of 9 000 tfh
With the background available from the test programme it is clear that further
investigation is required to obtain a solution to these problems All the
information gathered can be integrated and utilised to provide a solution A
possible solution can then be tested against the problems found with the current
transfer chutes
The optimisation of transfer chutes in the bulk materials industry
MN van Aarde
56
CHAPTER 4
CHAPTER 4 DYNAMIC CHUTES FOR THE ELIMINATION OF
RECURRING PROBLEMS
The optimisation of transfer chutes in the bulk materials industry
MN van Aarde
57
CHAPTER 4
41 PREFACE
After completion of the chute test programme the decision was made to improve
the old transfer configuration by installing a dynamic chute The reason for the
dynamic chute is to increase the material speed and decrease the stream cross
sectional area The dead boxes in the older chute slowed the material down and
the restriction on transfer height resulted in the material not being able to gain
enough speed after impacting on the dead boxes
A dynamic chute configuration is investigated in this chapter As the new chute
is fitted within the existing steelwork there are certain constraints that determine
the new configuration All the constraints and limitations discussed in this section
are specific to the facility under discussion
The new chute design basically consists of a hood and spoon which retains the
kinetic energy in the material stream as it is transferred from one conveyor to the
other This will reduce the creation of dust in the chute and help to discharge the
material at a velocity closer to that of the receiving conveyor The new design
does however experience high wear which was not a problem with the old chutes
due to large dead boxes
In order to fit the optimum design of a dynamic chute within the existing structure
some changes are required to the positioning of the feed conveyor head pulley
These changes are necessary to accommodate the discharge trajectory from the
feeding conveyor
The radii of the hood and spoon are specified in such a way that the impact wear
is reduced significantly In addition both the hood and spoon are fitted with a
removable dead box section in the impact zones The incorporation of these
sections makes this chute revolutionary in the sense of ease of maintenance
The optimisation of transfer chutes in the bulk materials industry
MN van Aarde
58
CHAPTER 4
This new chute addresses all problems identified at the facility and aims to
eliminate most of them
Tests were carried out to identify worst case materials for flow and wear
Different liner materials were tested for both flow and wear conditions The
outcome of these tests is used as the basis for the design of a new chute As
different conditions for flow and wear inside the chute exist different liners are
investigated for each section inside the chute
42 CONSIDERATION OF THE EXISTING TRANSFER POINT CONSTRAINTS
The stockyard consists of four stacker reclaimers and several transfer points
feeding onto the two downstream conveyors resulting in a very intricate system
This system has numerous requirements which need to be addressed when
considering a new transfer chute configuration The transfers under discussion
are situated at the head end of the stockyard conveyors
MOV1NG HEAD OER MOvm poundAD OVER CVI6 CVIS
t4CLIE SECTION
PURGING POSmON
Figure 35 Stockyard head end layout
The design of a new transfer chute configuration is restricted to a certain extent
by the existing structures on site Figure 35 provides an overall view of the
existing steelwork at the head end of the stockyard conveyor This existing steel
structure can be modified to suit a new configuration but does have some fixed
The optimisation of transfer chutes in the bulk materials industry
MN van Aarde
59
CHAPTER 4
constraints A good example of these constraints is the transfer height between
the stockyard conveyor and the downstream conveyors CV 5 and 6
On both sides of the stockyard conveyor stockpiles of ore can be reclaimed and
deposited onto the conveyor This facility allows a certain travel for the stacker
reclaimer along the stockyard conveyor for the stacking and reclaiming of
material The most forward position of the stacker reclaimer is at the beginning
of the incline section of the stockyard conveyor As previously explained any
curvature in a conveyor requires a certain minimum radius When the transfer
height is raised the radius constraints on that curvature in the stockyard
conveyor will reduce stockyard space This means that the storage capacity at
the facility will be greatly diminished
I ~
j
Figure 36 Dimensional constraints on the existing transfer configuration
The ideal is to stay within the eXisting critical dimensions as shown in Figure 36
As functionality of the chute dictates the chute configuration these dimensions
can be modified within certain constraints These critical dimensions on the
existing configuration are
The optimisation of transfer chutes in the bulk materials industry
MN van Aarde
60
CHAPTER 4
bull Centre of receiving belt to centre of the head pulley 800 mm
bull Bottom of receiving belt to top of the head pulley 4048 mm
The head pulley can however be moved back a certain amount before it
becomes necessary to change the entire incline section of the stockyard
conveyor As the moving head moves forward and backward there are idler cars
trailing behind the moving head carriage as shown in Figure 35 The purpose of
these idler cars is to support the belt when the moving head is feeding onto
CV 6 or when it is standing in the purging position
43 DESIGN OF THE CHUTE PROFILE
431 Design Methodology
Proven standard methods for the functional design of the chute are used These
hand calculation methods are based on the Conveyor Equipment Manufacturers
Association (CEMA) standard as well as papers from Prof AW Roberts These
are typically calculations for determining the discharge trajectory optimal radius
of the hood and spoon as well as the velocity of material passing through the
chute
In addition to standard methods of carrying out conceptual flow design it is
supplemented by the use of Discrete Element Modelling (OEM) simulation
software This is done to visualise the flow of material through the chute
Results from standard calculation methods are compared to the outputs of the
OEM simulations to confirm both results Chapter 5 will focus on the use of
Discrete Element Modelling for the design and verification of chute concepts
The optimisation of transfer chutes in the bulk materials industry
MN van Aarde
61
CHAPTER 4 -__-----__---_----------shy
432 Design Development
Figure 37 shows the concept of the hood and spoon chute for a 90deg transfer as
required by the facility layout The decision to opt for a hood and spoon chute is
based on trying to retain the material velocity when transferring material from the
feeding conveyor to the receiving conveyors Retention of material velocity is
critical as the transfer height is restricted The overall facility constraints for
design are as follows
bull Feeding belt speed - 45 ms
bull Receiving belt speed - 45 ms
bull Transfer height - 401 m
bull Belt widths -1650 mm
bull Maximum material throughput -10000 tlh
As this is a retrofit of an existing facility some of the facility constraints cannot be
changed This forms part of the design development as it steers the design in a
certain direction Due to the fact that the transfer height cannot be changed the
chute profile will be dependent on the transfer height restriction
The optimisation of transfer chutes in the bulk matefials industry
MN van Aarde
62
CHAPTER 4
START-UP CHrrlE
DRlBBIlNG CHUTE
Figure 37 Hood and spoon configuration for the 90 transfer
The optimum solution for the correct chute profile in this situation would be to
move the head pulley back far enough This should be done so that the hood
can receive the material trajectory at a small impact angle and still discharge
centrally onto the spoon However the head pulley can only be moved back a
certain amount Any further movement will require changes to the structure of
the feeding conveyor incline section
As the stockyard conveyors feed onto two receiving conveyors the head pulley
of the stockyard conveyors is situated on a moving head rail car This enables
the conveyor to discharge either on CV 5 or CV 6 as shown in Figure 25
Taking the movement of the head pulley into account the moving head rail car
can be shortened by 1000 mm in order to move the head pulley back As stated
in the preface all changes are distinctive to this facility alone However it is
important to be aware of the consequences of every modification
The optimisation of transfer chutes in the bulk materials industry
MN van Aarde
63
CHAPTER 4 -__----- ------shy
433 Determination of the Profile
An important of the hood and spoon design is to ensure a
discharge from the hood onto the centre of the spoon The is
determined using equation (1) in section 24 Although various material
are transferred it does not have a significant effect on the calculated trajectory
the bulk properties of the materials are very similar It is however important
to the material which will transferred obtain the flow angles and wear
This information the will be
the Liner selection for this case study is discussed in Appendix A
After the trajectory has been determined the hood radius can determined by
using equation (2) As head pulley can move 1 000 mm backward the
possible hood radius was determined to 2 577 mm This hood radius is
VIU(I(1 to produce the wear on the zone in chute
The impact angle at this radius is 11 which is less than the maximum
allowable limit of 20
The hood radius is chosen to as close as possible to radius of curvature of
the material trajectory The point where the hood radius and the trajectory radius
cross is known as the impact point In to determine the velocity
point in hood the at is required on the
hood from the horizontal where the material impacts and to slide down the
hood surface
In this case the position impact hood is at 558r from the horizontal
In to determine the velocity this angle e is used as starting
point in (3) obtain a complete velocity profile angle from where
the material impacts hood is decreased in increments 5 up to the
discharge point which is normally 0
The optimisation chutes in the bulk materials industry
MN van Aarde
64
-----
CHAPTER 4
Hood Velocity Profile
70
--- --~ 6 0
5 0
40 ~_
~ 30 g --- a 20 gt
10
00
60 50 40 30 20 10 o Theta (Position inside the hood)
Figure 38 Hood velocity profile
The spoon radius is determined in such a way that the wear at the point of impact
is kept to a minimum At the same time the horizontal component of the material
exit velocity is as close as possible to the receiving belt speed Firstly the
assumption is made that the initial velocity of material in the spoon is equal to the
exit velocity of material from the hood This yields a spoon entry velocity of
633 ms and can also be seen from Figure 38
By reiterating various radii for the spoon the optimum exit velocity Ve can be
obtained These radii are selected according to the available space in which the
spoon must fit and also to produce the smallest impact angle for material
discharging from the hood This table is set up to display the different exit
velocities at various spoon radii The exit velocity is also dependent on the exit
angle which is determined by the length of the spoon arc In this case the spoon
radius is chosen as 3 575 mm An exit angle of 38deg from the horizontal yields an
exit velocity closer to the receiving belt speed
The optimisation of transfer chutes in the bulk materials industry
MN van Aarde
65
CHAPTER 4
Spoon Velocity Profile
67
66
65
S 64 amp0 g 6 3
V
v-shy ~ ~
ii ~ gt 62
61 I I 60
o 10 20 30 40 50 60
Theta (position inside the spoon)
Figure 39 Spoon velocity profile
Taken from the origin of the spoon radius the material position in the spoon at
discharge is sr The selection of this angle is guided by the geometry of the
chute and surrounding structures This angle is then used to calculate the exit
velocity as shown in Figure 39 At this point the discharge angle relative to the
conveyor angle is 38deg Ve is then determined to be 6087 ms with a velocity
component of 479 ms in the direction of the belt This value is 618 higher
than the belt speed of 4S ms which is acceptable as it is within the allowable
10 range of variation Minimal spillage and reduced wear on the receiving
conveyor is expected
Both the hood and spoon have a converged profile This is done in order to
minimise spillage and ensure a smooth transfer of material from the hood to the
spoon and from the spoon to the receiving conveyor The converged profile
starts out wide to capture any stray particles and converges to bring the material
particles closer together at the discharge This profile does not influence the
transfer rate of the chute as the stream of material through the chute is no more
The optimisation of transfer chutes in the bulk materials industry
MN van Aarde
66
CHAPTER 4
compact than the material on the conveyor belt before and after the transfer
chute
44 INCORPORATING ADEAD BOX IN THE IMPACT AREAS
In chapter 1 reference is made to a chute design utilising pipe sections with a
rounded profile The flat back plate is chosen instead of a rounded pipe type
section to house the honeycomb dead box configuration It would be possible to
fit the honeycomb into a rounded back section but manufacturing and
maintenance would be unnecessarily difficult and expensive
Furthermore the cross section profile of the chute shows three sliding surfaces
as shown in These surfaces consist of the back plate two vertical side plates
and two diagonal plates This is done in order to increase the angle between
adjoining plates so that the probability of material hanging up in the corners is
reduced This helps to alleviate the risk of experiencing blocked chutes
Figure 40 Chute cross section
The optimisation of transfer chutes in the bulk materials industry
M N van Aarde
67
CHAPTER 4
441 Honeycomb Wear Box in the Hood
A honeycomb or wear box is incorporated into this chute configuration in order to
further minimise wear in the hood and spoon The honeycomb configuration is
clearly shown in and is typical for both the hood and spoon Reduced wear will I
be achieved as impact and sliding will take place on the basis of material on
material flow Ore is captured inside the honeycomb pockets which protects the
ceramic lining in the section of the honeycomb and creates another sliding face
made of the material being transferred The ribs in the wear box do not protrude
from the sliding face of the chute and therefore do not interfere with the main
stream flow of material
Positioning of the honeycomb is critical as the point of impact on the hood needs
to be on the honeycomb This is required in order to assure that the highest
material impact is absorbed by a layer of static material inside the honeycomb
and not the chute liners All the basic steps for designing a normal hood and
spoon chute are followed Firstly the angle at impact (8e) is calculated to
determine where the trajectory of material will cross the radius of the hood This
shows the position of the impact point on the hood Figure 20 indicates where 8e
is calculated As previously stated the angle at impact for this situation is
558r This is calculated using [33]
e = tan- I ( 1 ) (5)
C Ii
And y is defined by equation 1
This gives an indication as to where the honeycomb should be situated in order
to capture the material impacting the hood fully A flow simulation package can
also be used to determine the position of this honeycomb structure shows an
opening for the honeycomb which starts at 40deg clockwise from the vertical This
The optimisation of transfer chutes in the bulk materials industry 68
MN van Aarde
CHAPTER 4
means that there are almost 16deg of free space in the honeycomb to ensure that
the material will always impact inside the wear box
There is no set specification as to the size of this free space This is just to
accommodate any surges of mat~rial on the feeding conveyor As discussed in
Chapter 3 due to avalanches while reclaiming from the stockpiles material
surges on the conveyors is a reality
Figure 41 Honeycomb wear box positioning
illustrates exactly where this wear box is situated on the back plate of the hood
This configuration is very similar to that of the spoon as both wear boxes only
cover the width of the flat back plate of the hood and spoon The reason for this
is that most of the material impact and mainstream flow strikes the back plate
The optimisation of transfer chutes in the bulk materials industry
MN van Aarde
69
CHAPTER 4
WEAR BOX
Figure 42 Wear box in the hood section
All the horizontal ribs of the honeycomb are spaced 5deg apart and there are 5
vertical ribs following the converging contour of the hood as shown in Spacing
of the ribs depends largely on the maximum lump size handled by the transfer
In this case the largest lumps are approximately 34 mm in diameter The idea is
to get as many dead boxes into the honeycomb as possible These small
cavities should however be large enough to capture a substantial amount of ore
inside
The optimisation of transfer chutes in the bulk materials industry
MN van Aarde
70
CHAPTER 4 ----_----------------shy
Figure 43 Spacing arrangement of honeycomb ribs inside the hood
The two vertical liners on the edges of the honeycomb are only 65 mm high while
the rest of the vertical liners are 120 mm high This is done so that the flat liners
in the chute surface can overlap the edge liners of the honeycomb An open
groove between the tiles along the flow of material would cause the liners to be
worn through much faster than in normal sliding abrasion conditions Due to the
high wear characteristics of the ore all openings between tiles should be kept out
of the mainstream flow
All the ribs in the honeycomb are 50 mm thick and vary in depth The vertical
ribs protrude the horizontal ribs by 30 mm in order to channel the flow These
vertical ribs are all flush with the surrounding tiles on the flat sliding surface of the
hood All the pockets of the wear box are 120 mm deep measured from the top
of the vertical ribs Again dimension is dependent on the maximum lump size
handled by the transfer There are no specifications as to the relation between
the pocket size and the lump size These dimensions were chosen to be
approximately 4 times the lump size Computer simulations can be used to test
the feasibility of this concept while commissioning of the equipment will ultimately
show whether this method works
The optimisation of transfer chutes in the bulk materials industry
MN van Aarde
71
CHAPTER 4 ------------_ -- - ---------------shy
442 Honeycomb wear box in the spoon
The honeycomb wear box in the spoon has the same configuration as in the
hood It also covers the entire width of the back plate and fully accommodates
the material impacting on the spoon from the hood The entire spoon is broken
up into three sections and the honeycomb wear box is situated in the back
section as shown in
Figure 44 Wear box in the spoon section
With almost the same configuration as the hood the spoon also has a corner
liner to ensure a continuous lined face between the flat surface liners and the
honeycomb ribs The detail of these liners and ribs are shown in A 90deg transfer
with a hood and spoon chute means that the stream received by the spoon is
narrower and longer than the stream received by the hood This is caused when
the material takes the shape of the hood before it is discharged into the spoon
The converged configuration causes the stream to flatten against the sliding
surface in the chute
The optimisation of transfer chutes in the bulk materials industry
MN van Aarde
72
CHAPTER 4
Due to the spoon honeycomb being a bit narrower than the hood there are only
three vertical ribs The number of ribs had to be reduced to be able to
accommodate the preferred cavity size of the honeycomb boxes These ribs now
form two channels in which the stream of material can be directed
Figure 45 Liner detail of the spoon honeycomb wear box
As shown in there is a 3 mm gap between the honeycomb section and the chute
plate work This is to ensure that the honeycomb section can be easily removed
for maintenance on the liners All the edges of the liners have rounded corners
to reduce stress concentrations which can cause rapid liner failure
45 DESIGNING THE CHUTE FOR INTEGRATION WITH SYSTEM REQUIREMENTS
The arc length of the spoon back plate is longer and closer to the belt in order to
ensure a smooth transfer of material from the chute to the receiving conveyor A
small gap of 75 mm is left between the bottom of the spoon and the receiving
conveyor Due to the fact that material can also be fed from another upstream
The optimisation of transfer chutes in the bulk materials industry
MN van Aarde
73
CHAPTER 4
stockyard conveyor this configuration will not be suitable This means that the
gap of 75 mm is not enough to allow material to pass underneath the chute
To accommodate this situation the spoon is split into different sections where the
bottom section lifts up to make room for material from behind In the raised
position the gap between the chute and the belt is 450 mm When the lower belt
is loaded to full capacity the material height is 380 mm This means that the
clearance to the belt in the non operational position is sufficient and show the
operational and non operational positions of the spoon
T -t t----~r_-+-wtIY1shy
Figure 46 Spoon in the operational position
The optimisation of transfer chutes in the bulk materials industry
MN van Aarde
74
CHAPTER 4
Figure 47 Spoon in the non operational position
This section is a discussion on how this new transfer chute configuration should
be operated in order to comply with the facility requirements The bottom section
of the chute can be lifted out of the way of material from behind on the receiving
conveyor Therefore a control philosophy is required for this movement
Referring to Figure 25 positions A and B indicate where these new chutes will be
installed As previously stated position C is the purging or dump position and
show the actuated spoon section in the operating and non operating positions
The conditions for these positions are explained as follows
46 CONCLUSION
With the consideration of all the facility constraints and a conceptual idea of what
the transfer configuration should look like the design can be optimised When
the feeding belt velocity is known the material trajectory and optimum chute
radius can be determined This radius and the radius of the spoon must then be
corrected to comply with the facility constraints but still deliver the required
material transfer rate
The optimisation of transfer chutes in the bulk materials industry
MN van Aarde
75
CHAPTER 4
With the high cost implications of regular maintenance intervals on chute liners
and facility downtime a honeycomb structure is incorporated into the high impact
areas The purpose of this honeycomb structure is to form small pockets similar
to dead boxes in order to promote material on material flow This increases the
lifetime of the chute liners and reduces maintenance intervals
This specific transfer chute splits up easily into separate sections and will help to
simplify maintenance The bottom section of the chute is actuated to move up
and down depending on whether the chute is in operation or not This will ensure
optimum transfer of material while in operation and provide sufficient clearance
when not in operation This is again guided by the facility requirements
In the design of all the transfer chute components the physical properties of the
ore should always be considered This determines the chute profile in terms of
flow angles and liner selection With maximum material flow ability high
resistance to sliding abrasion and reduced maintenance cost in mind 94
alumina ceramics is the liner of choice This is only in the main flow areas of the
chute For the dribbling chute a polyurethane liner is used to promote the flow of
this sticky material
The optimisation of transfer chutes in the bulk materials industry
MN van Aarde
76
CHAPTER 5
CHAPTER 5 TESTING AND VERIFICATION OF THE NEW SOLUTION
- middotSmiddotmiddotmiddotmiddotmiddotmiddotmiddotmiddotmiddot-middotl~Oi
The optimisation of transfer chutes in the bulk materials industry 77
MN van Aarde
CHAPTER 5
51 PREFACE
Although hand calculations have been a proven method of design for many
years it is important to verify any new chute concept before fabrication and
implementation Confirming the concept can save time and money as it reduces
the risk of on-site modifications Hand calculations only supply a two
dimensional solution to the problem which does not always provide accurate
material flow profiles
In recent years a few material flow simulation packages have been developed to
aid the design of material handling equipment The use of software packages
can be beneficial to the design process as it gives a three dimensional view of
the material behaviour in the chute This means that changes to the chute
concept can be made prior to fabrication
It is however important to verify that the solution obtained from the software
package is an accurate reflection of actual design model Therefore the material
being handled should be thoroughly tested to obtain the correct physical
properties required to obtain an accurate simulation result
The use of material flow simulation software does not replace the necessity for
hand calculations All the basic steps should still be done to derive a conceptual
chute configuration Material flow simulation software should be used as a
complimentary tool to analytical hand calculations in the design process
The optimisation of transfer chutes in thebulk materials industry
MN van Aarde
78
CHAPTER 5
52 SELECTING A TEST METHODOLOGY
Traditionally transfer chutes were designed by using basic analytical calculations
and relying on empirical data from past experiences with other chutes Mostly
these analytical methods only cater for the initial part of the chute such as the
parabolic discharge trajectory It is difficult to determine what happens to the
flow of material after it strikes the chute wall [34]
Two methods of verification were usually applied to evaluate a new transfer
chute configuration Trial and error can be used but obviously this is not desired
due to the high cost implications A second method is to build a small scale
model of the chute in which tests can be carried out before a final design can be
adopted This physical modelling is however time consuming and
expensive [34]
Granular or particulate materials are composed of a large number of loosely
packed individual particles or grains The flow of such granular materials forms
an intricate part of the materials handling industry Small reductions in energy
consumption or increases in production can have great financial advantages
Therefore significant efforts are put into improving the efficiency of these
facilities The important role of numerical simUlations is becoming more evident
in these optimisation procedures [35] Due to these efforts this technology is
becoming more powerful and is easy to use as a verification method for transfer
chute designs
The behaviour of bulk material particles is unique in the sense that it exhibits
some of the properties associated with the gaseous liquid and solid states of
matter The granular state of bulk materials cannot be characterised by anyone
of these states alone The research that captures the contact between individual
particles in an explicit manner is known as discrete element methods (OEM) [36]
The optimisation of transfer chutes in the bulk materials industry
MN van Aarde
79
CHAPTER 5
In basic terms OEM explicitly models the dynamic motion and mechanical
interactions of each body or particle as seen in the physical material flow It is
also possible to obtain a detailed description of the velocities position and force
acting on each particle at a discrete point during the analysis This is achieved
by focusing on the individual grain or body rather than focusing on the global
body as is the case with the finite element approach [36]
Figure 48 illustrates two examples of how this OEM software can be applied
Obviously the flow characteristics differ between the applications shown in Figure
48 This is however catered for by the mathematical simulation of each particle
collision
Figure 48 Flow analysis examples a) separation and screening b) hoppers feeders 36]
Continuous improvements in the performance of computing systems make OEM
a realistic tool for use in a wide range of process design and optimisation
applications During the last 20 years the capabilities of OEM have progressed
from small scale two dimensional simulations to much more complex 3D
applications The latest high performance desk top computers make it possible
to simulate systems containing large numbers of particles within a reasonable
time [37]
The optimisation of transfer chutes in the bulk materials industry
MN van Aarde
80
CHAPTER 5
According to the institute for conveyor technologies at the Otto-von-Guericke
University of Magdeburg in Germany using OEM for bulk solid handling
equipment provides [38]
bull A cost effective method of simulating the utility of materials handling
equipmentshy
bull Precise control over complicated problem zones eg transfer chutes
redirection stations and high wear areas
bull The possibility to integrate processes in one simulation such as mixing and
segregation
bull The possibility to involve the customer more extensively in the design
process
bull An advantage in the market due to attractive video sequences and pictures
of the simulation
bull The possibility to prevent facility damages and increase the efficiency of
conveyor systems extensively
As a good example of the advantages of the discrete element method the
University of Witwatersrand in Johannesburg did studies on rotary grinding mills
The university studies have shown that the OEM qualitatively predicts the load
motion of the mill very well The improved knowledge of the behaviour of mills
can therefore increase the profitability of mineral processing operations [39]
This material handling equipment is generally costly to operate and inefficient in
the utilisation of energy for breakage In order to understand the behaviour of
mills better the OEM method is increasingly being applied to the modelling of the
load behaviour of grinding mills These results indicate that this method can be
applied successfully in the bulk materials handling industry
The apUmisatian af transfer chutes in the bulk materials industry
MN van Aarde
81
CHAPTERS
Another example where this technology has been used with great success is with
the design of a new load out chute for the Immingham coal import terminal in
Britain By simulating the flow with a OEM package the designers were aided in
the fact that they were supplied with a quantitative description of the bulk solid
movement through the chute In the opinion of Professor Franz Kessler
(University of Leoben) the Discrete Element Method provides the engineer with
unique detailed information to assist in the design of transfer points [3]
These simulation packages are at the moment very expensive and not widely
used in transfer chute design It can be anticipated that the utilisation of these
packages will increase as the technology improves and the cost of the software
goes down [40] To get the best value out of the simulation it is important to
compare simulation packages and select the one most suitable to the complexity
of the design
Fluenttrade is a two dimensional computational fluid dynamics (CFD) software
package which can also be used as a chute design aid through the simulation of
material flow It must however be noted that this is not a OEM simulation
package This software package simulates the flow of material by considering
the material particles as a liquid substance The output of the simulation is the
same as can be seen in the example of Figure 49 The colours in the simulation
represent the average particle spacing [40] Due to the fact that this package
can at this stage only deliver two dimensional simulations it is considered
inadequate to perform detailed simulations on the intricate design piscussed in
this dissertation
The optjmisation of transfer chutes in the bulk materials industry
MN van Aarde
82
CHAPTER 5
COnroUf Votume t-~bn 01 ( 00 frlm~2 5000amp1 00) ~gtJ C3_2002 fLUENT 60 (2lt1 9 940 n 1Mgt u ody)
Figure 49 Simulations results from Fluenttrade [40]
The Overland Conveyor Company provides another alternative to the Fluent
software package Applied OEM is a technology company that provides discrete
element software to a variety of users in the bulk materials industry Bulk Flow
Analysttrade is an entry level package that they provide This package is very
powerful in the sense that it can accurately predict flow patterns depending on
the accuracy of the inputs An example of this is shown in Figure 50 It also has
the capability to show material segregation dynamic forces and velocities [41]
Figure 50 Simulation results from Bulk Flow Analysttrade [41]
The optimisation of transfer chutes in the bulk materials industry
MN van Aarde
83
CHAPTER 5
OEM Solutions is a world leader in discrete element modelling software They
recently announced the release of the latest version of their flow simulation
package called EOEM 21 This package can be used to simulate and optimise
bulk material handling and processing operations [41] Oue to the capabilities of
this software package it is a very attractive option for designing transfer chutes
With the development of EOEM 21 OEM Solutions worked in collaboration with
customers in the Bulk Handling Mining and Construction Pharmaceutical
Chemical and Agricultural sectors This enables the end users to perform more
sophisticated particle simulations specific to their unique applications Also
incorporated into this package is the ability and flexibility to customise and
personalise advanced particle properties [42]
This specific package has been proven successful by industry leaders Martin
Engineering (Neponset Illinois) is a leading global supplier of solids handling
systems This company continues to expand their use of EOEM software in
design optimisation and development of bulk materials handling products These
optimisation and development actions include all aspects of conveyor systems
and transfer points for numerous industrial sectors [43]
There are several other OEM simulation packages such as ESYS Particle
Passage-OEM and YAOE However none of these software packages seem be
major industry role players in the discipline of chute design although they might
have the capability In adjudicating the three big role players in bulk material flow
simulation packages there are a few factors taken into consideration It appears
thatthe advantages of 30 capabilities are non negotiable Therefore Fluenttrade is
not really a consideration From the literature review of the Bulk Flow Analysttrade
and the EOEM packages it seems that these two will provide more or less the
same performance It does seem however that the EOEM software is a bigger
role player in various industries Due to the possible future capabilities of EOEM The optimisation of transfer chutes in the bulk materials industry
MN van Aarde
84
CHAPTER 5
through its association with numerous industries this simulation package is the
software of choice
In order to retrofit or design a new transfer point with the aid of the selected OEM
software package there are a few steps that a designer must follow to gain the
full benefit of this tool [36]
1 An accurate 3D or CAD representation of the new or old transfer chute
must be rendered
2 Identify restrictions and limitations in terms of chute geometry and
manufacturing
3 Identify desired design goals (Le dust emissions flow restrictions etc)
4 Identify representative material properties and particle descriptions
5 In case of a retrofit make design changes to chute geometry with CAD
6 Simulate the performance of the new design using OEM software
7 Evaluate results obtained from the simulation (reiterate steps 5 6 and 7)
8 Perform and finalise detail design steps
9 Manufacture
10 Installation
The above mentioned steps found in references [6] and [36] only provides
information regarding retrofitting or designing chutes with the aid of OEM
Although it is a powerful design 1001 the design process should not discard the
use of analytical hand calculation~ Some of the most important design decisions
regarding chute profiles are made with analytical hard calculations such as
plotting the material trajectorY
53 DETERMINATION OF MATERIAL PROPERTIES
The discrete element method is a promising approach to the simUlation of
granular material interaction The accuracy of the outcome of the simulation is
The optimisation of transfer chutes in the bulk materials industry
M N van Aarde
85
CHAPTER 5
however dependent upon accurate information on the material properties and
input parameters [44] These inputs basically consist of the following
fundamental parameters size and shape factors bulk density angle of repose
cohesion and adhesion parameters and restitution coefficients [45]
The determination of most of these parameters are explained and defined in the
following paragraphs The parameters that are changed in the simulation
according to the reaction of the flow are not discussed and are typically
parameters such as the internal coefficient of friction between a number of
particles A collaborated effort by the bulk handling industry aims to find ways in
which all parameters can be accurately determined through scientific methods
This has however still not been achieved The objective is to achieve a realistic
representation and therefore some parameters are altered in the simulation
It is important to note that the computation time increases as the particle size
becomes smaller and the amount of particles increase In most granular flow
problems the characteristics of the material stream are largely determined by
particles greater than 10 - 20 mm in size [45] Therefore in order to reduce
computation time the selected particle size for simUlations should be the same
as the largest particles handled by the facility namely 34 mm diameter
Although fines have a higher internal friction coefficient and more cohesiveness
these properties can be averaged into the input parameters to obtain the same
overall effect [45] Therefore only a single particle size is used in the simulation
and the properties optimised to obtain the same result under actual operating
conditionsmiddot Some of the material properties can be easily obtained from the
facility The rest of the properties are obtained from tests carried out by expert
conSUltants in this field
The size factor and bulk density are obtained from the facility Materia tests
carried out by external consultants provide the coefficient of friction and also the The optimisation of transfer chutes in the bulk materials industry
MN van Aarde
86
CHAPTER 5
wall friction angle This is the angle at which the material will start to slide under
its own mass To determine these material properties the external consultants
normally use sophisticated and expensive equipment Data gathered from these
tests are used for the hand calculation of the chute profile The angle of repose
can normally be observed from a stockpile and is the angle that the side of the
stockpile makes with the horizontal
For the OEM simulation the coefficient of friction is one of the main determining
factors of the wall friction angle Data provided by the material tests can not be
used as a direct input into OEM In the software package the coefficient of
friction is represented by a factor between 0 and 1 The material test data can
however provide some insight into where on this scale the factor is This factor
can be derived from a few small simulation iterations as there is no method of
direct conversion between the test result data and the OEM input
To determine this factor a plate is modelled with a single layer of particles This
plate is then rotated within the simulation at approximately 2deg per second As
soon as the particles begin to slide the time is taken from which the angle can be
calculated This process is repeated with different friction coefficients until the
correct wall friction angle is obtained After the coefficient of friction factor is
determined between the particles and the chute wall the material restitution
factor and coefficient of internal friction can be obtained
The restitution factor is obtained by measurirtg the rebound height of a particle
when it is dropped from a certain height This is usually difficult to determine due
to the variation in shape of the material particles If the particle lands on a
surface it rarely bounces straight back up Therefore the test is repeated
numerous times and an average is taken to obtain the final result
Coefficient of internal friction is a property that describes the particles ability to
slide across each other A simUlation is set up to create a small stockpile of The optimisation of transfer chutes in the blJlk materials industry
MN van Aarde
87
CHAPTER 5
material particles The angle of repose can be obtained by measuring the
average apex angle of the stockpiles In this simulation the coefficient of internal
friction and restitution factors are iterated This is done in order to simulate the
accurate behaviour of particles falling onto the stockpile and forming the correct
angle of repose Figure 51 shows what this simulation typically looks like
Figure 51 Determination of material properties for an accurate angle of repose
54 VERIFICATION OF THE SELECTED TEST METHODOLOGY FOR THIS
APPLICATION
The best verification is to compare the simulation results with an actual material
flow situation Therefore a comparison is made between the actual flow in the
existing transfer configuration and the simulation of this same transfer This is
also a good test to see if the parameters changed in the simulation were done
correctly
During the chute test programme CCTV cameras were installed in the problem
transfer chutes at the facility The cameras are positioned to provide an accurate
view of the material flow behaviour inside the chutes As explained in Chapter 3
The optimisation of transfer chutes in the bulk materials industry 88
MN van Aarde
CHAPTER 5
the behaviour of the material flow inside the chutes changes with the variation of
ore type
Due to the fact that only 34 mm diameter particles are used in the simulation a
test using coarse ore was chosen for the verification of the simulation
Therefore test 12 is used as reference for the verification In this test coarse S
with the particle size distribution between 28 mm and 34 mm was used at the
transfer from CV 3 to CV 5
Figure 52 shows an image taken from the CCTV camera inside the transfer chute
between CV 3 and CV 5 The red line indicates the top of the chute throat
opening and the yellow arrows show the top of material flow This screen shot
was taken at a flow rate of 10 000 tlh It can be deduced from this view and the
chute test work that the chute is choking at a throughput rate of 10 000 tlh
Figure 52 Actual material flow with coarse S at 10000 tIh
The transfer chute from Figure 52 was modelled in CAD and the model imported
into the discrete element package EDEM All the material input parameters as
discussed in section 53 were used in the simulation 10 000 tlh was used as the
The optimisation of transfer chutes in the bulk materials industry
MN van Aarde
89
CHAPTER 5
flow rate parameter in an attempt to simulate and recreate the situation as shown
by Figure 52
Test 12 of the chute performance tests gave the following results which can be
compared to the EDEM simulation
bull Chute started to choke rapidly at 10 000 tlh
bull Slight off centre loading onto the receiving conveyor CV 5
bull A lower velocity layer of material close to the discharge of the chute
bull Material roll back on the receiving conveyor due to significant differences in
the velocity of the material flow and the receiving conveyor
Off-centre loading
L
Figure 53 Material flow pattern through the existing chute
The optimisation of transfer chutes in the bulk materials industry
MN van Aarde
90
CHAPTER 5
Flow restricted in this area
Low velocity layer
Low discharge velocity rollback
Figure 54 Cross sectional side view of material flow through the existing chute
Figure 53 shows the material flow pattern in the existing chute where the thick
red arrows indicate the direction of flow The legend on the left of the figure
indicates the material velocity in ms Slow flowing material is shown in blue and
the colour turns to red as the material velocity increases Slight off centre
loading onto the receiving conveyor CV 5 can be seen from Figure 53 This
correlates well with the actual observations during the physical testing of this
transfer point
Figure 54 shows the more determining factors for correlation between actual flow
and simulated flow where the legend on the left indicates the material velocity in
ms This is a cross sectional view through the centre of the chute From this
view a build up of material can be seen in the chute throat area The slow
flowing material on the back of the chute also helps to restrict the flow Due to
the fact that the material speed at the discharge of the chute is much slower than
the receiving belt speed a stack of turbulent flowing material is formed behind
the discharge point on the receiving conveyor
The optimisation of transfer chutes in the bulk materials industry
MN van Aarde
91
CHAPTER 5
There is a good correlation between the simulated and actual material flow
pattern The simulation method can therefore be considered as a valid alternate
or additional method to standard analytical chute design Attention should be
given though to the input of material properties in order to obtain a realistic result
55 VERIFICATION OF NEW CHUTE CONFIGURATION AND OPTIMISATION OF THE
HOOD LOCATION
After establishing that the OEM is a reliable design and verification tool the new
transfer chute configuration can be simulated Firstly this configuration is
modelled without the honeycombs inside the hood and spoon This is done in
order to verify the material flow pattern and velocity through the hood and spoon
Results obtained from this simulation can then be compared to the hand
calculation results An iterative process is followed with simulations and hand
calculations to obtain the best flow results The simulation results are shown in
Figure 55 and Figure 56
I
L
Figure 55 Material flow through hood at 10 000 tIh
The optimisation of transfer chutes in the bulk materials industry
MN van Aarde
92
CHAPTER 5
Figure 56 Material flow through spoon at 10 000 tlh
The hood velocity profile shown in Figure 38 gives the same result as obtained
from the DEM simulation The calculated hood exit velocity is 633 ms This is
the same result obtained from the simulation and shown by the red colouring in
Figure 55 As the material enters the spoon it is falling under gravity and
therefore still accelerating At impact with the chute wall it slows down and exits
the spoon with approximately the same velocity as the receiving conveyor
Figure 56 shows the material flow through the spoon section This can also be
compared to the spoon velocity profile in Figure 39 The behaviour of the
material inside the spoon as shown by the simulation correlates with the results
obtained from the hand calculations This is another indication that with accurate
input parameters the DEM can be used as a useful verification tool
The optimisation of transfer chutes in the bulk materials industry
MN van Aarde
93
CHAPTER 5
Skew loading into spoon
Slower material
L
Figure 57 Determination of the optimum hood location
The hood is supported by a shaft at the top and can be moved horizontally This
function is incorporated into the design in order to optimise the hood location
during commissioning of the transfer chute It is critical to discharge centrally into
the spoon in order to eliminate skew loading onto the receiving conveyor
Figure 57 illustrates the effect that the hood location has on material flow When
comparing the flow from Figure 55 to the flow in Figure 57 it is clear that skew
loading is a direct result of an incorrect hood position The circled area in Figure
57 illustrates how the flow reacts to the incorrect hood location
Material is discharged to the right side of the spoon which causes a slight buildshy
up of material on the left This causes the material to flow slightly from side to
side as it passes through the spoon Figure 57 indicates that the material to the
The optimisation of transfer chutes in the bulk materials industry
MN van Aarde
94
CHAPTERS ----------------- -------___ _--shy
right at the spoon discharge is slightly slower than the material on the left This is
a clear indication of skew loading onto the receiving conveyor
The material flow pattern in Figure 55 is symmetrical and therefore will not
cause skew loading The OEM can give a good indication of the required hood
setup before commissioning However adjustments can still be made during the
commissioning process The tracking of the receiving belt should give a good
indication of when the hood is in the optimum position
56 EFFECT OF THE HONEYCOMB STRUCTURE IN HIGH IMPACT ZONES
The purpose of the honeycomb dead box structure in the high impact zones is to
capture material inside the pockets and induce material on material flow This
requires that the material inside the honeycombs should be stationary while the
main stream material flow moves over the dead boxes OEM can therefore be
set up in such a way that the material velocities can be visualised inside the
chute
In Chapter 4 the logic of how this honeycomb should be structured and
positioned was discussed The simulations shown in Figure 58 and Figure 59
illustrate how a OEM pack~ge can also be used to determine the positioning of
these honeycomb structures Impact points in the hood and spoon must be
inside the honeycomb in all situations of flow inside the chute The spacing of
dead box pockets can be altered to ensure that a continuous layer of stationary
material is formed in the honeycomb area Various geometries for this
honeycomb structure can be simulated with OEM to obtain the best results
The optimisation of transfer chutes in the bulk materials industry
MN van Aarde
95
CHAPTER 5
Large radius hood
Hood honeycomb box to minimise wear in impact
Vertical discharge from hood centralising flow on
belt
L
Figure 58 Material behaviour through hood
Spoon
Spoon honeycomb box to minimise wear in impact area
Improved spoon discharge flow
Figure 59 Material behaviour through spoon
The optimisation of transfer chutes in the bulk materials industry
MN van Aarde
96
CHAPTERS
The legends on the left of Figure 58 and Figure 59 indicate the material velocity
in ms Dark blue indicates stationary material and bright red indicates a
maximum material velocity of 8 ms Using this information the functionality of
the honeycomb dead boxes can now be analysed The velocity of the material
captured by the dead boxes is indicated as dark blue This means that all the
material in the dead boxes is stationary
With the result obtained from the OEM simulation it is clear that material on
material flow will be induced by the honeycomb dead boxes The pockets of the
honeycomb capture the material and will therefore have reduced wear in the
high impact areas This material on material flow does however induce a
coarser sliding surface than the smooth ceramic liner tiles Due to the high
velocity of material through the chute the effect of the coarser sliding surface is
however minimised
58 CONCLUSION
The Discrete Element Method is proven to be a successful design and
verification tool in the bulk materials industry This method is used widely in the
global bulk materials industry The successful outcome of the OEM simulation is
however dependent on the correct material input parameters Some of these
parameters are readily available from the facility that handles the material The
rest of the parameters can be determined by setting up simple test simulations
with OEM
To verify that the OEM simulation is a correct indication of the actual condition
the simulation is compared to CCTV images taken from the same transfer chute
The results show that the OEM simulation does provide a true reflection of the
actual material flow through the transfer chute Therefore the same material
input parameters can be used to simulate the new transfer chute configuration
The optimisation of transfer chutes in the bulk materials industry
MN van Aarde
97
CHAPTER 5
From the simulations done on the new transfer chute configuration the effect of
the honeycomb dead boxes can be examined These simulation results show
that the honeycomb dead box configuration is effective in capturing material
inside the honeycomb cavities This results in material on material flow and
reduces impact abrasion on the ceramic chute liners
Results obtained from the OEM simulation of the new transfer configuration are
compared to the hand calculation results This comparison indicates that the
material velocity calculated in the hood and spoon correlates well with the
material velocity calculated by the OEM The overall results obtained from
simulating the new transfer chute configuration have been shown to provide a
true reflection of the actual flow through the chute
The optimisation of transfer chutes in the bulk materials industry
MN van Aarde
98
CHAPTER 6
CHAPTER 6 CONCLUSIONS AND RECOMMENDATIONS
The optimisation of transfer chutes in the bulk materials industry
MN van Aarde
99
CHAPTER 6
61 CONCLUSIONS AND RECOMMENDATIONS
Bulk materials handling is a key role player in the global industrial industry
Within this field the industry faces many challenges on a daily basis These
challenges as with any industry are to limit expenses and increase profit Some
of the limiting factors of achieving this goal in the bulk materials handling industry
are lost time due to unscheduled maintenance product losses due to spillage
andhigh costs incurred by increased maintenance
The focus of this study was on the optimisation of transfer chutes and
investigations were carried out to determine the core problems These
investigations were done by observing and monitoring various grades of iron ore
passing through transfer chutes known to have throughput problems The core
problems were identified as high wear on liners in the impact zones skew
loading on receiving conveyors material spillage and chute blockages
These problems cause financial losses to the facility either directly or indirectly
Direct financial losses can be attributed to the frequent replacement of chute
liners while the indirect financial losses are caused by facility down time This is
why it is imperative to optimise the manner in which the transfer of material is
approached A new transfer chute configuration addresses the problems
identified at the facility and the core concepts can be adopted at any bulk
materials handling facility
This new concept examines the utilisation of the hood and spoon concept rather
than the conventional dead box configuration By using the hood and spoon
configuration the material discharge velocity is utilised and carried through to the
discharge onto the receiving conveyor Adding to this design is a honeycomb
dead box configuration in the high impact zones of the hood and spoon This
initiates material on material flow and prolongs the lifetime of the chute liners
The optimisation of transfer chutes in the bulk materials industry
MN van Aarde
100
CHAPTER 6
The radius of the hood should be designed so that it follows the path of the
material trajectory as closely as possible Some facility constraints prohibit this
hood radius from following exactly the same path as the material The radius of
the spoon is designed in such a manner that it receives the material from the
hood and slows it down while turning it into the direction in which the belt is
running Ideally the material should be discharged from the spoon at
approximately the same velocity as the receiving conveyor
If this can be achieved then some major problems suffered by the industry will
have been resolved With the hood having almost the same radius as the
material trajectory impact wear on liners can be significantly reduced By
discharging material from the chute onto the receiving conveyor at the same
velocity as the conveyor belt excessive belt wear and material spillage will be
avoided Further optimisation is however still possible by investigating the
implementation of various skirting options to the side of the conveyor
This new transfer chute configuration also boasts an articulated bottom section in
the spoon The purpose of the adjustable bottom section is to create greater
clearance below the spoon This will allow material on the belt below to pass
unimpeded underneath the spoon In some cases there can be several chutes in
series that discharge onto the same conveyor In these cases it is beneficial to
incorporate an articulated chute in order to have the capability of having a small
drop height between the discharge point in the chute and the receiving conveyor
This low drop height also minimises turbulent flow at the chute discharge point on
the receiving conveyor
The most unique feature to the new design is the implementation of the
honeycomb dead box configuration in the high impact zones Due to these high
impact areas the liners will experience the most wear This section of the chute
is flanged and can be removed separately from the rest of the chute to aid
maintenance In most maintenance operations it may only be necessary to reline The optimisation of transfer chutes in the bulk materials industry
MN van Aarde
101
CHAPTER 6
this small section of the chute Costs are minimised by reducing the time
required for maintenance and the cost of replacing liners
Previously testing of new transfer chute configurations normally involved
implementing the chute and obseNing its ability to perform according to
specification This can however be a costly exercise as it is possible that further
modifications to the chute will be required after implementation Therefore it is
beneficial to verify the new chute configuration before implementation
This is done by simulating the material flow through the chute using Discrete
Element Method A comparison was done between the actual flow in an eXisting
chute and the simulated flow in the same chute configuration This comparison
showed the same result obtained from the simulation and the actual material
flow This method can therefore be used as an accurate simulation tool for
evaluating transfer chute performance
The mathematical calculations describing the material flow in and over the
honeycomb dead box structures are complex Therefore simulation models are
used to show the material behaviour in those areas Simulations show that the
material captured within the dead boxes remains stationary thus protecting the
ceramic liners behind it This is the desired result as it prolongs the life of the
chute liners and reduces maintenance frequencies
If the work is done efficiently it normally takes two days to remove a worn chute
of this configuration fully and replace it with a new one This is normally done
once a year due to the design lifetime of the chute With the new chute
configuration this maintenance schedule can be reduced to two hours once a
year for the replacement of the honeycomb sections only The exposed face of
the honeycomb ribs will wear through until the efficiency of the honeycomb
design is reduced
The optimisation of transfer chutes in the bulk materials industry
MN van Aarde
102
CHAPTER 6
This specific iron ore facility has approximately fifty transfer points During this
exercise only two of these transfer points were replaced with the new chute
configuration The combined annual maintenance time for replacement of these
50 chutes is 100 days If the new chute philosophy is adopted on all these
transfers the annual maintenance time can be reduced to as little as 100 hours
This excludes the unplanned work for cleaning of spillages and fixing or replacing
worn conveyors
There are significant benefits to investigating the problems at specific transfer
points before attempting a new design This gives good insight into where the
focus should be during the design process Ea~y identification and
understanding of the problem areas is essential for a new chute configuration
The new design features can provide a vast improvement and a large benefit to
the bulk materials handling industry
62 RECOMMENDATIONS FOR FURTHER STUDY
During the chute performance tests it was noted that avalanches on the
stockpiles during reclaiming of material causes peaks on the conveyor systems
These peaks in the material stream increase the probability of blockages in the
transfer chutes As a result material spillage occurs and the conveyor belts can
be easily overloaded
This occurrence creates the requirement for further studies on the reclaiming
operations All stacker reclaimers are operated manually which creates ample
room for error Investigations can be done to determine the value of automating
the reclaiming operations Manual interaction cannot be avoided but an
automated system will reduce the possibility for error
Visual inspections on the transfer chute liners indicate that the material tends to
erode the liners away quicker in the grooves between liner plates or ceramic
The optimisation of transfer chutes in the bulk materials industry
MN van Aarde
103
CHAPTER 6
tiles This occurrence seems to be worse in areas of the chute where the
material velocity is the highest
This problem was specifically noticed with ceramic liner tiles The tiles are glued
to the chute surface with an epoxy and this substance also fills the crevices
between the tiles This epoxy is however not resistant to any type of sliding or
impact abrasion If the material gains speed in such a groove between the tiles it
simply erodes the epoxy away Studies to reduce or even eliminate this problem
should be examined
In some situations the layout and configuration of the chute prohibits the tiles
from being inserted in a staggered manner Studies can be done on the
composition of this epoxy in order to increase its resistance to sliding and impact
abrasion By doing so the lifetime of the chute liners can be increased which will
result in minimised facility down time due to maintenance
It seems that it is a global industry problem to find accurate scientific methods of
determining material input parameters for OEM simulations Although most of
the material properties can be determined through testing it is still a challenge to
convert that information into a representative input parameter into OEM It is
therefore recommended that further studies be undertaken to determine a
method by which material test data can be successfully converted into OEM input
parameters
The optimisation of transfer chutes in the bulk materials industry
MN van Aarde
104
REFERENCES ------shy
REFERENCES
[1] ARNOLD P C MCLEAN A G ROBERTS A W 1978 Bulk Solids
storage flow and handling Tunra Bulk Solids Australia Jan
[2] ANON 2008 Peak (Export) OilUSD Survival Dec
httppeakoHsurvivalorgltag=finance Date of access 8 Jun 2009
[3] KESSLER F 2006 Recent developments in the field of bulk conveying
FME Transactions Vol 34 NO4
[4] ANON 2007 Specification for Troughed Belt Conveyors British
Standards BS28901989 25 Sep Date of access 8 Jun 2009
[5] CEMA (Conveyor Equipment Manufacturers Association) Belt Conveyors
6thfor Bulk Materials ed wwwcemanetorg Date of access
10 Jun 2009
[6] DEWICKI G 2003 Computer Simulation of Granular Material Flows
Overland Conveyor Co Inc Jan httpwwwpowderandbulkcom Date
of access 10 Jun 2009
[7] AMERICAN COAL COUNCIL 2009 Engineered chutes control dust for
Ameren U Es Meramec Plant httpwww clean-coal infold rupalindexphp
Date of access 12 Jun 2009
[8] KUMBA IRON ORE 2008 Annual Financial Statements 2008
httpwwwsishenironorecompanycozareportskumba afs 08pdffullpdf
Date of access 13 Jun 2009
The optimisation of transfer chutes in the bulk materials industry
MN van Aarde
105
REFERENCES
[9] METSO BACKGROUNDER 2007 Rock Crushing 22 Feb
httpWWvVmetsocom Date of access 15 Jun 2009
[10] ALTHOFF H 1977 Reclaiming and Stacking System Patent US
4037735
[11] THE SOUTH AFRICAN INSTITUTE OF MATERIALS HANDLING
Conveyor belt installations and related components Chutes Level 1
course on belt conveying technology
httpWWvVsaimhcozaeducationcourse01chuteshtm Date of access
18 Jun 2009
[12] CLARKE R 2008 Hood and spoon internal flow belt conveyor transfer
systems SACEA - seminar 22 Aug httpWWvVsaceaorgzaDate of
access 22 Jun 2009
[13] T W WOODS CONSTRUCTION 2009 Design problems in coal transfer
chutes 24 Mar httpWWvVferretcomaucTW-Woods-Constructions
Date of access 25 Jun 2009
[14] LOUGHRAN J 2009 The flow of coal through transfer chutes 20 Aug
Showcase of research excellence James Cook University Australia
[15] ONEIL M 2006 A guide to coal chute replacement Power Engineering
International Nov httpgoliathecnextcomcoms2lgi 0198-369643Ashy
guide-to-coal-chutehtml Date of access 3 Jul 2009
[16] NORDELL LK 1992 A new era in overland conveyor belt design
httpWWvVckitcozasecureconveyorpaperstroughedoverlandoverland
htm Date of access 3 Jul 2009
The optimisation of transfer chutes in the bulk materials industry
MN van Aarde
106
REFERENCES
[17] Rowland C 1992 Dust Control at Transfer Points
httpwwwckitcozasecureconveyorpapersbionic-research-2d-bri2shy
paper05htm Date of access 4 Jul 2009
[18] KRAM ENGINEERING Ceramic composite impact blocks
httpwwwkramengineeringcozacercomhtmIDate of access
5 Jul 2009
I19] BLAZEK C 2005 Kinkaid InteliFlo tradeInstallation Source for Plats
Power Atticle Oct
httpwwwbenetechusacompdf caseStudyBe neKi ncArti c pdf
Date of access 10 Aug 2009
[20] CRP Engineering Corp Modern Transfer Chute Designs for Use in
Material Handling
httpwwwcbpengineeringcompdflTransfer Chutespdf Date of access
26 Apr 2010
[21] ROZENTALS J 2008 Rational design of conveyor chutes Bionic
Research Institute South African Institute of Materials Handling
[22] ROBERTS AW SCOTT OJ 1981 Flow of bulk solids through
transfer chutes of variable geometry and profile Bulk Solids Handling
1(4) Dec
[23] CARSON JW ROYAL TA GOODWILL DJ 1986 Understanding
and Eliminating Particle Segregation Problems Bulk Solids Handling
6(1) Feb
[24] BENJAMIN CW 2004 The use of parametric modelling to design
transfer chutes and other key components Gulf Conveyor Group The optimisation of transfer chutes in the bulk materials industry
MN van Aarde
107
l25] STUART DICK D ROYAL TA 1992 Design Principles for Chutes to
Handle Bulk Solids Bulk Solids Handling 12(3) Sep
[26J REICKS AV RUDOLPHI TJ 2004 The Importance and Prediction of
Tension Distribution around the Conveyor Belt Path Bulk materials
handling by conveyor belt 5(2)
(271 RAMOS CM 1991 The real cost of degradation
institute Chute design conference 1991
Bionic research
[28] ROBERTS AW 1969 An investigation of the gravity flow of non
cohesive granular materials through discharge chutes Transactions of
the ACMEjournal of engineering for indust~ May
[29] TAYLOR HJ 1989 Guide to the design of transfer chutes and chute
linings for bulk materials
association 1989
mechanical handling engineers
[30] ROBERTS AW 1999 Chute design application transfer chute design
Design guide for chutes in bulk solids handling The University of
Newcastle Australia
[31] NORDELL LK 1994 Palabora installs Curved Transfer Chute in Hard
Rock to Minimise Belt Cover Wear Bulk Solids Handling 14 Dec
[32] ROZENTALS J 1991 Flow of Bulk Solids in Chute Design
research institute Chute design conference 1991
Bionic
The optimisation oftransfer chutes in the bulk materials industry
MN van Aarde
108
REFERENCES
[33] ROBERTS AW WICHE SJ 2007 Feed Chute Geometry for
Minimum Belt Wear (h International conference of bulk materials
handling 17 Oct
[34J POWDER HANDLING New OEM Conveyor Transfer Chute Design
Software Helix Technologies
httpvwvwpowderhandlingcomauarticesnew-dem-conveyor-transfershy
chute-design-software Date of access 12 Aug 2009
[35J SAWLEY ML CLEARY PW 1999 A Parallel Discrete Element
Method for Industrial Granular Flow SimUlations EPFL - Super
Computing Review (11)
[36] DEWICKI G 2003 Bulk Material Handling and Processing - Numerical
Techniques and Simulation of Granular Material Overland Conveyor
Company Bulk Solids Handling 23(2)
[37J FA VIER J 2009 Continuing Improvements Boost use of Discrete
Element Method Oil and Gas Engineer- Production Processing 7 Oct
[38] KRAUS E F KA TTERFELD A Usage of the Discrete Element Method in
Conveyor Technologies Institute for Conveyor Technologies (IFSL) The
Otto-von-Guericke University of Magdeburg
[39] MOYS MH VAN NIEROP MA VAN TONDER JC GLOVER G
2005 Validation of the Discrete Element Method (OEM) by Comparing
Predicted Load Behaviour of a Grinding Mill with Measured Data School
for Process and Materials Engineering University of Witwatersrand
Johannesburg The optimisation of transfer materials industry
MN van Aarde
109
REFERENCES
[40J MciLVINA P MOSSAD R 2003 Two dimensional transfer chute
analysis using a continuum method Third international conference on
CFD in the Minerals and Process Industry CSIRO Melbourne Australia
(41J Overland Conveyor Company Inc 2009 Applied DEM
httpwwwapplieddemcomDate of access 26 Apr 2010
(42] DEM SOLUTIONS 2008 Advanced Particle Simulation Capabilities with
EDEM 21 Press release 5 Nov
[43J DEM SOLUTIONS 2008 Martin Engineering Expands use of EDEMTM
Software in Design of Solids Handling Equipment Press release 20 Feb
(44] COETZEE CJ ELS DNJ 2009 Calibration of Discrete Element
Parameters and the Modelling of Silo Discharge and Bucket Filling
Computers and Electronics in Agriculture 65 Mar
[45] DAVID J KRUSES PE Conveyor Belt Transfer Chute Modelling and
Other Applications using The Discrete Element Method in the Material
Handling Industry
httpwwwckitcozasecureconveyorpaperstrouqhedconveyorconveyor
Date of access 3 Sep 2009
bulk materials industry
MN van Aarde
110
ApPENDIXA
ApPENDIX A MATERIAL TESTS AND LINER SELECTiON
The optimisation of-transfer chutes in the bulk materials industry
MN van Aarde
11-1
ApPENDIX A
MATERIAL TEST WORK AND LINER SELECTION
Material samples were taken from the stockpile area for evaluation and testing
These samples represent the worst case materials for impact wear and flow
problems Tests were conducted by external consultants as this is a speciality
field Therefore no detail information on how the tests are conducted is currently
available Results from these tests should indicate the worst case parameters for
chute design according to each specific liner type tested
The material handled by the facility varied from 4 mm to 34 mm lump size A mid
range lump size ore was identified as the preferred material to use for wear
testing This decision was based on the specific ore type maximum lump size of
15 mm as required for the wear test The wear test apparatus used cannot
provide conclusive results with the larger lump sizes of 34 mm and thus smaller
sizes are used Guidance on which ore samples to take was given by the
external consultants tasked with performing the test work
The test work is divided into two sections Firstly the flow test work is carried out
on the finer material with a higher clay content known to have bad flow angles
Included in the selection of fine materials is a sample of the scraper dribblings
This is the material scraped off the belt underneath the head pulley Secondly
the wear tests were conducted on 15 mm samples as explained above
A few common liners were selected for testing These liners are shown in
Table A Some of these liners are known for their specific purpose and
characteristics Polyurethane is known to have a very good coefficient of friction
and will therefore improve the flow of material This material does however
wear out quicker in high impact applications Therefore it is only considered for
use inside the dribbling chute
The optimisation of transfer chutes in the bulk materials industry
MN van Aarde
112
ApPENDIX A
As can be seen from Figure 37 in section 432 the dribbling chute will only see
scraper dribblings from the primary and secondary scrapers It is protected from
any main stream flow of material by the start up chute This makes the
polyurethane liner a prime candidate for lining this section of the chute
Table A Material tested vs liner type
I Flow Tests Wear Tests
Liner T
en aJ c
u
I
i
N en aJ c
u
Cf)
en aJ c
u
I en
shy OJaJ C 0 shyj -shy 0 u pound
(f) shy0
T
aJ ~ j 0 0
N aJ ~ j 0 0 i
I Chrome x x x x x
Carbide
x x x x xI VRN 500 I
x x x x x x94
Alumina
Ceramic i I
Poly x
Urethane I I I
FLOW TEST WORK
The fines 1 sample was tested at three different moisture contents of 36 41
and 47 This is 70 80 and 90 of saturation moisture respectively No
noticeable difference was observed in the wall friction angles Therefore the
fines 2 and fines 3 samples were tested at 80 of saturation which is 42 and
43 moisture content respectively
Test work showed that the minimum chute angle required for flow increased as
the impact pressure increased Chute angles were measured up to impact
pressures of about 8 kPa The worst chute angle obtained was 62deg This means
that no angle inside the chute should be less than 62deg from the horizontal
The industry 113
MN van Aarde
ApPENDIXA
The scraper dribblings were tested at a moisture content of 12 This material
possesses the most clay content and therefore has the worst flow properties
During testing of this material water was added to improve the flow At an
impact pressure of 03 kPa the minimum chute angle drops from 62deg to 56deg when
adding a fine mist spray of water
WEAR TEST WORK
As stated in chapter 4 wear tests were conducted on the chrome carbide
overlay ceramics and VRN500 The results of these tests are shown as non
dimensional wear ratios of mm wearmm travel of bulk solid sliding on the wear
liners coupon at a given force Test results shown in Table B indicate that the
chrome carbide will have about 185 times the lifetime of 94 alumina ceramics
The VRN500 liner will wear about 6 times faster than the 94 alumina ceramics
at the same force
Table B Wear ratios of liners at two different pressure ranges
lore Wall Coupon 65 kPa 163kPa -173 kPa I i
Coarse 1 on 94 Alumina Ceramic 90 E-9 37 E-8
Coarse 1 on Chrome Carbide 87 E-9 20 E-8
Coarse 1 on VRN500 91 E-8 I 24 E-7 i
Coarse 2 on 94 Alumina Ceramics 38 E-9 22 E-8
Coarse 2 on Chrome Carbide 55 E-9 15 E-8
Coarse 2 on VRN500 66 E-8 25 E-7 I
LINER SELECTION
The lifetime of the liners is not the only criteria Maintainability and cost are also
factors that must be considered Chrome carbide seems to be the liner of choice
for this application However the specific type of chrome carbide tested is not
The optimisation of transfer chutes industry 114
MN van Aarde
ApPEND[xA
manufactured locally and the imported cost is approximately three times that of
ceramics
VRN500 is slightly cheaper than ceramics and can easily be bolted to the back
plate of the chute which makes maintenance very simple Ceramics are
however widely used on the facility and the maintenance teams are well trained
for this specific liner Therefore 94 alumina ceramics is chosen for this
application
The optimisation of transfer chutes in the bulk materials industry
MN van Aarde
115
ApPENODlt B
ApPENDIX B CHUTE CONTROL PHILOSOPHY
The optfmisation of transfer chutes in the bulk materials industry
MN van Aarde
116
ApPENDIX B
SPOON IN THE OPERATING POSITION
For the spoon to be in the operating position the moving head must be over that
specific spoon and the feeding stockyard conveyor must be running This means
that material will be fed through the chute In this case the spoon needs to be in
the operating position to prevent spillage
However when the chute is in the operating position and the feeding conveyor
trips for any reason the actuated spoon section must not move to the non
operating position If the spoon position feedback fails then the system must trip
and the spoon must remain in its last position The downstream conveyor must
also fail to start with this condition
SPOON IN THE NON OPERATING POSITION
As a rule the spoon needs to be in the non operating position when the moving
head on that specific stockyard conveyor is in the purging position (position C)
The reason is that when a stacker reclaimer is in stacking mode any upstream
stacker reclaimer can be reclaiming The reclaimed material on CV 5 or CV 6
will have to pass underneath the actuated chute
ACTUATED SPOON OVER CV 5
As an example for the movement of any actuated spoon on CV 5 the following
are considered When the moving heads of any of the stockyard conveyors are
in position A and that specific stockyard conveyor is running then the rest of the
actuated spoons over CV 5 must be in the non operating position The
following scenario provides a better understanding
bull CV 4 is running
bull CV 4 moving head is in position A
The optimisation of transfer chutes in the bulk materials industry
MN van Aarde
117
ApPENDIXB
In this situation all the actuated spoons on CV 5 except underneath CV 4
must be in the non operating position
ACTUATED SPOON OVER CV 6
As an example for the movement of any actuated spoon on CV 6 the following
are considered When the moving heads of any of the stockyard conveyors are
in position B and that specific stockyard conveyor is running then the rest of the
actuated spoons over CV 6 must be in the non operating position The
following scenario is similar to 453 but explains the control philosophy for the
moving head in position B
bull CV 2 is running
bull CV 2 moving head is in position B
In this situation all the actuated spoons on CV 6 except underneath CV 2
must be in the non operating position
The optimisation of transfer chutes in bulk materials industry
MN van Aarde
118
ABSTRACT
ABSTRACT
Bulk materials handling is a rapidly growing global industry Immense challenges
exist to improve the efficiency and cost effectiveness of transporting and handling
bulk materials continuously The nature and scale of bulk materials handling
varies from country to country This study specifically focuses on the handling of
bulk materials in the mining sector
Within this industry transfer chutes are a key component used for transferring
bulk material from one conveyor to another Among other uses it can also be
used under hoppers or silos to transfer material to conveyors trains trucks or
ships In a continuous effort to improve the efficiency of processes the industry is
bombarded with transfer chute problems that include
bull blocked chutes
bull high wear of liner materials
bull spillage due to skew loading
bull conveyor belt wear at loading points
Thorough investigation of existing transfer points before modifying or replacing
them with another configuration gives better insight into the problems This aids
the designer to come up with the optimum solution for a speciAc transfer point In
this dissertation a study is done on the configuration of dynamic chutes or hood
and spoon chutes After completing a detailed investigation of existing problems
the study focuses on rectifying material transfer problems and designing for ease
of maintenance
Adding to the improved flow in the new design for the specific case study
discussed in this dissertation other design details are discussed which further
validates the new design This design improves the wear life of the liners inside
the chute and minimises down time by reducing maintenance shutdowns
The optimisation of transfer chutes in the bulk materials industry
MN van Aarde
ii
ABSTRACT
There are literally endless possibilities when it comes to chute configurations due
to the uniqueness of each plant material type and layout constraints It is
therefore beneficial to know what issues to address in the process of chute
design or optimisation
This study focuses on a specific case study with unique problems and solutions
It should however give further insight and a basic understanding of what a chute
designer must consider and the methods taken to optimise an existing material
transfer point The purpose of this document is therefore not to provide the
reader with a recipe for chute optimisation but rather with the knowledge to
comprehend the problems and solutions by discussing a specific industry case
study
The optimisation of transfer chutes in the bulk materials industry
MN van Aarde
iii
SAMEVATTING
SAM EVATTING
Materiaal handtering is n vinnig groeiende wereldwye industrie Hierdie industrie
word gekonfronteer deur groot uitdagings om die effektiwiteit van materiaal
handtering te verbeter en sodoende die koste daaraan verbonde te verminder
Die aard en skaal van materiaal handtering varieer van land tot land afhangende
van die vereistes wat gestel word deur daardie land se industriele sektor Hierdie
studie fokus spesifiek op materiaal handtering in die mynbou sektor waar
hoofsaaklik geprosesseerde erts handteer word
In hierdie industrie is oordrag geute n sleutel komponent en word dit hoofsaaklik
gebruik om erts te vervoer vanaf een vervoerband na n volgende Dit kan ook
onder andere gebruik word onder hoppers of sillos waar materiaal vervoer word
na vervoerbande treine vragmotors of skepe In die strewe om die effektiwiteit
van prosesse te verbeter word die industrie gekonfronteer met probleme wat
onder andere insluit
bull geblokkeerde oordrag geute
bull hoe slytasie op geut-voerring materiale
bull vermorsing van materiaal as gevolg van geute wat skeef aflaai op
vervoerbande
bull hoe slytasie van vervoerbande by uitlaai punte
Voordat bestaande probleem geute vervang word met n nuwe konfigurasie is dit
belangrik om n deeglike ondersoek te doen Hierdie ondersoek skep n beter
insig oor die probleme wat bestaan in die oordrag geute n Beter insig rondom
die probleme gee aan die ontwerper die vermoe om die optimale oplossing vir
die probleme te kry In hierdie skripsie is n studie gedoen oor die konfigurasie
van dinamiese geute of sogenaamde hood and spoon geute Bestaande
probleme word in ag geneem en die studie fokus op die verbetering van
materiaal vloei sowel as In ontwerp wat instandhouding vergemaklik ~~~~~~~~-
The optimisation of transfer chutes in the bulk materials industry
MN van Aarde
iv
SAMEVATTING
As n toevoegsel tot die verbeterde vloei binne die nuwe ontwerp vir die
spesifieke geut waarna gekyk word in hierdie studie word daar ook ander
ontwerp toevoegings bespreek wat die waarde van die nuwe ontwerp verder
bevestig Hierdie ontwerp verbeter die leeftyd van die geut-voerring en tyd wat
afgestaan moet word aan instandhouding word geminimeer
Daar is letterlik eindelose moontlikhede wanneer dit kom by die konfigurasie van
oordrag geute as gevolg van die uniekheid van elke aanleg materiaal tipe en
uitleg beperkings Daarom is dit voordelig om te weet waaraan aandag gegee
moet word in die proses om geute te ontwerp of te optimiseer
Hierdie studie fokus op n spesifieke oordrag geut binne n spesifieke industrie
met unieke probleme en oplossings Dit behoort die geut ontwerper te bekwaam
met die basiese kennis en insig oor waarna om te kyk wanneer geute ontwerp of
geoptimiseer word Die doel van hierdie skripsie is dus nie om die leser te
voorsien van n resep om geute te optimiseer nie maar wei die kennis om die
probleme en oplossings te verstaan deur gebruik te maak van n studie uit die
industrie
The optimisation of transfer chutes in the bulk materials industry
MN van Aarde
v
ACKNOWLEDGEMENTS
ACKNOWLEDGEMENTS
I would like to thank Prof EH Mathews for the opportunity to do my Masters
degree
Special thanks to Dr M Kleingeld for his guidance and effort in assisting me in
my attempt to deliver a dissertation of this standard
Thank you to Prof Lesley Greyvenstein for the language editing
To my family thank you for all your support and encouragement throughout the
execution of this study
------________--__------------shyThe optimisation of transfer chutes in the bulk materials industry
MN van Aarde
vi
TABLE OF CONTENTS ---~-------------------~----
TABLE OF CONTENTS
Abstract ii
Samevatting iv
Acknowledgements vi
Table of contents vii
List of figures ix
List of tables xii
Nomenclature xiii
Chapter 1 Introduction to transfer chutes in the bulk materials handling industry1
11 Introduction to transfer chutes 2
12 Various applications and configurations of transfer chutes 5
13 Recurring chute problems and countermeasures from industry 11
14 Purpose of this research 18
15 Synopsis of this dissertation 19
Chapter 2 Basic considerations in chute design 21
21 Preface 22
22 Design objectives 22
23 Integrating a more appropriate chute layout with the plant constraints 27
24 Investigating the correct chute profile for reduced liner wear 30
25 Feed chute geometry for reduced belt wear 34
26 Conclusion37
Chapter 3 Tests for the identification of recurring problems on existing chutes39
31 Preface 40
32 Test methodology 40
33 Chute performance acceptance criteria 42
34 Discussion of problem areas 42
35 Summary of test results 54
36 Conclusion55
The optimisation of transfer chutes in the bulk materials industry
MN van Aarde
vii
TABLE OF CONTENTS
Chapter 4 Dynamic chutes for the elimination of recurring problems 57
41 Preface 58
42 Consideration of the existing transfer point constraints 59
43 Design of the chute profile 61
44 Incorporating a dead box in the impact areas 67
45 Designing the chute for integration with system requirements 73
46 Conclusion75
Chapter 5 Testing and verification ofthe new solution 77
51 Preface 78
52 Selecting a test methodology 79
53 Determination of material properties 85
54 Verification of the selected test methodology for this application 88
55 Verification of new chute configuration and optimisation of the hood
location 92
56 Effect of the honeycomb structure in high impact zones 95
58 Conclusion 97
Chapter 6 Conclusions and Recommendations 99
61 Conclusions and recommendations 100
62 Recommendations for further study 103
References 1 05
Appendix A Material Tests And Liner Selection 111
Appendix B Chute Control Philosophy 116
The optimisation of transfer chutes in the bulk materials industry
MN van Aarde
viii
LIST OF FIGURES
LIST OF FIGURES
Figure 1 Growth in global crude steel production from 1996 to 2006 [2] 2
Figure 2 Typical in-line transfer point [6] 4
Figure 3 90deg transfer point [7J 4
Fig ure 4 Material lump sizes through a crushing plant 6
Figure 5 Stacker Reclaimer in reclaiming mode 7
Figure 6 Typical dead box [11J9
Figure 7 Typical cascade chute [11] 9
Figure 8 Typical dynamic chute [12] 10
Figure 9 Radial door used in chutes under ore passes or silos [11] 1 0
Figure 10 Flopper gate diverting material to different receiving conveyors [11J 11
Figure 11 Ch ute liner degradation 12
Figure 12 Results of continuous belt wear at transfer points 13
Figure 1 Dust from a transfer point onto a stockpie13
Figure 14 Ceramic composite liners [18]15
Figure 15 Benetech Inteliflow J-Glide transfer chute [19] 16
Figure 16 Flow simulation of the Benetech Ineliflo chute [19] 17
Figure 17 Four step process for plant design and commissioning [1] 27
Figure 18 Vertical curve on incline conveyor 28
Figure 19 Protective roller on a transfer chute 29
Figure 20 Geometry of the impact plate and material trajectory [30J30
Figure 21 Model for the impact of a particle on a flat surface [29] 31
Figure 22 Ore flow path in the curved chute onto the incline conveyor [31] 35
Figure 23 Gentle deceleration of the product before impact on the receiving belt
[32] 35
Figure 24 Typical feed chute discharge model [33] 37
Figure 25 Layout of conveyors for chute test work 43
Figure 26 Configuration of the existing transfer chute44
Figure 27 Clear chute indicating camera angle 46
The optimisation of transfer chutes in the bulk materials industry
MN van Aarde
ix
LIST OF FIGURES
Figure 28 Coarse material at 8 000 tlh 46
Figure 29 Fine material at 8 000 tlh 47
Figure 30 Blocked chute with coarse material at 8600 tIh 47
Figure 31 Damaged side skirt 49
Figure 32 View behind the chute of the receiving conveyor before loading 50
Figure 33 View behind the chute of the receiving conveyor during loading 50
Figure 34 Peak surges experienced during reclaiming operations 52
Figure 35 Stockyard head end layout 59
Figure 36 Dimensional constraints on the existing transfer configuration 60
Figure 37 Hood and spoon configuration for the 90deg transfer 63
Figure 38 Hood velocity profile 65
Figure 39 Spoon velocity profile 66
Figure 40 Chute cross section 67
Fig ure 43 Honeycomb wear box positioning 69
Figure 44 Wear box in the hood section 70
Figure 45 Spacing arrangement of honeycomb ribs inside the hood 71
Figure 46 Wear box in the spoon section 72
Figure 47 Liner detail of the spoon honeycomb wear box 73
Figure 41 Spoon in the operational position 74
Figure 42 Spoon in the non operational position 75
Figure 48 Flow analysis examples a) separation and screening b) hoppers
feeders [36J 80
Figure 49 Simulations results from Fluenttrade [4OJ 83
Figure 50 Simulation results from Bulk Flow Analysttrade [41J83
Figure 51 Determination of material properties for an accurate angle of repose88
Figure Actual material flow with coarse Sat 10 000 tIh 89
Figure 53 Material flow pattem through the existing chute 90
Figure 54 Cross sectional side view of material flow through the existing chute91
Figure 55 Material flow through hood at 10 000 tlh 92
Figure 56 Material flow through spoon at 10 000 tlh 93
Figure 57 Determination of the optimum hood location 94
The optimisation of transfer chutes in the bulk materials industry
MN van Aarde
x
OF FIGURES
Figure 58 Material behaviour through hood 96
Figure 59 Material behaviour through spoon 96
The optimisation of transfer chutes in the bulk materials industry
MN van Aarde
xi
LIST OF TABLES
LIST OF TABLES
Table 1 Design Input Reference Requirements [24J 24
Table 2 Iron are grades used for chute test work 45
Table 3 Results from test programme 54
The optimisation of transfer chutes in the bulk materials industry
M N van Aarde
xii
---------------------------------
CV
NOMENCLATURE
NOMENCLATURE
SCADA
CCTV
CEMA
DEM
kPa
mm
MSHA
ms
mt
MW
NIOSH
OSHA
RampD
tlh
3D
Supervisory Control And Data Acquisition
Closed Circuit Television
Conveyor Equipment Manufacturers Association
Conveyor
Discrete Element Method
Kilopascal
Millimetres
Mine Safety and Health Administration
Metres per second
Metric Tons
Megawatt
National Institute for Occupational Safety and Health
Occupational Safety and Health Administration
Radius of curvature
Research and Development
Tons per hour
Three Dimensional
The optimisation of transfer chutes in the bulk materials industry
MN van Aarde
xiii
CHAPTER 1
CHAPTER 1 INTRODUCTION TO TRANSFER CHUTES IN THE BULK
MATERIALS HANDLING INDUSTRY
The optimisation of transfer chutes in the bulk materials industry
MN van Aarde
1
CHAPTER 1
11 INTRODUCTION TO TRANSFER CHUTES
111 Bulk material handling industry
In order to comprehend the utilisation of transfer chutes fully it is imperative to
first understand the industry in which it is used Transfer chutes are most
commonly used in the bulk materials handling industry Bulk materials handling
operations perform a key function in a great number and variety of industries
throughout the world as stated in 1978 by Arnold McLean and Roberts [1 J
The nature of materials handling and scale of industrial operation varies from
industry to industry and country to country These variations are based on the
industrial and economic capacity and requirements of the specific industry or
country Regardless of the variations in industry the relative costs of storing
handling and transporting bulk materials are in the majority of cases very
significant
o
Figure 1 Growth in global crude steel production from 1996 to 2006 [2J
The optimisation of transfer chutes in the bulk materials industry
MN van Aarde
2
CHAPTER 1
The chart from BHP Billiton shown in Figure 1 provides a clear indication of the
actual drivers of global materials demand Figure 1 indicates the percentage
growth in crude steel production from all the major role players between 1996
and 2006 China accounted for 65 of the 494 million tonnes of global steel
production growth between 1996 and 2006 Europe grew by 6 while the other
countries grew by 20 [2]
These figures emphasise that bulk materials handling performs a key function in
the global industry and economy [1] Because of market requirements new
products continuously evolve This is also true for the field of bulk conveying
technologies [3] It can be assumed that the evolution of new technology is due
to the requirement for more efficient and cost effective operation
The case study which will be discussed from Chapter 3 onwards is an iron ore
export facility This facility exports approximately 50 million tonnes per annum
With each hour of down time the financial losses equate to approximately
R750 000 This highlights the fact that handling systems should be designed and
operated with a view to achieving maximum efficiency and reliability
112 Function of transfer chutes
BS2890 (Specification for Troughed Belt Conveyors) gives the definition for
transfer chutes as follows A straight curved or spiral open topped or enclosed
smooth trough by which materials are directed and lowered by gravity [4] For
any belt conveyor system to operate successfully the system requires that [5]
bull the conveyor belt be loaded properly
bull the material transported by the conveyor is discharged properly
The transfer of bulk material can either be from a belt bin hopper feeder or
stockpile and occurs at a transfer point In most cases this transfer point requires
optimisation of transfer chutes in the bulk materials industry
MN van Aarde
3
CHAPTER 1 - ----~--~--------------~--------
a transfer chute [5] In industry the most common use of transfer chutes is for
transferring bulk material from one conveyor belt to another This transfer of
material can be done in any direction as simplistically explained in Figure 2 and
Figure 3
Figure 2 Typical in-line transfer point [6J
Figure 2 shows a basic in-line transfer of material from the end of one conveyor
belt onto the start of another conveyor belt Figure 3 illustrates a more intricate
design where the direction of material transport is changed by an angle of 90 0 bull
This design or any other design entailing a directional change in flow normally
requires more detailed engineering [7
The optimisation of transfer chutes in the bulk materials industry
MN van Aarde
4
CHAPTER 1
Regardless of the direction or type of transfer there are some design
requirements that always need special attention Some of these requirements
are reduced wear on chute liners correct discharge velocity minimum material
degradation and minimum belt abrasion The correct design will also eliminate
blockages shape the load correctly and minimise the creation of dust [7]
12 VARIOUS APPLICATIONS AND CONFIGURATIONS OF TRANSFER CHUTES
The application of transfer chutes is central to any operation in the bulk handling
industry Whether it is mining operations storing stacking importing or
exporting of bulk material the transfer of material is always required On the
mining side the challenges involved with materials handling are probably some of
the most extreme
This is due to the great variation in lump sizes that must be catered for At
Sishen iron ore mine seven iron ore products are produced conforming to
different chemical and physical specifications The current mining process at
Sishen entails [8]
bull Removal of topsoil and stockpiling
bull Drilling and blasting of ore
bull Loading of iron ore and transporting to the crushers
bull Crushing and screening into size fractions
bull Beneficiation of all size fractions
bull Stockpiling onto various product beds
The processes with the most intricate and complex chute arrangements are
probably crushing and screening as well as stacking and reclaiming of material
The optimisation of transfer chutes in the bulk materials industry
11 N van Aarde
5
CHAPTER 1
121 Crushing
An excavator or wheeled loader transfers the rock to be crushed into the feed
hopper of the primary crusher The primary crusher breaks the large rock
boulders or run of mine material into smaller grain sizes Some of the bigger
crushers in the industry can crack boulders that are about one cubic meter in
size All the crushed material passes over a screen to separate the different
lump sizes The material that falls through the screen is transferred via a series
of transfer chutes and conveyor belts to the stockpile area [9]
Where the material does not pass through the screen another system of transfer
chutes and conveyor belts transfers this material to a secondary crusher The
material is fed into this crusher via a transfer chute from the discharge of a
conveyor belt All the processed material is then transferred to the stockpile area
via a separate series of transfer chutes and conveyor systems [9] Throughout
this whole process the material lump size changes and with it the transfer chute
requirements
Figure 4 Material lump sizes through a crushing plant
The optimisation of transfer chutes in the bulk materials industry
MN van Aarde
6
CHAPTER 1
Figure 4 shows some spillage from a conveyor between a primary and secondary
crusher The shovel in the picture provides a good reference as to the variation
in material lump size on the walkway
122 Stacking and Recaiming
Normally the stockyard area has an elongated yard conveyor for moving bulk
material in the longitudinal direction of the stockyard Straddling the yard
conveyor transversely is the rail mounted undercarriage of the stacker reclaimer
Three main chutes transfer material through the machine [10] Figure 5 shows
this machine in action while reclaiming material from a stockpile
Figure 5 Stacker Reclaimer in reclaiming mode
The first chute will transfer material to the incline conveyor of the machine when
the material has to be stacked on the stockpile In the case where the material
must bypass the machine this chute will transfer material from the tripper back
onto the yard conveyor [10]
The optimisation of transfer chutes in the bulk materials industry
MN van Aarde
7
CHAPTER 1
The second chute transfers material from the incline conveyor onto the boom
conveyor This is normally a difficult process because the boom conveyor is
never in the same direction as the incline conveyor From the end of the boom
conveyor the material is Simply discharged onto the stockpile [10]
When reclaiming stockpile material the bucket whee at the head end of the
boom conveyor scoops up material and deposits it back onto the boom conveyor
From here it is discharged into the centre chute of the machine This chute then
discharges the material onto the yard conveyor for further processing In some
cases the bottom section of this centre chute must be moved out of the way to
allow free passage of material discharged from the tripper chute onto the yard
conveyor [10]
123 Chute configurations
Various chute configurations are used in the bulk materials handling industry
These configurations depend on the specific requirements of the system layout
or material properties There are basically two main configurations consisting of
dead box chutes and dynamic chutes Both of these configurations have their
specific applications in industry The major difference is that dead box chutes
use the material being transferred as a chute liner whereas dynamic chutes are
lined with a high wear resistant material A combination of both can also be
used
If the material being transferred is relatively dry such as goid ore dead boxes
prove to be more beneficial One of the applications of a ded box is to absorb
the direct impact of material discharged from a conveyor into a head chute as
can be seen in Figure 6 Other applications are in long or high transfer points In
these transfers the momentum of falling material must be reduced before
reaching the receiving conveyor belt in order to reduce wear of the belt [11]
The optimisation of transfer chutes in the bulk materials industry
MN van Aarde
8
CHAPTER 1
Figure 6 Typical dead box [11]
As shown in Figure 7 dead boxes are also used to accomplish changes in the
vertical flow direction by inserting angled panels This configuration where dead
boxes are used as deflection plates or impact wear plates is known as a cascade
chute In this case the deflection plate or the impact wear plate hardness is
equal to that of the feed material [11]
Figure 7 Typical cascade chute [11]
The hood and spoon chute or dynamic chute is configured so that the hood
catches and changes the material trajectory path to exit with a vertical velocity
When the material impacts the spoon it slides down the smooth spoon surface
The material flow direction is changed to the direction of the receiving conveyor
as shown in Figure 8 [12]
The optimisation of transfer chutes in the bulk materials industry
MN van Aarde
9
CHAPTER 1
Figure 8 Typical dynamic chute [12J
Ancillary equipment used with this configuration of chutes is radial doors and
flopper gates Radial doors are used successfully below ore passes or silos for
an onoff feed control as shown by Figure 9 One drawback of radial doors is the
possibility of jamming while closing In order to counteract this problem a
knocker arm between the cylinder door and the rod can be added This helps to
close the door with full force open with reduced force or hammered open [11]
Figure 9 Radial door used in chutes under ore passes or silos [11J
The optimisation of transfer chutes in the bulk materials industry
MN van Aarde
10
CHAPTER 1
The function of a f10pper gate is to divert the flow of material in a chute when one
conveyor is required to feed either of two discharge points as shown in Figure 10
For this same purpose a diverter car can also be used where a section of the
chute moves in and out of the path of material flow The critical area in the
design of a flop per gate is the hinge point In order for the gate to be self
cleaning the hinge point should be placed above the apex of the double chute
This also prevents rock traps that can jam the gate [11]
COVERED
Figure 10 Flopper gate diverling material to different receiving conveyors [11J
13 RECURRING CHUTE PROBLEMS AND COUNTERMEASURES FROM INDUSTRY
Transfer chutes are a fundamental link when conveying ore and therefore it is
important to get it right at the outset of design and fabrication Design and
fabrication issues can cause numerous problems when transferring material
Historically conveyor system design focused on the systems overall structural
integrity while ensuring that the equipment would fit within the facilitys
constraints [13] [14] [15]
The optimisation of transfer chutes in the bulk materials industry
MN van Aarde
11
CHAPTER 1
Little attention was given to design analysis or consideration for material flow
characteristics Normally the solution for controlling flow was to implement
simple rock boxes [15] This type of chute configuration is still commonly used in
industry but with more emphasis on the flow of material The most recurrent
problems on transfer chutes are [13] [14]
bull Spillage
bull Blocked chutes
bull High wear on the receiving belt due to major differences between the
material velocity and the belt velocity
bull Rapid chute wear
bull Degradation of the material being transferred
bull Excessive generation of dust and noise
bull Miss tracking of the receiving conveyor belt due to skew loading from the
transfer chute
Figure 11 Chute liner degradation
Figure 11 shows the excessive wear on ceramic tiles where the material
trajectory from the feeding belt impacts the chute These tiles are replaceable
and a maintenance schedule normally specifies the replacement intervals A
The optimisation of transfer chutes in the bulk materials industry 12
MN van Aarde
CHAPTER 1
problem arises when the frequency of these maintenance intervals is too high
due to excessive wear on the liners
Figure 12 Results of continuous belt wear at transfer points
The conveyor belt can account for up to 60 of the capital cost of a bulk
materials handling plant This means that the cost implications of constant
replacement of a conveyor belt due to wear can become significantly higher
than the original capital investment [16] Figure 12 shows the extreme damage
on a conveyor belt caused by abrasion and gouging
Figure 13 Dust from a transfer point onto a stockpile
The optimisation of transfer chutes in the bulk materials industry
MN van Aarde
13
CHAPTER 1 --~ ---------------------------shy
The presence of dust is an indisputable fact in many industries concerned with
the handling or processing of products such as coal mineral ores and many
others [17] As in the case of spillage it is easy to identify transfer systems that
cause dust clouds Environmental regulations are in place to prevent excessive I
dust emissions
Government organisations such as the Occupational Safety and Health
Administration (OSHA) the Mine Safety and Health Administration (MSHA) and
the National Institute for Occupational Safety and Health (NIOSH) closely monitor
dust levels at all coal handling facilities [13] Therefore it is imperative that the
chute design process caters for limiting dust emissions
Systems normally used in industry are enclosed skirting systems bag houses
and dust collectors This however is only treating the symptom rather than
eliminating the primary cause In order to minimise dust generation the use of
low impact angles and minimal chute contact is required (14] One of the most
successful methods of controlling dust is atomised water spray systems using a
combination of high pressure water and chemical substances
Over the years considerable research has gone into minimising wear on transfer
chutes There are currently a few different liner types to choose from depending
on the configuration and application of the chute These include ceramic tiles
chrome carbide overlay materials and typi~al hardened steel plates such as
VRN A combination of liner materials can also be used similar to the one
shown in Figure 14
The opUmisation of transfer chutes in the bulk materials industry
MN van Aarde
14
CHAPTER 1
Figure 14 Ceramic composite liners [18J
This ceramic composite liner is an example of the new technology available in
chute lining materials It is a high wear resistant surface made from cylindrical
alumina ceramic pellets bound within a resilient rubber base The purpose of this
material is to provide wear resistance through the use of ceramics while the
rubber dampens the impact forces [18]
Some innovative concepts for chute design have been implemented since the
materials handling industry started to incorporate new ideas Benetech Inc
installed a new generation hood and spoon type chute at Dominions 1200 MW
Kincaid coal powered generating station as shown in Figure 15 This chute
replaced the conventional dead box chute [19] Their innovation is to use a pipe
configuration combined with the hood and spoon concept
The optimisation of transfer chutes in the bulk materials industry
MN van Aarde
15
CHAPTER 1
Figure 15 Benetech Inteliflow J-Gide transfer chute [19J
This chute has sufficient chute wall slope and cross sectional area to prevent
material build-up and blocked chutes Reduced collision forces in the chute
minimize material degradation and the creation of excessive dust The material
velocity in the chute is controlled by the wall angles to obtain a discharge velocity
with the same horizontal component as the belt velocity [19] Figure 16 shows a
flow simulation of the Benetech concept The simulation shows that this concept
will result in lower impact forces and reduce belt abrasion
The optimisation of transfer chutes in the bulk materials industry
MN van Aarde
16
CHAPTER 1
Figure 16 Flow simulation ofthe Benetech Ineliflo chute [19J
CBP Engineering Corp also considers the concept of pipe type sections to be
the answer to most of the transfer chute problems They describe it as a curved
or half round chute The modern perception is to gently guide the material in the
required direction rather than use a square box design or deflector doors which
turns or deflects the flow [20]
The industry is striving towards developing new technology in transfer chute
design One solution is to incorporate soft loading transfer chutes to alter the
material flow direction with minimum impact on the side walls of chute and
receiving conveyor As experienced by many industries these types of chutes
can transfer material onto the receiving conveyor at almost the same velocity as
the conveyor By doing so many of the problems with material transfer can be
eliminated [13]
Most of these solutions as proposed by industry only address a few of the
numerous problems experienced with transfer chutes The dynamic hood and
The optimisation of transfer chutes in the bulk materials industry
MN van Aarde
17
CHAPTER 1
spoon chute appears to afford the best opportunity for solving most of the
problems There are still however many unanswered questions surrounding this
design
Figure 11 shows the installation of a hood type chute in the iron ore industry It is
clear from this image that liner wear in the higher impact areas is still an area of
concern Improvements can still be made to this design in order to further
enhance its performance
14 PURPOSE OF THIS RESEARCH
The bulk materials handling industry is constantly facing the challenge of
implementing transfer chutes that satisfy all the system requirements Problems
such as high wear spillage blockages and the control of material flow are just
some of the major challenges faced by the industry
The objective of this research is to identify problems experienced with transfer
chutes of an existing bulk handling system and to apply current design solutions
in eliminating these problems In doing so the research aims to introduce a new
method of minimising liner wear caused by high impact velocities
Dynamic chutes are discussed in particular where the entire design process
addresses the problems identified on chutes in brown field projects Approaching
chute design from a maintenance point of view with the focus on reducing liner I
degradation will provide a fresh approach to transfer chute design The
concepts disc~ssed in this dissertation (dynamic and dead box chutes) are
commonly used in industry However some research is done to determine
whether a combination of these concepts can solve some of the problems
experienced by industry
The optimisation of transfer chutes in the bulk materials industry 18
MN van Aarde
CHAPTER 1
At the hand of all the information provided in this dissertation its purpose is to
enable the chute designers to better understand the process of chute
optimisation and design This is achieved through the discussion of a case study
where the chutes are evaluated and re-designed to achieve the desired
performance
15 SYNOPSIS OF THIS DISSERTATION
Chapter 1 gives an introduction to the bulk materials industry and the role that
transfer chutes plays in this industry Some of the problems that the industries
have been experiencing with transfer chutes were identified and the diverse
solutions to these problems discussed These solutions were reviewed to
identify whether improvement would be possible
Chapter 2 provides a better understanding of the functionality and the
conceptualisation of transfer chutes as well as investigating the theory behind
material flow through transfer chutes This theory reviews the research and
design objectives used as a guideline when approaching a new chute
configuration The guidelines for evaluating and designing transfer chutes are
used to verify the performance of these chutes in the iron ore industry
Chapter 3 identifies some practical problems experienced on transfer chutes a~
an existing bulk transfer facility These problems are identified through a series
of tests where the actual flow inside the chutes is monitored via CCTV cameras
The results obtained from these tests are specific to this facility but can provide
insight into the cause of some problems generally experienced in the industry
These results can provide helpful information when modifying or re-designing
new transfer chutes
Chapter 4 uses the theory discussed in Chapter 2 to conceptualise a new
transfer chute configuration for the transfer points that were tested All the facility
The optimisation of transfer chutes in the bulk materials industry 19
MN van Aarde
CHAPTER 1
constraints are taken into account during the process in order to obtain an
optimum solution to the problems identified during the chute test work The old
chutes did not have major problems with liner wear due to large dead boxes
However this remains a serious consideration for the new dynamic chute design
due to its configuration where there is continuous sliding abrasion of the chute
surface A new concept for the reduction of liner degradation is introduced in this
chapter
Before manufacturing and installing this new concept it is important to verify that
it will perform according to conceptual design Chapter 5 is a discussion on the
use of the Discrete Element Method as a verification tool A simulation of the
new transfer chute concept is done to visualise the behaviour of the material as it
passes through the new transfer chute configuration
Chapter 6 discusses the benefits of the new transfer chute configuration A
conclusion is made as to what the financial implications will be with the
implementation of this new concept Recommendations are made for future
studies in the field of bulk materials handling These recommendations focus on
the optimisation of processes and the reduction of maintenance cost to the
facility
The optimisation of transfer chutes in the bulk materials industry
MN van Aarde
20
CHAPTER 2
CHAPTER 2 BASIC CONSIDERATIONS IN CHUTE DESIGN
The optimisation of transfer chutes in the bulk materials industry
MN van Aarde
21
CHAPTER 2
21 PREFACE
In an economic driven world the pressure for production is often the cause of the
loss of production This is a bold statement and is more factual than what the
industry would like to admit This is also valid in the bulk materials handling
industry Production targets seldom allow time for investigation into the root
cause of the problems The quick fix option is often adopted but is frequently the
cause of even more maintenance stoppages
Existing chutes on brown field projects often fail due to an initial disregard for the
design criteria changes in the system parameters or lack of maintenance
These transfer points are often repaired on site by adding or removing platework
and ignoring the secondary functions of a transfer chute Therefore it is
imperative to always consider the basic chute specifications when addressing a
material transfer problem [21]
22 DESIGN OBJECTIVES
In the quest to improve or design any transfer point some ground rules must be
set This can be seen as a check list when evaluating an existing chute or
designing a new chute Transfer chutes should aim to meet the following
requirements as far as possible [21] [22] [23]
bull Ensure that the required capacity can be obtained with no risk of blockage
bull Eliminate spillage
bull Minimise wear on all components and provide the optimal value life cycle
solution
bull Minimise degradation of material and generation of excessive dust
bull Accommodate and transfer primary and secondary scraper dribblings onto
the receiving conveyor
The optimisation of transfer chutes in the bulk materials industry
MN van Aarde
22
CHAPTER 2
bull Ensure that any differences between the flow of fine and coarse grades are
catered for
bull Transfer material onto the receiving conveyor so that at the feed point onto
the conveyor
bull the component of the material now (parallel to the receiving conveydr) is as
close as possible to the belt velocity (at least within 10) to minimise the
power required to accelerate the material and to minimise abrasive wear of
the belt
bull the vertical velocity component of the material flow is as low as possible so
as to minimise wear and damage to the belt as well as to minimise spillage
due to material bouncing off the belt
bull The flow is centralised on the belt and the lateral flow is minimised so as
not to affect belt tracking and avoid spillage
With the design of a new chute there are up to 46 different design inputs with 19
of these being absolutely critical to the success of the design Some of the most
critical preliminary design considerations are shown in Table 1 [24]
The optimisation of transfer chutes in the bulk materials industry
MN van Aarde
23
CHAPTER 2
Table 1 Design Input Reference Requirements [24J
Aria Unit
Feed Conveyor
Belt Speed r ms
Belt Width mm
JibHead Pulley Dia mm
Pulley Width mm
Angle to Horizontal at the Head Pulley degrees
Belt Troughing Angle degrees
Sight Height Data
Feed Conveyor Top of Belt to Roof mm
Drop Height mm
Receiving Conveyor Top of Belt to Floor mm
Receiving Conveyor
Belt Speed ms
Belt Width mm
Belt Thickness mm
Angle of Intersection degrees
Angle to Horizontal degrees
Belt Troughing Angle degrees
Material Properties
Max Oversize Lump (on top) mm
Max Oversize Lump (on top) degrees
studies done by Jenike and Johanson Inc have identified six design principles
that can serve as a guideline in chute optimisation exercises These six
principles focus on the accelerated flow in the chute which they identified as the
most critical mode [25]
Within accelerated flow the six problem areas identified by Jenike and Johanson
Inc are [25]
The optimisation of transfer chufes in the bulk materials industry
MN van Aarde
24
CHAPTER 2
bull plugging of chutes at the impact points
bull insufficient cross sectional area
bull uncontrolled flow of material
bull excessive wear on chute surfaces
bull excessive generation of dust
bull attrition or breakdown of particles
221 Plugging of chutes
In order to prevent plugging inside the chute the sliding surface inside the chute
must be sufficiently smooth to allow the material to slide and to clean off the most
frictional bulk solid that it handles This philosophy is particularly important
where the material irnpacts on a sliding surface Where material is prone to stick
to a surface the sliding angle increases proportionally to the force with which it
impacts the sliding surface In order to minimise material velocities and excessive
wear the sliding surface angle should not be steeper than required [25]
222 Insufficient cross sectional area
The cross section of the stream of material inside the chute is a function of the
velocity of flow Therefore it is critical to be able to calculate the velocity of the
stream of material particles at any point in the chute From industry experience a
good rule of thumb is that the cross section of the chute should have at least two
thirds of its cross section open at the lowest material velocity [25] When the
materialis at its lowest velocity it takes up a larger cross section of chute than at
higher velocities Therefore this cross section is used as a reference
223 Uncontrolled flow of material
Due to free falling material with high velocities excessive wear on chutes and
conveyor belt surfaces are inevitable Therefore it is more advantageous to
The optimisation of transfer chutes in the bulk materials industry
MN van Aarde
25
CHAPTER 2
have the particles impact the hood as soon as possible with a small impact
angle after discharge from the conveyor With the material flowing against the
sloped chute walls instead of free falling the material velocity can be controlled
more carefully through the chute [25]
224 Excessive wear on chute surfaces
Free flowing abrasive materials do not normally present a large wear problem
The easiest solution to this problem is to introduce rock boxes to facilitate
material on material flow Chute surfaces that are subjected to fast flowing
sticky and abrasive materials are the most difficult to design
A solution to this problem is to keep the impact pressure on the chute surface as
low as possible This is done by designing the chute profile to follow the material
trajectory path as closely as possible By doing so the material is less prone to
stick to the chute surface and the material velocity will keep the chute surface
clean [25]
225 Excessive generation of dust
Material flowing inside a transfer chute causes turbulence in the air and
excessive dust is created In order to minimise the amount of dust the stream of
material must be kept in contact with the chute surface as far as possible The
material stream must be compact and all impact angles against the chute walls
must be minimised A compact stream of material means that the material
particles are flowing tightly together At the chute discharge point the material
velocity must be as close as possible to the velocity of the receiving belt [25]
The optimisation of transfer in the bulk materials industry
M N van Aarde
26
CHAPTER 2
226 Attrition or breakdown of particles
The break up of particles is more likely to occur when large impact forces are
experienced inside a chute than on smooth sliding surfaces Therefore in most
cases the attrition of material particles can be minimised by considering the
following guidelines when designing a transfer chute minimise the material
impact angles concentrate the stream of material keep the material stream in
contact with the chute surface and keep the material velocity constant as far as
possible [25]
23 INTEGRATING A MORE APPROPRIATE CHUTE LAYOUT WITH THE PLANT
CONSTRAINTS
According to Tunra Bulk Solids in Australia the process for design and
commissioning of a new plant basically consists of four steps The entire
process is based on understanding the properties of the material to be
handled [1]
RampD CENTRE CONSULTING CONTRACTOR ENGINEERING AND PLANT
COMPANY OPERATOR r-------------- I TESTING Of CONCEPTUAl I DETAILED DESIGN CONSTRUCTION amp
I BULKSOUDS - DESIGN COMMISSIONING- I shyI Flow Proper1ies Lining Material tuet Equipment
Selection Procurement _ I I
I I
I Flow Pat1erns SSlpment Quality Control I
I IFeeder Loads amp Process Performance
I Power I Optimisation Assessment I I
L J -
I IBin Loads I I I Wear Predictions I
FEEDBACK I I I IModel Studigt L _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ J
i ~ FEEDBACK r-shyFigure 17 Four step process for plant design and commissioning [1J
The optimisation of transfer chutes in the bulk materials industry
MN van Aarde
27
CHAPTER 2
Figure 17 illustrates this four step process These steps are a good guideline in
order to incorporate a more appropriate chute layout for the plant constraints
This is an iterative process where all the possible solutions to a problem are
measured against all the possible plant constraints This section focuses more
on the second column of Figure 17 and specifically on structures and equipment
During this stage of design the utilisation of 3D parametric modelling also creates
an intimate and very accurate communication between the designer and the
project engineer or client This effective communication tool will save time and
improve the engineering process [24]
A good example of obtaining an appropriate chute layout for the plant constraints
can be explained as follows On an existing plant a transfer point will have a
specific transfer height from the top of the feed conveyor to the top of the
receiving conveyor If the feed conveyor has an incline section to obtain the
required transfer height it will also have a curve in the vertical plane of that
incline section This curve has a certain minimum radius in order to keep the belt
on the idlers at high belt tensions [26]
Figure 18 Vertical curve on incline conveyor
The optimisation of transfer chutes in the bulk materials industry
MN van Aarde
28
CHAPTER 2
If the transfer height at a transfer point is changed the path of the feeding
conveyor should always be taken into consideration With an increase in transfer
height the vertical curve radius will increase as well in order to prevent the
conveyor from lifting off the idlers in the curve This will require expensive
modifications to conveyor structures and therefore in most cases be a pointless
exercise Figure 18 shows clearly the large radius required to obtain a vertical
curve in a belt conveyor
Other considerations on brown field projects might be lift off of the receiving
conveyor at start up before or after the vertical curve This is caused by peaks
in belt tension at start up which may cause the belt to lift off the idlers and chafe
against the chute In some cases this can be solved by fitting a roller as shown
in Figure 19 to the underside of the chute to protect it from being damaged by
the belt or to protect the belt from being damaged by the chute The position of
this specific chute is just after a vertical curve where the belt tends to lift off at
start up
Figure 19 Protective roller on a transfer chute
The optimisation of transfer chutes in the bulk materials industry
MN van Aarde
29
CHAPTER 2
24 INVESTIGATING THE CORRECT CHUTE PROFILE FOR REDUCED LINER WEAR
In order to reduce chute wear the curved-profile variable chute concept is
introduced [27] This concept was originally developed by Professor Roberts for
the grain industry in 1969 [28] After many years of research and investigation
CMR Engineers and Project managers (pty) Ltd came to the following
conclusion any improvement in coal degradation dust generation and chute
wear can only be achieved by avoiding high impact forces or reducing them as
much as possible [27]
At any impact point of material in a chute or conveyor kinetic energy is
dissipated This increases material degradation and wear on liners and conveyor
belt covers Therefore it is good practise to redirect the kinetic energy in a
useful manner This action will help to reduce liner and belt wear [32]
x
Vo
- ImpactPlate
Figure 20 Geometry of the impact plate and material trajectory [30J
The optimisation of transfer chutes n the bulk materials industry
MN van Aarde
30
CHAPTER 2
The path followed by the material discharged over the end pulley of a belt
conveyor is known as its trajectory and is a function of the discharge velocity of
the material from the conveyor [29] Figure 20 shows the material trajectory as
weI as the radius and location of the impact plate In the case of dynamic chutes
this impact plate represents the back plate of the chute
The correct chute profile to reduce wear must cater for the proper location of the
chute covers and wearing plates This location depends upon the path of the
trajectory which must be predicted as accurately as possible
Figure 21 Mode for the impact of a particle on a flat surface [29]
Figure 21 illustrates a material particle impinging on a flat chute surface at an
angle of approach 91 and with approach velocity V1 This particle will then
rebound off the chute plate at an angel 92 and velocity V2 The wear on the
chute liners or the surface shown in Figure 21 will be a function of the vector
change in momentum of the particle One component will be normal to and the
other component parallel to the flat surface The parallel component is referred
to as the scouring component along the surface [29]
It is important to determine the radius of curvature of material within the
trajectory It is now a simple exercise to determine the chute hood radius
depending on plant constraints Firstly the material trajectory must be calculated
The optimisation of transfer chutes in the bulk materials industry
MN van Aarde
31
CHAPTER 2 ---~----------------
According to the mechanical handling engineers association in Perth Australia it
is beneficial to keep the impact angle as small as possible Impact angle less
than 20deg are recommended for most liner materials This will ensure an
acceptably small impulse force component normal to the surface The r~te at
which the material is gouging away the chute liner at the impact point will be
reduced [29]
The material trajectory is determined by equation l
(1)
Where the origin of the x and y axis is taken at the mean material height h and
the discharge point on the pulley as shown in Figure 20 The variables involved
in the calculation of the material trajectory are [30]
y =vertical position on the grid where the trajectory is determined
x = position parallel to the receiving belt line where the trajectory is determined
v = material speed
g =gravitational constant
a =inclination angle of the feeding conveyor
After the material leaves the belt a simplified assumption can be made that it
falls under gravity It is quite clear that in order to minimise the impact angle
the impact plate must follow the path of the material trajectory as far as possible
It will almost never be possible to obtain a contact point between the material and
the chute where there is a smooth contact with no impact angle
This radius of curvature of the material tr~jectory is determined as follows [30
The optimisation of transfer chutes in the bulk materials industry i 32
MN van Aarde
CHAPTER 2
[1 + ( gx )]15 R = vcos8
c (2)
vcos8
Where
g == gravitational constant
v == material speed
8 == Angle at discharge
In order to simplify the manufacturing process of a curved chute the radius must
be constant For a relatively smooth contact between the material and the chute
plate the radius of the curved chute at the point of contact is as close as
possible to the material discharge curvature radius [30] This is rarely possible
on brown field projects due to facility constraints In this case there will be higher
probability for rapid liner wear Each situation must be individually assessed to
determine the best solution
Cross sectional dimensions of the transfer chute must be sufficient to collect the
material and ensure continuous flow without causing blockages At the same
time the chute profile must not result in excessive material speed Material
speed inside the chute will be considered to be excessive when it can not be
controlled to exit the chute at approximately the same velocity to that of the
receiving conveyor Chutes may block for the following reasons [29]
bull Mechanical bridging due to large lumps locking into one another
bull Insufficient cross section causing cohesive material to choke or bridge
bull Inadequate chute inclination causing fines build-up
bull Corner effects or cohesion causing material to stick to the chute walls
The optimisation of transfer chutes in the bulk materials industry
MN van Aarde
33
CHAPTER 2
For the handling of large lumps of material field experience has shown that the
chute cross sectional area should be 25 times the major dimension of the largest
lumps To avoid possible bridging of the material in the chute the
recommendation is to make the inner chute volume as large as possible This
will be guided by the support steelwork around the transfer point [29]
Field experience has shown that it is advisable depending on the material being
transferred that the chute inclination angles be no less than 65deg to 700 Cornerbull
effects should also be avoided where material gets stuck in the inner corners of
chute plate work These angles should preferably be no less than 70 0 bull
25 FEED CHUTE GEOMETRY FOR REDUCED BELT WEAR
The design parameters to reduce both chute and belt wear are interrelated
Research done at the Phalaborwa copper mine is a good case study to prove the
concept of a curved chute profile This mine had specific problems with high belt
wear at transfer points At this facility an in-pit 60 x 89 gyratory crusher and
incline tunnel conveyor was commissioned to haul primary crushed ore A
conventional dead box chute transfers ore from the crusher to a 1800 mm wide
incline conveyor [31]
The maximum lump size handled by this section of the facility is 600 mm (60 kg)
An 18 mm thick top cover was specified for this conveyor with an X grade
rubber according to DIN (abrasion value lt 100 mm) This belt had an original
warranty of 10 years After 35 years the top cover started to show signs of
excessive wear and the tensile cords of the 18 mm thick cover were visible [31]
In April 1994 Phalaborwa commissioned the curved chute concept and a new
belt on the incline conveyor Six months after commissioning no gouging or
pitting damage was evident The material velocity through this curved chute onto
the incline conveyor is shown in Figure 22 [31]
The optimisation of transfer chutes in the bulk materials industry
MN van Aarde
34
CHAPTER 2
VELOCITY ( m I aec ) _ nm _ bull m _ 1211 _ UTI _ U16
_ IIU _ Im _ I rn _ 171-111 _ u n _ ~ l
_ 4 ~
_ 41 _ 4
141 CJ UtiI 1bull-bull 1t5
~ 1m bull UI2
Material Flow Velocity Gradient
Figure 22 Ore flow path in the curved chute onto the incline conveyor [31]
TENDENCY TO FORM STAGNANT LAYER LEADING
TO INSTABILITY IN DEPTH OF FLOW
C8middotFLOW IN CURVED CHUTES
Figure 23 Gentle deceleration of the product before impact on the receiving belt [32]
The optimisation of transfer chutes in the bulk materials industry
MN van Aarde
35
CHAPTER 2
Figure 23 illustrates the gentle deceleration of material that is achieved with the
curved chute concept This helps to reduce belt wear because it is relatively
easy to discharge the material at the same velocity as the receiving conveyor
The material speed v can be calculated at any point in the chute using equation
3 and equation 4 [33]
v 2~R [(2ue2 -l)sin(O) +3ue cos(O)] + Ke 2uB (3) 4ue +1
This equation is only applicable if the curved section of the chute has a constant
radius Rand I-Ie is assumed constant at an average value for the stream [33]
I-Ie = friction coefficient
8 = angle between the horizontal and the section of the spoon where the velocity
is determined and
(4)
The optimisation of transfer chutes in the bulk materjas industry
MN van Aarde
36
CHAPTER 2
Mass Flow Rate Omh
Figure 24 Typical feed chute discharge model [33J
The velocity Ve at the discharge of the chute can be determined from equation 3
and equation 4 The components Vey and Vex of the discharge velocity as
shown in Figure 24 can now be calculated This investigation should aid the
optimisation of the chute profile in order to [33]
bull match the horisontal component Vex of the material exit velocity as close
as possible to the belt speed
bull reduce the vertical component Vey of the material exit velocity in order to
minimize abrasive wear on the receiving conveyor
26 CONCLUSION
This section discussed the technical background necessary for the optimisation
of transfer chutes on an existing iron ore plant which will be discussed in
Chapter 4 The focus is specifically aimed at reducing impact wear on chute liner
materials and abrasive wear on receiving conveyor belts Important to note from
The optimisation oftransfer chutes in the bulk materials industry
MN van Aarde
37
CHAPTER 2
this section is the acceptable limits of dynamic chute optimisation or design
These limits aremiddot
bull a material impact angle of less than 20deg
bull a variance of less than 10 between the receiving belt velocity and the
material discharge velocity component parallel to the receiving conveyor
An important aspect of chute optimisation is to consider the facility constraints
These constraints are in some cases flexible but in most cases the chute
optimisation process must be designed within these constraints This means that
any new concept will have to be measured against what is possible within the
facility limits
It is important to note that only the most common transfer chute problems were
mentioned in this chapter Other possible problems were not addressed in this
chapter as it is normally related to detail design issues Solutions to these
problems are unique to each type of chute and will be addressed for the specific
case study in Chapter 4
The optimisafjon of transfer chutes in the bulk materials industry
MN van Aarde
38
CHAPTER 3
The optimisation of transfer chutes in the bulk materials industry
MN van Aarde
CHAPTER 3 TESTS FOR THE IDENTIFICATION OF RECURRING
PROBLEMS ON EXISTING CHUTES
39
CHAPTER 3
31 PREFACE
Since the completion of a certain iron ore handling facility it has been
experiencing recurring material transfer problems at high capacities In order to
investigate the problem it was decided that performance testing of the chutes
should be carried out The purpose of these tests was to monitor chute
performance at transfer rates of up to the design capacity of 10 000 tlh for
various grades of iron ore handled by the facility Some of the methodologies
used in testing are only applicable to this specific facility
Due to variations and surges associated with the reclaim operations at the
facility performance testing focused on reclaim side chutes This means that all
the transfer points at the exit points of the stockyard conveyors were tested
Nineteen tests were conducted on various stockyard transfers Information such
as the specific facility or conveyor numbers cannot be disclosed due to the
confidentiality of information
To analyse SCADA data the stacker reclaimer scale is used to determine the
peak surges passing through the transfer under investigation The reason for
this is that the peaks in flow due to reclaiming operations flatten out when
passing through the transfer points This is due to chute throat limitations and
small variations in belt speeds If the down stream scales are used it would give
an inaccurate indication of the amount of ore that passed through the transfer
chute
32 TEST METHODOLOGY
A CCTV camera was installed in a strategic position inside the head chute of the
stockyard conveyors These cameras provided valuable information on the
physical behaviour of the material flow inside the transfer chutes Where
possible cameras were also placed on the receiving belt in front of and behind
The optimisation of transfer chutes in the bulk materials industry
MN van Aarde
40
CHAPTER 3
the chute This was done to monitor belt tracking and spillage A high frequency
radio link between the head chute and the control tower made it possible to
monitor the cameras at all times
SCADA data was used to determine and establish the condition of the material
transfer at the time of the test Data from various scales en route were obtained
as well as confirmation of blocked chute signals In analysing the SCADA data
the stacker reclaimer scale is used to determine the peak surges passing through
the transfer being tested
Data was recorded from a sampling plant at the facility This data provides the
actual characteristics of representative samples taken and analysed by the
sampling plant during the duration of the test The data gathered consist of
moisture content of the material sample as well as the size distribution of the ore
Where possible an inspector was placed at the transfer point being tested to
observe and record the performance The inspector had a two way radio for
communication with the test co-ordinator in the central control room He would
also be responsible for the monitoring of any spillage dust emissions etc that
may not be picked up by the cameras
Prior to commencing a test on a specific conveyor route the following checks
had to be performed on all the material conveying equipment
bull Clean out all transfer chutes and remove any material build-up from the
sidewalls
bull Check that feed skirts are properly in position on the belt
bull Check that the conveyor belt is tracking properly at no load
bull Check conveyor idlers are all in position and free to rotate
bull Check blocked chute detectors are operational and in the correct location
The optimisation of transfer chutes in the bulk materials industry
MN van Aarde
CHAPTER 3
bull Change the position of the blocked chute detector if required to improve its
fUnction
bull Test and confirm that the CCTV middotsystems are functioning correctly
bull Assign persons with 2 way radios and cameras to monitor and record the I
results at each transfer point on the route
33 CHUTE PERFORMANCE ACCEPTANCE CRITERIA
A material transfer chute performs to specification if it transfers a maximum of
10 000 tlh of a specific iron are grade without experiencing any of the following
problems
bull Material build up inside the chute or blocking the chute ie material is not
exiting the chute at the same rate as it is entering
bull Material spillage encountered from the top of the transfer chute
bull Material spillage encountered where material is loaded onto the receiving
conveyor
bull Belt tracking of the receiving conveyor is significantly displaced by the
loading of material from the transfer chute onto the conveyor
Tests were conducted over a period of one month and in such a short period
visible wear is difficult to quantify Due to the sensitivity of the information no
historical data in terms of chute or belt wear were made available by the facility
Therefore it is not part of the criteria for these specific tests Should a chute
however fail to perform according to the set criteria it validates the need for
modifications or new designs
34 DISCUSSION OF PROBLEM AREAS
The major concern during the test work is material flow at the transfer points
Secondary concerns are spillage tracking of the receiving belt and material
The optimisation of transfer chutes in the bulk materials industry
MN van Aarde
42
CHAPTER 3
loading onto the receiving belt One of the external factors that playa significant
role in material flow rate is the method and process of reclaiming This section
will highlight all the problem areas observed during the test work
Figure 25 shows the layout of the stockyard area This layout will serve as a
reference when the specific test results at each transfer point are discussed The
legends for Figure 25 are as follows
c=gt Transfer points where performance tests have been done
~ Direction that the conveyors are moving in
CV4 CV3 CV2 CV1
Figure 25 Layout of conveyors for chute test work
All four stockyard conveyors have a moving head arrangement This means that
the chutes are split up into two sections A moving head discharges material
onto either conveyor (CV) 5 or CV 6 via a static transfer chute The moving
head positions are shown by A Band C in Figure 25
The optimisation of transfer chutes in the bulk materials industry
MN van Aarde
43
CHAPTER 3
Position C is the purging or dump position This position is used when the
stacker reclaimer is in stacking mode and any material left on the stockyard
conveyor gets dumped The material does not end up on the stockpiles
preventing contamination
90 de-g TRANSFBt
OfAO BOX IN MOVING HEAD
Figure 26 Configuration of the existing transfer chute
Figure 26 shows the configuration of the existing transfer chutes These chutes
capture the trajectory from the head pulley in a dead box situated in the top part
of the chute The material then cascades down a series of smaller dead boxes
onto the receiving conveyor below
Various grades of iron ore were tested during the testing period These different
grades of iron ore are shown in Table 2 Three fine grades and four coarse
grades were used The coarse material is defined as particles with a diameter of
The optimisation of transfer chutes in the bulk materials industry
MN van Aarde
44
CHAPTER 3
between 12 mm and 34 mm and the fine material with diameters of between
4 mm and 12 mm
Table 2 Iron are grades used for chute test work
Material Predominant Lump Size
Fine K 5mm
Fine N 8mm
Fine A 8mm
Coarse K 25mm
Coarse D 34mm
Coarse S 12 mm
Coarse A 20mm
The CCTV cameras were placed inside the moving head pointing down into the
static chute overlooking the receiving conveyor Figure 27 shows the camera
angle used during testing This is a view of a clear chute before testing The
legends for clarification of all the video images are as follows
Front of the chute throat opening
Top of flowing material at the chute throat opening
Flow pattern of the material
Direction of the receiving belt
The optimisation of transfer chutes in the bulk materials industry
MN van Aarde
45
CHAPTER 3
Figure 27 Clear chute indicating camera angle
341 Coarse Material vs Fine Material
Differences in transfer rates between coarse material and fine material are
evident from the data gathered during the test programme These results are
discussed later in this chapter The area between the yellow arrows and the red
line is the amount of freeboard available Freeboard is the open space available
between the top of the flowing stream of material and the chute plate work
Figure 28 and Figure 29 shows the flow of coarse ore and fine ore respectively in
the same chute at 8 000 tlh
Figure 28 Coarse material at 8 000 tlh
The optimisation of transfer chutes in the bulk materials industry
MN van Aarde
46
CHAPTER 3
Figure 29 Fine material at 8 000 tlh
The amount of freeboard with fine material is much larger than with coarse
material It is therefore obvious that coarse material is more likely to block a
chute when peak surges occur This is due to particles that interlock in the small
discharge opening of the chute
Figure 30 Blocked chute with coarse material at 8 600 tIh
Figure 30 is a snap shot of a chute blocked with coarse ore due to the material
interlocking at the discharge opening The time from material free flowing to a
blocked chute signal was approximately 10 seconds This is determined by
comparing the CCTV camera time to the blocked signal time on the SCADA
The optimisation of transfer chutes in the bulk materials industry
MN van Aarde
47
CHAPTER 3
The high clay content in finer material can also cause problems in the long run
When wet Anes are fed through the chutes a thin layer of Anes builds up and
sticks to the sides of the chute As this layer dries out it forms a new chute liner i
and the next layer builds up This process occurs gradually and will eventually
cause the chute to block
342 Cross Sectional Area
Video images of a blocked chute on the receiving belts were analysed to
determine whether the blockage was caused by material build up on the belt
underneath the chute This indicated that with the occurrence of a blocked chute
the material keeps flowing out of the chute at a constant rate without build up
From this the assumption can be made that in the case of a blocked chute the
material enters the chute at a higher rate than it is discharged at the bottom
Therefore the conclusion can be made that the chute cross sectional area at the
discharge is insufficient to handle the volume of ore at high throughput rates
Tests with a certain type of coarse material yielded a very low flow rate requiring
adjustment to the chute choke plate on the transfer between CV 3 and CV 5
The chute choke plate is basically a sliding door at the bottom of the chute to
adjust the discharge flow of material Tests with another type of coarse material
shown in the summary of test results indicates how the choke plate adjustment
can increase the throughput of material in the chute
Data of all the different types of ore at the facility are obtained at the sampling
building This data shows that the material size distribution for the two types of
coarse material used in the tests mentioned above are the same This indicates
that the test results with the second coarse material are an accurate reflection of
what will be experienced with the first type of coarse material Special care
The optimisation of transfer chutes in the bulk materials industry
MN van Aarde
48
CHAPTER 3
should be taken when adjusting the choke plate to make sure that skew loading
is not induced by the modification
343 Spillag3
During one of the first tests on the transfer between CV 2 and CV 6 spillage
was observed at one of the side skirts on the receiving belt A piece of the side
skirt had been damaged and pushed off the belt as shown by Figure 31 This
caused some of the material to be pushed off the belt when skew loading from
the chute caused the belt to miss track In this case spillage was not caused by
the skirt but by skew loading from the chute onto the receiving conveyor
Figure 31 Damaged side skirt
A greater concern is spillage on the moving head chute of CV 3 and CV 4
loading onto CV 6 It appears as if the head chute creeps during material
transfer onto CV 6 As the chute creeps the horizontal gap between the
moving head chute and the transfer chute reaches approximately 180 mm
Facility operations proposed a temporary solution by moving the head chute to
the dumping or purging position and back to CV 5 before stopping over CV 6
The reason for this creep could be attributed to slack in the moving head winch
cable
The optimisation of transfer chutes in the bulk materials industry
MN van Aarde
49
CHAPTER 3
345 Belt Tracking and Material Loading
The only belt tracking and material loading problems observed occurred on the
transfer between CV 2 and CV 5 I CV 6 A diverter plate was installed at the
bottom of the chute in order to force material flow onto the centre of the receiving conveyor belt This plate now causes material to fall to the left of the receiving
belt causing the belt to track to the right
Figure 32 View behind the chute of the receiving conveyor before loading
Figure 32 shows the view from a CCTV camera placed over the receiving
conveyor behind the chute Note the amount of the idler roller that is visible
before loading
Figure 33 View behind the chute of the receiving conveyor during loading
The optimisation of transfer chutes in the bulk materials industry
MN van Aarde
50
CHAPTER 3
Figure 33 shows the view from a CCTV camera placed over the receiving
conveyor behind the chute during loading Note the difference between the
amount of the idler roller that is visible between Figure 33 and Figure 32 This is
a clear indication of off centre belt tracking due to skew loading I
At the same transfer point it appears as if the configuration of the chute causes
the material to be dropped directly onto the receiving belt from the dead box in
the moving head This will cause high impact wear on the belt in the long run
High maintenance frequencies will be required on the impact rollers underneath
the chute and the roller bearings will have to be replaced frequently
346 Reclaiming Operations
Reclaim operations are done from the stacker reclaimer that scoops up the
material with a bucket wheel from the stockpile The machine starts at the top
bench of the stockpile and reclaims sideways until it is through the stockpile
This sideways movement is repeated while the machine moves down the
stockpile If the machine digs too deep into the stockpile small avalanches can
occur that over fill the buckets This causes peak surges in the flow on the
conveyor system
With an increase in the peak digging or reclaim rate as requested for test work it
seemed that the peak surges increased as well In normal reclaiming operations
(average reclaim rate of 6 000 tlh to 7000 tlh) the peaks in reclaim surges do not
usually exceed 1 000 tlh This is however dependent on the level of the
stockpile from where the machine is reclaiming
At a peak digging or reclaim rate of 8 000 tlh peak surges of up to 2 000 tlh were
observed as can be seen from Figure 34 All stacker reclaimers are operated
manually and the depth of the bucket wheel is determined by monitoring the
The optimisation of transfer chutes in the bulk materials industry
MN van Aarde
51
CHAPTER 3
reclaimer boom scale reading (yellow line) This makes it difficult to reclaim at a
constant rate
The reason for the high peak surges is due to avalanches on the stockpile
caused by reclaiming on the lower benches without first taking away the top
material The blue line in Figure 34 represents a conveyor scale reading after
the material has passed through a series of transfer chutes It is clear that the
peaks tend to dissipate over time as the peaks on the blue line are lower and
smoother than that on the yellow line
IlmJ
bull I _ bull It bull bull bull bull
--ErI--E--~---h--E=+[J]--EiE ~ J~~~ middot middot -~L I-~f~1-1shyt~=tt~~J~~v5 i ~ ~ ~ ~ ~ i ~ 1 ~ ~ ~ s ~ ------ ~-- - ------ - _ - -------- -- -- - _---- -- -r - --- -_shyp
C)
~ 1r =r=l[=1 -It-1 -- -~ -t= --shy~ _middotmiddot -r middotr middot middot [middot _r _ _ r- middotmiddot rmiddot middotmiddot -r- rmiddot-- middot- middotmiddot -rmiddot -r-middotmiddot middotr lXgtO middotmiddotmiddotmiddotmiddotmiddotmiddotmiddot[middotmiddotmiddotmiddotmiddotmiddotmiddotlmiddotmiddotmiddotmiddotmiddotmiddotlmiddotmiddotmiddotmiddotmiddotmiddotmiddotmiddotimiddotmiddotmiddotmiddotmiddotmiddotmiddotmiddotr-middotmiddotmiddotmiddot j middotmiddot1middotmiddotmiddotmiddotmiddot1middotmiddotmiddotmiddotmiddotmiddotmiddot1middotmiddotmiddotmiddotmiddot middotlmiddotmiddotmiddotmiddottmiddotmiddotmiddotmiddotmiddotmiddotmiddotjmiddot I~ [ bullbullbullbullbullbullbull [ bullbullbull middotmiddotmiddot1middotmiddotmiddotmiddotmiddotmiddot1middotmiddotmiddotmiddotmiddotmiddotmiddotmiddot1middotmiddotmiddotmiddotmiddotmiddotmiddotmiddot middotmiddotmiddotmiddotmiddotmiddotmiddotmiddoti~middotmiddotmiddotmiddotmiddotmiddotmiddotmiddottmiddotmiddotmiddotmiddotmiddotmiddotmiddotrmiddotmiddotmiddot middotrmiddotmiddotmiddotmiddotmiddotmiddot~middotmiddotmiddotmiddotmiddotmiddotmiddotmiddot1middotmiddotmiddotmiddotmiddotmiddotmiddotmiddotimiddotmiddotmiddot
t) cent
~ i i l i i i i i i i it ~ 8 ~ ~ S l i
~~ Ii ~ ~ g i i ~ 4 1 J yen i
s a e 11 JI as $ $ ~ IS IS e It
Time
-Con~SCO=-E___S~ SCALE
Figure 34 Peak surges experienced during reclaiming operations
347 Other Problem Areas
Some blockages on other chutes at the facility occurred while testing the
stockyard chutes These blockages are also shown in Table 3 where the test
The optimisation of transfer chutes in the bulk materials industry
MN van Aarde
52
CHAPTER 3
results are discussed and to raise awareness that the bottlenecks on site are not
only caused by problems on the tested chutes
A chute downstream from the stockyards encountered a blockage with fine I
material when the flow rate reached 11 OOb tfh Although this is higher than the
test maximum of 10 000 tfh it still raises concern as to why the chute blocked so
severely that it took approximately two hours to clear
Another bottleneck is the transfer point between the feed conveyor of CV 2 and
the discharge chute on CV 2 This transfer point blocked with fine material at a
peak just below 10 000 tfh It should be even worse with coarse are as
previously discussed Due to the configuration of the head chute spillage of
scraper dribblings is also of great concern The main stream of material
interferes with the flow path of the dribbling material Therefore the carry back
scraped off the bottom of the feeding belt cannot i~ow down the chute and is
pushed over the sides of the chute
The optimisation of transfer chutes in the bulk maferias industry
MN van Aarde
53
CHAPTER 3
35 SUMMARY OF TEST RESULTS
Table 3 Results from test programme
Transfer Point Material Tested Test No Peak Capacity Blocked Chute
CV11 CV5 Yes
Fines N 14 10000 tlh No
Fines N 15 10000tlh No
CV 11 CV6 Coarse K 20 9300 tlh No
Fines K 4 10600tlh No
Fines A 19 9633 tlh No
CV31 CV5 Yes
Yes
Yes
Coarse A 17 9427 tlh No
CV31 CV6 Coarse K 7 10195t1h Yes
Coarse K 8 11 000 tlh Yes
CV41 CV5 Coarse A 16 10307 tlh No
No (Mech trip on
CV4CV6 Fines K 10 10815 tlh downstream conveyor)
Coarse K 11 8000 tlh No
Fines A 18 10328 tlh No
No (Feed to CV 2
CV21 CV5 Fines N 13 10 000 tlh blocked)
CV21 Coarse K 1 amp 2 10 153 tlh No
No (Blocked chute on
Fines K 3 11 000 tlh downstream transfer)
The optimisation of transfer chutes in the bulk materials industry
MN van Aarde
54
CHAPTER 3
Table 3 shows the results obtained from all the tests on the stockyard conveyor
discharge chutes Where possible the same material grade was tested more
than once on the same transfer in order to confirm the repetitiveness of the test
The tests shown in red indicate the transfers that blocked at a flow rate of less
than 10000 tlh
Coarse K and Coarse 0 are noted as the critical materials for blocked chutes
caused by a peak surge Tests with Coarse K and Coarse S where a blocked
chute occurred at just over 10 000 tlh can also be considered as failed tests
This is due to the lack of a safety margin freeboard inside the chute When
analysing the video images a build up can be seen at a flow rate of less than
10000 tlh
Table 3 indicates that the fine material did not cause blocked chutes but it was
seen that it did fill up the chute throat area in some cases Although the coarse
material grades are shown as being least suitable for high flow rates the fine
material should not be underestimated for its ability to cause blockages The
finer materials normally have higher clay contents than the coarse grades and
therefore stick to the chute walls more easily_
36 CONCLUSION
At lower capacities (7 000 tlh to 8 000 tlh) the material appear to flow smoothly
inside the chutes without surging or building up in the chute This flow rate
normally does not cause spillage or skew loading on the receiving conveyor belt
On average as the flow rate approaches 9 000 tlh the material in the chute
throat area starts packing together and finally blocks up the chute
At transfer rates greater than 9 000 tlh the available area inside the chutes is
completely filled up This causes material to build up or surge inside the chute
which eventually results in the chute choking and the inlet flow becomes greater
The optimisation of transfer chutes in the bulk materials industry
MN van Aarde
55
CHAPTER 3
than the outlet flow Depending on the volume of the chute the choked state can
only be maintained for a certain period of time If the inlet flow does not
decrease it will cause a blocked chute
Peak surges of up to 10 000 tfh were recorded in most tests which involved a
material surge inside the chute but without the occurrence of a blocked chute trip
Although no blocked chute signal was given in these cases the ability of the
chutes to transfer continuously at flow rates of between 9 000 tfh and 10 000 tfh
is not very reliable
Continuous transfer at flow rates approaching 9 000 tfh seems attainable in most
cases but due to the limited freeboard available in the chute throat area the
chutes will easily become prone to blocking Due to the high peak surges at an
increased maximum reclaim rate the amount of freeboard is critical If the
design criteria of the chute were intended to accommodate these large surges
then all the chutes failed this test This can be attributed to the fact that no
freeboard is left at a maximum reclaim rate of 9 000 tfh
With the background available from the test programme it is clear that further
investigation is required to obtain a solution to these problems All the
information gathered can be integrated and utilised to provide a solution A
possible solution can then be tested against the problems found with the current
transfer chutes
The optimisation of transfer chutes in the bulk materials industry
MN van Aarde
56
CHAPTER 4
CHAPTER 4 DYNAMIC CHUTES FOR THE ELIMINATION OF
RECURRING PROBLEMS
The optimisation of transfer chutes in the bulk materials industry
MN van Aarde
57
CHAPTER 4
41 PREFACE
After completion of the chute test programme the decision was made to improve
the old transfer configuration by installing a dynamic chute The reason for the
dynamic chute is to increase the material speed and decrease the stream cross
sectional area The dead boxes in the older chute slowed the material down and
the restriction on transfer height resulted in the material not being able to gain
enough speed after impacting on the dead boxes
A dynamic chute configuration is investigated in this chapter As the new chute
is fitted within the existing steelwork there are certain constraints that determine
the new configuration All the constraints and limitations discussed in this section
are specific to the facility under discussion
The new chute design basically consists of a hood and spoon which retains the
kinetic energy in the material stream as it is transferred from one conveyor to the
other This will reduce the creation of dust in the chute and help to discharge the
material at a velocity closer to that of the receiving conveyor The new design
does however experience high wear which was not a problem with the old chutes
due to large dead boxes
In order to fit the optimum design of a dynamic chute within the existing structure
some changes are required to the positioning of the feed conveyor head pulley
These changes are necessary to accommodate the discharge trajectory from the
feeding conveyor
The radii of the hood and spoon are specified in such a way that the impact wear
is reduced significantly In addition both the hood and spoon are fitted with a
removable dead box section in the impact zones The incorporation of these
sections makes this chute revolutionary in the sense of ease of maintenance
The optimisation of transfer chutes in the bulk materials industry
MN van Aarde
58
CHAPTER 4
This new chute addresses all problems identified at the facility and aims to
eliminate most of them
Tests were carried out to identify worst case materials for flow and wear
Different liner materials were tested for both flow and wear conditions The
outcome of these tests is used as the basis for the design of a new chute As
different conditions for flow and wear inside the chute exist different liners are
investigated for each section inside the chute
42 CONSIDERATION OF THE EXISTING TRANSFER POINT CONSTRAINTS
The stockyard consists of four stacker reclaimers and several transfer points
feeding onto the two downstream conveyors resulting in a very intricate system
This system has numerous requirements which need to be addressed when
considering a new transfer chute configuration The transfers under discussion
are situated at the head end of the stockyard conveyors
MOV1NG HEAD OER MOvm poundAD OVER CVI6 CVIS
t4CLIE SECTION
PURGING POSmON
Figure 35 Stockyard head end layout
The design of a new transfer chute configuration is restricted to a certain extent
by the existing structures on site Figure 35 provides an overall view of the
existing steelwork at the head end of the stockyard conveyor This existing steel
structure can be modified to suit a new configuration but does have some fixed
The optimisation of transfer chutes in the bulk materials industry
MN van Aarde
59
CHAPTER 4
constraints A good example of these constraints is the transfer height between
the stockyard conveyor and the downstream conveyors CV 5 and 6
On both sides of the stockyard conveyor stockpiles of ore can be reclaimed and
deposited onto the conveyor This facility allows a certain travel for the stacker
reclaimer along the stockyard conveyor for the stacking and reclaiming of
material The most forward position of the stacker reclaimer is at the beginning
of the incline section of the stockyard conveyor As previously explained any
curvature in a conveyor requires a certain minimum radius When the transfer
height is raised the radius constraints on that curvature in the stockyard
conveyor will reduce stockyard space This means that the storage capacity at
the facility will be greatly diminished
I ~
j
Figure 36 Dimensional constraints on the existing transfer configuration
The ideal is to stay within the eXisting critical dimensions as shown in Figure 36
As functionality of the chute dictates the chute configuration these dimensions
can be modified within certain constraints These critical dimensions on the
existing configuration are
The optimisation of transfer chutes in the bulk materials industry
MN van Aarde
60
CHAPTER 4
bull Centre of receiving belt to centre of the head pulley 800 mm
bull Bottom of receiving belt to top of the head pulley 4048 mm
The head pulley can however be moved back a certain amount before it
becomes necessary to change the entire incline section of the stockyard
conveyor As the moving head moves forward and backward there are idler cars
trailing behind the moving head carriage as shown in Figure 35 The purpose of
these idler cars is to support the belt when the moving head is feeding onto
CV 6 or when it is standing in the purging position
43 DESIGN OF THE CHUTE PROFILE
431 Design Methodology
Proven standard methods for the functional design of the chute are used These
hand calculation methods are based on the Conveyor Equipment Manufacturers
Association (CEMA) standard as well as papers from Prof AW Roberts These
are typically calculations for determining the discharge trajectory optimal radius
of the hood and spoon as well as the velocity of material passing through the
chute
In addition to standard methods of carrying out conceptual flow design it is
supplemented by the use of Discrete Element Modelling (OEM) simulation
software This is done to visualise the flow of material through the chute
Results from standard calculation methods are compared to the outputs of the
OEM simulations to confirm both results Chapter 5 will focus on the use of
Discrete Element Modelling for the design and verification of chute concepts
The optimisation of transfer chutes in the bulk materials industry
MN van Aarde
61
CHAPTER 4 -__-----__---_----------shy
432 Design Development
Figure 37 shows the concept of the hood and spoon chute for a 90deg transfer as
required by the facility layout The decision to opt for a hood and spoon chute is
based on trying to retain the material velocity when transferring material from the
feeding conveyor to the receiving conveyors Retention of material velocity is
critical as the transfer height is restricted The overall facility constraints for
design are as follows
bull Feeding belt speed - 45 ms
bull Receiving belt speed - 45 ms
bull Transfer height - 401 m
bull Belt widths -1650 mm
bull Maximum material throughput -10000 tlh
As this is a retrofit of an existing facility some of the facility constraints cannot be
changed This forms part of the design development as it steers the design in a
certain direction Due to the fact that the transfer height cannot be changed the
chute profile will be dependent on the transfer height restriction
The optimisation of transfer chutes in the bulk matefials industry
MN van Aarde
62
CHAPTER 4
START-UP CHrrlE
DRlBBIlNG CHUTE
Figure 37 Hood and spoon configuration for the 90 transfer
The optimum solution for the correct chute profile in this situation would be to
move the head pulley back far enough This should be done so that the hood
can receive the material trajectory at a small impact angle and still discharge
centrally onto the spoon However the head pulley can only be moved back a
certain amount Any further movement will require changes to the structure of
the feeding conveyor incline section
As the stockyard conveyors feed onto two receiving conveyors the head pulley
of the stockyard conveyors is situated on a moving head rail car This enables
the conveyor to discharge either on CV 5 or CV 6 as shown in Figure 25
Taking the movement of the head pulley into account the moving head rail car
can be shortened by 1000 mm in order to move the head pulley back As stated
in the preface all changes are distinctive to this facility alone However it is
important to be aware of the consequences of every modification
The optimisation of transfer chutes in the bulk materials industry
MN van Aarde
63
CHAPTER 4 -__----- ------shy
433 Determination of the Profile
An important of the hood and spoon design is to ensure a
discharge from the hood onto the centre of the spoon The is
determined using equation (1) in section 24 Although various material
are transferred it does not have a significant effect on the calculated trajectory
the bulk properties of the materials are very similar It is however important
to the material which will transferred obtain the flow angles and wear
This information the will be
the Liner selection for this case study is discussed in Appendix A
After the trajectory has been determined the hood radius can determined by
using equation (2) As head pulley can move 1 000 mm backward the
possible hood radius was determined to 2 577 mm This hood radius is
VIU(I(1 to produce the wear on the zone in chute
The impact angle at this radius is 11 which is less than the maximum
allowable limit of 20
The hood radius is chosen to as close as possible to radius of curvature of
the material trajectory The point where the hood radius and the trajectory radius
cross is known as the impact point In to determine the velocity
point in hood the at is required on the
hood from the horizontal where the material impacts and to slide down the
hood surface
In this case the position impact hood is at 558r from the horizontal
In to determine the velocity this angle e is used as starting
point in (3) obtain a complete velocity profile angle from where
the material impacts hood is decreased in increments 5 up to the
discharge point which is normally 0
The optimisation chutes in the bulk materials industry
MN van Aarde
64
-----
CHAPTER 4
Hood Velocity Profile
70
--- --~ 6 0
5 0
40 ~_
~ 30 g --- a 20 gt
10
00
60 50 40 30 20 10 o Theta (Position inside the hood)
Figure 38 Hood velocity profile
The spoon radius is determined in such a way that the wear at the point of impact
is kept to a minimum At the same time the horizontal component of the material
exit velocity is as close as possible to the receiving belt speed Firstly the
assumption is made that the initial velocity of material in the spoon is equal to the
exit velocity of material from the hood This yields a spoon entry velocity of
633 ms and can also be seen from Figure 38
By reiterating various radii for the spoon the optimum exit velocity Ve can be
obtained These radii are selected according to the available space in which the
spoon must fit and also to produce the smallest impact angle for material
discharging from the hood This table is set up to display the different exit
velocities at various spoon radii The exit velocity is also dependent on the exit
angle which is determined by the length of the spoon arc In this case the spoon
radius is chosen as 3 575 mm An exit angle of 38deg from the horizontal yields an
exit velocity closer to the receiving belt speed
The optimisation of transfer chutes in the bulk materials industry
MN van Aarde
65
CHAPTER 4
Spoon Velocity Profile
67
66
65
S 64 amp0 g 6 3
V
v-shy ~ ~
ii ~ gt 62
61 I I 60
o 10 20 30 40 50 60
Theta (position inside the spoon)
Figure 39 Spoon velocity profile
Taken from the origin of the spoon radius the material position in the spoon at
discharge is sr The selection of this angle is guided by the geometry of the
chute and surrounding structures This angle is then used to calculate the exit
velocity as shown in Figure 39 At this point the discharge angle relative to the
conveyor angle is 38deg Ve is then determined to be 6087 ms with a velocity
component of 479 ms in the direction of the belt This value is 618 higher
than the belt speed of 4S ms which is acceptable as it is within the allowable
10 range of variation Minimal spillage and reduced wear on the receiving
conveyor is expected
Both the hood and spoon have a converged profile This is done in order to
minimise spillage and ensure a smooth transfer of material from the hood to the
spoon and from the spoon to the receiving conveyor The converged profile
starts out wide to capture any stray particles and converges to bring the material
particles closer together at the discharge This profile does not influence the
transfer rate of the chute as the stream of material through the chute is no more
The optimisation of transfer chutes in the bulk materials industry
MN van Aarde
66
CHAPTER 4
compact than the material on the conveyor belt before and after the transfer
chute
44 INCORPORATING ADEAD BOX IN THE IMPACT AREAS
In chapter 1 reference is made to a chute design utilising pipe sections with a
rounded profile The flat back plate is chosen instead of a rounded pipe type
section to house the honeycomb dead box configuration It would be possible to
fit the honeycomb into a rounded back section but manufacturing and
maintenance would be unnecessarily difficult and expensive
Furthermore the cross section profile of the chute shows three sliding surfaces
as shown in These surfaces consist of the back plate two vertical side plates
and two diagonal plates This is done in order to increase the angle between
adjoining plates so that the probability of material hanging up in the corners is
reduced This helps to alleviate the risk of experiencing blocked chutes
Figure 40 Chute cross section
The optimisation of transfer chutes in the bulk materials industry
M N van Aarde
67
CHAPTER 4
441 Honeycomb Wear Box in the Hood
A honeycomb or wear box is incorporated into this chute configuration in order to
further minimise wear in the hood and spoon The honeycomb configuration is
clearly shown in and is typical for both the hood and spoon Reduced wear will I
be achieved as impact and sliding will take place on the basis of material on
material flow Ore is captured inside the honeycomb pockets which protects the
ceramic lining in the section of the honeycomb and creates another sliding face
made of the material being transferred The ribs in the wear box do not protrude
from the sliding face of the chute and therefore do not interfere with the main
stream flow of material
Positioning of the honeycomb is critical as the point of impact on the hood needs
to be on the honeycomb This is required in order to assure that the highest
material impact is absorbed by a layer of static material inside the honeycomb
and not the chute liners All the basic steps for designing a normal hood and
spoon chute are followed Firstly the angle at impact (8e) is calculated to
determine where the trajectory of material will cross the radius of the hood This
shows the position of the impact point on the hood Figure 20 indicates where 8e
is calculated As previously stated the angle at impact for this situation is
558r This is calculated using [33]
e = tan- I ( 1 ) (5)
C Ii
And y is defined by equation 1
This gives an indication as to where the honeycomb should be situated in order
to capture the material impacting the hood fully A flow simulation package can
also be used to determine the position of this honeycomb structure shows an
opening for the honeycomb which starts at 40deg clockwise from the vertical This
The optimisation of transfer chutes in the bulk materials industry 68
MN van Aarde
CHAPTER 4
means that there are almost 16deg of free space in the honeycomb to ensure that
the material will always impact inside the wear box
There is no set specification as to the size of this free space This is just to
accommodate any surges of mat~rial on the feeding conveyor As discussed in
Chapter 3 due to avalanches while reclaiming from the stockpiles material
surges on the conveyors is a reality
Figure 41 Honeycomb wear box positioning
illustrates exactly where this wear box is situated on the back plate of the hood
This configuration is very similar to that of the spoon as both wear boxes only
cover the width of the flat back plate of the hood and spoon The reason for this
is that most of the material impact and mainstream flow strikes the back plate
The optimisation of transfer chutes in the bulk materials industry
MN van Aarde
69
CHAPTER 4
WEAR BOX
Figure 42 Wear box in the hood section
All the horizontal ribs of the honeycomb are spaced 5deg apart and there are 5
vertical ribs following the converging contour of the hood as shown in Spacing
of the ribs depends largely on the maximum lump size handled by the transfer
In this case the largest lumps are approximately 34 mm in diameter The idea is
to get as many dead boxes into the honeycomb as possible These small
cavities should however be large enough to capture a substantial amount of ore
inside
The optimisation of transfer chutes in the bulk materials industry
MN van Aarde
70
CHAPTER 4 ----_----------------shy
Figure 43 Spacing arrangement of honeycomb ribs inside the hood
The two vertical liners on the edges of the honeycomb are only 65 mm high while
the rest of the vertical liners are 120 mm high This is done so that the flat liners
in the chute surface can overlap the edge liners of the honeycomb An open
groove between the tiles along the flow of material would cause the liners to be
worn through much faster than in normal sliding abrasion conditions Due to the
high wear characteristics of the ore all openings between tiles should be kept out
of the mainstream flow
All the ribs in the honeycomb are 50 mm thick and vary in depth The vertical
ribs protrude the horizontal ribs by 30 mm in order to channel the flow These
vertical ribs are all flush with the surrounding tiles on the flat sliding surface of the
hood All the pockets of the wear box are 120 mm deep measured from the top
of the vertical ribs Again dimension is dependent on the maximum lump size
handled by the transfer There are no specifications as to the relation between
the pocket size and the lump size These dimensions were chosen to be
approximately 4 times the lump size Computer simulations can be used to test
the feasibility of this concept while commissioning of the equipment will ultimately
show whether this method works
The optimisation of transfer chutes in the bulk materials industry
MN van Aarde
71
CHAPTER 4 ------------_ -- - ---------------shy
442 Honeycomb wear box in the spoon
The honeycomb wear box in the spoon has the same configuration as in the
hood It also covers the entire width of the back plate and fully accommodates
the material impacting on the spoon from the hood The entire spoon is broken
up into three sections and the honeycomb wear box is situated in the back
section as shown in
Figure 44 Wear box in the spoon section
With almost the same configuration as the hood the spoon also has a corner
liner to ensure a continuous lined face between the flat surface liners and the
honeycomb ribs The detail of these liners and ribs are shown in A 90deg transfer
with a hood and spoon chute means that the stream received by the spoon is
narrower and longer than the stream received by the hood This is caused when
the material takes the shape of the hood before it is discharged into the spoon
The converged configuration causes the stream to flatten against the sliding
surface in the chute
The optimisation of transfer chutes in the bulk materials industry
MN van Aarde
72
CHAPTER 4
Due to the spoon honeycomb being a bit narrower than the hood there are only
three vertical ribs The number of ribs had to be reduced to be able to
accommodate the preferred cavity size of the honeycomb boxes These ribs now
form two channels in which the stream of material can be directed
Figure 45 Liner detail of the spoon honeycomb wear box
As shown in there is a 3 mm gap between the honeycomb section and the chute
plate work This is to ensure that the honeycomb section can be easily removed
for maintenance on the liners All the edges of the liners have rounded corners
to reduce stress concentrations which can cause rapid liner failure
45 DESIGNING THE CHUTE FOR INTEGRATION WITH SYSTEM REQUIREMENTS
The arc length of the spoon back plate is longer and closer to the belt in order to
ensure a smooth transfer of material from the chute to the receiving conveyor A
small gap of 75 mm is left between the bottom of the spoon and the receiving
conveyor Due to the fact that material can also be fed from another upstream
The optimisation of transfer chutes in the bulk materials industry
MN van Aarde
73
CHAPTER 4
stockyard conveyor this configuration will not be suitable This means that the
gap of 75 mm is not enough to allow material to pass underneath the chute
To accommodate this situation the spoon is split into different sections where the
bottom section lifts up to make room for material from behind In the raised
position the gap between the chute and the belt is 450 mm When the lower belt
is loaded to full capacity the material height is 380 mm This means that the
clearance to the belt in the non operational position is sufficient and show the
operational and non operational positions of the spoon
T -t t----~r_-+-wtIY1shy
Figure 46 Spoon in the operational position
The optimisation of transfer chutes in the bulk materials industry
MN van Aarde
74
CHAPTER 4
Figure 47 Spoon in the non operational position
This section is a discussion on how this new transfer chute configuration should
be operated in order to comply with the facility requirements The bottom section
of the chute can be lifted out of the way of material from behind on the receiving
conveyor Therefore a control philosophy is required for this movement
Referring to Figure 25 positions A and B indicate where these new chutes will be
installed As previously stated position C is the purging or dump position and
show the actuated spoon section in the operating and non operating positions
The conditions for these positions are explained as follows
46 CONCLUSION
With the consideration of all the facility constraints and a conceptual idea of what
the transfer configuration should look like the design can be optimised When
the feeding belt velocity is known the material trajectory and optimum chute
radius can be determined This radius and the radius of the spoon must then be
corrected to comply with the facility constraints but still deliver the required
material transfer rate
The optimisation of transfer chutes in the bulk materials industry
MN van Aarde
75
CHAPTER 4
With the high cost implications of regular maintenance intervals on chute liners
and facility downtime a honeycomb structure is incorporated into the high impact
areas The purpose of this honeycomb structure is to form small pockets similar
to dead boxes in order to promote material on material flow This increases the
lifetime of the chute liners and reduces maintenance intervals
This specific transfer chute splits up easily into separate sections and will help to
simplify maintenance The bottom section of the chute is actuated to move up
and down depending on whether the chute is in operation or not This will ensure
optimum transfer of material while in operation and provide sufficient clearance
when not in operation This is again guided by the facility requirements
In the design of all the transfer chute components the physical properties of the
ore should always be considered This determines the chute profile in terms of
flow angles and liner selection With maximum material flow ability high
resistance to sliding abrasion and reduced maintenance cost in mind 94
alumina ceramics is the liner of choice This is only in the main flow areas of the
chute For the dribbling chute a polyurethane liner is used to promote the flow of
this sticky material
The optimisation of transfer chutes in the bulk materials industry
MN van Aarde
76
CHAPTER 5
CHAPTER 5 TESTING AND VERIFICATION OF THE NEW SOLUTION
- middotSmiddotmiddotmiddotmiddotmiddotmiddotmiddotmiddotmiddot-middotl~Oi
The optimisation of transfer chutes in the bulk materials industry 77
MN van Aarde
CHAPTER 5
51 PREFACE
Although hand calculations have been a proven method of design for many
years it is important to verify any new chute concept before fabrication and
implementation Confirming the concept can save time and money as it reduces
the risk of on-site modifications Hand calculations only supply a two
dimensional solution to the problem which does not always provide accurate
material flow profiles
In recent years a few material flow simulation packages have been developed to
aid the design of material handling equipment The use of software packages
can be beneficial to the design process as it gives a three dimensional view of
the material behaviour in the chute This means that changes to the chute
concept can be made prior to fabrication
It is however important to verify that the solution obtained from the software
package is an accurate reflection of actual design model Therefore the material
being handled should be thoroughly tested to obtain the correct physical
properties required to obtain an accurate simulation result
The use of material flow simulation software does not replace the necessity for
hand calculations All the basic steps should still be done to derive a conceptual
chute configuration Material flow simulation software should be used as a
complimentary tool to analytical hand calculations in the design process
The optimisation of transfer chutes in thebulk materials industry
MN van Aarde
78
CHAPTER 5
52 SELECTING A TEST METHODOLOGY
Traditionally transfer chutes were designed by using basic analytical calculations
and relying on empirical data from past experiences with other chutes Mostly
these analytical methods only cater for the initial part of the chute such as the
parabolic discharge trajectory It is difficult to determine what happens to the
flow of material after it strikes the chute wall [34]
Two methods of verification were usually applied to evaluate a new transfer
chute configuration Trial and error can be used but obviously this is not desired
due to the high cost implications A second method is to build a small scale
model of the chute in which tests can be carried out before a final design can be
adopted This physical modelling is however time consuming and
expensive [34]
Granular or particulate materials are composed of a large number of loosely
packed individual particles or grains The flow of such granular materials forms
an intricate part of the materials handling industry Small reductions in energy
consumption or increases in production can have great financial advantages
Therefore significant efforts are put into improving the efficiency of these
facilities The important role of numerical simUlations is becoming more evident
in these optimisation procedures [35] Due to these efforts this technology is
becoming more powerful and is easy to use as a verification method for transfer
chute designs
The behaviour of bulk material particles is unique in the sense that it exhibits
some of the properties associated with the gaseous liquid and solid states of
matter The granular state of bulk materials cannot be characterised by anyone
of these states alone The research that captures the contact between individual
particles in an explicit manner is known as discrete element methods (OEM) [36]
The optimisation of transfer chutes in the bulk materials industry
MN van Aarde
79
CHAPTER 5
In basic terms OEM explicitly models the dynamic motion and mechanical
interactions of each body or particle as seen in the physical material flow It is
also possible to obtain a detailed description of the velocities position and force
acting on each particle at a discrete point during the analysis This is achieved
by focusing on the individual grain or body rather than focusing on the global
body as is the case with the finite element approach [36]
Figure 48 illustrates two examples of how this OEM software can be applied
Obviously the flow characteristics differ between the applications shown in Figure
48 This is however catered for by the mathematical simulation of each particle
collision
Figure 48 Flow analysis examples a) separation and screening b) hoppers feeders 36]
Continuous improvements in the performance of computing systems make OEM
a realistic tool for use in a wide range of process design and optimisation
applications During the last 20 years the capabilities of OEM have progressed
from small scale two dimensional simulations to much more complex 3D
applications The latest high performance desk top computers make it possible
to simulate systems containing large numbers of particles within a reasonable
time [37]
The optimisation of transfer chutes in the bulk materials industry
MN van Aarde
80
CHAPTER 5
According to the institute for conveyor technologies at the Otto-von-Guericke
University of Magdeburg in Germany using OEM for bulk solid handling
equipment provides [38]
bull A cost effective method of simulating the utility of materials handling
equipmentshy
bull Precise control over complicated problem zones eg transfer chutes
redirection stations and high wear areas
bull The possibility to integrate processes in one simulation such as mixing and
segregation
bull The possibility to involve the customer more extensively in the design
process
bull An advantage in the market due to attractive video sequences and pictures
of the simulation
bull The possibility to prevent facility damages and increase the efficiency of
conveyor systems extensively
As a good example of the advantages of the discrete element method the
University of Witwatersrand in Johannesburg did studies on rotary grinding mills
The university studies have shown that the OEM qualitatively predicts the load
motion of the mill very well The improved knowledge of the behaviour of mills
can therefore increase the profitability of mineral processing operations [39]
This material handling equipment is generally costly to operate and inefficient in
the utilisation of energy for breakage In order to understand the behaviour of
mills better the OEM method is increasingly being applied to the modelling of the
load behaviour of grinding mills These results indicate that this method can be
applied successfully in the bulk materials handling industry
The apUmisatian af transfer chutes in the bulk materials industry
MN van Aarde
81
CHAPTERS
Another example where this technology has been used with great success is with
the design of a new load out chute for the Immingham coal import terminal in
Britain By simulating the flow with a OEM package the designers were aided in
the fact that they were supplied with a quantitative description of the bulk solid
movement through the chute In the opinion of Professor Franz Kessler
(University of Leoben) the Discrete Element Method provides the engineer with
unique detailed information to assist in the design of transfer points [3]
These simulation packages are at the moment very expensive and not widely
used in transfer chute design It can be anticipated that the utilisation of these
packages will increase as the technology improves and the cost of the software
goes down [40] To get the best value out of the simulation it is important to
compare simulation packages and select the one most suitable to the complexity
of the design
Fluenttrade is a two dimensional computational fluid dynamics (CFD) software
package which can also be used as a chute design aid through the simulation of
material flow It must however be noted that this is not a OEM simulation
package This software package simulates the flow of material by considering
the material particles as a liquid substance The output of the simulation is the
same as can be seen in the example of Figure 49 The colours in the simulation
represent the average particle spacing [40] Due to the fact that this package
can at this stage only deliver two dimensional simulations it is considered
inadequate to perform detailed simulations on the intricate design piscussed in
this dissertation
The optjmisation of transfer chutes in the bulk materials industry
MN van Aarde
82
CHAPTER 5
COnroUf Votume t-~bn 01 ( 00 frlm~2 5000amp1 00) ~gtJ C3_2002 fLUENT 60 (2lt1 9 940 n 1Mgt u ody)
Figure 49 Simulations results from Fluenttrade [40]
The Overland Conveyor Company provides another alternative to the Fluent
software package Applied OEM is a technology company that provides discrete
element software to a variety of users in the bulk materials industry Bulk Flow
Analysttrade is an entry level package that they provide This package is very
powerful in the sense that it can accurately predict flow patterns depending on
the accuracy of the inputs An example of this is shown in Figure 50 It also has
the capability to show material segregation dynamic forces and velocities [41]
Figure 50 Simulation results from Bulk Flow Analysttrade [41]
The optimisation of transfer chutes in the bulk materials industry
MN van Aarde
83
CHAPTER 5
OEM Solutions is a world leader in discrete element modelling software They
recently announced the release of the latest version of their flow simulation
package called EOEM 21 This package can be used to simulate and optimise
bulk material handling and processing operations [41] Oue to the capabilities of
this software package it is a very attractive option for designing transfer chutes
With the development of EOEM 21 OEM Solutions worked in collaboration with
customers in the Bulk Handling Mining and Construction Pharmaceutical
Chemical and Agricultural sectors This enables the end users to perform more
sophisticated particle simulations specific to their unique applications Also
incorporated into this package is the ability and flexibility to customise and
personalise advanced particle properties [42]
This specific package has been proven successful by industry leaders Martin
Engineering (Neponset Illinois) is a leading global supplier of solids handling
systems This company continues to expand their use of EOEM software in
design optimisation and development of bulk materials handling products These
optimisation and development actions include all aspects of conveyor systems
and transfer points for numerous industrial sectors [43]
There are several other OEM simulation packages such as ESYS Particle
Passage-OEM and YAOE However none of these software packages seem be
major industry role players in the discipline of chute design although they might
have the capability In adjudicating the three big role players in bulk material flow
simulation packages there are a few factors taken into consideration It appears
thatthe advantages of 30 capabilities are non negotiable Therefore Fluenttrade is
not really a consideration From the literature review of the Bulk Flow Analysttrade
and the EOEM packages it seems that these two will provide more or less the
same performance It does seem however that the EOEM software is a bigger
role player in various industries Due to the possible future capabilities of EOEM The optimisation of transfer chutes in the bulk materials industry
MN van Aarde
84
CHAPTER 5
through its association with numerous industries this simulation package is the
software of choice
In order to retrofit or design a new transfer point with the aid of the selected OEM
software package there are a few steps that a designer must follow to gain the
full benefit of this tool [36]
1 An accurate 3D or CAD representation of the new or old transfer chute
must be rendered
2 Identify restrictions and limitations in terms of chute geometry and
manufacturing
3 Identify desired design goals (Le dust emissions flow restrictions etc)
4 Identify representative material properties and particle descriptions
5 In case of a retrofit make design changes to chute geometry with CAD
6 Simulate the performance of the new design using OEM software
7 Evaluate results obtained from the simulation (reiterate steps 5 6 and 7)
8 Perform and finalise detail design steps
9 Manufacture
10 Installation
The above mentioned steps found in references [6] and [36] only provides
information regarding retrofitting or designing chutes with the aid of OEM
Although it is a powerful design 1001 the design process should not discard the
use of analytical hand calculation~ Some of the most important design decisions
regarding chute profiles are made with analytical hard calculations such as
plotting the material trajectorY
53 DETERMINATION OF MATERIAL PROPERTIES
The discrete element method is a promising approach to the simUlation of
granular material interaction The accuracy of the outcome of the simulation is
The optimisation of transfer chutes in the bulk materials industry
M N van Aarde
85
CHAPTER 5
however dependent upon accurate information on the material properties and
input parameters [44] These inputs basically consist of the following
fundamental parameters size and shape factors bulk density angle of repose
cohesion and adhesion parameters and restitution coefficients [45]
The determination of most of these parameters are explained and defined in the
following paragraphs The parameters that are changed in the simulation
according to the reaction of the flow are not discussed and are typically
parameters such as the internal coefficient of friction between a number of
particles A collaborated effort by the bulk handling industry aims to find ways in
which all parameters can be accurately determined through scientific methods
This has however still not been achieved The objective is to achieve a realistic
representation and therefore some parameters are altered in the simulation
It is important to note that the computation time increases as the particle size
becomes smaller and the amount of particles increase In most granular flow
problems the characteristics of the material stream are largely determined by
particles greater than 10 - 20 mm in size [45] Therefore in order to reduce
computation time the selected particle size for simUlations should be the same
as the largest particles handled by the facility namely 34 mm diameter
Although fines have a higher internal friction coefficient and more cohesiveness
these properties can be averaged into the input parameters to obtain the same
overall effect [45] Therefore only a single particle size is used in the simulation
and the properties optimised to obtain the same result under actual operating
conditionsmiddot Some of the material properties can be easily obtained from the
facility The rest of the properties are obtained from tests carried out by expert
conSUltants in this field
The size factor and bulk density are obtained from the facility Materia tests
carried out by external consultants provide the coefficient of friction and also the The optimisation of transfer chutes in the bulk materials industry
MN van Aarde
86
CHAPTER 5
wall friction angle This is the angle at which the material will start to slide under
its own mass To determine these material properties the external consultants
normally use sophisticated and expensive equipment Data gathered from these
tests are used for the hand calculation of the chute profile The angle of repose
can normally be observed from a stockpile and is the angle that the side of the
stockpile makes with the horizontal
For the OEM simulation the coefficient of friction is one of the main determining
factors of the wall friction angle Data provided by the material tests can not be
used as a direct input into OEM In the software package the coefficient of
friction is represented by a factor between 0 and 1 The material test data can
however provide some insight into where on this scale the factor is This factor
can be derived from a few small simulation iterations as there is no method of
direct conversion between the test result data and the OEM input
To determine this factor a plate is modelled with a single layer of particles This
plate is then rotated within the simulation at approximately 2deg per second As
soon as the particles begin to slide the time is taken from which the angle can be
calculated This process is repeated with different friction coefficients until the
correct wall friction angle is obtained After the coefficient of friction factor is
determined between the particles and the chute wall the material restitution
factor and coefficient of internal friction can be obtained
The restitution factor is obtained by measurirtg the rebound height of a particle
when it is dropped from a certain height This is usually difficult to determine due
to the variation in shape of the material particles If the particle lands on a
surface it rarely bounces straight back up Therefore the test is repeated
numerous times and an average is taken to obtain the final result
Coefficient of internal friction is a property that describes the particles ability to
slide across each other A simUlation is set up to create a small stockpile of The optimisation of transfer chutes in the blJlk materials industry
MN van Aarde
87
CHAPTER 5
material particles The angle of repose can be obtained by measuring the
average apex angle of the stockpiles In this simulation the coefficient of internal
friction and restitution factors are iterated This is done in order to simulate the
accurate behaviour of particles falling onto the stockpile and forming the correct
angle of repose Figure 51 shows what this simulation typically looks like
Figure 51 Determination of material properties for an accurate angle of repose
54 VERIFICATION OF THE SELECTED TEST METHODOLOGY FOR THIS
APPLICATION
The best verification is to compare the simulation results with an actual material
flow situation Therefore a comparison is made between the actual flow in the
existing transfer configuration and the simulation of this same transfer This is
also a good test to see if the parameters changed in the simulation were done
correctly
During the chute test programme CCTV cameras were installed in the problem
transfer chutes at the facility The cameras are positioned to provide an accurate
view of the material flow behaviour inside the chutes As explained in Chapter 3
The optimisation of transfer chutes in the bulk materials industry 88
MN van Aarde
CHAPTER 5
the behaviour of the material flow inside the chutes changes with the variation of
ore type
Due to the fact that only 34 mm diameter particles are used in the simulation a
test using coarse ore was chosen for the verification of the simulation
Therefore test 12 is used as reference for the verification In this test coarse S
with the particle size distribution between 28 mm and 34 mm was used at the
transfer from CV 3 to CV 5
Figure 52 shows an image taken from the CCTV camera inside the transfer chute
between CV 3 and CV 5 The red line indicates the top of the chute throat
opening and the yellow arrows show the top of material flow This screen shot
was taken at a flow rate of 10 000 tlh It can be deduced from this view and the
chute test work that the chute is choking at a throughput rate of 10 000 tlh
Figure 52 Actual material flow with coarse S at 10000 tIh
The transfer chute from Figure 52 was modelled in CAD and the model imported
into the discrete element package EDEM All the material input parameters as
discussed in section 53 were used in the simulation 10 000 tlh was used as the
The optimisation of transfer chutes in the bulk materials industry
MN van Aarde
89
CHAPTER 5
flow rate parameter in an attempt to simulate and recreate the situation as shown
by Figure 52
Test 12 of the chute performance tests gave the following results which can be
compared to the EDEM simulation
bull Chute started to choke rapidly at 10 000 tlh
bull Slight off centre loading onto the receiving conveyor CV 5
bull A lower velocity layer of material close to the discharge of the chute
bull Material roll back on the receiving conveyor due to significant differences in
the velocity of the material flow and the receiving conveyor
Off-centre loading
L
Figure 53 Material flow pattern through the existing chute
The optimisation of transfer chutes in the bulk materials industry
MN van Aarde
90
CHAPTER 5
Flow restricted in this area
Low velocity layer
Low discharge velocity rollback
Figure 54 Cross sectional side view of material flow through the existing chute
Figure 53 shows the material flow pattern in the existing chute where the thick
red arrows indicate the direction of flow The legend on the left of the figure
indicates the material velocity in ms Slow flowing material is shown in blue and
the colour turns to red as the material velocity increases Slight off centre
loading onto the receiving conveyor CV 5 can be seen from Figure 53 This
correlates well with the actual observations during the physical testing of this
transfer point
Figure 54 shows the more determining factors for correlation between actual flow
and simulated flow where the legend on the left indicates the material velocity in
ms This is a cross sectional view through the centre of the chute From this
view a build up of material can be seen in the chute throat area The slow
flowing material on the back of the chute also helps to restrict the flow Due to
the fact that the material speed at the discharge of the chute is much slower than
the receiving belt speed a stack of turbulent flowing material is formed behind
the discharge point on the receiving conveyor
The optimisation of transfer chutes in the bulk materials industry
MN van Aarde
91
CHAPTER 5
There is a good correlation between the simulated and actual material flow
pattern The simulation method can therefore be considered as a valid alternate
or additional method to standard analytical chute design Attention should be
given though to the input of material properties in order to obtain a realistic result
55 VERIFICATION OF NEW CHUTE CONFIGURATION AND OPTIMISATION OF THE
HOOD LOCATION
After establishing that the OEM is a reliable design and verification tool the new
transfer chute configuration can be simulated Firstly this configuration is
modelled without the honeycombs inside the hood and spoon This is done in
order to verify the material flow pattern and velocity through the hood and spoon
Results obtained from this simulation can then be compared to the hand
calculation results An iterative process is followed with simulations and hand
calculations to obtain the best flow results The simulation results are shown in
Figure 55 and Figure 56
I
L
Figure 55 Material flow through hood at 10 000 tIh
The optimisation of transfer chutes in the bulk materials industry
MN van Aarde
92
CHAPTER 5
Figure 56 Material flow through spoon at 10 000 tlh
The hood velocity profile shown in Figure 38 gives the same result as obtained
from the DEM simulation The calculated hood exit velocity is 633 ms This is
the same result obtained from the simulation and shown by the red colouring in
Figure 55 As the material enters the spoon it is falling under gravity and
therefore still accelerating At impact with the chute wall it slows down and exits
the spoon with approximately the same velocity as the receiving conveyor
Figure 56 shows the material flow through the spoon section This can also be
compared to the spoon velocity profile in Figure 39 The behaviour of the
material inside the spoon as shown by the simulation correlates with the results
obtained from the hand calculations This is another indication that with accurate
input parameters the DEM can be used as a useful verification tool
The optimisation of transfer chutes in the bulk materials industry
MN van Aarde
93
CHAPTER 5
Skew loading into spoon
Slower material
L
Figure 57 Determination of the optimum hood location
The hood is supported by a shaft at the top and can be moved horizontally This
function is incorporated into the design in order to optimise the hood location
during commissioning of the transfer chute It is critical to discharge centrally into
the spoon in order to eliminate skew loading onto the receiving conveyor
Figure 57 illustrates the effect that the hood location has on material flow When
comparing the flow from Figure 55 to the flow in Figure 57 it is clear that skew
loading is a direct result of an incorrect hood position The circled area in Figure
57 illustrates how the flow reacts to the incorrect hood location
Material is discharged to the right side of the spoon which causes a slight buildshy
up of material on the left This causes the material to flow slightly from side to
side as it passes through the spoon Figure 57 indicates that the material to the
The optimisation of transfer chutes in the bulk materials industry
MN van Aarde
94
CHAPTERS ----------------- -------___ _--shy
right at the spoon discharge is slightly slower than the material on the left This is
a clear indication of skew loading onto the receiving conveyor
The material flow pattern in Figure 55 is symmetrical and therefore will not
cause skew loading The OEM can give a good indication of the required hood
setup before commissioning However adjustments can still be made during the
commissioning process The tracking of the receiving belt should give a good
indication of when the hood is in the optimum position
56 EFFECT OF THE HONEYCOMB STRUCTURE IN HIGH IMPACT ZONES
The purpose of the honeycomb dead box structure in the high impact zones is to
capture material inside the pockets and induce material on material flow This
requires that the material inside the honeycombs should be stationary while the
main stream material flow moves over the dead boxes OEM can therefore be
set up in such a way that the material velocities can be visualised inside the
chute
In Chapter 4 the logic of how this honeycomb should be structured and
positioned was discussed The simulations shown in Figure 58 and Figure 59
illustrate how a OEM pack~ge can also be used to determine the positioning of
these honeycomb structures Impact points in the hood and spoon must be
inside the honeycomb in all situations of flow inside the chute The spacing of
dead box pockets can be altered to ensure that a continuous layer of stationary
material is formed in the honeycomb area Various geometries for this
honeycomb structure can be simulated with OEM to obtain the best results
The optimisation of transfer chutes in the bulk materials industry
MN van Aarde
95
CHAPTER 5
Large radius hood
Hood honeycomb box to minimise wear in impact
Vertical discharge from hood centralising flow on
belt
L
Figure 58 Material behaviour through hood
Spoon
Spoon honeycomb box to minimise wear in impact area
Improved spoon discharge flow
Figure 59 Material behaviour through spoon
The optimisation of transfer chutes in the bulk materials industry
MN van Aarde
96
CHAPTERS
The legends on the left of Figure 58 and Figure 59 indicate the material velocity
in ms Dark blue indicates stationary material and bright red indicates a
maximum material velocity of 8 ms Using this information the functionality of
the honeycomb dead boxes can now be analysed The velocity of the material
captured by the dead boxes is indicated as dark blue This means that all the
material in the dead boxes is stationary
With the result obtained from the OEM simulation it is clear that material on
material flow will be induced by the honeycomb dead boxes The pockets of the
honeycomb capture the material and will therefore have reduced wear in the
high impact areas This material on material flow does however induce a
coarser sliding surface than the smooth ceramic liner tiles Due to the high
velocity of material through the chute the effect of the coarser sliding surface is
however minimised
58 CONCLUSION
The Discrete Element Method is proven to be a successful design and
verification tool in the bulk materials industry This method is used widely in the
global bulk materials industry The successful outcome of the OEM simulation is
however dependent on the correct material input parameters Some of these
parameters are readily available from the facility that handles the material The
rest of the parameters can be determined by setting up simple test simulations
with OEM
To verify that the OEM simulation is a correct indication of the actual condition
the simulation is compared to CCTV images taken from the same transfer chute
The results show that the OEM simulation does provide a true reflection of the
actual material flow through the transfer chute Therefore the same material
input parameters can be used to simulate the new transfer chute configuration
The optimisation of transfer chutes in the bulk materials industry
MN van Aarde
97
CHAPTER 5
From the simulations done on the new transfer chute configuration the effect of
the honeycomb dead boxes can be examined These simulation results show
that the honeycomb dead box configuration is effective in capturing material
inside the honeycomb cavities This results in material on material flow and
reduces impact abrasion on the ceramic chute liners
Results obtained from the OEM simulation of the new transfer configuration are
compared to the hand calculation results This comparison indicates that the
material velocity calculated in the hood and spoon correlates well with the
material velocity calculated by the OEM The overall results obtained from
simulating the new transfer chute configuration have been shown to provide a
true reflection of the actual flow through the chute
The optimisation of transfer chutes in the bulk materials industry
MN van Aarde
98
CHAPTER 6
CHAPTER 6 CONCLUSIONS AND RECOMMENDATIONS
The optimisation of transfer chutes in the bulk materials industry
MN van Aarde
99
CHAPTER 6
61 CONCLUSIONS AND RECOMMENDATIONS
Bulk materials handling is a key role player in the global industrial industry
Within this field the industry faces many challenges on a daily basis These
challenges as with any industry are to limit expenses and increase profit Some
of the limiting factors of achieving this goal in the bulk materials handling industry
are lost time due to unscheduled maintenance product losses due to spillage
andhigh costs incurred by increased maintenance
The focus of this study was on the optimisation of transfer chutes and
investigations were carried out to determine the core problems These
investigations were done by observing and monitoring various grades of iron ore
passing through transfer chutes known to have throughput problems The core
problems were identified as high wear on liners in the impact zones skew
loading on receiving conveyors material spillage and chute blockages
These problems cause financial losses to the facility either directly or indirectly
Direct financial losses can be attributed to the frequent replacement of chute
liners while the indirect financial losses are caused by facility down time This is
why it is imperative to optimise the manner in which the transfer of material is
approached A new transfer chute configuration addresses the problems
identified at the facility and the core concepts can be adopted at any bulk
materials handling facility
This new concept examines the utilisation of the hood and spoon concept rather
than the conventional dead box configuration By using the hood and spoon
configuration the material discharge velocity is utilised and carried through to the
discharge onto the receiving conveyor Adding to this design is a honeycomb
dead box configuration in the high impact zones of the hood and spoon This
initiates material on material flow and prolongs the lifetime of the chute liners
The optimisation of transfer chutes in the bulk materials industry
MN van Aarde
100
CHAPTER 6
The radius of the hood should be designed so that it follows the path of the
material trajectory as closely as possible Some facility constraints prohibit this
hood radius from following exactly the same path as the material The radius of
the spoon is designed in such a manner that it receives the material from the
hood and slows it down while turning it into the direction in which the belt is
running Ideally the material should be discharged from the spoon at
approximately the same velocity as the receiving conveyor
If this can be achieved then some major problems suffered by the industry will
have been resolved With the hood having almost the same radius as the
material trajectory impact wear on liners can be significantly reduced By
discharging material from the chute onto the receiving conveyor at the same
velocity as the conveyor belt excessive belt wear and material spillage will be
avoided Further optimisation is however still possible by investigating the
implementation of various skirting options to the side of the conveyor
This new transfer chute configuration also boasts an articulated bottom section in
the spoon The purpose of the adjustable bottom section is to create greater
clearance below the spoon This will allow material on the belt below to pass
unimpeded underneath the spoon In some cases there can be several chutes in
series that discharge onto the same conveyor In these cases it is beneficial to
incorporate an articulated chute in order to have the capability of having a small
drop height between the discharge point in the chute and the receiving conveyor
This low drop height also minimises turbulent flow at the chute discharge point on
the receiving conveyor
The most unique feature to the new design is the implementation of the
honeycomb dead box configuration in the high impact zones Due to these high
impact areas the liners will experience the most wear This section of the chute
is flanged and can be removed separately from the rest of the chute to aid
maintenance In most maintenance operations it may only be necessary to reline The optimisation of transfer chutes in the bulk materials industry
MN van Aarde
101
CHAPTER 6
this small section of the chute Costs are minimised by reducing the time
required for maintenance and the cost of replacing liners
Previously testing of new transfer chute configurations normally involved
implementing the chute and obseNing its ability to perform according to
specification This can however be a costly exercise as it is possible that further
modifications to the chute will be required after implementation Therefore it is
beneficial to verify the new chute configuration before implementation
This is done by simulating the material flow through the chute using Discrete
Element Method A comparison was done between the actual flow in an eXisting
chute and the simulated flow in the same chute configuration This comparison
showed the same result obtained from the simulation and the actual material
flow This method can therefore be used as an accurate simulation tool for
evaluating transfer chute performance
The mathematical calculations describing the material flow in and over the
honeycomb dead box structures are complex Therefore simulation models are
used to show the material behaviour in those areas Simulations show that the
material captured within the dead boxes remains stationary thus protecting the
ceramic liners behind it This is the desired result as it prolongs the life of the
chute liners and reduces maintenance frequencies
If the work is done efficiently it normally takes two days to remove a worn chute
of this configuration fully and replace it with a new one This is normally done
once a year due to the design lifetime of the chute With the new chute
configuration this maintenance schedule can be reduced to two hours once a
year for the replacement of the honeycomb sections only The exposed face of
the honeycomb ribs will wear through until the efficiency of the honeycomb
design is reduced
The optimisation of transfer chutes in the bulk materials industry
MN van Aarde
102
CHAPTER 6
This specific iron ore facility has approximately fifty transfer points During this
exercise only two of these transfer points were replaced with the new chute
configuration The combined annual maintenance time for replacement of these
50 chutes is 100 days If the new chute philosophy is adopted on all these
transfers the annual maintenance time can be reduced to as little as 100 hours
This excludes the unplanned work for cleaning of spillages and fixing or replacing
worn conveyors
There are significant benefits to investigating the problems at specific transfer
points before attempting a new design This gives good insight into where the
focus should be during the design process Ea~y identification and
understanding of the problem areas is essential for a new chute configuration
The new design features can provide a vast improvement and a large benefit to
the bulk materials handling industry
62 RECOMMENDATIONS FOR FURTHER STUDY
During the chute performance tests it was noted that avalanches on the
stockpiles during reclaiming of material causes peaks on the conveyor systems
These peaks in the material stream increase the probability of blockages in the
transfer chutes As a result material spillage occurs and the conveyor belts can
be easily overloaded
This occurrence creates the requirement for further studies on the reclaiming
operations All stacker reclaimers are operated manually which creates ample
room for error Investigations can be done to determine the value of automating
the reclaiming operations Manual interaction cannot be avoided but an
automated system will reduce the possibility for error
Visual inspections on the transfer chute liners indicate that the material tends to
erode the liners away quicker in the grooves between liner plates or ceramic
The optimisation of transfer chutes in the bulk materials industry
MN van Aarde
103
CHAPTER 6
tiles This occurrence seems to be worse in areas of the chute where the
material velocity is the highest
This problem was specifically noticed with ceramic liner tiles The tiles are glued
to the chute surface with an epoxy and this substance also fills the crevices
between the tiles This epoxy is however not resistant to any type of sliding or
impact abrasion If the material gains speed in such a groove between the tiles it
simply erodes the epoxy away Studies to reduce or even eliminate this problem
should be examined
In some situations the layout and configuration of the chute prohibits the tiles
from being inserted in a staggered manner Studies can be done on the
composition of this epoxy in order to increase its resistance to sliding and impact
abrasion By doing so the lifetime of the chute liners can be increased which will
result in minimised facility down time due to maintenance
It seems that it is a global industry problem to find accurate scientific methods of
determining material input parameters for OEM simulations Although most of
the material properties can be determined through testing it is still a challenge to
convert that information into a representative input parameter into OEM It is
therefore recommended that further studies be undertaken to determine a
method by which material test data can be successfully converted into OEM input
parameters
The optimisation of transfer chutes in the bulk materials industry
MN van Aarde
104
REFERENCES ------shy
REFERENCES
[1] ARNOLD P C MCLEAN A G ROBERTS A W 1978 Bulk Solids
storage flow and handling Tunra Bulk Solids Australia Jan
[2] ANON 2008 Peak (Export) OilUSD Survival Dec
httppeakoHsurvivalorgltag=finance Date of access 8 Jun 2009
[3] KESSLER F 2006 Recent developments in the field of bulk conveying
FME Transactions Vol 34 NO4
[4] ANON 2007 Specification for Troughed Belt Conveyors British
Standards BS28901989 25 Sep Date of access 8 Jun 2009
[5] CEMA (Conveyor Equipment Manufacturers Association) Belt Conveyors
6thfor Bulk Materials ed wwwcemanetorg Date of access
10 Jun 2009
[6] DEWICKI G 2003 Computer Simulation of Granular Material Flows
Overland Conveyor Co Inc Jan httpwwwpowderandbulkcom Date
of access 10 Jun 2009
[7] AMERICAN COAL COUNCIL 2009 Engineered chutes control dust for
Ameren U Es Meramec Plant httpwww clean-coal infold rupalindexphp
Date of access 12 Jun 2009
[8] KUMBA IRON ORE 2008 Annual Financial Statements 2008
httpwwwsishenironorecompanycozareportskumba afs 08pdffullpdf
Date of access 13 Jun 2009
The optimisation of transfer chutes in the bulk materials industry
MN van Aarde
105
REFERENCES
[9] METSO BACKGROUNDER 2007 Rock Crushing 22 Feb
httpWWvVmetsocom Date of access 15 Jun 2009
[10] ALTHOFF H 1977 Reclaiming and Stacking System Patent US
4037735
[11] THE SOUTH AFRICAN INSTITUTE OF MATERIALS HANDLING
Conveyor belt installations and related components Chutes Level 1
course on belt conveying technology
httpWWvVsaimhcozaeducationcourse01chuteshtm Date of access
18 Jun 2009
[12] CLARKE R 2008 Hood and spoon internal flow belt conveyor transfer
systems SACEA - seminar 22 Aug httpWWvVsaceaorgzaDate of
access 22 Jun 2009
[13] T W WOODS CONSTRUCTION 2009 Design problems in coal transfer
chutes 24 Mar httpWWvVferretcomaucTW-Woods-Constructions
Date of access 25 Jun 2009
[14] LOUGHRAN J 2009 The flow of coal through transfer chutes 20 Aug
Showcase of research excellence James Cook University Australia
[15] ONEIL M 2006 A guide to coal chute replacement Power Engineering
International Nov httpgoliathecnextcomcoms2lgi 0198-369643Ashy
guide-to-coal-chutehtml Date of access 3 Jul 2009
[16] NORDELL LK 1992 A new era in overland conveyor belt design
httpWWvVckitcozasecureconveyorpaperstroughedoverlandoverland
htm Date of access 3 Jul 2009
The optimisation of transfer chutes in the bulk materials industry
MN van Aarde
106
REFERENCES
[17] Rowland C 1992 Dust Control at Transfer Points
httpwwwckitcozasecureconveyorpapersbionic-research-2d-bri2shy
paper05htm Date of access 4 Jul 2009
[18] KRAM ENGINEERING Ceramic composite impact blocks
httpwwwkramengineeringcozacercomhtmIDate of access
5 Jul 2009
I19] BLAZEK C 2005 Kinkaid InteliFlo tradeInstallation Source for Plats
Power Atticle Oct
httpwwwbenetechusacompdf caseStudyBe neKi ncArti c pdf
Date of access 10 Aug 2009
[20] CRP Engineering Corp Modern Transfer Chute Designs for Use in
Material Handling
httpwwwcbpengineeringcompdflTransfer Chutespdf Date of access
26 Apr 2010
[21] ROZENTALS J 2008 Rational design of conveyor chutes Bionic
Research Institute South African Institute of Materials Handling
[22] ROBERTS AW SCOTT OJ 1981 Flow of bulk solids through
transfer chutes of variable geometry and profile Bulk Solids Handling
1(4) Dec
[23] CARSON JW ROYAL TA GOODWILL DJ 1986 Understanding
and Eliminating Particle Segregation Problems Bulk Solids Handling
6(1) Feb
[24] BENJAMIN CW 2004 The use of parametric modelling to design
transfer chutes and other key components Gulf Conveyor Group The optimisation of transfer chutes in the bulk materials industry
MN van Aarde
107
l25] STUART DICK D ROYAL TA 1992 Design Principles for Chutes to
Handle Bulk Solids Bulk Solids Handling 12(3) Sep
[26J REICKS AV RUDOLPHI TJ 2004 The Importance and Prediction of
Tension Distribution around the Conveyor Belt Path Bulk materials
handling by conveyor belt 5(2)
(271 RAMOS CM 1991 The real cost of degradation
institute Chute design conference 1991
Bionic research
[28] ROBERTS AW 1969 An investigation of the gravity flow of non
cohesive granular materials through discharge chutes Transactions of
the ACMEjournal of engineering for indust~ May
[29] TAYLOR HJ 1989 Guide to the design of transfer chutes and chute
linings for bulk materials
association 1989
mechanical handling engineers
[30] ROBERTS AW 1999 Chute design application transfer chute design
Design guide for chutes in bulk solids handling The University of
Newcastle Australia
[31] NORDELL LK 1994 Palabora installs Curved Transfer Chute in Hard
Rock to Minimise Belt Cover Wear Bulk Solids Handling 14 Dec
[32] ROZENTALS J 1991 Flow of Bulk Solids in Chute Design
research institute Chute design conference 1991
Bionic
The optimisation oftransfer chutes in the bulk materials industry
MN van Aarde
108
REFERENCES
[33] ROBERTS AW WICHE SJ 2007 Feed Chute Geometry for
Minimum Belt Wear (h International conference of bulk materials
handling 17 Oct
[34J POWDER HANDLING New OEM Conveyor Transfer Chute Design
Software Helix Technologies
httpvwvwpowderhandlingcomauarticesnew-dem-conveyor-transfershy
chute-design-software Date of access 12 Aug 2009
[35J SAWLEY ML CLEARY PW 1999 A Parallel Discrete Element
Method for Industrial Granular Flow SimUlations EPFL - Super
Computing Review (11)
[36] DEWICKI G 2003 Bulk Material Handling and Processing - Numerical
Techniques and Simulation of Granular Material Overland Conveyor
Company Bulk Solids Handling 23(2)
[37J FA VIER J 2009 Continuing Improvements Boost use of Discrete
Element Method Oil and Gas Engineer- Production Processing 7 Oct
[38] KRAUS E F KA TTERFELD A Usage of the Discrete Element Method in
Conveyor Technologies Institute for Conveyor Technologies (IFSL) The
Otto-von-Guericke University of Magdeburg
[39] MOYS MH VAN NIEROP MA VAN TONDER JC GLOVER G
2005 Validation of the Discrete Element Method (OEM) by Comparing
Predicted Load Behaviour of a Grinding Mill with Measured Data School
for Process and Materials Engineering University of Witwatersrand
Johannesburg The optimisation of transfer materials industry
MN van Aarde
109
REFERENCES
[40J MciLVINA P MOSSAD R 2003 Two dimensional transfer chute
analysis using a continuum method Third international conference on
CFD in the Minerals and Process Industry CSIRO Melbourne Australia
(41J Overland Conveyor Company Inc 2009 Applied DEM
httpwwwapplieddemcomDate of access 26 Apr 2010
(42] DEM SOLUTIONS 2008 Advanced Particle Simulation Capabilities with
EDEM 21 Press release 5 Nov
[43J DEM SOLUTIONS 2008 Martin Engineering Expands use of EDEMTM
Software in Design of Solids Handling Equipment Press release 20 Feb
(44] COETZEE CJ ELS DNJ 2009 Calibration of Discrete Element
Parameters and the Modelling of Silo Discharge and Bucket Filling
Computers and Electronics in Agriculture 65 Mar
[45] DAVID J KRUSES PE Conveyor Belt Transfer Chute Modelling and
Other Applications using The Discrete Element Method in the Material
Handling Industry
httpwwwckitcozasecureconveyorpaperstrouqhedconveyorconveyor
Date of access 3 Sep 2009
bulk materials industry
MN van Aarde
110
ApPENDIXA
ApPENDIX A MATERIAL TESTS AND LINER SELECTiON
The optimisation of-transfer chutes in the bulk materials industry
MN van Aarde
11-1
ApPENDIX A
MATERIAL TEST WORK AND LINER SELECTION
Material samples were taken from the stockpile area for evaluation and testing
These samples represent the worst case materials for impact wear and flow
problems Tests were conducted by external consultants as this is a speciality
field Therefore no detail information on how the tests are conducted is currently
available Results from these tests should indicate the worst case parameters for
chute design according to each specific liner type tested
The material handled by the facility varied from 4 mm to 34 mm lump size A mid
range lump size ore was identified as the preferred material to use for wear
testing This decision was based on the specific ore type maximum lump size of
15 mm as required for the wear test The wear test apparatus used cannot
provide conclusive results with the larger lump sizes of 34 mm and thus smaller
sizes are used Guidance on which ore samples to take was given by the
external consultants tasked with performing the test work
The test work is divided into two sections Firstly the flow test work is carried out
on the finer material with a higher clay content known to have bad flow angles
Included in the selection of fine materials is a sample of the scraper dribblings
This is the material scraped off the belt underneath the head pulley Secondly
the wear tests were conducted on 15 mm samples as explained above
A few common liners were selected for testing These liners are shown in
Table A Some of these liners are known for their specific purpose and
characteristics Polyurethane is known to have a very good coefficient of friction
and will therefore improve the flow of material This material does however
wear out quicker in high impact applications Therefore it is only considered for
use inside the dribbling chute
The optimisation of transfer chutes in the bulk materials industry
MN van Aarde
112
ApPENDIX A
As can be seen from Figure 37 in section 432 the dribbling chute will only see
scraper dribblings from the primary and secondary scrapers It is protected from
any main stream flow of material by the start up chute This makes the
polyurethane liner a prime candidate for lining this section of the chute
Table A Material tested vs liner type
I Flow Tests Wear Tests
Liner T
en aJ c
u
I
i
N en aJ c
u
Cf)
en aJ c
u
I en
shy OJaJ C 0 shyj -shy 0 u pound
(f) shy0
T
aJ ~ j 0 0
N aJ ~ j 0 0 i
I Chrome x x x x x
Carbide
x x x x xI VRN 500 I
x x x x x x94
Alumina
Ceramic i I
Poly x
Urethane I I I
FLOW TEST WORK
The fines 1 sample was tested at three different moisture contents of 36 41
and 47 This is 70 80 and 90 of saturation moisture respectively No
noticeable difference was observed in the wall friction angles Therefore the
fines 2 and fines 3 samples were tested at 80 of saturation which is 42 and
43 moisture content respectively
Test work showed that the minimum chute angle required for flow increased as
the impact pressure increased Chute angles were measured up to impact
pressures of about 8 kPa The worst chute angle obtained was 62deg This means
that no angle inside the chute should be less than 62deg from the horizontal
The industry 113
MN van Aarde
ApPENDIXA
The scraper dribblings were tested at a moisture content of 12 This material
possesses the most clay content and therefore has the worst flow properties
During testing of this material water was added to improve the flow At an
impact pressure of 03 kPa the minimum chute angle drops from 62deg to 56deg when
adding a fine mist spray of water
WEAR TEST WORK
As stated in chapter 4 wear tests were conducted on the chrome carbide
overlay ceramics and VRN500 The results of these tests are shown as non
dimensional wear ratios of mm wearmm travel of bulk solid sliding on the wear
liners coupon at a given force Test results shown in Table B indicate that the
chrome carbide will have about 185 times the lifetime of 94 alumina ceramics
The VRN500 liner will wear about 6 times faster than the 94 alumina ceramics
at the same force
Table B Wear ratios of liners at two different pressure ranges
lore Wall Coupon 65 kPa 163kPa -173 kPa I i
Coarse 1 on 94 Alumina Ceramic 90 E-9 37 E-8
Coarse 1 on Chrome Carbide 87 E-9 20 E-8
Coarse 1 on VRN500 91 E-8 I 24 E-7 i
Coarse 2 on 94 Alumina Ceramics 38 E-9 22 E-8
Coarse 2 on Chrome Carbide 55 E-9 15 E-8
Coarse 2 on VRN500 66 E-8 25 E-7 I
LINER SELECTION
The lifetime of the liners is not the only criteria Maintainability and cost are also
factors that must be considered Chrome carbide seems to be the liner of choice
for this application However the specific type of chrome carbide tested is not
The optimisation of transfer chutes industry 114
MN van Aarde
ApPEND[xA
manufactured locally and the imported cost is approximately three times that of
ceramics
VRN500 is slightly cheaper than ceramics and can easily be bolted to the back
plate of the chute which makes maintenance very simple Ceramics are
however widely used on the facility and the maintenance teams are well trained
for this specific liner Therefore 94 alumina ceramics is chosen for this
application
The optimisation of transfer chutes in the bulk materials industry
MN van Aarde
115
ApPENODlt B
ApPENDIX B CHUTE CONTROL PHILOSOPHY
The optfmisation of transfer chutes in the bulk materials industry
MN van Aarde
116
ApPENDIX B
SPOON IN THE OPERATING POSITION
For the spoon to be in the operating position the moving head must be over that
specific spoon and the feeding stockyard conveyor must be running This means
that material will be fed through the chute In this case the spoon needs to be in
the operating position to prevent spillage
However when the chute is in the operating position and the feeding conveyor
trips for any reason the actuated spoon section must not move to the non
operating position If the spoon position feedback fails then the system must trip
and the spoon must remain in its last position The downstream conveyor must
also fail to start with this condition
SPOON IN THE NON OPERATING POSITION
As a rule the spoon needs to be in the non operating position when the moving
head on that specific stockyard conveyor is in the purging position (position C)
The reason is that when a stacker reclaimer is in stacking mode any upstream
stacker reclaimer can be reclaiming The reclaimed material on CV 5 or CV 6
will have to pass underneath the actuated chute
ACTUATED SPOON OVER CV 5
As an example for the movement of any actuated spoon on CV 5 the following
are considered When the moving heads of any of the stockyard conveyors are
in position A and that specific stockyard conveyor is running then the rest of the
actuated spoons over CV 5 must be in the non operating position The
following scenario provides a better understanding
bull CV 4 is running
bull CV 4 moving head is in position A
The optimisation of transfer chutes in the bulk materials industry
MN van Aarde
117
ApPENDIXB
In this situation all the actuated spoons on CV 5 except underneath CV 4
must be in the non operating position
ACTUATED SPOON OVER CV 6
As an example for the movement of any actuated spoon on CV 6 the following
are considered When the moving heads of any of the stockyard conveyors are
in position B and that specific stockyard conveyor is running then the rest of the
actuated spoons over CV 6 must be in the non operating position The
following scenario is similar to 453 but explains the control philosophy for the
moving head in position B
bull CV 2 is running
bull CV 2 moving head is in position B
In this situation all the actuated spoons on CV 6 except underneath CV 2
must be in the non operating position
The optimisation of transfer chutes in bulk materials industry
MN van Aarde
118
ABSTRACT
There are literally endless possibilities when it comes to chute configurations due
to the uniqueness of each plant material type and layout constraints It is
therefore beneficial to know what issues to address in the process of chute
design or optimisation
This study focuses on a specific case study with unique problems and solutions
It should however give further insight and a basic understanding of what a chute
designer must consider and the methods taken to optimise an existing material
transfer point The purpose of this document is therefore not to provide the
reader with a recipe for chute optimisation but rather with the knowledge to
comprehend the problems and solutions by discussing a specific industry case
study
The optimisation of transfer chutes in the bulk materials industry
MN van Aarde
iii
SAMEVATTING
SAM EVATTING
Materiaal handtering is n vinnig groeiende wereldwye industrie Hierdie industrie
word gekonfronteer deur groot uitdagings om die effektiwiteit van materiaal
handtering te verbeter en sodoende die koste daaraan verbonde te verminder
Die aard en skaal van materiaal handtering varieer van land tot land afhangende
van die vereistes wat gestel word deur daardie land se industriele sektor Hierdie
studie fokus spesifiek op materiaal handtering in die mynbou sektor waar
hoofsaaklik geprosesseerde erts handteer word
In hierdie industrie is oordrag geute n sleutel komponent en word dit hoofsaaklik
gebruik om erts te vervoer vanaf een vervoerband na n volgende Dit kan ook
onder andere gebruik word onder hoppers of sillos waar materiaal vervoer word
na vervoerbande treine vragmotors of skepe In die strewe om die effektiwiteit
van prosesse te verbeter word die industrie gekonfronteer met probleme wat
onder andere insluit
bull geblokkeerde oordrag geute
bull hoe slytasie op geut-voerring materiale
bull vermorsing van materiaal as gevolg van geute wat skeef aflaai op
vervoerbande
bull hoe slytasie van vervoerbande by uitlaai punte
Voordat bestaande probleem geute vervang word met n nuwe konfigurasie is dit
belangrik om n deeglike ondersoek te doen Hierdie ondersoek skep n beter
insig oor die probleme wat bestaan in die oordrag geute n Beter insig rondom
die probleme gee aan die ontwerper die vermoe om die optimale oplossing vir
die probleme te kry In hierdie skripsie is n studie gedoen oor die konfigurasie
van dinamiese geute of sogenaamde hood and spoon geute Bestaande
probleme word in ag geneem en die studie fokus op die verbetering van
materiaal vloei sowel as In ontwerp wat instandhouding vergemaklik ~~~~~~~~-
The optimisation of transfer chutes in the bulk materials industry
MN van Aarde
iv
SAMEVATTING
As n toevoegsel tot die verbeterde vloei binne die nuwe ontwerp vir die
spesifieke geut waarna gekyk word in hierdie studie word daar ook ander
ontwerp toevoegings bespreek wat die waarde van die nuwe ontwerp verder
bevestig Hierdie ontwerp verbeter die leeftyd van die geut-voerring en tyd wat
afgestaan moet word aan instandhouding word geminimeer
Daar is letterlik eindelose moontlikhede wanneer dit kom by die konfigurasie van
oordrag geute as gevolg van die uniekheid van elke aanleg materiaal tipe en
uitleg beperkings Daarom is dit voordelig om te weet waaraan aandag gegee
moet word in die proses om geute te ontwerp of te optimiseer
Hierdie studie fokus op n spesifieke oordrag geut binne n spesifieke industrie
met unieke probleme en oplossings Dit behoort die geut ontwerper te bekwaam
met die basiese kennis en insig oor waarna om te kyk wanneer geute ontwerp of
geoptimiseer word Die doel van hierdie skripsie is dus nie om die leser te
voorsien van n resep om geute te optimiseer nie maar wei die kennis om die
probleme en oplossings te verstaan deur gebruik te maak van n studie uit die
industrie
The optimisation of transfer chutes in the bulk materials industry
MN van Aarde
v
ACKNOWLEDGEMENTS
ACKNOWLEDGEMENTS
I would like to thank Prof EH Mathews for the opportunity to do my Masters
degree
Special thanks to Dr M Kleingeld for his guidance and effort in assisting me in
my attempt to deliver a dissertation of this standard
Thank you to Prof Lesley Greyvenstein for the language editing
To my family thank you for all your support and encouragement throughout the
execution of this study
------________--__------------shyThe optimisation of transfer chutes in the bulk materials industry
MN van Aarde
vi
TABLE OF CONTENTS ---~-------------------~----
TABLE OF CONTENTS
Abstract ii
Samevatting iv
Acknowledgements vi
Table of contents vii
List of figures ix
List of tables xii
Nomenclature xiii
Chapter 1 Introduction to transfer chutes in the bulk materials handling industry1
11 Introduction to transfer chutes 2
12 Various applications and configurations of transfer chutes 5
13 Recurring chute problems and countermeasures from industry 11
14 Purpose of this research 18
15 Synopsis of this dissertation 19
Chapter 2 Basic considerations in chute design 21
21 Preface 22
22 Design objectives 22
23 Integrating a more appropriate chute layout with the plant constraints 27
24 Investigating the correct chute profile for reduced liner wear 30
25 Feed chute geometry for reduced belt wear 34
26 Conclusion37
Chapter 3 Tests for the identification of recurring problems on existing chutes39
31 Preface 40
32 Test methodology 40
33 Chute performance acceptance criteria 42
34 Discussion of problem areas 42
35 Summary of test results 54
36 Conclusion55
The optimisation of transfer chutes in the bulk materials industry
MN van Aarde
vii
TABLE OF CONTENTS
Chapter 4 Dynamic chutes for the elimination of recurring problems 57
41 Preface 58
42 Consideration of the existing transfer point constraints 59
43 Design of the chute profile 61
44 Incorporating a dead box in the impact areas 67
45 Designing the chute for integration with system requirements 73
46 Conclusion75
Chapter 5 Testing and verification ofthe new solution 77
51 Preface 78
52 Selecting a test methodology 79
53 Determination of material properties 85
54 Verification of the selected test methodology for this application 88
55 Verification of new chute configuration and optimisation of the hood
location 92
56 Effect of the honeycomb structure in high impact zones 95
58 Conclusion 97
Chapter 6 Conclusions and Recommendations 99
61 Conclusions and recommendations 100
62 Recommendations for further study 103
References 1 05
Appendix A Material Tests And Liner Selection 111
Appendix B Chute Control Philosophy 116
The optimisation of transfer chutes in the bulk materials industry
MN van Aarde
viii
LIST OF FIGURES
LIST OF FIGURES
Figure 1 Growth in global crude steel production from 1996 to 2006 [2] 2
Figure 2 Typical in-line transfer point [6] 4
Figure 3 90deg transfer point [7J 4
Fig ure 4 Material lump sizes through a crushing plant 6
Figure 5 Stacker Reclaimer in reclaiming mode 7
Figure 6 Typical dead box [11J9
Figure 7 Typical cascade chute [11] 9
Figure 8 Typical dynamic chute [12] 10
Figure 9 Radial door used in chutes under ore passes or silos [11] 1 0
Figure 10 Flopper gate diverting material to different receiving conveyors [11J 11
Figure 11 Ch ute liner degradation 12
Figure 12 Results of continuous belt wear at transfer points 13
Figure 1 Dust from a transfer point onto a stockpie13
Figure 14 Ceramic composite liners [18]15
Figure 15 Benetech Inteliflow J-Glide transfer chute [19] 16
Figure 16 Flow simulation of the Benetech Ineliflo chute [19] 17
Figure 17 Four step process for plant design and commissioning [1] 27
Figure 18 Vertical curve on incline conveyor 28
Figure 19 Protective roller on a transfer chute 29
Figure 20 Geometry of the impact plate and material trajectory [30J30
Figure 21 Model for the impact of a particle on a flat surface [29] 31
Figure 22 Ore flow path in the curved chute onto the incline conveyor [31] 35
Figure 23 Gentle deceleration of the product before impact on the receiving belt
[32] 35
Figure 24 Typical feed chute discharge model [33] 37
Figure 25 Layout of conveyors for chute test work 43
Figure 26 Configuration of the existing transfer chute44
Figure 27 Clear chute indicating camera angle 46
The optimisation of transfer chutes in the bulk materials industry
MN van Aarde
ix
LIST OF FIGURES
Figure 28 Coarse material at 8 000 tlh 46
Figure 29 Fine material at 8 000 tlh 47
Figure 30 Blocked chute with coarse material at 8600 tIh 47
Figure 31 Damaged side skirt 49
Figure 32 View behind the chute of the receiving conveyor before loading 50
Figure 33 View behind the chute of the receiving conveyor during loading 50
Figure 34 Peak surges experienced during reclaiming operations 52
Figure 35 Stockyard head end layout 59
Figure 36 Dimensional constraints on the existing transfer configuration 60
Figure 37 Hood and spoon configuration for the 90deg transfer 63
Figure 38 Hood velocity profile 65
Figure 39 Spoon velocity profile 66
Figure 40 Chute cross section 67
Fig ure 43 Honeycomb wear box positioning 69
Figure 44 Wear box in the hood section 70
Figure 45 Spacing arrangement of honeycomb ribs inside the hood 71
Figure 46 Wear box in the spoon section 72
Figure 47 Liner detail of the spoon honeycomb wear box 73
Figure 41 Spoon in the operational position 74
Figure 42 Spoon in the non operational position 75
Figure 48 Flow analysis examples a) separation and screening b) hoppers
feeders [36J 80
Figure 49 Simulations results from Fluenttrade [4OJ 83
Figure 50 Simulation results from Bulk Flow Analysttrade [41J83
Figure 51 Determination of material properties for an accurate angle of repose88
Figure Actual material flow with coarse Sat 10 000 tIh 89
Figure 53 Material flow pattem through the existing chute 90
Figure 54 Cross sectional side view of material flow through the existing chute91
Figure 55 Material flow through hood at 10 000 tlh 92
Figure 56 Material flow through spoon at 10 000 tlh 93
Figure 57 Determination of the optimum hood location 94
The optimisation of transfer chutes in the bulk materials industry
MN van Aarde
x
OF FIGURES
Figure 58 Material behaviour through hood 96
Figure 59 Material behaviour through spoon 96
The optimisation of transfer chutes in the bulk materials industry
MN van Aarde
xi
LIST OF TABLES
LIST OF TABLES
Table 1 Design Input Reference Requirements [24J 24
Table 2 Iron are grades used for chute test work 45
Table 3 Results from test programme 54
The optimisation of transfer chutes in the bulk materials industry
M N van Aarde
xii
---------------------------------
CV
NOMENCLATURE
NOMENCLATURE
SCADA
CCTV
CEMA
DEM
kPa
mm
MSHA
ms
mt
MW
NIOSH
OSHA
RampD
tlh
3D
Supervisory Control And Data Acquisition
Closed Circuit Television
Conveyor Equipment Manufacturers Association
Conveyor
Discrete Element Method
Kilopascal
Millimetres
Mine Safety and Health Administration
Metres per second
Metric Tons
Megawatt
National Institute for Occupational Safety and Health
Occupational Safety and Health Administration
Radius of curvature
Research and Development
Tons per hour
Three Dimensional
The optimisation of transfer chutes in the bulk materials industry
MN van Aarde
xiii
CHAPTER 1
CHAPTER 1 INTRODUCTION TO TRANSFER CHUTES IN THE BULK
MATERIALS HANDLING INDUSTRY
The optimisation of transfer chutes in the bulk materials industry
MN van Aarde
1
CHAPTER 1
11 INTRODUCTION TO TRANSFER CHUTES
111 Bulk material handling industry
In order to comprehend the utilisation of transfer chutes fully it is imperative to
first understand the industry in which it is used Transfer chutes are most
commonly used in the bulk materials handling industry Bulk materials handling
operations perform a key function in a great number and variety of industries
throughout the world as stated in 1978 by Arnold McLean and Roberts [1 J
The nature of materials handling and scale of industrial operation varies from
industry to industry and country to country These variations are based on the
industrial and economic capacity and requirements of the specific industry or
country Regardless of the variations in industry the relative costs of storing
handling and transporting bulk materials are in the majority of cases very
significant
o
Figure 1 Growth in global crude steel production from 1996 to 2006 [2J
The optimisation of transfer chutes in the bulk materials industry
MN van Aarde
2
CHAPTER 1
The chart from BHP Billiton shown in Figure 1 provides a clear indication of the
actual drivers of global materials demand Figure 1 indicates the percentage
growth in crude steel production from all the major role players between 1996
and 2006 China accounted for 65 of the 494 million tonnes of global steel
production growth between 1996 and 2006 Europe grew by 6 while the other
countries grew by 20 [2]
These figures emphasise that bulk materials handling performs a key function in
the global industry and economy [1] Because of market requirements new
products continuously evolve This is also true for the field of bulk conveying
technologies [3] It can be assumed that the evolution of new technology is due
to the requirement for more efficient and cost effective operation
The case study which will be discussed from Chapter 3 onwards is an iron ore
export facility This facility exports approximately 50 million tonnes per annum
With each hour of down time the financial losses equate to approximately
R750 000 This highlights the fact that handling systems should be designed and
operated with a view to achieving maximum efficiency and reliability
112 Function of transfer chutes
BS2890 (Specification for Troughed Belt Conveyors) gives the definition for
transfer chutes as follows A straight curved or spiral open topped or enclosed
smooth trough by which materials are directed and lowered by gravity [4] For
any belt conveyor system to operate successfully the system requires that [5]
bull the conveyor belt be loaded properly
bull the material transported by the conveyor is discharged properly
The transfer of bulk material can either be from a belt bin hopper feeder or
stockpile and occurs at a transfer point In most cases this transfer point requires
optimisation of transfer chutes in the bulk materials industry
MN van Aarde
3
CHAPTER 1 - ----~--~--------------~--------
a transfer chute [5] In industry the most common use of transfer chutes is for
transferring bulk material from one conveyor belt to another This transfer of
material can be done in any direction as simplistically explained in Figure 2 and
Figure 3
Figure 2 Typical in-line transfer point [6J
Figure 2 shows a basic in-line transfer of material from the end of one conveyor
belt onto the start of another conveyor belt Figure 3 illustrates a more intricate
design where the direction of material transport is changed by an angle of 90 0 bull
This design or any other design entailing a directional change in flow normally
requires more detailed engineering [7
The optimisation of transfer chutes in the bulk materials industry
MN van Aarde
4
CHAPTER 1
Regardless of the direction or type of transfer there are some design
requirements that always need special attention Some of these requirements
are reduced wear on chute liners correct discharge velocity minimum material
degradation and minimum belt abrasion The correct design will also eliminate
blockages shape the load correctly and minimise the creation of dust [7]
12 VARIOUS APPLICATIONS AND CONFIGURATIONS OF TRANSFER CHUTES
The application of transfer chutes is central to any operation in the bulk handling
industry Whether it is mining operations storing stacking importing or
exporting of bulk material the transfer of material is always required On the
mining side the challenges involved with materials handling are probably some of
the most extreme
This is due to the great variation in lump sizes that must be catered for At
Sishen iron ore mine seven iron ore products are produced conforming to
different chemical and physical specifications The current mining process at
Sishen entails [8]
bull Removal of topsoil and stockpiling
bull Drilling and blasting of ore
bull Loading of iron ore and transporting to the crushers
bull Crushing and screening into size fractions
bull Beneficiation of all size fractions
bull Stockpiling onto various product beds
The processes with the most intricate and complex chute arrangements are
probably crushing and screening as well as stacking and reclaiming of material
The optimisation of transfer chutes in the bulk materials industry
11 N van Aarde
5
CHAPTER 1
121 Crushing
An excavator or wheeled loader transfers the rock to be crushed into the feed
hopper of the primary crusher The primary crusher breaks the large rock
boulders or run of mine material into smaller grain sizes Some of the bigger
crushers in the industry can crack boulders that are about one cubic meter in
size All the crushed material passes over a screen to separate the different
lump sizes The material that falls through the screen is transferred via a series
of transfer chutes and conveyor belts to the stockpile area [9]
Where the material does not pass through the screen another system of transfer
chutes and conveyor belts transfers this material to a secondary crusher The
material is fed into this crusher via a transfer chute from the discharge of a
conveyor belt All the processed material is then transferred to the stockpile area
via a separate series of transfer chutes and conveyor systems [9] Throughout
this whole process the material lump size changes and with it the transfer chute
requirements
Figure 4 Material lump sizes through a crushing plant
The optimisation of transfer chutes in the bulk materials industry
MN van Aarde
6
CHAPTER 1
Figure 4 shows some spillage from a conveyor between a primary and secondary
crusher The shovel in the picture provides a good reference as to the variation
in material lump size on the walkway
122 Stacking and Recaiming
Normally the stockyard area has an elongated yard conveyor for moving bulk
material in the longitudinal direction of the stockyard Straddling the yard
conveyor transversely is the rail mounted undercarriage of the stacker reclaimer
Three main chutes transfer material through the machine [10] Figure 5 shows
this machine in action while reclaiming material from a stockpile
Figure 5 Stacker Reclaimer in reclaiming mode
The first chute will transfer material to the incline conveyor of the machine when
the material has to be stacked on the stockpile In the case where the material
must bypass the machine this chute will transfer material from the tripper back
onto the yard conveyor [10]
The optimisation of transfer chutes in the bulk materials industry
MN van Aarde
7
CHAPTER 1
The second chute transfers material from the incline conveyor onto the boom
conveyor This is normally a difficult process because the boom conveyor is
never in the same direction as the incline conveyor From the end of the boom
conveyor the material is Simply discharged onto the stockpile [10]
When reclaiming stockpile material the bucket whee at the head end of the
boom conveyor scoops up material and deposits it back onto the boom conveyor
From here it is discharged into the centre chute of the machine This chute then
discharges the material onto the yard conveyor for further processing In some
cases the bottom section of this centre chute must be moved out of the way to
allow free passage of material discharged from the tripper chute onto the yard
conveyor [10]
123 Chute configurations
Various chute configurations are used in the bulk materials handling industry
These configurations depend on the specific requirements of the system layout
or material properties There are basically two main configurations consisting of
dead box chutes and dynamic chutes Both of these configurations have their
specific applications in industry The major difference is that dead box chutes
use the material being transferred as a chute liner whereas dynamic chutes are
lined with a high wear resistant material A combination of both can also be
used
If the material being transferred is relatively dry such as goid ore dead boxes
prove to be more beneficial One of the applications of a ded box is to absorb
the direct impact of material discharged from a conveyor into a head chute as
can be seen in Figure 6 Other applications are in long or high transfer points In
these transfers the momentum of falling material must be reduced before
reaching the receiving conveyor belt in order to reduce wear of the belt [11]
The optimisation of transfer chutes in the bulk materials industry
MN van Aarde
8
CHAPTER 1
Figure 6 Typical dead box [11]
As shown in Figure 7 dead boxes are also used to accomplish changes in the
vertical flow direction by inserting angled panels This configuration where dead
boxes are used as deflection plates or impact wear plates is known as a cascade
chute In this case the deflection plate or the impact wear plate hardness is
equal to that of the feed material [11]
Figure 7 Typical cascade chute [11]
The hood and spoon chute or dynamic chute is configured so that the hood
catches and changes the material trajectory path to exit with a vertical velocity
When the material impacts the spoon it slides down the smooth spoon surface
The material flow direction is changed to the direction of the receiving conveyor
as shown in Figure 8 [12]
The optimisation of transfer chutes in the bulk materials industry
MN van Aarde
9
CHAPTER 1
Figure 8 Typical dynamic chute [12J
Ancillary equipment used with this configuration of chutes is radial doors and
flopper gates Radial doors are used successfully below ore passes or silos for
an onoff feed control as shown by Figure 9 One drawback of radial doors is the
possibility of jamming while closing In order to counteract this problem a
knocker arm between the cylinder door and the rod can be added This helps to
close the door with full force open with reduced force or hammered open [11]
Figure 9 Radial door used in chutes under ore passes or silos [11J
The optimisation of transfer chutes in the bulk materials industry
MN van Aarde
10
CHAPTER 1
The function of a f10pper gate is to divert the flow of material in a chute when one
conveyor is required to feed either of two discharge points as shown in Figure 10
For this same purpose a diverter car can also be used where a section of the
chute moves in and out of the path of material flow The critical area in the
design of a flop per gate is the hinge point In order for the gate to be self
cleaning the hinge point should be placed above the apex of the double chute
This also prevents rock traps that can jam the gate [11]
COVERED
Figure 10 Flopper gate diverling material to different receiving conveyors [11J
13 RECURRING CHUTE PROBLEMS AND COUNTERMEASURES FROM INDUSTRY
Transfer chutes are a fundamental link when conveying ore and therefore it is
important to get it right at the outset of design and fabrication Design and
fabrication issues can cause numerous problems when transferring material
Historically conveyor system design focused on the systems overall structural
integrity while ensuring that the equipment would fit within the facilitys
constraints [13] [14] [15]
The optimisation of transfer chutes in the bulk materials industry
MN van Aarde
11
CHAPTER 1
Little attention was given to design analysis or consideration for material flow
characteristics Normally the solution for controlling flow was to implement
simple rock boxes [15] This type of chute configuration is still commonly used in
industry but with more emphasis on the flow of material The most recurrent
problems on transfer chutes are [13] [14]
bull Spillage
bull Blocked chutes
bull High wear on the receiving belt due to major differences between the
material velocity and the belt velocity
bull Rapid chute wear
bull Degradation of the material being transferred
bull Excessive generation of dust and noise
bull Miss tracking of the receiving conveyor belt due to skew loading from the
transfer chute
Figure 11 Chute liner degradation
Figure 11 shows the excessive wear on ceramic tiles where the material
trajectory from the feeding belt impacts the chute These tiles are replaceable
and a maintenance schedule normally specifies the replacement intervals A
The optimisation of transfer chutes in the bulk materials industry 12
MN van Aarde
CHAPTER 1
problem arises when the frequency of these maintenance intervals is too high
due to excessive wear on the liners
Figure 12 Results of continuous belt wear at transfer points
The conveyor belt can account for up to 60 of the capital cost of a bulk
materials handling plant This means that the cost implications of constant
replacement of a conveyor belt due to wear can become significantly higher
than the original capital investment [16] Figure 12 shows the extreme damage
on a conveyor belt caused by abrasion and gouging
Figure 13 Dust from a transfer point onto a stockpile
The optimisation of transfer chutes in the bulk materials industry
MN van Aarde
13
CHAPTER 1 --~ ---------------------------shy
The presence of dust is an indisputable fact in many industries concerned with
the handling or processing of products such as coal mineral ores and many
others [17] As in the case of spillage it is easy to identify transfer systems that
cause dust clouds Environmental regulations are in place to prevent excessive I
dust emissions
Government organisations such as the Occupational Safety and Health
Administration (OSHA) the Mine Safety and Health Administration (MSHA) and
the National Institute for Occupational Safety and Health (NIOSH) closely monitor
dust levels at all coal handling facilities [13] Therefore it is imperative that the
chute design process caters for limiting dust emissions
Systems normally used in industry are enclosed skirting systems bag houses
and dust collectors This however is only treating the symptom rather than
eliminating the primary cause In order to minimise dust generation the use of
low impact angles and minimal chute contact is required (14] One of the most
successful methods of controlling dust is atomised water spray systems using a
combination of high pressure water and chemical substances
Over the years considerable research has gone into minimising wear on transfer
chutes There are currently a few different liner types to choose from depending
on the configuration and application of the chute These include ceramic tiles
chrome carbide overlay materials and typi~al hardened steel plates such as
VRN A combination of liner materials can also be used similar to the one
shown in Figure 14
The opUmisation of transfer chutes in the bulk materials industry
MN van Aarde
14
CHAPTER 1
Figure 14 Ceramic composite liners [18J
This ceramic composite liner is an example of the new technology available in
chute lining materials It is a high wear resistant surface made from cylindrical
alumina ceramic pellets bound within a resilient rubber base The purpose of this
material is to provide wear resistance through the use of ceramics while the
rubber dampens the impact forces [18]
Some innovative concepts for chute design have been implemented since the
materials handling industry started to incorporate new ideas Benetech Inc
installed a new generation hood and spoon type chute at Dominions 1200 MW
Kincaid coal powered generating station as shown in Figure 15 This chute
replaced the conventional dead box chute [19] Their innovation is to use a pipe
configuration combined with the hood and spoon concept
The optimisation of transfer chutes in the bulk materials industry
MN van Aarde
15
CHAPTER 1
Figure 15 Benetech Inteliflow J-Gide transfer chute [19J
This chute has sufficient chute wall slope and cross sectional area to prevent
material build-up and blocked chutes Reduced collision forces in the chute
minimize material degradation and the creation of excessive dust The material
velocity in the chute is controlled by the wall angles to obtain a discharge velocity
with the same horizontal component as the belt velocity [19] Figure 16 shows a
flow simulation of the Benetech concept The simulation shows that this concept
will result in lower impact forces and reduce belt abrasion
The optimisation of transfer chutes in the bulk materials industry
MN van Aarde
16
CHAPTER 1
Figure 16 Flow simulation ofthe Benetech Ineliflo chute [19J
CBP Engineering Corp also considers the concept of pipe type sections to be
the answer to most of the transfer chute problems They describe it as a curved
or half round chute The modern perception is to gently guide the material in the
required direction rather than use a square box design or deflector doors which
turns or deflects the flow [20]
The industry is striving towards developing new technology in transfer chute
design One solution is to incorporate soft loading transfer chutes to alter the
material flow direction with minimum impact on the side walls of chute and
receiving conveyor As experienced by many industries these types of chutes
can transfer material onto the receiving conveyor at almost the same velocity as
the conveyor By doing so many of the problems with material transfer can be
eliminated [13]
Most of these solutions as proposed by industry only address a few of the
numerous problems experienced with transfer chutes The dynamic hood and
The optimisation of transfer chutes in the bulk materials industry
MN van Aarde
17
CHAPTER 1
spoon chute appears to afford the best opportunity for solving most of the
problems There are still however many unanswered questions surrounding this
design
Figure 11 shows the installation of a hood type chute in the iron ore industry It is
clear from this image that liner wear in the higher impact areas is still an area of
concern Improvements can still be made to this design in order to further
enhance its performance
14 PURPOSE OF THIS RESEARCH
The bulk materials handling industry is constantly facing the challenge of
implementing transfer chutes that satisfy all the system requirements Problems
such as high wear spillage blockages and the control of material flow are just
some of the major challenges faced by the industry
The objective of this research is to identify problems experienced with transfer
chutes of an existing bulk handling system and to apply current design solutions
in eliminating these problems In doing so the research aims to introduce a new
method of minimising liner wear caused by high impact velocities
Dynamic chutes are discussed in particular where the entire design process
addresses the problems identified on chutes in brown field projects Approaching
chute design from a maintenance point of view with the focus on reducing liner I
degradation will provide a fresh approach to transfer chute design The
concepts disc~ssed in this dissertation (dynamic and dead box chutes) are
commonly used in industry However some research is done to determine
whether a combination of these concepts can solve some of the problems
experienced by industry
The optimisation of transfer chutes in the bulk materials industry 18
MN van Aarde
CHAPTER 1
At the hand of all the information provided in this dissertation its purpose is to
enable the chute designers to better understand the process of chute
optimisation and design This is achieved through the discussion of a case study
where the chutes are evaluated and re-designed to achieve the desired
performance
15 SYNOPSIS OF THIS DISSERTATION
Chapter 1 gives an introduction to the bulk materials industry and the role that
transfer chutes plays in this industry Some of the problems that the industries
have been experiencing with transfer chutes were identified and the diverse
solutions to these problems discussed These solutions were reviewed to
identify whether improvement would be possible
Chapter 2 provides a better understanding of the functionality and the
conceptualisation of transfer chutes as well as investigating the theory behind
material flow through transfer chutes This theory reviews the research and
design objectives used as a guideline when approaching a new chute
configuration The guidelines for evaluating and designing transfer chutes are
used to verify the performance of these chutes in the iron ore industry
Chapter 3 identifies some practical problems experienced on transfer chutes a~
an existing bulk transfer facility These problems are identified through a series
of tests where the actual flow inside the chutes is monitored via CCTV cameras
The results obtained from these tests are specific to this facility but can provide
insight into the cause of some problems generally experienced in the industry
These results can provide helpful information when modifying or re-designing
new transfer chutes
Chapter 4 uses the theory discussed in Chapter 2 to conceptualise a new
transfer chute configuration for the transfer points that were tested All the facility
The optimisation of transfer chutes in the bulk materials industry 19
MN van Aarde
CHAPTER 1
constraints are taken into account during the process in order to obtain an
optimum solution to the problems identified during the chute test work The old
chutes did not have major problems with liner wear due to large dead boxes
However this remains a serious consideration for the new dynamic chute design
due to its configuration where there is continuous sliding abrasion of the chute
surface A new concept for the reduction of liner degradation is introduced in this
chapter
Before manufacturing and installing this new concept it is important to verify that
it will perform according to conceptual design Chapter 5 is a discussion on the
use of the Discrete Element Method as a verification tool A simulation of the
new transfer chute concept is done to visualise the behaviour of the material as it
passes through the new transfer chute configuration
Chapter 6 discusses the benefits of the new transfer chute configuration A
conclusion is made as to what the financial implications will be with the
implementation of this new concept Recommendations are made for future
studies in the field of bulk materials handling These recommendations focus on
the optimisation of processes and the reduction of maintenance cost to the
facility
The optimisation of transfer chutes in the bulk materials industry
MN van Aarde
20
CHAPTER 2
CHAPTER 2 BASIC CONSIDERATIONS IN CHUTE DESIGN
The optimisation of transfer chutes in the bulk materials industry
MN van Aarde
21
CHAPTER 2
21 PREFACE
In an economic driven world the pressure for production is often the cause of the
loss of production This is a bold statement and is more factual than what the
industry would like to admit This is also valid in the bulk materials handling
industry Production targets seldom allow time for investigation into the root
cause of the problems The quick fix option is often adopted but is frequently the
cause of even more maintenance stoppages
Existing chutes on brown field projects often fail due to an initial disregard for the
design criteria changes in the system parameters or lack of maintenance
These transfer points are often repaired on site by adding or removing platework
and ignoring the secondary functions of a transfer chute Therefore it is
imperative to always consider the basic chute specifications when addressing a
material transfer problem [21]
22 DESIGN OBJECTIVES
In the quest to improve or design any transfer point some ground rules must be
set This can be seen as a check list when evaluating an existing chute or
designing a new chute Transfer chutes should aim to meet the following
requirements as far as possible [21] [22] [23]
bull Ensure that the required capacity can be obtained with no risk of blockage
bull Eliminate spillage
bull Minimise wear on all components and provide the optimal value life cycle
solution
bull Minimise degradation of material and generation of excessive dust
bull Accommodate and transfer primary and secondary scraper dribblings onto
the receiving conveyor
The optimisation of transfer chutes in the bulk materials industry
MN van Aarde
22
CHAPTER 2
bull Ensure that any differences between the flow of fine and coarse grades are
catered for
bull Transfer material onto the receiving conveyor so that at the feed point onto
the conveyor
bull the component of the material now (parallel to the receiving conveydr) is as
close as possible to the belt velocity (at least within 10) to minimise the
power required to accelerate the material and to minimise abrasive wear of
the belt
bull the vertical velocity component of the material flow is as low as possible so
as to minimise wear and damage to the belt as well as to minimise spillage
due to material bouncing off the belt
bull The flow is centralised on the belt and the lateral flow is minimised so as
not to affect belt tracking and avoid spillage
With the design of a new chute there are up to 46 different design inputs with 19
of these being absolutely critical to the success of the design Some of the most
critical preliminary design considerations are shown in Table 1 [24]
The optimisation of transfer chutes in the bulk materials industry
MN van Aarde
23
CHAPTER 2
Table 1 Design Input Reference Requirements [24J
Aria Unit
Feed Conveyor
Belt Speed r ms
Belt Width mm
JibHead Pulley Dia mm
Pulley Width mm
Angle to Horizontal at the Head Pulley degrees
Belt Troughing Angle degrees
Sight Height Data
Feed Conveyor Top of Belt to Roof mm
Drop Height mm
Receiving Conveyor Top of Belt to Floor mm
Receiving Conveyor
Belt Speed ms
Belt Width mm
Belt Thickness mm
Angle of Intersection degrees
Angle to Horizontal degrees
Belt Troughing Angle degrees
Material Properties
Max Oversize Lump (on top) mm
Max Oversize Lump (on top) degrees
studies done by Jenike and Johanson Inc have identified six design principles
that can serve as a guideline in chute optimisation exercises These six
principles focus on the accelerated flow in the chute which they identified as the
most critical mode [25]
Within accelerated flow the six problem areas identified by Jenike and Johanson
Inc are [25]
The optimisation of transfer chufes in the bulk materials industry
MN van Aarde
24
CHAPTER 2
bull plugging of chutes at the impact points
bull insufficient cross sectional area
bull uncontrolled flow of material
bull excessive wear on chute surfaces
bull excessive generation of dust
bull attrition or breakdown of particles
221 Plugging of chutes
In order to prevent plugging inside the chute the sliding surface inside the chute
must be sufficiently smooth to allow the material to slide and to clean off the most
frictional bulk solid that it handles This philosophy is particularly important
where the material irnpacts on a sliding surface Where material is prone to stick
to a surface the sliding angle increases proportionally to the force with which it
impacts the sliding surface In order to minimise material velocities and excessive
wear the sliding surface angle should not be steeper than required [25]
222 Insufficient cross sectional area
The cross section of the stream of material inside the chute is a function of the
velocity of flow Therefore it is critical to be able to calculate the velocity of the
stream of material particles at any point in the chute From industry experience a
good rule of thumb is that the cross section of the chute should have at least two
thirds of its cross section open at the lowest material velocity [25] When the
materialis at its lowest velocity it takes up a larger cross section of chute than at
higher velocities Therefore this cross section is used as a reference
223 Uncontrolled flow of material
Due to free falling material with high velocities excessive wear on chutes and
conveyor belt surfaces are inevitable Therefore it is more advantageous to
The optimisation of transfer chutes in the bulk materials industry
MN van Aarde
25
CHAPTER 2
have the particles impact the hood as soon as possible with a small impact
angle after discharge from the conveyor With the material flowing against the
sloped chute walls instead of free falling the material velocity can be controlled
more carefully through the chute [25]
224 Excessive wear on chute surfaces
Free flowing abrasive materials do not normally present a large wear problem
The easiest solution to this problem is to introduce rock boxes to facilitate
material on material flow Chute surfaces that are subjected to fast flowing
sticky and abrasive materials are the most difficult to design
A solution to this problem is to keep the impact pressure on the chute surface as
low as possible This is done by designing the chute profile to follow the material
trajectory path as closely as possible By doing so the material is less prone to
stick to the chute surface and the material velocity will keep the chute surface
clean [25]
225 Excessive generation of dust
Material flowing inside a transfer chute causes turbulence in the air and
excessive dust is created In order to minimise the amount of dust the stream of
material must be kept in contact with the chute surface as far as possible The
material stream must be compact and all impact angles against the chute walls
must be minimised A compact stream of material means that the material
particles are flowing tightly together At the chute discharge point the material
velocity must be as close as possible to the velocity of the receiving belt [25]
The optimisation of transfer in the bulk materials industry
M N van Aarde
26
CHAPTER 2
226 Attrition or breakdown of particles
The break up of particles is more likely to occur when large impact forces are
experienced inside a chute than on smooth sliding surfaces Therefore in most
cases the attrition of material particles can be minimised by considering the
following guidelines when designing a transfer chute minimise the material
impact angles concentrate the stream of material keep the material stream in
contact with the chute surface and keep the material velocity constant as far as
possible [25]
23 INTEGRATING A MORE APPROPRIATE CHUTE LAYOUT WITH THE PLANT
CONSTRAINTS
According to Tunra Bulk Solids in Australia the process for design and
commissioning of a new plant basically consists of four steps The entire
process is based on understanding the properties of the material to be
handled [1]
RampD CENTRE CONSULTING CONTRACTOR ENGINEERING AND PLANT
COMPANY OPERATOR r-------------- I TESTING Of CONCEPTUAl I DETAILED DESIGN CONSTRUCTION amp
I BULKSOUDS - DESIGN COMMISSIONING- I shyI Flow Proper1ies Lining Material tuet Equipment
Selection Procurement _ I I
I I
I Flow Pat1erns SSlpment Quality Control I
I IFeeder Loads amp Process Performance
I Power I Optimisation Assessment I I
L J -
I IBin Loads I I I Wear Predictions I
FEEDBACK I I I IModel Studigt L _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ J
i ~ FEEDBACK r-shyFigure 17 Four step process for plant design and commissioning [1J
The optimisation of transfer chutes in the bulk materials industry
MN van Aarde
27
CHAPTER 2
Figure 17 illustrates this four step process These steps are a good guideline in
order to incorporate a more appropriate chute layout for the plant constraints
This is an iterative process where all the possible solutions to a problem are
measured against all the possible plant constraints This section focuses more
on the second column of Figure 17 and specifically on structures and equipment
During this stage of design the utilisation of 3D parametric modelling also creates
an intimate and very accurate communication between the designer and the
project engineer or client This effective communication tool will save time and
improve the engineering process [24]
A good example of obtaining an appropriate chute layout for the plant constraints
can be explained as follows On an existing plant a transfer point will have a
specific transfer height from the top of the feed conveyor to the top of the
receiving conveyor If the feed conveyor has an incline section to obtain the
required transfer height it will also have a curve in the vertical plane of that
incline section This curve has a certain minimum radius in order to keep the belt
on the idlers at high belt tensions [26]
Figure 18 Vertical curve on incline conveyor
The optimisation of transfer chutes in the bulk materials industry
MN van Aarde
28
CHAPTER 2
If the transfer height at a transfer point is changed the path of the feeding
conveyor should always be taken into consideration With an increase in transfer
height the vertical curve radius will increase as well in order to prevent the
conveyor from lifting off the idlers in the curve This will require expensive
modifications to conveyor structures and therefore in most cases be a pointless
exercise Figure 18 shows clearly the large radius required to obtain a vertical
curve in a belt conveyor
Other considerations on brown field projects might be lift off of the receiving
conveyor at start up before or after the vertical curve This is caused by peaks
in belt tension at start up which may cause the belt to lift off the idlers and chafe
against the chute In some cases this can be solved by fitting a roller as shown
in Figure 19 to the underside of the chute to protect it from being damaged by
the belt or to protect the belt from being damaged by the chute The position of
this specific chute is just after a vertical curve where the belt tends to lift off at
start up
Figure 19 Protective roller on a transfer chute
The optimisation of transfer chutes in the bulk materials industry
MN van Aarde
29
CHAPTER 2
24 INVESTIGATING THE CORRECT CHUTE PROFILE FOR REDUCED LINER WEAR
In order to reduce chute wear the curved-profile variable chute concept is
introduced [27] This concept was originally developed by Professor Roberts for
the grain industry in 1969 [28] After many years of research and investigation
CMR Engineers and Project managers (pty) Ltd came to the following
conclusion any improvement in coal degradation dust generation and chute
wear can only be achieved by avoiding high impact forces or reducing them as
much as possible [27]
At any impact point of material in a chute or conveyor kinetic energy is
dissipated This increases material degradation and wear on liners and conveyor
belt covers Therefore it is good practise to redirect the kinetic energy in a
useful manner This action will help to reduce liner and belt wear [32]
x
Vo
- ImpactPlate
Figure 20 Geometry of the impact plate and material trajectory [30J
The optimisation of transfer chutes n the bulk materials industry
MN van Aarde
30
CHAPTER 2
The path followed by the material discharged over the end pulley of a belt
conveyor is known as its trajectory and is a function of the discharge velocity of
the material from the conveyor [29] Figure 20 shows the material trajectory as
weI as the radius and location of the impact plate In the case of dynamic chutes
this impact plate represents the back plate of the chute
The correct chute profile to reduce wear must cater for the proper location of the
chute covers and wearing plates This location depends upon the path of the
trajectory which must be predicted as accurately as possible
Figure 21 Mode for the impact of a particle on a flat surface [29]
Figure 21 illustrates a material particle impinging on a flat chute surface at an
angle of approach 91 and with approach velocity V1 This particle will then
rebound off the chute plate at an angel 92 and velocity V2 The wear on the
chute liners or the surface shown in Figure 21 will be a function of the vector
change in momentum of the particle One component will be normal to and the
other component parallel to the flat surface The parallel component is referred
to as the scouring component along the surface [29]
It is important to determine the radius of curvature of material within the
trajectory It is now a simple exercise to determine the chute hood radius
depending on plant constraints Firstly the material trajectory must be calculated
The optimisation of transfer chutes in the bulk materials industry
MN van Aarde
31
CHAPTER 2 ---~----------------
According to the mechanical handling engineers association in Perth Australia it
is beneficial to keep the impact angle as small as possible Impact angle less
than 20deg are recommended for most liner materials This will ensure an
acceptably small impulse force component normal to the surface The r~te at
which the material is gouging away the chute liner at the impact point will be
reduced [29]
The material trajectory is determined by equation l
(1)
Where the origin of the x and y axis is taken at the mean material height h and
the discharge point on the pulley as shown in Figure 20 The variables involved
in the calculation of the material trajectory are [30]
y =vertical position on the grid where the trajectory is determined
x = position parallel to the receiving belt line where the trajectory is determined
v = material speed
g =gravitational constant
a =inclination angle of the feeding conveyor
After the material leaves the belt a simplified assumption can be made that it
falls under gravity It is quite clear that in order to minimise the impact angle
the impact plate must follow the path of the material trajectory as far as possible
It will almost never be possible to obtain a contact point between the material and
the chute where there is a smooth contact with no impact angle
This radius of curvature of the material tr~jectory is determined as follows [30
The optimisation of transfer chutes in the bulk materials industry i 32
MN van Aarde
CHAPTER 2
[1 + ( gx )]15 R = vcos8
c (2)
vcos8
Where
g == gravitational constant
v == material speed
8 == Angle at discharge
In order to simplify the manufacturing process of a curved chute the radius must
be constant For a relatively smooth contact between the material and the chute
plate the radius of the curved chute at the point of contact is as close as
possible to the material discharge curvature radius [30] This is rarely possible
on brown field projects due to facility constraints In this case there will be higher
probability for rapid liner wear Each situation must be individually assessed to
determine the best solution
Cross sectional dimensions of the transfer chute must be sufficient to collect the
material and ensure continuous flow without causing blockages At the same
time the chute profile must not result in excessive material speed Material
speed inside the chute will be considered to be excessive when it can not be
controlled to exit the chute at approximately the same velocity to that of the
receiving conveyor Chutes may block for the following reasons [29]
bull Mechanical bridging due to large lumps locking into one another
bull Insufficient cross section causing cohesive material to choke or bridge
bull Inadequate chute inclination causing fines build-up
bull Corner effects or cohesion causing material to stick to the chute walls
The optimisation of transfer chutes in the bulk materials industry
MN van Aarde
33
CHAPTER 2
For the handling of large lumps of material field experience has shown that the
chute cross sectional area should be 25 times the major dimension of the largest
lumps To avoid possible bridging of the material in the chute the
recommendation is to make the inner chute volume as large as possible This
will be guided by the support steelwork around the transfer point [29]
Field experience has shown that it is advisable depending on the material being
transferred that the chute inclination angles be no less than 65deg to 700 Cornerbull
effects should also be avoided where material gets stuck in the inner corners of
chute plate work These angles should preferably be no less than 70 0 bull
25 FEED CHUTE GEOMETRY FOR REDUCED BELT WEAR
The design parameters to reduce both chute and belt wear are interrelated
Research done at the Phalaborwa copper mine is a good case study to prove the
concept of a curved chute profile This mine had specific problems with high belt
wear at transfer points At this facility an in-pit 60 x 89 gyratory crusher and
incline tunnel conveyor was commissioned to haul primary crushed ore A
conventional dead box chute transfers ore from the crusher to a 1800 mm wide
incline conveyor [31]
The maximum lump size handled by this section of the facility is 600 mm (60 kg)
An 18 mm thick top cover was specified for this conveyor with an X grade
rubber according to DIN (abrasion value lt 100 mm) This belt had an original
warranty of 10 years After 35 years the top cover started to show signs of
excessive wear and the tensile cords of the 18 mm thick cover were visible [31]
In April 1994 Phalaborwa commissioned the curved chute concept and a new
belt on the incline conveyor Six months after commissioning no gouging or
pitting damage was evident The material velocity through this curved chute onto
the incline conveyor is shown in Figure 22 [31]
The optimisation of transfer chutes in the bulk materials industry
MN van Aarde
34
CHAPTER 2
VELOCITY ( m I aec ) _ nm _ bull m _ 1211 _ UTI _ U16
_ IIU _ Im _ I rn _ 171-111 _ u n _ ~ l
_ 4 ~
_ 41 _ 4
141 CJ UtiI 1bull-bull 1t5
~ 1m bull UI2
Material Flow Velocity Gradient
Figure 22 Ore flow path in the curved chute onto the incline conveyor [31]
TENDENCY TO FORM STAGNANT LAYER LEADING
TO INSTABILITY IN DEPTH OF FLOW
C8middotFLOW IN CURVED CHUTES
Figure 23 Gentle deceleration of the product before impact on the receiving belt [32]
The optimisation of transfer chutes in the bulk materials industry
MN van Aarde
35
CHAPTER 2
Figure 23 illustrates the gentle deceleration of material that is achieved with the
curved chute concept This helps to reduce belt wear because it is relatively
easy to discharge the material at the same velocity as the receiving conveyor
The material speed v can be calculated at any point in the chute using equation
3 and equation 4 [33]
v 2~R [(2ue2 -l)sin(O) +3ue cos(O)] + Ke 2uB (3) 4ue +1
This equation is only applicable if the curved section of the chute has a constant
radius Rand I-Ie is assumed constant at an average value for the stream [33]
I-Ie = friction coefficient
8 = angle between the horizontal and the section of the spoon where the velocity
is determined and
(4)
The optimisation of transfer chutes in the bulk materjas industry
MN van Aarde
36
CHAPTER 2
Mass Flow Rate Omh
Figure 24 Typical feed chute discharge model [33J
The velocity Ve at the discharge of the chute can be determined from equation 3
and equation 4 The components Vey and Vex of the discharge velocity as
shown in Figure 24 can now be calculated This investigation should aid the
optimisation of the chute profile in order to [33]
bull match the horisontal component Vex of the material exit velocity as close
as possible to the belt speed
bull reduce the vertical component Vey of the material exit velocity in order to
minimize abrasive wear on the receiving conveyor
26 CONCLUSION
This section discussed the technical background necessary for the optimisation
of transfer chutes on an existing iron ore plant which will be discussed in
Chapter 4 The focus is specifically aimed at reducing impact wear on chute liner
materials and abrasive wear on receiving conveyor belts Important to note from
The optimisation oftransfer chutes in the bulk materials industry
MN van Aarde
37
CHAPTER 2
this section is the acceptable limits of dynamic chute optimisation or design
These limits aremiddot
bull a material impact angle of less than 20deg
bull a variance of less than 10 between the receiving belt velocity and the
material discharge velocity component parallel to the receiving conveyor
An important aspect of chute optimisation is to consider the facility constraints
These constraints are in some cases flexible but in most cases the chute
optimisation process must be designed within these constraints This means that
any new concept will have to be measured against what is possible within the
facility limits
It is important to note that only the most common transfer chute problems were
mentioned in this chapter Other possible problems were not addressed in this
chapter as it is normally related to detail design issues Solutions to these
problems are unique to each type of chute and will be addressed for the specific
case study in Chapter 4
The optimisafjon of transfer chutes in the bulk materials industry
MN van Aarde
38
CHAPTER 3
The optimisation of transfer chutes in the bulk materials industry
MN van Aarde
CHAPTER 3 TESTS FOR THE IDENTIFICATION OF RECURRING
PROBLEMS ON EXISTING CHUTES
39
CHAPTER 3
31 PREFACE
Since the completion of a certain iron ore handling facility it has been
experiencing recurring material transfer problems at high capacities In order to
investigate the problem it was decided that performance testing of the chutes
should be carried out The purpose of these tests was to monitor chute
performance at transfer rates of up to the design capacity of 10 000 tlh for
various grades of iron ore handled by the facility Some of the methodologies
used in testing are only applicable to this specific facility
Due to variations and surges associated with the reclaim operations at the
facility performance testing focused on reclaim side chutes This means that all
the transfer points at the exit points of the stockyard conveyors were tested
Nineteen tests were conducted on various stockyard transfers Information such
as the specific facility or conveyor numbers cannot be disclosed due to the
confidentiality of information
To analyse SCADA data the stacker reclaimer scale is used to determine the
peak surges passing through the transfer under investigation The reason for
this is that the peaks in flow due to reclaiming operations flatten out when
passing through the transfer points This is due to chute throat limitations and
small variations in belt speeds If the down stream scales are used it would give
an inaccurate indication of the amount of ore that passed through the transfer
chute
32 TEST METHODOLOGY
A CCTV camera was installed in a strategic position inside the head chute of the
stockyard conveyors These cameras provided valuable information on the
physical behaviour of the material flow inside the transfer chutes Where
possible cameras were also placed on the receiving belt in front of and behind
The optimisation of transfer chutes in the bulk materials industry
MN van Aarde
40
CHAPTER 3
the chute This was done to monitor belt tracking and spillage A high frequency
radio link between the head chute and the control tower made it possible to
monitor the cameras at all times
SCADA data was used to determine and establish the condition of the material
transfer at the time of the test Data from various scales en route were obtained
as well as confirmation of blocked chute signals In analysing the SCADA data
the stacker reclaimer scale is used to determine the peak surges passing through
the transfer being tested
Data was recorded from a sampling plant at the facility This data provides the
actual characteristics of representative samples taken and analysed by the
sampling plant during the duration of the test The data gathered consist of
moisture content of the material sample as well as the size distribution of the ore
Where possible an inspector was placed at the transfer point being tested to
observe and record the performance The inspector had a two way radio for
communication with the test co-ordinator in the central control room He would
also be responsible for the monitoring of any spillage dust emissions etc that
may not be picked up by the cameras
Prior to commencing a test on a specific conveyor route the following checks
had to be performed on all the material conveying equipment
bull Clean out all transfer chutes and remove any material build-up from the
sidewalls
bull Check that feed skirts are properly in position on the belt
bull Check that the conveyor belt is tracking properly at no load
bull Check conveyor idlers are all in position and free to rotate
bull Check blocked chute detectors are operational and in the correct location
The optimisation of transfer chutes in the bulk materials industry
MN van Aarde
CHAPTER 3
bull Change the position of the blocked chute detector if required to improve its
fUnction
bull Test and confirm that the CCTV middotsystems are functioning correctly
bull Assign persons with 2 way radios and cameras to monitor and record the I
results at each transfer point on the route
33 CHUTE PERFORMANCE ACCEPTANCE CRITERIA
A material transfer chute performs to specification if it transfers a maximum of
10 000 tlh of a specific iron are grade without experiencing any of the following
problems
bull Material build up inside the chute or blocking the chute ie material is not
exiting the chute at the same rate as it is entering
bull Material spillage encountered from the top of the transfer chute
bull Material spillage encountered where material is loaded onto the receiving
conveyor
bull Belt tracking of the receiving conveyor is significantly displaced by the
loading of material from the transfer chute onto the conveyor
Tests were conducted over a period of one month and in such a short period
visible wear is difficult to quantify Due to the sensitivity of the information no
historical data in terms of chute or belt wear were made available by the facility
Therefore it is not part of the criteria for these specific tests Should a chute
however fail to perform according to the set criteria it validates the need for
modifications or new designs
34 DISCUSSION OF PROBLEM AREAS
The major concern during the test work is material flow at the transfer points
Secondary concerns are spillage tracking of the receiving belt and material
The optimisation of transfer chutes in the bulk materials industry
MN van Aarde
42
CHAPTER 3
loading onto the receiving belt One of the external factors that playa significant
role in material flow rate is the method and process of reclaiming This section
will highlight all the problem areas observed during the test work
Figure 25 shows the layout of the stockyard area This layout will serve as a
reference when the specific test results at each transfer point are discussed The
legends for Figure 25 are as follows
c=gt Transfer points where performance tests have been done
~ Direction that the conveyors are moving in
CV4 CV3 CV2 CV1
Figure 25 Layout of conveyors for chute test work
All four stockyard conveyors have a moving head arrangement This means that
the chutes are split up into two sections A moving head discharges material
onto either conveyor (CV) 5 or CV 6 via a static transfer chute The moving
head positions are shown by A Band C in Figure 25
The optimisation of transfer chutes in the bulk materials industry
MN van Aarde
43
CHAPTER 3
Position C is the purging or dump position This position is used when the
stacker reclaimer is in stacking mode and any material left on the stockyard
conveyor gets dumped The material does not end up on the stockpiles
preventing contamination
90 de-g TRANSFBt
OfAO BOX IN MOVING HEAD
Figure 26 Configuration of the existing transfer chute
Figure 26 shows the configuration of the existing transfer chutes These chutes
capture the trajectory from the head pulley in a dead box situated in the top part
of the chute The material then cascades down a series of smaller dead boxes
onto the receiving conveyor below
Various grades of iron ore were tested during the testing period These different
grades of iron ore are shown in Table 2 Three fine grades and four coarse
grades were used The coarse material is defined as particles with a diameter of
The optimisation of transfer chutes in the bulk materials industry
MN van Aarde
44
CHAPTER 3
between 12 mm and 34 mm and the fine material with diameters of between
4 mm and 12 mm
Table 2 Iron are grades used for chute test work
Material Predominant Lump Size
Fine K 5mm
Fine N 8mm
Fine A 8mm
Coarse K 25mm
Coarse D 34mm
Coarse S 12 mm
Coarse A 20mm
The CCTV cameras were placed inside the moving head pointing down into the
static chute overlooking the receiving conveyor Figure 27 shows the camera
angle used during testing This is a view of a clear chute before testing The
legends for clarification of all the video images are as follows
Front of the chute throat opening
Top of flowing material at the chute throat opening
Flow pattern of the material
Direction of the receiving belt
The optimisation of transfer chutes in the bulk materials industry
MN van Aarde
45
CHAPTER 3
Figure 27 Clear chute indicating camera angle
341 Coarse Material vs Fine Material
Differences in transfer rates between coarse material and fine material are
evident from the data gathered during the test programme These results are
discussed later in this chapter The area between the yellow arrows and the red
line is the amount of freeboard available Freeboard is the open space available
between the top of the flowing stream of material and the chute plate work
Figure 28 and Figure 29 shows the flow of coarse ore and fine ore respectively in
the same chute at 8 000 tlh
Figure 28 Coarse material at 8 000 tlh
The optimisation of transfer chutes in the bulk materials industry
MN van Aarde
46
CHAPTER 3
Figure 29 Fine material at 8 000 tlh
The amount of freeboard with fine material is much larger than with coarse
material It is therefore obvious that coarse material is more likely to block a
chute when peak surges occur This is due to particles that interlock in the small
discharge opening of the chute
Figure 30 Blocked chute with coarse material at 8 600 tIh
Figure 30 is a snap shot of a chute blocked with coarse ore due to the material
interlocking at the discharge opening The time from material free flowing to a
blocked chute signal was approximately 10 seconds This is determined by
comparing the CCTV camera time to the blocked signal time on the SCADA
The optimisation of transfer chutes in the bulk materials industry
MN van Aarde
47
CHAPTER 3
The high clay content in finer material can also cause problems in the long run
When wet Anes are fed through the chutes a thin layer of Anes builds up and
sticks to the sides of the chute As this layer dries out it forms a new chute liner i
and the next layer builds up This process occurs gradually and will eventually
cause the chute to block
342 Cross Sectional Area
Video images of a blocked chute on the receiving belts were analysed to
determine whether the blockage was caused by material build up on the belt
underneath the chute This indicated that with the occurrence of a blocked chute
the material keeps flowing out of the chute at a constant rate without build up
From this the assumption can be made that in the case of a blocked chute the
material enters the chute at a higher rate than it is discharged at the bottom
Therefore the conclusion can be made that the chute cross sectional area at the
discharge is insufficient to handle the volume of ore at high throughput rates
Tests with a certain type of coarse material yielded a very low flow rate requiring
adjustment to the chute choke plate on the transfer between CV 3 and CV 5
The chute choke plate is basically a sliding door at the bottom of the chute to
adjust the discharge flow of material Tests with another type of coarse material
shown in the summary of test results indicates how the choke plate adjustment
can increase the throughput of material in the chute
Data of all the different types of ore at the facility are obtained at the sampling
building This data shows that the material size distribution for the two types of
coarse material used in the tests mentioned above are the same This indicates
that the test results with the second coarse material are an accurate reflection of
what will be experienced with the first type of coarse material Special care
The optimisation of transfer chutes in the bulk materials industry
MN van Aarde
48
CHAPTER 3
should be taken when adjusting the choke plate to make sure that skew loading
is not induced by the modification
343 Spillag3
During one of the first tests on the transfer between CV 2 and CV 6 spillage
was observed at one of the side skirts on the receiving belt A piece of the side
skirt had been damaged and pushed off the belt as shown by Figure 31 This
caused some of the material to be pushed off the belt when skew loading from
the chute caused the belt to miss track In this case spillage was not caused by
the skirt but by skew loading from the chute onto the receiving conveyor
Figure 31 Damaged side skirt
A greater concern is spillage on the moving head chute of CV 3 and CV 4
loading onto CV 6 It appears as if the head chute creeps during material
transfer onto CV 6 As the chute creeps the horizontal gap between the
moving head chute and the transfer chute reaches approximately 180 mm
Facility operations proposed a temporary solution by moving the head chute to
the dumping or purging position and back to CV 5 before stopping over CV 6
The reason for this creep could be attributed to slack in the moving head winch
cable
The optimisation of transfer chutes in the bulk materials industry
MN van Aarde
49
CHAPTER 3
345 Belt Tracking and Material Loading
The only belt tracking and material loading problems observed occurred on the
transfer between CV 2 and CV 5 I CV 6 A diverter plate was installed at the
bottom of the chute in order to force material flow onto the centre of the receiving conveyor belt This plate now causes material to fall to the left of the receiving
belt causing the belt to track to the right
Figure 32 View behind the chute of the receiving conveyor before loading
Figure 32 shows the view from a CCTV camera placed over the receiving
conveyor behind the chute Note the amount of the idler roller that is visible
before loading
Figure 33 View behind the chute of the receiving conveyor during loading
The optimisation of transfer chutes in the bulk materials industry
MN van Aarde
50
CHAPTER 3
Figure 33 shows the view from a CCTV camera placed over the receiving
conveyor behind the chute during loading Note the difference between the
amount of the idler roller that is visible between Figure 33 and Figure 32 This is
a clear indication of off centre belt tracking due to skew loading I
At the same transfer point it appears as if the configuration of the chute causes
the material to be dropped directly onto the receiving belt from the dead box in
the moving head This will cause high impact wear on the belt in the long run
High maintenance frequencies will be required on the impact rollers underneath
the chute and the roller bearings will have to be replaced frequently
346 Reclaiming Operations
Reclaim operations are done from the stacker reclaimer that scoops up the
material with a bucket wheel from the stockpile The machine starts at the top
bench of the stockpile and reclaims sideways until it is through the stockpile
This sideways movement is repeated while the machine moves down the
stockpile If the machine digs too deep into the stockpile small avalanches can
occur that over fill the buckets This causes peak surges in the flow on the
conveyor system
With an increase in the peak digging or reclaim rate as requested for test work it
seemed that the peak surges increased as well In normal reclaiming operations
(average reclaim rate of 6 000 tlh to 7000 tlh) the peaks in reclaim surges do not
usually exceed 1 000 tlh This is however dependent on the level of the
stockpile from where the machine is reclaiming
At a peak digging or reclaim rate of 8 000 tlh peak surges of up to 2 000 tlh were
observed as can be seen from Figure 34 All stacker reclaimers are operated
manually and the depth of the bucket wheel is determined by monitoring the
The optimisation of transfer chutes in the bulk materials industry
MN van Aarde
51
CHAPTER 3
reclaimer boom scale reading (yellow line) This makes it difficult to reclaim at a
constant rate
The reason for the high peak surges is due to avalanches on the stockpile
caused by reclaiming on the lower benches without first taking away the top
material The blue line in Figure 34 represents a conveyor scale reading after
the material has passed through a series of transfer chutes It is clear that the
peaks tend to dissipate over time as the peaks on the blue line are lower and
smoother than that on the yellow line
IlmJ
bull I _ bull It bull bull bull bull
--ErI--E--~---h--E=+[J]--EiE ~ J~~~ middot middot -~L I-~f~1-1shyt~=tt~~J~~v5 i ~ ~ ~ ~ ~ i ~ 1 ~ ~ ~ s ~ ------ ~-- - ------ - _ - -------- -- -- - _---- -- -r - --- -_shyp
C)
~ 1r =r=l[=1 -It-1 -- -~ -t= --shy~ _middotmiddot -r middotr middot middot [middot _r _ _ r- middotmiddot rmiddot middotmiddot -r- rmiddot-- middot- middotmiddot -rmiddot -r-middotmiddot middotr lXgtO middotmiddotmiddotmiddotmiddotmiddotmiddotmiddot[middotmiddotmiddotmiddotmiddotmiddotmiddotlmiddotmiddotmiddotmiddotmiddotmiddotlmiddotmiddotmiddotmiddotmiddotmiddotmiddotmiddotimiddotmiddotmiddotmiddotmiddotmiddotmiddotmiddotr-middotmiddotmiddotmiddot j middotmiddot1middotmiddotmiddotmiddotmiddot1middotmiddotmiddotmiddotmiddotmiddotmiddot1middotmiddotmiddotmiddotmiddot middotlmiddotmiddotmiddotmiddottmiddotmiddotmiddotmiddotmiddotmiddotmiddotjmiddot I~ [ bullbullbullbullbullbullbull [ bullbullbull middotmiddotmiddot1middotmiddotmiddotmiddotmiddotmiddot1middotmiddotmiddotmiddotmiddotmiddotmiddotmiddot1middotmiddotmiddotmiddotmiddotmiddotmiddotmiddot middotmiddotmiddotmiddotmiddotmiddotmiddotmiddoti~middotmiddotmiddotmiddotmiddotmiddotmiddotmiddottmiddotmiddotmiddotmiddotmiddotmiddotmiddotrmiddotmiddotmiddot middotrmiddotmiddotmiddotmiddotmiddotmiddot~middotmiddotmiddotmiddotmiddotmiddotmiddotmiddot1middotmiddotmiddotmiddotmiddotmiddotmiddotmiddotimiddotmiddotmiddot
t) cent
~ i i l i i i i i i i it ~ 8 ~ ~ S l i
~~ Ii ~ ~ g i i ~ 4 1 J yen i
s a e 11 JI as $ $ ~ IS IS e It
Time
-Con~SCO=-E___S~ SCALE
Figure 34 Peak surges experienced during reclaiming operations
347 Other Problem Areas
Some blockages on other chutes at the facility occurred while testing the
stockyard chutes These blockages are also shown in Table 3 where the test
The optimisation of transfer chutes in the bulk materials industry
MN van Aarde
52
CHAPTER 3
results are discussed and to raise awareness that the bottlenecks on site are not
only caused by problems on the tested chutes
A chute downstream from the stockyards encountered a blockage with fine I
material when the flow rate reached 11 OOb tfh Although this is higher than the
test maximum of 10 000 tfh it still raises concern as to why the chute blocked so
severely that it took approximately two hours to clear
Another bottleneck is the transfer point between the feed conveyor of CV 2 and
the discharge chute on CV 2 This transfer point blocked with fine material at a
peak just below 10 000 tfh It should be even worse with coarse are as
previously discussed Due to the configuration of the head chute spillage of
scraper dribblings is also of great concern The main stream of material
interferes with the flow path of the dribbling material Therefore the carry back
scraped off the bottom of the feeding belt cannot i~ow down the chute and is
pushed over the sides of the chute
The optimisation of transfer chutes in the bulk maferias industry
MN van Aarde
53
CHAPTER 3
35 SUMMARY OF TEST RESULTS
Table 3 Results from test programme
Transfer Point Material Tested Test No Peak Capacity Blocked Chute
CV11 CV5 Yes
Fines N 14 10000 tlh No
Fines N 15 10000tlh No
CV 11 CV6 Coarse K 20 9300 tlh No
Fines K 4 10600tlh No
Fines A 19 9633 tlh No
CV31 CV5 Yes
Yes
Yes
Coarse A 17 9427 tlh No
CV31 CV6 Coarse K 7 10195t1h Yes
Coarse K 8 11 000 tlh Yes
CV41 CV5 Coarse A 16 10307 tlh No
No (Mech trip on
CV4CV6 Fines K 10 10815 tlh downstream conveyor)
Coarse K 11 8000 tlh No
Fines A 18 10328 tlh No
No (Feed to CV 2
CV21 CV5 Fines N 13 10 000 tlh blocked)
CV21 Coarse K 1 amp 2 10 153 tlh No
No (Blocked chute on
Fines K 3 11 000 tlh downstream transfer)
The optimisation of transfer chutes in the bulk materials industry
MN van Aarde
54
CHAPTER 3
Table 3 shows the results obtained from all the tests on the stockyard conveyor
discharge chutes Where possible the same material grade was tested more
than once on the same transfer in order to confirm the repetitiveness of the test
The tests shown in red indicate the transfers that blocked at a flow rate of less
than 10000 tlh
Coarse K and Coarse 0 are noted as the critical materials for blocked chutes
caused by a peak surge Tests with Coarse K and Coarse S where a blocked
chute occurred at just over 10 000 tlh can also be considered as failed tests
This is due to the lack of a safety margin freeboard inside the chute When
analysing the video images a build up can be seen at a flow rate of less than
10000 tlh
Table 3 indicates that the fine material did not cause blocked chutes but it was
seen that it did fill up the chute throat area in some cases Although the coarse
material grades are shown as being least suitable for high flow rates the fine
material should not be underestimated for its ability to cause blockages The
finer materials normally have higher clay contents than the coarse grades and
therefore stick to the chute walls more easily_
36 CONCLUSION
At lower capacities (7 000 tlh to 8 000 tlh) the material appear to flow smoothly
inside the chutes without surging or building up in the chute This flow rate
normally does not cause spillage or skew loading on the receiving conveyor belt
On average as the flow rate approaches 9 000 tlh the material in the chute
throat area starts packing together and finally blocks up the chute
At transfer rates greater than 9 000 tlh the available area inside the chutes is
completely filled up This causes material to build up or surge inside the chute
which eventually results in the chute choking and the inlet flow becomes greater
The optimisation of transfer chutes in the bulk materials industry
MN van Aarde
55
CHAPTER 3
than the outlet flow Depending on the volume of the chute the choked state can
only be maintained for a certain period of time If the inlet flow does not
decrease it will cause a blocked chute
Peak surges of up to 10 000 tfh were recorded in most tests which involved a
material surge inside the chute but without the occurrence of a blocked chute trip
Although no blocked chute signal was given in these cases the ability of the
chutes to transfer continuously at flow rates of between 9 000 tfh and 10 000 tfh
is not very reliable
Continuous transfer at flow rates approaching 9 000 tfh seems attainable in most
cases but due to the limited freeboard available in the chute throat area the
chutes will easily become prone to blocking Due to the high peak surges at an
increased maximum reclaim rate the amount of freeboard is critical If the
design criteria of the chute were intended to accommodate these large surges
then all the chutes failed this test This can be attributed to the fact that no
freeboard is left at a maximum reclaim rate of 9 000 tfh
With the background available from the test programme it is clear that further
investigation is required to obtain a solution to these problems All the
information gathered can be integrated and utilised to provide a solution A
possible solution can then be tested against the problems found with the current
transfer chutes
The optimisation of transfer chutes in the bulk materials industry
MN van Aarde
56
CHAPTER 4
CHAPTER 4 DYNAMIC CHUTES FOR THE ELIMINATION OF
RECURRING PROBLEMS
The optimisation of transfer chutes in the bulk materials industry
MN van Aarde
57
CHAPTER 4
41 PREFACE
After completion of the chute test programme the decision was made to improve
the old transfer configuration by installing a dynamic chute The reason for the
dynamic chute is to increase the material speed and decrease the stream cross
sectional area The dead boxes in the older chute slowed the material down and
the restriction on transfer height resulted in the material not being able to gain
enough speed after impacting on the dead boxes
A dynamic chute configuration is investigated in this chapter As the new chute
is fitted within the existing steelwork there are certain constraints that determine
the new configuration All the constraints and limitations discussed in this section
are specific to the facility under discussion
The new chute design basically consists of a hood and spoon which retains the
kinetic energy in the material stream as it is transferred from one conveyor to the
other This will reduce the creation of dust in the chute and help to discharge the
material at a velocity closer to that of the receiving conveyor The new design
does however experience high wear which was not a problem with the old chutes
due to large dead boxes
In order to fit the optimum design of a dynamic chute within the existing structure
some changes are required to the positioning of the feed conveyor head pulley
These changes are necessary to accommodate the discharge trajectory from the
feeding conveyor
The radii of the hood and spoon are specified in such a way that the impact wear
is reduced significantly In addition both the hood and spoon are fitted with a
removable dead box section in the impact zones The incorporation of these
sections makes this chute revolutionary in the sense of ease of maintenance
The optimisation of transfer chutes in the bulk materials industry
MN van Aarde
58
CHAPTER 4
This new chute addresses all problems identified at the facility and aims to
eliminate most of them
Tests were carried out to identify worst case materials for flow and wear
Different liner materials were tested for both flow and wear conditions The
outcome of these tests is used as the basis for the design of a new chute As
different conditions for flow and wear inside the chute exist different liners are
investigated for each section inside the chute
42 CONSIDERATION OF THE EXISTING TRANSFER POINT CONSTRAINTS
The stockyard consists of four stacker reclaimers and several transfer points
feeding onto the two downstream conveyors resulting in a very intricate system
This system has numerous requirements which need to be addressed when
considering a new transfer chute configuration The transfers under discussion
are situated at the head end of the stockyard conveyors
MOV1NG HEAD OER MOvm poundAD OVER CVI6 CVIS
t4CLIE SECTION
PURGING POSmON
Figure 35 Stockyard head end layout
The design of a new transfer chute configuration is restricted to a certain extent
by the existing structures on site Figure 35 provides an overall view of the
existing steelwork at the head end of the stockyard conveyor This existing steel
structure can be modified to suit a new configuration but does have some fixed
The optimisation of transfer chutes in the bulk materials industry
MN van Aarde
59
CHAPTER 4
constraints A good example of these constraints is the transfer height between
the stockyard conveyor and the downstream conveyors CV 5 and 6
On both sides of the stockyard conveyor stockpiles of ore can be reclaimed and
deposited onto the conveyor This facility allows a certain travel for the stacker
reclaimer along the stockyard conveyor for the stacking and reclaiming of
material The most forward position of the stacker reclaimer is at the beginning
of the incline section of the stockyard conveyor As previously explained any
curvature in a conveyor requires a certain minimum radius When the transfer
height is raised the radius constraints on that curvature in the stockyard
conveyor will reduce stockyard space This means that the storage capacity at
the facility will be greatly diminished
I ~
j
Figure 36 Dimensional constraints on the existing transfer configuration
The ideal is to stay within the eXisting critical dimensions as shown in Figure 36
As functionality of the chute dictates the chute configuration these dimensions
can be modified within certain constraints These critical dimensions on the
existing configuration are
The optimisation of transfer chutes in the bulk materials industry
MN van Aarde
60
CHAPTER 4
bull Centre of receiving belt to centre of the head pulley 800 mm
bull Bottom of receiving belt to top of the head pulley 4048 mm
The head pulley can however be moved back a certain amount before it
becomes necessary to change the entire incline section of the stockyard
conveyor As the moving head moves forward and backward there are idler cars
trailing behind the moving head carriage as shown in Figure 35 The purpose of
these idler cars is to support the belt when the moving head is feeding onto
CV 6 or when it is standing in the purging position
43 DESIGN OF THE CHUTE PROFILE
431 Design Methodology
Proven standard methods for the functional design of the chute are used These
hand calculation methods are based on the Conveyor Equipment Manufacturers
Association (CEMA) standard as well as papers from Prof AW Roberts These
are typically calculations for determining the discharge trajectory optimal radius
of the hood and spoon as well as the velocity of material passing through the
chute
In addition to standard methods of carrying out conceptual flow design it is
supplemented by the use of Discrete Element Modelling (OEM) simulation
software This is done to visualise the flow of material through the chute
Results from standard calculation methods are compared to the outputs of the
OEM simulations to confirm both results Chapter 5 will focus on the use of
Discrete Element Modelling for the design and verification of chute concepts
The optimisation of transfer chutes in the bulk materials industry
MN van Aarde
61
CHAPTER 4 -__-----__---_----------shy
432 Design Development
Figure 37 shows the concept of the hood and spoon chute for a 90deg transfer as
required by the facility layout The decision to opt for a hood and spoon chute is
based on trying to retain the material velocity when transferring material from the
feeding conveyor to the receiving conveyors Retention of material velocity is
critical as the transfer height is restricted The overall facility constraints for
design are as follows
bull Feeding belt speed - 45 ms
bull Receiving belt speed - 45 ms
bull Transfer height - 401 m
bull Belt widths -1650 mm
bull Maximum material throughput -10000 tlh
As this is a retrofit of an existing facility some of the facility constraints cannot be
changed This forms part of the design development as it steers the design in a
certain direction Due to the fact that the transfer height cannot be changed the
chute profile will be dependent on the transfer height restriction
The optimisation of transfer chutes in the bulk matefials industry
MN van Aarde
62
CHAPTER 4
START-UP CHrrlE
DRlBBIlNG CHUTE
Figure 37 Hood and spoon configuration for the 90 transfer
The optimum solution for the correct chute profile in this situation would be to
move the head pulley back far enough This should be done so that the hood
can receive the material trajectory at a small impact angle and still discharge
centrally onto the spoon However the head pulley can only be moved back a
certain amount Any further movement will require changes to the structure of
the feeding conveyor incline section
As the stockyard conveyors feed onto two receiving conveyors the head pulley
of the stockyard conveyors is situated on a moving head rail car This enables
the conveyor to discharge either on CV 5 or CV 6 as shown in Figure 25
Taking the movement of the head pulley into account the moving head rail car
can be shortened by 1000 mm in order to move the head pulley back As stated
in the preface all changes are distinctive to this facility alone However it is
important to be aware of the consequences of every modification
The optimisation of transfer chutes in the bulk materials industry
MN van Aarde
63
CHAPTER 4 -__----- ------shy
433 Determination of the Profile
An important of the hood and spoon design is to ensure a
discharge from the hood onto the centre of the spoon The is
determined using equation (1) in section 24 Although various material
are transferred it does not have a significant effect on the calculated trajectory
the bulk properties of the materials are very similar It is however important
to the material which will transferred obtain the flow angles and wear
This information the will be
the Liner selection for this case study is discussed in Appendix A
After the trajectory has been determined the hood radius can determined by
using equation (2) As head pulley can move 1 000 mm backward the
possible hood radius was determined to 2 577 mm This hood radius is
VIU(I(1 to produce the wear on the zone in chute
The impact angle at this radius is 11 which is less than the maximum
allowable limit of 20
The hood radius is chosen to as close as possible to radius of curvature of
the material trajectory The point where the hood radius and the trajectory radius
cross is known as the impact point In to determine the velocity
point in hood the at is required on the
hood from the horizontal where the material impacts and to slide down the
hood surface
In this case the position impact hood is at 558r from the horizontal
In to determine the velocity this angle e is used as starting
point in (3) obtain a complete velocity profile angle from where
the material impacts hood is decreased in increments 5 up to the
discharge point which is normally 0
The optimisation chutes in the bulk materials industry
MN van Aarde
64
-----
CHAPTER 4
Hood Velocity Profile
70
--- --~ 6 0
5 0
40 ~_
~ 30 g --- a 20 gt
10
00
60 50 40 30 20 10 o Theta (Position inside the hood)
Figure 38 Hood velocity profile
The spoon radius is determined in such a way that the wear at the point of impact
is kept to a minimum At the same time the horizontal component of the material
exit velocity is as close as possible to the receiving belt speed Firstly the
assumption is made that the initial velocity of material in the spoon is equal to the
exit velocity of material from the hood This yields a spoon entry velocity of
633 ms and can also be seen from Figure 38
By reiterating various radii for the spoon the optimum exit velocity Ve can be
obtained These radii are selected according to the available space in which the
spoon must fit and also to produce the smallest impact angle for material
discharging from the hood This table is set up to display the different exit
velocities at various spoon radii The exit velocity is also dependent on the exit
angle which is determined by the length of the spoon arc In this case the spoon
radius is chosen as 3 575 mm An exit angle of 38deg from the horizontal yields an
exit velocity closer to the receiving belt speed
The optimisation of transfer chutes in the bulk materials industry
MN van Aarde
65
CHAPTER 4
Spoon Velocity Profile
67
66
65
S 64 amp0 g 6 3
V
v-shy ~ ~
ii ~ gt 62
61 I I 60
o 10 20 30 40 50 60
Theta (position inside the spoon)
Figure 39 Spoon velocity profile
Taken from the origin of the spoon radius the material position in the spoon at
discharge is sr The selection of this angle is guided by the geometry of the
chute and surrounding structures This angle is then used to calculate the exit
velocity as shown in Figure 39 At this point the discharge angle relative to the
conveyor angle is 38deg Ve is then determined to be 6087 ms with a velocity
component of 479 ms in the direction of the belt This value is 618 higher
than the belt speed of 4S ms which is acceptable as it is within the allowable
10 range of variation Minimal spillage and reduced wear on the receiving
conveyor is expected
Both the hood and spoon have a converged profile This is done in order to
minimise spillage and ensure a smooth transfer of material from the hood to the
spoon and from the spoon to the receiving conveyor The converged profile
starts out wide to capture any stray particles and converges to bring the material
particles closer together at the discharge This profile does not influence the
transfer rate of the chute as the stream of material through the chute is no more
The optimisation of transfer chutes in the bulk materials industry
MN van Aarde
66
CHAPTER 4
compact than the material on the conveyor belt before and after the transfer
chute
44 INCORPORATING ADEAD BOX IN THE IMPACT AREAS
In chapter 1 reference is made to a chute design utilising pipe sections with a
rounded profile The flat back plate is chosen instead of a rounded pipe type
section to house the honeycomb dead box configuration It would be possible to
fit the honeycomb into a rounded back section but manufacturing and
maintenance would be unnecessarily difficult and expensive
Furthermore the cross section profile of the chute shows three sliding surfaces
as shown in These surfaces consist of the back plate two vertical side plates
and two diagonal plates This is done in order to increase the angle between
adjoining plates so that the probability of material hanging up in the corners is
reduced This helps to alleviate the risk of experiencing blocked chutes
Figure 40 Chute cross section
The optimisation of transfer chutes in the bulk materials industry
M N van Aarde
67
CHAPTER 4
441 Honeycomb Wear Box in the Hood
A honeycomb or wear box is incorporated into this chute configuration in order to
further minimise wear in the hood and spoon The honeycomb configuration is
clearly shown in and is typical for both the hood and spoon Reduced wear will I
be achieved as impact and sliding will take place on the basis of material on
material flow Ore is captured inside the honeycomb pockets which protects the
ceramic lining in the section of the honeycomb and creates another sliding face
made of the material being transferred The ribs in the wear box do not protrude
from the sliding face of the chute and therefore do not interfere with the main
stream flow of material
Positioning of the honeycomb is critical as the point of impact on the hood needs
to be on the honeycomb This is required in order to assure that the highest
material impact is absorbed by a layer of static material inside the honeycomb
and not the chute liners All the basic steps for designing a normal hood and
spoon chute are followed Firstly the angle at impact (8e) is calculated to
determine where the trajectory of material will cross the radius of the hood This
shows the position of the impact point on the hood Figure 20 indicates where 8e
is calculated As previously stated the angle at impact for this situation is
558r This is calculated using [33]
e = tan- I ( 1 ) (5)
C Ii
And y is defined by equation 1
This gives an indication as to where the honeycomb should be situated in order
to capture the material impacting the hood fully A flow simulation package can
also be used to determine the position of this honeycomb structure shows an
opening for the honeycomb which starts at 40deg clockwise from the vertical This
The optimisation of transfer chutes in the bulk materials industry 68
MN van Aarde
CHAPTER 4
means that there are almost 16deg of free space in the honeycomb to ensure that
the material will always impact inside the wear box
There is no set specification as to the size of this free space This is just to
accommodate any surges of mat~rial on the feeding conveyor As discussed in
Chapter 3 due to avalanches while reclaiming from the stockpiles material
surges on the conveyors is a reality
Figure 41 Honeycomb wear box positioning
illustrates exactly where this wear box is situated on the back plate of the hood
This configuration is very similar to that of the spoon as both wear boxes only
cover the width of the flat back plate of the hood and spoon The reason for this
is that most of the material impact and mainstream flow strikes the back plate
The optimisation of transfer chutes in the bulk materials industry
MN van Aarde
69
CHAPTER 4
WEAR BOX
Figure 42 Wear box in the hood section
All the horizontal ribs of the honeycomb are spaced 5deg apart and there are 5
vertical ribs following the converging contour of the hood as shown in Spacing
of the ribs depends largely on the maximum lump size handled by the transfer
In this case the largest lumps are approximately 34 mm in diameter The idea is
to get as many dead boxes into the honeycomb as possible These small
cavities should however be large enough to capture a substantial amount of ore
inside
The optimisation of transfer chutes in the bulk materials industry
MN van Aarde
70
CHAPTER 4 ----_----------------shy
Figure 43 Spacing arrangement of honeycomb ribs inside the hood
The two vertical liners on the edges of the honeycomb are only 65 mm high while
the rest of the vertical liners are 120 mm high This is done so that the flat liners
in the chute surface can overlap the edge liners of the honeycomb An open
groove between the tiles along the flow of material would cause the liners to be
worn through much faster than in normal sliding abrasion conditions Due to the
high wear characteristics of the ore all openings between tiles should be kept out
of the mainstream flow
All the ribs in the honeycomb are 50 mm thick and vary in depth The vertical
ribs protrude the horizontal ribs by 30 mm in order to channel the flow These
vertical ribs are all flush with the surrounding tiles on the flat sliding surface of the
hood All the pockets of the wear box are 120 mm deep measured from the top
of the vertical ribs Again dimension is dependent on the maximum lump size
handled by the transfer There are no specifications as to the relation between
the pocket size and the lump size These dimensions were chosen to be
approximately 4 times the lump size Computer simulations can be used to test
the feasibility of this concept while commissioning of the equipment will ultimately
show whether this method works
The optimisation of transfer chutes in the bulk materials industry
MN van Aarde
71
CHAPTER 4 ------------_ -- - ---------------shy
442 Honeycomb wear box in the spoon
The honeycomb wear box in the spoon has the same configuration as in the
hood It also covers the entire width of the back plate and fully accommodates
the material impacting on the spoon from the hood The entire spoon is broken
up into three sections and the honeycomb wear box is situated in the back
section as shown in
Figure 44 Wear box in the spoon section
With almost the same configuration as the hood the spoon also has a corner
liner to ensure a continuous lined face between the flat surface liners and the
honeycomb ribs The detail of these liners and ribs are shown in A 90deg transfer
with a hood and spoon chute means that the stream received by the spoon is
narrower and longer than the stream received by the hood This is caused when
the material takes the shape of the hood before it is discharged into the spoon
The converged configuration causes the stream to flatten against the sliding
surface in the chute
The optimisation of transfer chutes in the bulk materials industry
MN van Aarde
72
CHAPTER 4
Due to the spoon honeycomb being a bit narrower than the hood there are only
three vertical ribs The number of ribs had to be reduced to be able to
accommodate the preferred cavity size of the honeycomb boxes These ribs now
form two channels in which the stream of material can be directed
Figure 45 Liner detail of the spoon honeycomb wear box
As shown in there is a 3 mm gap between the honeycomb section and the chute
plate work This is to ensure that the honeycomb section can be easily removed
for maintenance on the liners All the edges of the liners have rounded corners
to reduce stress concentrations which can cause rapid liner failure
45 DESIGNING THE CHUTE FOR INTEGRATION WITH SYSTEM REQUIREMENTS
The arc length of the spoon back plate is longer and closer to the belt in order to
ensure a smooth transfer of material from the chute to the receiving conveyor A
small gap of 75 mm is left between the bottom of the spoon and the receiving
conveyor Due to the fact that material can also be fed from another upstream
The optimisation of transfer chutes in the bulk materials industry
MN van Aarde
73
CHAPTER 4
stockyard conveyor this configuration will not be suitable This means that the
gap of 75 mm is not enough to allow material to pass underneath the chute
To accommodate this situation the spoon is split into different sections where the
bottom section lifts up to make room for material from behind In the raised
position the gap between the chute and the belt is 450 mm When the lower belt
is loaded to full capacity the material height is 380 mm This means that the
clearance to the belt in the non operational position is sufficient and show the
operational and non operational positions of the spoon
T -t t----~r_-+-wtIY1shy
Figure 46 Spoon in the operational position
The optimisation of transfer chutes in the bulk materials industry
MN van Aarde
74
CHAPTER 4
Figure 47 Spoon in the non operational position
This section is a discussion on how this new transfer chute configuration should
be operated in order to comply with the facility requirements The bottom section
of the chute can be lifted out of the way of material from behind on the receiving
conveyor Therefore a control philosophy is required for this movement
Referring to Figure 25 positions A and B indicate where these new chutes will be
installed As previously stated position C is the purging or dump position and
show the actuated spoon section in the operating and non operating positions
The conditions for these positions are explained as follows
46 CONCLUSION
With the consideration of all the facility constraints and a conceptual idea of what
the transfer configuration should look like the design can be optimised When
the feeding belt velocity is known the material trajectory and optimum chute
radius can be determined This radius and the radius of the spoon must then be
corrected to comply with the facility constraints but still deliver the required
material transfer rate
The optimisation of transfer chutes in the bulk materials industry
MN van Aarde
75
CHAPTER 4
With the high cost implications of regular maintenance intervals on chute liners
and facility downtime a honeycomb structure is incorporated into the high impact
areas The purpose of this honeycomb structure is to form small pockets similar
to dead boxes in order to promote material on material flow This increases the
lifetime of the chute liners and reduces maintenance intervals
This specific transfer chute splits up easily into separate sections and will help to
simplify maintenance The bottom section of the chute is actuated to move up
and down depending on whether the chute is in operation or not This will ensure
optimum transfer of material while in operation and provide sufficient clearance
when not in operation This is again guided by the facility requirements
In the design of all the transfer chute components the physical properties of the
ore should always be considered This determines the chute profile in terms of
flow angles and liner selection With maximum material flow ability high
resistance to sliding abrasion and reduced maintenance cost in mind 94
alumina ceramics is the liner of choice This is only in the main flow areas of the
chute For the dribbling chute a polyurethane liner is used to promote the flow of
this sticky material
The optimisation of transfer chutes in the bulk materials industry
MN van Aarde
76
CHAPTER 5
CHAPTER 5 TESTING AND VERIFICATION OF THE NEW SOLUTION
- middotSmiddotmiddotmiddotmiddotmiddotmiddotmiddotmiddotmiddot-middotl~Oi
The optimisation of transfer chutes in the bulk materials industry 77
MN van Aarde
CHAPTER 5
51 PREFACE
Although hand calculations have been a proven method of design for many
years it is important to verify any new chute concept before fabrication and
implementation Confirming the concept can save time and money as it reduces
the risk of on-site modifications Hand calculations only supply a two
dimensional solution to the problem which does not always provide accurate
material flow profiles
In recent years a few material flow simulation packages have been developed to
aid the design of material handling equipment The use of software packages
can be beneficial to the design process as it gives a three dimensional view of
the material behaviour in the chute This means that changes to the chute
concept can be made prior to fabrication
It is however important to verify that the solution obtained from the software
package is an accurate reflection of actual design model Therefore the material
being handled should be thoroughly tested to obtain the correct physical
properties required to obtain an accurate simulation result
The use of material flow simulation software does not replace the necessity for
hand calculations All the basic steps should still be done to derive a conceptual
chute configuration Material flow simulation software should be used as a
complimentary tool to analytical hand calculations in the design process
The optimisation of transfer chutes in thebulk materials industry
MN van Aarde
78
CHAPTER 5
52 SELECTING A TEST METHODOLOGY
Traditionally transfer chutes were designed by using basic analytical calculations
and relying on empirical data from past experiences with other chutes Mostly
these analytical methods only cater for the initial part of the chute such as the
parabolic discharge trajectory It is difficult to determine what happens to the
flow of material after it strikes the chute wall [34]
Two methods of verification were usually applied to evaluate a new transfer
chute configuration Trial and error can be used but obviously this is not desired
due to the high cost implications A second method is to build a small scale
model of the chute in which tests can be carried out before a final design can be
adopted This physical modelling is however time consuming and
expensive [34]
Granular or particulate materials are composed of a large number of loosely
packed individual particles or grains The flow of such granular materials forms
an intricate part of the materials handling industry Small reductions in energy
consumption or increases in production can have great financial advantages
Therefore significant efforts are put into improving the efficiency of these
facilities The important role of numerical simUlations is becoming more evident
in these optimisation procedures [35] Due to these efforts this technology is
becoming more powerful and is easy to use as a verification method for transfer
chute designs
The behaviour of bulk material particles is unique in the sense that it exhibits
some of the properties associated with the gaseous liquid and solid states of
matter The granular state of bulk materials cannot be characterised by anyone
of these states alone The research that captures the contact between individual
particles in an explicit manner is known as discrete element methods (OEM) [36]
The optimisation of transfer chutes in the bulk materials industry
MN van Aarde
79
CHAPTER 5
In basic terms OEM explicitly models the dynamic motion and mechanical
interactions of each body or particle as seen in the physical material flow It is
also possible to obtain a detailed description of the velocities position and force
acting on each particle at a discrete point during the analysis This is achieved
by focusing on the individual grain or body rather than focusing on the global
body as is the case with the finite element approach [36]
Figure 48 illustrates two examples of how this OEM software can be applied
Obviously the flow characteristics differ between the applications shown in Figure
48 This is however catered for by the mathematical simulation of each particle
collision
Figure 48 Flow analysis examples a) separation and screening b) hoppers feeders 36]
Continuous improvements in the performance of computing systems make OEM
a realistic tool for use in a wide range of process design and optimisation
applications During the last 20 years the capabilities of OEM have progressed
from small scale two dimensional simulations to much more complex 3D
applications The latest high performance desk top computers make it possible
to simulate systems containing large numbers of particles within a reasonable
time [37]
The optimisation of transfer chutes in the bulk materials industry
MN van Aarde
80
CHAPTER 5
According to the institute for conveyor technologies at the Otto-von-Guericke
University of Magdeburg in Germany using OEM for bulk solid handling
equipment provides [38]
bull A cost effective method of simulating the utility of materials handling
equipmentshy
bull Precise control over complicated problem zones eg transfer chutes
redirection stations and high wear areas
bull The possibility to integrate processes in one simulation such as mixing and
segregation
bull The possibility to involve the customer more extensively in the design
process
bull An advantage in the market due to attractive video sequences and pictures
of the simulation
bull The possibility to prevent facility damages and increase the efficiency of
conveyor systems extensively
As a good example of the advantages of the discrete element method the
University of Witwatersrand in Johannesburg did studies on rotary grinding mills
The university studies have shown that the OEM qualitatively predicts the load
motion of the mill very well The improved knowledge of the behaviour of mills
can therefore increase the profitability of mineral processing operations [39]
This material handling equipment is generally costly to operate and inefficient in
the utilisation of energy for breakage In order to understand the behaviour of
mills better the OEM method is increasingly being applied to the modelling of the
load behaviour of grinding mills These results indicate that this method can be
applied successfully in the bulk materials handling industry
The apUmisatian af transfer chutes in the bulk materials industry
MN van Aarde
81
CHAPTERS
Another example where this technology has been used with great success is with
the design of a new load out chute for the Immingham coal import terminal in
Britain By simulating the flow with a OEM package the designers were aided in
the fact that they were supplied with a quantitative description of the bulk solid
movement through the chute In the opinion of Professor Franz Kessler
(University of Leoben) the Discrete Element Method provides the engineer with
unique detailed information to assist in the design of transfer points [3]
These simulation packages are at the moment very expensive and not widely
used in transfer chute design It can be anticipated that the utilisation of these
packages will increase as the technology improves and the cost of the software
goes down [40] To get the best value out of the simulation it is important to
compare simulation packages and select the one most suitable to the complexity
of the design
Fluenttrade is a two dimensional computational fluid dynamics (CFD) software
package which can also be used as a chute design aid through the simulation of
material flow It must however be noted that this is not a OEM simulation
package This software package simulates the flow of material by considering
the material particles as a liquid substance The output of the simulation is the
same as can be seen in the example of Figure 49 The colours in the simulation
represent the average particle spacing [40] Due to the fact that this package
can at this stage only deliver two dimensional simulations it is considered
inadequate to perform detailed simulations on the intricate design piscussed in
this dissertation
The optjmisation of transfer chutes in the bulk materials industry
MN van Aarde
82
CHAPTER 5
COnroUf Votume t-~bn 01 ( 00 frlm~2 5000amp1 00) ~gtJ C3_2002 fLUENT 60 (2lt1 9 940 n 1Mgt u ody)
Figure 49 Simulations results from Fluenttrade [40]
The Overland Conveyor Company provides another alternative to the Fluent
software package Applied OEM is a technology company that provides discrete
element software to a variety of users in the bulk materials industry Bulk Flow
Analysttrade is an entry level package that they provide This package is very
powerful in the sense that it can accurately predict flow patterns depending on
the accuracy of the inputs An example of this is shown in Figure 50 It also has
the capability to show material segregation dynamic forces and velocities [41]
Figure 50 Simulation results from Bulk Flow Analysttrade [41]
The optimisation of transfer chutes in the bulk materials industry
MN van Aarde
83
CHAPTER 5
OEM Solutions is a world leader in discrete element modelling software They
recently announced the release of the latest version of their flow simulation
package called EOEM 21 This package can be used to simulate and optimise
bulk material handling and processing operations [41] Oue to the capabilities of
this software package it is a very attractive option for designing transfer chutes
With the development of EOEM 21 OEM Solutions worked in collaboration with
customers in the Bulk Handling Mining and Construction Pharmaceutical
Chemical and Agricultural sectors This enables the end users to perform more
sophisticated particle simulations specific to their unique applications Also
incorporated into this package is the ability and flexibility to customise and
personalise advanced particle properties [42]
This specific package has been proven successful by industry leaders Martin
Engineering (Neponset Illinois) is a leading global supplier of solids handling
systems This company continues to expand their use of EOEM software in
design optimisation and development of bulk materials handling products These
optimisation and development actions include all aspects of conveyor systems
and transfer points for numerous industrial sectors [43]
There are several other OEM simulation packages such as ESYS Particle
Passage-OEM and YAOE However none of these software packages seem be
major industry role players in the discipline of chute design although they might
have the capability In adjudicating the three big role players in bulk material flow
simulation packages there are a few factors taken into consideration It appears
thatthe advantages of 30 capabilities are non negotiable Therefore Fluenttrade is
not really a consideration From the literature review of the Bulk Flow Analysttrade
and the EOEM packages it seems that these two will provide more or less the
same performance It does seem however that the EOEM software is a bigger
role player in various industries Due to the possible future capabilities of EOEM The optimisation of transfer chutes in the bulk materials industry
MN van Aarde
84
CHAPTER 5
through its association with numerous industries this simulation package is the
software of choice
In order to retrofit or design a new transfer point with the aid of the selected OEM
software package there are a few steps that a designer must follow to gain the
full benefit of this tool [36]
1 An accurate 3D or CAD representation of the new or old transfer chute
must be rendered
2 Identify restrictions and limitations in terms of chute geometry and
manufacturing
3 Identify desired design goals (Le dust emissions flow restrictions etc)
4 Identify representative material properties and particle descriptions
5 In case of a retrofit make design changes to chute geometry with CAD
6 Simulate the performance of the new design using OEM software
7 Evaluate results obtained from the simulation (reiterate steps 5 6 and 7)
8 Perform and finalise detail design steps
9 Manufacture
10 Installation
The above mentioned steps found in references [6] and [36] only provides
information regarding retrofitting or designing chutes with the aid of OEM
Although it is a powerful design 1001 the design process should not discard the
use of analytical hand calculation~ Some of the most important design decisions
regarding chute profiles are made with analytical hard calculations such as
plotting the material trajectorY
53 DETERMINATION OF MATERIAL PROPERTIES
The discrete element method is a promising approach to the simUlation of
granular material interaction The accuracy of the outcome of the simulation is
The optimisation of transfer chutes in the bulk materials industry
M N van Aarde
85
CHAPTER 5
however dependent upon accurate information on the material properties and
input parameters [44] These inputs basically consist of the following
fundamental parameters size and shape factors bulk density angle of repose
cohesion and adhesion parameters and restitution coefficients [45]
The determination of most of these parameters are explained and defined in the
following paragraphs The parameters that are changed in the simulation
according to the reaction of the flow are not discussed and are typically
parameters such as the internal coefficient of friction between a number of
particles A collaborated effort by the bulk handling industry aims to find ways in
which all parameters can be accurately determined through scientific methods
This has however still not been achieved The objective is to achieve a realistic
representation and therefore some parameters are altered in the simulation
It is important to note that the computation time increases as the particle size
becomes smaller and the amount of particles increase In most granular flow
problems the characteristics of the material stream are largely determined by
particles greater than 10 - 20 mm in size [45] Therefore in order to reduce
computation time the selected particle size for simUlations should be the same
as the largest particles handled by the facility namely 34 mm diameter
Although fines have a higher internal friction coefficient and more cohesiveness
these properties can be averaged into the input parameters to obtain the same
overall effect [45] Therefore only a single particle size is used in the simulation
and the properties optimised to obtain the same result under actual operating
conditionsmiddot Some of the material properties can be easily obtained from the
facility The rest of the properties are obtained from tests carried out by expert
conSUltants in this field
The size factor and bulk density are obtained from the facility Materia tests
carried out by external consultants provide the coefficient of friction and also the The optimisation of transfer chutes in the bulk materials industry
MN van Aarde
86
CHAPTER 5
wall friction angle This is the angle at which the material will start to slide under
its own mass To determine these material properties the external consultants
normally use sophisticated and expensive equipment Data gathered from these
tests are used for the hand calculation of the chute profile The angle of repose
can normally be observed from a stockpile and is the angle that the side of the
stockpile makes with the horizontal
For the OEM simulation the coefficient of friction is one of the main determining
factors of the wall friction angle Data provided by the material tests can not be
used as a direct input into OEM In the software package the coefficient of
friction is represented by a factor between 0 and 1 The material test data can
however provide some insight into where on this scale the factor is This factor
can be derived from a few small simulation iterations as there is no method of
direct conversion between the test result data and the OEM input
To determine this factor a plate is modelled with a single layer of particles This
plate is then rotated within the simulation at approximately 2deg per second As
soon as the particles begin to slide the time is taken from which the angle can be
calculated This process is repeated with different friction coefficients until the
correct wall friction angle is obtained After the coefficient of friction factor is
determined between the particles and the chute wall the material restitution
factor and coefficient of internal friction can be obtained
The restitution factor is obtained by measurirtg the rebound height of a particle
when it is dropped from a certain height This is usually difficult to determine due
to the variation in shape of the material particles If the particle lands on a
surface it rarely bounces straight back up Therefore the test is repeated
numerous times and an average is taken to obtain the final result
Coefficient of internal friction is a property that describes the particles ability to
slide across each other A simUlation is set up to create a small stockpile of The optimisation of transfer chutes in the blJlk materials industry
MN van Aarde
87
CHAPTER 5
material particles The angle of repose can be obtained by measuring the
average apex angle of the stockpiles In this simulation the coefficient of internal
friction and restitution factors are iterated This is done in order to simulate the
accurate behaviour of particles falling onto the stockpile and forming the correct
angle of repose Figure 51 shows what this simulation typically looks like
Figure 51 Determination of material properties for an accurate angle of repose
54 VERIFICATION OF THE SELECTED TEST METHODOLOGY FOR THIS
APPLICATION
The best verification is to compare the simulation results with an actual material
flow situation Therefore a comparison is made between the actual flow in the
existing transfer configuration and the simulation of this same transfer This is
also a good test to see if the parameters changed in the simulation were done
correctly
During the chute test programme CCTV cameras were installed in the problem
transfer chutes at the facility The cameras are positioned to provide an accurate
view of the material flow behaviour inside the chutes As explained in Chapter 3
The optimisation of transfer chutes in the bulk materials industry 88
MN van Aarde
CHAPTER 5
the behaviour of the material flow inside the chutes changes with the variation of
ore type
Due to the fact that only 34 mm diameter particles are used in the simulation a
test using coarse ore was chosen for the verification of the simulation
Therefore test 12 is used as reference for the verification In this test coarse S
with the particle size distribution between 28 mm and 34 mm was used at the
transfer from CV 3 to CV 5
Figure 52 shows an image taken from the CCTV camera inside the transfer chute
between CV 3 and CV 5 The red line indicates the top of the chute throat
opening and the yellow arrows show the top of material flow This screen shot
was taken at a flow rate of 10 000 tlh It can be deduced from this view and the
chute test work that the chute is choking at a throughput rate of 10 000 tlh
Figure 52 Actual material flow with coarse S at 10000 tIh
The transfer chute from Figure 52 was modelled in CAD and the model imported
into the discrete element package EDEM All the material input parameters as
discussed in section 53 were used in the simulation 10 000 tlh was used as the
The optimisation of transfer chutes in the bulk materials industry
MN van Aarde
89
CHAPTER 5
flow rate parameter in an attempt to simulate and recreate the situation as shown
by Figure 52
Test 12 of the chute performance tests gave the following results which can be
compared to the EDEM simulation
bull Chute started to choke rapidly at 10 000 tlh
bull Slight off centre loading onto the receiving conveyor CV 5
bull A lower velocity layer of material close to the discharge of the chute
bull Material roll back on the receiving conveyor due to significant differences in
the velocity of the material flow and the receiving conveyor
Off-centre loading
L
Figure 53 Material flow pattern through the existing chute
The optimisation of transfer chutes in the bulk materials industry
MN van Aarde
90
CHAPTER 5
Flow restricted in this area
Low velocity layer
Low discharge velocity rollback
Figure 54 Cross sectional side view of material flow through the existing chute
Figure 53 shows the material flow pattern in the existing chute where the thick
red arrows indicate the direction of flow The legend on the left of the figure
indicates the material velocity in ms Slow flowing material is shown in blue and
the colour turns to red as the material velocity increases Slight off centre
loading onto the receiving conveyor CV 5 can be seen from Figure 53 This
correlates well with the actual observations during the physical testing of this
transfer point
Figure 54 shows the more determining factors for correlation between actual flow
and simulated flow where the legend on the left indicates the material velocity in
ms This is a cross sectional view through the centre of the chute From this
view a build up of material can be seen in the chute throat area The slow
flowing material on the back of the chute also helps to restrict the flow Due to
the fact that the material speed at the discharge of the chute is much slower than
the receiving belt speed a stack of turbulent flowing material is formed behind
the discharge point on the receiving conveyor
The optimisation of transfer chutes in the bulk materials industry
MN van Aarde
91
CHAPTER 5
There is a good correlation between the simulated and actual material flow
pattern The simulation method can therefore be considered as a valid alternate
or additional method to standard analytical chute design Attention should be
given though to the input of material properties in order to obtain a realistic result
55 VERIFICATION OF NEW CHUTE CONFIGURATION AND OPTIMISATION OF THE
HOOD LOCATION
After establishing that the OEM is a reliable design and verification tool the new
transfer chute configuration can be simulated Firstly this configuration is
modelled without the honeycombs inside the hood and spoon This is done in
order to verify the material flow pattern and velocity through the hood and spoon
Results obtained from this simulation can then be compared to the hand
calculation results An iterative process is followed with simulations and hand
calculations to obtain the best flow results The simulation results are shown in
Figure 55 and Figure 56
I
L
Figure 55 Material flow through hood at 10 000 tIh
The optimisation of transfer chutes in the bulk materials industry
MN van Aarde
92
CHAPTER 5
Figure 56 Material flow through spoon at 10 000 tlh
The hood velocity profile shown in Figure 38 gives the same result as obtained
from the DEM simulation The calculated hood exit velocity is 633 ms This is
the same result obtained from the simulation and shown by the red colouring in
Figure 55 As the material enters the spoon it is falling under gravity and
therefore still accelerating At impact with the chute wall it slows down and exits
the spoon with approximately the same velocity as the receiving conveyor
Figure 56 shows the material flow through the spoon section This can also be
compared to the spoon velocity profile in Figure 39 The behaviour of the
material inside the spoon as shown by the simulation correlates with the results
obtained from the hand calculations This is another indication that with accurate
input parameters the DEM can be used as a useful verification tool
The optimisation of transfer chutes in the bulk materials industry
MN van Aarde
93
CHAPTER 5
Skew loading into spoon
Slower material
L
Figure 57 Determination of the optimum hood location
The hood is supported by a shaft at the top and can be moved horizontally This
function is incorporated into the design in order to optimise the hood location
during commissioning of the transfer chute It is critical to discharge centrally into
the spoon in order to eliminate skew loading onto the receiving conveyor
Figure 57 illustrates the effect that the hood location has on material flow When
comparing the flow from Figure 55 to the flow in Figure 57 it is clear that skew
loading is a direct result of an incorrect hood position The circled area in Figure
57 illustrates how the flow reacts to the incorrect hood location
Material is discharged to the right side of the spoon which causes a slight buildshy
up of material on the left This causes the material to flow slightly from side to
side as it passes through the spoon Figure 57 indicates that the material to the
The optimisation of transfer chutes in the bulk materials industry
MN van Aarde
94
CHAPTERS ----------------- -------___ _--shy
right at the spoon discharge is slightly slower than the material on the left This is
a clear indication of skew loading onto the receiving conveyor
The material flow pattern in Figure 55 is symmetrical and therefore will not
cause skew loading The OEM can give a good indication of the required hood
setup before commissioning However adjustments can still be made during the
commissioning process The tracking of the receiving belt should give a good
indication of when the hood is in the optimum position
56 EFFECT OF THE HONEYCOMB STRUCTURE IN HIGH IMPACT ZONES
The purpose of the honeycomb dead box structure in the high impact zones is to
capture material inside the pockets and induce material on material flow This
requires that the material inside the honeycombs should be stationary while the
main stream material flow moves over the dead boxes OEM can therefore be
set up in such a way that the material velocities can be visualised inside the
chute
In Chapter 4 the logic of how this honeycomb should be structured and
positioned was discussed The simulations shown in Figure 58 and Figure 59
illustrate how a OEM pack~ge can also be used to determine the positioning of
these honeycomb structures Impact points in the hood and spoon must be
inside the honeycomb in all situations of flow inside the chute The spacing of
dead box pockets can be altered to ensure that a continuous layer of stationary
material is formed in the honeycomb area Various geometries for this
honeycomb structure can be simulated with OEM to obtain the best results
The optimisation of transfer chutes in the bulk materials industry
MN van Aarde
95
CHAPTER 5
Large radius hood
Hood honeycomb box to minimise wear in impact
Vertical discharge from hood centralising flow on
belt
L
Figure 58 Material behaviour through hood
Spoon
Spoon honeycomb box to minimise wear in impact area
Improved spoon discharge flow
Figure 59 Material behaviour through spoon
The optimisation of transfer chutes in the bulk materials industry
MN van Aarde
96
CHAPTERS
The legends on the left of Figure 58 and Figure 59 indicate the material velocity
in ms Dark blue indicates stationary material and bright red indicates a
maximum material velocity of 8 ms Using this information the functionality of
the honeycomb dead boxes can now be analysed The velocity of the material
captured by the dead boxes is indicated as dark blue This means that all the
material in the dead boxes is stationary
With the result obtained from the OEM simulation it is clear that material on
material flow will be induced by the honeycomb dead boxes The pockets of the
honeycomb capture the material and will therefore have reduced wear in the
high impact areas This material on material flow does however induce a
coarser sliding surface than the smooth ceramic liner tiles Due to the high
velocity of material through the chute the effect of the coarser sliding surface is
however minimised
58 CONCLUSION
The Discrete Element Method is proven to be a successful design and
verification tool in the bulk materials industry This method is used widely in the
global bulk materials industry The successful outcome of the OEM simulation is
however dependent on the correct material input parameters Some of these
parameters are readily available from the facility that handles the material The
rest of the parameters can be determined by setting up simple test simulations
with OEM
To verify that the OEM simulation is a correct indication of the actual condition
the simulation is compared to CCTV images taken from the same transfer chute
The results show that the OEM simulation does provide a true reflection of the
actual material flow through the transfer chute Therefore the same material
input parameters can be used to simulate the new transfer chute configuration
The optimisation of transfer chutes in the bulk materials industry
MN van Aarde
97
CHAPTER 5
From the simulations done on the new transfer chute configuration the effect of
the honeycomb dead boxes can be examined These simulation results show
that the honeycomb dead box configuration is effective in capturing material
inside the honeycomb cavities This results in material on material flow and
reduces impact abrasion on the ceramic chute liners
Results obtained from the OEM simulation of the new transfer configuration are
compared to the hand calculation results This comparison indicates that the
material velocity calculated in the hood and spoon correlates well with the
material velocity calculated by the OEM The overall results obtained from
simulating the new transfer chute configuration have been shown to provide a
true reflection of the actual flow through the chute
The optimisation of transfer chutes in the bulk materials industry
MN van Aarde
98
CHAPTER 6
CHAPTER 6 CONCLUSIONS AND RECOMMENDATIONS
The optimisation of transfer chutes in the bulk materials industry
MN van Aarde
99
CHAPTER 6
61 CONCLUSIONS AND RECOMMENDATIONS
Bulk materials handling is a key role player in the global industrial industry
Within this field the industry faces many challenges on a daily basis These
challenges as with any industry are to limit expenses and increase profit Some
of the limiting factors of achieving this goal in the bulk materials handling industry
are lost time due to unscheduled maintenance product losses due to spillage
andhigh costs incurred by increased maintenance
The focus of this study was on the optimisation of transfer chutes and
investigations were carried out to determine the core problems These
investigations were done by observing and monitoring various grades of iron ore
passing through transfer chutes known to have throughput problems The core
problems were identified as high wear on liners in the impact zones skew
loading on receiving conveyors material spillage and chute blockages
These problems cause financial losses to the facility either directly or indirectly
Direct financial losses can be attributed to the frequent replacement of chute
liners while the indirect financial losses are caused by facility down time This is
why it is imperative to optimise the manner in which the transfer of material is
approached A new transfer chute configuration addresses the problems
identified at the facility and the core concepts can be adopted at any bulk
materials handling facility
This new concept examines the utilisation of the hood and spoon concept rather
than the conventional dead box configuration By using the hood and spoon
configuration the material discharge velocity is utilised and carried through to the
discharge onto the receiving conveyor Adding to this design is a honeycomb
dead box configuration in the high impact zones of the hood and spoon This
initiates material on material flow and prolongs the lifetime of the chute liners
The optimisation of transfer chutes in the bulk materials industry
MN van Aarde
100
CHAPTER 6
The radius of the hood should be designed so that it follows the path of the
material trajectory as closely as possible Some facility constraints prohibit this
hood radius from following exactly the same path as the material The radius of
the spoon is designed in such a manner that it receives the material from the
hood and slows it down while turning it into the direction in which the belt is
running Ideally the material should be discharged from the spoon at
approximately the same velocity as the receiving conveyor
If this can be achieved then some major problems suffered by the industry will
have been resolved With the hood having almost the same radius as the
material trajectory impact wear on liners can be significantly reduced By
discharging material from the chute onto the receiving conveyor at the same
velocity as the conveyor belt excessive belt wear and material spillage will be
avoided Further optimisation is however still possible by investigating the
implementation of various skirting options to the side of the conveyor
This new transfer chute configuration also boasts an articulated bottom section in
the spoon The purpose of the adjustable bottom section is to create greater
clearance below the spoon This will allow material on the belt below to pass
unimpeded underneath the spoon In some cases there can be several chutes in
series that discharge onto the same conveyor In these cases it is beneficial to
incorporate an articulated chute in order to have the capability of having a small
drop height between the discharge point in the chute and the receiving conveyor
This low drop height also minimises turbulent flow at the chute discharge point on
the receiving conveyor
The most unique feature to the new design is the implementation of the
honeycomb dead box configuration in the high impact zones Due to these high
impact areas the liners will experience the most wear This section of the chute
is flanged and can be removed separately from the rest of the chute to aid
maintenance In most maintenance operations it may only be necessary to reline The optimisation of transfer chutes in the bulk materials industry
MN van Aarde
101
CHAPTER 6
this small section of the chute Costs are minimised by reducing the time
required for maintenance and the cost of replacing liners
Previously testing of new transfer chute configurations normally involved
implementing the chute and obseNing its ability to perform according to
specification This can however be a costly exercise as it is possible that further
modifications to the chute will be required after implementation Therefore it is
beneficial to verify the new chute configuration before implementation
This is done by simulating the material flow through the chute using Discrete
Element Method A comparison was done between the actual flow in an eXisting
chute and the simulated flow in the same chute configuration This comparison
showed the same result obtained from the simulation and the actual material
flow This method can therefore be used as an accurate simulation tool for
evaluating transfer chute performance
The mathematical calculations describing the material flow in and over the
honeycomb dead box structures are complex Therefore simulation models are
used to show the material behaviour in those areas Simulations show that the
material captured within the dead boxes remains stationary thus protecting the
ceramic liners behind it This is the desired result as it prolongs the life of the
chute liners and reduces maintenance frequencies
If the work is done efficiently it normally takes two days to remove a worn chute
of this configuration fully and replace it with a new one This is normally done
once a year due to the design lifetime of the chute With the new chute
configuration this maintenance schedule can be reduced to two hours once a
year for the replacement of the honeycomb sections only The exposed face of
the honeycomb ribs will wear through until the efficiency of the honeycomb
design is reduced
The optimisation of transfer chutes in the bulk materials industry
MN van Aarde
102
CHAPTER 6
This specific iron ore facility has approximately fifty transfer points During this
exercise only two of these transfer points were replaced with the new chute
configuration The combined annual maintenance time for replacement of these
50 chutes is 100 days If the new chute philosophy is adopted on all these
transfers the annual maintenance time can be reduced to as little as 100 hours
This excludes the unplanned work for cleaning of spillages and fixing or replacing
worn conveyors
There are significant benefits to investigating the problems at specific transfer
points before attempting a new design This gives good insight into where the
focus should be during the design process Ea~y identification and
understanding of the problem areas is essential for a new chute configuration
The new design features can provide a vast improvement and a large benefit to
the bulk materials handling industry
62 RECOMMENDATIONS FOR FURTHER STUDY
During the chute performance tests it was noted that avalanches on the
stockpiles during reclaiming of material causes peaks on the conveyor systems
These peaks in the material stream increase the probability of blockages in the
transfer chutes As a result material spillage occurs and the conveyor belts can
be easily overloaded
This occurrence creates the requirement for further studies on the reclaiming
operations All stacker reclaimers are operated manually which creates ample
room for error Investigations can be done to determine the value of automating
the reclaiming operations Manual interaction cannot be avoided but an
automated system will reduce the possibility for error
Visual inspections on the transfer chute liners indicate that the material tends to
erode the liners away quicker in the grooves between liner plates or ceramic
The optimisation of transfer chutes in the bulk materials industry
MN van Aarde
103
CHAPTER 6
tiles This occurrence seems to be worse in areas of the chute where the
material velocity is the highest
This problem was specifically noticed with ceramic liner tiles The tiles are glued
to the chute surface with an epoxy and this substance also fills the crevices
between the tiles This epoxy is however not resistant to any type of sliding or
impact abrasion If the material gains speed in such a groove between the tiles it
simply erodes the epoxy away Studies to reduce or even eliminate this problem
should be examined
In some situations the layout and configuration of the chute prohibits the tiles
from being inserted in a staggered manner Studies can be done on the
composition of this epoxy in order to increase its resistance to sliding and impact
abrasion By doing so the lifetime of the chute liners can be increased which will
result in minimised facility down time due to maintenance
It seems that it is a global industry problem to find accurate scientific methods of
determining material input parameters for OEM simulations Although most of
the material properties can be determined through testing it is still a challenge to
convert that information into a representative input parameter into OEM It is
therefore recommended that further studies be undertaken to determine a
method by which material test data can be successfully converted into OEM input
parameters
The optimisation of transfer chutes in the bulk materials industry
MN van Aarde
104
REFERENCES ------shy
REFERENCES
[1] ARNOLD P C MCLEAN A G ROBERTS A W 1978 Bulk Solids
storage flow and handling Tunra Bulk Solids Australia Jan
[2] ANON 2008 Peak (Export) OilUSD Survival Dec
httppeakoHsurvivalorgltag=finance Date of access 8 Jun 2009
[3] KESSLER F 2006 Recent developments in the field of bulk conveying
FME Transactions Vol 34 NO4
[4] ANON 2007 Specification for Troughed Belt Conveyors British
Standards BS28901989 25 Sep Date of access 8 Jun 2009
[5] CEMA (Conveyor Equipment Manufacturers Association) Belt Conveyors
6thfor Bulk Materials ed wwwcemanetorg Date of access
10 Jun 2009
[6] DEWICKI G 2003 Computer Simulation of Granular Material Flows
Overland Conveyor Co Inc Jan httpwwwpowderandbulkcom Date
of access 10 Jun 2009
[7] AMERICAN COAL COUNCIL 2009 Engineered chutes control dust for
Ameren U Es Meramec Plant httpwww clean-coal infold rupalindexphp
Date of access 12 Jun 2009
[8] KUMBA IRON ORE 2008 Annual Financial Statements 2008
httpwwwsishenironorecompanycozareportskumba afs 08pdffullpdf
Date of access 13 Jun 2009
The optimisation of transfer chutes in the bulk materials industry
MN van Aarde
105
REFERENCES
[9] METSO BACKGROUNDER 2007 Rock Crushing 22 Feb
httpWWvVmetsocom Date of access 15 Jun 2009
[10] ALTHOFF H 1977 Reclaiming and Stacking System Patent US
4037735
[11] THE SOUTH AFRICAN INSTITUTE OF MATERIALS HANDLING
Conveyor belt installations and related components Chutes Level 1
course on belt conveying technology
httpWWvVsaimhcozaeducationcourse01chuteshtm Date of access
18 Jun 2009
[12] CLARKE R 2008 Hood and spoon internal flow belt conveyor transfer
systems SACEA - seminar 22 Aug httpWWvVsaceaorgzaDate of
access 22 Jun 2009
[13] T W WOODS CONSTRUCTION 2009 Design problems in coal transfer
chutes 24 Mar httpWWvVferretcomaucTW-Woods-Constructions
Date of access 25 Jun 2009
[14] LOUGHRAN J 2009 The flow of coal through transfer chutes 20 Aug
Showcase of research excellence James Cook University Australia
[15] ONEIL M 2006 A guide to coal chute replacement Power Engineering
International Nov httpgoliathecnextcomcoms2lgi 0198-369643Ashy
guide-to-coal-chutehtml Date of access 3 Jul 2009
[16] NORDELL LK 1992 A new era in overland conveyor belt design
httpWWvVckitcozasecureconveyorpaperstroughedoverlandoverland
htm Date of access 3 Jul 2009
The optimisation of transfer chutes in the bulk materials industry
MN van Aarde
106
REFERENCES
[17] Rowland C 1992 Dust Control at Transfer Points
httpwwwckitcozasecureconveyorpapersbionic-research-2d-bri2shy
paper05htm Date of access 4 Jul 2009
[18] KRAM ENGINEERING Ceramic composite impact blocks
httpwwwkramengineeringcozacercomhtmIDate of access
5 Jul 2009
I19] BLAZEK C 2005 Kinkaid InteliFlo tradeInstallation Source for Plats
Power Atticle Oct
httpwwwbenetechusacompdf caseStudyBe neKi ncArti c pdf
Date of access 10 Aug 2009
[20] CRP Engineering Corp Modern Transfer Chute Designs for Use in
Material Handling
httpwwwcbpengineeringcompdflTransfer Chutespdf Date of access
26 Apr 2010
[21] ROZENTALS J 2008 Rational design of conveyor chutes Bionic
Research Institute South African Institute of Materials Handling
[22] ROBERTS AW SCOTT OJ 1981 Flow of bulk solids through
transfer chutes of variable geometry and profile Bulk Solids Handling
1(4) Dec
[23] CARSON JW ROYAL TA GOODWILL DJ 1986 Understanding
and Eliminating Particle Segregation Problems Bulk Solids Handling
6(1) Feb
[24] BENJAMIN CW 2004 The use of parametric modelling to design
transfer chutes and other key components Gulf Conveyor Group The optimisation of transfer chutes in the bulk materials industry
MN van Aarde
107
l25] STUART DICK D ROYAL TA 1992 Design Principles for Chutes to
Handle Bulk Solids Bulk Solids Handling 12(3) Sep
[26J REICKS AV RUDOLPHI TJ 2004 The Importance and Prediction of
Tension Distribution around the Conveyor Belt Path Bulk materials
handling by conveyor belt 5(2)
(271 RAMOS CM 1991 The real cost of degradation
institute Chute design conference 1991
Bionic research
[28] ROBERTS AW 1969 An investigation of the gravity flow of non
cohesive granular materials through discharge chutes Transactions of
the ACMEjournal of engineering for indust~ May
[29] TAYLOR HJ 1989 Guide to the design of transfer chutes and chute
linings for bulk materials
association 1989
mechanical handling engineers
[30] ROBERTS AW 1999 Chute design application transfer chute design
Design guide for chutes in bulk solids handling The University of
Newcastle Australia
[31] NORDELL LK 1994 Palabora installs Curved Transfer Chute in Hard
Rock to Minimise Belt Cover Wear Bulk Solids Handling 14 Dec
[32] ROZENTALS J 1991 Flow of Bulk Solids in Chute Design
research institute Chute design conference 1991
Bionic
The optimisation oftransfer chutes in the bulk materials industry
MN van Aarde
108
REFERENCES
[33] ROBERTS AW WICHE SJ 2007 Feed Chute Geometry for
Minimum Belt Wear (h International conference of bulk materials
handling 17 Oct
[34J POWDER HANDLING New OEM Conveyor Transfer Chute Design
Software Helix Technologies
httpvwvwpowderhandlingcomauarticesnew-dem-conveyor-transfershy
chute-design-software Date of access 12 Aug 2009
[35J SAWLEY ML CLEARY PW 1999 A Parallel Discrete Element
Method for Industrial Granular Flow SimUlations EPFL - Super
Computing Review (11)
[36] DEWICKI G 2003 Bulk Material Handling and Processing - Numerical
Techniques and Simulation of Granular Material Overland Conveyor
Company Bulk Solids Handling 23(2)
[37J FA VIER J 2009 Continuing Improvements Boost use of Discrete
Element Method Oil and Gas Engineer- Production Processing 7 Oct
[38] KRAUS E F KA TTERFELD A Usage of the Discrete Element Method in
Conveyor Technologies Institute for Conveyor Technologies (IFSL) The
Otto-von-Guericke University of Magdeburg
[39] MOYS MH VAN NIEROP MA VAN TONDER JC GLOVER G
2005 Validation of the Discrete Element Method (OEM) by Comparing
Predicted Load Behaviour of a Grinding Mill with Measured Data School
for Process and Materials Engineering University of Witwatersrand
Johannesburg The optimisation of transfer materials industry
MN van Aarde
109
REFERENCES
[40J MciLVINA P MOSSAD R 2003 Two dimensional transfer chute
analysis using a continuum method Third international conference on
CFD in the Minerals and Process Industry CSIRO Melbourne Australia
(41J Overland Conveyor Company Inc 2009 Applied DEM
httpwwwapplieddemcomDate of access 26 Apr 2010
(42] DEM SOLUTIONS 2008 Advanced Particle Simulation Capabilities with
EDEM 21 Press release 5 Nov
[43J DEM SOLUTIONS 2008 Martin Engineering Expands use of EDEMTM
Software in Design of Solids Handling Equipment Press release 20 Feb
(44] COETZEE CJ ELS DNJ 2009 Calibration of Discrete Element
Parameters and the Modelling of Silo Discharge and Bucket Filling
Computers and Electronics in Agriculture 65 Mar
[45] DAVID J KRUSES PE Conveyor Belt Transfer Chute Modelling and
Other Applications using The Discrete Element Method in the Material
Handling Industry
httpwwwckitcozasecureconveyorpaperstrouqhedconveyorconveyor
Date of access 3 Sep 2009
bulk materials industry
MN van Aarde
110
ApPENDIXA
ApPENDIX A MATERIAL TESTS AND LINER SELECTiON
The optimisation of-transfer chutes in the bulk materials industry
MN van Aarde
11-1
ApPENDIX A
MATERIAL TEST WORK AND LINER SELECTION
Material samples were taken from the stockpile area for evaluation and testing
These samples represent the worst case materials for impact wear and flow
problems Tests were conducted by external consultants as this is a speciality
field Therefore no detail information on how the tests are conducted is currently
available Results from these tests should indicate the worst case parameters for
chute design according to each specific liner type tested
The material handled by the facility varied from 4 mm to 34 mm lump size A mid
range lump size ore was identified as the preferred material to use for wear
testing This decision was based on the specific ore type maximum lump size of
15 mm as required for the wear test The wear test apparatus used cannot
provide conclusive results with the larger lump sizes of 34 mm and thus smaller
sizes are used Guidance on which ore samples to take was given by the
external consultants tasked with performing the test work
The test work is divided into two sections Firstly the flow test work is carried out
on the finer material with a higher clay content known to have bad flow angles
Included in the selection of fine materials is a sample of the scraper dribblings
This is the material scraped off the belt underneath the head pulley Secondly
the wear tests were conducted on 15 mm samples as explained above
A few common liners were selected for testing These liners are shown in
Table A Some of these liners are known for their specific purpose and
characteristics Polyurethane is known to have a very good coefficient of friction
and will therefore improve the flow of material This material does however
wear out quicker in high impact applications Therefore it is only considered for
use inside the dribbling chute
The optimisation of transfer chutes in the bulk materials industry
MN van Aarde
112
ApPENDIX A
As can be seen from Figure 37 in section 432 the dribbling chute will only see
scraper dribblings from the primary and secondary scrapers It is protected from
any main stream flow of material by the start up chute This makes the
polyurethane liner a prime candidate for lining this section of the chute
Table A Material tested vs liner type
I Flow Tests Wear Tests
Liner T
en aJ c
u
I
i
N en aJ c
u
Cf)
en aJ c
u
I en
shy OJaJ C 0 shyj -shy 0 u pound
(f) shy0
T
aJ ~ j 0 0
N aJ ~ j 0 0 i
I Chrome x x x x x
Carbide
x x x x xI VRN 500 I
x x x x x x94
Alumina
Ceramic i I
Poly x
Urethane I I I
FLOW TEST WORK
The fines 1 sample was tested at three different moisture contents of 36 41
and 47 This is 70 80 and 90 of saturation moisture respectively No
noticeable difference was observed in the wall friction angles Therefore the
fines 2 and fines 3 samples were tested at 80 of saturation which is 42 and
43 moisture content respectively
Test work showed that the minimum chute angle required for flow increased as
the impact pressure increased Chute angles were measured up to impact
pressures of about 8 kPa The worst chute angle obtained was 62deg This means
that no angle inside the chute should be less than 62deg from the horizontal
The industry 113
MN van Aarde
ApPENDIXA
The scraper dribblings were tested at a moisture content of 12 This material
possesses the most clay content and therefore has the worst flow properties
During testing of this material water was added to improve the flow At an
impact pressure of 03 kPa the minimum chute angle drops from 62deg to 56deg when
adding a fine mist spray of water
WEAR TEST WORK
As stated in chapter 4 wear tests were conducted on the chrome carbide
overlay ceramics and VRN500 The results of these tests are shown as non
dimensional wear ratios of mm wearmm travel of bulk solid sliding on the wear
liners coupon at a given force Test results shown in Table B indicate that the
chrome carbide will have about 185 times the lifetime of 94 alumina ceramics
The VRN500 liner will wear about 6 times faster than the 94 alumina ceramics
at the same force
Table B Wear ratios of liners at two different pressure ranges
lore Wall Coupon 65 kPa 163kPa -173 kPa I i
Coarse 1 on 94 Alumina Ceramic 90 E-9 37 E-8
Coarse 1 on Chrome Carbide 87 E-9 20 E-8
Coarse 1 on VRN500 91 E-8 I 24 E-7 i
Coarse 2 on 94 Alumina Ceramics 38 E-9 22 E-8
Coarse 2 on Chrome Carbide 55 E-9 15 E-8
Coarse 2 on VRN500 66 E-8 25 E-7 I
LINER SELECTION
The lifetime of the liners is not the only criteria Maintainability and cost are also
factors that must be considered Chrome carbide seems to be the liner of choice
for this application However the specific type of chrome carbide tested is not
The optimisation of transfer chutes industry 114
MN van Aarde
ApPEND[xA
manufactured locally and the imported cost is approximately three times that of
ceramics
VRN500 is slightly cheaper than ceramics and can easily be bolted to the back
plate of the chute which makes maintenance very simple Ceramics are
however widely used on the facility and the maintenance teams are well trained
for this specific liner Therefore 94 alumina ceramics is chosen for this
application
The optimisation of transfer chutes in the bulk materials industry
MN van Aarde
115
ApPENODlt B
ApPENDIX B CHUTE CONTROL PHILOSOPHY
The optfmisation of transfer chutes in the bulk materials industry
MN van Aarde
116
ApPENDIX B
SPOON IN THE OPERATING POSITION
For the spoon to be in the operating position the moving head must be over that
specific spoon and the feeding stockyard conveyor must be running This means
that material will be fed through the chute In this case the spoon needs to be in
the operating position to prevent spillage
However when the chute is in the operating position and the feeding conveyor
trips for any reason the actuated spoon section must not move to the non
operating position If the spoon position feedback fails then the system must trip
and the spoon must remain in its last position The downstream conveyor must
also fail to start with this condition
SPOON IN THE NON OPERATING POSITION
As a rule the spoon needs to be in the non operating position when the moving
head on that specific stockyard conveyor is in the purging position (position C)
The reason is that when a stacker reclaimer is in stacking mode any upstream
stacker reclaimer can be reclaiming The reclaimed material on CV 5 or CV 6
will have to pass underneath the actuated chute
ACTUATED SPOON OVER CV 5
As an example for the movement of any actuated spoon on CV 5 the following
are considered When the moving heads of any of the stockyard conveyors are
in position A and that specific stockyard conveyor is running then the rest of the
actuated spoons over CV 5 must be in the non operating position The
following scenario provides a better understanding
bull CV 4 is running
bull CV 4 moving head is in position A
The optimisation of transfer chutes in the bulk materials industry
MN van Aarde
117
ApPENDIXB
In this situation all the actuated spoons on CV 5 except underneath CV 4
must be in the non operating position
ACTUATED SPOON OVER CV 6
As an example for the movement of any actuated spoon on CV 6 the following
are considered When the moving heads of any of the stockyard conveyors are
in position B and that specific stockyard conveyor is running then the rest of the
actuated spoons over CV 6 must be in the non operating position The
following scenario is similar to 453 but explains the control philosophy for the
moving head in position B
bull CV 2 is running
bull CV 2 moving head is in position B
In this situation all the actuated spoons on CV 6 except underneath CV 2
must be in the non operating position
The optimisation of transfer chutes in bulk materials industry
MN van Aarde
118
SAMEVATTING
SAM EVATTING
Materiaal handtering is n vinnig groeiende wereldwye industrie Hierdie industrie
word gekonfronteer deur groot uitdagings om die effektiwiteit van materiaal
handtering te verbeter en sodoende die koste daaraan verbonde te verminder
Die aard en skaal van materiaal handtering varieer van land tot land afhangende
van die vereistes wat gestel word deur daardie land se industriele sektor Hierdie
studie fokus spesifiek op materiaal handtering in die mynbou sektor waar
hoofsaaklik geprosesseerde erts handteer word
In hierdie industrie is oordrag geute n sleutel komponent en word dit hoofsaaklik
gebruik om erts te vervoer vanaf een vervoerband na n volgende Dit kan ook
onder andere gebruik word onder hoppers of sillos waar materiaal vervoer word
na vervoerbande treine vragmotors of skepe In die strewe om die effektiwiteit
van prosesse te verbeter word die industrie gekonfronteer met probleme wat
onder andere insluit
bull geblokkeerde oordrag geute
bull hoe slytasie op geut-voerring materiale
bull vermorsing van materiaal as gevolg van geute wat skeef aflaai op
vervoerbande
bull hoe slytasie van vervoerbande by uitlaai punte
Voordat bestaande probleem geute vervang word met n nuwe konfigurasie is dit
belangrik om n deeglike ondersoek te doen Hierdie ondersoek skep n beter
insig oor die probleme wat bestaan in die oordrag geute n Beter insig rondom
die probleme gee aan die ontwerper die vermoe om die optimale oplossing vir
die probleme te kry In hierdie skripsie is n studie gedoen oor die konfigurasie
van dinamiese geute of sogenaamde hood and spoon geute Bestaande
probleme word in ag geneem en die studie fokus op die verbetering van
materiaal vloei sowel as In ontwerp wat instandhouding vergemaklik ~~~~~~~~-
The optimisation of transfer chutes in the bulk materials industry
MN van Aarde
iv
SAMEVATTING
As n toevoegsel tot die verbeterde vloei binne die nuwe ontwerp vir die
spesifieke geut waarna gekyk word in hierdie studie word daar ook ander
ontwerp toevoegings bespreek wat die waarde van die nuwe ontwerp verder
bevestig Hierdie ontwerp verbeter die leeftyd van die geut-voerring en tyd wat
afgestaan moet word aan instandhouding word geminimeer
Daar is letterlik eindelose moontlikhede wanneer dit kom by die konfigurasie van
oordrag geute as gevolg van die uniekheid van elke aanleg materiaal tipe en
uitleg beperkings Daarom is dit voordelig om te weet waaraan aandag gegee
moet word in die proses om geute te ontwerp of te optimiseer
Hierdie studie fokus op n spesifieke oordrag geut binne n spesifieke industrie
met unieke probleme en oplossings Dit behoort die geut ontwerper te bekwaam
met die basiese kennis en insig oor waarna om te kyk wanneer geute ontwerp of
geoptimiseer word Die doel van hierdie skripsie is dus nie om die leser te
voorsien van n resep om geute te optimiseer nie maar wei die kennis om die
probleme en oplossings te verstaan deur gebruik te maak van n studie uit die
industrie
The optimisation of transfer chutes in the bulk materials industry
MN van Aarde
v
ACKNOWLEDGEMENTS
ACKNOWLEDGEMENTS
I would like to thank Prof EH Mathews for the opportunity to do my Masters
degree
Special thanks to Dr M Kleingeld for his guidance and effort in assisting me in
my attempt to deliver a dissertation of this standard
Thank you to Prof Lesley Greyvenstein for the language editing
To my family thank you for all your support and encouragement throughout the
execution of this study
------________--__------------shyThe optimisation of transfer chutes in the bulk materials industry
MN van Aarde
vi
TABLE OF CONTENTS ---~-------------------~----
TABLE OF CONTENTS
Abstract ii
Samevatting iv
Acknowledgements vi
Table of contents vii
List of figures ix
List of tables xii
Nomenclature xiii
Chapter 1 Introduction to transfer chutes in the bulk materials handling industry1
11 Introduction to transfer chutes 2
12 Various applications and configurations of transfer chutes 5
13 Recurring chute problems and countermeasures from industry 11
14 Purpose of this research 18
15 Synopsis of this dissertation 19
Chapter 2 Basic considerations in chute design 21
21 Preface 22
22 Design objectives 22
23 Integrating a more appropriate chute layout with the plant constraints 27
24 Investigating the correct chute profile for reduced liner wear 30
25 Feed chute geometry for reduced belt wear 34
26 Conclusion37
Chapter 3 Tests for the identification of recurring problems on existing chutes39
31 Preface 40
32 Test methodology 40
33 Chute performance acceptance criteria 42
34 Discussion of problem areas 42
35 Summary of test results 54
36 Conclusion55
The optimisation of transfer chutes in the bulk materials industry
MN van Aarde
vii
TABLE OF CONTENTS
Chapter 4 Dynamic chutes for the elimination of recurring problems 57
41 Preface 58
42 Consideration of the existing transfer point constraints 59
43 Design of the chute profile 61
44 Incorporating a dead box in the impact areas 67
45 Designing the chute for integration with system requirements 73
46 Conclusion75
Chapter 5 Testing and verification ofthe new solution 77
51 Preface 78
52 Selecting a test methodology 79
53 Determination of material properties 85
54 Verification of the selected test methodology for this application 88
55 Verification of new chute configuration and optimisation of the hood
location 92
56 Effect of the honeycomb structure in high impact zones 95
58 Conclusion 97
Chapter 6 Conclusions and Recommendations 99
61 Conclusions and recommendations 100
62 Recommendations for further study 103
References 1 05
Appendix A Material Tests And Liner Selection 111
Appendix B Chute Control Philosophy 116
The optimisation of transfer chutes in the bulk materials industry
MN van Aarde
viii
LIST OF FIGURES
LIST OF FIGURES
Figure 1 Growth in global crude steel production from 1996 to 2006 [2] 2
Figure 2 Typical in-line transfer point [6] 4
Figure 3 90deg transfer point [7J 4
Fig ure 4 Material lump sizes through a crushing plant 6
Figure 5 Stacker Reclaimer in reclaiming mode 7
Figure 6 Typical dead box [11J9
Figure 7 Typical cascade chute [11] 9
Figure 8 Typical dynamic chute [12] 10
Figure 9 Radial door used in chutes under ore passes or silos [11] 1 0
Figure 10 Flopper gate diverting material to different receiving conveyors [11J 11
Figure 11 Ch ute liner degradation 12
Figure 12 Results of continuous belt wear at transfer points 13
Figure 1 Dust from a transfer point onto a stockpie13
Figure 14 Ceramic composite liners [18]15
Figure 15 Benetech Inteliflow J-Glide transfer chute [19] 16
Figure 16 Flow simulation of the Benetech Ineliflo chute [19] 17
Figure 17 Four step process for plant design and commissioning [1] 27
Figure 18 Vertical curve on incline conveyor 28
Figure 19 Protective roller on a transfer chute 29
Figure 20 Geometry of the impact plate and material trajectory [30J30
Figure 21 Model for the impact of a particle on a flat surface [29] 31
Figure 22 Ore flow path in the curved chute onto the incline conveyor [31] 35
Figure 23 Gentle deceleration of the product before impact on the receiving belt
[32] 35
Figure 24 Typical feed chute discharge model [33] 37
Figure 25 Layout of conveyors for chute test work 43
Figure 26 Configuration of the existing transfer chute44
Figure 27 Clear chute indicating camera angle 46
The optimisation of transfer chutes in the bulk materials industry
MN van Aarde
ix
LIST OF FIGURES
Figure 28 Coarse material at 8 000 tlh 46
Figure 29 Fine material at 8 000 tlh 47
Figure 30 Blocked chute with coarse material at 8600 tIh 47
Figure 31 Damaged side skirt 49
Figure 32 View behind the chute of the receiving conveyor before loading 50
Figure 33 View behind the chute of the receiving conveyor during loading 50
Figure 34 Peak surges experienced during reclaiming operations 52
Figure 35 Stockyard head end layout 59
Figure 36 Dimensional constraints on the existing transfer configuration 60
Figure 37 Hood and spoon configuration for the 90deg transfer 63
Figure 38 Hood velocity profile 65
Figure 39 Spoon velocity profile 66
Figure 40 Chute cross section 67
Fig ure 43 Honeycomb wear box positioning 69
Figure 44 Wear box in the hood section 70
Figure 45 Spacing arrangement of honeycomb ribs inside the hood 71
Figure 46 Wear box in the spoon section 72
Figure 47 Liner detail of the spoon honeycomb wear box 73
Figure 41 Spoon in the operational position 74
Figure 42 Spoon in the non operational position 75
Figure 48 Flow analysis examples a) separation and screening b) hoppers
feeders [36J 80
Figure 49 Simulations results from Fluenttrade [4OJ 83
Figure 50 Simulation results from Bulk Flow Analysttrade [41J83
Figure 51 Determination of material properties for an accurate angle of repose88
Figure Actual material flow with coarse Sat 10 000 tIh 89
Figure 53 Material flow pattem through the existing chute 90
Figure 54 Cross sectional side view of material flow through the existing chute91
Figure 55 Material flow through hood at 10 000 tlh 92
Figure 56 Material flow through spoon at 10 000 tlh 93
Figure 57 Determination of the optimum hood location 94
The optimisation of transfer chutes in the bulk materials industry
MN van Aarde
x
OF FIGURES
Figure 58 Material behaviour through hood 96
Figure 59 Material behaviour through spoon 96
The optimisation of transfer chutes in the bulk materials industry
MN van Aarde
xi
LIST OF TABLES
LIST OF TABLES
Table 1 Design Input Reference Requirements [24J 24
Table 2 Iron are grades used for chute test work 45
Table 3 Results from test programme 54
The optimisation of transfer chutes in the bulk materials industry
M N van Aarde
xii
---------------------------------
CV
NOMENCLATURE
NOMENCLATURE
SCADA
CCTV
CEMA
DEM
kPa
mm
MSHA
ms
mt
MW
NIOSH
OSHA
RampD
tlh
3D
Supervisory Control And Data Acquisition
Closed Circuit Television
Conveyor Equipment Manufacturers Association
Conveyor
Discrete Element Method
Kilopascal
Millimetres
Mine Safety and Health Administration
Metres per second
Metric Tons
Megawatt
National Institute for Occupational Safety and Health
Occupational Safety and Health Administration
Radius of curvature
Research and Development
Tons per hour
Three Dimensional
The optimisation of transfer chutes in the bulk materials industry
MN van Aarde
xiii
CHAPTER 1
CHAPTER 1 INTRODUCTION TO TRANSFER CHUTES IN THE BULK
MATERIALS HANDLING INDUSTRY
The optimisation of transfer chutes in the bulk materials industry
MN van Aarde
1
CHAPTER 1
11 INTRODUCTION TO TRANSFER CHUTES
111 Bulk material handling industry
In order to comprehend the utilisation of transfer chutes fully it is imperative to
first understand the industry in which it is used Transfer chutes are most
commonly used in the bulk materials handling industry Bulk materials handling
operations perform a key function in a great number and variety of industries
throughout the world as stated in 1978 by Arnold McLean and Roberts [1 J
The nature of materials handling and scale of industrial operation varies from
industry to industry and country to country These variations are based on the
industrial and economic capacity and requirements of the specific industry or
country Regardless of the variations in industry the relative costs of storing
handling and transporting bulk materials are in the majority of cases very
significant
o
Figure 1 Growth in global crude steel production from 1996 to 2006 [2J
The optimisation of transfer chutes in the bulk materials industry
MN van Aarde
2
CHAPTER 1
The chart from BHP Billiton shown in Figure 1 provides a clear indication of the
actual drivers of global materials demand Figure 1 indicates the percentage
growth in crude steel production from all the major role players between 1996
and 2006 China accounted for 65 of the 494 million tonnes of global steel
production growth between 1996 and 2006 Europe grew by 6 while the other
countries grew by 20 [2]
These figures emphasise that bulk materials handling performs a key function in
the global industry and economy [1] Because of market requirements new
products continuously evolve This is also true for the field of bulk conveying
technologies [3] It can be assumed that the evolution of new technology is due
to the requirement for more efficient and cost effective operation
The case study which will be discussed from Chapter 3 onwards is an iron ore
export facility This facility exports approximately 50 million tonnes per annum
With each hour of down time the financial losses equate to approximately
R750 000 This highlights the fact that handling systems should be designed and
operated with a view to achieving maximum efficiency and reliability
112 Function of transfer chutes
BS2890 (Specification for Troughed Belt Conveyors) gives the definition for
transfer chutes as follows A straight curved or spiral open topped or enclosed
smooth trough by which materials are directed and lowered by gravity [4] For
any belt conveyor system to operate successfully the system requires that [5]
bull the conveyor belt be loaded properly
bull the material transported by the conveyor is discharged properly
The transfer of bulk material can either be from a belt bin hopper feeder or
stockpile and occurs at a transfer point In most cases this transfer point requires
optimisation of transfer chutes in the bulk materials industry
MN van Aarde
3
CHAPTER 1 - ----~--~--------------~--------
a transfer chute [5] In industry the most common use of transfer chutes is for
transferring bulk material from one conveyor belt to another This transfer of
material can be done in any direction as simplistically explained in Figure 2 and
Figure 3
Figure 2 Typical in-line transfer point [6J
Figure 2 shows a basic in-line transfer of material from the end of one conveyor
belt onto the start of another conveyor belt Figure 3 illustrates a more intricate
design where the direction of material transport is changed by an angle of 90 0 bull
This design or any other design entailing a directional change in flow normally
requires more detailed engineering [7
The optimisation of transfer chutes in the bulk materials industry
MN van Aarde
4
CHAPTER 1
Regardless of the direction or type of transfer there are some design
requirements that always need special attention Some of these requirements
are reduced wear on chute liners correct discharge velocity minimum material
degradation and minimum belt abrasion The correct design will also eliminate
blockages shape the load correctly and minimise the creation of dust [7]
12 VARIOUS APPLICATIONS AND CONFIGURATIONS OF TRANSFER CHUTES
The application of transfer chutes is central to any operation in the bulk handling
industry Whether it is mining operations storing stacking importing or
exporting of bulk material the transfer of material is always required On the
mining side the challenges involved with materials handling are probably some of
the most extreme
This is due to the great variation in lump sizes that must be catered for At
Sishen iron ore mine seven iron ore products are produced conforming to
different chemical and physical specifications The current mining process at
Sishen entails [8]
bull Removal of topsoil and stockpiling
bull Drilling and blasting of ore
bull Loading of iron ore and transporting to the crushers
bull Crushing and screening into size fractions
bull Beneficiation of all size fractions
bull Stockpiling onto various product beds
The processes with the most intricate and complex chute arrangements are
probably crushing and screening as well as stacking and reclaiming of material
The optimisation of transfer chutes in the bulk materials industry
11 N van Aarde
5
CHAPTER 1
121 Crushing
An excavator or wheeled loader transfers the rock to be crushed into the feed
hopper of the primary crusher The primary crusher breaks the large rock
boulders or run of mine material into smaller grain sizes Some of the bigger
crushers in the industry can crack boulders that are about one cubic meter in
size All the crushed material passes over a screen to separate the different
lump sizes The material that falls through the screen is transferred via a series
of transfer chutes and conveyor belts to the stockpile area [9]
Where the material does not pass through the screen another system of transfer
chutes and conveyor belts transfers this material to a secondary crusher The
material is fed into this crusher via a transfer chute from the discharge of a
conveyor belt All the processed material is then transferred to the stockpile area
via a separate series of transfer chutes and conveyor systems [9] Throughout
this whole process the material lump size changes and with it the transfer chute
requirements
Figure 4 Material lump sizes through a crushing plant
The optimisation of transfer chutes in the bulk materials industry
MN van Aarde
6
CHAPTER 1
Figure 4 shows some spillage from a conveyor between a primary and secondary
crusher The shovel in the picture provides a good reference as to the variation
in material lump size on the walkway
122 Stacking and Recaiming
Normally the stockyard area has an elongated yard conveyor for moving bulk
material in the longitudinal direction of the stockyard Straddling the yard
conveyor transversely is the rail mounted undercarriage of the stacker reclaimer
Three main chutes transfer material through the machine [10] Figure 5 shows
this machine in action while reclaiming material from a stockpile
Figure 5 Stacker Reclaimer in reclaiming mode
The first chute will transfer material to the incline conveyor of the machine when
the material has to be stacked on the stockpile In the case where the material
must bypass the machine this chute will transfer material from the tripper back
onto the yard conveyor [10]
The optimisation of transfer chutes in the bulk materials industry
MN van Aarde
7
CHAPTER 1
The second chute transfers material from the incline conveyor onto the boom
conveyor This is normally a difficult process because the boom conveyor is
never in the same direction as the incline conveyor From the end of the boom
conveyor the material is Simply discharged onto the stockpile [10]
When reclaiming stockpile material the bucket whee at the head end of the
boom conveyor scoops up material and deposits it back onto the boom conveyor
From here it is discharged into the centre chute of the machine This chute then
discharges the material onto the yard conveyor for further processing In some
cases the bottom section of this centre chute must be moved out of the way to
allow free passage of material discharged from the tripper chute onto the yard
conveyor [10]
123 Chute configurations
Various chute configurations are used in the bulk materials handling industry
These configurations depend on the specific requirements of the system layout
or material properties There are basically two main configurations consisting of
dead box chutes and dynamic chutes Both of these configurations have their
specific applications in industry The major difference is that dead box chutes
use the material being transferred as a chute liner whereas dynamic chutes are
lined with a high wear resistant material A combination of both can also be
used
If the material being transferred is relatively dry such as goid ore dead boxes
prove to be more beneficial One of the applications of a ded box is to absorb
the direct impact of material discharged from a conveyor into a head chute as
can be seen in Figure 6 Other applications are in long or high transfer points In
these transfers the momentum of falling material must be reduced before
reaching the receiving conveyor belt in order to reduce wear of the belt [11]
The optimisation of transfer chutes in the bulk materials industry
MN van Aarde
8
CHAPTER 1
Figure 6 Typical dead box [11]
As shown in Figure 7 dead boxes are also used to accomplish changes in the
vertical flow direction by inserting angled panels This configuration where dead
boxes are used as deflection plates or impact wear plates is known as a cascade
chute In this case the deflection plate or the impact wear plate hardness is
equal to that of the feed material [11]
Figure 7 Typical cascade chute [11]
The hood and spoon chute or dynamic chute is configured so that the hood
catches and changes the material trajectory path to exit with a vertical velocity
When the material impacts the spoon it slides down the smooth spoon surface
The material flow direction is changed to the direction of the receiving conveyor
as shown in Figure 8 [12]
The optimisation of transfer chutes in the bulk materials industry
MN van Aarde
9
CHAPTER 1
Figure 8 Typical dynamic chute [12J
Ancillary equipment used with this configuration of chutes is radial doors and
flopper gates Radial doors are used successfully below ore passes or silos for
an onoff feed control as shown by Figure 9 One drawback of radial doors is the
possibility of jamming while closing In order to counteract this problem a
knocker arm between the cylinder door and the rod can be added This helps to
close the door with full force open with reduced force or hammered open [11]
Figure 9 Radial door used in chutes under ore passes or silos [11J
The optimisation of transfer chutes in the bulk materials industry
MN van Aarde
10
CHAPTER 1
The function of a f10pper gate is to divert the flow of material in a chute when one
conveyor is required to feed either of two discharge points as shown in Figure 10
For this same purpose a diverter car can also be used where a section of the
chute moves in and out of the path of material flow The critical area in the
design of a flop per gate is the hinge point In order for the gate to be self
cleaning the hinge point should be placed above the apex of the double chute
This also prevents rock traps that can jam the gate [11]
COVERED
Figure 10 Flopper gate diverling material to different receiving conveyors [11J
13 RECURRING CHUTE PROBLEMS AND COUNTERMEASURES FROM INDUSTRY
Transfer chutes are a fundamental link when conveying ore and therefore it is
important to get it right at the outset of design and fabrication Design and
fabrication issues can cause numerous problems when transferring material
Historically conveyor system design focused on the systems overall structural
integrity while ensuring that the equipment would fit within the facilitys
constraints [13] [14] [15]
The optimisation of transfer chutes in the bulk materials industry
MN van Aarde
11
CHAPTER 1
Little attention was given to design analysis or consideration for material flow
characteristics Normally the solution for controlling flow was to implement
simple rock boxes [15] This type of chute configuration is still commonly used in
industry but with more emphasis on the flow of material The most recurrent
problems on transfer chutes are [13] [14]
bull Spillage
bull Blocked chutes
bull High wear on the receiving belt due to major differences between the
material velocity and the belt velocity
bull Rapid chute wear
bull Degradation of the material being transferred
bull Excessive generation of dust and noise
bull Miss tracking of the receiving conveyor belt due to skew loading from the
transfer chute
Figure 11 Chute liner degradation
Figure 11 shows the excessive wear on ceramic tiles where the material
trajectory from the feeding belt impacts the chute These tiles are replaceable
and a maintenance schedule normally specifies the replacement intervals A
The optimisation of transfer chutes in the bulk materials industry 12
MN van Aarde
CHAPTER 1
problem arises when the frequency of these maintenance intervals is too high
due to excessive wear on the liners
Figure 12 Results of continuous belt wear at transfer points
The conveyor belt can account for up to 60 of the capital cost of a bulk
materials handling plant This means that the cost implications of constant
replacement of a conveyor belt due to wear can become significantly higher
than the original capital investment [16] Figure 12 shows the extreme damage
on a conveyor belt caused by abrasion and gouging
Figure 13 Dust from a transfer point onto a stockpile
The optimisation of transfer chutes in the bulk materials industry
MN van Aarde
13
CHAPTER 1 --~ ---------------------------shy
The presence of dust is an indisputable fact in many industries concerned with
the handling or processing of products such as coal mineral ores and many
others [17] As in the case of spillage it is easy to identify transfer systems that
cause dust clouds Environmental regulations are in place to prevent excessive I
dust emissions
Government organisations such as the Occupational Safety and Health
Administration (OSHA) the Mine Safety and Health Administration (MSHA) and
the National Institute for Occupational Safety and Health (NIOSH) closely monitor
dust levels at all coal handling facilities [13] Therefore it is imperative that the
chute design process caters for limiting dust emissions
Systems normally used in industry are enclosed skirting systems bag houses
and dust collectors This however is only treating the symptom rather than
eliminating the primary cause In order to minimise dust generation the use of
low impact angles and minimal chute contact is required (14] One of the most
successful methods of controlling dust is atomised water spray systems using a
combination of high pressure water and chemical substances
Over the years considerable research has gone into minimising wear on transfer
chutes There are currently a few different liner types to choose from depending
on the configuration and application of the chute These include ceramic tiles
chrome carbide overlay materials and typi~al hardened steel plates such as
VRN A combination of liner materials can also be used similar to the one
shown in Figure 14
The opUmisation of transfer chutes in the bulk materials industry
MN van Aarde
14
CHAPTER 1
Figure 14 Ceramic composite liners [18J
This ceramic composite liner is an example of the new technology available in
chute lining materials It is a high wear resistant surface made from cylindrical
alumina ceramic pellets bound within a resilient rubber base The purpose of this
material is to provide wear resistance through the use of ceramics while the
rubber dampens the impact forces [18]
Some innovative concepts for chute design have been implemented since the
materials handling industry started to incorporate new ideas Benetech Inc
installed a new generation hood and spoon type chute at Dominions 1200 MW
Kincaid coal powered generating station as shown in Figure 15 This chute
replaced the conventional dead box chute [19] Their innovation is to use a pipe
configuration combined with the hood and spoon concept
The optimisation of transfer chutes in the bulk materials industry
MN van Aarde
15
CHAPTER 1
Figure 15 Benetech Inteliflow J-Gide transfer chute [19J
This chute has sufficient chute wall slope and cross sectional area to prevent
material build-up and blocked chutes Reduced collision forces in the chute
minimize material degradation and the creation of excessive dust The material
velocity in the chute is controlled by the wall angles to obtain a discharge velocity
with the same horizontal component as the belt velocity [19] Figure 16 shows a
flow simulation of the Benetech concept The simulation shows that this concept
will result in lower impact forces and reduce belt abrasion
The optimisation of transfer chutes in the bulk materials industry
MN van Aarde
16
CHAPTER 1
Figure 16 Flow simulation ofthe Benetech Ineliflo chute [19J
CBP Engineering Corp also considers the concept of pipe type sections to be
the answer to most of the transfer chute problems They describe it as a curved
or half round chute The modern perception is to gently guide the material in the
required direction rather than use a square box design or deflector doors which
turns or deflects the flow [20]
The industry is striving towards developing new technology in transfer chute
design One solution is to incorporate soft loading transfer chutes to alter the
material flow direction with minimum impact on the side walls of chute and
receiving conveyor As experienced by many industries these types of chutes
can transfer material onto the receiving conveyor at almost the same velocity as
the conveyor By doing so many of the problems with material transfer can be
eliminated [13]
Most of these solutions as proposed by industry only address a few of the
numerous problems experienced with transfer chutes The dynamic hood and
The optimisation of transfer chutes in the bulk materials industry
MN van Aarde
17
CHAPTER 1
spoon chute appears to afford the best opportunity for solving most of the
problems There are still however many unanswered questions surrounding this
design
Figure 11 shows the installation of a hood type chute in the iron ore industry It is
clear from this image that liner wear in the higher impact areas is still an area of
concern Improvements can still be made to this design in order to further
enhance its performance
14 PURPOSE OF THIS RESEARCH
The bulk materials handling industry is constantly facing the challenge of
implementing transfer chutes that satisfy all the system requirements Problems
such as high wear spillage blockages and the control of material flow are just
some of the major challenges faced by the industry
The objective of this research is to identify problems experienced with transfer
chutes of an existing bulk handling system and to apply current design solutions
in eliminating these problems In doing so the research aims to introduce a new
method of minimising liner wear caused by high impact velocities
Dynamic chutes are discussed in particular where the entire design process
addresses the problems identified on chutes in brown field projects Approaching
chute design from a maintenance point of view with the focus on reducing liner I
degradation will provide a fresh approach to transfer chute design The
concepts disc~ssed in this dissertation (dynamic and dead box chutes) are
commonly used in industry However some research is done to determine
whether a combination of these concepts can solve some of the problems
experienced by industry
The optimisation of transfer chutes in the bulk materials industry 18
MN van Aarde
CHAPTER 1
At the hand of all the information provided in this dissertation its purpose is to
enable the chute designers to better understand the process of chute
optimisation and design This is achieved through the discussion of a case study
where the chutes are evaluated and re-designed to achieve the desired
performance
15 SYNOPSIS OF THIS DISSERTATION
Chapter 1 gives an introduction to the bulk materials industry and the role that
transfer chutes plays in this industry Some of the problems that the industries
have been experiencing with transfer chutes were identified and the diverse
solutions to these problems discussed These solutions were reviewed to
identify whether improvement would be possible
Chapter 2 provides a better understanding of the functionality and the
conceptualisation of transfer chutes as well as investigating the theory behind
material flow through transfer chutes This theory reviews the research and
design objectives used as a guideline when approaching a new chute
configuration The guidelines for evaluating and designing transfer chutes are
used to verify the performance of these chutes in the iron ore industry
Chapter 3 identifies some practical problems experienced on transfer chutes a~
an existing bulk transfer facility These problems are identified through a series
of tests where the actual flow inside the chutes is monitored via CCTV cameras
The results obtained from these tests are specific to this facility but can provide
insight into the cause of some problems generally experienced in the industry
These results can provide helpful information when modifying or re-designing
new transfer chutes
Chapter 4 uses the theory discussed in Chapter 2 to conceptualise a new
transfer chute configuration for the transfer points that were tested All the facility
The optimisation of transfer chutes in the bulk materials industry 19
MN van Aarde
CHAPTER 1
constraints are taken into account during the process in order to obtain an
optimum solution to the problems identified during the chute test work The old
chutes did not have major problems with liner wear due to large dead boxes
However this remains a serious consideration for the new dynamic chute design
due to its configuration where there is continuous sliding abrasion of the chute
surface A new concept for the reduction of liner degradation is introduced in this
chapter
Before manufacturing and installing this new concept it is important to verify that
it will perform according to conceptual design Chapter 5 is a discussion on the
use of the Discrete Element Method as a verification tool A simulation of the
new transfer chute concept is done to visualise the behaviour of the material as it
passes through the new transfer chute configuration
Chapter 6 discusses the benefits of the new transfer chute configuration A
conclusion is made as to what the financial implications will be with the
implementation of this new concept Recommendations are made for future
studies in the field of bulk materials handling These recommendations focus on
the optimisation of processes and the reduction of maintenance cost to the
facility
The optimisation of transfer chutes in the bulk materials industry
MN van Aarde
20
CHAPTER 2
CHAPTER 2 BASIC CONSIDERATIONS IN CHUTE DESIGN
The optimisation of transfer chutes in the bulk materials industry
MN van Aarde
21
CHAPTER 2
21 PREFACE
In an economic driven world the pressure for production is often the cause of the
loss of production This is a bold statement and is more factual than what the
industry would like to admit This is also valid in the bulk materials handling
industry Production targets seldom allow time for investigation into the root
cause of the problems The quick fix option is often adopted but is frequently the
cause of even more maintenance stoppages
Existing chutes on brown field projects often fail due to an initial disregard for the
design criteria changes in the system parameters or lack of maintenance
These transfer points are often repaired on site by adding or removing platework
and ignoring the secondary functions of a transfer chute Therefore it is
imperative to always consider the basic chute specifications when addressing a
material transfer problem [21]
22 DESIGN OBJECTIVES
In the quest to improve or design any transfer point some ground rules must be
set This can be seen as a check list when evaluating an existing chute or
designing a new chute Transfer chutes should aim to meet the following
requirements as far as possible [21] [22] [23]
bull Ensure that the required capacity can be obtained with no risk of blockage
bull Eliminate spillage
bull Minimise wear on all components and provide the optimal value life cycle
solution
bull Minimise degradation of material and generation of excessive dust
bull Accommodate and transfer primary and secondary scraper dribblings onto
the receiving conveyor
The optimisation of transfer chutes in the bulk materials industry
MN van Aarde
22
CHAPTER 2
bull Ensure that any differences between the flow of fine and coarse grades are
catered for
bull Transfer material onto the receiving conveyor so that at the feed point onto
the conveyor
bull the component of the material now (parallel to the receiving conveydr) is as
close as possible to the belt velocity (at least within 10) to minimise the
power required to accelerate the material and to minimise abrasive wear of
the belt
bull the vertical velocity component of the material flow is as low as possible so
as to minimise wear and damage to the belt as well as to minimise spillage
due to material bouncing off the belt
bull The flow is centralised on the belt and the lateral flow is minimised so as
not to affect belt tracking and avoid spillage
With the design of a new chute there are up to 46 different design inputs with 19
of these being absolutely critical to the success of the design Some of the most
critical preliminary design considerations are shown in Table 1 [24]
The optimisation of transfer chutes in the bulk materials industry
MN van Aarde
23
CHAPTER 2
Table 1 Design Input Reference Requirements [24J
Aria Unit
Feed Conveyor
Belt Speed r ms
Belt Width mm
JibHead Pulley Dia mm
Pulley Width mm
Angle to Horizontal at the Head Pulley degrees
Belt Troughing Angle degrees
Sight Height Data
Feed Conveyor Top of Belt to Roof mm
Drop Height mm
Receiving Conveyor Top of Belt to Floor mm
Receiving Conveyor
Belt Speed ms
Belt Width mm
Belt Thickness mm
Angle of Intersection degrees
Angle to Horizontal degrees
Belt Troughing Angle degrees
Material Properties
Max Oversize Lump (on top) mm
Max Oversize Lump (on top) degrees
studies done by Jenike and Johanson Inc have identified six design principles
that can serve as a guideline in chute optimisation exercises These six
principles focus on the accelerated flow in the chute which they identified as the
most critical mode [25]
Within accelerated flow the six problem areas identified by Jenike and Johanson
Inc are [25]
The optimisation of transfer chufes in the bulk materials industry
MN van Aarde
24
CHAPTER 2
bull plugging of chutes at the impact points
bull insufficient cross sectional area
bull uncontrolled flow of material
bull excessive wear on chute surfaces
bull excessive generation of dust
bull attrition or breakdown of particles
221 Plugging of chutes
In order to prevent plugging inside the chute the sliding surface inside the chute
must be sufficiently smooth to allow the material to slide and to clean off the most
frictional bulk solid that it handles This philosophy is particularly important
where the material irnpacts on a sliding surface Where material is prone to stick
to a surface the sliding angle increases proportionally to the force with which it
impacts the sliding surface In order to minimise material velocities and excessive
wear the sliding surface angle should not be steeper than required [25]
222 Insufficient cross sectional area
The cross section of the stream of material inside the chute is a function of the
velocity of flow Therefore it is critical to be able to calculate the velocity of the
stream of material particles at any point in the chute From industry experience a
good rule of thumb is that the cross section of the chute should have at least two
thirds of its cross section open at the lowest material velocity [25] When the
materialis at its lowest velocity it takes up a larger cross section of chute than at
higher velocities Therefore this cross section is used as a reference
223 Uncontrolled flow of material
Due to free falling material with high velocities excessive wear on chutes and
conveyor belt surfaces are inevitable Therefore it is more advantageous to
The optimisation of transfer chutes in the bulk materials industry
MN van Aarde
25
CHAPTER 2
have the particles impact the hood as soon as possible with a small impact
angle after discharge from the conveyor With the material flowing against the
sloped chute walls instead of free falling the material velocity can be controlled
more carefully through the chute [25]
224 Excessive wear on chute surfaces
Free flowing abrasive materials do not normally present a large wear problem
The easiest solution to this problem is to introduce rock boxes to facilitate
material on material flow Chute surfaces that are subjected to fast flowing
sticky and abrasive materials are the most difficult to design
A solution to this problem is to keep the impact pressure on the chute surface as
low as possible This is done by designing the chute profile to follow the material
trajectory path as closely as possible By doing so the material is less prone to
stick to the chute surface and the material velocity will keep the chute surface
clean [25]
225 Excessive generation of dust
Material flowing inside a transfer chute causes turbulence in the air and
excessive dust is created In order to minimise the amount of dust the stream of
material must be kept in contact with the chute surface as far as possible The
material stream must be compact and all impact angles against the chute walls
must be minimised A compact stream of material means that the material
particles are flowing tightly together At the chute discharge point the material
velocity must be as close as possible to the velocity of the receiving belt [25]
The optimisation of transfer in the bulk materials industry
M N van Aarde
26
CHAPTER 2
226 Attrition or breakdown of particles
The break up of particles is more likely to occur when large impact forces are
experienced inside a chute than on smooth sliding surfaces Therefore in most
cases the attrition of material particles can be minimised by considering the
following guidelines when designing a transfer chute minimise the material
impact angles concentrate the stream of material keep the material stream in
contact with the chute surface and keep the material velocity constant as far as
possible [25]
23 INTEGRATING A MORE APPROPRIATE CHUTE LAYOUT WITH THE PLANT
CONSTRAINTS
According to Tunra Bulk Solids in Australia the process for design and
commissioning of a new plant basically consists of four steps The entire
process is based on understanding the properties of the material to be
handled [1]
RampD CENTRE CONSULTING CONTRACTOR ENGINEERING AND PLANT
COMPANY OPERATOR r-------------- I TESTING Of CONCEPTUAl I DETAILED DESIGN CONSTRUCTION amp
I BULKSOUDS - DESIGN COMMISSIONING- I shyI Flow Proper1ies Lining Material tuet Equipment
Selection Procurement _ I I
I I
I Flow Pat1erns SSlpment Quality Control I
I IFeeder Loads amp Process Performance
I Power I Optimisation Assessment I I
L J -
I IBin Loads I I I Wear Predictions I
FEEDBACK I I I IModel Studigt L _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ J
i ~ FEEDBACK r-shyFigure 17 Four step process for plant design and commissioning [1J
The optimisation of transfer chutes in the bulk materials industry
MN van Aarde
27
CHAPTER 2
Figure 17 illustrates this four step process These steps are a good guideline in
order to incorporate a more appropriate chute layout for the plant constraints
This is an iterative process where all the possible solutions to a problem are
measured against all the possible plant constraints This section focuses more
on the second column of Figure 17 and specifically on structures and equipment
During this stage of design the utilisation of 3D parametric modelling also creates
an intimate and very accurate communication between the designer and the
project engineer or client This effective communication tool will save time and
improve the engineering process [24]
A good example of obtaining an appropriate chute layout for the plant constraints
can be explained as follows On an existing plant a transfer point will have a
specific transfer height from the top of the feed conveyor to the top of the
receiving conveyor If the feed conveyor has an incline section to obtain the
required transfer height it will also have a curve in the vertical plane of that
incline section This curve has a certain minimum radius in order to keep the belt
on the idlers at high belt tensions [26]
Figure 18 Vertical curve on incline conveyor
The optimisation of transfer chutes in the bulk materials industry
MN van Aarde
28
CHAPTER 2
If the transfer height at a transfer point is changed the path of the feeding
conveyor should always be taken into consideration With an increase in transfer
height the vertical curve radius will increase as well in order to prevent the
conveyor from lifting off the idlers in the curve This will require expensive
modifications to conveyor structures and therefore in most cases be a pointless
exercise Figure 18 shows clearly the large radius required to obtain a vertical
curve in a belt conveyor
Other considerations on brown field projects might be lift off of the receiving
conveyor at start up before or after the vertical curve This is caused by peaks
in belt tension at start up which may cause the belt to lift off the idlers and chafe
against the chute In some cases this can be solved by fitting a roller as shown
in Figure 19 to the underside of the chute to protect it from being damaged by
the belt or to protect the belt from being damaged by the chute The position of
this specific chute is just after a vertical curve where the belt tends to lift off at
start up
Figure 19 Protective roller on a transfer chute
The optimisation of transfer chutes in the bulk materials industry
MN van Aarde
29
CHAPTER 2
24 INVESTIGATING THE CORRECT CHUTE PROFILE FOR REDUCED LINER WEAR
In order to reduce chute wear the curved-profile variable chute concept is
introduced [27] This concept was originally developed by Professor Roberts for
the grain industry in 1969 [28] After many years of research and investigation
CMR Engineers and Project managers (pty) Ltd came to the following
conclusion any improvement in coal degradation dust generation and chute
wear can only be achieved by avoiding high impact forces or reducing them as
much as possible [27]
At any impact point of material in a chute or conveyor kinetic energy is
dissipated This increases material degradation and wear on liners and conveyor
belt covers Therefore it is good practise to redirect the kinetic energy in a
useful manner This action will help to reduce liner and belt wear [32]
x
Vo
- ImpactPlate
Figure 20 Geometry of the impact plate and material trajectory [30J
The optimisation of transfer chutes n the bulk materials industry
MN van Aarde
30
CHAPTER 2
The path followed by the material discharged over the end pulley of a belt
conveyor is known as its trajectory and is a function of the discharge velocity of
the material from the conveyor [29] Figure 20 shows the material trajectory as
weI as the radius and location of the impact plate In the case of dynamic chutes
this impact plate represents the back plate of the chute
The correct chute profile to reduce wear must cater for the proper location of the
chute covers and wearing plates This location depends upon the path of the
trajectory which must be predicted as accurately as possible
Figure 21 Mode for the impact of a particle on a flat surface [29]
Figure 21 illustrates a material particle impinging on a flat chute surface at an
angle of approach 91 and with approach velocity V1 This particle will then
rebound off the chute plate at an angel 92 and velocity V2 The wear on the
chute liners or the surface shown in Figure 21 will be a function of the vector
change in momentum of the particle One component will be normal to and the
other component parallel to the flat surface The parallel component is referred
to as the scouring component along the surface [29]
It is important to determine the radius of curvature of material within the
trajectory It is now a simple exercise to determine the chute hood radius
depending on plant constraints Firstly the material trajectory must be calculated
The optimisation of transfer chutes in the bulk materials industry
MN van Aarde
31
CHAPTER 2 ---~----------------
According to the mechanical handling engineers association in Perth Australia it
is beneficial to keep the impact angle as small as possible Impact angle less
than 20deg are recommended for most liner materials This will ensure an
acceptably small impulse force component normal to the surface The r~te at
which the material is gouging away the chute liner at the impact point will be
reduced [29]
The material trajectory is determined by equation l
(1)
Where the origin of the x and y axis is taken at the mean material height h and
the discharge point on the pulley as shown in Figure 20 The variables involved
in the calculation of the material trajectory are [30]
y =vertical position on the grid where the trajectory is determined
x = position parallel to the receiving belt line where the trajectory is determined
v = material speed
g =gravitational constant
a =inclination angle of the feeding conveyor
After the material leaves the belt a simplified assumption can be made that it
falls under gravity It is quite clear that in order to minimise the impact angle
the impact plate must follow the path of the material trajectory as far as possible
It will almost never be possible to obtain a contact point between the material and
the chute where there is a smooth contact with no impact angle
This radius of curvature of the material tr~jectory is determined as follows [30
The optimisation of transfer chutes in the bulk materials industry i 32
MN van Aarde
CHAPTER 2
[1 + ( gx )]15 R = vcos8
c (2)
vcos8
Where
g == gravitational constant
v == material speed
8 == Angle at discharge
In order to simplify the manufacturing process of a curved chute the radius must
be constant For a relatively smooth contact between the material and the chute
plate the radius of the curved chute at the point of contact is as close as
possible to the material discharge curvature radius [30] This is rarely possible
on brown field projects due to facility constraints In this case there will be higher
probability for rapid liner wear Each situation must be individually assessed to
determine the best solution
Cross sectional dimensions of the transfer chute must be sufficient to collect the
material and ensure continuous flow without causing blockages At the same
time the chute profile must not result in excessive material speed Material
speed inside the chute will be considered to be excessive when it can not be
controlled to exit the chute at approximately the same velocity to that of the
receiving conveyor Chutes may block for the following reasons [29]
bull Mechanical bridging due to large lumps locking into one another
bull Insufficient cross section causing cohesive material to choke or bridge
bull Inadequate chute inclination causing fines build-up
bull Corner effects or cohesion causing material to stick to the chute walls
The optimisation of transfer chutes in the bulk materials industry
MN van Aarde
33
CHAPTER 2
For the handling of large lumps of material field experience has shown that the
chute cross sectional area should be 25 times the major dimension of the largest
lumps To avoid possible bridging of the material in the chute the
recommendation is to make the inner chute volume as large as possible This
will be guided by the support steelwork around the transfer point [29]
Field experience has shown that it is advisable depending on the material being
transferred that the chute inclination angles be no less than 65deg to 700 Cornerbull
effects should also be avoided where material gets stuck in the inner corners of
chute plate work These angles should preferably be no less than 70 0 bull
25 FEED CHUTE GEOMETRY FOR REDUCED BELT WEAR
The design parameters to reduce both chute and belt wear are interrelated
Research done at the Phalaborwa copper mine is a good case study to prove the
concept of a curved chute profile This mine had specific problems with high belt
wear at transfer points At this facility an in-pit 60 x 89 gyratory crusher and
incline tunnel conveyor was commissioned to haul primary crushed ore A
conventional dead box chute transfers ore from the crusher to a 1800 mm wide
incline conveyor [31]
The maximum lump size handled by this section of the facility is 600 mm (60 kg)
An 18 mm thick top cover was specified for this conveyor with an X grade
rubber according to DIN (abrasion value lt 100 mm) This belt had an original
warranty of 10 years After 35 years the top cover started to show signs of
excessive wear and the tensile cords of the 18 mm thick cover were visible [31]
In April 1994 Phalaborwa commissioned the curved chute concept and a new
belt on the incline conveyor Six months after commissioning no gouging or
pitting damage was evident The material velocity through this curved chute onto
the incline conveyor is shown in Figure 22 [31]
The optimisation of transfer chutes in the bulk materials industry
MN van Aarde
34
CHAPTER 2
VELOCITY ( m I aec ) _ nm _ bull m _ 1211 _ UTI _ U16
_ IIU _ Im _ I rn _ 171-111 _ u n _ ~ l
_ 4 ~
_ 41 _ 4
141 CJ UtiI 1bull-bull 1t5
~ 1m bull UI2
Material Flow Velocity Gradient
Figure 22 Ore flow path in the curved chute onto the incline conveyor [31]
TENDENCY TO FORM STAGNANT LAYER LEADING
TO INSTABILITY IN DEPTH OF FLOW
C8middotFLOW IN CURVED CHUTES
Figure 23 Gentle deceleration of the product before impact on the receiving belt [32]
The optimisation of transfer chutes in the bulk materials industry
MN van Aarde
35
CHAPTER 2
Figure 23 illustrates the gentle deceleration of material that is achieved with the
curved chute concept This helps to reduce belt wear because it is relatively
easy to discharge the material at the same velocity as the receiving conveyor
The material speed v can be calculated at any point in the chute using equation
3 and equation 4 [33]
v 2~R [(2ue2 -l)sin(O) +3ue cos(O)] + Ke 2uB (3) 4ue +1
This equation is only applicable if the curved section of the chute has a constant
radius Rand I-Ie is assumed constant at an average value for the stream [33]
I-Ie = friction coefficient
8 = angle between the horizontal and the section of the spoon where the velocity
is determined and
(4)
The optimisation of transfer chutes in the bulk materjas industry
MN van Aarde
36
CHAPTER 2
Mass Flow Rate Omh
Figure 24 Typical feed chute discharge model [33J
The velocity Ve at the discharge of the chute can be determined from equation 3
and equation 4 The components Vey and Vex of the discharge velocity as
shown in Figure 24 can now be calculated This investigation should aid the
optimisation of the chute profile in order to [33]
bull match the horisontal component Vex of the material exit velocity as close
as possible to the belt speed
bull reduce the vertical component Vey of the material exit velocity in order to
minimize abrasive wear on the receiving conveyor
26 CONCLUSION
This section discussed the technical background necessary for the optimisation
of transfer chutes on an existing iron ore plant which will be discussed in
Chapter 4 The focus is specifically aimed at reducing impact wear on chute liner
materials and abrasive wear on receiving conveyor belts Important to note from
The optimisation oftransfer chutes in the bulk materials industry
MN van Aarde
37
CHAPTER 2
this section is the acceptable limits of dynamic chute optimisation or design
These limits aremiddot
bull a material impact angle of less than 20deg
bull a variance of less than 10 between the receiving belt velocity and the
material discharge velocity component parallel to the receiving conveyor
An important aspect of chute optimisation is to consider the facility constraints
These constraints are in some cases flexible but in most cases the chute
optimisation process must be designed within these constraints This means that
any new concept will have to be measured against what is possible within the
facility limits
It is important to note that only the most common transfer chute problems were
mentioned in this chapter Other possible problems were not addressed in this
chapter as it is normally related to detail design issues Solutions to these
problems are unique to each type of chute and will be addressed for the specific
case study in Chapter 4
The optimisafjon of transfer chutes in the bulk materials industry
MN van Aarde
38
CHAPTER 3
The optimisation of transfer chutes in the bulk materials industry
MN van Aarde
CHAPTER 3 TESTS FOR THE IDENTIFICATION OF RECURRING
PROBLEMS ON EXISTING CHUTES
39
CHAPTER 3
31 PREFACE
Since the completion of a certain iron ore handling facility it has been
experiencing recurring material transfer problems at high capacities In order to
investigate the problem it was decided that performance testing of the chutes
should be carried out The purpose of these tests was to monitor chute
performance at transfer rates of up to the design capacity of 10 000 tlh for
various grades of iron ore handled by the facility Some of the methodologies
used in testing are only applicable to this specific facility
Due to variations and surges associated with the reclaim operations at the
facility performance testing focused on reclaim side chutes This means that all
the transfer points at the exit points of the stockyard conveyors were tested
Nineteen tests were conducted on various stockyard transfers Information such
as the specific facility or conveyor numbers cannot be disclosed due to the
confidentiality of information
To analyse SCADA data the stacker reclaimer scale is used to determine the
peak surges passing through the transfer under investigation The reason for
this is that the peaks in flow due to reclaiming operations flatten out when
passing through the transfer points This is due to chute throat limitations and
small variations in belt speeds If the down stream scales are used it would give
an inaccurate indication of the amount of ore that passed through the transfer
chute
32 TEST METHODOLOGY
A CCTV camera was installed in a strategic position inside the head chute of the
stockyard conveyors These cameras provided valuable information on the
physical behaviour of the material flow inside the transfer chutes Where
possible cameras were also placed on the receiving belt in front of and behind
The optimisation of transfer chutes in the bulk materials industry
MN van Aarde
40
CHAPTER 3
the chute This was done to monitor belt tracking and spillage A high frequency
radio link between the head chute and the control tower made it possible to
monitor the cameras at all times
SCADA data was used to determine and establish the condition of the material
transfer at the time of the test Data from various scales en route were obtained
as well as confirmation of blocked chute signals In analysing the SCADA data
the stacker reclaimer scale is used to determine the peak surges passing through
the transfer being tested
Data was recorded from a sampling plant at the facility This data provides the
actual characteristics of representative samples taken and analysed by the
sampling plant during the duration of the test The data gathered consist of
moisture content of the material sample as well as the size distribution of the ore
Where possible an inspector was placed at the transfer point being tested to
observe and record the performance The inspector had a two way radio for
communication with the test co-ordinator in the central control room He would
also be responsible for the monitoring of any spillage dust emissions etc that
may not be picked up by the cameras
Prior to commencing a test on a specific conveyor route the following checks
had to be performed on all the material conveying equipment
bull Clean out all transfer chutes and remove any material build-up from the
sidewalls
bull Check that feed skirts are properly in position on the belt
bull Check that the conveyor belt is tracking properly at no load
bull Check conveyor idlers are all in position and free to rotate
bull Check blocked chute detectors are operational and in the correct location
The optimisation of transfer chutes in the bulk materials industry
MN van Aarde
CHAPTER 3
bull Change the position of the blocked chute detector if required to improve its
fUnction
bull Test and confirm that the CCTV middotsystems are functioning correctly
bull Assign persons with 2 way radios and cameras to monitor and record the I
results at each transfer point on the route
33 CHUTE PERFORMANCE ACCEPTANCE CRITERIA
A material transfer chute performs to specification if it transfers a maximum of
10 000 tlh of a specific iron are grade without experiencing any of the following
problems
bull Material build up inside the chute or blocking the chute ie material is not
exiting the chute at the same rate as it is entering
bull Material spillage encountered from the top of the transfer chute
bull Material spillage encountered where material is loaded onto the receiving
conveyor
bull Belt tracking of the receiving conveyor is significantly displaced by the
loading of material from the transfer chute onto the conveyor
Tests were conducted over a period of one month and in such a short period
visible wear is difficult to quantify Due to the sensitivity of the information no
historical data in terms of chute or belt wear were made available by the facility
Therefore it is not part of the criteria for these specific tests Should a chute
however fail to perform according to the set criteria it validates the need for
modifications or new designs
34 DISCUSSION OF PROBLEM AREAS
The major concern during the test work is material flow at the transfer points
Secondary concerns are spillage tracking of the receiving belt and material
The optimisation of transfer chutes in the bulk materials industry
MN van Aarde
42
CHAPTER 3
loading onto the receiving belt One of the external factors that playa significant
role in material flow rate is the method and process of reclaiming This section
will highlight all the problem areas observed during the test work
Figure 25 shows the layout of the stockyard area This layout will serve as a
reference when the specific test results at each transfer point are discussed The
legends for Figure 25 are as follows
c=gt Transfer points where performance tests have been done
~ Direction that the conveyors are moving in
CV4 CV3 CV2 CV1
Figure 25 Layout of conveyors for chute test work
All four stockyard conveyors have a moving head arrangement This means that
the chutes are split up into two sections A moving head discharges material
onto either conveyor (CV) 5 or CV 6 via a static transfer chute The moving
head positions are shown by A Band C in Figure 25
The optimisation of transfer chutes in the bulk materials industry
MN van Aarde
43
CHAPTER 3
Position C is the purging or dump position This position is used when the
stacker reclaimer is in stacking mode and any material left on the stockyard
conveyor gets dumped The material does not end up on the stockpiles
preventing contamination
90 de-g TRANSFBt
OfAO BOX IN MOVING HEAD
Figure 26 Configuration of the existing transfer chute
Figure 26 shows the configuration of the existing transfer chutes These chutes
capture the trajectory from the head pulley in a dead box situated in the top part
of the chute The material then cascades down a series of smaller dead boxes
onto the receiving conveyor below
Various grades of iron ore were tested during the testing period These different
grades of iron ore are shown in Table 2 Three fine grades and four coarse
grades were used The coarse material is defined as particles with a diameter of
The optimisation of transfer chutes in the bulk materials industry
MN van Aarde
44
CHAPTER 3
between 12 mm and 34 mm and the fine material with diameters of between
4 mm and 12 mm
Table 2 Iron are grades used for chute test work
Material Predominant Lump Size
Fine K 5mm
Fine N 8mm
Fine A 8mm
Coarse K 25mm
Coarse D 34mm
Coarse S 12 mm
Coarse A 20mm
The CCTV cameras were placed inside the moving head pointing down into the
static chute overlooking the receiving conveyor Figure 27 shows the camera
angle used during testing This is a view of a clear chute before testing The
legends for clarification of all the video images are as follows
Front of the chute throat opening
Top of flowing material at the chute throat opening
Flow pattern of the material
Direction of the receiving belt
The optimisation of transfer chutes in the bulk materials industry
MN van Aarde
45
CHAPTER 3
Figure 27 Clear chute indicating camera angle
341 Coarse Material vs Fine Material
Differences in transfer rates between coarse material and fine material are
evident from the data gathered during the test programme These results are
discussed later in this chapter The area between the yellow arrows and the red
line is the amount of freeboard available Freeboard is the open space available
between the top of the flowing stream of material and the chute plate work
Figure 28 and Figure 29 shows the flow of coarse ore and fine ore respectively in
the same chute at 8 000 tlh
Figure 28 Coarse material at 8 000 tlh
The optimisation of transfer chutes in the bulk materials industry
MN van Aarde
46
CHAPTER 3
Figure 29 Fine material at 8 000 tlh
The amount of freeboard with fine material is much larger than with coarse
material It is therefore obvious that coarse material is more likely to block a
chute when peak surges occur This is due to particles that interlock in the small
discharge opening of the chute
Figure 30 Blocked chute with coarse material at 8 600 tIh
Figure 30 is a snap shot of a chute blocked with coarse ore due to the material
interlocking at the discharge opening The time from material free flowing to a
blocked chute signal was approximately 10 seconds This is determined by
comparing the CCTV camera time to the blocked signal time on the SCADA
The optimisation of transfer chutes in the bulk materials industry
MN van Aarde
47
CHAPTER 3
The high clay content in finer material can also cause problems in the long run
When wet Anes are fed through the chutes a thin layer of Anes builds up and
sticks to the sides of the chute As this layer dries out it forms a new chute liner i
and the next layer builds up This process occurs gradually and will eventually
cause the chute to block
342 Cross Sectional Area
Video images of a blocked chute on the receiving belts were analysed to
determine whether the blockage was caused by material build up on the belt
underneath the chute This indicated that with the occurrence of a blocked chute
the material keeps flowing out of the chute at a constant rate without build up
From this the assumption can be made that in the case of a blocked chute the
material enters the chute at a higher rate than it is discharged at the bottom
Therefore the conclusion can be made that the chute cross sectional area at the
discharge is insufficient to handle the volume of ore at high throughput rates
Tests with a certain type of coarse material yielded a very low flow rate requiring
adjustment to the chute choke plate on the transfer between CV 3 and CV 5
The chute choke plate is basically a sliding door at the bottom of the chute to
adjust the discharge flow of material Tests with another type of coarse material
shown in the summary of test results indicates how the choke plate adjustment
can increase the throughput of material in the chute
Data of all the different types of ore at the facility are obtained at the sampling
building This data shows that the material size distribution for the two types of
coarse material used in the tests mentioned above are the same This indicates
that the test results with the second coarse material are an accurate reflection of
what will be experienced with the first type of coarse material Special care
The optimisation of transfer chutes in the bulk materials industry
MN van Aarde
48
CHAPTER 3
should be taken when adjusting the choke plate to make sure that skew loading
is not induced by the modification
343 Spillag3
During one of the first tests on the transfer between CV 2 and CV 6 spillage
was observed at one of the side skirts on the receiving belt A piece of the side
skirt had been damaged and pushed off the belt as shown by Figure 31 This
caused some of the material to be pushed off the belt when skew loading from
the chute caused the belt to miss track In this case spillage was not caused by
the skirt but by skew loading from the chute onto the receiving conveyor
Figure 31 Damaged side skirt
A greater concern is spillage on the moving head chute of CV 3 and CV 4
loading onto CV 6 It appears as if the head chute creeps during material
transfer onto CV 6 As the chute creeps the horizontal gap between the
moving head chute and the transfer chute reaches approximately 180 mm
Facility operations proposed a temporary solution by moving the head chute to
the dumping or purging position and back to CV 5 before stopping over CV 6
The reason for this creep could be attributed to slack in the moving head winch
cable
The optimisation of transfer chutes in the bulk materials industry
MN van Aarde
49
CHAPTER 3
345 Belt Tracking and Material Loading
The only belt tracking and material loading problems observed occurred on the
transfer between CV 2 and CV 5 I CV 6 A diverter plate was installed at the
bottom of the chute in order to force material flow onto the centre of the receiving conveyor belt This plate now causes material to fall to the left of the receiving
belt causing the belt to track to the right
Figure 32 View behind the chute of the receiving conveyor before loading
Figure 32 shows the view from a CCTV camera placed over the receiving
conveyor behind the chute Note the amount of the idler roller that is visible
before loading
Figure 33 View behind the chute of the receiving conveyor during loading
The optimisation of transfer chutes in the bulk materials industry
MN van Aarde
50
CHAPTER 3
Figure 33 shows the view from a CCTV camera placed over the receiving
conveyor behind the chute during loading Note the difference between the
amount of the idler roller that is visible between Figure 33 and Figure 32 This is
a clear indication of off centre belt tracking due to skew loading I
At the same transfer point it appears as if the configuration of the chute causes
the material to be dropped directly onto the receiving belt from the dead box in
the moving head This will cause high impact wear on the belt in the long run
High maintenance frequencies will be required on the impact rollers underneath
the chute and the roller bearings will have to be replaced frequently
346 Reclaiming Operations
Reclaim operations are done from the stacker reclaimer that scoops up the
material with a bucket wheel from the stockpile The machine starts at the top
bench of the stockpile and reclaims sideways until it is through the stockpile
This sideways movement is repeated while the machine moves down the
stockpile If the machine digs too deep into the stockpile small avalanches can
occur that over fill the buckets This causes peak surges in the flow on the
conveyor system
With an increase in the peak digging or reclaim rate as requested for test work it
seemed that the peak surges increased as well In normal reclaiming operations
(average reclaim rate of 6 000 tlh to 7000 tlh) the peaks in reclaim surges do not
usually exceed 1 000 tlh This is however dependent on the level of the
stockpile from where the machine is reclaiming
At a peak digging or reclaim rate of 8 000 tlh peak surges of up to 2 000 tlh were
observed as can be seen from Figure 34 All stacker reclaimers are operated
manually and the depth of the bucket wheel is determined by monitoring the
The optimisation of transfer chutes in the bulk materials industry
MN van Aarde
51
CHAPTER 3
reclaimer boom scale reading (yellow line) This makes it difficult to reclaim at a
constant rate
The reason for the high peak surges is due to avalanches on the stockpile
caused by reclaiming on the lower benches without first taking away the top
material The blue line in Figure 34 represents a conveyor scale reading after
the material has passed through a series of transfer chutes It is clear that the
peaks tend to dissipate over time as the peaks on the blue line are lower and
smoother than that on the yellow line
IlmJ
bull I _ bull It bull bull bull bull
--ErI--E--~---h--E=+[J]--EiE ~ J~~~ middot middot -~L I-~f~1-1shyt~=tt~~J~~v5 i ~ ~ ~ ~ ~ i ~ 1 ~ ~ ~ s ~ ------ ~-- - ------ - _ - -------- -- -- - _---- -- -r - --- -_shyp
C)
~ 1r =r=l[=1 -It-1 -- -~ -t= --shy~ _middotmiddot -r middotr middot middot [middot _r _ _ r- middotmiddot rmiddot middotmiddot -r- rmiddot-- middot- middotmiddot -rmiddot -r-middotmiddot middotr lXgtO middotmiddotmiddotmiddotmiddotmiddotmiddotmiddot[middotmiddotmiddotmiddotmiddotmiddotmiddotlmiddotmiddotmiddotmiddotmiddotmiddotlmiddotmiddotmiddotmiddotmiddotmiddotmiddotmiddotimiddotmiddotmiddotmiddotmiddotmiddotmiddotmiddotr-middotmiddotmiddotmiddot j middotmiddot1middotmiddotmiddotmiddotmiddot1middotmiddotmiddotmiddotmiddotmiddotmiddot1middotmiddotmiddotmiddotmiddot middotlmiddotmiddotmiddotmiddottmiddotmiddotmiddotmiddotmiddotmiddotmiddotjmiddot I~ [ bullbullbullbullbullbullbull [ bullbullbull middotmiddotmiddot1middotmiddotmiddotmiddotmiddotmiddot1middotmiddotmiddotmiddotmiddotmiddotmiddotmiddot1middotmiddotmiddotmiddotmiddotmiddotmiddotmiddot middotmiddotmiddotmiddotmiddotmiddotmiddotmiddoti~middotmiddotmiddotmiddotmiddotmiddotmiddotmiddottmiddotmiddotmiddotmiddotmiddotmiddotmiddotrmiddotmiddotmiddot middotrmiddotmiddotmiddotmiddotmiddotmiddot~middotmiddotmiddotmiddotmiddotmiddotmiddotmiddot1middotmiddotmiddotmiddotmiddotmiddotmiddotmiddotimiddotmiddotmiddot
t) cent
~ i i l i i i i i i i it ~ 8 ~ ~ S l i
~~ Ii ~ ~ g i i ~ 4 1 J yen i
s a e 11 JI as $ $ ~ IS IS e It
Time
-Con~SCO=-E___S~ SCALE
Figure 34 Peak surges experienced during reclaiming operations
347 Other Problem Areas
Some blockages on other chutes at the facility occurred while testing the
stockyard chutes These blockages are also shown in Table 3 where the test
The optimisation of transfer chutes in the bulk materials industry
MN van Aarde
52
CHAPTER 3
results are discussed and to raise awareness that the bottlenecks on site are not
only caused by problems on the tested chutes
A chute downstream from the stockyards encountered a blockage with fine I
material when the flow rate reached 11 OOb tfh Although this is higher than the
test maximum of 10 000 tfh it still raises concern as to why the chute blocked so
severely that it took approximately two hours to clear
Another bottleneck is the transfer point between the feed conveyor of CV 2 and
the discharge chute on CV 2 This transfer point blocked with fine material at a
peak just below 10 000 tfh It should be even worse with coarse are as
previously discussed Due to the configuration of the head chute spillage of
scraper dribblings is also of great concern The main stream of material
interferes with the flow path of the dribbling material Therefore the carry back
scraped off the bottom of the feeding belt cannot i~ow down the chute and is
pushed over the sides of the chute
The optimisation of transfer chutes in the bulk maferias industry
MN van Aarde
53
CHAPTER 3
35 SUMMARY OF TEST RESULTS
Table 3 Results from test programme
Transfer Point Material Tested Test No Peak Capacity Blocked Chute
CV11 CV5 Yes
Fines N 14 10000 tlh No
Fines N 15 10000tlh No
CV 11 CV6 Coarse K 20 9300 tlh No
Fines K 4 10600tlh No
Fines A 19 9633 tlh No
CV31 CV5 Yes
Yes
Yes
Coarse A 17 9427 tlh No
CV31 CV6 Coarse K 7 10195t1h Yes
Coarse K 8 11 000 tlh Yes
CV41 CV5 Coarse A 16 10307 tlh No
No (Mech trip on
CV4CV6 Fines K 10 10815 tlh downstream conveyor)
Coarse K 11 8000 tlh No
Fines A 18 10328 tlh No
No (Feed to CV 2
CV21 CV5 Fines N 13 10 000 tlh blocked)
CV21 Coarse K 1 amp 2 10 153 tlh No
No (Blocked chute on
Fines K 3 11 000 tlh downstream transfer)
The optimisation of transfer chutes in the bulk materials industry
MN van Aarde
54
CHAPTER 3
Table 3 shows the results obtained from all the tests on the stockyard conveyor
discharge chutes Where possible the same material grade was tested more
than once on the same transfer in order to confirm the repetitiveness of the test
The tests shown in red indicate the transfers that blocked at a flow rate of less
than 10000 tlh
Coarse K and Coarse 0 are noted as the critical materials for blocked chutes
caused by a peak surge Tests with Coarse K and Coarse S where a blocked
chute occurred at just over 10 000 tlh can also be considered as failed tests
This is due to the lack of a safety margin freeboard inside the chute When
analysing the video images a build up can be seen at a flow rate of less than
10000 tlh
Table 3 indicates that the fine material did not cause blocked chutes but it was
seen that it did fill up the chute throat area in some cases Although the coarse
material grades are shown as being least suitable for high flow rates the fine
material should not be underestimated for its ability to cause blockages The
finer materials normally have higher clay contents than the coarse grades and
therefore stick to the chute walls more easily_
36 CONCLUSION
At lower capacities (7 000 tlh to 8 000 tlh) the material appear to flow smoothly
inside the chutes without surging or building up in the chute This flow rate
normally does not cause spillage or skew loading on the receiving conveyor belt
On average as the flow rate approaches 9 000 tlh the material in the chute
throat area starts packing together and finally blocks up the chute
At transfer rates greater than 9 000 tlh the available area inside the chutes is
completely filled up This causes material to build up or surge inside the chute
which eventually results in the chute choking and the inlet flow becomes greater
The optimisation of transfer chutes in the bulk materials industry
MN van Aarde
55
CHAPTER 3
than the outlet flow Depending on the volume of the chute the choked state can
only be maintained for a certain period of time If the inlet flow does not
decrease it will cause a blocked chute
Peak surges of up to 10 000 tfh were recorded in most tests which involved a
material surge inside the chute but without the occurrence of a blocked chute trip
Although no blocked chute signal was given in these cases the ability of the
chutes to transfer continuously at flow rates of between 9 000 tfh and 10 000 tfh
is not very reliable
Continuous transfer at flow rates approaching 9 000 tfh seems attainable in most
cases but due to the limited freeboard available in the chute throat area the
chutes will easily become prone to blocking Due to the high peak surges at an
increased maximum reclaim rate the amount of freeboard is critical If the
design criteria of the chute were intended to accommodate these large surges
then all the chutes failed this test This can be attributed to the fact that no
freeboard is left at a maximum reclaim rate of 9 000 tfh
With the background available from the test programme it is clear that further
investigation is required to obtain a solution to these problems All the
information gathered can be integrated and utilised to provide a solution A
possible solution can then be tested against the problems found with the current
transfer chutes
The optimisation of transfer chutes in the bulk materials industry
MN van Aarde
56
CHAPTER 4
CHAPTER 4 DYNAMIC CHUTES FOR THE ELIMINATION OF
RECURRING PROBLEMS
The optimisation of transfer chutes in the bulk materials industry
MN van Aarde
57
CHAPTER 4
41 PREFACE
After completion of the chute test programme the decision was made to improve
the old transfer configuration by installing a dynamic chute The reason for the
dynamic chute is to increase the material speed and decrease the stream cross
sectional area The dead boxes in the older chute slowed the material down and
the restriction on transfer height resulted in the material not being able to gain
enough speed after impacting on the dead boxes
A dynamic chute configuration is investigated in this chapter As the new chute
is fitted within the existing steelwork there are certain constraints that determine
the new configuration All the constraints and limitations discussed in this section
are specific to the facility under discussion
The new chute design basically consists of a hood and spoon which retains the
kinetic energy in the material stream as it is transferred from one conveyor to the
other This will reduce the creation of dust in the chute and help to discharge the
material at a velocity closer to that of the receiving conveyor The new design
does however experience high wear which was not a problem with the old chutes
due to large dead boxes
In order to fit the optimum design of a dynamic chute within the existing structure
some changes are required to the positioning of the feed conveyor head pulley
These changes are necessary to accommodate the discharge trajectory from the
feeding conveyor
The radii of the hood and spoon are specified in such a way that the impact wear
is reduced significantly In addition both the hood and spoon are fitted with a
removable dead box section in the impact zones The incorporation of these
sections makes this chute revolutionary in the sense of ease of maintenance
The optimisation of transfer chutes in the bulk materials industry
MN van Aarde
58
CHAPTER 4
This new chute addresses all problems identified at the facility and aims to
eliminate most of them
Tests were carried out to identify worst case materials for flow and wear
Different liner materials were tested for both flow and wear conditions The
outcome of these tests is used as the basis for the design of a new chute As
different conditions for flow and wear inside the chute exist different liners are
investigated for each section inside the chute
42 CONSIDERATION OF THE EXISTING TRANSFER POINT CONSTRAINTS
The stockyard consists of four stacker reclaimers and several transfer points
feeding onto the two downstream conveyors resulting in a very intricate system
This system has numerous requirements which need to be addressed when
considering a new transfer chute configuration The transfers under discussion
are situated at the head end of the stockyard conveyors
MOV1NG HEAD OER MOvm poundAD OVER CVI6 CVIS
t4CLIE SECTION
PURGING POSmON
Figure 35 Stockyard head end layout
The design of a new transfer chute configuration is restricted to a certain extent
by the existing structures on site Figure 35 provides an overall view of the
existing steelwork at the head end of the stockyard conveyor This existing steel
structure can be modified to suit a new configuration but does have some fixed
The optimisation of transfer chutes in the bulk materials industry
MN van Aarde
59
CHAPTER 4
constraints A good example of these constraints is the transfer height between
the stockyard conveyor and the downstream conveyors CV 5 and 6
On both sides of the stockyard conveyor stockpiles of ore can be reclaimed and
deposited onto the conveyor This facility allows a certain travel for the stacker
reclaimer along the stockyard conveyor for the stacking and reclaiming of
material The most forward position of the stacker reclaimer is at the beginning
of the incline section of the stockyard conveyor As previously explained any
curvature in a conveyor requires a certain minimum radius When the transfer
height is raised the radius constraints on that curvature in the stockyard
conveyor will reduce stockyard space This means that the storage capacity at
the facility will be greatly diminished
I ~
j
Figure 36 Dimensional constraints on the existing transfer configuration
The ideal is to stay within the eXisting critical dimensions as shown in Figure 36
As functionality of the chute dictates the chute configuration these dimensions
can be modified within certain constraints These critical dimensions on the
existing configuration are
The optimisation of transfer chutes in the bulk materials industry
MN van Aarde
60
CHAPTER 4
bull Centre of receiving belt to centre of the head pulley 800 mm
bull Bottom of receiving belt to top of the head pulley 4048 mm
The head pulley can however be moved back a certain amount before it
becomes necessary to change the entire incline section of the stockyard
conveyor As the moving head moves forward and backward there are idler cars
trailing behind the moving head carriage as shown in Figure 35 The purpose of
these idler cars is to support the belt when the moving head is feeding onto
CV 6 or when it is standing in the purging position
43 DESIGN OF THE CHUTE PROFILE
431 Design Methodology
Proven standard methods for the functional design of the chute are used These
hand calculation methods are based on the Conveyor Equipment Manufacturers
Association (CEMA) standard as well as papers from Prof AW Roberts These
are typically calculations for determining the discharge trajectory optimal radius
of the hood and spoon as well as the velocity of material passing through the
chute
In addition to standard methods of carrying out conceptual flow design it is
supplemented by the use of Discrete Element Modelling (OEM) simulation
software This is done to visualise the flow of material through the chute
Results from standard calculation methods are compared to the outputs of the
OEM simulations to confirm both results Chapter 5 will focus on the use of
Discrete Element Modelling for the design and verification of chute concepts
The optimisation of transfer chutes in the bulk materials industry
MN van Aarde
61
CHAPTER 4 -__-----__---_----------shy
432 Design Development
Figure 37 shows the concept of the hood and spoon chute for a 90deg transfer as
required by the facility layout The decision to opt for a hood and spoon chute is
based on trying to retain the material velocity when transferring material from the
feeding conveyor to the receiving conveyors Retention of material velocity is
critical as the transfer height is restricted The overall facility constraints for
design are as follows
bull Feeding belt speed - 45 ms
bull Receiving belt speed - 45 ms
bull Transfer height - 401 m
bull Belt widths -1650 mm
bull Maximum material throughput -10000 tlh
As this is a retrofit of an existing facility some of the facility constraints cannot be
changed This forms part of the design development as it steers the design in a
certain direction Due to the fact that the transfer height cannot be changed the
chute profile will be dependent on the transfer height restriction
The optimisation of transfer chutes in the bulk matefials industry
MN van Aarde
62
CHAPTER 4
START-UP CHrrlE
DRlBBIlNG CHUTE
Figure 37 Hood and spoon configuration for the 90 transfer
The optimum solution for the correct chute profile in this situation would be to
move the head pulley back far enough This should be done so that the hood
can receive the material trajectory at a small impact angle and still discharge
centrally onto the spoon However the head pulley can only be moved back a
certain amount Any further movement will require changes to the structure of
the feeding conveyor incline section
As the stockyard conveyors feed onto two receiving conveyors the head pulley
of the stockyard conveyors is situated on a moving head rail car This enables
the conveyor to discharge either on CV 5 or CV 6 as shown in Figure 25
Taking the movement of the head pulley into account the moving head rail car
can be shortened by 1000 mm in order to move the head pulley back As stated
in the preface all changes are distinctive to this facility alone However it is
important to be aware of the consequences of every modification
The optimisation of transfer chutes in the bulk materials industry
MN van Aarde
63
CHAPTER 4 -__----- ------shy
433 Determination of the Profile
An important of the hood and spoon design is to ensure a
discharge from the hood onto the centre of the spoon The is
determined using equation (1) in section 24 Although various material
are transferred it does not have a significant effect on the calculated trajectory
the bulk properties of the materials are very similar It is however important
to the material which will transferred obtain the flow angles and wear
This information the will be
the Liner selection for this case study is discussed in Appendix A
After the trajectory has been determined the hood radius can determined by
using equation (2) As head pulley can move 1 000 mm backward the
possible hood radius was determined to 2 577 mm This hood radius is
VIU(I(1 to produce the wear on the zone in chute
The impact angle at this radius is 11 which is less than the maximum
allowable limit of 20
The hood radius is chosen to as close as possible to radius of curvature of
the material trajectory The point where the hood radius and the trajectory radius
cross is known as the impact point In to determine the velocity
point in hood the at is required on the
hood from the horizontal where the material impacts and to slide down the
hood surface
In this case the position impact hood is at 558r from the horizontal
In to determine the velocity this angle e is used as starting
point in (3) obtain a complete velocity profile angle from where
the material impacts hood is decreased in increments 5 up to the
discharge point which is normally 0
The optimisation chutes in the bulk materials industry
MN van Aarde
64
-----
CHAPTER 4
Hood Velocity Profile
70
--- --~ 6 0
5 0
40 ~_
~ 30 g --- a 20 gt
10
00
60 50 40 30 20 10 o Theta (Position inside the hood)
Figure 38 Hood velocity profile
The spoon radius is determined in such a way that the wear at the point of impact
is kept to a minimum At the same time the horizontal component of the material
exit velocity is as close as possible to the receiving belt speed Firstly the
assumption is made that the initial velocity of material in the spoon is equal to the
exit velocity of material from the hood This yields a spoon entry velocity of
633 ms and can also be seen from Figure 38
By reiterating various radii for the spoon the optimum exit velocity Ve can be
obtained These radii are selected according to the available space in which the
spoon must fit and also to produce the smallest impact angle for material
discharging from the hood This table is set up to display the different exit
velocities at various spoon radii The exit velocity is also dependent on the exit
angle which is determined by the length of the spoon arc In this case the spoon
radius is chosen as 3 575 mm An exit angle of 38deg from the horizontal yields an
exit velocity closer to the receiving belt speed
The optimisation of transfer chutes in the bulk materials industry
MN van Aarde
65
CHAPTER 4
Spoon Velocity Profile
67
66
65
S 64 amp0 g 6 3
V
v-shy ~ ~
ii ~ gt 62
61 I I 60
o 10 20 30 40 50 60
Theta (position inside the spoon)
Figure 39 Spoon velocity profile
Taken from the origin of the spoon radius the material position in the spoon at
discharge is sr The selection of this angle is guided by the geometry of the
chute and surrounding structures This angle is then used to calculate the exit
velocity as shown in Figure 39 At this point the discharge angle relative to the
conveyor angle is 38deg Ve is then determined to be 6087 ms with a velocity
component of 479 ms in the direction of the belt This value is 618 higher
than the belt speed of 4S ms which is acceptable as it is within the allowable
10 range of variation Minimal spillage and reduced wear on the receiving
conveyor is expected
Both the hood and spoon have a converged profile This is done in order to
minimise spillage and ensure a smooth transfer of material from the hood to the
spoon and from the spoon to the receiving conveyor The converged profile
starts out wide to capture any stray particles and converges to bring the material
particles closer together at the discharge This profile does not influence the
transfer rate of the chute as the stream of material through the chute is no more
The optimisation of transfer chutes in the bulk materials industry
MN van Aarde
66
CHAPTER 4
compact than the material on the conveyor belt before and after the transfer
chute
44 INCORPORATING ADEAD BOX IN THE IMPACT AREAS
In chapter 1 reference is made to a chute design utilising pipe sections with a
rounded profile The flat back plate is chosen instead of a rounded pipe type
section to house the honeycomb dead box configuration It would be possible to
fit the honeycomb into a rounded back section but manufacturing and
maintenance would be unnecessarily difficult and expensive
Furthermore the cross section profile of the chute shows three sliding surfaces
as shown in These surfaces consist of the back plate two vertical side plates
and two diagonal plates This is done in order to increase the angle between
adjoining plates so that the probability of material hanging up in the corners is
reduced This helps to alleviate the risk of experiencing blocked chutes
Figure 40 Chute cross section
The optimisation of transfer chutes in the bulk materials industry
M N van Aarde
67
CHAPTER 4
441 Honeycomb Wear Box in the Hood
A honeycomb or wear box is incorporated into this chute configuration in order to
further minimise wear in the hood and spoon The honeycomb configuration is
clearly shown in and is typical for both the hood and spoon Reduced wear will I
be achieved as impact and sliding will take place on the basis of material on
material flow Ore is captured inside the honeycomb pockets which protects the
ceramic lining in the section of the honeycomb and creates another sliding face
made of the material being transferred The ribs in the wear box do not protrude
from the sliding face of the chute and therefore do not interfere with the main
stream flow of material
Positioning of the honeycomb is critical as the point of impact on the hood needs
to be on the honeycomb This is required in order to assure that the highest
material impact is absorbed by a layer of static material inside the honeycomb
and not the chute liners All the basic steps for designing a normal hood and
spoon chute are followed Firstly the angle at impact (8e) is calculated to
determine where the trajectory of material will cross the radius of the hood This
shows the position of the impact point on the hood Figure 20 indicates where 8e
is calculated As previously stated the angle at impact for this situation is
558r This is calculated using [33]
e = tan- I ( 1 ) (5)
C Ii
And y is defined by equation 1
This gives an indication as to where the honeycomb should be situated in order
to capture the material impacting the hood fully A flow simulation package can
also be used to determine the position of this honeycomb structure shows an
opening for the honeycomb which starts at 40deg clockwise from the vertical This
The optimisation of transfer chutes in the bulk materials industry 68
MN van Aarde
CHAPTER 4
means that there are almost 16deg of free space in the honeycomb to ensure that
the material will always impact inside the wear box
There is no set specification as to the size of this free space This is just to
accommodate any surges of mat~rial on the feeding conveyor As discussed in
Chapter 3 due to avalanches while reclaiming from the stockpiles material
surges on the conveyors is a reality
Figure 41 Honeycomb wear box positioning
illustrates exactly where this wear box is situated on the back plate of the hood
This configuration is very similar to that of the spoon as both wear boxes only
cover the width of the flat back plate of the hood and spoon The reason for this
is that most of the material impact and mainstream flow strikes the back plate
The optimisation of transfer chutes in the bulk materials industry
MN van Aarde
69
CHAPTER 4
WEAR BOX
Figure 42 Wear box in the hood section
All the horizontal ribs of the honeycomb are spaced 5deg apart and there are 5
vertical ribs following the converging contour of the hood as shown in Spacing
of the ribs depends largely on the maximum lump size handled by the transfer
In this case the largest lumps are approximately 34 mm in diameter The idea is
to get as many dead boxes into the honeycomb as possible These small
cavities should however be large enough to capture a substantial amount of ore
inside
The optimisation of transfer chutes in the bulk materials industry
MN van Aarde
70
CHAPTER 4 ----_----------------shy
Figure 43 Spacing arrangement of honeycomb ribs inside the hood
The two vertical liners on the edges of the honeycomb are only 65 mm high while
the rest of the vertical liners are 120 mm high This is done so that the flat liners
in the chute surface can overlap the edge liners of the honeycomb An open
groove between the tiles along the flow of material would cause the liners to be
worn through much faster than in normal sliding abrasion conditions Due to the
high wear characteristics of the ore all openings between tiles should be kept out
of the mainstream flow
All the ribs in the honeycomb are 50 mm thick and vary in depth The vertical
ribs protrude the horizontal ribs by 30 mm in order to channel the flow These
vertical ribs are all flush with the surrounding tiles on the flat sliding surface of the
hood All the pockets of the wear box are 120 mm deep measured from the top
of the vertical ribs Again dimension is dependent on the maximum lump size
handled by the transfer There are no specifications as to the relation between
the pocket size and the lump size These dimensions were chosen to be
approximately 4 times the lump size Computer simulations can be used to test
the feasibility of this concept while commissioning of the equipment will ultimately
show whether this method works
The optimisation of transfer chutes in the bulk materials industry
MN van Aarde
71
CHAPTER 4 ------------_ -- - ---------------shy
442 Honeycomb wear box in the spoon
The honeycomb wear box in the spoon has the same configuration as in the
hood It also covers the entire width of the back plate and fully accommodates
the material impacting on the spoon from the hood The entire spoon is broken
up into three sections and the honeycomb wear box is situated in the back
section as shown in
Figure 44 Wear box in the spoon section
With almost the same configuration as the hood the spoon also has a corner
liner to ensure a continuous lined face between the flat surface liners and the
honeycomb ribs The detail of these liners and ribs are shown in A 90deg transfer
with a hood and spoon chute means that the stream received by the spoon is
narrower and longer than the stream received by the hood This is caused when
the material takes the shape of the hood before it is discharged into the spoon
The converged configuration causes the stream to flatten against the sliding
surface in the chute
The optimisation of transfer chutes in the bulk materials industry
MN van Aarde
72
CHAPTER 4
Due to the spoon honeycomb being a bit narrower than the hood there are only
three vertical ribs The number of ribs had to be reduced to be able to
accommodate the preferred cavity size of the honeycomb boxes These ribs now
form two channels in which the stream of material can be directed
Figure 45 Liner detail of the spoon honeycomb wear box
As shown in there is a 3 mm gap between the honeycomb section and the chute
plate work This is to ensure that the honeycomb section can be easily removed
for maintenance on the liners All the edges of the liners have rounded corners
to reduce stress concentrations which can cause rapid liner failure
45 DESIGNING THE CHUTE FOR INTEGRATION WITH SYSTEM REQUIREMENTS
The arc length of the spoon back plate is longer and closer to the belt in order to
ensure a smooth transfer of material from the chute to the receiving conveyor A
small gap of 75 mm is left between the bottom of the spoon and the receiving
conveyor Due to the fact that material can also be fed from another upstream
The optimisation of transfer chutes in the bulk materials industry
MN van Aarde
73
CHAPTER 4
stockyard conveyor this configuration will not be suitable This means that the
gap of 75 mm is not enough to allow material to pass underneath the chute
To accommodate this situation the spoon is split into different sections where the
bottom section lifts up to make room for material from behind In the raised
position the gap between the chute and the belt is 450 mm When the lower belt
is loaded to full capacity the material height is 380 mm This means that the
clearance to the belt in the non operational position is sufficient and show the
operational and non operational positions of the spoon
T -t t----~r_-+-wtIY1shy
Figure 46 Spoon in the operational position
The optimisation of transfer chutes in the bulk materials industry
MN van Aarde
74
CHAPTER 4
Figure 47 Spoon in the non operational position
This section is a discussion on how this new transfer chute configuration should
be operated in order to comply with the facility requirements The bottom section
of the chute can be lifted out of the way of material from behind on the receiving
conveyor Therefore a control philosophy is required for this movement
Referring to Figure 25 positions A and B indicate where these new chutes will be
installed As previously stated position C is the purging or dump position and
show the actuated spoon section in the operating and non operating positions
The conditions for these positions are explained as follows
46 CONCLUSION
With the consideration of all the facility constraints and a conceptual idea of what
the transfer configuration should look like the design can be optimised When
the feeding belt velocity is known the material trajectory and optimum chute
radius can be determined This radius and the radius of the spoon must then be
corrected to comply with the facility constraints but still deliver the required
material transfer rate
The optimisation of transfer chutes in the bulk materials industry
MN van Aarde
75
CHAPTER 4
With the high cost implications of regular maintenance intervals on chute liners
and facility downtime a honeycomb structure is incorporated into the high impact
areas The purpose of this honeycomb structure is to form small pockets similar
to dead boxes in order to promote material on material flow This increases the
lifetime of the chute liners and reduces maintenance intervals
This specific transfer chute splits up easily into separate sections and will help to
simplify maintenance The bottom section of the chute is actuated to move up
and down depending on whether the chute is in operation or not This will ensure
optimum transfer of material while in operation and provide sufficient clearance
when not in operation This is again guided by the facility requirements
In the design of all the transfer chute components the physical properties of the
ore should always be considered This determines the chute profile in terms of
flow angles and liner selection With maximum material flow ability high
resistance to sliding abrasion and reduced maintenance cost in mind 94
alumina ceramics is the liner of choice This is only in the main flow areas of the
chute For the dribbling chute a polyurethane liner is used to promote the flow of
this sticky material
The optimisation of transfer chutes in the bulk materials industry
MN van Aarde
76
CHAPTER 5
CHAPTER 5 TESTING AND VERIFICATION OF THE NEW SOLUTION
- middotSmiddotmiddotmiddotmiddotmiddotmiddotmiddotmiddotmiddot-middotl~Oi
The optimisation of transfer chutes in the bulk materials industry 77
MN van Aarde
CHAPTER 5
51 PREFACE
Although hand calculations have been a proven method of design for many
years it is important to verify any new chute concept before fabrication and
implementation Confirming the concept can save time and money as it reduces
the risk of on-site modifications Hand calculations only supply a two
dimensional solution to the problem which does not always provide accurate
material flow profiles
In recent years a few material flow simulation packages have been developed to
aid the design of material handling equipment The use of software packages
can be beneficial to the design process as it gives a three dimensional view of
the material behaviour in the chute This means that changes to the chute
concept can be made prior to fabrication
It is however important to verify that the solution obtained from the software
package is an accurate reflection of actual design model Therefore the material
being handled should be thoroughly tested to obtain the correct physical
properties required to obtain an accurate simulation result
The use of material flow simulation software does not replace the necessity for
hand calculations All the basic steps should still be done to derive a conceptual
chute configuration Material flow simulation software should be used as a
complimentary tool to analytical hand calculations in the design process
The optimisation of transfer chutes in thebulk materials industry
MN van Aarde
78
CHAPTER 5
52 SELECTING A TEST METHODOLOGY
Traditionally transfer chutes were designed by using basic analytical calculations
and relying on empirical data from past experiences with other chutes Mostly
these analytical methods only cater for the initial part of the chute such as the
parabolic discharge trajectory It is difficult to determine what happens to the
flow of material after it strikes the chute wall [34]
Two methods of verification were usually applied to evaluate a new transfer
chute configuration Trial and error can be used but obviously this is not desired
due to the high cost implications A second method is to build a small scale
model of the chute in which tests can be carried out before a final design can be
adopted This physical modelling is however time consuming and
expensive [34]
Granular or particulate materials are composed of a large number of loosely
packed individual particles or grains The flow of such granular materials forms
an intricate part of the materials handling industry Small reductions in energy
consumption or increases in production can have great financial advantages
Therefore significant efforts are put into improving the efficiency of these
facilities The important role of numerical simUlations is becoming more evident
in these optimisation procedures [35] Due to these efforts this technology is
becoming more powerful and is easy to use as a verification method for transfer
chute designs
The behaviour of bulk material particles is unique in the sense that it exhibits
some of the properties associated with the gaseous liquid and solid states of
matter The granular state of bulk materials cannot be characterised by anyone
of these states alone The research that captures the contact between individual
particles in an explicit manner is known as discrete element methods (OEM) [36]
The optimisation of transfer chutes in the bulk materials industry
MN van Aarde
79
CHAPTER 5
In basic terms OEM explicitly models the dynamic motion and mechanical
interactions of each body or particle as seen in the physical material flow It is
also possible to obtain a detailed description of the velocities position and force
acting on each particle at a discrete point during the analysis This is achieved
by focusing on the individual grain or body rather than focusing on the global
body as is the case with the finite element approach [36]
Figure 48 illustrates two examples of how this OEM software can be applied
Obviously the flow characteristics differ between the applications shown in Figure
48 This is however catered for by the mathematical simulation of each particle
collision
Figure 48 Flow analysis examples a) separation and screening b) hoppers feeders 36]
Continuous improvements in the performance of computing systems make OEM
a realistic tool for use in a wide range of process design and optimisation
applications During the last 20 years the capabilities of OEM have progressed
from small scale two dimensional simulations to much more complex 3D
applications The latest high performance desk top computers make it possible
to simulate systems containing large numbers of particles within a reasonable
time [37]
The optimisation of transfer chutes in the bulk materials industry
MN van Aarde
80
CHAPTER 5
According to the institute for conveyor technologies at the Otto-von-Guericke
University of Magdeburg in Germany using OEM for bulk solid handling
equipment provides [38]
bull A cost effective method of simulating the utility of materials handling
equipmentshy
bull Precise control over complicated problem zones eg transfer chutes
redirection stations and high wear areas
bull The possibility to integrate processes in one simulation such as mixing and
segregation
bull The possibility to involve the customer more extensively in the design
process
bull An advantage in the market due to attractive video sequences and pictures
of the simulation
bull The possibility to prevent facility damages and increase the efficiency of
conveyor systems extensively
As a good example of the advantages of the discrete element method the
University of Witwatersrand in Johannesburg did studies on rotary grinding mills
The university studies have shown that the OEM qualitatively predicts the load
motion of the mill very well The improved knowledge of the behaviour of mills
can therefore increase the profitability of mineral processing operations [39]
This material handling equipment is generally costly to operate and inefficient in
the utilisation of energy for breakage In order to understand the behaviour of
mills better the OEM method is increasingly being applied to the modelling of the
load behaviour of grinding mills These results indicate that this method can be
applied successfully in the bulk materials handling industry
The apUmisatian af transfer chutes in the bulk materials industry
MN van Aarde
81
CHAPTERS
Another example where this technology has been used with great success is with
the design of a new load out chute for the Immingham coal import terminal in
Britain By simulating the flow with a OEM package the designers were aided in
the fact that they were supplied with a quantitative description of the bulk solid
movement through the chute In the opinion of Professor Franz Kessler
(University of Leoben) the Discrete Element Method provides the engineer with
unique detailed information to assist in the design of transfer points [3]
These simulation packages are at the moment very expensive and not widely
used in transfer chute design It can be anticipated that the utilisation of these
packages will increase as the technology improves and the cost of the software
goes down [40] To get the best value out of the simulation it is important to
compare simulation packages and select the one most suitable to the complexity
of the design
Fluenttrade is a two dimensional computational fluid dynamics (CFD) software
package which can also be used as a chute design aid through the simulation of
material flow It must however be noted that this is not a OEM simulation
package This software package simulates the flow of material by considering
the material particles as a liquid substance The output of the simulation is the
same as can be seen in the example of Figure 49 The colours in the simulation
represent the average particle spacing [40] Due to the fact that this package
can at this stage only deliver two dimensional simulations it is considered
inadequate to perform detailed simulations on the intricate design piscussed in
this dissertation
The optjmisation of transfer chutes in the bulk materials industry
MN van Aarde
82
CHAPTER 5
COnroUf Votume t-~bn 01 ( 00 frlm~2 5000amp1 00) ~gtJ C3_2002 fLUENT 60 (2lt1 9 940 n 1Mgt u ody)
Figure 49 Simulations results from Fluenttrade [40]
The Overland Conveyor Company provides another alternative to the Fluent
software package Applied OEM is a technology company that provides discrete
element software to a variety of users in the bulk materials industry Bulk Flow
Analysttrade is an entry level package that they provide This package is very
powerful in the sense that it can accurately predict flow patterns depending on
the accuracy of the inputs An example of this is shown in Figure 50 It also has
the capability to show material segregation dynamic forces and velocities [41]
Figure 50 Simulation results from Bulk Flow Analysttrade [41]
The optimisation of transfer chutes in the bulk materials industry
MN van Aarde
83
CHAPTER 5
OEM Solutions is a world leader in discrete element modelling software They
recently announced the release of the latest version of their flow simulation
package called EOEM 21 This package can be used to simulate and optimise
bulk material handling and processing operations [41] Oue to the capabilities of
this software package it is a very attractive option for designing transfer chutes
With the development of EOEM 21 OEM Solutions worked in collaboration with
customers in the Bulk Handling Mining and Construction Pharmaceutical
Chemical and Agricultural sectors This enables the end users to perform more
sophisticated particle simulations specific to their unique applications Also
incorporated into this package is the ability and flexibility to customise and
personalise advanced particle properties [42]
This specific package has been proven successful by industry leaders Martin
Engineering (Neponset Illinois) is a leading global supplier of solids handling
systems This company continues to expand their use of EOEM software in
design optimisation and development of bulk materials handling products These
optimisation and development actions include all aspects of conveyor systems
and transfer points for numerous industrial sectors [43]
There are several other OEM simulation packages such as ESYS Particle
Passage-OEM and YAOE However none of these software packages seem be
major industry role players in the discipline of chute design although they might
have the capability In adjudicating the three big role players in bulk material flow
simulation packages there are a few factors taken into consideration It appears
thatthe advantages of 30 capabilities are non negotiable Therefore Fluenttrade is
not really a consideration From the literature review of the Bulk Flow Analysttrade
and the EOEM packages it seems that these two will provide more or less the
same performance It does seem however that the EOEM software is a bigger
role player in various industries Due to the possible future capabilities of EOEM The optimisation of transfer chutes in the bulk materials industry
MN van Aarde
84
CHAPTER 5
through its association with numerous industries this simulation package is the
software of choice
In order to retrofit or design a new transfer point with the aid of the selected OEM
software package there are a few steps that a designer must follow to gain the
full benefit of this tool [36]
1 An accurate 3D or CAD representation of the new or old transfer chute
must be rendered
2 Identify restrictions and limitations in terms of chute geometry and
manufacturing
3 Identify desired design goals (Le dust emissions flow restrictions etc)
4 Identify representative material properties and particle descriptions
5 In case of a retrofit make design changes to chute geometry with CAD
6 Simulate the performance of the new design using OEM software
7 Evaluate results obtained from the simulation (reiterate steps 5 6 and 7)
8 Perform and finalise detail design steps
9 Manufacture
10 Installation
The above mentioned steps found in references [6] and [36] only provides
information regarding retrofitting or designing chutes with the aid of OEM
Although it is a powerful design 1001 the design process should not discard the
use of analytical hand calculation~ Some of the most important design decisions
regarding chute profiles are made with analytical hard calculations such as
plotting the material trajectorY
53 DETERMINATION OF MATERIAL PROPERTIES
The discrete element method is a promising approach to the simUlation of
granular material interaction The accuracy of the outcome of the simulation is
The optimisation of transfer chutes in the bulk materials industry
M N van Aarde
85
CHAPTER 5
however dependent upon accurate information on the material properties and
input parameters [44] These inputs basically consist of the following
fundamental parameters size and shape factors bulk density angle of repose
cohesion and adhesion parameters and restitution coefficients [45]
The determination of most of these parameters are explained and defined in the
following paragraphs The parameters that are changed in the simulation
according to the reaction of the flow are not discussed and are typically
parameters such as the internal coefficient of friction between a number of
particles A collaborated effort by the bulk handling industry aims to find ways in
which all parameters can be accurately determined through scientific methods
This has however still not been achieved The objective is to achieve a realistic
representation and therefore some parameters are altered in the simulation
It is important to note that the computation time increases as the particle size
becomes smaller and the amount of particles increase In most granular flow
problems the characteristics of the material stream are largely determined by
particles greater than 10 - 20 mm in size [45] Therefore in order to reduce
computation time the selected particle size for simUlations should be the same
as the largest particles handled by the facility namely 34 mm diameter
Although fines have a higher internal friction coefficient and more cohesiveness
these properties can be averaged into the input parameters to obtain the same
overall effect [45] Therefore only a single particle size is used in the simulation
and the properties optimised to obtain the same result under actual operating
conditionsmiddot Some of the material properties can be easily obtained from the
facility The rest of the properties are obtained from tests carried out by expert
conSUltants in this field
The size factor and bulk density are obtained from the facility Materia tests
carried out by external consultants provide the coefficient of friction and also the The optimisation of transfer chutes in the bulk materials industry
MN van Aarde
86
CHAPTER 5
wall friction angle This is the angle at which the material will start to slide under
its own mass To determine these material properties the external consultants
normally use sophisticated and expensive equipment Data gathered from these
tests are used for the hand calculation of the chute profile The angle of repose
can normally be observed from a stockpile and is the angle that the side of the
stockpile makes with the horizontal
For the OEM simulation the coefficient of friction is one of the main determining
factors of the wall friction angle Data provided by the material tests can not be
used as a direct input into OEM In the software package the coefficient of
friction is represented by a factor between 0 and 1 The material test data can
however provide some insight into where on this scale the factor is This factor
can be derived from a few small simulation iterations as there is no method of
direct conversion between the test result data and the OEM input
To determine this factor a plate is modelled with a single layer of particles This
plate is then rotated within the simulation at approximately 2deg per second As
soon as the particles begin to slide the time is taken from which the angle can be
calculated This process is repeated with different friction coefficients until the
correct wall friction angle is obtained After the coefficient of friction factor is
determined between the particles and the chute wall the material restitution
factor and coefficient of internal friction can be obtained
The restitution factor is obtained by measurirtg the rebound height of a particle
when it is dropped from a certain height This is usually difficult to determine due
to the variation in shape of the material particles If the particle lands on a
surface it rarely bounces straight back up Therefore the test is repeated
numerous times and an average is taken to obtain the final result
Coefficient of internal friction is a property that describes the particles ability to
slide across each other A simUlation is set up to create a small stockpile of The optimisation of transfer chutes in the blJlk materials industry
MN van Aarde
87
CHAPTER 5
material particles The angle of repose can be obtained by measuring the
average apex angle of the stockpiles In this simulation the coefficient of internal
friction and restitution factors are iterated This is done in order to simulate the
accurate behaviour of particles falling onto the stockpile and forming the correct
angle of repose Figure 51 shows what this simulation typically looks like
Figure 51 Determination of material properties for an accurate angle of repose
54 VERIFICATION OF THE SELECTED TEST METHODOLOGY FOR THIS
APPLICATION
The best verification is to compare the simulation results with an actual material
flow situation Therefore a comparison is made between the actual flow in the
existing transfer configuration and the simulation of this same transfer This is
also a good test to see if the parameters changed in the simulation were done
correctly
During the chute test programme CCTV cameras were installed in the problem
transfer chutes at the facility The cameras are positioned to provide an accurate
view of the material flow behaviour inside the chutes As explained in Chapter 3
The optimisation of transfer chutes in the bulk materials industry 88
MN van Aarde
CHAPTER 5
the behaviour of the material flow inside the chutes changes with the variation of
ore type
Due to the fact that only 34 mm diameter particles are used in the simulation a
test using coarse ore was chosen for the verification of the simulation
Therefore test 12 is used as reference for the verification In this test coarse S
with the particle size distribution between 28 mm and 34 mm was used at the
transfer from CV 3 to CV 5
Figure 52 shows an image taken from the CCTV camera inside the transfer chute
between CV 3 and CV 5 The red line indicates the top of the chute throat
opening and the yellow arrows show the top of material flow This screen shot
was taken at a flow rate of 10 000 tlh It can be deduced from this view and the
chute test work that the chute is choking at a throughput rate of 10 000 tlh
Figure 52 Actual material flow with coarse S at 10000 tIh
The transfer chute from Figure 52 was modelled in CAD and the model imported
into the discrete element package EDEM All the material input parameters as
discussed in section 53 were used in the simulation 10 000 tlh was used as the
The optimisation of transfer chutes in the bulk materials industry
MN van Aarde
89
CHAPTER 5
flow rate parameter in an attempt to simulate and recreate the situation as shown
by Figure 52
Test 12 of the chute performance tests gave the following results which can be
compared to the EDEM simulation
bull Chute started to choke rapidly at 10 000 tlh
bull Slight off centre loading onto the receiving conveyor CV 5
bull A lower velocity layer of material close to the discharge of the chute
bull Material roll back on the receiving conveyor due to significant differences in
the velocity of the material flow and the receiving conveyor
Off-centre loading
L
Figure 53 Material flow pattern through the existing chute
The optimisation of transfer chutes in the bulk materials industry
MN van Aarde
90
CHAPTER 5
Flow restricted in this area
Low velocity layer
Low discharge velocity rollback
Figure 54 Cross sectional side view of material flow through the existing chute
Figure 53 shows the material flow pattern in the existing chute where the thick
red arrows indicate the direction of flow The legend on the left of the figure
indicates the material velocity in ms Slow flowing material is shown in blue and
the colour turns to red as the material velocity increases Slight off centre
loading onto the receiving conveyor CV 5 can be seen from Figure 53 This
correlates well with the actual observations during the physical testing of this
transfer point
Figure 54 shows the more determining factors for correlation between actual flow
and simulated flow where the legend on the left indicates the material velocity in
ms This is a cross sectional view through the centre of the chute From this
view a build up of material can be seen in the chute throat area The slow
flowing material on the back of the chute also helps to restrict the flow Due to
the fact that the material speed at the discharge of the chute is much slower than
the receiving belt speed a stack of turbulent flowing material is formed behind
the discharge point on the receiving conveyor
The optimisation of transfer chutes in the bulk materials industry
MN van Aarde
91
CHAPTER 5
There is a good correlation between the simulated and actual material flow
pattern The simulation method can therefore be considered as a valid alternate
or additional method to standard analytical chute design Attention should be
given though to the input of material properties in order to obtain a realistic result
55 VERIFICATION OF NEW CHUTE CONFIGURATION AND OPTIMISATION OF THE
HOOD LOCATION
After establishing that the OEM is a reliable design and verification tool the new
transfer chute configuration can be simulated Firstly this configuration is
modelled without the honeycombs inside the hood and spoon This is done in
order to verify the material flow pattern and velocity through the hood and spoon
Results obtained from this simulation can then be compared to the hand
calculation results An iterative process is followed with simulations and hand
calculations to obtain the best flow results The simulation results are shown in
Figure 55 and Figure 56
I
L
Figure 55 Material flow through hood at 10 000 tIh
The optimisation of transfer chutes in the bulk materials industry
MN van Aarde
92
CHAPTER 5
Figure 56 Material flow through spoon at 10 000 tlh
The hood velocity profile shown in Figure 38 gives the same result as obtained
from the DEM simulation The calculated hood exit velocity is 633 ms This is
the same result obtained from the simulation and shown by the red colouring in
Figure 55 As the material enters the spoon it is falling under gravity and
therefore still accelerating At impact with the chute wall it slows down and exits
the spoon with approximately the same velocity as the receiving conveyor
Figure 56 shows the material flow through the spoon section This can also be
compared to the spoon velocity profile in Figure 39 The behaviour of the
material inside the spoon as shown by the simulation correlates with the results
obtained from the hand calculations This is another indication that with accurate
input parameters the DEM can be used as a useful verification tool
The optimisation of transfer chutes in the bulk materials industry
MN van Aarde
93
CHAPTER 5
Skew loading into spoon
Slower material
L
Figure 57 Determination of the optimum hood location
The hood is supported by a shaft at the top and can be moved horizontally This
function is incorporated into the design in order to optimise the hood location
during commissioning of the transfer chute It is critical to discharge centrally into
the spoon in order to eliminate skew loading onto the receiving conveyor
Figure 57 illustrates the effect that the hood location has on material flow When
comparing the flow from Figure 55 to the flow in Figure 57 it is clear that skew
loading is a direct result of an incorrect hood position The circled area in Figure
57 illustrates how the flow reacts to the incorrect hood location
Material is discharged to the right side of the spoon which causes a slight buildshy
up of material on the left This causes the material to flow slightly from side to
side as it passes through the spoon Figure 57 indicates that the material to the
The optimisation of transfer chutes in the bulk materials industry
MN van Aarde
94
CHAPTERS ----------------- -------___ _--shy
right at the spoon discharge is slightly slower than the material on the left This is
a clear indication of skew loading onto the receiving conveyor
The material flow pattern in Figure 55 is symmetrical and therefore will not
cause skew loading The OEM can give a good indication of the required hood
setup before commissioning However adjustments can still be made during the
commissioning process The tracking of the receiving belt should give a good
indication of when the hood is in the optimum position
56 EFFECT OF THE HONEYCOMB STRUCTURE IN HIGH IMPACT ZONES
The purpose of the honeycomb dead box structure in the high impact zones is to
capture material inside the pockets and induce material on material flow This
requires that the material inside the honeycombs should be stationary while the
main stream material flow moves over the dead boxes OEM can therefore be
set up in such a way that the material velocities can be visualised inside the
chute
In Chapter 4 the logic of how this honeycomb should be structured and
positioned was discussed The simulations shown in Figure 58 and Figure 59
illustrate how a OEM pack~ge can also be used to determine the positioning of
these honeycomb structures Impact points in the hood and spoon must be
inside the honeycomb in all situations of flow inside the chute The spacing of
dead box pockets can be altered to ensure that a continuous layer of stationary
material is formed in the honeycomb area Various geometries for this
honeycomb structure can be simulated with OEM to obtain the best results
The optimisation of transfer chutes in the bulk materials industry
MN van Aarde
95
CHAPTER 5
Large radius hood
Hood honeycomb box to minimise wear in impact
Vertical discharge from hood centralising flow on
belt
L
Figure 58 Material behaviour through hood
Spoon
Spoon honeycomb box to minimise wear in impact area
Improved spoon discharge flow
Figure 59 Material behaviour through spoon
The optimisation of transfer chutes in the bulk materials industry
MN van Aarde
96
CHAPTERS
The legends on the left of Figure 58 and Figure 59 indicate the material velocity
in ms Dark blue indicates stationary material and bright red indicates a
maximum material velocity of 8 ms Using this information the functionality of
the honeycomb dead boxes can now be analysed The velocity of the material
captured by the dead boxes is indicated as dark blue This means that all the
material in the dead boxes is stationary
With the result obtained from the OEM simulation it is clear that material on
material flow will be induced by the honeycomb dead boxes The pockets of the
honeycomb capture the material and will therefore have reduced wear in the
high impact areas This material on material flow does however induce a
coarser sliding surface than the smooth ceramic liner tiles Due to the high
velocity of material through the chute the effect of the coarser sliding surface is
however minimised
58 CONCLUSION
The Discrete Element Method is proven to be a successful design and
verification tool in the bulk materials industry This method is used widely in the
global bulk materials industry The successful outcome of the OEM simulation is
however dependent on the correct material input parameters Some of these
parameters are readily available from the facility that handles the material The
rest of the parameters can be determined by setting up simple test simulations
with OEM
To verify that the OEM simulation is a correct indication of the actual condition
the simulation is compared to CCTV images taken from the same transfer chute
The results show that the OEM simulation does provide a true reflection of the
actual material flow through the transfer chute Therefore the same material
input parameters can be used to simulate the new transfer chute configuration
The optimisation of transfer chutes in the bulk materials industry
MN van Aarde
97
CHAPTER 5
From the simulations done on the new transfer chute configuration the effect of
the honeycomb dead boxes can be examined These simulation results show
that the honeycomb dead box configuration is effective in capturing material
inside the honeycomb cavities This results in material on material flow and
reduces impact abrasion on the ceramic chute liners
Results obtained from the OEM simulation of the new transfer configuration are
compared to the hand calculation results This comparison indicates that the
material velocity calculated in the hood and spoon correlates well with the
material velocity calculated by the OEM The overall results obtained from
simulating the new transfer chute configuration have been shown to provide a
true reflection of the actual flow through the chute
The optimisation of transfer chutes in the bulk materials industry
MN van Aarde
98
CHAPTER 6
CHAPTER 6 CONCLUSIONS AND RECOMMENDATIONS
The optimisation of transfer chutes in the bulk materials industry
MN van Aarde
99
CHAPTER 6
61 CONCLUSIONS AND RECOMMENDATIONS
Bulk materials handling is a key role player in the global industrial industry
Within this field the industry faces many challenges on a daily basis These
challenges as with any industry are to limit expenses and increase profit Some
of the limiting factors of achieving this goal in the bulk materials handling industry
are lost time due to unscheduled maintenance product losses due to spillage
andhigh costs incurred by increased maintenance
The focus of this study was on the optimisation of transfer chutes and
investigations were carried out to determine the core problems These
investigations were done by observing and monitoring various grades of iron ore
passing through transfer chutes known to have throughput problems The core
problems were identified as high wear on liners in the impact zones skew
loading on receiving conveyors material spillage and chute blockages
These problems cause financial losses to the facility either directly or indirectly
Direct financial losses can be attributed to the frequent replacement of chute
liners while the indirect financial losses are caused by facility down time This is
why it is imperative to optimise the manner in which the transfer of material is
approached A new transfer chute configuration addresses the problems
identified at the facility and the core concepts can be adopted at any bulk
materials handling facility
This new concept examines the utilisation of the hood and spoon concept rather
than the conventional dead box configuration By using the hood and spoon
configuration the material discharge velocity is utilised and carried through to the
discharge onto the receiving conveyor Adding to this design is a honeycomb
dead box configuration in the high impact zones of the hood and spoon This
initiates material on material flow and prolongs the lifetime of the chute liners
The optimisation of transfer chutes in the bulk materials industry
MN van Aarde
100
CHAPTER 6
The radius of the hood should be designed so that it follows the path of the
material trajectory as closely as possible Some facility constraints prohibit this
hood radius from following exactly the same path as the material The radius of
the spoon is designed in such a manner that it receives the material from the
hood and slows it down while turning it into the direction in which the belt is
running Ideally the material should be discharged from the spoon at
approximately the same velocity as the receiving conveyor
If this can be achieved then some major problems suffered by the industry will
have been resolved With the hood having almost the same radius as the
material trajectory impact wear on liners can be significantly reduced By
discharging material from the chute onto the receiving conveyor at the same
velocity as the conveyor belt excessive belt wear and material spillage will be
avoided Further optimisation is however still possible by investigating the
implementation of various skirting options to the side of the conveyor
This new transfer chute configuration also boasts an articulated bottom section in
the spoon The purpose of the adjustable bottom section is to create greater
clearance below the spoon This will allow material on the belt below to pass
unimpeded underneath the spoon In some cases there can be several chutes in
series that discharge onto the same conveyor In these cases it is beneficial to
incorporate an articulated chute in order to have the capability of having a small
drop height between the discharge point in the chute and the receiving conveyor
This low drop height also minimises turbulent flow at the chute discharge point on
the receiving conveyor
The most unique feature to the new design is the implementation of the
honeycomb dead box configuration in the high impact zones Due to these high
impact areas the liners will experience the most wear This section of the chute
is flanged and can be removed separately from the rest of the chute to aid
maintenance In most maintenance operations it may only be necessary to reline The optimisation of transfer chutes in the bulk materials industry
MN van Aarde
101
CHAPTER 6
this small section of the chute Costs are minimised by reducing the time
required for maintenance and the cost of replacing liners
Previously testing of new transfer chute configurations normally involved
implementing the chute and obseNing its ability to perform according to
specification This can however be a costly exercise as it is possible that further
modifications to the chute will be required after implementation Therefore it is
beneficial to verify the new chute configuration before implementation
This is done by simulating the material flow through the chute using Discrete
Element Method A comparison was done between the actual flow in an eXisting
chute and the simulated flow in the same chute configuration This comparison
showed the same result obtained from the simulation and the actual material
flow This method can therefore be used as an accurate simulation tool for
evaluating transfer chute performance
The mathematical calculations describing the material flow in and over the
honeycomb dead box structures are complex Therefore simulation models are
used to show the material behaviour in those areas Simulations show that the
material captured within the dead boxes remains stationary thus protecting the
ceramic liners behind it This is the desired result as it prolongs the life of the
chute liners and reduces maintenance frequencies
If the work is done efficiently it normally takes two days to remove a worn chute
of this configuration fully and replace it with a new one This is normally done
once a year due to the design lifetime of the chute With the new chute
configuration this maintenance schedule can be reduced to two hours once a
year for the replacement of the honeycomb sections only The exposed face of
the honeycomb ribs will wear through until the efficiency of the honeycomb
design is reduced
The optimisation of transfer chutes in the bulk materials industry
MN van Aarde
102
CHAPTER 6
This specific iron ore facility has approximately fifty transfer points During this
exercise only two of these transfer points were replaced with the new chute
configuration The combined annual maintenance time for replacement of these
50 chutes is 100 days If the new chute philosophy is adopted on all these
transfers the annual maintenance time can be reduced to as little as 100 hours
This excludes the unplanned work for cleaning of spillages and fixing or replacing
worn conveyors
There are significant benefits to investigating the problems at specific transfer
points before attempting a new design This gives good insight into where the
focus should be during the design process Ea~y identification and
understanding of the problem areas is essential for a new chute configuration
The new design features can provide a vast improvement and a large benefit to
the bulk materials handling industry
62 RECOMMENDATIONS FOR FURTHER STUDY
During the chute performance tests it was noted that avalanches on the
stockpiles during reclaiming of material causes peaks on the conveyor systems
These peaks in the material stream increase the probability of blockages in the
transfer chutes As a result material spillage occurs and the conveyor belts can
be easily overloaded
This occurrence creates the requirement for further studies on the reclaiming
operations All stacker reclaimers are operated manually which creates ample
room for error Investigations can be done to determine the value of automating
the reclaiming operations Manual interaction cannot be avoided but an
automated system will reduce the possibility for error
Visual inspections on the transfer chute liners indicate that the material tends to
erode the liners away quicker in the grooves between liner plates or ceramic
The optimisation of transfer chutes in the bulk materials industry
MN van Aarde
103
CHAPTER 6
tiles This occurrence seems to be worse in areas of the chute where the
material velocity is the highest
This problem was specifically noticed with ceramic liner tiles The tiles are glued
to the chute surface with an epoxy and this substance also fills the crevices
between the tiles This epoxy is however not resistant to any type of sliding or
impact abrasion If the material gains speed in such a groove between the tiles it
simply erodes the epoxy away Studies to reduce or even eliminate this problem
should be examined
In some situations the layout and configuration of the chute prohibits the tiles
from being inserted in a staggered manner Studies can be done on the
composition of this epoxy in order to increase its resistance to sliding and impact
abrasion By doing so the lifetime of the chute liners can be increased which will
result in minimised facility down time due to maintenance
It seems that it is a global industry problem to find accurate scientific methods of
determining material input parameters for OEM simulations Although most of
the material properties can be determined through testing it is still a challenge to
convert that information into a representative input parameter into OEM It is
therefore recommended that further studies be undertaken to determine a
method by which material test data can be successfully converted into OEM input
parameters
The optimisation of transfer chutes in the bulk materials industry
MN van Aarde
104
REFERENCES ------shy
REFERENCES
[1] ARNOLD P C MCLEAN A G ROBERTS A W 1978 Bulk Solids
storage flow and handling Tunra Bulk Solids Australia Jan
[2] ANON 2008 Peak (Export) OilUSD Survival Dec
httppeakoHsurvivalorgltag=finance Date of access 8 Jun 2009
[3] KESSLER F 2006 Recent developments in the field of bulk conveying
FME Transactions Vol 34 NO4
[4] ANON 2007 Specification for Troughed Belt Conveyors British
Standards BS28901989 25 Sep Date of access 8 Jun 2009
[5] CEMA (Conveyor Equipment Manufacturers Association) Belt Conveyors
6thfor Bulk Materials ed wwwcemanetorg Date of access
10 Jun 2009
[6] DEWICKI G 2003 Computer Simulation of Granular Material Flows
Overland Conveyor Co Inc Jan httpwwwpowderandbulkcom Date
of access 10 Jun 2009
[7] AMERICAN COAL COUNCIL 2009 Engineered chutes control dust for
Ameren U Es Meramec Plant httpwww clean-coal infold rupalindexphp
Date of access 12 Jun 2009
[8] KUMBA IRON ORE 2008 Annual Financial Statements 2008
httpwwwsishenironorecompanycozareportskumba afs 08pdffullpdf
Date of access 13 Jun 2009
The optimisation of transfer chutes in the bulk materials industry
MN van Aarde
105
REFERENCES
[9] METSO BACKGROUNDER 2007 Rock Crushing 22 Feb
httpWWvVmetsocom Date of access 15 Jun 2009
[10] ALTHOFF H 1977 Reclaiming and Stacking System Patent US
4037735
[11] THE SOUTH AFRICAN INSTITUTE OF MATERIALS HANDLING
Conveyor belt installations and related components Chutes Level 1
course on belt conveying technology
httpWWvVsaimhcozaeducationcourse01chuteshtm Date of access
18 Jun 2009
[12] CLARKE R 2008 Hood and spoon internal flow belt conveyor transfer
systems SACEA - seminar 22 Aug httpWWvVsaceaorgzaDate of
access 22 Jun 2009
[13] T W WOODS CONSTRUCTION 2009 Design problems in coal transfer
chutes 24 Mar httpWWvVferretcomaucTW-Woods-Constructions
Date of access 25 Jun 2009
[14] LOUGHRAN J 2009 The flow of coal through transfer chutes 20 Aug
Showcase of research excellence James Cook University Australia
[15] ONEIL M 2006 A guide to coal chute replacement Power Engineering
International Nov httpgoliathecnextcomcoms2lgi 0198-369643Ashy
guide-to-coal-chutehtml Date of access 3 Jul 2009
[16] NORDELL LK 1992 A new era in overland conveyor belt design
httpWWvVckitcozasecureconveyorpaperstroughedoverlandoverland
htm Date of access 3 Jul 2009
The optimisation of transfer chutes in the bulk materials industry
MN van Aarde
106
REFERENCES
[17] Rowland C 1992 Dust Control at Transfer Points
httpwwwckitcozasecureconveyorpapersbionic-research-2d-bri2shy
paper05htm Date of access 4 Jul 2009
[18] KRAM ENGINEERING Ceramic composite impact blocks
httpwwwkramengineeringcozacercomhtmIDate of access
5 Jul 2009
I19] BLAZEK C 2005 Kinkaid InteliFlo tradeInstallation Source for Plats
Power Atticle Oct
httpwwwbenetechusacompdf caseStudyBe neKi ncArti c pdf
Date of access 10 Aug 2009
[20] CRP Engineering Corp Modern Transfer Chute Designs for Use in
Material Handling
httpwwwcbpengineeringcompdflTransfer Chutespdf Date of access
26 Apr 2010
[21] ROZENTALS J 2008 Rational design of conveyor chutes Bionic
Research Institute South African Institute of Materials Handling
[22] ROBERTS AW SCOTT OJ 1981 Flow of bulk solids through
transfer chutes of variable geometry and profile Bulk Solids Handling
1(4) Dec
[23] CARSON JW ROYAL TA GOODWILL DJ 1986 Understanding
and Eliminating Particle Segregation Problems Bulk Solids Handling
6(1) Feb
[24] BENJAMIN CW 2004 The use of parametric modelling to design
transfer chutes and other key components Gulf Conveyor Group The optimisation of transfer chutes in the bulk materials industry
MN van Aarde
107
l25] STUART DICK D ROYAL TA 1992 Design Principles for Chutes to
Handle Bulk Solids Bulk Solids Handling 12(3) Sep
[26J REICKS AV RUDOLPHI TJ 2004 The Importance and Prediction of
Tension Distribution around the Conveyor Belt Path Bulk materials
handling by conveyor belt 5(2)
(271 RAMOS CM 1991 The real cost of degradation
institute Chute design conference 1991
Bionic research
[28] ROBERTS AW 1969 An investigation of the gravity flow of non
cohesive granular materials through discharge chutes Transactions of
the ACMEjournal of engineering for indust~ May
[29] TAYLOR HJ 1989 Guide to the design of transfer chutes and chute
linings for bulk materials
association 1989
mechanical handling engineers
[30] ROBERTS AW 1999 Chute design application transfer chute design
Design guide for chutes in bulk solids handling The University of
Newcastle Australia
[31] NORDELL LK 1994 Palabora installs Curved Transfer Chute in Hard
Rock to Minimise Belt Cover Wear Bulk Solids Handling 14 Dec
[32] ROZENTALS J 1991 Flow of Bulk Solids in Chute Design
research institute Chute design conference 1991
Bionic
The optimisation oftransfer chutes in the bulk materials industry
MN van Aarde
108
REFERENCES
[33] ROBERTS AW WICHE SJ 2007 Feed Chute Geometry for
Minimum Belt Wear (h International conference of bulk materials
handling 17 Oct
[34J POWDER HANDLING New OEM Conveyor Transfer Chute Design
Software Helix Technologies
httpvwvwpowderhandlingcomauarticesnew-dem-conveyor-transfershy
chute-design-software Date of access 12 Aug 2009
[35J SAWLEY ML CLEARY PW 1999 A Parallel Discrete Element
Method for Industrial Granular Flow SimUlations EPFL - Super
Computing Review (11)
[36] DEWICKI G 2003 Bulk Material Handling and Processing - Numerical
Techniques and Simulation of Granular Material Overland Conveyor
Company Bulk Solids Handling 23(2)
[37J FA VIER J 2009 Continuing Improvements Boost use of Discrete
Element Method Oil and Gas Engineer- Production Processing 7 Oct
[38] KRAUS E F KA TTERFELD A Usage of the Discrete Element Method in
Conveyor Technologies Institute for Conveyor Technologies (IFSL) The
Otto-von-Guericke University of Magdeburg
[39] MOYS MH VAN NIEROP MA VAN TONDER JC GLOVER G
2005 Validation of the Discrete Element Method (OEM) by Comparing
Predicted Load Behaviour of a Grinding Mill with Measured Data School
for Process and Materials Engineering University of Witwatersrand
Johannesburg The optimisation of transfer materials industry
MN van Aarde
109
REFERENCES
[40J MciLVINA P MOSSAD R 2003 Two dimensional transfer chute
analysis using a continuum method Third international conference on
CFD in the Minerals and Process Industry CSIRO Melbourne Australia
(41J Overland Conveyor Company Inc 2009 Applied DEM
httpwwwapplieddemcomDate of access 26 Apr 2010
(42] DEM SOLUTIONS 2008 Advanced Particle Simulation Capabilities with
EDEM 21 Press release 5 Nov
[43J DEM SOLUTIONS 2008 Martin Engineering Expands use of EDEMTM
Software in Design of Solids Handling Equipment Press release 20 Feb
(44] COETZEE CJ ELS DNJ 2009 Calibration of Discrete Element
Parameters and the Modelling of Silo Discharge and Bucket Filling
Computers and Electronics in Agriculture 65 Mar
[45] DAVID J KRUSES PE Conveyor Belt Transfer Chute Modelling and
Other Applications using The Discrete Element Method in the Material
Handling Industry
httpwwwckitcozasecureconveyorpaperstrouqhedconveyorconveyor
Date of access 3 Sep 2009
bulk materials industry
MN van Aarde
110
ApPENDIXA
ApPENDIX A MATERIAL TESTS AND LINER SELECTiON
The optimisation of-transfer chutes in the bulk materials industry
MN van Aarde
11-1
ApPENDIX A
MATERIAL TEST WORK AND LINER SELECTION
Material samples were taken from the stockpile area for evaluation and testing
These samples represent the worst case materials for impact wear and flow
problems Tests were conducted by external consultants as this is a speciality
field Therefore no detail information on how the tests are conducted is currently
available Results from these tests should indicate the worst case parameters for
chute design according to each specific liner type tested
The material handled by the facility varied from 4 mm to 34 mm lump size A mid
range lump size ore was identified as the preferred material to use for wear
testing This decision was based on the specific ore type maximum lump size of
15 mm as required for the wear test The wear test apparatus used cannot
provide conclusive results with the larger lump sizes of 34 mm and thus smaller
sizes are used Guidance on which ore samples to take was given by the
external consultants tasked with performing the test work
The test work is divided into two sections Firstly the flow test work is carried out
on the finer material with a higher clay content known to have bad flow angles
Included in the selection of fine materials is a sample of the scraper dribblings
This is the material scraped off the belt underneath the head pulley Secondly
the wear tests were conducted on 15 mm samples as explained above
A few common liners were selected for testing These liners are shown in
Table A Some of these liners are known for their specific purpose and
characteristics Polyurethane is known to have a very good coefficient of friction
and will therefore improve the flow of material This material does however
wear out quicker in high impact applications Therefore it is only considered for
use inside the dribbling chute
The optimisation of transfer chutes in the bulk materials industry
MN van Aarde
112
ApPENDIX A
As can be seen from Figure 37 in section 432 the dribbling chute will only see
scraper dribblings from the primary and secondary scrapers It is protected from
any main stream flow of material by the start up chute This makes the
polyurethane liner a prime candidate for lining this section of the chute
Table A Material tested vs liner type
I Flow Tests Wear Tests
Liner T
en aJ c
u
I
i
N en aJ c
u
Cf)
en aJ c
u
I en
shy OJaJ C 0 shyj -shy 0 u pound
(f) shy0
T
aJ ~ j 0 0
N aJ ~ j 0 0 i
I Chrome x x x x x
Carbide
x x x x xI VRN 500 I
x x x x x x94
Alumina
Ceramic i I
Poly x
Urethane I I I
FLOW TEST WORK
The fines 1 sample was tested at three different moisture contents of 36 41
and 47 This is 70 80 and 90 of saturation moisture respectively No
noticeable difference was observed in the wall friction angles Therefore the
fines 2 and fines 3 samples were tested at 80 of saturation which is 42 and
43 moisture content respectively
Test work showed that the minimum chute angle required for flow increased as
the impact pressure increased Chute angles were measured up to impact
pressures of about 8 kPa The worst chute angle obtained was 62deg This means
that no angle inside the chute should be less than 62deg from the horizontal
The industry 113
MN van Aarde
ApPENDIXA
The scraper dribblings were tested at a moisture content of 12 This material
possesses the most clay content and therefore has the worst flow properties
During testing of this material water was added to improve the flow At an
impact pressure of 03 kPa the minimum chute angle drops from 62deg to 56deg when
adding a fine mist spray of water
WEAR TEST WORK
As stated in chapter 4 wear tests were conducted on the chrome carbide
overlay ceramics and VRN500 The results of these tests are shown as non
dimensional wear ratios of mm wearmm travel of bulk solid sliding on the wear
liners coupon at a given force Test results shown in Table B indicate that the
chrome carbide will have about 185 times the lifetime of 94 alumina ceramics
The VRN500 liner will wear about 6 times faster than the 94 alumina ceramics
at the same force
Table B Wear ratios of liners at two different pressure ranges
lore Wall Coupon 65 kPa 163kPa -173 kPa I i
Coarse 1 on 94 Alumina Ceramic 90 E-9 37 E-8
Coarse 1 on Chrome Carbide 87 E-9 20 E-8
Coarse 1 on VRN500 91 E-8 I 24 E-7 i
Coarse 2 on 94 Alumina Ceramics 38 E-9 22 E-8
Coarse 2 on Chrome Carbide 55 E-9 15 E-8
Coarse 2 on VRN500 66 E-8 25 E-7 I
LINER SELECTION
The lifetime of the liners is not the only criteria Maintainability and cost are also
factors that must be considered Chrome carbide seems to be the liner of choice
for this application However the specific type of chrome carbide tested is not
The optimisation of transfer chutes industry 114
MN van Aarde
ApPEND[xA
manufactured locally and the imported cost is approximately three times that of
ceramics
VRN500 is slightly cheaper than ceramics and can easily be bolted to the back
plate of the chute which makes maintenance very simple Ceramics are
however widely used on the facility and the maintenance teams are well trained
for this specific liner Therefore 94 alumina ceramics is chosen for this
application
The optimisation of transfer chutes in the bulk materials industry
MN van Aarde
115
ApPENODlt B
ApPENDIX B CHUTE CONTROL PHILOSOPHY
The optfmisation of transfer chutes in the bulk materials industry
MN van Aarde
116
ApPENDIX B
SPOON IN THE OPERATING POSITION
For the spoon to be in the operating position the moving head must be over that
specific spoon and the feeding stockyard conveyor must be running This means
that material will be fed through the chute In this case the spoon needs to be in
the operating position to prevent spillage
However when the chute is in the operating position and the feeding conveyor
trips for any reason the actuated spoon section must not move to the non
operating position If the spoon position feedback fails then the system must trip
and the spoon must remain in its last position The downstream conveyor must
also fail to start with this condition
SPOON IN THE NON OPERATING POSITION
As a rule the spoon needs to be in the non operating position when the moving
head on that specific stockyard conveyor is in the purging position (position C)
The reason is that when a stacker reclaimer is in stacking mode any upstream
stacker reclaimer can be reclaiming The reclaimed material on CV 5 or CV 6
will have to pass underneath the actuated chute
ACTUATED SPOON OVER CV 5
As an example for the movement of any actuated spoon on CV 5 the following
are considered When the moving heads of any of the stockyard conveyors are
in position A and that specific stockyard conveyor is running then the rest of the
actuated spoons over CV 5 must be in the non operating position The
following scenario provides a better understanding
bull CV 4 is running
bull CV 4 moving head is in position A
The optimisation of transfer chutes in the bulk materials industry
MN van Aarde
117
ApPENDIXB
In this situation all the actuated spoons on CV 5 except underneath CV 4
must be in the non operating position
ACTUATED SPOON OVER CV 6
As an example for the movement of any actuated spoon on CV 6 the following
are considered When the moving heads of any of the stockyard conveyors are
in position B and that specific stockyard conveyor is running then the rest of the
actuated spoons over CV 6 must be in the non operating position The
following scenario is similar to 453 but explains the control philosophy for the
moving head in position B
bull CV 2 is running
bull CV 2 moving head is in position B
In this situation all the actuated spoons on CV 6 except underneath CV 2
must be in the non operating position
The optimisation of transfer chutes in bulk materials industry
MN van Aarde
118
SAMEVATTING
As n toevoegsel tot die verbeterde vloei binne die nuwe ontwerp vir die
spesifieke geut waarna gekyk word in hierdie studie word daar ook ander
ontwerp toevoegings bespreek wat die waarde van die nuwe ontwerp verder
bevestig Hierdie ontwerp verbeter die leeftyd van die geut-voerring en tyd wat
afgestaan moet word aan instandhouding word geminimeer
Daar is letterlik eindelose moontlikhede wanneer dit kom by die konfigurasie van
oordrag geute as gevolg van die uniekheid van elke aanleg materiaal tipe en
uitleg beperkings Daarom is dit voordelig om te weet waaraan aandag gegee
moet word in die proses om geute te ontwerp of te optimiseer
Hierdie studie fokus op n spesifieke oordrag geut binne n spesifieke industrie
met unieke probleme en oplossings Dit behoort die geut ontwerper te bekwaam
met die basiese kennis en insig oor waarna om te kyk wanneer geute ontwerp of
geoptimiseer word Die doel van hierdie skripsie is dus nie om die leser te
voorsien van n resep om geute te optimiseer nie maar wei die kennis om die
probleme en oplossings te verstaan deur gebruik te maak van n studie uit die
industrie
The optimisation of transfer chutes in the bulk materials industry
MN van Aarde
v
ACKNOWLEDGEMENTS
ACKNOWLEDGEMENTS
I would like to thank Prof EH Mathews for the opportunity to do my Masters
degree
Special thanks to Dr M Kleingeld for his guidance and effort in assisting me in
my attempt to deliver a dissertation of this standard
Thank you to Prof Lesley Greyvenstein for the language editing
To my family thank you for all your support and encouragement throughout the
execution of this study
------________--__------------shyThe optimisation of transfer chutes in the bulk materials industry
MN van Aarde
vi
TABLE OF CONTENTS ---~-------------------~----
TABLE OF CONTENTS
Abstract ii
Samevatting iv
Acknowledgements vi
Table of contents vii
List of figures ix
List of tables xii
Nomenclature xiii
Chapter 1 Introduction to transfer chutes in the bulk materials handling industry1
11 Introduction to transfer chutes 2
12 Various applications and configurations of transfer chutes 5
13 Recurring chute problems and countermeasures from industry 11
14 Purpose of this research 18
15 Synopsis of this dissertation 19
Chapter 2 Basic considerations in chute design 21
21 Preface 22
22 Design objectives 22
23 Integrating a more appropriate chute layout with the plant constraints 27
24 Investigating the correct chute profile for reduced liner wear 30
25 Feed chute geometry for reduced belt wear 34
26 Conclusion37
Chapter 3 Tests for the identification of recurring problems on existing chutes39
31 Preface 40
32 Test methodology 40
33 Chute performance acceptance criteria 42
34 Discussion of problem areas 42
35 Summary of test results 54
36 Conclusion55
The optimisation of transfer chutes in the bulk materials industry
MN van Aarde
vii
TABLE OF CONTENTS
Chapter 4 Dynamic chutes for the elimination of recurring problems 57
41 Preface 58
42 Consideration of the existing transfer point constraints 59
43 Design of the chute profile 61
44 Incorporating a dead box in the impact areas 67
45 Designing the chute for integration with system requirements 73
46 Conclusion75
Chapter 5 Testing and verification ofthe new solution 77
51 Preface 78
52 Selecting a test methodology 79
53 Determination of material properties 85
54 Verification of the selected test methodology for this application 88
55 Verification of new chute configuration and optimisation of the hood
location 92
56 Effect of the honeycomb structure in high impact zones 95
58 Conclusion 97
Chapter 6 Conclusions and Recommendations 99
61 Conclusions and recommendations 100
62 Recommendations for further study 103
References 1 05
Appendix A Material Tests And Liner Selection 111
Appendix B Chute Control Philosophy 116
The optimisation of transfer chutes in the bulk materials industry
MN van Aarde
viii
LIST OF FIGURES
LIST OF FIGURES
Figure 1 Growth in global crude steel production from 1996 to 2006 [2] 2
Figure 2 Typical in-line transfer point [6] 4
Figure 3 90deg transfer point [7J 4
Fig ure 4 Material lump sizes through a crushing plant 6
Figure 5 Stacker Reclaimer in reclaiming mode 7
Figure 6 Typical dead box [11J9
Figure 7 Typical cascade chute [11] 9
Figure 8 Typical dynamic chute [12] 10
Figure 9 Radial door used in chutes under ore passes or silos [11] 1 0
Figure 10 Flopper gate diverting material to different receiving conveyors [11J 11
Figure 11 Ch ute liner degradation 12
Figure 12 Results of continuous belt wear at transfer points 13
Figure 1 Dust from a transfer point onto a stockpie13
Figure 14 Ceramic composite liners [18]15
Figure 15 Benetech Inteliflow J-Glide transfer chute [19] 16
Figure 16 Flow simulation of the Benetech Ineliflo chute [19] 17
Figure 17 Four step process for plant design and commissioning [1] 27
Figure 18 Vertical curve on incline conveyor 28
Figure 19 Protective roller on a transfer chute 29
Figure 20 Geometry of the impact plate and material trajectory [30J30
Figure 21 Model for the impact of a particle on a flat surface [29] 31
Figure 22 Ore flow path in the curved chute onto the incline conveyor [31] 35
Figure 23 Gentle deceleration of the product before impact on the receiving belt
[32] 35
Figure 24 Typical feed chute discharge model [33] 37
Figure 25 Layout of conveyors for chute test work 43
Figure 26 Configuration of the existing transfer chute44
Figure 27 Clear chute indicating camera angle 46
The optimisation of transfer chutes in the bulk materials industry
MN van Aarde
ix
LIST OF FIGURES
Figure 28 Coarse material at 8 000 tlh 46
Figure 29 Fine material at 8 000 tlh 47
Figure 30 Blocked chute with coarse material at 8600 tIh 47
Figure 31 Damaged side skirt 49
Figure 32 View behind the chute of the receiving conveyor before loading 50
Figure 33 View behind the chute of the receiving conveyor during loading 50
Figure 34 Peak surges experienced during reclaiming operations 52
Figure 35 Stockyard head end layout 59
Figure 36 Dimensional constraints on the existing transfer configuration 60
Figure 37 Hood and spoon configuration for the 90deg transfer 63
Figure 38 Hood velocity profile 65
Figure 39 Spoon velocity profile 66
Figure 40 Chute cross section 67
Fig ure 43 Honeycomb wear box positioning 69
Figure 44 Wear box in the hood section 70
Figure 45 Spacing arrangement of honeycomb ribs inside the hood 71
Figure 46 Wear box in the spoon section 72
Figure 47 Liner detail of the spoon honeycomb wear box 73
Figure 41 Spoon in the operational position 74
Figure 42 Spoon in the non operational position 75
Figure 48 Flow analysis examples a) separation and screening b) hoppers
feeders [36J 80
Figure 49 Simulations results from Fluenttrade [4OJ 83
Figure 50 Simulation results from Bulk Flow Analysttrade [41J83
Figure 51 Determination of material properties for an accurate angle of repose88
Figure Actual material flow with coarse Sat 10 000 tIh 89
Figure 53 Material flow pattem through the existing chute 90
Figure 54 Cross sectional side view of material flow through the existing chute91
Figure 55 Material flow through hood at 10 000 tlh 92
Figure 56 Material flow through spoon at 10 000 tlh 93
Figure 57 Determination of the optimum hood location 94
The optimisation of transfer chutes in the bulk materials industry
MN van Aarde
x
OF FIGURES
Figure 58 Material behaviour through hood 96
Figure 59 Material behaviour through spoon 96
The optimisation of transfer chutes in the bulk materials industry
MN van Aarde
xi
LIST OF TABLES
LIST OF TABLES
Table 1 Design Input Reference Requirements [24J 24
Table 2 Iron are grades used for chute test work 45
Table 3 Results from test programme 54
The optimisation of transfer chutes in the bulk materials industry
M N van Aarde
xii
---------------------------------
CV
NOMENCLATURE
NOMENCLATURE
SCADA
CCTV
CEMA
DEM
kPa
mm
MSHA
ms
mt
MW
NIOSH
OSHA
RampD
tlh
3D
Supervisory Control And Data Acquisition
Closed Circuit Television
Conveyor Equipment Manufacturers Association
Conveyor
Discrete Element Method
Kilopascal
Millimetres
Mine Safety and Health Administration
Metres per second
Metric Tons
Megawatt
National Institute for Occupational Safety and Health
Occupational Safety and Health Administration
Radius of curvature
Research and Development
Tons per hour
Three Dimensional
The optimisation of transfer chutes in the bulk materials industry
MN van Aarde
xiii
CHAPTER 1
CHAPTER 1 INTRODUCTION TO TRANSFER CHUTES IN THE BULK
MATERIALS HANDLING INDUSTRY
The optimisation of transfer chutes in the bulk materials industry
MN van Aarde
1
CHAPTER 1
11 INTRODUCTION TO TRANSFER CHUTES
111 Bulk material handling industry
In order to comprehend the utilisation of transfer chutes fully it is imperative to
first understand the industry in which it is used Transfer chutes are most
commonly used in the bulk materials handling industry Bulk materials handling
operations perform a key function in a great number and variety of industries
throughout the world as stated in 1978 by Arnold McLean and Roberts [1 J
The nature of materials handling and scale of industrial operation varies from
industry to industry and country to country These variations are based on the
industrial and economic capacity and requirements of the specific industry or
country Regardless of the variations in industry the relative costs of storing
handling and transporting bulk materials are in the majority of cases very
significant
o
Figure 1 Growth in global crude steel production from 1996 to 2006 [2J
The optimisation of transfer chutes in the bulk materials industry
MN van Aarde
2
CHAPTER 1
The chart from BHP Billiton shown in Figure 1 provides a clear indication of the
actual drivers of global materials demand Figure 1 indicates the percentage
growth in crude steel production from all the major role players between 1996
and 2006 China accounted for 65 of the 494 million tonnes of global steel
production growth between 1996 and 2006 Europe grew by 6 while the other
countries grew by 20 [2]
These figures emphasise that bulk materials handling performs a key function in
the global industry and economy [1] Because of market requirements new
products continuously evolve This is also true for the field of bulk conveying
technologies [3] It can be assumed that the evolution of new technology is due
to the requirement for more efficient and cost effective operation
The case study which will be discussed from Chapter 3 onwards is an iron ore
export facility This facility exports approximately 50 million tonnes per annum
With each hour of down time the financial losses equate to approximately
R750 000 This highlights the fact that handling systems should be designed and
operated with a view to achieving maximum efficiency and reliability
112 Function of transfer chutes
BS2890 (Specification for Troughed Belt Conveyors) gives the definition for
transfer chutes as follows A straight curved or spiral open topped or enclosed
smooth trough by which materials are directed and lowered by gravity [4] For
any belt conveyor system to operate successfully the system requires that [5]
bull the conveyor belt be loaded properly
bull the material transported by the conveyor is discharged properly
The transfer of bulk material can either be from a belt bin hopper feeder or
stockpile and occurs at a transfer point In most cases this transfer point requires
optimisation of transfer chutes in the bulk materials industry
MN van Aarde
3
CHAPTER 1 - ----~--~--------------~--------
a transfer chute [5] In industry the most common use of transfer chutes is for
transferring bulk material from one conveyor belt to another This transfer of
material can be done in any direction as simplistically explained in Figure 2 and
Figure 3
Figure 2 Typical in-line transfer point [6J
Figure 2 shows a basic in-line transfer of material from the end of one conveyor
belt onto the start of another conveyor belt Figure 3 illustrates a more intricate
design where the direction of material transport is changed by an angle of 90 0 bull
This design or any other design entailing a directional change in flow normally
requires more detailed engineering [7
The optimisation of transfer chutes in the bulk materials industry
MN van Aarde
4
CHAPTER 1
Regardless of the direction or type of transfer there are some design
requirements that always need special attention Some of these requirements
are reduced wear on chute liners correct discharge velocity minimum material
degradation and minimum belt abrasion The correct design will also eliminate
blockages shape the load correctly and minimise the creation of dust [7]
12 VARIOUS APPLICATIONS AND CONFIGURATIONS OF TRANSFER CHUTES
The application of transfer chutes is central to any operation in the bulk handling
industry Whether it is mining operations storing stacking importing or
exporting of bulk material the transfer of material is always required On the
mining side the challenges involved with materials handling are probably some of
the most extreme
This is due to the great variation in lump sizes that must be catered for At
Sishen iron ore mine seven iron ore products are produced conforming to
different chemical and physical specifications The current mining process at
Sishen entails [8]
bull Removal of topsoil and stockpiling
bull Drilling and blasting of ore
bull Loading of iron ore and transporting to the crushers
bull Crushing and screening into size fractions
bull Beneficiation of all size fractions
bull Stockpiling onto various product beds
The processes with the most intricate and complex chute arrangements are
probably crushing and screening as well as stacking and reclaiming of material
The optimisation of transfer chutes in the bulk materials industry
11 N van Aarde
5
CHAPTER 1
121 Crushing
An excavator or wheeled loader transfers the rock to be crushed into the feed
hopper of the primary crusher The primary crusher breaks the large rock
boulders or run of mine material into smaller grain sizes Some of the bigger
crushers in the industry can crack boulders that are about one cubic meter in
size All the crushed material passes over a screen to separate the different
lump sizes The material that falls through the screen is transferred via a series
of transfer chutes and conveyor belts to the stockpile area [9]
Where the material does not pass through the screen another system of transfer
chutes and conveyor belts transfers this material to a secondary crusher The
material is fed into this crusher via a transfer chute from the discharge of a
conveyor belt All the processed material is then transferred to the stockpile area
via a separate series of transfer chutes and conveyor systems [9] Throughout
this whole process the material lump size changes and with it the transfer chute
requirements
Figure 4 Material lump sizes through a crushing plant
The optimisation of transfer chutes in the bulk materials industry
MN van Aarde
6
CHAPTER 1
Figure 4 shows some spillage from a conveyor between a primary and secondary
crusher The shovel in the picture provides a good reference as to the variation
in material lump size on the walkway
122 Stacking and Recaiming
Normally the stockyard area has an elongated yard conveyor for moving bulk
material in the longitudinal direction of the stockyard Straddling the yard
conveyor transversely is the rail mounted undercarriage of the stacker reclaimer
Three main chutes transfer material through the machine [10] Figure 5 shows
this machine in action while reclaiming material from a stockpile
Figure 5 Stacker Reclaimer in reclaiming mode
The first chute will transfer material to the incline conveyor of the machine when
the material has to be stacked on the stockpile In the case where the material
must bypass the machine this chute will transfer material from the tripper back
onto the yard conveyor [10]
The optimisation of transfer chutes in the bulk materials industry
MN van Aarde
7
CHAPTER 1
The second chute transfers material from the incline conveyor onto the boom
conveyor This is normally a difficult process because the boom conveyor is
never in the same direction as the incline conveyor From the end of the boom
conveyor the material is Simply discharged onto the stockpile [10]
When reclaiming stockpile material the bucket whee at the head end of the
boom conveyor scoops up material and deposits it back onto the boom conveyor
From here it is discharged into the centre chute of the machine This chute then
discharges the material onto the yard conveyor for further processing In some
cases the bottom section of this centre chute must be moved out of the way to
allow free passage of material discharged from the tripper chute onto the yard
conveyor [10]
123 Chute configurations
Various chute configurations are used in the bulk materials handling industry
These configurations depend on the specific requirements of the system layout
or material properties There are basically two main configurations consisting of
dead box chutes and dynamic chutes Both of these configurations have their
specific applications in industry The major difference is that dead box chutes
use the material being transferred as a chute liner whereas dynamic chutes are
lined with a high wear resistant material A combination of both can also be
used
If the material being transferred is relatively dry such as goid ore dead boxes
prove to be more beneficial One of the applications of a ded box is to absorb
the direct impact of material discharged from a conveyor into a head chute as
can be seen in Figure 6 Other applications are in long or high transfer points In
these transfers the momentum of falling material must be reduced before
reaching the receiving conveyor belt in order to reduce wear of the belt [11]
The optimisation of transfer chutes in the bulk materials industry
MN van Aarde
8
CHAPTER 1
Figure 6 Typical dead box [11]
As shown in Figure 7 dead boxes are also used to accomplish changes in the
vertical flow direction by inserting angled panels This configuration where dead
boxes are used as deflection plates or impact wear plates is known as a cascade
chute In this case the deflection plate or the impact wear plate hardness is
equal to that of the feed material [11]
Figure 7 Typical cascade chute [11]
The hood and spoon chute or dynamic chute is configured so that the hood
catches and changes the material trajectory path to exit with a vertical velocity
When the material impacts the spoon it slides down the smooth spoon surface
The material flow direction is changed to the direction of the receiving conveyor
as shown in Figure 8 [12]
The optimisation of transfer chutes in the bulk materials industry
MN van Aarde
9
CHAPTER 1
Figure 8 Typical dynamic chute [12J
Ancillary equipment used with this configuration of chutes is radial doors and
flopper gates Radial doors are used successfully below ore passes or silos for
an onoff feed control as shown by Figure 9 One drawback of radial doors is the
possibility of jamming while closing In order to counteract this problem a
knocker arm between the cylinder door and the rod can be added This helps to
close the door with full force open with reduced force or hammered open [11]
Figure 9 Radial door used in chutes under ore passes or silos [11J
The optimisation of transfer chutes in the bulk materials industry
MN van Aarde
10
CHAPTER 1
The function of a f10pper gate is to divert the flow of material in a chute when one
conveyor is required to feed either of two discharge points as shown in Figure 10
For this same purpose a diverter car can also be used where a section of the
chute moves in and out of the path of material flow The critical area in the
design of a flop per gate is the hinge point In order for the gate to be self
cleaning the hinge point should be placed above the apex of the double chute
This also prevents rock traps that can jam the gate [11]
COVERED
Figure 10 Flopper gate diverling material to different receiving conveyors [11J
13 RECURRING CHUTE PROBLEMS AND COUNTERMEASURES FROM INDUSTRY
Transfer chutes are a fundamental link when conveying ore and therefore it is
important to get it right at the outset of design and fabrication Design and
fabrication issues can cause numerous problems when transferring material
Historically conveyor system design focused on the systems overall structural
integrity while ensuring that the equipment would fit within the facilitys
constraints [13] [14] [15]
The optimisation of transfer chutes in the bulk materials industry
MN van Aarde
11
CHAPTER 1
Little attention was given to design analysis or consideration for material flow
characteristics Normally the solution for controlling flow was to implement
simple rock boxes [15] This type of chute configuration is still commonly used in
industry but with more emphasis on the flow of material The most recurrent
problems on transfer chutes are [13] [14]
bull Spillage
bull Blocked chutes
bull High wear on the receiving belt due to major differences between the
material velocity and the belt velocity
bull Rapid chute wear
bull Degradation of the material being transferred
bull Excessive generation of dust and noise
bull Miss tracking of the receiving conveyor belt due to skew loading from the
transfer chute
Figure 11 Chute liner degradation
Figure 11 shows the excessive wear on ceramic tiles where the material
trajectory from the feeding belt impacts the chute These tiles are replaceable
and a maintenance schedule normally specifies the replacement intervals A
The optimisation of transfer chutes in the bulk materials industry 12
MN van Aarde
CHAPTER 1
problem arises when the frequency of these maintenance intervals is too high
due to excessive wear on the liners
Figure 12 Results of continuous belt wear at transfer points
The conveyor belt can account for up to 60 of the capital cost of a bulk
materials handling plant This means that the cost implications of constant
replacement of a conveyor belt due to wear can become significantly higher
than the original capital investment [16] Figure 12 shows the extreme damage
on a conveyor belt caused by abrasion and gouging
Figure 13 Dust from a transfer point onto a stockpile
The optimisation of transfer chutes in the bulk materials industry
MN van Aarde
13
CHAPTER 1 --~ ---------------------------shy
The presence of dust is an indisputable fact in many industries concerned with
the handling or processing of products such as coal mineral ores and many
others [17] As in the case of spillage it is easy to identify transfer systems that
cause dust clouds Environmental regulations are in place to prevent excessive I
dust emissions
Government organisations such as the Occupational Safety and Health
Administration (OSHA) the Mine Safety and Health Administration (MSHA) and
the National Institute for Occupational Safety and Health (NIOSH) closely monitor
dust levels at all coal handling facilities [13] Therefore it is imperative that the
chute design process caters for limiting dust emissions
Systems normally used in industry are enclosed skirting systems bag houses
and dust collectors This however is only treating the symptom rather than
eliminating the primary cause In order to minimise dust generation the use of
low impact angles and minimal chute contact is required (14] One of the most
successful methods of controlling dust is atomised water spray systems using a
combination of high pressure water and chemical substances
Over the years considerable research has gone into minimising wear on transfer
chutes There are currently a few different liner types to choose from depending
on the configuration and application of the chute These include ceramic tiles
chrome carbide overlay materials and typi~al hardened steel plates such as
VRN A combination of liner materials can also be used similar to the one
shown in Figure 14
The opUmisation of transfer chutes in the bulk materials industry
MN van Aarde
14
CHAPTER 1
Figure 14 Ceramic composite liners [18J
This ceramic composite liner is an example of the new technology available in
chute lining materials It is a high wear resistant surface made from cylindrical
alumina ceramic pellets bound within a resilient rubber base The purpose of this
material is to provide wear resistance through the use of ceramics while the
rubber dampens the impact forces [18]
Some innovative concepts for chute design have been implemented since the
materials handling industry started to incorporate new ideas Benetech Inc
installed a new generation hood and spoon type chute at Dominions 1200 MW
Kincaid coal powered generating station as shown in Figure 15 This chute
replaced the conventional dead box chute [19] Their innovation is to use a pipe
configuration combined with the hood and spoon concept
The optimisation of transfer chutes in the bulk materials industry
MN van Aarde
15
CHAPTER 1
Figure 15 Benetech Inteliflow J-Gide transfer chute [19J
This chute has sufficient chute wall slope and cross sectional area to prevent
material build-up and blocked chutes Reduced collision forces in the chute
minimize material degradation and the creation of excessive dust The material
velocity in the chute is controlled by the wall angles to obtain a discharge velocity
with the same horizontal component as the belt velocity [19] Figure 16 shows a
flow simulation of the Benetech concept The simulation shows that this concept
will result in lower impact forces and reduce belt abrasion
The optimisation of transfer chutes in the bulk materials industry
MN van Aarde
16
CHAPTER 1
Figure 16 Flow simulation ofthe Benetech Ineliflo chute [19J
CBP Engineering Corp also considers the concept of pipe type sections to be
the answer to most of the transfer chute problems They describe it as a curved
or half round chute The modern perception is to gently guide the material in the
required direction rather than use a square box design or deflector doors which
turns or deflects the flow [20]
The industry is striving towards developing new technology in transfer chute
design One solution is to incorporate soft loading transfer chutes to alter the
material flow direction with minimum impact on the side walls of chute and
receiving conveyor As experienced by many industries these types of chutes
can transfer material onto the receiving conveyor at almost the same velocity as
the conveyor By doing so many of the problems with material transfer can be
eliminated [13]
Most of these solutions as proposed by industry only address a few of the
numerous problems experienced with transfer chutes The dynamic hood and
The optimisation of transfer chutes in the bulk materials industry
MN van Aarde
17
CHAPTER 1
spoon chute appears to afford the best opportunity for solving most of the
problems There are still however many unanswered questions surrounding this
design
Figure 11 shows the installation of a hood type chute in the iron ore industry It is
clear from this image that liner wear in the higher impact areas is still an area of
concern Improvements can still be made to this design in order to further
enhance its performance
14 PURPOSE OF THIS RESEARCH
The bulk materials handling industry is constantly facing the challenge of
implementing transfer chutes that satisfy all the system requirements Problems
such as high wear spillage blockages and the control of material flow are just
some of the major challenges faced by the industry
The objective of this research is to identify problems experienced with transfer
chutes of an existing bulk handling system and to apply current design solutions
in eliminating these problems In doing so the research aims to introduce a new
method of minimising liner wear caused by high impact velocities
Dynamic chutes are discussed in particular where the entire design process
addresses the problems identified on chutes in brown field projects Approaching
chute design from a maintenance point of view with the focus on reducing liner I
degradation will provide a fresh approach to transfer chute design The
concepts disc~ssed in this dissertation (dynamic and dead box chutes) are
commonly used in industry However some research is done to determine
whether a combination of these concepts can solve some of the problems
experienced by industry
The optimisation of transfer chutes in the bulk materials industry 18
MN van Aarde
CHAPTER 1
At the hand of all the information provided in this dissertation its purpose is to
enable the chute designers to better understand the process of chute
optimisation and design This is achieved through the discussion of a case study
where the chutes are evaluated and re-designed to achieve the desired
performance
15 SYNOPSIS OF THIS DISSERTATION
Chapter 1 gives an introduction to the bulk materials industry and the role that
transfer chutes plays in this industry Some of the problems that the industries
have been experiencing with transfer chutes were identified and the diverse
solutions to these problems discussed These solutions were reviewed to
identify whether improvement would be possible
Chapter 2 provides a better understanding of the functionality and the
conceptualisation of transfer chutes as well as investigating the theory behind
material flow through transfer chutes This theory reviews the research and
design objectives used as a guideline when approaching a new chute
configuration The guidelines for evaluating and designing transfer chutes are
used to verify the performance of these chutes in the iron ore industry
Chapter 3 identifies some practical problems experienced on transfer chutes a~
an existing bulk transfer facility These problems are identified through a series
of tests where the actual flow inside the chutes is monitored via CCTV cameras
The results obtained from these tests are specific to this facility but can provide
insight into the cause of some problems generally experienced in the industry
These results can provide helpful information when modifying or re-designing
new transfer chutes
Chapter 4 uses the theory discussed in Chapter 2 to conceptualise a new
transfer chute configuration for the transfer points that were tested All the facility
The optimisation of transfer chutes in the bulk materials industry 19
MN van Aarde
CHAPTER 1
constraints are taken into account during the process in order to obtain an
optimum solution to the problems identified during the chute test work The old
chutes did not have major problems with liner wear due to large dead boxes
However this remains a serious consideration for the new dynamic chute design
due to its configuration where there is continuous sliding abrasion of the chute
surface A new concept for the reduction of liner degradation is introduced in this
chapter
Before manufacturing and installing this new concept it is important to verify that
it will perform according to conceptual design Chapter 5 is a discussion on the
use of the Discrete Element Method as a verification tool A simulation of the
new transfer chute concept is done to visualise the behaviour of the material as it
passes through the new transfer chute configuration
Chapter 6 discusses the benefits of the new transfer chute configuration A
conclusion is made as to what the financial implications will be with the
implementation of this new concept Recommendations are made for future
studies in the field of bulk materials handling These recommendations focus on
the optimisation of processes and the reduction of maintenance cost to the
facility
The optimisation of transfer chutes in the bulk materials industry
MN van Aarde
20
CHAPTER 2
CHAPTER 2 BASIC CONSIDERATIONS IN CHUTE DESIGN
The optimisation of transfer chutes in the bulk materials industry
MN van Aarde
21
CHAPTER 2
21 PREFACE
In an economic driven world the pressure for production is often the cause of the
loss of production This is a bold statement and is more factual than what the
industry would like to admit This is also valid in the bulk materials handling
industry Production targets seldom allow time for investigation into the root
cause of the problems The quick fix option is often adopted but is frequently the
cause of even more maintenance stoppages
Existing chutes on brown field projects often fail due to an initial disregard for the
design criteria changes in the system parameters or lack of maintenance
These transfer points are often repaired on site by adding or removing platework
and ignoring the secondary functions of a transfer chute Therefore it is
imperative to always consider the basic chute specifications when addressing a
material transfer problem [21]
22 DESIGN OBJECTIVES
In the quest to improve or design any transfer point some ground rules must be
set This can be seen as a check list when evaluating an existing chute or
designing a new chute Transfer chutes should aim to meet the following
requirements as far as possible [21] [22] [23]
bull Ensure that the required capacity can be obtained with no risk of blockage
bull Eliminate spillage
bull Minimise wear on all components and provide the optimal value life cycle
solution
bull Minimise degradation of material and generation of excessive dust
bull Accommodate and transfer primary and secondary scraper dribblings onto
the receiving conveyor
The optimisation of transfer chutes in the bulk materials industry
MN van Aarde
22
CHAPTER 2
bull Ensure that any differences between the flow of fine and coarse grades are
catered for
bull Transfer material onto the receiving conveyor so that at the feed point onto
the conveyor
bull the component of the material now (parallel to the receiving conveydr) is as
close as possible to the belt velocity (at least within 10) to minimise the
power required to accelerate the material and to minimise abrasive wear of
the belt
bull the vertical velocity component of the material flow is as low as possible so
as to minimise wear and damage to the belt as well as to minimise spillage
due to material bouncing off the belt
bull The flow is centralised on the belt and the lateral flow is minimised so as
not to affect belt tracking and avoid spillage
With the design of a new chute there are up to 46 different design inputs with 19
of these being absolutely critical to the success of the design Some of the most
critical preliminary design considerations are shown in Table 1 [24]
The optimisation of transfer chutes in the bulk materials industry
MN van Aarde
23
CHAPTER 2
Table 1 Design Input Reference Requirements [24J
Aria Unit
Feed Conveyor
Belt Speed r ms
Belt Width mm
JibHead Pulley Dia mm
Pulley Width mm
Angle to Horizontal at the Head Pulley degrees
Belt Troughing Angle degrees
Sight Height Data
Feed Conveyor Top of Belt to Roof mm
Drop Height mm
Receiving Conveyor Top of Belt to Floor mm
Receiving Conveyor
Belt Speed ms
Belt Width mm
Belt Thickness mm
Angle of Intersection degrees
Angle to Horizontal degrees
Belt Troughing Angle degrees
Material Properties
Max Oversize Lump (on top) mm
Max Oversize Lump (on top) degrees
studies done by Jenike and Johanson Inc have identified six design principles
that can serve as a guideline in chute optimisation exercises These six
principles focus on the accelerated flow in the chute which they identified as the
most critical mode [25]
Within accelerated flow the six problem areas identified by Jenike and Johanson
Inc are [25]
The optimisation of transfer chufes in the bulk materials industry
MN van Aarde
24
CHAPTER 2
bull plugging of chutes at the impact points
bull insufficient cross sectional area
bull uncontrolled flow of material
bull excessive wear on chute surfaces
bull excessive generation of dust
bull attrition or breakdown of particles
221 Plugging of chutes
In order to prevent plugging inside the chute the sliding surface inside the chute
must be sufficiently smooth to allow the material to slide and to clean off the most
frictional bulk solid that it handles This philosophy is particularly important
where the material irnpacts on a sliding surface Where material is prone to stick
to a surface the sliding angle increases proportionally to the force with which it
impacts the sliding surface In order to minimise material velocities and excessive
wear the sliding surface angle should not be steeper than required [25]
222 Insufficient cross sectional area
The cross section of the stream of material inside the chute is a function of the
velocity of flow Therefore it is critical to be able to calculate the velocity of the
stream of material particles at any point in the chute From industry experience a
good rule of thumb is that the cross section of the chute should have at least two
thirds of its cross section open at the lowest material velocity [25] When the
materialis at its lowest velocity it takes up a larger cross section of chute than at
higher velocities Therefore this cross section is used as a reference
223 Uncontrolled flow of material
Due to free falling material with high velocities excessive wear on chutes and
conveyor belt surfaces are inevitable Therefore it is more advantageous to
The optimisation of transfer chutes in the bulk materials industry
MN van Aarde
25
CHAPTER 2
have the particles impact the hood as soon as possible with a small impact
angle after discharge from the conveyor With the material flowing against the
sloped chute walls instead of free falling the material velocity can be controlled
more carefully through the chute [25]
224 Excessive wear on chute surfaces
Free flowing abrasive materials do not normally present a large wear problem
The easiest solution to this problem is to introduce rock boxes to facilitate
material on material flow Chute surfaces that are subjected to fast flowing
sticky and abrasive materials are the most difficult to design
A solution to this problem is to keep the impact pressure on the chute surface as
low as possible This is done by designing the chute profile to follow the material
trajectory path as closely as possible By doing so the material is less prone to
stick to the chute surface and the material velocity will keep the chute surface
clean [25]
225 Excessive generation of dust
Material flowing inside a transfer chute causes turbulence in the air and
excessive dust is created In order to minimise the amount of dust the stream of
material must be kept in contact with the chute surface as far as possible The
material stream must be compact and all impact angles against the chute walls
must be minimised A compact stream of material means that the material
particles are flowing tightly together At the chute discharge point the material
velocity must be as close as possible to the velocity of the receiving belt [25]
The optimisation of transfer in the bulk materials industry
M N van Aarde
26
CHAPTER 2
226 Attrition or breakdown of particles
The break up of particles is more likely to occur when large impact forces are
experienced inside a chute than on smooth sliding surfaces Therefore in most
cases the attrition of material particles can be minimised by considering the
following guidelines when designing a transfer chute minimise the material
impact angles concentrate the stream of material keep the material stream in
contact with the chute surface and keep the material velocity constant as far as
possible [25]
23 INTEGRATING A MORE APPROPRIATE CHUTE LAYOUT WITH THE PLANT
CONSTRAINTS
According to Tunra Bulk Solids in Australia the process for design and
commissioning of a new plant basically consists of four steps The entire
process is based on understanding the properties of the material to be
handled [1]
RampD CENTRE CONSULTING CONTRACTOR ENGINEERING AND PLANT
COMPANY OPERATOR r-------------- I TESTING Of CONCEPTUAl I DETAILED DESIGN CONSTRUCTION amp
I BULKSOUDS - DESIGN COMMISSIONING- I shyI Flow Proper1ies Lining Material tuet Equipment
Selection Procurement _ I I
I I
I Flow Pat1erns SSlpment Quality Control I
I IFeeder Loads amp Process Performance
I Power I Optimisation Assessment I I
L J -
I IBin Loads I I I Wear Predictions I
FEEDBACK I I I IModel Studigt L _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ J
i ~ FEEDBACK r-shyFigure 17 Four step process for plant design and commissioning [1J
The optimisation of transfer chutes in the bulk materials industry
MN van Aarde
27
CHAPTER 2
Figure 17 illustrates this four step process These steps are a good guideline in
order to incorporate a more appropriate chute layout for the plant constraints
This is an iterative process where all the possible solutions to a problem are
measured against all the possible plant constraints This section focuses more
on the second column of Figure 17 and specifically on structures and equipment
During this stage of design the utilisation of 3D parametric modelling also creates
an intimate and very accurate communication between the designer and the
project engineer or client This effective communication tool will save time and
improve the engineering process [24]
A good example of obtaining an appropriate chute layout for the plant constraints
can be explained as follows On an existing plant a transfer point will have a
specific transfer height from the top of the feed conveyor to the top of the
receiving conveyor If the feed conveyor has an incline section to obtain the
required transfer height it will also have a curve in the vertical plane of that
incline section This curve has a certain minimum radius in order to keep the belt
on the idlers at high belt tensions [26]
Figure 18 Vertical curve on incline conveyor
The optimisation of transfer chutes in the bulk materials industry
MN van Aarde
28
CHAPTER 2
If the transfer height at a transfer point is changed the path of the feeding
conveyor should always be taken into consideration With an increase in transfer
height the vertical curve radius will increase as well in order to prevent the
conveyor from lifting off the idlers in the curve This will require expensive
modifications to conveyor structures and therefore in most cases be a pointless
exercise Figure 18 shows clearly the large radius required to obtain a vertical
curve in a belt conveyor
Other considerations on brown field projects might be lift off of the receiving
conveyor at start up before or after the vertical curve This is caused by peaks
in belt tension at start up which may cause the belt to lift off the idlers and chafe
against the chute In some cases this can be solved by fitting a roller as shown
in Figure 19 to the underside of the chute to protect it from being damaged by
the belt or to protect the belt from being damaged by the chute The position of
this specific chute is just after a vertical curve where the belt tends to lift off at
start up
Figure 19 Protective roller on a transfer chute
The optimisation of transfer chutes in the bulk materials industry
MN van Aarde
29
CHAPTER 2
24 INVESTIGATING THE CORRECT CHUTE PROFILE FOR REDUCED LINER WEAR
In order to reduce chute wear the curved-profile variable chute concept is
introduced [27] This concept was originally developed by Professor Roberts for
the grain industry in 1969 [28] After many years of research and investigation
CMR Engineers and Project managers (pty) Ltd came to the following
conclusion any improvement in coal degradation dust generation and chute
wear can only be achieved by avoiding high impact forces or reducing them as
much as possible [27]
At any impact point of material in a chute or conveyor kinetic energy is
dissipated This increases material degradation and wear on liners and conveyor
belt covers Therefore it is good practise to redirect the kinetic energy in a
useful manner This action will help to reduce liner and belt wear [32]
x
Vo
- ImpactPlate
Figure 20 Geometry of the impact plate and material trajectory [30J
The optimisation of transfer chutes n the bulk materials industry
MN van Aarde
30
CHAPTER 2
The path followed by the material discharged over the end pulley of a belt
conveyor is known as its trajectory and is a function of the discharge velocity of
the material from the conveyor [29] Figure 20 shows the material trajectory as
weI as the radius and location of the impact plate In the case of dynamic chutes
this impact plate represents the back plate of the chute
The correct chute profile to reduce wear must cater for the proper location of the
chute covers and wearing plates This location depends upon the path of the
trajectory which must be predicted as accurately as possible
Figure 21 Mode for the impact of a particle on a flat surface [29]
Figure 21 illustrates a material particle impinging on a flat chute surface at an
angle of approach 91 and with approach velocity V1 This particle will then
rebound off the chute plate at an angel 92 and velocity V2 The wear on the
chute liners or the surface shown in Figure 21 will be a function of the vector
change in momentum of the particle One component will be normal to and the
other component parallel to the flat surface The parallel component is referred
to as the scouring component along the surface [29]
It is important to determine the radius of curvature of material within the
trajectory It is now a simple exercise to determine the chute hood radius
depending on plant constraints Firstly the material trajectory must be calculated
The optimisation of transfer chutes in the bulk materials industry
MN van Aarde
31
CHAPTER 2 ---~----------------
According to the mechanical handling engineers association in Perth Australia it
is beneficial to keep the impact angle as small as possible Impact angle less
than 20deg are recommended for most liner materials This will ensure an
acceptably small impulse force component normal to the surface The r~te at
which the material is gouging away the chute liner at the impact point will be
reduced [29]
The material trajectory is determined by equation l
(1)
Where the origin of the x and y axis is taken at the mean material height h and
the discharge point on the pulley as shown in Figure 20 The variables involved
in the calculation of the material trajectory are [30]
y =vertical position on the grid where the trajectory is determined
x = position parallel to the receiving belt line where the trajectory is determined
v = material speed
g =gravitational constant
a =inclination angle of the feeding conveyor
After the material leaves the belt a simplified assumption can be made that it
falls under gravity It is quite clear that in order to minimise the impact angle
the impact plate must follow the path of the material trajectory as far as possible
It will almost never be possible to obtain a contact point between the material and
the chute where there is a smooth contact with no impact angle
This radius of curvature of the material tr~jectory is determined as follows [30
The optimisation of transfer chutes in the bulk materials industry i 32
MN van Aarde
CHAPTER 2
[1 + ( gx )]15 R = vcos8
c (2)
vcos8
Where
g == gravitational constant
v == material speed
8 == Angle at discharge
In order to simplify the manufacturing process of a curved chute the radius must
be constant For a relatively smooth contact between the material and the chute
plate the radius of the curved chute at the point of contact is as close as
possible to the material discharge curvature radius [30] This is rarely possible
on brown field projects due to facility constraints In this case there will be higher
probability for rapid liner wear Each situation must be individually assessed to
determine the best solution
Cross sectional dimensions of the transfer chute must be sufficient to collect the
material and ensure continuous flow without causing blockages At the same
time the chute profile must not result in excessive material speed Material
speed inside the chute will be considered to be excessive when it can not be
controlled to exit the chute at approximately the same velocity to that of the
receiving conveyor Chutes may block for the following reasons [29]
bull Mechanical bridging due to large lumps locking into one another
bull Insufficient cross section causing cohesive material to choke or bridge
bull Inadequate chute inclination causing fines build-up
bull Corner effects or cohesion causing material to stick to the chute walls
The optimisation of transfer chutes in the bulk materials industry
MN van Aarde
33
CHAPTER 2
For the handling of large lumps of material field experience has shown that the
chute cross sectional area should be 25 times the major dimension of the largest
lumps To avoid possible bridging of the material in the chute the
recommendation is to make the inner chute volume as large as possible This
will be guided by the support steelwork around the transfer point [29]
Field experience has shown that it is advisable depending on the material being
transferred that the chute inclination angles be no less than 65deg to 700 Cornerbull
effects should also be avoided where material gets stuck in the inner corners of
chute plate work These angles should preferably be no less than 70 0 bull
25 FEED CHUTE GEOMETRY FOR REDUCED BELT WEAR
The design parameters to reduce both chute and belt wear are interrelated
Research done at the Phalaborwa copper mine is a good case study to prove the
concept of a curved chute profile This mine had specific problems with high belt
wear at transfer points At this facility an in-pit 60 x 89 gyratory crusher and
incline tunnel conveyor was commissioned to haul primary crushed ore A
conventional dead box chute transfers ore from the crusher to a 1800 mm wide
incline conveyor [31]
The maximum lump size handled by this section of the facility is 600 mm (60 kg)
An 18 mm thick top cover was specified for this conveyor with an X grade
rubber according to DIN (abrasion value lt 100 mm) This belt had an original
warranty of 10 years After 35 years the top cover started to show signs of
excessive wear and the tensile cords of the 18 mm thick cover were visible [31]
In April 1994 Phalaborwa commissioned the curved chute concept and a new
belt on the incline conveyor Six months after commissioning no gouging or
pitting damage was evident The material velocity through this curved chute onto
the incline conveyor is shown in Figure 22 [31]
The optimisation of transfer chutes in the bulk materials industry
MN van Aarde
34
CHAPTER 2
VELOCITY ( m I aec ) _ nm _ bull m _ 1211 _ UTI _ U16
_ IIU _ Im _ I rn _ 171-111 _ u n _ ~ l
_ 4 ~
_ 41 _ 4
141 CJ UtiI 1bull-bull 1t5
~ 1m bull UI2
Material Flow Velocity Gradient
Figure 22 Ore flow path in the curved chute onto the incline conveyor [31]
TENDENCY TO FORM STAGNANT LAYER LEADING
TO INSTABILITY IN DEPTH OF FLOW
C8middotFLOW IN CURVED CHUTES
Figure 23 Gentle deceleration of the product before impact on the receiving belt [32]
The optimisation of transfer chutes in the bulk materials industry
MN van Aarde
35
CHAPTER 2
Figure 23 illustrates the gentle deceleration of material that is achieved with the
curved chute concept This helps to reduce belt wear because it is relatively
easy to discharge the material at the same velocity as the receiving conveyor
The material speed v can be calculated at any point in the chute using equation
3 and equation 4 [33]
v 2~R [(2ue2 -l)sin(O) +3ue cos(O)] + Ke 2uB (3) 4ue +1
This equation is only applicable if the curved section of the chute has a constant
radius Rand I-Ie is assumed constant at an average value for the stream [33]
I-Ie = friction coefficient
8 = angle between the horizontal and the section of the spoon where the velocity
is determined and
(4)
The optimisation of transfer chutes in the bulk materjas industry
MN van Aarde
36
CHAPTER 2
Mass Flow Rate Omh
Figure 24 Typical feed chute discharge model [33J
The velocity Ve at the discharge of the chute can be determined from equation 3
and equation 4 The components Vey and Vex of the discharge velocity as
shown in Figure 24 can now be calculated This investigation should aid the
optimisation of the chute profile in order to [33]
bull match the horisontal component Vex of the material exit velocity as close
as possible to the belt speed
bull reduce the vertical component Vey of the material exit velocity in order to
minimize abrasive wear on the receiving conveyor
26 CONCLUSION
This section discussed the technical background necessary for the optimisation
of transfer chutes on an existing iron ore plant which will be discussed in
Chapter 4 The focus is specifically aimed at reducing impact wear on chute liner
materials and abrasive wear on receiving conveyor belts Important to note from
The optimisation oftransfer chutes in the bulk materials industry
MN van Aarde
37
CHAPTER 2
this section is the acceptable limits of dynamic chute optimisation or design
These limits aremiddot
bull a material impact angle of less than 20deg
bull a variance of less than 10 between the receiving belt velocity and the
material discharge velocity component parallel to the receiving conveyor
An important aspect of chute optimisation is to consider the facility constraints
These constraints are in some cases flexible but in most cases the chute
optimisation process must be designed within these constraints This means that
any new concept will have to be measured against what is possible within the
facility limits
It is important to note that only the most common transfer chute problems were
mentioned in this chapter Other possible problems were not addressed in this
chapter as it is normally related to detail design issues Solutions to these
problems are unique to each type of chute and will be addressed for the specific
case study in Chapter 4
The optimisafjon of transfer chutes in the bulk materials industry
MN van Aarde
38
CHAPTER 3
The optimisation of transfer chutes in the bulk materials industry
MN van Aarde
CHAPTER 3 TESTS FOR THE IDENTIFICATION OF RECURRING
PROBLEMS ON EXISTING CHUTES
39
CHAPTER 3
31 PREFACE
Since the completion of a certain iron ore handling facility it has been
experiencing recurring material transfer problems at high capacities In order to
investigate the problem it was decided that performance testing of the chutes
should be carried out The purpose of these tests was to monitor chute
performance at transfer rates of up to the design capacity of 10 000 tlh for
various grades of iron ore handled by the facility Some of the methodologies
used in testing are only applicable to this specific facility
Due to variations and surges associated with the reclaim operations at the
facility performance testing focused on reclaim side chutes This means that all
the transfer points at the exit points of the stockyard conveyors were tested
Nineteen tests were conducted on various stockyard transfers Information such
as the specific facility or conveyor numbers cannot be disclosed due to the
confidentiality of information
To analyse SCADA data the stacker reclaimer scale is used to determine the
peak surges passing through the transfer under investigation The reason for
this is that the peaks in flow due to reclaiming operations flatten out when
passing through the transfer points This is due to chute throat limitations and
small variations in belt speeds If the down stream scales are used it would give
an inaccurate indication of the amount of ore that passed through the transfer
chute
32 TEST METHODOLOGY
A CCTV camera was installed in a strategic position inside the head chute of the
stockyard conveyors These cameras provided valuable information on the
physical behaviour of the material flow inside the transfer chutes Where
possible cameras were also placed on the receiving belt in front of and behind
The optimisation of transfer chutes in the bulk materials industry
MN van Aarde
40
CHAPTER 3
the chute This was done to monitor belt tracking and spillage A high frequency
radio link between the head chute and the control tower made it possible to
monitor the cameras at all times
SCADA data was used to determine and establish the condition of the material
transfer at the time of the test Data from various scales en route were obtained
as well as confirmation of blocked chute signals In analysing the SCADA data
the stacker reclaimer scale is used to determine the peak surges passing through
the transfer being tested
Data was recorded from a sampling plant at the facility This data provides the
actual characteristics of representative samples taken and analysed by the
sampling plant during the duration of the test The data gathered consist of
moisture content of the material sample as well as the size distribution of the ore
Where possible an inspector was placed at the transfer point being tested to
observe and record the performance The inspector had a two way radio for
communication with the test co-ordinator in the central control room He would
also be responsible for the monitoring of any spillage dust emissions etc that
may not be picked up by the cameras
Prior to commencing a test on a specific conveyor route the following checks
had to be performed on all the material conveying equipment
bull Clean out all transfer chutes and remove any material build-up from the
sidewalls
bull Check that feed skirts are properly in position on the belt
bull Check that the conveyor belt is tracking properly at no load
bull Check conveyor idlers are all in position and free to rotate
bull Check blocked chute detectors are operational and in the correct location
The optimisation of transfer chutes in the bulk materials industry
MN van Aarde
CHAPTER 3
bull Change the position of the blocked chute detector if required to improve its
fUnction
bull Test and confirm that the CCTV middotsystems are functioning correctly
bull Assign persons with 2 way radios and cameras to monitor and record the I
results at each transfer point on the route
33 CHUTE PERFORMANCE ACCEPTANCE CRITERIA
A material transfer chute performs to specification if it transfers a maximum of
10 000 tlh of a specific iron are grade without experiencing any of the following
problems
bull Material build up inside the chute or blocking the chute ie material is not
exiting the chute at the same rate as it is entering
bull Material spillage encountered from the top of the transfer chute
bull Material spillage encountered where material is loaded onto the receiving
conveyor
bull Belt tracking of the receiving conveyor is significantly displaced by the
loading of material from the transfer chute onto the conveyor
Tests were conducted over a period of one month and in such a short period
visible wear is difficult to quantify Due to the sensitivity of the information no
historical data in terms of chute or belt wear were made available by the facility
Therefore it is not part of the criteria for these specific tests Should a chute
however fail to perform according to the set criteria it validates the need for
modifications or new designs
34 DISCUSSION OF PROBLEM AREAS
The major concern during the test work is material flow at the transfer points
Secondary concerns are spillage tracking of the receiving belt and material
The optimisation of transfer chutes in the bulk materials industry
MN van Aarde
42
CHAPTER 3
loading onto the receiving belt One of the external factors that playa significant
role in material flow rate is the method and process of reclaiming This section
will highlight all the problem areas observed during the test work
Figure 25 shows the layout of the stockyard area This layout will serve as a
reference when the specific test results at each transfer point are discussed The
legends for Figure 25 are as follows
c=gt Transfer points where performance tests have been done
~ Direction that the conveyors are moving in
CV4 CV3 CV2 CV1
Figure 25 Layout of conveyors for chute test work
All four stockyard conveyors have a moving head arrangement This means that
the chutes are split up into two sections A moving head discharges material
onto either conveyor (CV) 5 or CV 6 via a static transfer chute The moving
head positions are shown by A Band C in Figure 25
The optimisation of transfer chutes in the bulk materials industry
MN van Aarde
43
CHAPTER 3
Position C is the purging or dump position This position is used when the
stacker reclaimer is in stacking mode and any material left on the stockyard
conveyor gets dumped The material does not end up on the stockpiles
preventing contamination
90 de-g TRANSFBt
OfAO BOX IN MOVING HEAD
Figure 26 Configuration of the existing transfer chute
Figure 26 shows the configuration of the existing transfer chutes These chutes
capture the trajectory from the head pulley in a dead box situated in the top part
of the chute The material then cascades down a series of smaller dead boxes
onto the receiving conveyor below
Various grades of iron ore were tested during the testing period These different
grades of iron ore are shown in Table 2 Three fine grades and four coarse
grades were used The coarse material is defined as particles with a diameter of
The optimisation of transfer chutes in the bulk materials industry
MN van Aarde
44
CHAPTER 3
between 12 mm and 34 mm and the fine material with diameters of between
4 mm and 12 mm
Table 2 Iron are grades used for chute test work
Material Predominant Lump Size
Fine K 5mm
Fine N 8mm
Fine A 8mm
Coarse K 25mm
Coarse D 34mm
Coarse S 12 mm
Coarse A 20mm
The CCTV cameras were placed inside the moving head pointing down into the
static chute overlooking the receiving conveyor Figure 27 shows the camera
angle used during testing This is a view of a clear chute before testing The
legends for clarification of all the video images are as follows
Front of the chute throat opening
Top of flowing material at the chute throat opening
Flow pattern of the material
Direction of the receiving belt
The optimisation of transfer chutes in the bulk materials industry
MN van Aarde
45
CHAPTER 3
Figure 27 Clear chute indicating camera angle
341 Coarse Material vs Fine Material
Differences in transfer rates between coarse material and fine material are
evident from the data gathered during the test programme These results are
discussed later in this chapter The area between the yellow arrows and the red
line is the amount of freeboard available Freeboard is the open space available
between the top of the flowing stream of material and the chute plate work
Figure 28 and Figure 29 shows the flow of coarse ore and fine ore respectively in
the same chute at 8 000 tlh
Figure 28 Coarse material at 8 000 tlh
The optimisation of transfer chutes in the bulk materials industry
MN van Aarde
46
CHAPTER 3
Figure 29 Fine material at 8 000 tlh
The amount of freeboard with fine material is much larger than with coarse
material It is therefore obvious that coarse material is more likely to block a
chute when peak surges occur This is due to particles that interlock in the small
discharge opening of the chute
Figure 30 Blocked chute with coarse material at 8 600 tIh
Figure 30 is a snap shot of a chute blocked with coarse ore due to the material
interlocking at the discharge opening The time from material free flowing to a
blocked chute signal was approximately 10 seconds This is determined by
comparing the CCTV camera time to the blocked signal time on the SCADA
The optimisation of transfer chutes in the bulk materials industry
MN van Aarde
47
CHAPTER 3
The high clay content in finer material can also cause problems in the long run
When wet Anes are fed through the chutes a thin layer of Anes builds up and
sticks to the sides of the chute As this layer dries out it forms a new chute liner i
and the next layer builds up This process occurs gradually and will eventually
cause the chute to block
342 Cross Sectional Area
Video images of a blocked chute on the receiving belts were analysed to
determine whether the blockage was caused by material build up on the belt
underneath the chute This indicated that with the occurrence of a blocked chute
the material keeps flowing out of the chute at a constant rate without build up
From this the assumption can be made that in the case of a blocked chute the
material enters the chute at a higher rate than it is discharged at the bottom
Therefore the conclusion can be made that the chute cross sectional area at the
discharge is insufficient to handle the volume of ore at high throughput rates
Tests with a certain type of coarse material yielded a very low flow rate requiring
adjustment to the chute choke plate on the transfer between CV 3 and CV 5
The chute choke plate is basically a sliding door at the bottom of the chute to
adjust the discharge flow of material Tests with another type of coarse material
shown in the summary of test results indicates how the choke plate adjustment
can increase the throughput of material in the chute
Data of all the different types of ore at the facility are obtained at the sampling
building This data shows that the material size distribution for the two types of
coarse material used in the tests mentioned above are the same This indicates
that the test results with the second coarse material are an accurate reflection of
what will be experienced with the first type of coarse material Special care
The optimisation of transfer chutes in the bulk materials industry
MN van Aarde
48
CHAPTER 3
should be taken when adjusting the choke plate to make sure that skew loading
is not induced by the modification
343 Spillag3
During one of the first tests on the transfer between CV 2 and CV 6 spillage
was observed at one of the side skirts on the receiving belt A piece of the side
skirt had been damaged and pushed off the belt as shown by Figure 31 This
caused some of the material to be pushed off the belt when skew loading from
the chute caused the belt to miss track In this case spillage was not caused by
the skirt but by skew loading from the chute onto the receiving conveyor
Figure 31 Damaged side skirt
A greater concern is spillage on the moving head chute of CV 3 and CV 4
loading onto CV 6 It appears as if the head chute creeps during material
transfer onto CV 6 As the chute creeps the horizontal gap between the
moving head chute and the transfer chute reaches approximately 180 mm
Facility operations proposed a temporary solution by moving the head chute to
the dumping or purging position and back to CV 5 before stopping over CV 6
The reason for this creep could be attributed to slack in the moving head winch
cable
The optimisation of transfer chutes in the bulk materials industry
MN van Aarde
49
CHAPTER 3
345 Belt Tracking and Material Loading
The only belt tracking and material loading problems observed occurred on the
transfer between CV 2 and CV 5 I CV 6 A diverter plate was installed at the
bottom of the chute in order to force material flow onto the centre of the receiving conveyor belt This plate now causes material to fall to the left of the receiving
belt causing the belt to track to the right
Figure 32 View behind the chute of the receiving conveyor before loading
Figure 32 shows the view from a CCTV camera placed over the receiving
conveyor behind the chute Note the amount of the idler roller that is visible
before loading
Figure 33 View behind the chute of the receiving conveyor during loading
The optimisation of transfer chutes in the bulk materials industry
MN van Aarde
50
CHAPTER 3
Figure 33 shows the view from a CCTV camera placed over the receiving
conveyor behind the chute during loading Note the difference between the
amount of the idler roller that is visible between Figure 33 and Figure 32 This is
a clear indication of off centre belt tracking due to skew loading I
At the same transfer point it appears as if the configuration of the chute causes
the material to be dropped directly onto the receiving belt from the dead box in
the moving head This will cause high impact wear on the belt in the long run
High maintenance frequencies will be required on the impact rollers underneath
the chute and the roller bearings will have to be replaced frequently
346 Reclaiming Operations
Reclaim operations are done from the stacker reclaimer that scoops up the
material with a bucket wheel from the stockpile The machine starts at the top
bench of the stockpile and reclaims sideways until it is through the stockpile
This sideways movement is repeated while the machine moves down the
stockpile If the machine digs too deep into the stockpile small avalanches can
occur that over fill the buckets This causes peak surges in the flow on the
conveyor system
With an increase in the peak digging or reclaim rate as requested for test work it
seemed that the peak surges increased as well In normal reclaiming operations
(average reclaim rate of 6 000 tlh to 7000 tlh) the peaks in reclaim surges do not
usually exceed 1 000 tlh This is however dependent on the level of the
stockpile from where the machine is reclaiming
At a peak digging or reclaim rate of 8 000 tlh peak surges of up to 2 000 tlh were
observed as can be seen from Figure 34 All stacker reclaimers are operated
manually and the depth of the bucket wheel is determined by monitoring the
The optimisation of transfer chutes in the bulk materials industry
MN van Aarde
51
CHAPTER 3
reclaimer boom scale reading (yellow line) This makes it difficult to reclaim at a
constant rate
The reason for the high peak surges is due to avalanches on the stockpile
caused by reclaiming on the lower benches without first taking away the top
material The blue line in Figure 34 represents a conveyor scale reading after
the material has passed through a series of transfer chutes It is clear that the
peaks tend to dissipate over time as the peaks on the blue line are lower and
smoother than that on the yellow line
IlmJ
bull I _ bull It bull bull bull bull
--ErI--E--~---h--E=+[J]--EiE ~ J~~~ middot middot -~L I-~f~1-1shyt~=tt~~J~~v5 i ~ ~ ~ ~ ~ i ~ 1 ~ ~ ~ s ~ ------ ~-- - ------ - _ - -------- -- -- - _---- -- -r - --- -_shyp
C)
~ 1r =r=l[=1 -It-1 -- -~ -t= --shy~ _middotmiddot -r middotr middot middot [middot _r _ _ r- middotmiddot rmiddot middotmiddot -r- rmiddot-- middot- middotmiddot -rmiddot -r-middotmiddot middotr lXgtO middotmiddotmiddotmiddotmiddotmiddotmiddotmiddot[middotmiddotmiddotmiddotmiddotmiddotmiddotlmiddotmiddotmiddotmiddotmiddotmiddotlmiddotmiddotmiddotmiddotmiddotmiddotmiddotmiddotimiddotmiddotmiddotmiddotmiddotmiddotmiddotmiddotr-middotmiddotmiddotmiddot j middotmiddot1middotmiddotmiddotmiddotmiddot1middotmiddotmiddotmiddotmiddotmiddotmiddot1middotmiddotmiddotmiddotmiddot middotlmiddotmiddotmiddotmiddottmiddotmiddotmiddotmiddotmiddotmiddotmiddotjmiddot I~ [ bullbullbullbullbullbullbull [ bullbullbull middotmiddotmiddot1middotmiddotmiddotmiddotmiddotmiddot1middotmiddotmiddotmiddotmiddotmiddotmiddotmiddot1middotmiddotmiddotmiddotmiddotmiddotmiddotmiddot middotmiddotmiddotmiddotmiddotmiddotmiddotmiddoti~middotmiddotmiddotmiddotmiddotmiddotmiddotmiddottmiddotmiddotmiddotmiddotmiddotmiddotmiddotrmiddotmiddotmiddot middotrmiddotmiddotmiddotmiddotmiddotmiddot~middotmiddotmiddotmiddotmiddotmiddotmiddotmiddot1middotmiddotmiddotmiddotmiddotmiddotmiddotmiddotimiddotmiddotmiddot
t) cent
~ i i l i i i i i i i it ~ 8 ~ ~ S l i
~~ Ii ~ ~ g i i ~ 4 1 J yen i
s a e 11 JI as $ $ ~ IS IS e It
Time
-Con~SCO=-E___S~ SCALE
Figure 34 Peak surges experienced during reclaiming operations
347 Other Problem Areas
Some blockages on other chutes at the facility occurred while testing the
stockyard chutes These blockages are also shown in Table 3 where the test
The optimisation of transfer chutes in the bulk materials industry
MN van Aarde
52
CHAPTER 3
results are discussed and to raise awareness that the bottlenecks on site are not
only caused by problems on the tested chutes
A chute downstream from the stockyards encountered a blockage with fine I
material when the flow rate reached 11 OOb tfh Although this is higher than the
test maximum of 10 000 tfh it still raises concern as to why the chute blocked so
severely that it took approximately two hours to clear
Another bottleneck is the transfer point between the feed conveyor of CV 2 and
the discharge chute on CV 2 This transfer point blocked with fine material at a
peak just below 10 000 tfh It should be even worse with coarse are as
previously discussed Due to the configuration of the head chute spillage of
scraper dribblings is also of great concern The main stream of material
interferes with the flow path of the dribbling material Therefore the carry back
scraped off the bottom of the feeding belt cannot i~ow down the chute and is
pushed over the sides of the chute
The optimisation of transfer chutes in the bulk maferias industry
MN van Aarde
53
CHAPTER 3
35 SUMMARY OF TEST RESULTS
Table 3 Results from test programme
Transfer Point Material Tested Test No Peak Capacity Blocked Chute
CV11 CV5 Yes
Fines N 14 10000 tlh No
Fines N 15 10000tlh No
CV 11 CV6 Coarse K 20 9300 tlh No
Fines K 4 10600tlh No
Fines A 19 9633 tlh No
CV31 CV5 Yes
Yes
Yes
Coarse A 17 9427 tlh No
CV31 CV6 Coarse K 7 10195t1h Yes
Coarse K 8 11 000 tlh Yes
CV41 CV5 Coarse A 16 10307 tlh No
No (Mech trip on
CV4CV6 Fines K 10 10815 tlh downstream conveyor)
Coarse K 11 8000 tlh No
Fines A 18 10328 tlh No
No (Feed to CV 2
CV21 CV5 Fines N 13 10 000 tlh blocked)
CV21 Coarse K 1 amp 2 10 153 tlh No
No (Blocked chute on
Fines K 3 11 000 tlh downstream transfer)
The optimisation of transfer chutes in the bulk materials industry
MN van Aarde
54
CHAPTER 3
Table 3 shows the results obtained from all the tests on the stockyard conveyor
discharge chutes Where possible the same material grade was tested more
than once on the same transfer in order to confirm the repetitiveness of the test
The tests shown in red indicate the transfers that blocked at a flow rate of less
than 10000 tlh
Coarse K and Coarse 0 are noted as the critical materials for blocked chutes
caused by a peak surge Tests with Coarse K and Coarse S where a blocked
chute occurred at just over 10 000 tlh can also be considered as failed tests
This is due to the lack of a safety margin freeboard inside the chute When
analysing the video images a build up can be seen at a flow rate of less than
10000 tlh
Table 3 indicates that the fine material did not cause blocked chutes but it was
seen that it did fill up the chute throat area in some cases Although the coarse
material grades are shown as being least suitable for high flow rates the fine
material should not be underestimated for its ability to cause blockages The
finer materials normally have higher clay contents than the coarse grades and
therefore stick to the chute walls more easily_
36 CONCLUSION
At lower capacities (7 000 tlh to 8 000 tlh) the material appear to flow smoothly
inside the chutes without surging or building up in the chute This flow rate
normally does not cause spillage or skew loading on the receiving conveyor belt
On average as the flow rate approaches 9 000 tlh the material in the chute
throat area starts packing together and finally blocks up the chute
At transfer rates greater than 9 000 tlh the available area inside the chutes is
completely filled up This causes material to build up or surge inside the chute
which eventually results in the chute choking and the inlet flow becomes greater
The optimisation of transfer chutes in the bulk materials industry
MN van Aarde
55
CHAPTER 3
than the outlet flow Depending on the volume of the chute the choked state can
only be maintained for a certain period of time If the inlet flow does not
decrease it will cause a blocked chute
Peak surges of up to 10 000 tfh were recorded in most tests which involved a
material surge inside the chute but without the occurrence of a blocked chute trip
Although no blocked chute signal was given in these cases the ability of the
chutes to transfer continuously at flow rates of between 9 000 tfh and 10 000 tfh
is not very reliable
Continuous transfer at flow rates approaching 9 000 tfh seems attainable in most
cases but due to the limited freeboard available in the chute throat area the
chutes will easily become prone to blocking Due to the high peak surges at an
increased maximum reclaim rate the amount of freeboard is critical If the
design criteria of the chute were intended to accommodate these large surges
then all the chutes failed this test This can be attributed to the fact that no
freeboard is left at a maximum reclaim rate of 9 000 tfh
With the background available from the test programme it is clear that further
investigation is required to obtain a solution to these problems All the
information gathered can be integrated and utilised to provide a solution A
possible solution can then be tested against the problems found with the current
transfer chutes
The optimisation of transfer chutes in the bulk materials industry
MN van Aarde
56
CHAPTER 4
CHAPTER 4 DYNAMIC CHUTES FOR THE ELIMINATION OF
RECURRING PROBLEMS
The optimisation of transfer chutes in the bulk materials industry
MN van Aarde
57
CHAPTER 4
41 PREFACE
After completion of the chute test programme the decision was made to improve
the old transfer configuration by installing a dynamic chute The reason for the
dynamic chute is to increase the material speed and decrease the stream cross
sectional area The dead boxes in the older chute slowed the material down and
the restriction on transfer height resulted in the material not being able to gain
enough speed after impacting on the dead boxes
A dynamic chute configuration is investigated in this chapter As the new chute
is fitted within the existing steelwork there are certain constraints that determine
the new configuration All the constraints and limitations discussed in this section
are specific to the facility under discussion
The new chute design basically consists of a hood and spoon which retains the
kinetic energy in the material stream as it is transferred from one conveyor to the
other This will reduce the creation of dust in the chute and help to discharge the
material at a velocity closer to that of the receiving conveyor The new design
does however experience high wear which was not a problem with the old chutes
due to large dead boxes
In order to fit the optimum design of a dynamic chute within the existing structure
some changes are required to the positioning of the feed conveyor head pulley
These changes are necessary to accommodate the discharge trajectory from the
feeding conveyor
The radii of the hood and spoon are specified in such a way that the impact wear
is reduced significantly In addition both the hood and spoon are fitted with a
removable dead box section in the impact zones The incorporation of these
sections makes this chute revolutionary in the sense of ease of maintenance
The optimisation of transfer chutes in the bulk materials industry
MN van Aarde
58
CHAPTER 4
This new chute addresses all problems identified at the facility and aims to
eliminate most of them
Tests were carried out to identify worst case materials for flow and wear
Different liner materials were tested for both flow and wear conditions The
outcome of these tests is used as the basis for the design of a new chute As
different conditions for flow and wear inside the chute exist different liners are
investigated for each section inside the chute
42 CONSIDERATION OF THE EXISTING TRANSFER POINT CONSTRAINTS
The stockyard consists of four stacker reclaimers and several transfer points
feeding onto the two downstream conveyors resulting in a very intricate system
This system has numerous requirements which need to be addressed when
considering a new transfer chute configuration The transfers under discussion
are situated at the head end of the stockyard conveyors
MOV1NG HEAD OER MOvm poundAD OVER CVI6 CVIS
t4CLIE SECTION
PURGING POSmON
Figure 35 Stockyard head end layout
The design of a new transfer chute configuration is restricted to a certain extent
by the existing structures on site Figure 35 provides an overall view of the
existing steelwork at the head end of the stockyard conveyor This existing steel
structure can be modified to suit a new configuration but does have some fixed
The optimisation of transfer chutes in the bulk materials industry
MN van Aarde
59
CHAPTER 4
constraints A good example of these constraints is the transfer height between
the stockyard conveyor and the downstream conveyors CV 5 and 6
On both sides of the stockyard conveyor stockpiles of ore can be reclaimed and
deposited onto the conveyor This facility allows a certain travel for the stacker
reclaimer along the stockyard conveyor for the stacking and reclaiming of
material The most forward position of the stacker reclaimer is at the beginning
of the incline section of the stockyard conveyor As previously explained any
curvature in a conveyor requires a certain minimum radius When the transfer
height is raised the radius constraints on that curvature in the stockyard
conveyor will reduce stockyard space This means that the storage capacity at
the facility will be greatly diminished
I ~
j
Figure 36 Dimensional constraints on the existing transfer configuration
The ideal is to stay within the eXisting critical dimensions as shown in Figure 36
As functionality of the chute dictates the chute configuration these dimensions
can be modified within certain constraints These critical dimensions on the
existing configuration are
The optimisation of transfer chutes in the bulk materials industry
MN van Aarde
60
CHAPTER 4
bull Centre of receiving belt to centre of the head pulley 800 mm
bull Bottom of receiving belt to top of the head pulley 4048 mm
The head pulley can however be moved back a certain amount before it
becomes necessary to change the entire incline section of the stockyard
conveyor As the moving head moves forward and backward there are idler cars
trailing behind the moving head carriage as shown in Figure 35 The purpose of
these idler cars is to support the belt when the moving head is feeding onto
CV 6 or when it is standing in the purging position
43 DESIGN OF THE CHUTE PROFILE
431 Design Methodology
Proven standard methods for the functional design of the chute are used These
hand calculation methods are based on the Conveyor Equipment Manufacturers
Association (CEMA) standard as well as papers from Prof AW Roberts These
are typically calculations for determining the discharge trajectory optimal radius
of the hood and spoon as well as the velocity of material passing through the
chute
In addition to standard methods of carrying out conceptual flow design it is
supplemented by the use of Discrete Element Modelling (OEM) simulation
software This is done to visualise the flow of material through the chute
Results from standard calculation methods are compared to the outputs of the
OEM simulations to confirm both results Chapter 5 will focus on the use of
Discrete Element Modelling for the design and verification of chute concepts
The optimisation of transfer chutes in the bulk materials industry
MN van Aarde
61
CHAPTER 4 -__-----__---_----------shy
432 Design Development
Figure 37 shows the concept of the hood and spoon chute for a 90deg transfer as
required by the facility layout The decision to opt for a hood and spoon chute is
based on trying to retain the material velocity when transferring material from the
feeding conveyor to the receiving conveyors Retention of material velocity is
critical as the transfer height is restricted The overall facility constraints for
design are as follows
bull Feeding belt speed - 45 ms
bull Receiving belt speed - 45 ms
bull Transfer height - 401 m
bull Belt widths -1650 mm
bull Maximum material throughput -10000 tlh
As this is a retrofit of an existing facility some of the facility constraints cannot be
changed This forms part of the design development as it steers the design in a
certain direction Due to the fact that the transfer height cannot be changed the
chute profile will be dependent on the transfer height restriction
The optimisation of transfer chutes in the bulk matefials industry
MN van Aarde
62
CHAPTER 4
START-UP CHrrlE
DRlBBIlNG CHUTE
Figure 37 Hood and spoon configuration for the 90 transfer
The optimum solution for the correct chute profile in this situation would be to
move the head pulley back far enough This should be done so that the hood
can receive the material trajectory at a small impact angle and still discharge
centrally onto the spoon However the head pulley can only be moved back a
certain amount Any further movement will require changes to the structure of
the feeding conveyor incline section
As the stockyard conveyors feed onto two receiving conveyors the head pulley
of the stockyard conveyors is situated on a moving head rail car This enables
the conveyor to discharge either on CV 5 or CV 6 as shown in Figure 25
Taking the movement of the head pulley into account the moving head rail car
can be shortened by 1000 mm in order to move the head pulley back As stated
in the preface all changes are distinctive to this facility alone However it is
important to be aware of the consequences of every modification
The optimisation of transfer chutes in the bulk materials industry
MN van Aarde
63
CHAPTER 4 -__----- ------shy
433 Determination of the Profile
An important of the hood and spoon design is to ensure a
discharge from the hood onto the centre of the spoon The is
determined using equation (1) in section 24 Although various material
are transferred it does not have a significant effect on the calculated trajectory
the bulk properties of the materials are very similar It is however important
to the material which will transferred obtain the flow angles and wear
This information the will be
the Liner selection for this case study is discussed in Appendix A
After the trajectory has been determined the hood radius can determined by
using equation (2) As head pulley can move 1 000 mm backward the
possible hood radius was determined to 2 577 mm This hood radius is
VIU(I(1 to produce the wear on the zone in chute
The impact angle at this radius is 11 which is less than the maximum
allowable limit of 20
The hood radius is chosen to as close as possible to radius of curvature of
the material trajectory The point where the hood radius and the trajectory radius
cross is known as the impact point In to determine the velocity
point in hood the at is required on the
hood from the horizontal where the material impacts and to slide down the
hood surface
In this case the position impact hood is at 558r from the horizontal
In to determine the velocity this angle e is used as starting
point in (3) obtain a complete velocity profile angle from where
the material impacts hood is decreased in increments 5 up to the
discharge point which is normally 0
The optimisation chutes in the bulk materials industry
MN van Aarde
64
-----
CHAPTER 4
Hood Velocity Profile
70
--- --~ 6 0
5 0
40 ~_
~ 30 g --- a 20 gt
10
00
60 50 40 30 20 10 o Theta (Position inside the hood)
Figure 38 Hood velocity profile
The spoon radius is determined in such a way that the wear at the point of impact
is kept to a minimum At the same time the horizontal component of the material
exit velocity is as close as possible to the receiving belt speed Firstly the
assumption is made that the initial velocity of material in the spoon is equal to the
exit velocity of material from the hood This yields a spoon entry velocity of
633 ms and can also be seen from Figure 38
By reiterating various radii for the spoon the optimum exit velocity Ve can be
obtained These radii are selected according to the available space in which the
spoon must fit and also to produce the smallest impact angle for material
discharging from the hood This table is set up to display the different exit
velocities at various spoon radii The exit velocity is also dependent on the exit
angle which is determined by the length of the spoon arc In this case the spoon
radius is chosen as 3 575 mm An exit angle of 38deg from the horizontal yields an
exit velocity closer to the receiving belt speed
The optimisation of transfer chutes in the bulk materials industry
MN van Aarde
65
CHAPTER 4
Spoon Velocity Profile
67
66
65
S 64 amp0 g 6 3
V
v-shy ~ ~
ii ~ gt 62
61 I I 60
o 10 20 30 40 50 60
Theta (position inside the spoon)
Figure 39 Spoon velocity profile
Taken from the origin of the spoon radius the material position in the spoon at
discharge is sr The selection of this angle is guided by the geometry of the
chute and surrounding structures This angle is then used to calculate the exit
velocity as shown in Figure 39 At this point the discharge angle relative to the
conveyor angle is 38deg Ve is then determined to be 6087 ms with a velocity
component of 479 ms in the direction of the belt This value is 618 higher
than the belt speed of 4S ms which is acceptable as it is within the allowable
10 range of variation Minimal spillage and reduced wear on the receiving
conveyor is expected
Both the hood and spoon have a converged profile This is done in order to
minimise spillage and ensure a smooth transfer of material from the hood to the
spoon and from the spoon to the receiving conveyor The converged profile
starts out wide to capture any stray particles and converges to bring the material
particles closer together at the discharge This profile does not influence the
transfer rate of the chute as the stream of material through the chute is no more
The optimisation of transfer chutes in the bulk materials industry
MN van Aarde
66
CHAPTER 4
compact than the material on the conveyor belt before and after the transfer
chute
44 INCORPORATING ADEAD BOX IN THE IMPACT AREAS
In chapter 1 reference is made to a chute design utilising pipe sections with a
rounded profile The flat back plate is chosen instead of a rounded pipe type
section to house the honeycomb dead box configuration It would be possible to
fit the honeycomb into a rounded back section but manufacturing and
maintenance would be unnecessarily difficult and expensive
Furthermore the cross section profile of the chute shows three sliding surfaces
as shown in These surfaces consist of the back plate two vertical side plates
and two diagonal plates This is done in order to increase the angle between
adjoining plates so that the probability of material hanging up in the corners is
reduced This helps to alleviate the risk of experiencing blocked chutes
Figure 40 Chute cross section
The optimisation of transfer chutes in the bulk materials industry
M N van Aarde
67
CHAPTER 4
441 Honeycomb Wear Box in the Hood
A honeycomb or wear box is incorporated into this chute configuration in order to
further minimise wear in the hood and spoon The honeycomb configuration is
clearly shown in and is typical for both the hood and spoon Reduced wear will I
be achieved as impact and sliding will take place on the basis of material on
material flow Ore is captured inside the honeycomb pockets which protects the
ceramic lining in the section of the honeycomb and creates another sliding face
made of the material being transferred The ribs in the wear box do not protrude
from the sliding face of the chute and therefore do not interfere with the main
stream flow of material
Positioning of the honeycomb is critical as the point of impact on the hood needs
to be on the honeycomb This is required in order to assure that the highest
material impact is absorbed by a layer of static material inside the honeycomb
and not the chute liners All the basic steps for designing a normal hood and
spoon chute are followed Firstly the angle at impact (8e) is calculated to
determine where the trajectory of material will cross the radius of the hood This
shows the position of the impact point on the hood Figure 20 indicates where 8e
is calculated As previously stated the angle at impact for this situation is
558r This is calculated using [33]
e = tan- I ( 1 ) (5)
C Ii
And y is defined by equation 1
This gives an indication as to where the honeycomb should be situated in order
to capture the material impacting the hood fully A flow simulation package can
also be used to determine the position of this honeycomb structure shows an
opening for the honeycomb which starts at 40deg clockwise from the vertical This
The optimisation of transfer chutes in the bulk materials industry 68
MN van Aarde
CHAPTER 4
means that there are almost 16deg of free space in the honeycomb to ensure that
the material will always impact inside the wear box
There is no set specification as to the size of this free space This is just to
accommodate any surges of mat~rial on the feeding conveyor As discussed in
Chapter 3 due to avalanches while reclaiming from the stockpiles material
surges on the conveyors is a reality
Figure 41 Honeycomb wear box positioning
illustrates exactly where this wear box is situated on the back plate of the hood
This configuration is very similar to that of the spoon as both wear boxes only
cover the width of the flat back plate of the hood and spoon The reason for this
is that most of the material impact and mainstream flow strikes the back plate
The optimisation of transfer chutes in the bulk materials industry
MN van Aarde
69
CHAPTER 4
WEAR BOX
Figure 42 Wear box in the hood section
All the horizontal ribs of the honeycomb are spaced 5deg apart and there are 5
vertical ribs following the converging contour of the hood as shown in Spacing
of the ribs depends largely on the maximum lump size handled by the transfer
In this case the largest lumps are approximately 34 mm in diameter The idea is
to get as many dead boxes into the honeycomb as possible These small
cavities should however be large enough to capture a substantial amount of ore
inside
The optimisation of transfer chutes in the bulk materials industry
MN van Aarde
70
CHAPTER 4 ----_----------------shy
Figure 43 Spacing arrangement of honeycomb ribs inside the hood
The two vertical liners on the edges of the honeycomb are only 65 mm high while
the rest of the vertical liners are 120 mm high This is done so that the flat liners
in the chute surface can overlap the edge liners of the honeycomb An open
groove between the tiles along the flow of material would cause the liners to be
worn through much faster than in normal sliding abrasion conditions Due to the
high wear characteristics of the ore all openings between tiles should be kept out
of the mainstream flow
All the ribs in the honeycomb are 50 mm thick and vary in depth The vertical
ribs protrude the horizontal ribs by 30 mm in order to channel the flow These
vertical ribs are all flush with the surrounding tiles on the flat sliding surface of the
hood All the pockets of the wear box are 120 mm deep measured from the top
of the vertical ribs Again dimension is dependent on the maximum lump size
handled by the transfer There are no specifications as to the relation between
the pocket size and the lump size These dimensions were chosen to be
approximately 4 times the lump size Computer simulations can be used to test
the feasibility of this concept while commissioning of the equipment will ultimately
show whether this method works
The optimisation of transfer chutes in the bulk materials industry
MN van Aarde
71
CHAPTER 4 ------------_ -- - ---------------shy
442 Honeycomb wear box in the spoon
The honeycomb wear box in the spoon has the same configuration as in the
hood It also covers the entire width of the back plate and fully accommodates
the material impacting on the spoon from the hood The entire spoon is broken
up into three sections and the honeycomb wear box is situated in the back
section as shown in
Figure 44 Wear box in the spoon section
With almost the same configuration as the hood the spoon also has a corner
liner to ensure a continuous lined face between the flat surface liners and the
honeycomb ribs The detail of these liners and ribs are shown in A 90deg transfer
with a hood and spoon chute means that the stream received by the spoon is
narrower and longer than the stream received by the hood This is caused when
the material takes the shape of the hood before it is discharged into the spoon
The converged configuration causes the stream to flatten against the sliding
surface in the chute
The optimisation of transfer chutes in the bulk materials industry
MN van Aarde
72
CHAPTER 4
Due to the spoon honeycomb being a bit narrower than the hood there are only
three vertical ribs The number of ribs had to be reduced to be able to
accommodate the preferred cavity size of the honeycomb boxes These ribs now
form two channels in which the stream of material can be directed
Figure 45 Liner detail of the spoon honeycomb wear box
As shown in there is a 3 mm gap between the honeycomb section and the chute
plate work This is to ensure that the honeycomb section can be easily removed
for maintenance on the liners All the edges of the liners have rounded corners
to reduce stress concentrations which can cause rapid liner failure
45 DESIGNING THE CHUTE FOR INTEGRATION WITH SYSTEM REQUIREMENTS
The arc length of the spoon back plate is longer and closer to the belt in order to
ensure a smooth transfer of material from the chute to the receiving conveyor A
small gap of 75 mm is left between the bottom of the spoon and the receiving
conveyor Due to the fact that material can also be fed from another upstream
The optimisation of transfer chutes in the bulk materials industry
MN van Aarde
73
CHAPTER 4
stockyard conveyor this configuration will not be suitable This means that the
gap of 75 mm is not enough to allow material to pass underneath the chute
To accommodate this situation the spoon is split into different sections where the
bottom section lifts up to make room for material from behind In the raised
position the gap between the chute and the belt is 450 mm When the lower belt
is loaded to full capacity the material height is 380 mm This means that the
clearance to the belt in the non operational position is sufficient and show the
operational and non operational positions of the spoon
T -t t----~r_-+-wtIY1shy
Figure 46 Spoon in the operational position
The optimisation of transfer chutes in the bulk materials industry
MN van Aarde
74
CHAPTER 4
Figure 47 Spoon in the non operational position
This section is a discussion on how this new transfer chute configuration should
be operated in order to comply with the facility requirements The bottom section
of the chute can be lifted out of the way of material from behind on the receiving
conveyor Therefore a control philosophy is required for this movement
Referring to Figure 25 positions A and B indicate where these new chutes will be
installed As previously stated position C is the purging or dump position and
show the actuated spoon section in the operating and non operating positions
The conditions for these positions are explained as follows
46 CONCLUSION
With the consideration of all the facility constraints and a conceptual idea of what
the transfer configuration should look like the design can be optimised When
the feeding belt velocity is known the material trajectory and optimum chute
radius can be determined This radius and the radius of the spoon must then be
corrected to comply with the facility constraints but still deliver the required
material transfer rate
The optimisation of transfer chutes in the bulk materials industry
MN van Aarde
75
CHAPTER 4
With the high cost implications of regular maintenance intervals on chute liners
and facility downtime a honeycomb structure is incorporated into the high impact
areas The purpose of this honeycomb structure is to form small pockets similar
to dead boxes in order to promote material on material flow This increases the
lifetime of the chute liners and reduces maintenance intervals
This specific transfer chute splits up easily into separate sections and will help to
simplify maintenance The bottom section of the chute is actuated to move up
and down depending on whether the chute is in operation or not This will ensure
optimum transfer of material while in operation and provide sufficient clearance
when not in operation This is again guided by the facility requirements
In the design of all the transfer chute components the physical properties of the
ore should always be considered This determines the chute profile in terms of
flow angles and liner selection With maximum material flow ability high
resistance to sliding abrasion and reduced maintenance cost in mind 94
alumina ceramics is the liner of choice This is only in the main flow areas of the
chute For the dribbling chute a polyurethane liner is used to promote the flow of
this sticky material
The optimisation of transfer chutes in the bulk materials industry
MN van Aarde
76
CHAPTER 5
CHAPTER 5 TESTING AND VERIFICATION OF THE NEW SOLUTION
- middotSmiddotmiddotmiddotmiddotmiddotmiddotmiddotmiddotmiddot-middotl~Oi
The optimisation of transfer chutes in the bulk materials industry 77
MN van Aarde
CHAPTER 5
51 PREFACE
Although hand calculations have been a proven method of design for many
years it is important to verify any new chute concept before fabrication and
implementation Confirming the concept can save time and money as it reduces
the risk of on-site modifications Hand calculations only supply a two
dimensional solution to the problem which does not always provide accurate
material flow profiles
In recent years a few material flow simulation packages have been developed to
aid the design of material handling equipment The use of software packages
can be beneficial to the design process as it gives a three dimensional view of
the material behaviour in the chute This means that changes to the chute
concept can be made prior to fabrication
It is however important to verify that the solution obtained from the software
package is an accurate reflection of actual design model Therefore the material
being handled should be thoroughly tested to obtain the correct physical
properties required to obtain an accurate simulation result
The use of material flow simulation software does not replace the necessity for
hand calculations All the basic steps should still be done to derive a conceptual
chute configuration Material flow simulation software should be used as a
complimentary tool to analytical hand calculations in the design process
The optimisation of transfer chutes in thebulk materials industry
MN van Aarde
78
CHAPTER 5
52 SELECTING A TEST METHODOLOGY
Traditionally transfer chutes were designed by using basic analytical calculations
and relying on empirical data from past experiences with other chutes Mostly
these analytical methods only cater for the initial part of the chute such as the
parabolic discharge trajectory It is difficult to determine what happens to the
flow of material after it strikes the chute wall [34]
Two methods of verification were usually applied to evaluate a new transfer
chute configuration Trial and error can be used but obviously this is not desired
due to the high cost implications A second method is to build a small scale
model of the chute in which tests can be carried out before a final design can be
adopted This physical modelling is however time consuming and
expensive [34]
Granular or particulate materials are composed of a large number of loosely
packed individual particles or grains The flow of such granular materials forms
an intricate part of the materials handling industry Small reductions in energy
consumption or increases in production can have great financial advantages
Therefore significant efforts are put into improving the efficiency of these
facilities The important role of numerical simUlations is becoming more evident
in these optimisation procedures [35] Due to these efforts this technology is
becoming more powerful and is easy to use as a verification method for transfer
chute designs
The behaviour of bulk material particles is unique in the sense that it exhibits
some of the properties associated with the gaseous liquid and solid states of
matter The granular state of bulk materials cannot be characterised by anyone
of these states alone The research that captures the contact between individual
particles in an explicit manner is known as discrete element methods (OEM) [36]
The optimisation of transfer chutes in the bulk materials industry
MN van Aarde
79
CHAPTER 5
In basic terms OEM explicitly models the dynamic motion and mechanical
interactions of each body or particle as seen in the physical material flow It is
also possible to obtain a detailed description of the velocities position and force
acting on each particle at a discrete point during the analysis This is achieved
by focusing on the individual grain or body rather than focusing on the global
body as is the case with the finite element approach [36]
Figure 48 illustrates two examples of how this OEM software can be applied
Obviously the flow characteristics differ between the applications shown in Figure
48 This is however catered for by the mathematical simulation of each particle
collision
Figure 48 Flow analysis examples a) separation and screening b) hoppers feeders 36]
Continuous improvements in the performance of computing systems make OEM
a realistic tool for use in a wide range of process design and optimisation
applications During the last 20 years the capabilities of OEM have progressed
from small scale two dimensional simulations to much more complex 3D
applications The latest high performance desk top computers make it possible
to simulate systems containing large numbers of particles within a reasonable
time [37]
The optimisation of transfer chutes in the bulk materials industry
MN van Aarde
80
CHAPTER 5
According to the institute for conveyor technologies at the Otto-von-Guericke
University of Magdeburg in Germany using OEM for bulk solid handling
equipment provides [38]
bull A cost effective method of simulating the utility of materials handling
equipmentshy
bull Precise control over complicated problem zones eg transfer chutes
redirection stations and high wear areas
bull The possibility to integrate processes in one simulation such as mixing and
segregation
bull The possibility to involve the customer more extensively in the design
process
bull An advantage in the market due to attractive video sequences and pictures
of the simulation
bull The possibility to prevent facility damages and increase the efficiency of
conveyor systems extensively
As a good example of the advantages of the discrete element method the
University of Witwatersrand in Johannesburg did studies on rotary grinding mills
The university studies have shown that the OEM qualitatively predicts the load
motion of the mill very well The improved knowledge of the behaviour of mills
can therefore increase the profitability of mineral processing operations [39]
This material handling equipment is generally costly to operate and inefficient in
the utilisation of energy for breakage In order to understand the behaviour of
mills better the OEM method is increasingly being applied to the modelling of the
load behaviour of grinding mills These results indicate that this method can be
applied successfully in the bulk materials handling industry
The apUmisatian af transfer chutes in the bulk materials industry
MN van Aarde
81
CHAPTERS
Another example where this technology has been used with great success is with
the design of a new load out chute for the Immingham coal import terminal in
Britain By simulating the flow with a OEM package the designers were aided in
the fact that they were supplied with a quantitative description of the bulk solid
movement through the chute In the opinion of Professor Franz Kessler
(University of Leoben) the Discrete Element Method provides the engineer with
unique detailed information to assist in the design of transfer points [3]
These simulation packages are at the moment very expensive and not widely
used in transfer chute design It can be anticipated that the utilisation of these
packages will increase as the technology improves and the cost of the software
goes down [40] To get the best value out of the simulation it is important to
compare simulation packages and select the one most suitable to the complexity
of the design
Fluenttrade is a two dimensional computational fluid dynamics (CFD) software
package which can also be used as a chute design aid through the simulation of
material flow It must however be noted that this is not a OEM simulation
package This software package simulates the flow of material by considering
the material particles as a liquid substance The output of the simulation is the
same as can be seen in the example of Figure 49 The colours in the simulation
represent the average particle spacing [40] Due to the fact that this package
can at this stage only deliver two dimensional simulations it is considered
inadequate to perform detailed simulations on the intricate design piscussed in
this dissertation
The optjmisation of transfer chutes in the bulk materials industry
MN van Aarde
82
CHAPTER 5
COnroUf Votume t-~bn 01 ( 00 frlm~2 5000amp1 00) ~gtJ C3_2002 fLUENT 60 (2lt1 9 940 n 1Mgt u ody)
Figure 49 Simulations results from Fluenttrade [40]
The Overland Conveyor Company provides another alternative to the Fluent
software package Applied OEM is a technology company that provides discrete
element software to a variety of users in the bulk materials industry Bulk Flow
Analysttrade is an entry level package that they provide This package is very
powerful in the sense that it can accurately predict flow patterns depending on
the accuracy of the inputs An example of this is shown in Figure 50 It also has
the capability to show material segregation dynamic forces and velocities [41]
Figure 50 Simulation results from Bulk Flow Analysttrade [41]
The optimisation of transfer chutes in the bulk materials industry
MN van Aarde
83
CHAPTER 5
OEM Solutions is a world leader in discrete element modelling software They
recently announced the release of the latest version of their flow simulation
package called EOEM 21 This package can be used to simulate and optimise
bulk material handling and processing operations [41] Oue to the capabilities of
this software package it is a very attractive option for designing transfer chutes
With the development of EOEM 21 OEM Solutions worked in collaboration with
customers in the Bulk Handling Mining and Construction Pharmaceutical
Chemical and Agricultural sectors This enables the end users to perform more
sophisticated particle simulations specific to their unique applications Also
incorporated into this package is the ability and flexibility to customise and
personalise advanced particle properties [42]
This specific package has been proven successful by industry leaders Martin
Engineering (Neponset Illinois) is a leading global supplier of solids handling
systems This company continues to expand their use of EOEM software in
design optimisation and development of bulk materials handling products These
optimisation and development actions include all aspects of conveyor systems
and transfer points for numerous industrial sectors [43]
There are several other OEM simulation packages such as ESYS Particle
Passage-OEM and YAOE However none of these software packages seem be
major industry role players in the discipline of chute design although they might
have the capability In adjudicating the three big role players in bulk material flow
simulation packages there are a few factors taken into consideration It appears
thatthe advantages of 30 capabilities are non negotiable Therefore Fluenttrade is
not really a consideration From the literature review of the Bulk Flow Analysttrade
and the EOEM packages it seems that these two will provide more or less the
same performance It does seem however that the EOEM software is a bigger
role player in various industries Due to the possible future capabilities of EOEM The optimisation of transfer chutes in the bulk materials industry
MN van Aarde
84
CHAPTER 5
through its association with numerous industries this simulation package is the
software of choice
In order to retrofit or design a new transfer point with the aid of the selected OEM
software package there are a few steps that a designer must follow to gain the
full benefit of this tool [36]
1 An accurate 3D or CAD representation of the new or old transfer chute
must be rendered
2 Identify restrictions and limitations in terms of chute geometry and
manufacturing
3 Identify desired design goals (Le dust emissions flow restrictions etc)
4 Identify representative material properties and particle descriptions
5 In case of a retrofit make design changes to chute geometry with CAD
6 Simulate the performance of the new design using OEM software
7 Evaluate results obtained from the simulation (reiterate steps 5 6 and 7)
8 Perform and finalise detail design steps
9 Manufacture
10 Installation
The above mentioned steps found in references [6] and [36] only provides
information regarding retrofitting or designing chutes with the aid of OEM
Although it is a powerful design 1001 the design process should not discard the
use of analytical hand calculation~ Some of the most important design decisions
regarding chute profiles are made with analytical hard calculations such as
plotting the material trajectorY
53 DETERMINATION OF MATERIAL PROPERTIES
The discrete element method is a promising approach to the simUlation of
granular material interaction The accuracy of the outcome of the simulation is
The optimisation of transfer chutes in the bulk materials industry
M N van Aarde
85
CHAPTER 5
however dependent upon accurate information on the material properties and
input parameters [44] These inputs basically consist of the following
fundamental parameters size and shape factors bulk density angle of repose
cohesion and adhesion parameters and restitution coefficients [45]
The determination of most of these parameters are explained and defined in the
following paragraphs The parameters that are changed in the simulation
according to the reaction of the flow are not discussed and are typically
parameters such as the internal coefficient of friction between a number of
particles A collaborated effort by the bulk handling industry aims to find ways in
which all parameters can be accurately determined through scientific methods
This has however still not been achieved The objective is to achieve a realistic
representation and therefore some parameters are altered in the simulation
It is important to note that the computation time increases as the particle size
becomes smaller and the amount of particles increase In most granular flow
problems the characteristics of the material stream are largely determined by
particles greater than 10 - 20 mm in size [45] Therefore in order to reduce
computation time the selected particle size for simUlations should be the same
as the largest particles handled by the facility namely 34 mm diameter
Although fines have a higher internal friction coefficient and more cohesiveness
these properties can be averaged into the input parameters to obtain the same
overall effect [45] Therefore only a single particle size is used in the simulation
and the properties optimised to obtain the same result under actual operating
conditionsmiddot Some of the material properties can be easily obtained from the
facility The rest of the properties are obtained from tests carried out by expert
conSUltants in this field
The size factor and bulk density are obtained from the facility Materia tests
carried out by external consultants provide the coefficient of friction and also the The optimisation of transfer chutes in the bulk materials industry
MN van Aarde
86
CHAPTER 5
wall friction angle This is the angle at which the material will start to slide under
its own mass To determine these material properties the external consultants
normally use sophisticated and expensive equipment Data gathered from these
tests are used for the hand calculation of the chute profile The angle of repose
can normally be observed from a stockpile and is the angle that the side of the
stockpile makes with the horizontal
For the OEM simulation the coefficient of friction is one of the main determining
factors of the wall friction angle Data provided by the material tests can not be
used as a direct input into OEM In the software package the coefficient of
friction is represented by a factor between 0 and 1 The material test data can
however provide some insight into where on this scale the factor is This factor
can be derived from a few small simulation iterations as there is no method of
direct conversion between the test result data and the OEM input
To determine this factor a plate is modelled with a single layer of particles This
plate is then rotated within the simulation at approximately 2deg per second As
soon as the particles begin to slide the time is taken from which the angle can be
calculated This process is repeated with different friction coefficients until the
correct wall friction angle is obtained After the coefficient of friction factor is
determined between the particles and the chute wall the material restitution
factor and coefficient of internal friction can be obtained
The restitution factor is obtained by measurirtg the rebound height of a particle
when it is dropped from a certain height This is usually difficult to determine due
to the variation in shape of the material particles If the particle lands on a
surface it rarely bounces straight back up Therefore the test is repeated
numerous times and an average is taken to obtain the final result
Coefficient of internal friction is a property that describes the particles ability to
slide across each other A simUlation is set up to create a small stockpile of The optimisation of transfer chutes in the blJlk materials industry
MN van Aarde
87
CHAPTER 5
material particles The angle of repose can be obtained by measuring the
average apex angle of the stockpiles In this simulation the coefficient of internal
friction and restitution factors are iterated This is done in order to simulate the
accurate behaviour of particles falling onto the stockpile and forming the correct
angle of repose Figure 51 shows what this simulation typically looks like
Figure 51 Determination of material properties for an accurate angle of repose
54 VERIFICATION OF THE SELECTED TEST METHODOLOGY FOR THIS
APPLICATION
The best verification is to compare the simulation results with an actual material
flow situation Therefore a comparison is made between the actual flow in the
existing transfer configuration and the simulation of this same transfer This is
also a good test to see if the parameters changed in the simulation were done
correctly
During the chute test programme CCTV cameras were installed in the problem
transfer chutes at the facility The cameras are positioned to provide an accurate
view of the material flow behaviour inside the chutes As explained in Chapter 3
The optimisation of transfer chutes in the bulk materials industry 88
MN van Aarde
CHAPTER 5
the behaviour of the material flow inside the chutes changes with the variation of
ore type
Due to the fact that only 34 mm diameter particles are used in the simulation a
test using coarse ore was chosen for the verification of the simulation
Therefore test 12 is used as reference for the verification In this test coarse S
with the particle size distribution between 28 mm and 34 mm was used at the
transfer from CV 3 to CV 5
Figure 52 shows an image taken from the CCTV camera inside the transfer chute
between CV 3 and CV 5 The red line indicates the top of the chute throat
opening and the yellow arrows show the top of material flow This screen shot
was taken at a flow rate of 10 000 tlh It can be deduced from this view and the
chute test work that the chute is choking at a throughput rate of 10 000 tlh
Figure 52 Actual material flow with coarse S at 10000 tIh
The transfer chute from Figure 52 was modelled in CAD and the model imported
into the discrete element package EDEM All the material input parameters as
discussed in section 53 were used in the simulation 10 000 tlh was used as the
The optimisation of transfer chutes in the bulk materials industry
MN van Aarde
89
CHAPTER 5
flow rate parameter in an attempt to simulate and recreate the situation as shown
by Figure 52
Test 12 of the chute performance tests gave the following results which can be
compared to the EDEM simulation
bull Chute started to choke rapidly at 10 000 tlh
bull Slight off centre loading onto the receiving conveyor CV 5
bull A lower velocity layer of material close to the discharge of the chute
bull Material roll back on the receiving conveyor due to significant differences in
the velocity of the material flow and the receiving conveyor
Off-centre loading
L
Figure 53 Material flow pattern through the existing chute
The optimisation of transfer chutes in the bulk materials industry
MN van Aarde
90
CHAPTER 5
Flow restricted in this area
Low velocity layer
Low discharge velocity rollback
Figure 54 Cross sectional side view of material flow through the existing chute
Figure 53 shows the material flow pattern in the existing chute where the thick
red arrows indicate the direction of flow The legend on the left of the figure
indicates the material velocity in ms Slow flowing material is shown in blue and
the colour turns to red as the material velocity increases Slight off centre
loading onto the receiving conveyor CV 5 can be seen from Figure 53 This
correlates well with the actual observations during the physical testing of this
transfer point
Figure 54 shows the more determining factors for correlation between actual flow
and simulated flow where the legend on the left indicates the material velocity in
ms This is a cross sectional view through the centre of the chute From this
view a build up of material can be seen in the chute throat area The slow
flowing material on the back of the chute also helps to restrict the flow Due to
the fact that the material speed at the discharge of the chute is much slower than
the receiving belt speed a stack of turbulent flowing material is formed behind
the discharge point on the receiving conveyor
The optimisation of transfer chutes in the bulk materials industry
MN van Aarde
91
CHAPTER 5
There is a good correlation between the simulated and actual material flow
pattern The simulation method can therefore be considered as a valid alternate
or additional method to standard analytical chute design Attention should be
given though to the input of material properties in order to obtain a realistic result
55 VERIFICATION OF NEW CHUTE CONFIGURATION AND OPTIMISATION OF THE
HOOD LOCATION
After establishing that the OEM is a reliable design and verification tool the new
transfer chute configuration can be simulated Firstly this configuration is
modelled without the honeycombs inside the hood and spoon This is done in
order to verify the material flow pattern and velocity through the hood and spoon
Results obtained from this simulation can then be compared to the hand
calculation results An iterative process is followed with simulations and hand
calculations to obtain the best flow results The simulation results are shown in
Figure 55 and Figure 56
I
L
Figure 55 Material flow through hood at 10 000 tIh
The optimisation of transfer chutes in the bulk materials industry
MN van Aarde
92
CHAPTER 5
Figure 56 Material flow through spoon at 10 000 tlh
The hood velocity profile shown in Figure 38 gives the same result as obtained
from the DEM simulation The calculated hood exit velocity is 633 ms This is
the same result obtained from the simulation and shown by the red colouring in
Figure 55 As the material enters the spoon it is falling under gravity and
therefore still accelerating At impact with the chute wall it slows down and exits
the spoon with approximately the same velocity as the receiving conveyor
Figure 56 shows the material flow through the spoon section This can also be
compared to the spoon velocity profile in Figure 39 The behaviour of the
material inside the spoon as shown by the simulation correlates with the results
obtained from the hand calculations This is another indication that with accurate
input parameters the DEM can be used as a useful verification tool
The optimisation of transfer chutes in the bulk materials industry
MN van Aarde
93
CHAPTER 5
Skew loading into spoon
Slower material
L
Figure 57 Determination of the optimum hood location
The hood is supported by a shaft at the top and can be moved horizontally This
function is incorporated into the design in order to optimise the hood location
during commissioning of the transfer chute It is critical to discharge centrally into
the spoon in order to eliminate skew loading onto the receiving conveyor
Figure 57 illustrates the effect that the hood location has on material flow When
comparing the flow from Figure 55 to the flow in Figure 57 it is clear that skew
loading is a direct result of an incorrect hood position The circled area in Figure
57 illustrates how the flow reacts to the incorrect hood location
Material is discharged to the right side of the spoon which causes a slight buildshy
up of material on the left This causes the material to flow slightly from side to
side as it passes through the spoon Figure 57 indicates that the material to the
The optimisation of transfer chutes in the bulk materials industry
MN van Aarde
94
CHAPTERS ----------------- -------___ _--shy
right at the spoon discharge is slightly slower than the material on the left This is
a clear indication of skew loading onto the receiving conveyor
The material flow pattern in Figure 55 is symmetrical and therefore will not
cause skew loading The OEM can give a good indication of the required hood
setup before commissioning However adjustments can still be made during the
commissioning process The tracking of the receiving belt should give a good
indication of when the hood is in the optimum position
56 EFFECT OF THE HONEYCOMB STRUCTURE IN HIGH IMPACT ZONES
The purpose of the honeycomb dead box structure in the high impact zones is to
capture material inside the pockets and induce material on material flow This
requires that the material inside the honeycombs should be stationary while the
main stream material flow moves over the dead boxes OEM can therefore be
set up in such a way that the material velocities can be visualised inside the
chute
In Chapter 4 the logic of how this honeycomb should be structured and
positioned was discussed The simulations shown in Figure 58 and Figure 59
illustrate how a OEM pack~ge can also be used to determine the positioning of
these honeycomb structures Impact points in the hood and spoon must be
inside the honeycomb in all situations of flow inside the chute The spacing of
dead box pockets can be altered to ensure that a continuous layer of stationary
material is formed in the honeycomb area Various geometries for this
honeycomb structure can be simulated with OEM to obtain the best results
The optimisation of transfer chutes in the bulk materials industry
MN van Aarde
95
CHAPTER 5
Large radius hood
Hood honeycomb box to minimise wear in impact
Vertical discharge from hood centralising flow on
belt
L
Figure 58 Material behaviour through hood
Spoon
Spoon honeycomb box to minimise wear in impact area
Improved spoon discharge flow
Figure 59 Material behaviour through spoon
The optimisation of transfer chutes in the bulk materials industry
MN van Aarde
96
CHAPTERS
The legends on the left of Figure 58 and Figure 59 indicate the material velocity
in ms Dark blue indicates stationary material and bright red indicates a
maximum material velocity of 8 ms Using this information the functionality of
the honeycomb dead boxes can now be analysed The velocity of the material
captured by the dead boxes is indicated as dark blue This means that all the
material in the dead boxes is stationary
With the result obtained from the OEM simulation it is clear that material on
material flow will be induced by the honeycomb dead boxes The pockets of the
honeycomb capture the material and will therefore have reduced wear in the
high impact areas This material on material flow does however induce a
coarser sliding surface than the smooth ceramic liner tiles Due to the high
velocity of material through the chute the effect of the coarser sliding surface is
however minimised
58 CONCLUSION
The Discrete Element Method is proven to be a successful design and
verification tool in the bulk materials industry This method is used widely in the
global bulk materials industry The successful outcome of the OEM simulation is
however dependent on the correct material input parameters Some of these
parameters are readily available from the facility that handles the material The
rest of the parameters can be determined by setting up simple test simulations
with OEM
To verify that the OEM simulation is a correct indication of the actual condition
the simulation is compared to CCTV images taken from the same transfer chute
The results show that the OEM simulation does provide a true reflection of the
actual material flow through the transfer chute Therefore the same material
input parameters can be used to simulate the new transfer chute configuration
The optimisation of transfer chutes in the bulk materials industry
MN van Aarde
97
CHAPTER 5
From the simulations done on the new transfer chute configuration the effect of
the honeycomb dead boxes can be examined These simulation results show
that the honeycomb dead box configuration is effective in capturing material
inside the honeycomb cavities This results in material on material flow and
reduces impact abrasion on the ceramic chute liners
Results obtained from the OEM simulation of the new transfer configuration are
compared to the hand calculation results This comparison indicates that the
material velocity calculated in the hood and spoon correlates well with the
material velocity calculated by the OEM The overall results obtained from
simulating the new transfer chute configuration have been shown to provide a
true reflection of the actual flow through the chute
The optimisation of transfer chutes in the bulk materials industry
MN van Aarde
98
CHAPTER 6
CHAPTER 6 CONCLUSIONS AND RECOMMENDATIONS
The optimisation of transfer chutes in the bulk materials industry
MN van Aarde
99
CHAPTER 6
61 CONCLUSIONS AND RECOMMENDATIONS
Bulk materials handling is a key role player in the global industrial industry
Within this field the industry faces many challenges on a daily basis These
challenges as with any industry are to limit expenses and increase profit Some
of the limiting factors of achieving this goal in the bulk materials handling industry
are lost time due to unscheduled maintenance product losses due to spillage
andhigh costs incurred by increased maintenance
The focus of this study was on the optimisation of transfer chutes and
investigations were carried out to determine the core problems These
investigations were done by observing and monitoring various grades of iron ore
passing through transfer chutes known to have throughput problems The core
problems were identified as high wear on liners in the impact zones skew
loading on receiving conveyors material spillage and chute blockages
These problems cause financial losses to the facility either directly or indirectly
Direct financial losses can be attributed to the frequent replacement of chute
liners while the indirect financial losses are caused by facility down time This is
why it is imperative to optimise the manner in which the transfer of material is
approached A new transfer chute configuration addresses the problems
identified at the facility and the core concepts can be adopted at any bulk
materials handling facility
This new concept examines the utilisation of the hood and spoon concept rather
than the conventional dead box configuration By using the hood and spoon
configuration the material discharge velocity is utilised and carried through to the
discharge onto the receiving conveyor Adding to this design is a honeycomb
dead box configuration in the high impact zones of the hood and spoon This
initiates material on material flow and prolongs the lifetime of the chute liners
The optimisation of transfer chutes in the bulk materials industry
MN van Aarde
100
CHAPTER 6
The radius of the hood should be designed so that it follows the path of the
material trajectory as closely as possible Some facility constraints prohibit this
hood radius from following exactly the same path as the material The radius of
the spoon is designed in such a manner that it receives the material from the
hood and slows it down while turning it into the direction in which the belt is
running Ideally the material should be discharged from the spoon at
approximately the same velocity as the receiving conveyor
If this can be achieved then some major problems suffered by the industry will
have been resolved With the hood having almost the same radius as the
material trajectory impact wear on liners can be significantly reduced By
discharging material from the chute onto the receiving conveyor at the same
velocity as the conveyor belt excessive belt wear and material spillage will be
avoided Further optimisation is however still possible by investigating the
implementation of various skirting options to the side of the conveyor
This new transfer chute configuration also boasts an articulated bottom section in
the spoon The purpose of the adjustable bottom section is to create greater
clearance below the spoon This will allow material on the belt below to pass
unimpeded underneath the spoon In some cases there can be several chutes in
series that discharge onto the same conveyor In these cases it is beneficial to
incorporate an articulated chute in order to have the capability of having a small
drop height between the discharge point in the chute and the receiving conveyor
This low drop height also minimises turbulent flow at the chute discharge point on
the receiving conveyor
The most unique feature to the new design is the implementation of the
honeycomb dead box configuration in the high impact zones Due to these high
impact areas the liners will experience the most wear This section of the chute
is flanged and can be removed separately from the rest of the chute to aid
maintenance In most maintenance operations it may only be necessary to reline The optimisation of transfer chutes in the bulk materials industry
MN van Aarde
101
CHAPTER 6
this small section of the chute Costs are minimised by reducing the time
required for maintenance and the cost of replacing liners
Previously testing of new transfer chute configurations normally involved
implementing the chute and obseNing its ability to perform according to
specification This can however be a costly exercise as it is possible that further
modifications to the chute will be required after implementation Therefore it is
beneficial to verify the new chute configuration before implementation
This is done by simulating the material flow through the chute using Discrete
Element Method A comparison was done between the actual flow in an eXisting
chute and the simulated flow in the same chute configuration This comparison
showed the same result obtained from the simulation and the actual material
flow This method can therefore be used as an accurate simulation tool for
evaluating transfer chute performance
The mathematical calculations describing the material flow in and over the
honeycomb dead box structures are complex Therefore simulation models are
used to show the material behaviour in those areas Simulations show that the
material captured within the dead boxes remains stationary thus protecting the
ceramic liners behind it This is the desired result as it prolongs the life of the
chute liners and reduces maintenance frequencies
If the work is done efficiently it normally takes two days to remove a worn chute
of this configuration fully and replace it with a new one This is normally done
once a year due to the design lifetime of the chute With the new chute
configuration this maintenance schedule can be reduced to two hours once a
year for the replacement of the honeycomb sections only The exposed face of
the honeycomb ribs will wear through until the efficiency of the honeycomb
design is reduced
The optimisation of transfer chutes in the bulk materials industry
MN van Aarde
102
CHAPTER 6
This specific iron ore facility has approximately fifty transfer points During this
exercise only two of these transfer points were replaced with the new chute
configuration The combined annual maintenance time for replacement of these
50 chutes is 100 days If the new chute philosophy is adopted on all these
transfers the annual maintenance time can be reduced to as little as 100 hours
This excludes the unplanned work for cleaning of spillages and fixing or replacing
worn conveyors
There are significant benefits to investigating the problems at specific transfer
points before attempting a new design This gives good insight into where the
focus should be during the design process Ea~y identification and
understanding of the problem areas is essential for a new chute configuration
The new design features can provide a vast improvement and a large benefit to
the bulk materials handling industry
62 RECOMMENDATIONS FOR FURTHER STUDY
During the chute performance tests it was noted that avalanches on the
stockpiles during reclaiming of material causes peaks on the conveyor systems
These peaks in the material stream increase the probability of blockages in the
transfer chutes As a result material spillage occurs and the conveyor belts can
be easily overloaded
This occurrence creates the requirement for further studies on the reclaiming
operations All stacker reclaimers are operated manually which creates ample
room for error Investigations can be done to determine the value of automating
the reclaiming operations Manual interaction cannot be avoided but an
automated system will reduce the possibility for error
Visual inspections on the transfer chute liners indicate that the material tends to
erode the liners away quicker in the grooves between liner plates or ceramic
The optimisation of transfer chutes in the bulk materials industry
MN van Aarde
103
CHAPTER 6
tiles This occurrence seems to be worse in areas of the chute where the
material velocity is the highest
This problem was specifically noticed with ceramic liner tiles The tiles are glued
to the chute surface with an epoxy and this substance also fills the crevices
between the tiles This epoxy is however not resistant to any type of sliding or
impact abrasion If the material gains speed in such a groove between the tiles it
simply erodes the epoxy away Studies to reduce or even eliminate this problem
should be examined
In some situations the layout and configuration of the chute prohibits the tiles
from being inserted in a staggered manner Studies can be done on the
composition of this epoxy in order to increase its resistance to sliding and impact
abrasion By doing so the lifetime of the chute liners can be increased which will
result in minimised facility down time due to maintenance
It seems that it is a global industry problem to find accurate scientific methods of
determining material input parameters for OEM simulations Although most of
the material properties can be determined through testing it is still a challenge to
convert that information into a representative input parameter into OEM It is
therefore recommended that further studies be undertaken to determine a
method by which material test data can be successfully converted into OEM input
parameters
The optimisation of transfer chutes in the bulk materials industry
MN van Aarde
104
REFERENCES ------shy
REFERENCES
[1] ARNOLD P C MCLEAN A G ROBERTS A W 1978 Bulk Solids
storage flow and handling Tunra Bulk Solids Australia Jan
[2] ANON 2008 Peak (Export) OilUSD Survival Dec
httppeakoHsurvivalorgltag=finance Date of access 8 Jun 2009
[3] KESSLER F 2006 Recent developments in the field of bulk conveying
FME Transactions Vol 34 NO4
[4] ANON 2007 Specification for Troughed Belt Conveyors British
Standards BS28901989 25 Sep Date of access 8 Jun 2009
[5] CEMA (Conveyor Equipment Manufacturers Association) Belt Conveyors
6thfor Bulk Materials ed wwwcemanetorg Date of access
10 Jun 2009
[6] DEWICKI G 2003 Computer Simulation of Granular Material Flows
Overland Conveyor Co Inc Jan httpwwwpowderandbulkcom Date
of access 10 Jun 2009
[7] AMERICAN COAL COUNCIL 2009 Engineered chutes control dust for
Ameren U Es Meramec Plant httpwww clean-coal infold rupalindexphp
Date of access 12 Jun 2009
[8] KUMBA IRON ORE 2008 Annual Financial Statements 2008
httpwwwsishenironorecompanycozareportskumba afs 08pdffullpdf
Date of access 13 Jun 2009
The optimisation of transfer chutes in the bulk materials industry
MN van Aarde
105
REFERENCES
[9] METSO BACKGROUNDER 2007 Rock Crushing 22 Feb
httpWWvVmetsocom Date of access 15 Jun 2009
[10] ALTHOFF H 1977 Reclaiming and Stacking System Patent US
4037735
[11] THE SOUTH AFRICAN INSTITUTE OF MATERIALS HANDLING
Conveyor belt installations and related components Chutes Level 1
course on belt conveying technology
httpWWvVsaimhcozaeducationcourse01chuteshtm Date of access
18 Jun 2009
[12] CLARKE R 2008 Hood and spoon internal flow belt conveyor transfer
systems SACEA - seminar 22 Aug httpWWvVsaceaorgzaDate of
access 22 Jun 2009
[13] T W WOODS CONSTRUCTION 2009 Design problems in coal transfer
chutes 24 Mar httpWWvVferretcomaucTW-Woods-Constructions
Date of access 25 Jun 2009
[14] LOUGHRAN J 2009 The flow of coal through transfer chutes 20 Aug
Showcase of research excellence James Cook University Australia
[15] ONEIL M 2006 A guide to coal chute replacement Power Engineering
International Nov httpgoliathecnextcomcoms2lgi 0198-369643Ashy
guide-to-coal-chutehtml Date of access 3 Jul 2009
[16] NORDELL LK 1992 A new era in overland conveyor belt design
httpWWvVckitcozasecureconveyorpaperstroughedoverlandoverland
htm Date of access 3 Jul 2009
The optimisation of transfer chutes in the bulk materials industry
MN van Aarde
106
REFERENCES
[17] Rowland C 1992 Dust Control at Transfer Points
httpwwwckitcozasecureconveyorpapersbionic-research-2d-bri2shy
paper05htm Date of access 4 Jul 2009
[18] KRAM ENGINEERING Ceramic composite impact blocks
httpwwwkramengineeringcozacercomhtmIDate of access
5 Jul 2009
I19] BLAZEK C 2005 Kinkaid InteliFlo tradeInstallation Source for Plats
Power Atticle Oct
httpwwwbenetechusacompdf caseStudyBe neKi ncArti c pdf
Date of access 10 Aug 2009
[20] CRP Engineering Corp Modern Transfer Chute Designs for Use in
Material Handling
httpwwwcbpengineeringcompdflTransfer Chutespdf Date of access
26 Apr 2010
[21] ROZENTALS J 2008 Rational design of conveyor chutes Bionic
Research Institute South African Institute of Materials Handling
[22] ROBERTS AW SCOTT OJ 1981 Flow of bulk solids through
transfer chutes of variable geometry and profile Bulk Solids Handling
1(4) Dec
[23] CARSON JW ROYAL TA GOODWILL DJ 1986 Understanding
and Eliminating Particle Segregation Problems Bulk Solids Handling
6(1) Feb
[24] BENJAMIN CW 2004 The use of parametric modelling to design
transfer chutes and other key components Gulf Conveyor Group The optimisation of transfer chutes in the bulk materials industry
MN van Aarde
107
l25] STUART DICK D ROYAL TA 1992 Design Principles for Chutes to
Handle Bulk Solids Bulk Solids Handling 12(3) Sep
[26J REICKS AV RUDOLPHI TJ 2004 The Importance and Prediction of
Tension Distribution around the Conveyor Belt Path Bulk materials
handling by conveyor belt 5(2)
(271 RAMOS CM 1991 The real cost of degradation
institute Chute design conference 1991
Bionic research
[28] ROBERTS AW 1969 An investigation of the gravity flow of non
cohesive granular materials through discharge chutes Transactions of
the ACMEjournal of engineering for indust~ May
[29] TAYLOR HJ 1989 Guide to the design of transfer chutes and chute
linings for bulk materials
association 1989
mechanical handling engineers
[30] ROBERTS AW 1999 Chute design application transfer chute design
Design guide for chutes in bulk solids handling The University of
Newcastle Australia
[31] NORDELL LK 1994 Palabora installs Curved Transfer Chute in Hard
Rock to Minimise Belt Cover Wear Bulk Solids Handling 14 Dec
[32] ROZENTALS J 1991 Flow of Bulk Solids in Chute Design
research institute Chute design conference 1991
Bionic
The optimisation oftransfer chutes in the bulk materials industry
MN van Aarde
108
REFERENCES
[33] ROBERTS AW WICHE SJ 2007 Feed Chute Geometry for
Minimum Belt Wear (h International conference of bulk materials
handling 17 Oct
[34J POWDER HANDLING New OEM Conveyor Transfer Chute Design
Software Helix Technologies
httpvwvwpowderhandlingcomauarticesnew-dem-conveyor-transfershy
chute-design-software Date of access 12 Aug 2009
[35J SAWLEY ML CLEARY PW 1999 A Parallel Discrete Element
Method for Industrial Granular Flow SimUlations EPFL - Super
Computing Review (11)
[36] DEWICKI G 2003 Bulk Material Handling and Processing - Numerical
Techniques and Simulation of Granular Material Overland Conveyor
Company Bulk Solids Handling 23(2)
[37J FA VIER J 2009 Continuing Improvements Boost use of Discrete
Element Method Oil and Gas Engineer- Production Processing 7 Oct
[38] KRAUS E F KA TTERFELD A Usage of the Discrete Element Method in
Conveyor Technologies Institute for Conveyor Technologies (IFSL) The
Otto-von-Guericke University of Magdeburg
[39] MOYS MH VAN NIEROP MA VAN TONDER JC GLOVER G
2005 Validation of the Discrete Element Method (OEM) by Comparing
Predicted Load Behaviour of a Grinding Mill with Measured Data School
for Process and Materials Engineering University of Witwatersrand
Johannesburg The optimisation of transfer materials industry
MN van Aarde
109
REFERENCES
[40J MciLVINA P MOSSAD R 2003 Two dimensional transfer chute
analysis using a continuum method Third international conference on
CFD in the Minerals and Process Industry CSIRO Melbourne Australia
(41J Overland Conveyor Company Inc 2009 Applied DEM
httpwwwapplieddemcomDate of access 26 Apr 2010
(42] DEM SOLUTIONS 2008 Advanced Particle Simulation Capabilities with
EDEM 21 Press release 5 Nov
[43J DEM SOLUTIONS 2008 Martin Engineering Expands use of EDEMTM
Software in Design of Solids Handling Equipment Press release 20 Feb
(44] COETZEE CJ ELS DNJ 2009 Calibration of Discrete Element
Parameters and the Modelling of Silo Discharge and Bucket Filling
Computers and Electronics in Agriculture 65 Mar
[45] DAVID J KRUSES PE Conveyor Belt Transfer Chute Modelling and
Other Applications using The Discrete Element Method in the Material
Handling Industry
httpwwwckitcozasecureconveyorpaperstrouqhedconveyorconveyor
Date of access 3 Sep 2009
bulk materials industry
MN van Aarde
110
ApPENDIXA
ApPENDIX A MATERIAL TESTS AND LINER SELECTiON
The optimisation of-transfer chutes in the bulk materials industry
MN van Aarde
11-1
ApPENDIX A
MATERIAL TEST WORK AND LINER SELECTION
Material samples were taken from the stockpile area for evaluation and testing
These samples represent the worst case materials for impact wear and flow
problems Tests were conducted by external consultants as this is a speciality
field Therefore no detail information on how the tests are conducted is currently
available Results from these tests should indicate the worst case parameters for
chute design according to each specific liner type tested
The material handled by the facility varied from 4 mm to 34 mm lump size A mid
range lump size ore was identified as the preferred material to use for wear
testing This decision was based on the specific ore type maximum lump size of
15 mm as required for the wear test The wear test apparatus used cannot
provide conclusive results with the larger lump sizes of 34 mm and thus smaller
sizes are used Guidance on which ore samples to take was given by the
external consultants tasked with performing the test work
The test work is divided into two sections Firstly the flow test work is carried out
on the finer material with a higher clay content known to have bad flow angles
Included in the selection of fine materials is a sample of the scraper dribblings
This is the material scraped off the belt underneath the head pulley Secondly
the wear tests were conducted on 15 mm samples as explained above
A few common liners were selected for testing These liners are shown in
Table A Some of these liners are known for their specific purpose and
characteristics Polyurethane is known to have a very good coefficient of friction
and will therefore improve the flow of material This material does however
wear out quicker in high impact applications Therefore it is only considered for
use inside the dribbling chute
The optimisation of transfer chutes in the bulk materials industry
MN van Aarde
112
ApPENDIX A
As can be seen from Figure 37 in section 432 the dribbling chute will only see
scraper dribblings from the primary and secondary scrapers It is protected from
any main stream flow of material by the start up chute This makes the
polyurethane liner a prime candidate for lining this section of the chute
Table A Material tested vs liner type
I Flow Tests Wear Tests
Liner T
en aJ c
u
I
i
N en aJ c
u
Cf)
en aJ c
u
I en
shy OJaJ C 0 shyj -shy 0 u pound
(f) shy0
T
aJ ~ j 0 0
N aJ ~ j 0 0 i
I Chrome x x x x x
Carbide
x x x x xI VRN 500 I
x x x x x x94
Alumina
Ceramic i I
Poly x
Urethane I I I
FLOW TEST WORK
The fines 1 sample was tested at three different moisture contents of 36 41
and 47 This is 70 80 and 90 of saturation moisture respectively No
noticeable difference was observed in the wall friction angles Therefore the
fines 2 and fines 3 samples were tested at 80 of saturation which is 42 and
43 moisture content respectively
Test work showed that the minimum chute angle required for flow increased as
the impact pressure increased Chute angles were measured up to impact
pressures of about 8 kPa The worst chute angle obtained was 62deg This means
that no angle inside the chute should be less than 62deg from the horizontal
The industry 113
MN van Aarde
ApPENDIXA
The scraper dribblings were tested at a moisture content of 12 This material
possesses the most clay content and therefore has the worst flow properties
During testing of this material water was added to improve the flow At an
impact pressure of 03 kPa the minimum chute angle drops from 62deg to 56deg when
adding a fine mist spray of water
WEAR TEST WORK
As stated in chapter 4 wear tests were conducted on the chrome carbide
overlay ceramics and VRN500 The results of these tests are shown as non
dimensional wear ratios of mm wearmm travel of bulk solid sliding on the wear
liners coupon at a given force Test results shown in Table B indicate that the
chrome carbide will have about 185 times the lifetime of 94 alumina ceramics
The VRN500 liner will wear about 6 times faster than the 94 alumina ceramics
at the same force
Table B Wear ratios of liners at two different pressure ranges
lore Wall Coupon 65 kPa 163kPa -173 kPa I i
Coarse 1 on 94 Alumina Ceramic 90 E-9 37 E-8
Coarse 1 on Chrome Carbide 87 E-9 20 E-8
Coarse 1 on VRN500 91 E-8 I 24 E-7 i
Coarse 2 on 94 Alumina Ceramics 38 E-9 22 E-8
Coarse 2 on Chrome Carbide 55 E-9 15 E-8
Coarse 2 on VRN500 66 E-8 25 E-7 I
LINER SELECTION
The lifetime of the liners is not the only criteria Maintainability and cost are also
factors that must be considered Chrome carbide seems to be the liner of choice
for this application However the specific type of chrome carbide tested is not
The optimisation of transfer chutes industry 114
MN van Aarde
ApPEND[xA
manufactured locally and the imported cost is approximately three times that of
ceramics
VRN500 is slightly cheaper than ceramics and can easily be bolted to the back
plate of the chute which makes maintenance very simple Ceramics are
however widely used on the facility and the maintenance teams are well trained
for this specific liner Therefore 94 alumina ceramics is chosen for this
application
The optimisation of transfer chutes in the bulk materials industry
MN van Aarde
115
ApPENODlt B
ApPENDIX B CHUTE CONTROL PHILOSOPHY
The optfmisation of transfer chutes in the bulk materials industry
MN van Aarde
116
ApPENDIX B
SPOON IN THE OPERATING POSITION
For the spoon to be in the operating position the moving head must be over that
specific spoon and the feeding stockyard conveyor must be running This means
that material will be fed through the chute In this case the spoon needs to be in
the operating position to prevent spillage
However when the chute is in the operating position and the feeding conveyor
trips for any reason the actuated spoon section must not move to the non
operating position If the spoon position feedback fails then the system must trip
and the spoon must remain in its last position The downstream conveyor must
also fail to start with this condition
SPOON IN THE NON OPERATING POSITION
As a rule the spoon needs to be in the non operating position when the moving
head on that specific stockyard conveyor is in the purging position (position C)
The reason is that when a stacker reclaimer is in stacking mode any upstream
stacker reclaimer can be reclaiming The reclaimed material on CV 5 or CV 6
will have to pass underneath the actuated chute
ACTUATED SPOON OVER CV 5
As an example for the movement of any actuated spoon on CV 5 the following
are considered When the moving heads of any of the stockyard conveyors are
in position A and that specific stockyard conveyor is running then the rest of the
actuated spoons over CV 5 must be in the non operating position The
following scenario provides a better understanding
bull CV 4 is running
bull CV 4 moving head is in position A
The optimisation of transfer chutes in the bulk materials industry
MN van Aarde
117
ApPENDIXB
In this situation all the actuated spoons on CV 5 except underneath CV 4
must be in the non operating position
ACTUATED SPOON OVER CV 6
As an example for the movement of any actuated spoon on CV 6 the following
are considered When the moving heads of any of the stockyard conveyors are
in position B and that specific stockyard conveyor is running then the rest of the
actuated spoons over CV 6 must be in the non operating position The
following scenario is similar to 453 but explains the control philosophy for the
moving head in position B
bull CV 2 is running
bull CV 2 moving head is in position B
In this situation all the actuated spoons on CV 6 except underneath CV 2
must be in the non operating position
The optimisation of transfer chutes in bulk materials industry
MN van Aarde
118
ACKNOWLEDGEMENTS
ACKNOWLEDGEMENTS
I would like to thank Prof EH Mathews for the opportunity to do my Masters
degree
Special thanks to Dr M Kleingeld for his guidance and effort in assisting me in
my attempt to deliver a dissertation of this standard
Thank you to Prof Lesley Greyvenstein for the language editing
To my family thank you for all your support and encouragement throughout the
execution of this study
------________--__------------shyThe optimisation of transfer chutes in the bulk materials industry
MN van Aarde
vi
TABLE OF CONTENTS ---~-------------------~----
TABLE OF CONTENTS
Abstract ii
Samevatting iv
Acknowledgements vi
Table of contents vii
List of figures ix
List of tables xii
Nomenclature xiii
Chapter 1 Introduction to transfer chutes in the bulk materials handling industry1
11 Introduction to transfer chutes 2
12 Various applications and configurations of transfer chutes 5
13 Recurring chute problems and countermeasures from industry 11
14 Purpose of this research 18
15 Synopsis of this dissertation 19
Chapter 2 Basic considerations in chute design 21
21 Preface 22
22 Design objectives 22
23 Integrating a more appropriate chute layout with the plant constraints 27
24 Investigating the correct chute profile for reduced liner wear 30
25 Feed chute geometry for reduced belt wear 34
26 Conclusion37
Chapter 3 Tests for the identification of recurring problems on existing chutes39
31 Preface 40
32 Test methodology 40
33 Chute performance acceptance criteria 42
34 Discussion of problem areas 42
35 Summary of test results 54
36 Conclusion55
The optimisation of transfer chutes in the bulk materials industry
MN van Aarde
vii
TABLE OF CONTENTS
Chapter 4 Dynamic chutes for the elimination of recurring problems 57
41 Preface 58
42 Consideration of the existing transfer point constraints 59
43 Design of the chute profile 61
44 Incorporating a dead box in the impact areas 67
45 Designing the chute for integration with system requirements 73
46 Conclusion75
Chapter 5 Testing and verification ofthe new solution 77
51 Preface 78
52 Selecting a test methodology 79
53 Determination of material properties 85
54 Verification of the selected test methodology for this application 88
55 Verification of new chute configuration and optimisation of the hood
location 92
56 Effect of the honeycomb structure in high impact zones 95
58 Conclusion 97
Chapter 6 Conclusions and Recommendations 99
61 Conclusions and recommendations 100
62 Recommendations for further study 103
References 1 05
Appendix A Material Tests And Liner Selection 111
Appendix B Chute Control Philosophy 116
The optimisation of transfer chutes in the bulk materials industry
MN van Aarde
viii
LIST OF FIGURES
LIST OF FIGURES
Figure 1 Growth in global crude steel production from 1996 to 2006 [2] 2
Figure 2 Typical in-line transfer point [6] 4
Figure 3 90deg transfer point [7J 4
Fig ure 4 Material lump sizes through a crushing plant 6
Figure 5 Stacker Reclaimer in reclaiming mode 7
Figure 6 Typical dead box [11J9
Figure 7 Typical cascade chute [11] 9
Figure 8 Typical dynamic chute [12] 10
Figure 9 Radial door used in chutes under ore passes or silos [11] 1 0
Figure 10 Flopper gate diverting material to different receiving conveyors [11J 11
Figure 11 Ch ute liner degradation 12
Figure 12 Results of continuous belt wear at transfer points 13
Figure 1 Dust from a transfer point onto a stockpie13
Figure 14 Ceramic composite liners [18]15
Figure 15 Benetech Inteliflow J-Glide transfer chute [19] 16
Figure 16 Flow simulation of the Benetech Ineliflo chute [19] 17
Figure 17 Four step process for plant design and commissioning [1] 27
Figure 18 Vertical curve on incline conveyor 28
Figure 19 Protective roller on a transfer chute 29
Figure 20 Geometry of the impact plate and material trajectory [30J30
Figure 21 Model for the impact of a particle on a flat surface [29] 31
Figure 22 Ore flow path in the curved chute onto the incline conveyor [31] 35
Figure 23 Gentle deceleration of the product before impact on the receiving belt
[32] 35
Figure 24 Typical feed chute discharge model [33] 37
Figure 25 Layout of conveyors for chute test work 43
Figure 26 Configuration of the existing transfer chute44
Figure 27 Clear chute indicating camera angle 46
The optimisation of transfer chutes in the bulk materials industry
MN van Aarde
ix
LIST OF FIGURES
Figure 28 Coarse material at 8 000 tlh 46
Figure 29 Fine material at 8 000 tlh 47
Figure 30 Blocked chute with coarse material at 8600 tIh 47
Figure 31 Damaged side skirt 49
Figure 32 View behind the chute of the receiving conveyor before loading 50
Figure 33 View behind the chute of the receiving conveyor during loading 50
Figure 34 Peak surges experienced during reclaiming operations 52
Figure 35 Stockyard head end layout 59
Figure 36 Dimensional constraints on the existing transfer configuration 60
Figure 37 Hood and spoon configuration for the 90deg transfer 63
Figure 38 Hood velocity profile 65
Figure 39 Spoon velocity profile 66
Figure 40 Chute cross section 67
Fig ure 43 Honeycomb wear box positioning 69
Figure 44 Wear box in the hood section 70
Figure 45 Spacing arrangement of honeycomb ribs inside the hood 71
Figure 46 Wear box in the spoon section 72
Figure 47 Liner detail of the spoon honeycomb wear box 73
Figure 41 Spoon in the operational position 74
Figure 42 Spoon in the non operational position 75
Figure 48 Flow analysis examples a) separation and screening b) hoppers
feeders [36J 80
Figure 49 Simulations results from Fluenttrade [4OJ 83
Figure 50 Simulation results from Bulk Flow Analysttrade [41J83
Figure 51 Determination of material properties for an accurate angle of repose88
Figure Actual material flow with coarse Sat 10 000 tIh 89
Figure 53 Material flow pattem through the existing chute 90
Figure 54 Cross sectional side view of material flow through the existing chute91
Figure 55 Material flow through hood at 10 000 tlh 92
Figure 56 Material flow through spoon at 10 000 tlh 93
Figure 57 Determination of the optimum hood location 94
The optimisation of transfer chutes in the bulk materials industry
MN van Aarde
x
OF FIGURES
Figure 58 Material behaviour through hood 96
Figure 59 Material behaviour through spoon 96
The optimisation of transfer chutes in the bulk materials industry
MN van Aarde
xi
LIST OF TABLES
LIST OF TABLES
Table 1 Design Input Reference Requirements [24J 24
Table 2 Iron are grades used for chute test work 45
Table 3 Results from test programme 54
The optimisation of transfer chutes in the bulk materials industry
M N van Aarde
xii
---------------------------------
CV
NOMENCLATURE
NOMENCLATURE
SCADA
CCTV
CEMA
DEM
kPa
mm
MSHA
ms
mt
MW
NIOSH
OSHA
RampD
tlh
3D
Supervisory Control And Data Acquisition
Closed Circuit Television
Conveyor Equipment Manufacturers Association
Conveyor
Discrete Element Method
Kilopascal
Millimetres
Mine Safety and Health Administration
Metres per second
Metric Tons
Megawatt
National Institute for Occupational Safety and Health
Occupational Safety and Health Administration
Radius of curvature
Research and Development
Tons per hour
Three Dimensional
The optimisation of transfer chutes in the bulk materials industry
MN van Aarde
xiii
CHAPTER 1
CHAPTER 1 INTRODUCTION TO TRANSFER CHUTES IN THE BULK
MATERIALS HANDLING INDUSTRY
The optimisation of transfer chutes in the bulk materials industry
MN van Aarde
1
CHAPTER 1
11 INTRODUCTION TO TRANSFER CHUTES
111 Bulk material handling industry
In order to comprehend the utilisation of transfer chutes fully it is imperative to
first understand the industry in which it is used Transfer chutes are most
commonly used in the bulk materials handling industry Bulk materials handling
operations perform a key function in a great number and variety of industries
throughout the world as stated in 1978 by Arnold McLean and Roberts [1 J
The nature of materials handling and scale of industrial operation varies from
industry to industry and country to country These variations are based on the
industrial and economic capacity and requirements of the specific industry or
country Regardless of the variations in industry the relative costs of storing
handling and transporting bulk materials are in the majority of cases very
significant
o
Figure 1 Growth in global crude steel production from 1996 to 2006 [2J
The optimisation of transfer chutes in the bulk materials industry
MN van Aarde
2
CHAPTER 1
The chart from BHP Billiton shown in Figure 1 provides a clear indication of the
actual drivers of global materials demand Figure 1 indicates the percentage
growth in crude steel production from all the major role players between 1996
and 2006 China accounted for 65 of the 494 million tonnes of global steel
production growth between 1996 and 2006 Europe grew by 6 while the other
countries grew by 20 [2]
These figures emphasise that bulk materials handling performs a key function in
the global industry and economy [1] Because of market requirements new
products continuously evolve This is also true for the field of bulk conveying
technologies [3] It can be assumed that the evolution of new technology is due
to the requirement for more efficient and cost effective operation
The case study which will be discussed from Chapter 3 onwards is an iron ore
export facility This facility exports approximately 50 million tonnes per annum
With each hour of down time the financial losses equate to approximately
R750 000 This highlights the fact that handling systems should be designed and
operated with a view to achieving maximum efficiency and reliability
112 Function of transfer chutes
BS2890 (Specification for Troughed Belt Conveyors) gives the definition for
transfer chutes as follows A straight curved or spiral open topped or enclosed
smooth trough by which materials are directed and lowered by gravity [4] For
any belt conveyor system to operate successfully the system requires that [5]
bull the conveyor belt be loaded properly
bull the material transported by the conveyor is discharged properly
The transfer of bulk material can either be from a belt bin hopper feeder or
stockpile and occurs at a transfer point In most cases this transfer point requires
optimisation of transfer chutes in the bulk materials industry
MN van Aarde
3
CHAPTER 1 - ----~--~--------------~--------
a transfer chute [5] In industry the most common use of transfer chutes is for
transferring bulk material from one conveyor belt to another This transfer of
material can be done in any direction as simplistically explained in Figure 2 and
Figure 3
Figure 2 Typical in-line transfer point [6J
Figure 2 shows a basic in-line transfer of material from the end of one conveyor
belt onto the start of another conveyor belt Figure 3 illustrates a more intricate
design where the direction of material transport is changed by an angle of 90 0 bull
This design or any other design entailing a directional change in flow normally
requires more detailed engineering [7
The optimisation of transfer chutes in the bulk materials industry
MN van Aarde
4
CHAPTER 1
Regardless of the direction or type of transfer there are some design
requirements that always need special attention Some of these requirements
are reduced wear on chute liners correct discharge velocity minimum material
degradation and minimum belt abrasion The correct design will also eliminate
blockages shape the load correctly and minimise the creation of dust [7]
12 VARIOUS APPLICATIONS AND CONFIGURATIONS OF TRANSFER CHUTES
The application of transfer chutes is central to any operation in the bulk handling
industry Whether it is mining operations storing stacking importing or
exporting of bulk material the transfer of material is always required On the
mining side the challenges involved with materials handling are probably some of
the most extreme
This is due to the great variation in lump sizes that must be catered for At
Sishen iron ore mine seven iron ore products are produced conforming to
different chemical and physical specifications The current mining process at
Sishen entails [8]
bull Removal of topsoil and stockpiling
bull Drilling and blasting of ore
bull Loading of iron ore and transporting to the crushers
bull Crushing and screening into size fractions
bull Beneficiation of all size fractions
bull Stockpiling onto various product beds
The processes with the most intricate and complex chute arrangements are
probably crushing and screening as well as stacking and reclaiming of material
The optimisation of transfer chutes in the bulk materials industry
11 N van Aarde
5
CHAPTER 1
121 Crushing
An excavator or wheeled loader transfers the rock to be crushed into the feed
hopper of the primary crusher The primary crusher breaks the large rock
boulders or run of mine material into smaller grain sizes Some of the bigger
crushers in the industry can crack boulders that are about one cubic meter in
size All the crushed material passes over a screen to separate the different
lump sizes The material that falls through the screen is transferred via a series
of transfer chutes and conveyor belts to the stockpile area [9]
Where the material does not pass through the screen another system of transfer
chutes and conveyor belts transfers this material to a secondary crusher The
material is fed into this crusher via a transfer chute from the discharge of a
conveyor belt All the processed material is then transferred to the stockpile area
via a separate series of transfer chutes and conveyor systems [9] Throughout
this whole process the material lump size changes and with it the transfer chute
requirements
Figure 4 Material lump sizes through a crushing plant
The optimisation of transfer chutes in the bulk materials industry
MN van Aarde
6
CHAPTER 1
Figure 4 shows some spillage from a conveyor between a primary and secondary
crusher The shovel in the picture provides a good reference as to the variation
in material lump size on the walkway
122 Stacking and Recaiming
Normally the stockyard area has an elongated yard conveyor for moving bulk
material in the longitudinal direction of the stockyard Straddling the yard
conveyor transversely is the rail mounted undercarriage of the stacker reclaimer
Three main chutes transfer material through the machine [10] Figure 5 shows
this machine in action while reclaiming material from a stockpile
Figure 5 Stacker Reclaimer in reclaiming mode
The first chute will transfer material to the incline conveyor of the machine when
the material has to be stacked on the stockpile In the case where the material
must bypass the machine this chute will transfer material from the tripper back
onto the yard conveyor [10]
The optimisation of transfer chutes in the bulk materials industry
MN van Aarde
7
CHAPTER 1
The second chute transfers material from the incline conveyor onto the boom
conveyor This is normally a difficult process because the boom conveyor is
never in the same direction as the incline conveyor From the end of the boom
conveyor the material is Simply discharged onto the stockpile [10]
When reclaiming stockpile material the bucket whee at the head end of the
boom conveyor scoops up material and deposits it back onto the boom conveyor
From here it is discharged into the centre chute of the machine This chute then
discharges the material onto the yard conveyor for further processing In some
cases the bottom section of this centre chute must be moved out of the way to
allow free passage of material discharged from the tripper chute onto the yard
conveyor [10]
123 Chute configurations
Various chute configurations are used in the bulk materials handling industry
These configurations depend on the specific requirements of the system layout
or material properties There are basically two main configurations consisting of
dead box chutes and dynamic chutes Both of these configurations have their
specific applications in industry The major difference is that dead box chutes
use the material being transferred as a chute liner whereas dynamic chutes are
lined with a high wear resistant material A combination of both can also be
used
If the material being transferred is relatively dry such as goid ore dead boxes
prove to be more beneficial One of the applications of a ded box is to absorb
the direct impact of material discharged from a conveyor into a head chute as
can be seen in Figure 6 Other applications are in long or high transfer points In
these transfers the momentum of falling material must be reduced before
reaching the receiving conveyor belt in order to reduce wear of the belt [11]
The optimisation of transfer chutes in the bulk materials industry
MN van Aarde
8
CHAPTER 1
Figure 6 Typical dead box [11]
As shown in Figure 7 dead boxes are also used to accomplish changes in the
vertical flow direction by inserting angled panels This configuration where dead
boxes are used as deflection plates or impact wear plates is known as a cascade
chute In this case the deflection plate or the impact wear plate hardness is
equal to that of the feed material [11]
Figure 7 Typical cascade chute [11]
The hood and spoon chute or dynamic chute is configured so that the hood
catches and changes the material trajectory path to exit with a vertical velocity
When the material impacts the spoon it slides down the smooth spoon surface
The material flow direction is changed to the direction of the receiving conveyor
as shown in Figure 8 [12]
The optimisation of transfer chutes in the bulk materials industry
MN van Aarde
9
CHAPTER 1
Figure 8 Typical dynamic chute [12J
Ancillary equipment used with this configuration of chutes is radial doors and
flopper gates Radial doors are used successfully below ore passes or silos for
an onoff feed control as shown by Figure 9 One drawback of radial doors is the
possibility of jamming while closing In order to counteract this problem a
knocker arm between the cylinder door and the rod can be added This helps to
close the door with full force open with reduced force or hammered open [11]
Figure 9 Radial door used in chutes under ore passes or silos [11J
The optimisation of transfer chutes in the bulk materials industry
MN van Aarde
10
CHAPTER 1
The function of a f10pper gate is to divert the flow of material in a chute when one
conveyor is required to feed either of two discharge points as shown in Figure 10
For this same purpose a diverter car can also be used where a section of the
chute moves in and out of the path of material flow The critical area in the
design of a flop per gate is the hinge point In order for the gate to be self
cleaning the hinge point should be placed above the apex of the double chute
This also prevents rock traps that can jam the gate [11]
COVERED
Figure 10 Flopper gate diverling material to different receiving conveyors [11J
13 RECURRING CHUTE PROBLEMS AND COUNTERMEASURES FROM INDUSTRY
Transfer chutes are a fundamental link when conveying ore and therefore it is
important to get it right at the outset of design and fabrication Design and
fabrication issues can cause numerous problems when transferring material
Historically conveyor system design focused on the systems overall structural
integrity while ensuring that the equipment would fit within the facilitys
constraints [13] [14] [15]
The optimisation of transfer chutes in the bulk materials industry
MN van Aarde
11
CHAPTER 1
Little attention was given to design analysis or consideration for material flow
characteristics Normally the solution for controlling flow was to implement
simple rock boxes [15] This type of chute configuration is still commonly used in
industry but with more emphasis on the flow of material The most recurrent
problems on transfer chutes are [13] [14]
bull Spillage
bull Blocked chutes
bull High wear on the receiving belt due to major differences between the
material velocity and the belt velocity
bull Rapid chute wear
bull Degradation of the material being transferred
bull Excessive generation of dust and noise
bull Miss tracking of the receiving conveyor belt due to skew loading from the
transfer chute
Figure 11 Chute liner degradation
Figure 11 shows the excessive wear on ceramic tiles where the material
trajectory from the feeding belt impacts the chute These tiles are replaceable
and a maintenance schedule normally specifies the replacement intervals A
The optimisation of transfer chutes in the bulk materials industry 12
MN van Aarde
CHAPTER 1
problem arises when the frequency of these maintenance intervals is too high
due to excessive wear on the liners
Figure 12 Results of continuous belt wear at transfer points
The conveyor belt can account for up to 60 of the capital cost of a bulk
materials handling plant This means that the cost implications of constant
replacement of a conveyor belt due to wear can become significantly higher
than the original capital investment [16] Figure 12 shows the extreme damage
on a conveyor belt caused by abrasion and gouging
Figure 13 Dust from a transfer point onto a stockpile
The optimisation of transfer chutes in the bulk materials industry
MN van Aarde
13
CHAPTER 1 --~ ---------------------------shy
The presence of dust is an indisputable fact in many industries concerned with
the handling or processing of products such as coal mineral ores and many
others [17] As in the case of spillage it is easy to identify transfer systems that
cause dust clouds Environmental regulations are in place to prevent excessive I
dust emissions
Government organisations such as the Occupational Safety and Health
Administration (OSHA) the Mine Safety and Health Administration (MSHA) and
the National Institute for Occupational Safety and Health (NIOSH) closely monitor
dust levels at all coal handling facilities [13] Therefore it is imperative that the
chute design process caters for limiting dust emissions
Systems normally used in industry are enclosed skirting systems bag houses
and dust collectors This however is only treating the symptom rather than
eliminating the primary cause In order to minimise dust generation the use of
low impact angles and minimal chute contact is required (14] One of the most
successful methods of controlling dust is atomised water spray systems using a
combination of high pressure water and chemical substances
Over the years considerable research has gone into minimising wear on transfer
chutes There are currently a few different liner types to choose from depending
on the configuration and application of the chute These include ceramic tiles
chrome carbide overlay materials and typi~al hardened steel plates such as
VRN A combination of liner materials can also be used similar to the one
shown in Figure 14
The opUmisation of transfer chutes in the bulk materials industry
MN van Aarde
14
CHAPTER 1
Figure 14 Ceramic composite liners [18J
This ceramic composite liner is an example of the new technology available in
chute lining materials It is a high wear resistant surface made from cylindrical
alumina ceramic pellets bound within a resilient rubber base The purpose of this
material is to provide wear resistance through the use of ceramics while the
rubber dampens the impact forces [18]
Some innovative concepts for chute design have been implemented since the
materials handling industry started to incorporate new ideas Benetech Inc
installed a new generation hood and spoon type chute at Dominions 1200 MW
Kincaid coal powered generating station as shown in Figure 15 This chute
replaced the conventional dead box chute [19] Their innovation is to use a pipe
configuration combined with the hood and spoon concept
The optimisation of transfer chutes in the bulk materials industry
MN van Aarde
15
CHAPTER 1
Figure 15 Benetech Inteliflow J-Gide transfer chute [19J
This chute has sufficient chute wall slope and cross sectional area to prevent
material build-up and blocked chutes Reduced collision forces in the chute
minimize material degradation and the creation of excessive dust The material
velocity in the chute is controlled by the wall angles to obtain a discharge velocity
with the same horizontal component as the belt velocity [19] Figure 16 shows a
flow simulation of the Benetech concept The simulation shows that this concept
will result in lower impact forces and reduce belt abrasion
The optimisation of transfer chutes in the bulk materials industry
MN van Aarde
16
CHAPTER 1
Figure 16 Flow simulation ofthe Benetech Ineliflo chute [19J
CBP Engineering Corp also considers the concept of pipe type sections to be
the answer to most of the transfer chute problems They describe it as a curved
or half round chute The modern perception is to gently guide the material in the
required direction rather than use a square box design or deflector doors which
turns or deflects the flow [20]
The industry is striving towards developing new technology in transfer chute
design One solution is to incorporate soft loading transfer chutes to alter the
material flow direction with minimum impact on the side walls of chute and
receiving conveyor As experienced by many industries these types of chutes
can transfer material onto the receiving conveyor at almost the same velocity as
the conveyor By doing so many of the problems with material transfer can be
eliminated [13]
Most of these solutions as proposed by industry only address a few of the
numerous problems experienced with transfer chutes The dynamic hood and
The optimisation of transfer chutes in the bulk materials industry
MN van Aarde
17
CHAPTER 1
spoon chute appears to afford the best opportunity for solving most of the
problems There are still however many unanswered questions surrounding this
design
Figure 11 shows the installation of a hood type chute in the iron ore industry It is
clear from this image that liner wear in the higher impact areas is still an area of
concern Improvements can still be made to this design in order to further
enhance its performance
14 PURPOSE OF THIS RESEARCH
The bulk materials handling industry is constantly facing the challenge of
implementing transfer chutes that satisfy all the system requirements Problems
such as high wear spillage blockages and the control of material flow are just
some of the major challenges faced by the industry
The objective of this research is to identify problems experienced with transfer
chutes of an existing bulk handling system and to apply current design solutions
in eliminating these problems In doing so the research aims to introduce a new
method of minimising liner wear caused by high impact velocities
Dynamic chutes are discussed in particular where the entire design process
addresses the problems identified on chutes in brown field projects Approaching
chute design from a maintenance point of view with the focus on reducing liner I
degradation will provide a fresh approach to transfer chute design The
concepts disc~ssed in this dissertation (dynamic and dead box chutes) are
commonly used in industry However some research is done to determine
whether a combination of these concepts can solve some of the problems
experienced by industry
The optimisation of transfer chutes in the bulk materials industry 18
MN van Aarde
CHAPTER 1
At the hand of all the information provided in this dissertation its purpose is to
enable the chute designers to better understand the process of chute
optimisation and design This is achieved through the discussion of a case study
where the chutes are evaluated and re-designed to achieve the desired
performance
15 SYNOPSIS OF THIS DISSERTATION
Chapter 1 gives an introduction to the bulk materials industry and the role that
transfer chutes plays in this industry Some of the problems that the industries
have been experiencing with transfer chutes were identified and the diverse
solutions to these problems discussed These solutions were reviewed to
identify whether improvement would be possible
Chapter 2 provides a better understanding of the functionality and the
conceptualisation of transfer chutes as well as investigating the theory behind
material flow through transfer chutes This theory reviews the research and
design objectives used as a guideline when approaching a new chute
configuration The guidelines for evaluating and designing transfer chutes are
used to verify the performance of these chutes in the iron ore industry
Chapter 3 identifies some practical problems experienced on transfer chutes a~
an existing bulk transfer facility These problems are identified through a series
of tests where the actual flow inside the chutes is monitored via CCTV cameras
The results obtained from these tests are specific to this facility but can provide
insight into the cause of some problems generally experienced in the industry
These results can provide helpful information when modifying or re-designing
new transfer chutes
Chapter 4 uses the theory discussed in Chapter 2 to conceptualise a new
transfer chute configuration for the transfer points that were tested All the facility
The optimisation of transfer chutes in the bulk materials industry 19
MN van Aarde
CHAPTER 1
constraints are taken into account during the process in order to obtain an
optimum solution to the problems identified during the chute test work The old
chutes did not have major problems with liner wear due to large dead boxes
However this remains a serious consideration for the new dynamic chute design
due to its configuration where there is continuous sliding abrasion of the chute
surface A new concept for the reduction of liner degradation is introduced in this
chapter
Before manufacturing and installing this new concept it is important to verify that
it will perform according to conceptual design Chapter 5 is a discussion on the
use of the Discrete Element Method as a verification tool A simulation of the
new transfer chute concept is done to visualise the behaviour of the material as it
passes through the new transfer chute configuration
Chapter 6 discusses the benefits of the new transfer chute configuration A
conclusion is made as to what the financial implications will be with the
implementation of this new concept Recommendations are made for future
studies in the field of bulk materials handling These recommendations focus on
the optimisation of processes and the reduction of maintenance cost to the
facility
The optimisation of transfer chutes in the bulk materials industry
MN van Aarde
20
CHAPTER 2
CHAPTER 2 BASIC CONSIDERATIONS IN CHUTE DESIGN
The optimisation of transfer chutes in the bulk materials industry
MN van Aarde
21
CHAPTER 2
21 PREFACE
In an economic driven world the pressure for production is often the cause of the
loss of production This is a bold statement and is more factual than what the
industry would like to admit This is also valid in the bulk materials handling
industry Production targets seldom allow time for investigation into the root
cause of the problems The quick fix option is often adopted but is frequently the
cause of even more maintenance stoppages
Existing chutes on brown field projects often fail due to an initial disregard for the
design criteria changes in the system parameters or lack of maintenance
These transfer points are often repaired on site by adding or removing platework
and ignoring the secondary functions of a transfer chute Therefore it is
imperative to always consider the basic chute specifications when addressing a
material transfer problem [21]
22 DESIGN OBJECTIVES
In the quest to improve or design any transfer point some ground rules must be
set This can be seen as a check list when evaluating an existing chute or
designing a new chute Transfer chutes should aim to meet the following
requirements as far as possible [21] [22] [23]
bull Ensure that the required capacity can be obtained with no risk of blockage
bull Eliminate spillage
bull Minimise wear on all components and provide the optimal value life cycle
solution
bull Minimise degradation of material and generation of excessive dust
bull Accommodate and transfer primary and secondary scraper dribblings onto
the receiving conveyor
The optimisation of transfer chutes in the bulk materials industry
MN van Aarde
22
CHAPTER 2
bull Ensure that any differences between the flow of fine and coarse grades are
catered for
bull Transfer material onto the receiving conveyor so that at the feed point onto
the conveyor
bull the component of the material now (parallel to the receiving conveydr) is as
close as possible to the belt velocity (at least within 10) to minimise the
power required to accelerate the material and to minimise abrasive wear of
the belt
bull the vertical velocity component of the material flow is as low as possible so
as to minimise wear and damage to the belt as well as to minimise spillage
due to material bouncing off the belt
bull The flow is centralised on the belt and the lateral flow is minimised so as
not to affect belt tracking and avoid spillage
With the design of a new chute there are up to 46 different design inputs with 19
of these being absolutely critical to the success of the design Some of the most
critical preliminary design considerations are shown in Table 1 [24]
The optimisation of transfer chutes in the bulk materials industry
MN van Aarde
23
CHAPTER 2
Table 1 Design Input Reference Requirements [24J
Aria Unit
Feed Conveyor
Belt Speed r ms
Belt Width mm
JibHead Pulley Dia mm
Pulley Width mm
Angle to Horizontal at the Head Pulley degrees
Belt Troughing Angle degrees
Sight Height Data
Feed Conveyor Top of Belt to Roof mm
Drop Height mm
Receiving Conveyor Top of Belt to Floor mm
Receiving Conveyor
Belt Speed ms
Belt Width mm
Belt Thickness mm
Angle of Intersection degrees
Angle to Horizontal degrees
Belt Troughing Angle degrees
Material Properties
Max Oversize Lump (on top) mm
Max Oversize Lump (on top) degrees
studies done by Jenike and Johanson Inc have identified six design principles
that can serve as a guideline in chute optimisation exercises These six
principles focus on the accelerated flow in the chute which they identified as the
most critical mode [25]
Within accelerated flow the six problem areas identified by Jenike and Johanson
Inc are [25]
The optimisation of transfer chufes in the bulk materials industry
MN van Aarde
24
CHAPTER 2
bull plugging of chutes at the impact points
bull insufficient cross sectional area
bull uncontrolled flow of material
bull excessive wear on chute surfaces
bull excessive generation of dust
bull attrition or breakdown of particles
221 Plugging of chutes
In order to prevent plugging inside the chute the sliding surface inside the chute
must be sufficiently smooth to allow the material to slide and to clean off the most
frictional bulk solid that it handles This philosophy is particularly important
where the material irnpacts on a sliding surface Where material is prone to stick
to a surface the sliding angle increases proportionally to the force with which it
impacts the sliding surface In order to minimise material velocities and excessive
wear the sliding surface angle should not be steeper than required [25]
222 Insufficient cross sectional area
The cross section of the stream of material inside the chute is a function of the
velocity of flow Therefore it is critical to be able to calculate the velocity of the
stream of material particles at any point in the chute From industry experience a
good rule of thumb is that the cross section of the chute should have at least two
thirds of its cross section open at the lowest material velocity [25] When the
materialis at its lowest velocity it takes up a larger cross section of chute than at
higher velocities Therefore this cross section is used as a reference
223 Uncontrolled flow of material
Due to free falling material with high velocities excessive wear on chutes and
conveyor belt surfaces are inevitable Therefore it is more advantageous to
The optimisation of transfer chutes in the bulk materials industry
MN van Aarde
25
CHAPTER 2
have the particles impact the hood as soon as possible with a small impact
angle after discharge from the conveyor With the material flowing against the
sloped chute walls instead of free falling the material velocity can be controlled
more carefully through the chute [25]
224 Excessive wear on chute surfaces
Free flowing abrasive materials do not normally present a large wear problem
The easiest solution to this problem is to introduce rock boxes to facilitate
material on material flow Chute surfaces that are subjected to fast flowing
sticky and abrasive materials are the most difficult to design
A solution to this problem is to keep the impact pressure on the chute surface as
low as possible This is done by designing the chute profile to follow the material
trajectory path as closely as possible By doing so the material is less prone to
stick to the chute surface and the material velocity will keep the chute surface
clean [25]
225 Excessive generation of dust
Material flowing inside a transfer chute causes turbulence in the air and
excessive dust is created In order to minimise the amount of dust the stream of
material must be kept in contact with the chute surface as far as possible The
material stream must be compact and all impact angles against the chute walls
must be minimised A compact stream of material means that the material
particles are flowing tightly together At the chute discharge point the material
velocity must be as close as possible to the velocity of the receiving belt [25]
The optimisation of transfer in the bulk materials industry
M N van Aarde
26
CHAPTER 2
226 Attrition or breakdown of particles
The break up of particles is more likely to occur when large impact forces are
experienced inside a chute than on smooth sliding surfaces Therefore in most
cases the attrition of material particles can be minimised by considering the
following guidelines when designing a transfer chute minimise the material
impact angles concentrate the stream of material keep the material stream in
contact with the chute surface and keep the material velocity constant as far as
possible [25]
23 INTEGRATING A MORE APPROPRIATE CHUTE LAYOUT WITH THE PLANT
CONSTRAINTS
According to Tunra Bulk Solids in Australia the process for design and
commissioning of a new plant basically consists of four steps The entire
process is based on understanding the properties of the material to be
handled [1]
RampD CENTRE CONSULTING CONTRACTOR ENGINEERING AND PLANT
COMPANY OPERATOR r-------------- I TESTING Of CONCEPTUAl I DETAILED DESIGN CONSTRUCTION amp
I BULKSOUDS - DESIGN COMMISSIONING- I shyI Flow Proper1ies Lining Material tuet Equipment
Selection Procurement _ I I
I I
I Flow Pat1erns SSlpment Quality Control I
I IFeeder Loads amp Process Performance
I Power I Optimisation Assessment I I
L J -
I IBin Loads I I I Wear Predictions I
FEEDBACK I I I IModel Studigt L _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ J
i ~ FEEDBACK r-shyFigure 17 Four step process for plant design and commissioning [1J
The optimisation of transfer chutes in the bulk materials industry
MN van Aarde
27
CHAPTER 2
Figure 17 illustrates this four step process These steps are a good guideline in
order to incorporate a more appropriate chute layout for the plant constraints
This is an iterative process where all the possible solutions to a problem are
measured against all the possible plant constraints This section focuses more
on the second column of Figure 17 and specifically on structures and equipment
During this stage of design the utilisation of 3D parametric modelling also creates
an intimate and very accurate communication between the designer and the
project engineer or client This effective communication tool will save time and
improve the engineering process [24]
A good example of obtaining an appropriate chute layout for the plant constraints
can be explained as follows On an existing plant a transfer point will have a
specific transfer height from the top of the feed conveyor to the top of the
receiving conveyor If the feed conveyor has an incline section to obtain the
required transfer height it will also have a curve in the vertical plane of that
incline section This curve has a certain minimum radius in order to keep the belt
on the idlers at high belt tensions [26]
Figure 18 Vertical curve on incline conveyor
The optimisation of transfer chutes in the bulk materials industry
MN van Aarde
28
CHAPTER 2
If the transfer height at a transfer point is changed the path of the feeding
conveyor should always be taken into consideration With an increase in transfer
height the vertical curve radius will increase as well in order to prevent the
conveyor from lifting off the idlers in the curve This will require expensive
modifications to conveyor structures and therefore in most cases be a pointless
exercise Figure 18 shows clearly the large radius required to obtain a vertical
curve in a belt conveyor
Other considerations on brown field projects might be lift off of the receiving
conveyor at start up before or after the vertical curve This is caused by peaks
in belt tension at start up which may cause the belt to lift off the idlers and chafe
against the chute In some cases this can be solved by fitting a roller as shown
in Figure 19 to the underside of the chute to protect it from being damaged by
the belt or to protect the belt from being damaged by the chute The position of
this specific chute is just after a vertical curve where the belt tends to lift off at
start up
Figure 19 Protective roller on a transfer chute
The optimisation of transfer chutes in the bulk materials industry
MN van Aarde
29
CHAPTER 2
24 INVESTIGATING THE CORRECT CHUTE PROFILE FOR REDUCED LINER WEAR
In order to reduce chute wear the curved-profile variable chute concept is
introduced [27] This concept was originally developed by Professor Roberts for
the grain industry in 1969 [28] After many years of research and investigation
CMR Engineers and Project managers (pty) Ltd came to the following
conclusion any improvement in coal degradation dust generation and chute
wear can only be achieved by avoiding high impact forces or reducing them as
much as possible [27]
At any impact point of material in a chute or conveyor kinetic energy is
dissipated This increases material degradation and wear on liners and conveyor
belt covers Therefore it is good practise to redirect the kinetic energy in a
useful manner This action will help to reduce liner and belt wear [32]
x
Vo
- ImpactPlate
Figure 20 Geometry of the impact plate and material trajectory [30J
The optimisation of transfer chutes n the bulk materials industry
MN van Aarde
30
CHAPTER 2
The path followed by the material discharged over the end pulley of a belt
conveyor is known as its trajectory and is a function of the discharge velocity of
the material from the conveyor [29] Figure 20 shows the material trajectory as
weI as the radius and location of the impact plate In the case of dynamic chutes
this impact plate represents the back plate of the chute
The correct chute profile to reduce wear must cater for the proper location of the
chute covers and wearing plates This location depends upon the path of the
trajectory which must be predicted as accurately as possible
Figure 21 Mode for the impact of a particle on a flat surface [29]
Figure 21 illustrates a material particle impinging on a flat chute surface at an
angle of approach 91 and with approach velocity V1 This particle will then
rebound off the chute plate at an angel 92 and velocity V2 The wear on the
chute liners or the surface shown in Figure 21 will be a function of the vector
change in momentum of the particle One component will be normal to and the
other component parallel to the flat surface The parallel component is referred
to as the scouring component along the surface [29]
It is important to determine the radius of curvature of material within the
trajectory It is now a simple exercise to determine the chute hood radius
depending on plant constraints Firstly the material trajectory must be calculated
The optimisation of transfer chutes in the bulk materials industry
MN van Aarde
31
CHAPTER 2 ---~----------------
According to the mechanical handling engineers association in Perth Australia it
is beneficial to keep the impact angle as small as possible Impact angle less
than 20deg are recommended for most liner materials This will ensure an
acceptably small impulse force component normal to the surface The r~te at
which the material is gouging away the chute liner at the impact point will be
reduced [29]
The material trajectory is determined by equation l
(1)
Where the origin of the x and y axis is taken at the mean material height h and
the discharge point on the pulley as shown in Figure 20 The variables involved
in the calculation of the material trajectory are [30]
y =vertical position on the grid where the trajectory is determined
x = position parallel to the receiving belt line where the trajectory is determined
v = material speed
g =gravitational constant
a =inclination angle of the feeding conveyor
After the material leaves the belt a simplified assumption can be made that it
falls under gravity It is quite clear that in order to minimise the impact angle
the impact plate must follow the path of the material trajectory as far as possible
It will almost never be possible to obtain a contact point between the material and
the chute where there is a smooth contact with no impact angle
This radius of curvature of the material tr~jectory is determined as follows [30
The optimisation of transfer chutes in the bulk materials industry i 32
MN van Aarde
CHAPTER 2
[1 + ( gx )]15 R = vcos8
c (2)
vcos8
Where
g == gravitational constant
v == material speed
8 == Angle at discharge
In order to simplify the manufacturing process of a curved chute the radius must
be constant For a relatively smooth contact between the material and the chute
plate the radius of the curved chute at the point of contact is as close as
possible to the material discharge curvature radius [30] This is rarely possible
on brown field projects due to facility constraints In this case there will be higher
probability for rapid liner wear Each situation must be individually assessed to
determine the best solution
Cross sectional dimensions of the transfer chute must be sufficient to collect the
material and ensure continuous flow without causing blockages At the same
time the chute profile must not result in excessive material speed Material
speed inside the chute will be considered to be excessive when it can not be
controlled to exit the chute at approximately the same velocity to that of the
receiving conveyor Chutes may block for the following reasons [29]
bull Mechanical bridging due to large lumps locking into one another
bull Insufficient cross section causing cohesive material to choke or bridge
bull Inadequate chute inclination causing fines build-up
bull Corner effects or cohesion causing material to stick to the chute walls
The optimisation of transfer chutes in the bulk materials industry
MN van Aarde
33
CHAPTER 2
For the handling of large lumps of material field experience has shown that the
chute cross sectional area should be 25 times the major dimension of the largest
lumps To avoid possible bridging of the material in the chute the
recommendation is to make the inner chute volume as large as possible This
will be guided by the support steelwork around the transfer point [29]
Field experience has shown that it is advisable depending on the material being
transferred that the chute inclination angles be no less than 65deg to 700 Cornerbull
effects should also be avoided where material gets stuck in the inner corners of
chute plate work These angles should preferably be no less than 70 0 bull
25 FEED CHUTE GEOMETRY FOR REDUCED BELT WEAR
The design parameters to reduce both chute and belt wear are interrelated
Research done at the Phalaborwa copper mine is a good case study to prove the
concept of a curved chute profile This mine had specific problems with high belt
wear at transfer points At this facility an in-pit 60 x 89 gyratory crusher and
incline tunnel conveyor was commissioned to haul primary crushed ore A
conventional dead box chute transfers ore from the crusher to a 1800 mm wide
incline conveyor [31]
The maximum lump size handled by this section of the facility is 600 mm (60 kg)
An 18 mm thick top cover was specified for this conveyor with an X grade
rubber according to DIN (abrasion value lt 100 mm) This belt had an original
warranty of 10 years After 35 years the top cover started to show signs of
excessive wear and the tensile cords of the 18 mm thick cover were visible [31]
In April 1994 Phalaborwa commissioned the curved chute concept and a new
belt on the incline conveyor Six months after commissioning no gouging or
pitting damage was evident The material velocity through this curved chute onto
the incline conveyor is shown in Figure 22 [31]
The optimisation of transfer chutes in the bulk materials industry
MN van Aarde
34
CHAPTER 2
VELOCITY ( m I aec ) _ nm _ bull m _ 1211 _ UTI _ U16
_ IIU _ Im _ I rn _ 171-111 _ u n _ ~ l
_ 4 ~
_ 41 _ 4
141 CJ UtiI 1bull-bull 1t5
~ 1m bull UI2
Material Flow Velocity Gradient
Figure 22 Ore flow path in the curved chute onto the incline conveyor [31]
TENDENCY TO FORM STAGNANT LAYER LEADING
TO INSTABILITY IN DEPTH OF FLOW
C8middotFLOW IN CURVED CHUTES
Figure 23 Gentle deceleration of the product before impact on the receiving belt [32]
The optimisation of transfer chutes in the bulk materials industry
MN van Aarde
35
CHAPTER 2
Figure 23 illustrates the gentle deceleration of material that is achieved with the
curved chute concept This helps to reduce belt wear because it is relatively
easy to discharge the material at the same velocity as the receiving conveyor
The material speed v can be calculated at any point in the chute using equation
3 and equation 4 [33]
v 2~R [(2ue2 -l)sin(O) +3ue cos(O)] + Ke 2uB (3) 4ue +1
This equation is only applicable if the curved section of the chute has a constant
radius Rand I-Ie is assumed constant at an average value for the stream [33]
I-Ie = friction coefficient
8 = angle between the horizontal and the section of the spoon where the velocity
is determined and
(4)
The optimisation of transfer chutes in the bulk materjas industry
MN van Aarde
36
CHAPTER 2
Mass Flow Rate Omh
Figure 24 Typical feed chute discharge model [33J
The velocity Ve at the discharge of the chute can be determined from equation 3
and equation 4 The components Vey and Vex of the discharge velocity as
shown in Figure 24 can now be calculated This investigation should aid the
optimisation of the chute profile in order to [33]
bull match the horisontal component Vex of the material exit velocity as close
as possible to the belt speed
bull reduce the vertical component Vey of the material exit velocity in order to
minimize abrasive wear on the receiving conveyor
26 CONCLUSION
This section discussed the technical background necessary for the optimisation
of transfer chutes on an existing iron ore plant which will be discussed in
Chapter 4 The focus is specifically aimed at reducing impact wear on chute liner
materials and abrasive wear on receiving conveyor belts Important to note from
The optimisation oftransfer chutes in the bulk materials industry
MN van Aarde
37
CHAPTER 2
this section is the acceptable limits of dynamic chute optimisation or design
These limits aremiddot
bull a material impact angle of less than 20deg
bull a variance of less than 10 between the receiving belt velocity and the
material discharge velocity component parallel to the receiving conveyor
An important aspect of chute optimisation is to consider the facility constraints
These constraints are in some cases flexible but in most cases the chute
optimisation process must be designed within these constraints This means that
any new concept will have to be measured against what is possible within the
facility limits
It is important to note that only the most common transfer chute problems were
mentioned in this chapter Other possible problems were not addressed in this
chapter as it is normally related to detail design issues Solutions to these
problems are unique to each type of chute and will be addressed for the specific
case study in Chapter 4
The optimisafjon of transfer chutes in the bulk materials industry
MN van Aarde
38
CHAPTER 3
The optimisation of transfer chutes in the bulk materials industry
MN van Aarde
CHAPTER 3 TESTS FOR THE IDENTIFICATION OF RECURRING
PROBLEMS ON EXISTING CHUTES
39
CHAPTER 3
31 PREFACE
Since the completion of a certain iron ore handling facility it has been
experiencing recurring material transfer problems at high capacities In order to
investigate the problem it was decided that performance testing of the chutes
should be carried out The purpose of these tests was to monitor chute
performance at transfer rates of up to the design capacity of 10 000 tlh for
various grades of iron ore handled by the facility Some of the methodologies
used in testing are only applicable to this specific facility
Due to variations and surges associated with the reclaim operations at the
facility performance testing focused on reclaim side chutes This means that all
the transfer points at the exit points of the stockyard conveyors were tested
Nineteen tests were conducted on various stockyard transfers Information such
as the specific facility or conveyor numbers cannot be disclosed due to the
confidentiality of information
To analyse SCADA data the stacker reclaimer scale is used to determine the
peak surges passing through the transfer under investigation The reason for
this is that the peaks in flow due to reclaiming operations flatten out when
passing through the transfer points This is due to chute throat limitations and
small variations in belt speeds If the down stream scales are used it would give
an inaccurate indication of the amount of ore that passed through the transfer
chute
32 TEST METHODOLOGY
A CCTV camera was installed in a strategic position inside the head chute of the
stockyard conveyors These cameras provided valuable information on the
physical behaviour of the material flow inside the transfer chutes Where
possible cameras were also placed on the receiving belt in front of and behind
The optimisation of transfer chutes in the bulk materials industry
MN van Aarde
40
CHAPTER 3
the chute This was done to monitor belt tracking and spillage A high frequency
radio link between the head chute and the control tower made it possible to
monitor the cameras at all times
SCADA data was used to determine and establish the condition of the material
transfer at the time of the test Data from various scales en route were obtained
as well as confirmation of blocked chute signals In analysing the SCADA data
the stacker reclaimer scale is used to determine the peak surges passing through
the transfer being tested
Data was recorded from a sampling plant at the facility This data provides the
actual characteristics of representative samples taken and analysed by the
sampling plant during the duration of the test The data gathered consist of
moisture content of the material sample as well as the size distribution of the ore
Where possible an inspector was placed at the transfer point being tested to
observe and record the performance The inspector had a two way radio for
communication with the test co-ordinator in the central control room He would
also be responsible for the monitoring of any spillage dust emissions etc that
may not be picked up by the cameras
Prior to commencing a test on a specific conveyor route the following checks
had to be performed on all the material conveying equipment
bull Clean out all transfer chutes and remove any material build-up from the
sidewalls
bull Check that feed skirts are properly in position on the belt
bull Check that the conveyor belt is tracking properly at no load
bull Check conveyor idlers are all in position and free to rotate
bull Check blocked chute detectors are operational and in the correct location
The optimisation of transfer chutes in the bulk materials industry
MN van Aarde
CHAPTER 3
bull Change the position of the blocked chute detector if required to improve its
fUnction
bull Test and confirm that the CCTV middotsystems are functioning correctly
bull Assign persons with 2 way radios and cameras to monitor and record the I
results at each transfer point on the route
33 CHUTE PERFORMANCE ACCEPTANCE CRITERIA
A material transfer chute performs to specification if it transfers a maximum of
10 000 tlh of a specific iron are grade without experiencing any of the following
problems
bull Material build up inside the chute or blocking the chute ie material is not
exiting the chute at the same rate as it is entering
bull Material spillage encountered from the top of the transfer chute
bull Material spillage encountered where material is loaded onto the receiving
conveyor
bull Belt tracking of the receiving conveyor is significantly displaced by the
loading of material from the transfer chute onto the conveyor
Tests were conducted over a period of one month and in such a short period
visible wear is difficult to quantify Due to the sensitivity of the information no
historical data in terms of chute or belt wear were made available by the facility
Therefore it is not part of the criteria for these specific tests Should a chute
however fail to perform according to the set criteria it validates the need for
modifications or new designs
34 DISCUSSION OF PROBLEM AREAS
The major concern during the test work is material flow at the transfer points
Secondary concerns are spillage tracking of the receiving belt and material
The optimisation of transfer chutes in the bulk materials industry
MN van Aarde
42
CHAPTER 3
loading onto the receiving belt One of the external factors that playa significant
role in material flow rate is the method and process of reclaiming This section
will highlight all the problem areas observed during the test work
Figure 25 shows the layout of the stockyard area This layout will serve as a
reference when the specific test results at each transfer point are discussed The
legends for Figure 25 are as follows
c=gt Transfer points where performance tests have been done
~ Direction that the conveyors are moving in
CV4 CV3 CV2 CV1
Figure 25 Layout of conveyors for chute test work
All four stockyard conveyors have a moving head arrangement This means that
the chutes are split up into two sections A moving head discharges material
onto either conveyor (CV) 5 or CV 6 via a static transfer chute The moving
head positions are shown by A Band C in Figure 25
The optimisation of transfer chutes in the bulk materials industry
MN van Aarde
43
CHAPTER 3
Position C is the purging or dump position This position is used when the
stacker reclaimer is in stacking mode and any material left on the stockyard
conveyor gets dumped The material does not end up on the stockpiles
preventing contamination
90 de-g TRANSFBt
OfAO BOX IN MOVING HEAD
Figure 26 Configuration of the existing transfer chute
Figure 26 shows the configuration of the existing transfer chutes These chutes
capture the trajectory from the head pulley in a dead box situated in the top part
of the chute The material then cascades down a series of smaller dead boxes
onto the receiving conveyor below
Various grades of iron ore were tested during the testing period These different
grades of iron ore are shown in Table 2 Three fine grades and four coarse
grades were used The coarse material is defined as particles with a diameter of
The optimisation of transfer chutes in the bulk materials industry
MN van Aarde
44
CHAPTER 3
between 12 mm and 34 mm and the fine material with diameters of between
4 mm and 12 mm
Table 2 Iron are grades used for chute test work
Material Predominant Lump Size
Fine K 5mm
Fine N 8mm
Fine A 8mm
Coarse K 25mm
Coarse D 34mm
Coarse S 12 mm
Coarse A 20mm
The CCTV cameras were placed inside the moving head pointing down into the
static chute overlooking the receiving conveyor Figure 27 shows the camera
angle used during testing This is a view of a clear chute before testing The
legends for clarification of all the video images are as follows
Front of the chute throat opening
Top of flowing material at the chute throat opening
Flow pattern of the material
Direction of the receiving belt
The optimisation of transfer chutes in the bulk materials industry
MN van Aarde
45
CHAPTER 3
Figure 27 Clear chute indicating camera angle
341 Coarse Material vs Fine Material
Differences in transfer rates between coarse material and fine material are
evident from the data gathered during the test programme These results are
discussed later in this chapter The area between the yellow arrows and the red
line is the amount of freeboard available Freeboard is the open space available
between the top of the flowing stream of material and the chute plate work
Figure 28 and Figure 29 shows the flow of coarse ore and fine ore respectively in
the same chute at 8 000 tlh
Figure 28 Coarse material at 8 000 tlh
The optimisation of transfer chutes in the bulk materials industry
MN van Aarde
46
CHAPTER 3
Figure 29 Fine material at 8 000 tlh
The amount of freeboard with fine material is much larger than with coarse
material It is therefore obvious that coarse material is more likely to block a
chute when peak surges occur This is due to particles that interlock in the small
discharge opening of the chute
Figure 30 Blocked chute with coarse material at 8 600 tIh
Figure 30 is a snap shot of a chute blocked with coarse ore due to the material
interlocking at the discharge opening The time from material free flowing to a
blocked chute signal was approximately 10 seconds This is determined by
comparing the CCTV camera time to the blocked signal time on the SCADA
The optimisation of transfer chutes in the bulk materials industry
MN van Aarde
47
CHAPTER 3
The high clay content in finer material can also cause problems in the long run
When wet Anes are fed through the chutes a thin layer of Anes builds up and
sticks to the sides of the chute As this layer dries out it forms a new chute liner i
and the next layer builds up This process occurs gradually and will eventually
cause the chute to block
342 Cross Sectional Area
Video images of a blocked chute on the receiving belts were analysed to
determine whether the blockage was caused by material build up on the belt
underneath the chute This indicated that with the occurrence of a blocked chute
the material keeps flowing out of the chute at a constant rate without build up
From this the assumption can be made that in the case of a blocked chute the
material enters the chute at a higher rate than it is discharged at the bottom
Therefore the conclusion can be made that the chute cross sectional area at the
discharge is insufficient to handle the volume of ore at high throughput rates
Tests with a certain type of coarse material yielded a very low flow rate requiring
adjustment to the chute choke plate on the transfer between CV 3 and CV 5
The chute choke plate is basically a sliding door at the bottom of the chute to
adjust the discharge flow of material Tests with another type of coarse material
shown in the summary of test results indicates how the choke plate adjustment
can increase the throughput of material in the chute
Data of all the different types of ore at the facility are obtained at the sampling
building This data shows that the material size distribution for the two types of
coarse material used in the tests mentioned above are the same This indicates
that the test results with the second coarse material are an accurate reflection of
what will be experienced with the first type of coarse material Special care
The optimisation of transfer chutes in the bulk materials industry
MN van Aarde
48
CHAPTER 3
should be taken when adjusting the choke plate to make sure that skew loading
is not induced by the modification
343 Spillag3
During one of the first tests on the transfer between CV 2 and CV 6 spillage
was observed at one of the side skirts on the receiving belt A piece of the side
skirt had been damaged and pushed off the belt as shown by Figure 31 This
caused some of the material to be pushed off the belt when skew loading from
the chute caused the belt to miss track In this case spillage was not caused by
the skirt but by skew loading from the chute onto the receiving conveyor
Figure 31 Damaged side skirt
A greater concern is spillage on the moving head chute of CV 3 and CV 4
loading onto CV 6 It appears as if the head chute creeps during material
transfer onto CV 6 As the chute creeps the horizontal gap between the
moving head chute and the transfer chute reaches approximately 180 mm
Facility operations proposed a temporary solution by moving the head chute to
the dumping or purging position and back to CV 5 before stopping over CV 6
The reason for this creep could be attributed to slack in the moving head winch
cable
The optimisation of transfer chutes in the bulk materials industry
MN van Aarde
49
CHAPTER 3
345 Belt Tracking and Material Loading
The only belt tracking and material loading problems observed occurred on the
transfer between CV 2 and CV 5 I CV 6 A diverter plate was installed at the
bottom of the chute in order to force material flow onto the centre of the receiving conveyor belt This plate now causes material to fall to the left of the receiving
belt causing the belt to track to the right
Figure 32 View behind the chute of the receiving conveyor before loading
Figure 32 shows the view from a CCTV camera placed over the receiving
conveyor behind the chute Note the amount of the idler roller that is visible
before loading
Figure 33 View behind the chute of the receiving conveyor during loading
The optimisation of transfer chutes in the bulk materials industry
MN van Aarde
50
CHAPTER 3
Figure 33 shows the view from a CCTV camera placed over the receiving
conveyor behind the chute during loading Note the difference between the
amount of the idler roller that is visible between Figure 33 and Figure 32 This is
a clear indication of off centre belt tracking due to skew loading I
At the same transfer point it appears as if the configuration of the chute causes
the material to be dropped directly onto the receiving belt from the dead box in
the moving head This will cause high impact wear on the belt in the long run
High maintenance frequencies will be required on the impact rollers underneath
the chute and the roller bearings will have to be replaced frequently
346 Reclaiming Operations
Reclaim operations are done from the stacker reclaimer that scoops up the
material with a bucket wheel from the stockpile The machine starts at the top
bench of the stockpile and reclaims sideways until it is through the stockpile
This sideways movement is repeated while the machine moves down the
stockpile If the machine digs too deep into the stockpile small avalanches can
occur that over fill the buckets This causes peak surges in the flow on the
conveyor system
With an increase in the peak digging or reclaim rate as requested for test work it
seemed that the peak surges increased as well In normal reclaiming operations
(average reclaim rate of 6 000 tlh to 7000 tlh) the peaks in reclaim surges do not
usually exceed 1 000 tlh This is however dependent on the level of the
stockpile from where the machine is reclaiming
At a peak digging or reclaim rate of 8 000 tlh peak surges of up to 2 000 tlh were
observed as can be seen from Figure 34 All stacker reclaimers are operated
manually and the depth of the bucket wheel is determined by monitoring the
The optimisation of transfer chutes in the bulk materials industry
MN van Aarde
51
CHAPTER 3
reclaimer boom scale reading (yellow line) This makes it difficult to reclaim at a
constant rate
The reason for the high peak surges is due to avalanches on the stockpile
caused by reclaiming on the lower benches without first taking away the top
material The blue line in Figure 34 represents a conveyor scale reading after
the material has passed through a series of transfer chutes It is clear that the
peaks tend to dissipate over time as the peaks on the blue line are lower and
smoother than that on the yellow line
IlmJ
bull I _ bull It bull bull bull bull
--ErI--E--~---h--E=+[J]--EiE ~ J~~~ middot middot -~L I-~f~1-1shyt~=tt~~J~~v5 i ~ ~ ~ ~ ~ i ~ 1 ~ ~ ~ s ~ ------ ~-- - ------ - _ - -------- -- -- - _---- -- -r - --- -_shyp
C)
~ 1r =r=l[=1 -It-1 -- -~ -t= --shy~ _middotmiddot -r middotr middot middot [middot _r _ _ r- middotmiddot rmiddot middotmiddot -r- rmiddot-- middot- middotmiddot -rmiddot -r-middotmiddot middotr lXgtO middotmiddotmiddotmiddotmiddotmiddotmiddotmiddot[middotmiddotmiddotmiddotmiddotmiddotmiddotlmiddotmiddotmiddotmiddotmiddotmiddotlmiddotmiddotmiddotmiddotmiddotmiddotmiddotmiddotimiddotmiddotmiddotmiddotmiddotmiddotmiddotmiddotr-middotmiddotmiddotmiddot j middotmiddot1middotmiddotmiddotmiddotmiddot1middotmiddotmiddotmiddotmiddotmiddotmiddot1middotmiddotmiddotmiddotmiddot middotlmiddotmiddotmiddotmiddottmiddotmiddotmiddotmiddotmiddotmiddotmiddotjmiddot I~ [ bullbullbullbullbullbullbull [ bullbullbull middotmiddotmiddot1middotmiddotmiddotmiddotmiddotmiddot1middotmiddotmiddotmiddotmiddotmiddotmiddotmiddot1middotmiddotmiddotmiddotmiddotmiddotmiddotmiddot middotmiddotmiddotmiddotmiddotmiddotmiddotmiddoti~middotmiddotmiddotmiddotmiddotmiddotmiddotmiddottmiddotmiddotmiddotmiddotmiddotmiddotmiddotrmiddotmiddotmiddot middotrmiddotmiddotmiddotmiddotmiddotmiddot~middotmiddotmiddotmiddotmiddotmiddotmiddotmiddot1middotmiddotmiddotmiddotmiddotmiddotmiddotmiddotimiddotmiddotmiddot
t) cent
~ i i l i i i i i i i it ~ 8 ~ ~ S l i
~~ Ii ~ ~ g i i ~ 4 1 J yen i
s a e 11 JI as $ $ ~ IS IS e It
Time
-Con~SCO=-E___S~ SCALE
Figure 34 Peak surges experienced during reclaiming operations
347 Other Problem Areas
Some blockages on other chutes at the facility occurred while testing the
stockyard chutes These blockages are also shown in Table 3 where the test
The optimisation of transfer chutes in the bulk materials industry
MN van Aarde
52
CHAPTER 3
results are discussed and to raise awareness that the bottlenecks on site are not
only caused by problems on the tested chutes
A chute downstream from the stockyards encountered a blockage with fine I
material when the flow rate reached 11 OOb tfh Although this is higher than the
test maximum of 10 000 tfh it still raises concern as to why the chute blocked so
severely that it took approximately two hours to clear
Another bottleneck is the transfer point between the feed conveyor of CV 2 and
the discharge chute on CV 2 This transfer point blocked with fine material at a
peak just below 10 000 tfh It should be even worse with coarse are as
previously discussed Due to the configuration of the head chute spillage of
scraper dribblings is also of great concern The main stream of material
interferes with the flow path of the dribbling material Therefore the carry back
scraped off the bottom of the feeding belt cannot i~ow down the chute and is
pushed over the sides of the chute
The optimisation of transfer chutes in the bulk maferias industry
MN van Aarde
53
CHAPTER 3
35 SUMMARY OF TEST RESULTS
Table 3 Results from test programme
Transfer Point Material Tested Test No Peak Capacity Blocked Chute
CV11 CV5 Yes
Fines N 14 10000 tlh No
Fines N 15 10000tlh No
CV 11 CV6 Coarse K 20 9300 tlh No
Fines K 4 10600tlh No
Fines A 19 9633 tlh No
CV31 CV5 Yes
Yes
Yes
Coarse A 17 9427 tlh No
CV31 CV6 Coarse K 7 10195t1h Yes
Coarse K 8 11 000 tlh Yes
CV41 CV5 Coarse A 16 10307 tlh No
No (Mech trip on
CV4CV6 Fines K 10 10815 tlh downstream conveyor)
Coarse K 11 8000 tlh No
Fines A 18 10328 tlh No
No (Feed to CV 2
CV21 CV5 Fines N 13 10 000 tlh blocked)
CV21 Coarse K 1 amp 2 10 153 tlh No
No (Blocked chute on
Fines K 3 11 000 tlh downstream transfer)
The optimisation of transfer chutes in the bulk materials industry
MN van Aarde
54
CHAPTER 3
Table 3 shows the results obtained from all the tests on the stockyard conveyor
discharge chutes Where possible the same material grade was tested more
than once on the same transfer in order to confirm the repetitiveness of the test
The tests shown in red indicate the transfers that blocked at a flow rate of less
than 10000 tlh
Coarse K and Coarse 0 are noted as the critical materials for blocked chutes
caused by a peak surge Tests with Coarse K and Coarse S where a blocked
chute occurred at just over 10 000 tlh can also be considered as failed tests
This is due to the lack of a safety margin freeboard inside the chute When
analysing the video images a build up can be seen at a flow rate of less than
10000 tlh
Table 3 indicates that the fine material did not cause blocked chutes but it was
seen that it did fill up the chute throat area in some cases Although the coarse
material grades are shown as being least suitable for high flow rates the fine
material should not be underestimated for its ability to cause blockages The
finer materials normally have higher clay contents than the coarse grades and
therefore stick to the chute walls more easily_
36 CONCLUSION
At lower capacities (7 000 tlh to 8 000 tlh) the material appear to flow smoothly
inside the chutes without surging or building up in the chute This flow rate
normally does not cause spillage or skew loading on the receiving conveyor belt
On average as the flow rate approaches 9 000 tlh the material in the chute
throat area starts packing together and finally blocks up the chute
At transfer rates greater than 9 000 tlh the available area inside the chutes is
completely filled up This causes material to build up or surge inside the chute
which eventually results in the chute choking and the inlet flow becomes greater
The optimisation of transfer chutes in the bulk materials industry
MN van Aarde
55
CHAPTER 3
than the outlet flow Depending on the volume of the chute the choked state can
only be maintained for a certain period of time If the inlet flow does not
decrease it will cause a blocked chute
Peak surges of up to 10 000 tfh were recorded in most tests which involved a
material surge inside the chute but without the occurrence of a blocked chute trip
Although no blocked chute signal was given in these cases the ability of the
chutes to transfer continuously at flow rates of between 9 000 tfh and 10 000 tfh
is not very reliable
Continuous transfer at flow rates approaching 9 000 tfh seems attainable in most
cases but due to the limited freeboard available in the chute throat area the
chutes will easily become prone to blocking Due to the high peak surges at an
increased maximum reclaim rate the amount of freeboard is critical If the
design criteria of the chute were intended to accommodate these large surges
then all the chutes failed this test This can be attributed to the fact that no
freeboard is left at a maximum reclaim rate of 9 000 tfh
With the background available from the test programme it is clear that further
investigation is required to obtain a solution to these problems All the
information gathered can be integrated and utilised to provide a solution A
possible solution can then be tested against the problems found with the current
transfer chutes
The optimisation of transfer chutes in the bulk materials industry
MN van Aarde
56
CHAPTER 4
CHAPTER 4 DYNAMIC CHUTES FOR THE ELIMINATION OF
RECURRING PROBLEMS
The optimisation of transfer chutes in the bulk materials industry
MN van Aarde
57
CHAPTER 4
41 PREFACE
After completion of the chute test programme the decision was made to improve
the old transfer configuration by installing a dynamic chute The reason for the
dynamic chute is to increase the material speed and decrease the stream cross
sectional area The dead boxes in the older chute slowed the material down and
the restriction on transfer height resulted in the material not being able to gain
enough speed after impacting on the dead boxes
A dynamic chute configuration is investigated in this chapter As the new chute
is fitted within the existing steelwork there are certain constraints that determine
the new configuration All the constraints and limitations discussed in this section
are specific to the facility under discussion
The new chute design basically consists of a hood and spoon which retains the
kinetic energy in the material stream as it is transferred from one conveyor to the
other This will reduce the creation of dust in the chute and help to discharge the
material at a velocity closer to that of the receiving conveyor The new design
does however experience high wear which was not a problem with the old chutes
due to large dead boxes
In order to fit the optimum design of a dynamic chute within the existing structure
some changes are required to the positioning of the feed conveyor head pulley
These changes are necessary to accommodate the discharge trajectory from the
feeding conveyor
The radii of the hood and spoon are specified in such a way that the impact wear
is reduced significantly In addition both the hood and spoon are fitted with a
removable dead box section in the impact zones The incorporation of these
sections makes this chute revolutionary in the sense of ease of maintenance
The optimisation of transfer chutes in the bulk materials industry
MN van Aarde
58
CHAPTER 4
This new chute addresses all problems identified at the facility and aims to
eliminate most of them
Tests were carried out to identify worst case materials for flow and wear
Different liner materials were tested for both flow and wear conditions The
outcome of these tests is used as the basis for the design of a new chute As
different conditions for flow and wear inside the chute exist different liners are
investigated for each section inside the chute
42 CONSIDERATION OF THE EXISTING TRANSFER POINT CONSTRAINTS
The stockyard consists of four stacker reclaimers and several transfer points
feeding onto the two downstream conveyors resulting in a very intricate system
This system has numerous requirements which need to be addressed when
considering a new transfer chute configuration The transfers under discussion
are situated at the head end of the stockyard conveyors
MOV1NG HEAD OER MOvm poundAD OVER CVI6 CVIS
t4CLIE SECTION
PURGING POSmON
Figure 35 Stockyard head end layout
The design of a new transfer chute configuration is restricted to a certain extent
by the existing structures on site Figure 35 provides an overall view of the
existing steelwork at the head end of the stockyard conveyor This existing steel
structure can be modified to suit a new configuration but does have some fixed
The optimisation of transfer chutes in the bulk materials industry
MN van Aarde
59
CHAPTER 4
constraints A good example of these constraints is the transfer height between
the stockyard conveyor and the downstream conveyors CV 5 and 6
On both sides of the stockyard conveyor stockpiles of ore can be reclaimed and
deposited onto the conveyor This facility allows a certain travel for the stacker
reclaimer along the stockyard conveyor for the stacking and reclaiming of
material The most forward position of the stacker reclaimer is at the beginning
of the incline section of the stockyard conveyor As previously explained any
curvature in a conveyor requires a certain minimum radius When the transfer
height is raised the radius constraints on that curvature in the stockyard
conveyor will reduce stockyard space This means that the storage capacity at
the facility will be greatly diminished
I ~
j
Figure 36 Dimensional constraints on the existing transfer configuration
The ideal is to stay within the eXisting critical dimensions as shown in Figure 36
As functionality of the chute dictates the chute configuration these dimensions
can be modified within certain constraints These critical dimensions on the
existing configuration are
The optimisation of transfer chutes in the bulk materials industry
MN van Aarde
60
CHAPTER 4
bull Centre of receiving belt to centre of the head pulley 800 mm
bull Bottom of receiving belt to top of the head pulley 4048 mm
The head pulley can however be moved back a certain amount before it
becomes necessary to change the entire incline section of the stockyard
conveyor As the moving head moves forward and backward there are idler cars
trailing behind the moving head carriage as shown in Figure 35 The purpose of
these idler cars is to support the belt when the moving head is feeding onto
CV 6 or when it is standing in the purging position
43 DESIGN OF THE CHUTE PROFILE
431 Design Methodology
Proven standard methods for the functional design of the chute are used These
hand calculation methods are based on the Conveyor Equipment Manufacturers
Association (CEMA) standard as well as papers from Prof AW Roberts These
are typically calculations for determining the discharge trajectory optimal radius
of the hood and spoon as well as the velocity of material passing through the
chute
In addition to standard methods of carrying out conceptual flow design it is
supplemented by the use of Discrete Element Modelling (OEM) simulation
software This is done to visualise the flow of material through the chute
Results from standard calculation methods are compared to the outputs of the
OEM simulations to confirm both results Chapter 5 will focus on the use of
Discrete Element Modelling for the design and verification of chute concepts
The optimisation of transfer chutes in the bulk materials industry
MN van Aarde
61
CHAPTER 4 -__-----__---_----------shy
432 Design Development
Figure 37 shows the concept of the hood and spoon chute for a 90deg transfer as
required by the facility layout The decision to opt for a hood and spoon chute is
based on trying to retain the material velocity when transferring material from the
feeding conveyor to the receiving conveyors Retention of material velocity is
critical as the transfer height is restricted The overall facility constraints for
design are as follows
bull Feeding belt speed - 45 ms
bull Receiving belt speed - 45 ms
bull Transfer height - 401 m
bull Belt widths -1650 mm
bull Maximum material throughput -10000 tlh
As this is a retrofit of an existing facility some of the facility constraints cannot be
changed This forms part of the design development as it steers the design in a
certain direction Due to the fact that the transfer height cannot be changed the
chute profile will be dependent on the transfer height restriction
The optimisation of transfer chutes in the bulk matefials industry
MN van Aarde
62
CHAPTER 4
START-UP CHrrlE
DRlBBIlNG CHUTE
Figure 37 Hood and spoon configuration for the 90 transfer
The optimum solution for the correct chute profile in this situation would be to
move the head pulley back far enough This should be done so that the hood
can receive the material trajectory at a small impact angle and still discharge
centrally onto the spoon However the head pulley can only be moved back a
certain amount Any further movement will require changes to the structure of
the feeding conveyor incline section
As the stockyard conveyors feed onto two receiving conveyors the head pulley
of the stockyard conveyors is situated on a moving head rail car This enables
the conveyor to discharge either on CV 5 or CV 6 as shown in Figure 25
Taking the movement of the head pulley into account the moving head rail car
can be shortened by 1000 mm in order to move the head pulley back As stated
in the preface all changes are distinctive to this facility alone However it is
important to be aware of the consequences of every modification
The optimisation of transfer chutes in the bulk materials industry
MN van Aarde
63
CHAPTER 4 -__----- ------shy
433 Determination of the Profile
An important of the hood and spoon design is to ensure a
discharge from the hood onto the centre of the spoon The is
determined using equation (1) in section 24 Although various material
are transferred it does not have a significant effect on the calculated trajectory
the bulk properties of the materials are very similar It is however important
to the material which will transferred obtain the flow angles and wear
This information the will be
the Liner selection for this case study is discussed in Appendix A
After the trajectory has been determined the hood radius can determined by
using equation (2) As head pulley can move 1 000 mm backward the
possible hood radius was determined to 2 577 mm This hood radius is
VIU(I(1 to produce the wear on the zone in chute
The impact angle at this radius is 11 which is less than the maximum
allowable limit of 20
The hood radius is chosen to as close as possible to radius of curvature of
the material trajectory The point where the hood radius and the trajectory radius
cross is known as the impact point In to determine the velocity
point in hood the at is required on the
hood from the horizontal where the material impacts and to slide down the
hood surface
In this case the position impact hood is at 558r from the horizontal
In to determine the velocity this angle e is used as starting
point in (3) obtain a complete velocity profile angle from where
the material impacts hood is decreased in increments 5 up to the
discharge point which is normally 0
The optimisation chutes in the bulk materials industry
MN van Aarde
64
-----
CHAPTER 4
Hood Velocity Profile
70
--- --~ 6 0
5 0
40 ~_
~ 30 g --- a 20 gt
10
00
60 50 40 30 20 10 o Theta (Position inside the hood)
Figure 38 Hood velocity profile
The spoon radius is determined in such a way that the wear at the point of impact
is kept to a minimum At the same time the horizontal component of the material
exit velocity is as close as possible to the receiving belt speed Firstly the
assumption is made that the initial velocity of material in the spoon is equal to the
exit velocity of material from the hood This yields a spoon entry velocity of
633 ms and can also be seen from Figure 38
By reiterating various radii for the spoon the optimum exit velocity Ve can be
obtained These radii are selected according to the available space in which the
spoon must fit and also to produce the smallest impact angle for material
discharging from the hood This table is set up to display the different exit
velocities at various spoon radii The exit velocity is also dependent on the exit
angle which is determined by the length of the spoon arc In this case the spoon
radius is chosen as 3 575 mm An exit angle of 38deg from the horizontal yields an
exit velocity closer to the receiving belt speed
The optimisation of transfer chutes in the bulk materials industry
MN van Aarde
65
CHAPTER 4
Spoon Velocity Profile
67
66
65
S 64 amp0 g 6 3
V
v-shy ~ ~
ii ~ gt 62
61 I I 60
o 10 20 30 40 50 60
Theta (position inside the spoon)
Figure 39 Spoon velocity profile
Taken from the origin of the spoon radius the material position in the spoon at
discharge is sr The selection of this angle is guided by the geometry of the
chute and surrounding structures This angle is then used to calculate the exit
velocity as shown in Figure 39 At this point the discharge angle relative to the
conveyor angle is 38deg Ve is then determined to be 6087 ms with a velocity
component of 479 ms in the direction of the belt This value is 618 higher
than the belt speed of 4S ms which is acceptable as it is within the allowable
10 range of variation Minimal spillage and reduced wear on the receiving
conveyor is expected
Both the hood and spoon have a converged profile This is done in order to
minimise spillage and ensure a smooth transfer of material from the hood to the
spoon and from the spoon to the receiving conveyor The converged profile
starts out wide to capture any stray particles and converges to bring the material
particles closer together at the discharge This profile does not influence the
transfer rate of the chute as the stream of material through the chute is no more
The optimisation of transfer chutes in the bulk materials industry
MN van Aarde
66
CHAPTER 4
compact than the material on the conveyor belt before and after the transfer
chute
44 INCORPORATING ADEAD BOX IN THE IMPACT AREAS
In chapter 1 reference is made to a chute design utilising pipe sections with a
rounded profile The flat back plate is chosen instead of a rounded pipe type
section to house the honeycomb dead box configuration It would be possible to
fit the honeycomb into a rounded back section but manufacturing and
maintenance would be unnecessarily difficult and expensive
Furthermore the cross section profile of the chute shows three sliding surfaces
as shown in These surfaces consist of the back plate two vertical side plates
and two diagonal plates This is done in order to increase the angle between
adjoining plates so that the probability of material hanging up in the corners is
reduced This helps to alleviate the risk of experiencing blocked chutes
Figure 40 Chute cross section
The optimisation of transfer chutes in the bulk materials industry
M N van Aarde
67
CHAPTER 4
441 Honeycomb Wear Box in the Hood
A honeycomb or wear box is incorporated into this chute configuration in order to
further minimise wear in the hood and spoon The honeycomb configuration is
clearly shown in and is typical for both the hood and spoon Reduced wear will I
be achieved as impact and sliding will take place on the basis of material on
material flow Ore is captured inside the honeycomb pockets which protects the
ceramic lining in the section of the honeycomb and creates another sliding face
made of the material being transferred The ribs in the wear box do not protrude
from the sliding face of the chute and therefore do not interfere with the main
stream flow of material
Positioning of the honeycomb is critical as the point of impact on the hood needs
to be on the honeycomb This is required in order to assure that the highest
material impact is absorbed by a layer of static material inside the honeycomb
and not the chute liners All the basic steps for designing a normal hood and
spoon chute are followed Firstly the angle at impact (8e) is calculated to
determine where the trajectory of material will cross the radius of the hood This
shows the position of the impact point on the hood Figure 20 indicates where 8e
is calculated As previously stated the angle at impact for this situation is
558r This is calculated using [33]
e = tan- I ( 1 ) (5)
C Ii
And y is defined by equation 1
This gives an indication as to where the honeycomb should be situated in order
to capture the material impacting the hood fully A flow simulation package can
also be used to determine the position of this honeycomb structure shows an
opening for the honeycomb which starts at 40deg clockwise from the vertical This
The optimisation of transfer chutes in the bulk materials industry 68
MN van Aarde
CHAPTER 4
means that there are almost 16deg of free space in the honeycomb to ensure that
the material will always impact inside the wear box
There is no set specification as to the size of this free space This is just to
accommodate any surges of mat~rial on the feeding conveyor As discussed in
Chapter 3 due to avalanches while reclaiming from the stockpiles material
surges on the conveyors is a reality
Figure 41 Honeycomb wear box positioning
illustrates exactly where this wear box is situated on the back plate of the hood
This configuration is very similar to that of the spoon as both wear boxes only
cover the width of the flat back plate of the hood and spoon The reason for this
is that most of the material impact and mainstream flow strikes the back plate
The optimisation of transfer chutes in the bulk materials industry
MN van Aarde
69
CHAPTER 4
WEAR BOX
Figure 42 Wear box in the hood section
All the horizontal ribs of the honeycomb are spaced 5deg apart and there are 5
vertical ribs following the converging contour of the hood as shown in Spacing
of the ribs depends largely on the maximum lump size handled by the transfer
In this case the largest lumps are approximately 34 mm in diameter The idea is
to get as many dead boxes into the honeycomb as possible These small
cavities should however be large enough to capture a substantial amount of ore
inside
The optimisation of transfer chutes in the bulk materials industry
MN van Aarde
70
CHAPTER 4 ----_----------------shy
Figure 43 Spacing arrangement of honeycomb ribs inside the hood
The two vertical liners on the edges of the honeycomb are only 65 mm high while
the rest of the vertical liners are 120 mm high This is done so that the flat liners
in the chute surface can overlap the edge liners of the honeycomb An open
groove between the tiles along the flow of material would cause the liners to be
worn through much faster than in normal sliding abrasion conditions Due to the
high wear characteristics of the ore all openings between tiles should be kept out
of the mainstream flow
All the ribs in the honeycomb are 50 mm thick and vary in depth The vertical
ribs protrude the horizontal ribs by 30 mm in order to channel the flow These
vertical ribs are all flush with the surrounding tiles on the flat sliding surface of the
hood All the pockets of the wear box are 120 mm deep measured from the top
of the vertical ribs Again dimension is dependent on the maximum lump size
handled by the transfer There are no specifications as to the relation between
the pocket size and the lump size These dimensions were chosen to be
approximately 4 times the lump size Computer simulations can be used to test
the feasibility of this concept while commissioning of the equipment will ultimately
show whether this method works
The optimisation of transfer chutes in the bulk materials industry
MN van Aarde
71
CHAPTER 4 ------------_ -- - ---------------shy
442 Honeycomb wear box in the spoon
The honeycomb wear box in the spoon has the same configuration as in the
hood It also covers the entire width of the back plate and fully accommodates
the material impacting on the spoon from the hood The entire spoon is broken
up into three sections and the honeycomb wear box is situated in the back
section as shown in
Figure 44 Wear box in the spoon section
With almost the same configuration as the hood the spoon also has a corner
liner to ensure a continuous lined face between the flat surface liners and the
honeycomb ribs The detail of these liners and ribs are shown in A 90deg transfer
with a hood and spoon chute means that the stream received by the spoon is
narrower and longer than the stream received by the hood This is caused when
the material takes the shape of the hood before it is discharged into the spoon
The converged configuration causes the stream to flatten against the sliding
surface in the chute
The optimisation of transfer chutes in the bulk materials industry
MN van Aarde
72
CHAPTER 4
Due to the spoon honeycomb being a bit narrower than the hood there are only
three vertical ribs The number of ribs had to be reduced to be able to
accommodate the preferred cavity size of the honeycomb boxes These ribs now
form two channels in which the stream of material can be directed
Figure 45 Liner detail of the spoon honeycomb wear box
As shown in there is a 3 mm gap between the honeycomb section and the chute
plate work This is to ensure that the honeycomb section can be easily removed
for maintenance on the liners All the edges of the liners have rounded corners
to reduce stress concentrations which can cause rapid liner failure
45 DESIGNING THE CHUTE FOR INTEGRATION WITH SYSTEM REQUIREMENTS
The arc length of the spoon back plate is longer and closer to the belt in order to
ensure a smooth transfer of material from the chute to the receiving conveyor A
small gap of 75 mm is left between the bottom of the spoon and the receiving
conveyor Due to the fact that material can also be fed from another upstream
The optimisation of transfer chutes in the bulk materials industry
MN van Aarde
73
CHAPTER 4
stockyard conveyor this configuration will not be suitable This means that the
gap of 75 mm is not enough to allow material to pass underneath the chute
To accommodate this situation the spoon is split into different sections where the
bottom section lifts up to make room for material from behind In the raised
position the gap between the chute and the belt is 450 mm When the lower belt
is loaded to full capacity the material height is 380 mm This means that the
clearance to the belt in the non operational position is sufficient and show the
operational and non operational positions of the spoon
T -t t----~r_-+-wtIY1shy
Figure 46 Spoon in the operational position
The optimisation of transfer chutes in the bulk materials industry
MN van Aarde
74
CHAPTER 4
Figure 47 Spoon in the non operational position
This section is a discussion on how this new transfer chute configuration should
be operated in order to comply with the facility requirements The bottom section
of the chute can be lifted out of the way of material from behind on the receiving
conveyor Therefore a control philosophy is required for this movement
Referring to Figure 25 positions A and B indicate where these new chutes will be
installed As previously stated position C is the purging or dump position and
show the actuated spoon section in the operating and non operating positions
The conditions for these positions are explained as follows
46 CONCLUSION
With the consideration of all the facility constraints and a conceptual idea of what
the transfer configuration should look like the design can be optimised When
the feeding belt velocity is known the material trajectory and optimum chute
radius can be determined This radius and the radius of the spoon must then be
corrected to comply with the facility constraints but still deliver the required
material transfer rate
The optimisation of transfer chutes in the bulk materials industry
MN van Aarde
75
CHAPTER 4
With the high cost implications of regular maintenance intervals on chute liners
and facility downtime a honeycomb structure is incorporated into the high impact
areas The purpose of this honeycomb structure is to form small pockets similar
to dead boxes in order to promote material on material flow This increases the
lifetime of the chute liners and reduces maintenance intervals
This specific transfer chute splits up easily into separate sections and will help to
simplify maintenance The bottom section of the chute is actuated to move up
and down depending on whether the chute is in operation or not This will ensure
optimum transfer of material while in operation and provide sufficient clearance
when not in operation This is again guided by the facility requirements
In the design of all the transfer chute components the physical properties of the
ore should always be considered This determines the chute profile in terms of
flow angles and liner selection With maximum material flow ability high
resistance to sliding abrasion and reduced maintenance cost in mind 94
alumina ceramics is the liner of choice This is only in the main flow areas of the
chute For the dribbling chute a polyurethane liner is used to promote the flow of
this sticky material
The optimisation of transfer chutes in the bulk materials industry
MN van Aarde
76
CHAPTER 5
CHAPTER 5 TESTING AND VERIFICATION OF THE NEW SOLUTION
- middotSmiddotmiddotmiddotmiddotmiddotmiddotmiddotmiddotmiddot-middotl~Oi
The optimisation of transfer chutes in the bulk materials industry 77
MN van Aarde
CHAPTER 5
51 PREFACE
Although hand calculations have been a proven method of design for many
years it is important to verify any new chute concept before fabrication and
implementation Confirming the concept can save time and money as it reduces
the risk of on-site modifications Hand calculations only supply a two
dimensional solution to the problem which does not always provide accurate
material flow profiles
In recent years a few material flow simulation packages have been developed to
aid the design of material handling equipment The use of software packages
can be beneficial to the design process as it gives a three dimensional view of
the material behaviour in the chute This means that changes to the chute
concept can be made prior to fabrication
It is however important to verify that the solution obtained from the software
package is an accurate reflection of actual design model Therefore the material
being handled should be thoroughly tested to obtain the correct physical
properties required to obtain an accurate simulation result
The use of material flow simulation software does not replace the necessity for
hand calculations All the basic steps should still be done to derive a conceptual
chute configuration Material flow simulation software should be used as a
complimentary tool to analytical hand calculations in the design process
The optimisation of transfer chutes in thebulk materials industry
MN van Aarde
78
CHAPTER 5
52 SELECTING A TEST METHODOLOGY
Traditionally transfer chutes were designed by using basic analytical calculations
and relying on empirical data from past experiences with other chutes Mostly
these analytical methods only cater for the initial part of the chute such as the
parabolic discharge trajectory It is difficult to determine what happens to the
flow of material after it strikes the chute wall [34]
Two methods of verification were usually applied to evaluate a new transfer
chute configuration Trial and error can be used but obviously this is not desired
due to the high cost implications A second method is to build a small scale
model of the chute in which tests can be carried out before a final design can be
adopted This physical modelling is however time consuming and
expensive [34]
Granular or particulate materials are composed of a large number of loosely
packed individual particles or grains The flow of such granular materials forms
an intricate part of the materials handling industry Small reductions in energy
consumption or increases in production can have great financial advantages
Therefore significant efforts are put into improving the efficiency of these
facilities The important role of numerical simUlations is becoming more evident
in these optimisation procedures [35] Due to these efforts this technology is
becoming more powerful and is easy to use as a verification method for transfer
chute designs
The behaviour of bulk material particles is unique in the sense that it exhibits
some of the properties associated with the gaseous liquid and solid states of
matter The granular state of bulk materials cannot be characterised by anyone
of these states alone The research that captures the contact between individual
particles in an explicit manner is known as discrete element methods (OEM) [36]
The optimisation of transfer chutes in the bulk materials industry
MN van Aarde
79
CHAPTER 5
In basic terms OEM explicitly models the dynamic motion and mechanical
interactions of each body or particle as seen in the physical material flow It is
also possible to obtain a detailed description of the velocities position and force
acting on each particle at a discrete point during the analysis This is achieved
by focusing on the individual grain or body rather than focusing on the global
body as is the case with the finite element approach [36]
Figure 48 illustrates two examples of how this OEM software can be applied
Obviously the flow characteristics differ between the applications shown in Figure
48 This is however catered for by the mathematical simulation of each particle
collision
Figure 48 Flow analysis examples a) separation and screening b) hoppers feeders 36]
Continuous improvements in the performance of computing systems make OEM
a realistic tool for use in a wide range of process design and optimisation
applications During the last 20 years the capabilities of OEM have progressed
from small scale two dimensional simulations to much more complex 3D
applications The latest high performance desk top computers make it possible
to simulate systems containing large numbers of particles within a reasonable
time [37]
The optimisation of transfer chutes in the bulk materials industry
MN van Aarde
80
CHAPTER 5
According to the institute for conveyor technologies at the Otto-von-Guericke
University of Magdeburg in Germany using OEM for bulk solid handling
equipment provides [38]
bull A cost effective method of simulating the utility of materials handling
equipmentshy
bull Precise control over complicated problem zones eg transfer chutes
redirection stations and high wear areas
bull The possibility to integrate processes in one simulation such as mixing and
segregation
bull The possibility to involve the customer more extensively in the design
process
bull An advantage in the market due to attractive video sequences and pictures
of the simulation
bull The possibility to prevent facility damages and increase the efficiency of
conveyor systems extensively
As a good example of the advantages of the discrete element method the
University of Witwatersrand in Johannesburg did studies on rotary grinding mills
The university studies have shown that the OEM qualitatively predicts the load
motion of the mill very well The improved knowledge of the behaviour of mills
can therefore increase the profitability of mineral processing operations [39]
This material handling equipment is generally costly to operate and inefficient in
the utilisation of energy for breakage In order to understand the behaviour of
mills better the OEM method is increasingly being applied to the modelling of the
load behaviour of grinding mills These results indicate that this method can be
applied successfully in the bulk materials handling industry
The apUmisatian af transfer chutes in the bulk materials industry
MN van Aarde
81
CHAPTERS
Another example where this technology has been used with great success is with
the design of a new load out chute for the Immingham coal import terminal in
Britain By simulating the flow with a OEM package the designers were aided in
the fact that they were supplied with a quantitative description of the bulk solid
movement through the chute In the opinion of Professor Franz Kessler
(University of Leoben) the Discrete Element Method provides the engineer with
unique detailed information to assist in the design of transfer points [3]
These simulation packages are at the moment very expensive and not widely
used in transfer chute design It can be anticipated that the utilisation of these
packages will increase as the technology improves and the cost of the software
goes down [40] To get the best value out of the simulation it is important to
compare simulation packages and select the one most suitable to the complexity
of the design
Fluenttrade is a two dimensional computational fluid dynamics (CFD) software
package which can also be used as a chute design aid through the simulation of
material flow It must however be noted that this is not a OEM simulation
package This software package simulates the flow of material by considering
the material particles as a liquid substance The output of the simulation is the
same as can be seen in the example of Figure 49 The colours in the simulation
represent the average particle spacing [40] Due to the fact that this package
can at this stage only deliver two dimensional simulations it is considered
inadequate to perform detailed simulations on the intricate design piscussed in
this dissertation
The optjmisation of transfer chutes in the bulk materials industry
MN van Aarde
82
CHAPTER 5
COnroUf Votume t-~bn 01 ( 00 frlm~2 5000amp1 00) ~gtJ C3_2002 fLUENT 60 (2lt1 9 940 n 1Mgt u ody)
Figure 49 Simulations results from Fluenttrade [40]
The Overland Conveyor Company provides another alternative to the Fluent
software package Applied OEM is a technology company that provides discrete
element software to a variety of users in the bulk materials industry Bulk Flow
Analysttrade is an entry level package that they provide This package is very
powerful in the sense that it can accurately predict flow patterns depending on
the accuracy of the inputs An example of this is shown in Figure 50 It also has
the capability to show material segregation dynamic forces and velocities [41]
Figure 50 Simulation results from Bulk Flow Analysttrade [41]
The optimisation of transfer chutes in the bulk materials industry
MN van Aarde
83
CHAPTER 5
OEM Solutions is a world leader in discrete element modelling software They
recently announced the release of the latest version of their flow simulation
package called EOEM 21 This package can be used to simulate and optimise
bulk material handling and processing operations [41] Oue to the capabilities of
this software package it is a very attractive option for designing transfer chutes
With the development of EOEM 21 OEM Solutions worked in collaboration with
customers in the Bulk Handling Mining and Construction Pharmaceutical
Chemical and Agricultural sectors This enables the end users to perform more
sophisticated particle simulations specific to their unique applications Also
incorporated into this package is the ability and flexibility to customise and
personalise advanced particle properties [42]
This specific package has been proven successful by industry leaders Martin
Engineering (Neponset Illinois) is a leading global supplier of solids handling
systems This company continues to expand their use of EOEM software in
design optimisation and development of bulk materials handling products These
optimisation and development actions include all aspects of conveyor systems
and transfer points for numerous industrial sectors [43]
There are several other OEM simulation packages such as ESYS Particle
Passage-OEM and YAOE However none of these software packages seem be
major industry role players in the discipline of chute design although they might
have the capability In adjudicating the three big role players in bulk material flow
simulation packages there are a few factors taken into consideration It appears
thatthe advantages of 30 capabilities are non negotiable Therefore Fluenttrade is
not really a consideration From the literature review of the Bulk Flow Analysttrade
and the EOEM packages it seems that these two will provide more or less the
same performance It does seem however that the EOEM software is a bigger
role player in various industries Due to the possible future capabilities of EOEM The optimisation of transfer chutes in the bulk materials industry
MN van Aarde
84
CHAPTER 5
through its association with numerous industries this simulation package is the
software of choice
In order to retrofit or design a new transfer point with the aid of the selected OEM
software package there are a few steps that a designer must follow to gain the
full benefit of this tool [36]
1 An accurate 3D or CAD representation of the new or old transfer chute
must be rendered
2 Identify restrictions and limitations in terms of chute geometry and
manufacturing
3 Identify desired design goals (Le dust emissions flow restrictions etc)
4 Identify representative material properties and particle descriptions
5 In case of a retrofit make design changes to chute geometry with CAD
6 Simulate the performance of the new design using OEM software
7 Evaluate results obtained from the simulation (reiterate steps 5 6 and 7)
8 Perform and finalise detail design steps
9 Manufacture
10 Installation
The above mentioned steps found in references [6] and [36] only provides
information regarding retrofitting or designing chutes with the aid of OEM
Although it is a powerful design 1001 the design process should not discard the
use of analytical hand calculation~ Some of the most important design decisions
regarding chute profiles are made with analytical hard calculations such as
plotting the material trajectorY
53 DETERMINATION OF MATERIAL PROPERTIES
The discrete element method is a promising approach to the simUlation of
granular material interaction The accuracy of the outcome of the simulation is
The optimisation of transfer chutes in the bulk materials industry
M N van Aarde
85
CHAPTER 5
however dependent upon accurate information on the material properties and
input parameters [44] These inputs basically consist of the following
fundamental parameters size and shape factors bulk density angle of repose
cohesion and adhesion parameters and restitution coefficients [45]
The determination of most of these parameters are explained and defined in the
following paragraphs The parameters that are changed in the simulation
according to the reaction of the flow are not discussed and are typically
parameters such as the internal coefficient of friction between a number of
particles A collaborated effort by the bulk handling industry aims to find ways in
which all parameters can be accurately determined through scientific methods
This has however still not been achieved The objective is to achieve a realistic
representation and therefore some parameters are altered in the simulation
It is important to note that the computation time increases as the particle size
becomes smaller and the amount of particles increase In most granular flow
problems the characteristics of the material stream are largely determined by
particles greater than 10 - 20 mm in size [45] Therefore in order to reduce
computation time the selected particle size for simUlations should be the same
as the largest particles handled by the facility namely 34 mm diameter
Although fines have a higher internal friction coefficient and more cohesiveness
these properties can be averaged into the input parameters to obtain the same
overall effect [45] Therefore only a single particle size is used in the simulation
and the properties optimised to obtain the same result under actual operating
conditionsmiddot Some of the material properties can be easily obtained from the
facility The rest of the properties are obtained from tests carried out by expert
conSUltants in this field
The size factor and bulk density are obtained from the facility Materia tests
carried out by external consultants provide the coefficient of friction and also the The optimisation of transfer chutes in the bulk materials industry
MN van Aarde
86
CHAPTER 5
wall friction angle This is the angle at which the material will start to slide under
its own mass To determine these material properties the external consultants
normally use sophisticated and expensive equipment Data gathered from these
tests are used for the hand calculation of the chute profile The angle of repose
can normally be observed from a stockpile and is the angle that the side of the
stockpile makes with the horizontal
For the OEM simulation the coefficient of friction is one of the main determining
factors of the wall friction angle Data provided by the material tests can not be
used as a direct input into OEM In the software package the coefficient of
friction is represented by a factor between 0 and 1 The material test data can
however provide some insight into where on this scale the factor is This factor
can be derived from a few small simulation iterations as there is no method of
direct conversion between the test result data and the OEM input
To determine this factor a plate is modelled with a single layer of particles This
plate is then rotated within the simulation at approximately 2deg per second As
soon as the particles begin to slide the time is taken from which the angle can be
calculated This process is repeated with different friction coefficients until the
correct wall friction angle is obtained After the coefficient of friction factor is
determined between the particles and the chute wall the material restitution
factor and coefficient of internal friction can be obtained
The restitution factor is obtained by measurirtg the rebound height of a particle
when it is dropped from a certain height This is usually difficult to determine due
to the variation in shape of the material particles If the particle lands on a
surface it rarely bounces straight back up Therefore the test is repeated
numerous times and an average is taken to obtain the final result
Coefficient of internal friction is a property that describes the particles ability to
slide across each other A simUlation is set up to create a small stockpile of The optimisation of transfer chutes in the blJlk materials industry
MN van Aarde
87
CHAPTER 5
material particles The angle of repose can be obtained by measuring the
average apex angle of the stockpiles In this simulation the coefficient of internal
friction and restitution factors are iterated This is done in order to simulate the
accurate behaviour of particles falling onto the stockpile and forming the correct
angle of repose Figure 51 shows what this simulation typically looks like
Figure 51 Determination of material properties for an accurate angle of repose
54 VERIFICATION OF THE SELECTED TEST METHODOLOGY FOR THIS
APPLICATION
The best verification is to compare the simulation results with an actual material
flow situation Therefore a comparison is made between the actual flow in the
existing transfer configuration and the simulation of this same transfer This is
also a good test to see if the parameters changed in the simulation were done
correctly
During the chute test programme CCTV cameras were installed in the problem
transfer chutes at the facility The cameras are positioned to provide an accurate
view of the material flow behaviour inside the chutes As explained in Chapter 3
The optimisation of transfer chutes in the bulk materials industry 88
MN van Aarde
CHAPTER 5
the behaviour of the material flow inside the chutes changes with the variation of
ore type
Due to the fact that only 34 mm diameter particles are used in the simulation a
test using coarse ore was chosen for the verification of the simulation
Therefore test 12 is used as reference for the verification In this test coarse S
with the particle size distribution between 28 mm and 34 mm was used at the
transfer from CV 3 to CV 5
Figure 52 shows an image taken from the CCTV camera inside the transfer chute
between CV 3 and CV 5 The red line indicates the top of the chute throat
opening and the yellow arrows show the top of material flow This screen shot
was taken at a flow rate of 10 000 tlh It can be deduced from this view and the
chute test work that the chute is choking at a throughput rate of 10 000 tlh
Figure 52 Actual material flow with coarse S at 10000 tIh
The transfer chute from Figure 52 was modelled in CAD and the model imported
into the discrete element package EDEM All the material input parameters as
discussed in section 53 were used in the simulation 10 000 tlh was used as the
The optimisation of transfer chutes in the bulk materials industry
MN van Aarde
89
CHAPTER 5
flow rate parameter in an attempt to simulate and recreate the situation as shown
by Figure 52
Test 12 of the chute performance tests gave the following results which can be
compared to the EDEM simulation
bull Chute started to choke rapidly at 10 000 tlh
bull Slight off centre loading onto the receiving conveyor CV 5
bull A lower velocity layer of material close to the discharge of the chute
bull Material roll back on the receiving conveyor due to significant differences in
the velocity of the material flow and the receiving conveyor
Off-centre loading
L
Figure 53 Material flow pattern through the existing chute
The optimisation of transfer chutes in the bulk materials industry
MN van Aarde
90
CHAPTER 5
Flow restricted in this area
Low velocity layer
Low discharge velocity rollback
Figure 54 Cross sectional side view of material flow through the existing chute
Figure 53 shows the material flow pattern in the existing chute where the thick
red arrows indicate the direction of flow The legend on the left of the figure
indicates the material velocity in ms Slow flowing material is shown in blue and
the colour turns to red as the material velocity increases Slight off centre
loading onto the receiving conveyor CV 5 can be seen from Figure 53 This
correlates well with the actual observations during the physical testing of this
transfer point
Figure 54 shows the more determining factors for correlation between actual flow
and simulated flow where the legend on the left indicates the material velocity in
ms This is a cross sectional view through the centre of the chute From this
view a build up of material can be seen in the chute throat area The slow
flowing material on the back of the chute also helps to restrict the flow Due to
the fact that the material speed at the discharge of the chute is much slower than
the receiving belt speed a stack of turbulent flowing material is formed behind
the discharge point on the receiving conveyor
The optimisation of transfer chutes in the bulk materials industry
MN van Aarde
91
CHAPTER 5
There is a good correlation between the simulated and actual material flow
pattern The simulation method can therefore be considered as a valid alternate
or additional method to standard analytical chute design Attention should be
given though to the input of material properties in order to obtain a realistic result
55 VERIFICATION OF NEW CHUTE CONFIGURATION AND OPTIMISATION OF THE
HOOD LOCATION
After establishing that the OEM is a reliable design and verification tool the new
transfer chute configuration can be simulated Firstly this configuration is
modelled without the honeycombs inside the hood and spoon This is done in
order to verify the material flow pattern and velocity through the hood and spoon
Results obtained from this simulation can then be compared to the hand
calculation results An iterative process is followed with simulations and hand
calculations to obtain the best flow results The simulation results are shown in
Figure 55 and Figure 56
I
L
Figure 55 Material flow through hood at 10 000 tIh
The optimisation of transfer chutes in the bulk materials industry
MN van Aarde
92
CHAPTER 5
Figure 56 Material flow through spoon at 10 000 tlh
The hood velocity profile shown in Figure 38 gives the same result as obtained
from the DEM simulation The calculated hood exit velocity is 633 ms This is
the same result obtained from the simulation and shown by the red colouring in
Figure 55 As the material enters the spoon it is falling under gravity and
therefore still accelerating At impact with the chute wall it slows down and exits
the spoon with approximately the same velocity as the receiving conveyor
Figure 56 shows the material flow through the spoon section This can also be
compared to the spoon velocity profile in Figure 39 The behaviour of the
material inside the spoon as shown by the simulation correlates with the results
obtained from the hand calculations This is another indication that with accurate
input parameters the DEM can be used as a useful verification tool
The optimisation of transfer chutes in the bulk materials industry
MN van Aarde
93
CHAPTER 5
Skew loading into spoon
Slower material
L
Figure 57 Determination of the optimum hood location
The hood is supported by a shaft at the top and can be moved horizontally This
function is incorporated into the design in order to optimise the hood location
during commissioning of the transfer chute It is critical to discharge centrally into
the spoon in order to eliminate skew loading onto the receiving conveyor
Figure 57 illustrates the effect that the hood location has on material flow When
comparing the flow from Figure 55 to the flow in Figure 57 it is clear that skew
loading is a direct result of an incorrect hood position The circled area in Figure
57 illustrates how the flow reacts to the incorrect hood location
Material is discharged to the right side of the spoon which causes a slight buildshy
up of material on the left This causes the material to flow slightly from side to
side as it passes through the spoon Figure 57 indicates that the material to the
The optimisation of transfer chutes in the bulk materials industry
MN van Aarde
94
CHAPTERS ----------------- -------___ _--shy
right at the spoon discharge is slightly slower than the material on the left This is
a clear indication of skew loading onto the receiving conveyor
The material flow pattern in Figure 55 is symmetrical and therefore will not
cause skew loading The OEM can give a good indication of the required hood
setup before commissioning However adjustments can still be made during the
commissioning process The tracking of the receiving belt should give a good
indication of when the hood is in the optimum position
56 EFFECT OF THE HONEYCOMB STRUCTURE IN HIGH IMPACT ZONES
The purpose of the honeycomb dead box structure in the high impact zones is to
capture material inside the pockets and induce material on material flow This
requires that the material inside the honeycombs should be stationary while the
main stream material flow moves over the dead boxes OEM can therefore be
set up in such a way that the material velocities can be visualised inside the
chute
In Chapter 4 the logic of how this honeycomb should be structured and
positioned was discussed The simulations shown in Figure 58 and Figure 59
illustrate how a OEM pack~ge can also be used to determine the positioning of
these honeycomb structures Impact points in the hood and spoon must be
inside the honeycomb in all situations of flow inside the chute The spacing of
dead box pockets can be altered to ensure that a continuous layer of stationary
material is formed in the honeycomb area Various geometries for this
honeycomb structure can be simulated with OEM to obtain the best results
The optimisation of transfer chutes in the bulk materials industry
MN van Aarde
95
CHAPTER 5
Large radius hood
Hood honeycomb box to minimise wear in impact
Vertical discharge from hood centralising flow on
belt
L
Figure 58 Material behaviour through hood
Spoon
Spoon honeycomb box to minimise wear in impact area
Improved spoon discharge flow
Figure 59 Material behaviour through spoon
The optimisation of transfer chutes in the bulk materials industry
MN van Aarde
96
CHAPTERS
The legends on the left of Figure 58 and Figure 59 indicate the material velocity
in ms Dark blue indicates stationary material and bright red indicates a
maximum material velocity of 8 ms Using this information the functionality of
the honeycomb dead boxes can now be analysed The velocity of the material
captured by the dead boxes is indicated as dark blue This means that all the
material in the dead boxes is stationary
With the result obtained from the OEM simulation it is clear that material on
material flow will be induced by the honeycomb dead boxes The pockets of the
honeycomb capture the material and will therefore have reduced wear in the
high impact areas This material on material flow does however induce a
coarser sliding surface than the smooth ceramic liner tiles Due to the high
velocity of material through the chute the effect of the coarser sliding surface is
however minimised
58 CONCLUSION
The Discrete Element Method is proven to be a successful design and
verification tool in the bulk materials industry This method is used widely in the
global bulk materials industry The successful outcome of the OEM simulation is
however dependent on the correct material input parameters Some of these
parameters are readily available from the facility that handles the material The
rest of the parameters can be determined by setting up simple test simulations
with OEM
To verify that the OEM simulation is a correct indication of the actual condition
the simulation is compared to CCTV images taken from the same transfer chute
The results show that the OEM simulation does provide a true reflection of the
actual material flow through the transfer chute Therefore the same material
input parameters can be used to simulate the new transfer chute configuration
The optimisation of transfer chutes in the bulk materials industry
MN van Aarde
97
CHAPTER 5
From the simulations done on the new transfer chute configuration the effect of
the honeycomb dead boxes can be examined These simulation results show
that the honeycomb dead box configuration is effective in capturing material
inside the honeycomb cavities This results in material on material flow and
reduces impact abrasion on the ceramic chute liners
Results obtained from the OEM simulation of the new transfer configuration are
compared to the hand calculation results This comparison indicates that the
material velocity calculated in the hood and spoon correlates well with the
material velocity calculated by the OEM The overall results obtained from
simulating the new transfer chute configuration have been shown to provide a
true reflection of the actual flow through the chute
The optimisation of transfer chutes in the bulk materials industry
MN van Aarde
98
CHAPTER 6
CHAPTER 6 CONCLUSIONS AND RECOMMENDATIONS
The optimisation of transfer chutes in the bulk materials industry
MN van Aarde
99
CHAPTER 6
61 CONCLUSIONS AND RECOMMENDATIONS
Bulk materials handling is a key role player in the global industrial industry
Within this field the industry faces many challenges on a daily basis These
challenges as with any industry are to limit expenses and increase profit Some
of the limiting factors of achieving this goal in the bulk materials handling industry
are lost time due to unscheduled maintenance product losses due to spillage
andhigh costs incurred by increased maintenance
The focus of this study was on the optimisation of transfer chutes and
investigations were carried out to determine the core problems These
investigations were done by observing and monitoring various grades of iron ore
passing through transfer chutes known to have throughput problems The core
problems were identified as high wear on liners in the impact zones skew
loading on receiving conveyors material spillage and chute blockages
These problems cause financial losses to the facility either directly or indirectly
Direct financial losses can be attributed to the frequent replacement of chute
liners while the indirect financial losses are caused by facility down time This is
why it is imperative to optimise the manner in which the transfer of material is
approached A new transfer chute configuration addresses the problems
identified at the facility and the core concepts can be adopted at any bulk
materials handling facility
This new concept examines the utilisation of the hood and spoon concept rather
than the conventional dead box configuration By using the hood and spoon
configuration the material discharge velocity is utilised and carried through to the
discharge onto the receiving conveyor Adding to this design is a honeycomb
dead box configuration in the high impact zones of the hood and spoon This
initiates material on material flow and prolongs the lifetime of the chute liners
The optimisation of transfer chutes in the bulk materials industry
MN van Aarde
100
CHAPTER 6
The radius of the hood should be designed so that it follows the path of the
material trajectory as closely as possible Some facility constraints prohibit this
hood radius from following exactly the same path as the material The radius of
the spoon is designed in such a manner that it receives the material from the
hood and slows it down while turning it into the direction in which the belt is
running Ideally the material should be discharged from the spoon at
approximately the same velocity as the receiving conveyor
If this can be achieved then some major problems suffered by the industry will
have been resolved With the hood having almost the same radius as the
material trajectory impact wear on liners can be significantly reduced By
discharging material from the chute onto the receiving conveyor at the same
velocity as the conveyor belt excessive belt wear and material spillage will be
avoided Further optimisation is however still possible by investigating the
implementation of various skirting options to the side of the conveyor
This new transfer chute configuration also boasts an articulated bottom section in
the spoon The purpose of the adjustable bottom section is to create greater
clearance below the spoon This will allow material on the belt below to pass
unimpeded underneath the spoon In some cases there can be several chutes in
series that discharge onto the same conveyor In these cases it is beneficial to
incorporate an articulated chute in order to have the capability of having a small
drop height between the discharge point in the chute and the receiving conveyor
This low drop height also minimises turbulent flow at the chute discharge point on
the receiving conveyor
The most unique feature to the new design is the implementation of the
honeycomb dead box configuration in the high impact zones Due to these high
impact areas the liners will experience the most wear This section of the chute
is flanged and can be removed separately from the rest of the chute to aid
maintenance In most maintenance operations it may only be necessary to reline The optimisation of transfer chutes in the bulk materials industry
MN van Aarde
101
CHAPTER 6
this small section of the chute Costs are minimised by reducing the time
required for maintenance and the cost of replacing liners
Previously testing of new transfer chute configurations normally involved
implementing the chute and obseNing its ability to perform according to
specification This can however be a costly exercise as it is possible that further
modifications to the chute will be required after implementation Therefore it is
beneficial to verify the new chute configuration before implementation
This is done by simulating the material flow through the chute using Discrete
Element Method A comparison was done between the actual flow in an eXisting
chute and the simulated flow in the same chute configuration This comparison
showed the same result obtained from the simulation and the actual material
flow This method can therefore be used as an accurate simulation tool for
evaluating transfer chute performance
The mathematical calculations describing the material flow in and over the
honeycomb dead box structures are complex Therefore simulation models are
used to show the material behaviour in those areas Simulations show that the
material captured within the dead boxes remains stationary thus protecting the
ceramic liners behind it This is the desired result as it prolongs the life of the
chute liners and reduces maintenance frequencies
If the work is done efficiently it normally takes two days to remove a worn chute
of this configuration fully and replace it with a new one This is normally done
once a year due to the design lifetime of the chute With the new chute
configuration this maintenance schedule can be reduced to two hours once a
year for the replacement of the honeycomb sections only The exposed face of
the honeycomb ribs will wear through until the efficiency of the honeycomb
design is reduced
The optimisation of transfer chutes in the bulk materials industry
MN van Aarde
102
CHAPTER 6
This specific iron ore facility has approximately fifty transfer points During this
exercise only two of these transfer points were replaced with the new chute
configuration The combined annual maintenance time for replacement of these
50 chutes is 100 days If the new chute philosophy is adopted on all these
transfers the annual maintenance time can be reduced to as little as 100 hours
This excludes the unplanned work for cleaning of spillages and fixing or replacing
worn conveyors
There are significant benefits to investigating the problems at specific transfer
points before attempting a new design This gives good insight into where the
focus should be during the design process Ea~y identification and
understanding of the problem areas is essential for a new chute configuration
The new design features can provide a vast improvement and a large benefit to
the bulk materials handling industry
62 RECOMMENDATIONS FOR FURTHER STUDY
During the chute performance tests it was noted that avalanches on the
stockpiles during reclaiming of material causes peaks on the conveyor systems
These peaks in the material stream increase the probability of blockages in the
transfer chutes As a result material spillage occurs and the conveyor belts can
be easily overloaded
This occurrence creates the requirement for further studies on the reclaiming
operations All stacker reclaimers are operated manually which creates ample
room for error Investigations can be done to determine the value of automating
the reclaiming operations Manual interaction cannot be avoided but an
automated system will reduce the possibility for error
Visual inspections on the transfer chute liners indicate that the material tends to
erode the liners away quicker in the grooves between liner plates or ceramic
The optimisation of transfer chutes in the bulk materials industry
MN van Aarde
103
CHAPTER 6
tiles This occurrence seems to be worse in areas of the chute where the
material velocity is the highest
This problem was specifically noticed with ceramic liner tiles The tiles are glued
to the chute surface with an epoxy and this substance also fills the crevices
between the tiles This epoxy is however not resistant to any type of sliding or
impact abrasion If the material gains speed in such a groove between the tiles it
simply erodes the epoxy away Studies to reduce or even eliminate this problem
should be examined
In some situations the layout and configuration of the chute prohibits the tiles
from being inserted in a staggered manner Studies can be done on the
composition of this epoxy in order to increase its resistance to sliding and impact
abrasion By doing so the lifetime of the chute liners can be increased which will
result in minimised facility down time due to maintenance
It seems that it is a global industry problem to find accurate scientific methods of
determining material input parameters for OEM simulations Although most of
the material properties can be determined through testing it is still a challenge to
convert that information into a representative input parameter into OEM It is
therefore recommended that further studies be undertaken to determine a
method by which material test data can be successfully converted into OEM input
parameters
The optimisation of transfer chutes in the bulk materials industry
MN van Aarde
104
REFERENCES ------shy
REFERENCES
[1] ARNOLD P C MCLEAN A G ROBERTS A W 1978 Bulk Solids
storage flow and handling Tunra Bulk Solids Australia Jan
[2] ANON 2008 Peak (Export) OilUSD Survival Dec
httppeakoHsurvivalorgltag=finance Date of access 8 Jun 2009
[3] KESSLER F 2006 Recent developments in the field of bulk conveying
FME Transactions Vol 34 NO4
[4] ANON 2007 Specification for Troughed Belt Conveyors British
Standards BS28901989 25 Sep Date of access 8 Jun 2009
[5] CEMA (Conveyor Equipment Manufacturers Association) Belt Conveyors
6thfor Bulk Materials ed wwwcemanetorg Date of access
10 Jun 2009
[6] DEWICKI G 2003 Computer Simulation of Granular Material Flows
Overland Conveyor Co Inc Jan httpwwwpowderandbulkcom Date
of access 10 Jun 2009
[7] AMERICAN COAL COUNCIL 2009 Engineered chutes control dust for
Ameren U Es Meramec Plant httpwww clean-coal infold rupalindexphp
Date of access 12 Jun 2009
[8] KUMBA IRON ORE 2008 Annual Financial Statements 2008
httpwwwsishenironorecompanycozareportskumba afs 08pdffullpdf
Date of access 13 Jun 2009
The optimisation of transfer chutes in the bulk materials industry
MN van Aarde
105
REFERENCES
[9] METSO BACKGROUNDER 2007 Rock Crushing 22 Feb
httpWWvVmetsocom Date of access 15 Jun 2009
[10] ALTHOFF H 1977 Reclaiming and Stacking System Patent US
4037735
[11] THE SOUTH AFRICAN INSTITUTE OF MATERIALS HANDLING
Conveyor belt installations and related components Chutes Level 1
course on belt conveying technology
httpWWvVsaimhcozaeducationcourse01chuteshtm Date of access
18 Jun 2009
[12] CLARKE R 2008 Hood and spoon internal flow belt conveyor transfer
systems SACEA - seminar 22 Aug httpWWvVsaceaorgzaDate of
access 22 Jun 2009
[13] T W WOODS CONSTRUCTION 2009 Design problems in coal transfer
chutes 24 Mar httpWWvVferretcomaucTW-Woods-Constructions
Date of access 25 Jun 2009
[14] LOUGHRAN J 2009 The flow of coal through transfer chutes 20 Aug
Showcase of research excellence James Cook University Australia
[15] ONEIL M 2006 A guide to coal chute replacement Power Engineering
International Nov httpgoliathecnextcomcoms2lgi 0198-369643Ashy
guide-to-coal-chutehtml Date of access 3 Jul 2009
[16] NORDELL LK 1992 A new era in overland conveyor belt design
httpWWvVckitcozasecureconveyorpaperstroughedoverlandoverland
htm Date of access 3 Jul 2009
The optimisation of transfer chutes in the bulk materials industry
MN van Aarde
106
REFERENCES
[17] Rowland C 1992 Dust Control at Transfer Points
httpwwwckitcozasecureconveyorpapersbionic-research-2d-bri2shy
paper05htm Date of access 4 Jul 2009
[18] KRAM ENGINEERING Ceramic composite impact blocks
httpwwwkramengineeringcozacercomhtmIDate of access
5 Jul 2009
I19] BLAZEK C 2005 Kinkaid InteliFlo tradeInstallation Source for Plats
Power Atticle Oct
httpwwwbenetechusacompdf caseStudyBe neKi ncArti c pdf
Date of access 10 Aug 2009
[20] CRP Engineering Corp Modern Transfer Chute Designs for Use in
Material Handling
httpwwwcbpengineeringcompdflTransfer Chutespdf Date of access
26 Apr 2010
[21] ROZENTALS J 2008 Rational design of conveyor chutes Bionic
Research Institute South African Institute of Materials Handling
[22] ROBERTS AW SCOTT OJ 1981 Flow of bulk solids through
transfer chutes of variable geometry and profile Bulk Solids Handling
1(4) Dec
[23] CARSON JW ROYAL TA GOODWILL DJ 1986 Understanding
and Eliminating Particle Segregation Problems Bulk Solids Handling
6(1) Feb
[24] BENJAMIN CW 2004 The use of parametric modelling to design
transfer chutes and other key components Gulf Conveyor Group The optimisation of transfer chutes in the bulk materials industry
MN van Aarde
107
l25] STUART DICK D ROYAL TA 1992 Design Principles for Chutes to
Handle Bulk Solids Bulk Solids Handling 12(3) Sep
[26J REICKS AV RUDOLPHI TJ 2004 The Importance and Prediction of
Tension Distribution around the Conveyor Belt Path Bulk materials
handling by conveyor belt 5(2)
(271 RAMOS CM 1991 The real cost of degradation
institute Chute design conference 1991
Bionic research
[28] ROBERTS AW 1969 An investigation of the gravity flow of non
cohesive granular materials through discharge chutes Transactions of
the ACMEjournal of engineering for indust~ May
[29] TAYLOR HJ 1989 Guide to the design of transfer chutes and chute
linings for bulk materials
association 1989
mechanical handling engineers
[30] ROBERTS AW 1999 Chute design application transfer chute design
Design guide for chutes in bulk solids handling The University of
Newcastle Australia
[31] NORDELL LK 1994 Palabora installs Curved Transfer Chute in Hard
Rock to Minimise Belt Cover Wear Bulk Solids Handling 14 Dec
[32] ROZENTALS J 1991 Flow of Bulk Solids in Chute Design
research institute Chute design conference 1991
Bionic
The optimisation oftransfer chutes in the bulk materials industry
MN van Aarde
108
REFERENCES
[33] ROBERTS AW WICHE SJ 2007 Feed Chute Geometry for
Minimum Belt Wear (h International conference of bulk materials
handling 17 Oct
[34J POWDER HANDLING New OEM Conveyor Transfer Chute Design
Software Helix Technologies
httpvwvwpowderhandlingcomauarticesnew-dem-conveyor-transfershy
chute-design-software Date of access 12 Aug 2009
[35J SAWLEY ML CLEARY PW 1999 A Parallel Discrete Element
Method for Industrial Granular Flow SimUlations EPFL - Super
Computing Review (11)
[36] DEWICKI G 2003 Bulk Material Handling and Processing - Numerical
Techniques and Simulation of Granular Material Overland Conveyor
Company Bulk Solids Handling 23(2)
[37J FA VIER J 2009 Continuing Improvements Boost use of Discrete
Element Method Oil and Gas Engineer- Production Processing 7 Oct
[38] KRAUS E F KA TTERFELD A Usage of the Discrete Element Method in
Conveyor Technologies Institute for Conveyor Technologies (IFSL) The
Otto-von-Guericke University of Magdeburg
[39] MOYS MH VAN NIEROP MA VAN TONDER JC GLOVER G
2005 Validation of the Discrete Element Method (OEM) by Comparing
Predicted Load Behaviour of a Grinding Mill with Measured Data School
for Process and Materials Engineering University of Witwatersrand
Johannesburg The optimisation of transfer materials industry
MN van Aarde
109
REFERENCES
[40J MciLVINA P MOSSAD R 2003 Two dimensional transfer chute
analysis using a continuum method Third international conference on
CFD in the Minerals and Process Industry CSIRO Melbourne Australia
(41J Overland Conveyor Company Inc 2009 Applied DEM
httpwwwapplieddemcomDate of access 26 Apr 2010
(42] DEM SOLUTIONS 2008 Advanced Particle Simulation Capabilities with
EDEM 21 Press release 5 Nov
[43J DEM SOLUTIONS 2008 Martin Engineering Expands use of EDEMTM
Software in Design of Solids Handling Equipment Press release 20 Feb
(44] COETZEE CJ ELS DNJ 2009 Calibration of Discrete Element
Parameters and the Modelling of Silo Discharge and Bucket Filling
Computers and Electronics in Agriculture 65 Mar
[45] DAVID J KRUSES PE Conveyor Belt Transfer Chute Modelling and
Other Applications using The Discrete Element Method in the Material
Handling Industry
httpwwwckitcozasecureconveyorpaperstrouqhedconveyorconveyor
Date of access 3 Sep 2009
bulk materials industry
MN van Aarde
110
ApPENDIXA
ApPENDIX A MATERIAL TESTS AND LINER SELECTiON
The optimisation of-transfer chutes in the bulk materials industry
MN van Aarde
11-1
ApPENDIX A
MATERIAL TEST WORK AND LINER SELECTION
Material samples were taken from the stockpile area for evaluation and testing
These samples represent the worst case materials for impact wear and flow
problems Tests were conducted by external consultants as this is a speciality
field Therefore no detail information on how the tests are conducted is currently
available Results from these tests should indicate the worst case parameters for
chute design according to each specific liner type tested
The material handled by the facility varied from 4 mm to 34 mm lump size A mid
range lump size ore was identified as the preferred material to use for wear
testing This decision was based on the specific ore type maximum lump size of
15 mm as required for the wear test The wear test apparatus used cannot
provide conclusive results with the larger lump sizes of 34 mm and thus smaller
sizes are used Guidance on which ore samples to take was given by the
external consultants tasked with performing the test work
The test work is divided into two sections Firstly the flow test work is carried out
on the finer material with a higher clay content known to have bad flow angles
Included in the selection of fine materials is a sample of the scraper dribblings
This is the material scraped off the belt underneath the head pulley Secondly
the wear tests were conducted on 15 mm samples as explained above
A few common liners were selected for testing These liners are shown in
Table A Some of these liners are known for their specific purpose and
characteristics Polyurethane is known to have a very good coefficient of friction
and will therefore improve the flow of material This material does however
wear out quicker in high impact applications Therefore it is only considered for
use inside the dribbling chute
The optimisation of transfer chutes in the bulk materials industry
MN van Aarde
112
ApPENDIX A
As can be seen from Figure 37 in section 432 the dribbling chute will only see
scraper dribblings from the primary and secondary scrapers It is protected from
any main stream flow of material by the start up chute This makes the
polyurethane liner a prime candidate for lining this section of the chute
Table A Material tested vs liner type
I Flow Tests Wear Tests
Liner T
en aJ c
u
I
i
N en aJ c
u
Cf)
en aJ c
u
I en
shy OJaJ C 0 shyj -shy 0 u pound
(f) shy0
T
aJ ~ j 0 0
N aJ ~ j 0 0 i
I Chrome x x x x x
Carbide
x x x x xI VRN 500 I
x x x x x x94
Alumina
Ceramic i I
Poly x
Urethane I I I
FLOW TEST WORK
The fines 1 sample was tested at three different moisture contents of 36 41
and 47 This is 70 80 and 90 of saturation moisture respectively No
noticeable difference was observed in the wall friction angles Therefore the
fines 2 and fines 3 samples were tested at 80 of saturation which is 42 and
43 moisture content respectively
Test work showed that the minimum chute angle required for flow increased as
the impact pressure increased Chute angles were measured up to impact
pressures of about 8 kPa The worst chute angle obtained was 62deg This means
that no angle inside the chute should be less than 62deg from the horizontal
The industry 113
MN van Aarde
ApPENDIXA
The scraper dribblings were tested at a moisture content of 12 This material
possesses the most clay content and therefore has the worst flow properties
During testing of this material water was added to improve the flow At an
impact pressure of 03 kPa the minimum chute angle drops from 62deg to 56deg when
adding a fine mist spray of water
WEAR TEST WORK
As stated in chapter 4 wear tests were conducted on the chrome carbide
overlay ceramics and VRN500 The results of these tests are shown as non
dimensional wear ratios of mm wearmm travel of bulk solid sliding on the wear
liners coupon at a given force Test results shown in Table B indicate that the
chrome carbide will have about 185 times the lifetime of 94 alumina ceramics
The VRN500 liner will wear about 6 times faster than the 94 alumina ceramics
at the same force
Table B Wear ratios of liners at two different pressure ranges
lore Wall Coupon 65 kPa 163kPa -173 kPa I i
Coarse 1 on 94 Alumina Ceramic 90 E-9 37 E-8
Coarse 1 on Chrome Carbide 87 E-9 20 E-8
Coarse 1 on VRN500 91 E-8 I 24 E-7 i
Coarse 2 on 94 Alumina Ceramics 38 E-9 22 E-8
Coarse 2 on Chrome Carbide 55 E-9 15 E-8
Coarse 2 on VRN500 66 E-8 25 E-7 I
LINER SELECTION
The lifetime of the liners is not the only criteria Maintainability and cost are also
factors that must be considered Chrome carbide seems to be the liner of choice
for this application However the specific type of chrome carbide tested is not
The optimisation of transfer chutes industry 114
MN van Aarde
ApPEND[xA
manufactured locally and the imported cost is approximately three times that of
ceramics
VRN500 is slightly cheaper than ceramics and can easily be bolted to the back
plate of the chute which makes maintenance very simple Ceramics are
however widely used on the facility and the maintenance teams are well trained
for this specific liner Therefore 94 alumina ceramics is chosen for this
application
The optimisation of transfer chutes in the bulk materials industry
MN van Aarde
115
ApPENODlt B
ApPENDIX B CHUTE CONTROL PHILOSOPHY
The optfmisation of transfer chutes in the bulk materials industry
MN van Aarde
116
ApPENDIX B
SPOON IN THE OPERATING POSITION
For the spoon to be in the operating position the moving head must be over that
specific spoon and the feeding stockyard conveyor must be running This means
that material will be fed through the chute In this case the spoon needs to be in
the operating position to prevent spillage
However when the chute is in the operating position and the feeding conveyor
trips for any reason the actuated spoon section must not move to the non
operating position If the spoon position feedback fails then the system must trip
and the spoon must remain in its last position The downstream conveyor must
also fail to start with this condition
SPOON IN THE NON OPERATING POSITION
As a rule the spoon needs to be in the non operating position when the moving
head on that specific stockyard conveyor is in the purging position (position C)
The reason is that when a stacker reclaimer is in stacking mode any upstream
stacker reclaimer can be reclaiming The reclaimed material on CV 5 or CV 6
will have to pass underneath the actuated chute
ACTUATED SPOON OVER CV 5
As an example for the movement of any actuated spoon on CV 5 the following
are considered When the moving heads of any of the stockyard conveyors are
in position A and that specific stockyard conveyor is running then the rest of the
actuated spoons over CV 5 must be in the non operating position The
following scenario provides a better understanding
bull CV 4 is running
bull CV 4 moving head is in position A
The optimisation of transfer chutes in the bulk materials industry
MN van Aarde
117
ApPENDIXB
In this situation all the actuated spoons on CV 5 except underneath CV 4
must be in the non operating position
ACTUATED SPOON OVER CV 6
As an example for the movement of any actuated spoon on CV 6 the following
are considered When the moving heads of any of the stockyard conveyors are
in position B and that specific stockyard conveyor is running then the rest of the
actuated spoons over CV 6 must be in the non operating position The
following scenario is similar to 453 but explains the control philosophy for the
moving head in position B
bull CV 2 is running
bull CV 2 moving head is in position B
In this situation all the actuated spoons on CV 6 except underneath CV 2
must be in the non operating position
The optimisation of transfer chutes in bulk materials industry
MN van Aarde
118
TABLE OF CONTENTS ---~-------------------~----
TABLE OF CONTENTS
Abstract ii
Samevatting iv
Acknowledgements vi
Table of contents vii
List of figures ix
List of tables xii
Nomenclature xiii
Chapter 1 Introduction to transfer chutes in the bulk materials handling industry1
11 Introduction to transfer chutes 2
12 Various applications and configurations of transfer chutes 5
13 Recurring chute problems and countermeasures from industry 11
14 Purpose of this research 18
15 Synopsis of this dissertation 19
Chapter 2 Basic considerations in chute design 21
21 Preface 22
22 Design objectives 22
23 Integrating a more appropriate chute layout with the plant constraints 27
24 Investigating the correct chute profile for reduced liner wear 30
25 Feed chute geometry for reduced belt wear 34
26 Conclusion37
Chapter 3 Tests for the identification of recurring problems on existing chutes39
31 Preface 40
32 Test methodology 40
33 Chute performance acceptance criteria 42
34 Discussion of problem areas 42
35 Summary of test results 54
36 Conclusion55
The optimisation of transfer chutes in the bulk materials industry
MN van Aarde
vii
TABLE OF CONTENTS
Chapter 4 Dynamic chutes for the elimination of recurring problems 57
41 Preface 58
42 Consideration of the existing transfer point constraints 59
43 Design of the chute profile 61
44 Incorporating a dead box in the impact areas 67
45 Designing the chute for integration with system requirements 73
46 Conclusion75
Chapter 5 Testing and verification ofthe new solution 77
51 Preface 78
52 Selecting a test methodology 79
53 Determination of material properties 85
54 Verification of the selected test methodology for this application 88
55 Verification of new chute configuration and optimisation of the hood
location 92
56 Effect of the honeycomb structure in high impact zones 95
58 Conclusion 97
Chapter 6 Conclusions and Recommendations 99
61 Conclusions and recommendations 100
62 Recommendations for further study 103
References 1 05
Appendix A Material Tests And Liner Selection 111
Appendix B Chute Control Philosophy 116
The optimisation of transfer chutes in the bulk materials industry
MN van Aarde
viii
LIST OF FIGURES
LIST OF FIGURES
Figure 1 Growth in global crude steel production from 1996 to 2006 [2] 2
Figure 2 Typical in-line transfer point [6] 4
Figure 3 90deg transfer point [7J 4
Fig ure 4 Material lump sizes through a crushing plant 6
Figure 5 Stacker Reclaimer in reclaiming mode 7
Figure 6 Typical dead box [11J9
Figure 7 Typical cascade chute [11] 9
Figure 8 Typical dynamic chute [12] 10
Figure 9 Radial door used in chutes under ore passes or silos [11] 1 0
Figure 10 Flopper gate diverting material to different receiving conveyors [11J 11
Figure 11 Ch ute liner degradation 12
Figure 12 Results of continuous belt wear at transfer points 13
Figure 1 Dust from a transfer point onto a stockpie13
Figure 14 Ceramic composite liners [18]15
Figure 15 Benetech Inteliflow J-Glide transfer chute [19] 16
Figure 16 Flow simulation of the Benetech Ineliflo chute [19] 17
Figure 17 Four step process for plant design and commissioning [1] 27
Figure 18 Vertical curve on incline conveyor 28
Figure 19 Protective roller on a transfer chute 29
Figure 20 Geometry of the impact plate and material trajectory [30J30
Figure 21 Model for the impact of a particle on a flat surface [29] 31
Figure 22 Ore flow path in the curved chute onto the incline conveyor [31] 35
Figure 23 Gentle deceleration of the product before impact on the receiving belt
[32] 35
Figure 24 Typical feed chute discharge model [33] 37
Figure 25 Layout of conveyors for chute test work 43
Figure 26 Configuration of the existing transfer chute44
Figure 27 Clear chute indicating camera angle 46
The optimisation of transfer chutes in the bulk materials industry
MN van Aarde
ix
LIST OF FIGURES
Figure 28 Coarse material at 8 000 tlh 46
Figure 29 Fine material at 8 000 tlh 47
Figure 30 Blocked chute with coarse material at 8600 tIh 47
Figure 31 Damaged side skirt 49
Figure 32 View behind the chute of the receiving conveyor before loading 50
Figure 33 View behind the chute of the receiving conveyor during loading 50
Figure 34 Peak surges experienced during reclaiming operations 52
Figure 35 Stockyard head end layout 59
Figure 36 Dimensional constraints on the existing transfer configuration 60
Figure 37 Hood and spoon configuration for the 90deg transfer 63
Figure 38 Hood velocity profile 65
Figure 39 Spoon velocity profile 66
Figure 40 Chute cross section 67
Fig ure 43 Honeycomb wear box positioning 69
Figure 44 Wear box in the hood section 70
Figure 45 Spacing arrangement of honeycomb ribs inside the hood 71
Figure 46 Wear box in the spoon section 72
Figure 47 Liner detail of the spoon honeycomb wear box 73
Figure 41 Spoon in the operational position 74
Figure 42 Spoon in the non operational position 75
Figure 48 Flow analysis examples a) separation and screening b) hoppers
feeders [36J 80
Figure 49 Simulations results from Fluenttrade [4OJ 83
Figure 50 Simulation results from Bulk Flow Analysttrade [41J83
Figure 51 Determination of material properties for an accurate angle of repose88
Figure Actual material flow with coarse Sat 10 000 tIh 89
Figure 53 Material flow pattem through the existing chute 90
Figure 54 Cross sectional side view of material flow through the existing chute91
Figure 55 Material flow through hood at 10 000 tlh 92
Figure 56 Material flow through spoon at 10 000 tlh 93
Figure 57 Determination of the optimum hood location 94
The optimisation of transfer chutes in the bulk materials industry
MN van Aarde
x
OF FIGURES
Figure 58 Material behaviour through hood 96
Figure 59 Material behaviour through spoon 96
The optimisation of transfer chutes in the bulk materials industry
MN van Aarde
xi
LIST OF TABLES
LIST OF TABLES
Table 1 Design Input Reference Requirements [24J 24
Table 2 Iron are grades used for chute test work 45
Table 3 Results from test programme 54
The optimisation of transfer chutes in the bulk materials industry
M N van Aarde
xii
---------------------------------
CV
NOMENCLATURE
NOMENCLATURE
SCADA
CCTV
CEMA
DEM
kPa
mm
MSHA
ms
mt
MW
NIOSH
OSHA
RampD
tlh
3D
Supervisory Control And Data Acquisition
Closed Circuit Television
Conveyor Equipment Manufacturers Association
Conveyor
Discrete Element Method
Kilopascal
Millimetres
Mine Safety and Health Administration
Metres per second
Metric Tons
Megawatt
National Institute for Occupational Safety and Health
Occupational Safety and Health Administration
Radius of curvature
Research and Development
Tons per hour
Three Dimensional
The optimisation of transfer chutes in the bulk materials industry
MN van Aarde
xiii
CHAPTER 1
CHAPTER 1 INTRODUCTION TO TRANSFER CHUTES IN THE BULK
MATERIALS HANDLING INDUSTRY
The optimisation of transfer chutes in the bulk materials industry
MN van Aarde
1
CHAPTER 1
11 INTRODUCTION TO TRANSFER CHUTES
111 Bulk material handling industry
In order to comprehend the utilisation of transfer chutes fully it is imperative to
first understand the industry in which it is used Transfer chutes are most
commonly used in the bulk materials handling industry Bulk materials handling
operations perform a key function in a great number and variety of industries
throughout the world as stated in 1978 by Arnold McLean and Roberts [1 J
The nature of materials handling and scale of industrial operation varies from
industry to industry and country to country These variations are based on the
industrial and economic capacity and requirements of the specific industry or
country Regardless of the variations in industry the relative costs of storing
handling and transporting bulk materials are in the majority of cases very
significant
o
Figure 1 Growth in global crude steel production from 1996 to 2006 [2J
The optimisation of transfer chutes in the bulk materials industry
MN van Aarde
2
CHAPTER 1
The chart from BHP Billiton shown in Figure 1 provides a clear indication of the
actual drivers of global materials demand Figure 1 indicates the percentage
growth in crude steel production from all the major role players between 1996
and 2006 China accounted for 65 of the 494 million tonnes of global steel
production growth between 1996 and 2006 Europe grew by 6 while the other
countries grew by 20 [2]
These figures emphasise that bulk materials handling performs a key function in
the global industry and economy [1] Because of market requirements new
products continuously evolve This is also true for the field of bulk conveying
technologies [3] It can be assumed that the evolution of new technology is due
to the requirement for more efficient and cost effective operation
The case study which will be discussed from Chapter 3 onwards is an iron ore
export facility This facility exports approximately 50 million tonnes per annum
With each hour of down time the financial losses equate to approximately
R750 000 This highlights the fact that handling systems should be designed and
operated with a view to achieving maximum efficiency and reliability
112 Function of transfer chutes
BS2890 (Specification for Troughed Belt Conveyors) gives the definition for
transfer chutes as follows A straight curved or spiral open topped or enclosed
smooth trough by which materials are directed and lowered by gravity [4] For
any belt conveyor system to operate successfully the system requires that [5]
bull the conveyor belt be loaded properly
bull the material transported by the conveyor is discharged properly
The transfer of bulk material can either be from a belt bin hopper feeder or
stockpile and occurs at a transfer point In most cases this transfer point requires
optimisation of transfer chutes in the bulk materials industry
MN van Aarde
3
CHAPTER 1 - ----~--~--------------~--------
a transfer chute [5] In industry the most common use of transfer chutes is for
transferring bulk material from one conveyor belt to another This transfer of
material can be done in any direction as simplistically explained in Figure 2 and
Figure 3
Figure 2 Typical in-line transfer point [6J
Figure 2 shows a basic in-line transfer of material from the end of one conveyor
belt onto the start of another conveyor belt Figure 3 illustrates a more intricate
design where the direction of material transport is changed by an angle of 90 0 bull
This design or any other design entailing a directional change in flow normally
requires more detailed engineering [7
The optimisation of transfer chutes in the bulk materials industry
MN van Aarde
4
CHAPTER 1
Regardless of the direction or type of transfer there are some design
requirements that always need special attention Some of these requirements
are reduced wear on chute liners correct discharge velocity minimum material
degradation and minimum belt abrasion The correct design will also eliminate
blockages shape the load correctly and minimise the creation of dust [7]
12 VARIOUS APPLICATIONS AND CONFIGURATIONS OF TRANSFER CHUTES
The application of transfer chutes is central to any operation in the bulk handling
industry Whether it is mining operations storing stacking importing or
exporting of bulk material the transfer of material is always required On the
mining side the challenges involved with materials handling are probably some of
the most extreme
This is due to the great variation in lump sizes that must be catered for At
Sishen iron ore mine seven iron ore products are produced conforming to
different chemical and physical specifications The current mining process at
Sishen entails [8]
bull Removal of topsoil and stockpiling
bull Drilling and blasting of ore
bull Loading of iron ore and transporting to the crushers
bull Crushing and screening into size fractions
bull Beneficiation of all size fractions
bull Stockpiling onto various product beds
The processes with the most intricate and complex chute arrangements are
probably crushing and screening as well as stacking and reclaiming of material
The optimisation of transfer chutes in the bulk materials industry
11 N van Aarde
5
CHAPTER 1
121 Crushing
An excavator or wheeled loader transfers the rock to be crushed into the feed
hopper of the primary crusher The primary crusher breaks the large rock
boulders or run of mine material into smaller grain sizes Some of the bigger
crushers in the industry can crack boulders that are about one cubic meter in
size All the crushed material passes over a screen to separate the different
lump sizes The material that falls through the screen is transferred via a series
of transfer chutes and conveyor belts to the stockpile area [9]
Where the material does not pass through the screen another system of transfer
chutes and conveyor belts transfers this material to a secondary crusher The
material is fed into this crusher via a transfer chute from the discharge of a
conveyor belt All the processed material is then transferred to the stockpile area
via a separate series of transfer chutes and conveyor systems [9] Throughout
this whole process the material lump size changes and with it the transfer chute
requirements
Figure 4 Material lump sizes through a crushing plant
The optimisation of transfer chutes in the bulk materials industry
MN van Aarde
6
CHAPTER 1
Figure 4 shows some spillage from a conveyor between a primary and secondary
crusher The shovel in the picture provides a good reference as to the variation
in material lump size on the walkway
122 Stacking and Recaiming
Normally the stockyard area has an elongated yard conveyor for moving bulk
material in the longitudinal direction of the stockyard Straddling the yard
conveyor transversely is the rail mounted undercarriage of the stacker reclaimer
Three main chutes transfer material through the machine [10] Figure 5 shows
this machine in action while reclaiming material from a stockpile
Figure 5 Stacker Reclaimer in reclaiming mode
The first chute will transfer material to the incline conveyor of the machine when
the material has to be stacked on the stockpile In the case where the material
must bypass the machine this chute will transfer material from the tripper back
onto the yard conveyor [10]
The optimisation of transfer chutes in the bulk materials industry
MN van Aarde
7
CHAPTER 1
The second chute transfers material from the incline conveyor onto the boom
conveyor This is normally a difficult process because the boom conveyor is
never in the same direction as the incline conveyor From the end of the boom
conveyor the material is Simply discharged onto the stockpile [10]
When reclaiming stockpile material the bucket whee at the head end of the
boom conveyor scoops up material and deposits it back onto the boom conveyor
From here it is discharged into the centre chute of the machine This chute then
discharges the material onto the yard conveyor for further processing In some
cases the bottom section of this centre chute must be moved out of the way to
allow free passage of material discharged from the tripper chute onto the yard
conveyor [10]
123 Chute configurations
Various chute configurations are used in the bulk materials handling industry
These configurations depend on the specific requirements of the system layout
or material properties There are basically two main configurations consisting of
dead box chutes and dynamic chutes Both of these configurations have their
specific applications in industry The major difference is that dead box chutes
use the material being transferred as a chute liner whereas dynamic chutes are
lined with a high wear resistant material A combination of both can also be
used
If the material being transferred is relatively dry such as goid ore dead boxes
prove to be more beneficial One of the applications of a ded box is to absorb
the direct impact of material discharged from a conveyor into a head chute as
can be seen in Figure 6 Other applications are in long or high transfer points In
these transfers the momentum of falling material must be reduced before
reaching the receiving conveyor belt in order to reduce wear of the belt [11]
The optimisation of transfer chutes in the bulk materials industry
MN van Aarde
8
CHAPTER 1
Figure 6 Typical dead box [11]
As shown in Figure 7 dead boxes are also used to accomplish changes in the
vertical flow direction by inserting angled panels This configuration where dead
boxes are used as deflection plates or impact wear plates is known as a cascade
chute In this case the deflection plate or the impact wear plate hardness is
equal to that of the feed material [11]
Figure 7 Typical cascade chute [11]
The hood and spoon chute or dynamic chute is configured so that the hood
catches and changes the material trajectory path to exit with a vertical velocity
When the material impacts the spoon it slides down the smooth spoon surface
The material flow direction is changed to the direction of the receiving conveyor
as shown in Figure 8 [12]
The optimisation of transfer chutes in the bulk materials industry
MN van Aarde
9
CHAPTER 1
Figure 8 Typical dynamic chute [12J
Ancillary equipment used with this configuration of chutes is radial doors and
flopper gates Radial doors are used successfully below ore passes or silos for
an onoff feed control as shown by Figure 9 One drawback of radial doors is the
possibility of jamming while closing In order to counteract this problem a
knocker arm between the cylinder door and the rod can be added This helps to
close the door with full force open with reduced force or hammered open [11]
Figure 9 Radial door used in chutes under ore passes or silos [11J
The optimisation of transfer chutes in the bulk materials industry
MN van Aarde
10
CHAPTER 1
The function of a f10pper gate is to divert the flow of material in a chute when one
conveyor is required to feed either of two discharge points as shown in Figure 10
For this same purpose a diverter car can also be used where a section of the
chute moves in and out of the path of material flow The critical area in the
design of a flop per gate is the hinge point In order for the gate to be self
cleaning the hinge point should be placed above the apex of the double chute
This also prevents rock traps that can jam the gate [11]
COVERED
Figure 10 Flopper gate diverling material to different receiving conveyors [11J
13 RECURRING CHUTE PROBLEMS AND COUNTERMEASURES FROM INDUSTRY
Transfer chutes are a fundamental link when conveying ore and therefore it is
important to get it right at the outset of design and fabrication Design and
fabrication issues can cause numerous problems when transferring material
Historically conveyor system design focused on the systems overall structural
integrity while ensuring that the equipment would fit within the facilitys
constraints [13] [14] [15]
The optimisation of transfer chutes in the bulk materials industry
MN van Aarde
11
CHAPTER 1
Little attention was given to design analysis or consideration for material flow
characteristics Normally the solution for controlling flow was to implement
simple rock boxes [15] This type of chute configuration is still commonly used in
industry but with more emphasis on the flow of material The most recurrent
problems on transfer chutes are [13] [14]
bull Spillage
bull Blocked chutes
bull High wear on the receiving belt due to major differences between the
material velocity and the belt velocity
bull Rapid chute wear
bull Degradation of the material being transferred
bull Excessive generation of dust and noise
bull Miss tracking of the receiving conveyor belt due to skew loading from the
transfer chute
Figure 11 Chute liner degradation
Figure 11 shows the excessive wear on ceramic tiles where the material
trajectory from the feeding belt impacts the chute These tiles are replaceable
and a maintenance schedule normally specifies the replacement intervals A
The optimisation of transfer chutes in the bulk materials industry 12
MN van Aarde
CHAPTER 1
problem arises when the frequency of these maintenance intervals is too high
due to excessive wear on the liners
Figure 12 Results of continuous belt wear at transfer points
The conveyor belt can account for up to 60 of the capital cost of a bulk
materials handling plant This means that the cost implications of constant
replacement of a conveyor belt due to wear can become significantly higher
than the original capital investment [16] Figure 12 shows the extreme damage
on a conveyor belt caused by abrasion and gouging
Figure 13 Dust from a transfer point onto a stockpile
The optimisation of transfer chutes in the bulk materials industry
MN van Aarde
13
CHAPTER 1 --~ ---------------------------shy
The presence of dust is an indisputable fact in many industries concerned with
the handling or processing of products such as coal mineral ores and many
others [17] As in the case of spillage it is easy to identify transfer systems that
cause dust clouds Environmental regulations are in place to prevent excessive I
dust emissions
Government organisations such as the Occupational Safety and Health
Administration (OSHA) the Mine Safety and Health Administration (MSHA) and
the National Institute for Occupational Safety and Health (NIOSH) closely monitor
dust levels at all coal handling facilities [13] Therefore it is imperative that the
chute design process caters for limiting dust emissions
Systems normally used in industry are enclosed skirting systems bag houses
and dust collectors This however is only treating the symptom rather than
eliminating the primary cause In order to minimise dust generation the use of
low impact angles and minimal chute contact is required (14] One of the most
successful methods of controlling dust is atomised water spray systems using a
combination of high pressure water and chemical substances
Over the years considerable research has gone into minimising wear on transfer
chutes There are currently a few different liner types to choose from depending
on the configuration and application of the chute These include ceramic tiles
chrome carbide overlay materials and typi~al hardened steel plates such as
VRN A combination of liner materials can also be used similar to the one
shown in Figure 14
The opUmisation of transfer chutes in the bulk materials industry
MN van Aarde
14
CHAPTER 1
Figure 14 Ceramic composite liners [18J
This ceramic composite liner is an example of the new technology available in
chute lining materials It is a high wear resistant surface made from cylindrical
alumina ceramic pellets bound within a resilient rubber base The purpose of this
material is to provide wear resistance through the use of ceramics while the
rubber dampens the impact forces [18]
Some innovative concepts for chute design have been implemented since the
materials handling industry started to incorporate new ideas Benetech Inc
installed a new generation hood and spoon type chute at Dominions 1200 MW
Kincaid coal powered generating station as shown in Figure 15 This chute
replaced the conventional dead box chute [19] Their innovation is to use a pipe
configuration combined with the hood and spoon concept
The optimisation of transfer chutes in the bulk materials industry
MN van Aarde
15
CHAPTER 1
Figure 15 Benetech Inteliflow J-Gide transfer chute [19J
This chute has sufficient chute wall slope and cross sectional area to prevent
material build-up and blocked chutes Reduced collision forces in the chute
minimize material degradation and the creation of excessive dust The material
velocity in the chute is controlled by the wall angles to obtain a discharge velocity
with the same horizontal component as the belt velocity [19] Figure 16 shows a
flow simulation of the Benetech concept The simulation shows that this concept
will result in lower impact forces and reduce belt abrasion
The optimisation of transfer chutes in the bulk materials industry
MN van Aarde
16
CHAPTER 1
Figure 16 Flow simulation ofthe Benetech Ineliflo chute [19J
CBP Engineering Corp also considers the concept of pipe type sections to be
the answer to most of the transfer chute problems They describe it as a curved
or half round chute The modern perception is to gently guide the material in the
required direction rather than use a square box design or deflector doors which
turns or deflects the flow [20]
The industry is striving towards developing new technology in transfer chute
design One solution is to incorporate soft loading transfer chutes to alter the
material flow direction with minimum impact on the side walls of chute and
receiving conveyor As experienced by many industries these types of chutes
can transfer material onto the receiving conveyor at almost the same velocity as
the conveyor By doing so many of the problems with material transfer can be
eliminated [13]
Most of these solutions as proposed by industry only address a few of the
numerous problems experienced with transfer chutes The dynamic hood and
The optimisation of transfer chutes in the bulk materials industry
MN van Aarde
17
CHAPTER 1
spoon chute appears to afford the best opportunity for solving most of the
problems There are still however many unanswered questions surrounding this
design
Figure 11 shows the installation of a hood type chute in the iron ore industry It is
clear from this image that liner wear in the higher impact areas is still an area of
concern Improvements can still be made to this design in order to further
enhance its performance
14 PURPOSE OF THIS RESEARCH
The bulk materials handling industry is constantly facing the challenge of
implementing transfer chutes that satisfy all the system requirements Problems
such as high wear spillage blockages and the control of material flow are just
some of the major challenges faced by the industry
The objective of this research is to identify problems experienced with transfer
chutes of an existing bulk handling system and to apply current design solutions
in eliminating these problems In doing so the research aims to introduce a new
method of minimising liner wear caused by high impact velocities
Dynamic chutes are discussed in particular where the entire design process
addresses the problems identified on chutes in brown field projects Approaching
chute design from a maintenance point of view with the focus on reducing liner I
degradation will provide a fresh approach to transfer chute design The
concepts disc~ssed in this dissertation (dynamic and dead box chutes) are
commonly used in industry However some research is done to determine
whether a combination of these concepts can solve some of the problems
experienced by industry
The optimisation of transfer chutes in the bulk materials industry 18
MN van Aarde
CHAPTER 1
At the hand of all the information provided in this dissertation its purpose is to
enable the chute designers to better understand the process of chute
optimisation and design This is achieved through the discussion of a case study
where the chutes are evaluated and re-designed to achieve the desired
performance
15 SYNOPSIS OF THIS DISSERTATION
Chapter 1 gives an introduction to the bulk materials industry and the role that
transfer chutes plays in this industry Some of the problems that the industries
have been experiencing with transfer chutes were identified and the diverse
solutions to these problems discussed These solutions were reviewed to
identify whether improvement would be possible
Chapter 2 provides a better understanding of the functionality and the
conceptualisation of transfer chutes as well as investigating the theory behind
material flow through transfer chutes This theory reviews the research and
design objectives used as a guideline when approaching a new chute
configuration The guidelines for evaluating and designing transfer chutes are
used to verify the performance of these chutes in the iron ore industry
Chapter 3 identifies some practical problems experienced on transfer chutes a~
an existing bulk transfer facility These problems are identified through a series
of tests where the actual flow inside the chutes is monitored via CCTV cameras
The results obtained from these tests are specific to this facility but can provide
insight into the cause of some problems generally experienced in the industry
These results can provide helpful information when modifying or re-designing
new transfer chutes
Chapter 4 uses the theory discussed in Chapter 2 to conceptualise a new
transfer chute configuration for the transfer points that were tested All the facility
The optimisation of transfer chutes in the bulk materials industry 19
MN van Aarde
CHAPTER 1
constraints are taken into account during the process in order to obtain an
optimum solution to the problems identified during the chute test work The old
chutes did not have major problems with liner wear due to large dead boxes
However this remains a serious consideration for the new dynamic chute design
due to its configuration where there is continuous sliding abrasion of the chute
surface A new concept for the reduction of liner degradation is introduced in this
chapter
Before manufacturing and installing this new concept it is important to verify that
it will perform according to conceptual design Chapter 5 is a discussion on the
use of the Discrete Element Method as a verification tool A simulation of the
new transfer chute concept is done to visualise the behaviour of the material as it
passes through the new transfer chute configuration
Chapter 6 discusses the benefits of the new transfer chute configuration A
conclusion is made as to what the financial implications will be with the
implementation of this new concept Recommendations are made for future
studies in the field of bulk materials handling These recommendations focus on
the optimisation of processes and the reduction of maintenance cost to the
facility
The optimisation of transfer chutes in the bulk materials industry
MN van Aarde
20
CHAPTER 2
CHAPTER 2 BASIC CONSIDERATIONS IN CHUTE DESIGN
The optimisation of transfer chutes in the bulk materials industry
MN van Aarde
21
CHAPTER 2
21 PREFACE
In an economic driven world the pressure for production is often the cause of the
loss of production This is a bold statement and is more factual than what the
industry would like to admit This is also valid in the bulk materials handling
industry Production targets seldom allow time for investigation into the root
cause of the problems The quick fix option is often adopted but is frequently the
cause of even more maintenance stoppages
Existing chutes on brown field projects often fail due to an initial disregard for the
design criteria changes in the system parameters or lack of maintenance
These transfer points are often repaired on site by adding or removing platework
and ignoring the secondary functions of a transfer chute Therefore it is
imperative to always consider the basic chute specifications when addressing a
material transfer problem [21]
22 DESIGN OBJECTIVES
In the quest to improve or design any transfer point some ground rules must be
set This can be seen as a check list when evaluating an existing chute or
designing a new chute Transfer chutes should aim to meet the following
requirements as far as possible [21] [22] [23]
bull Ensure that the required capacity can be obtained with no risk of blockage
bull Eliminate spillage
bull Minimise wear on all components and provide the optimal value life cycle
solution
bull Minimise degradation of material and generation of excessive dust
bull Accommodate and transfer primary and secondary scraper dribblings onto
the receiving conveyor
The optimisation of transfer chutes in the bulk materials industry
MN van Aarde
22
CHAPTER 2
bull Ensure that any differences between the flow of fine and coarse grades are
catered for
bull Transfer material onto the receiving conveyor so that at the feed point onto
the conveyor
bull the component of the material now (parallel to the receiving conveydr) is as
close as possible to the belt velocity (at least within 10) to minimise the
power required to accelerate the material and to minimise abrasive wear of
the belt
bull the vertical velocity component of the material flow is as low as possible so
as to minimise wear and damage to the belt as well as to minimise spillage
due to material bouncing off the belt
bull The flow is centralised on the belt and the lateral flow is minimised so as
not to affect belt tracking and avoid spillage
With the design of a new chute there are up to 46 different design inputs with 19
of these being absolutely critical to the success of the design Some of the most
critical preliminary design considerations are shown in Table 1 [24]
The optimisation of transfer chutes in the bulk materials industry
MN van Aarde
23
CHAPTER 2
Table 1 Design Input Reference Requirements [24J
Aria Unit
Feed Conveyor
Belt Speed r ms
Belt Width mm
JibHead Pulley Dia mm
Pulley Width mm
Angle to Horizontal at the Head Pulley degrees
Belt Troughing Angle degrees
Sight Height Data
Feed Conveyor Top of Belt to Roof mm
Drop Height mm
Receiving Conveyor Top of Belt to Floor mm
Receiving Conveyor
Belt Speed ms
Belt Width mm
Belt Thickness mm
Angle of Intersection degrees
Angle to Horizontal degrees
Belt Troughing Angle degrees
Material Properties
Max Oversize Lump (on top) mm
Max Oversize Lump (on top) degrees
studies done by Jenike and Johanson Inc have identified six design principles
that can serve as a guideline in chute optimisation exercises These six
principles focus on the accelerated flow in the chute which they identified as the
most critical mode [25]
Within accelerated flow the six problem areas identified by Jenike and Johanson
Inc are [25]
The optimisation of transfer chufes in the bulk materials industry
MN van Aarde
24
CHAPTER 2
bull plugging of chutes at the impact points
bull insufficient cross sectional area
bull uncontrolled flow of material
bull excessive wear on chute surfaces
bull excessive generation of dust
bull attrition or breakdown of particles
221 Plugging of chutes
In order to prevent plugging inside the chute the sliding surface inside the chute
must be sufficiently smooth to allow the material to slide and to clean off the most
frictional bulk solid that it handles This philosophy is particularly important
where the material irnpacts on a sliding surface Where material is prone to stick
to a surface the sliding angle increases proportionally to the force with which it
impacts the sliding surface In order to minimise material velocities and excessive
wear the sliding surface angle should not be steeper than required [25]
222 Insufficient cross sectional area
The cross section of the stream of material inside the chute is a function of the
velocity of flow Therefore it is critical to be able to calculate the velocity of the
stream of material particles at any point in the chute From industry experience a
good rule of thumb is that the cross section of the chute should have at least two
thirds of its cross section open at the lowest material velocity [25] When the
materialis at its lowest velocity it takes up a larger cross section of chute than at
higher velocities Therefore this cross section is used as a reference
223 Uncontrolled flow of material
Due to free falling material with high velocities excessive wear on chutes and
conveyor belt surfaces are inevitable Therefore it is more advantageous to
The optimisation of transfer chutes in the bulk materials industry
MN van Aarde
25
CHAPTER 2
have the particles impact the hood as soon as possible with a small impact
angle after discharge from the conveyor With the material flowing against the
sloped chute walls instead of free falling the material velocity can be controlled
more carefully through the chute [25]
224 Excessive wear on chute surfaces
Free flowing abrasive materials do not normally present a large wear problem
The easiest solution to this problem is to introduce rock boxes to facilitate
material on material flow Chute surfaces that are subjected to fast flowing
sticky and abrasive materials are the most difficult to design
A solution to this problem is to keep the impact pressure on the chute surface as
low as possible This is done by designing the chute profile to follow the material
trajectory path as closely as possible By doing so the material is less prone to
stick to the chute surface and the material velocity will keep the chute surface
clean [25]
225 Excessive generation of dust
Material flowing inside a transfer chute causes turbulence in the air and
excessive dust is created In order to minimise the amount of dust the stream of
material must be kept in contact with the chute surface as far as possible The
material stream must be compact and all impact angles against the chute walls
must be minimised A compact stream of material means that the material
particles are flowing tightly together At the chute discharge point the material
velocity must be as close as possible to the velocity of the receiving belt [25]
The optimisation of transfer in the bulk materials industry
M N van Aarde
26
CHAPTER 2
226 Attrition or breakdown of particles
The break up of particles is more likely to occur when large impact forces are
experienced inside a chute than on smooth sliding surfaces Therefore in most
cases the attrition of material particles can be minimised by considering the
following guidelines when designing a transfer chute minimise the material
impact angles concentrate the stream of material keep the material stream in
contact with the chute surface and keep the material velocity constant as far as
possible [25]
23 INTEGRATING A MORE APPROPRIATE CHUTE LAYOUT WITH THE PLANT
CONSTRAINTS
According to Tunra Bulk Solids in Australia the process for design and
commissioning of a new plant basically consists of four steps The entire
process is based on understanding the properties of the material to be
handled [1]
RampD CENTRE CONSULTING CONTRACTOR ENGINEERING AND PLANT
COMPANY OPERATOR r-------------- I TESTING Of CONCEPTUAl I DETAILED DESIGN CONSTRUCTION amp
I BULKSOUDS - DESIGN COMMISSIONING- I shyI Flow Proper1ies Lining Material tuet Equipment
Selection Procurement _ I I
I I
I Flow Pat1erns SSlpment Quality Control I
I IFeeder Loads amp Process Performance
I Power I Optimisation Assessment I I
L J -
I IBin Loads I I I Wear Predictions I
FEEDBACK I I I IModel Studigt L _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ J
i ~ FEEDBACK r-shyFigure 17 Four step process for plant design and commissioning [1J
The optimisation of transfer chutes in the bulk materials industry
MN van Aarde
27
CHAPTER 2
Figure 17 illustrates this four step process These steps are a good guideline in
order to incorporate a more appropriate chute layout for the plant constraints
This is an iterative process where all the possible solutions to a problem are
measured against all the possible plant constraints This section focuses more
on the second column of Figure 17 and specifically on structures and equipment
During this stage of design the utilisation of 3D parametric modelling also creates
an intimate and very accurate communication between the designer and the
project engineer or client This effective communication tool will save time and
improve the engineering process [24]
A good example of obtaining an appropriate chute layout for the plant constraints
can be explained as follows On an existing plant a transfer point will have a
specific transfer height from the top of the feed conveyor to the top of the
receiving conveyor If the feed conveyor has an incline section to obtain the
required transfer height it will also have a curve in the vertical plane of that
incline section This curve has a certain minimum radius in order to keep the belt
on the idlers at high belt tensions [26]
Figure 18 Vertical curve on incline conveyor
The optimisation of transfer chutes in the bulk materials industry
MN van Aarde
28
CHAPTER 2
If the transfer height at a transfer point is changed the path of the feeding
conveyor should always be taken into consideration With an increase in transfer
height the vertical curve radius will increase as well in order to prevent the
conveyor from lifting off the idlers in the curve This will require expensive
modifications to conveyor structures and therefore in most cases be a pointless
exercise Figure 18 shows clearly the large radius required to obtain a vertical
curve in a belt conveyor
Other considerations on brown field projects might be lift off of the receiving
conveyor at start up before or after the vertical curve This is caused by peaks
in belt tension at start up which may cause the belt to lift off the idlers and chafe
against the chute In some cases this can be solved by fitting a roller as shown
in Figure 19 to the underside of the chute to protect it from being damaged by
the belt or to protect the belt from being damaged by the chute The position of
this specific chute is just after a vertical curve where the belt tends to lift off at
start up
Figure 19 Protective roller on a transfer chute
The optimisation of transfer chutes in the bulk materials industry
MN van Aarde
29
CHAPTER 2
24 INVESTIGATING THE CORRECT CHUTE PROFILE FOR REDUCED LINER WEAR
In order to reduce chute wear the curved-profile variable chute concept is
introduced [27] This concept was originally developed by Professor Roberts for
the grain industry in 1969 [28] After many years of research and investigation
CMR Engineers and Project managers (pty) Ltd came to the following
conclusion any improvement in coal degradation dust generation and chute
wear can only be achieved by avoiding high impact forces or reducing them as
much as possible [27]
At any impact point of material in a chute or conveyor kinetic energy is
dissipated This increases material degradation and wear on liners and conveyor
belt covers Therefore it is good practise to redirect the kinetic energy in a
useful manner This action will help to reduce liner and belt wear [32]
x
Vo
- ImpactPlate
Figure 20 Geometry of the impact plate and material trajectory [30J
The optimisation of transfer chutes n the bulk materials industry
MN van Aarde
30
CHAPTER 2
The path followed by the material discharged over the end pulley of a belt
conveyor is known as its trajectory and is a function of the discharge velocity of
the material from the conveyor [29] Figure 20 shows the material trajectory as
weI as the radius and location of the impact plate In the case of dynamic chutes
this impact plate represents the back plate of the chute
The correct chute profile to reduce wear must cater for the proper location of the
chute covers and wearing plates This location depends upon the path of the
trajectory which must be predicted as accurately as possible
Figure 21 Mode for the impact of a particle on a flat surface [29]
Figure 21 illustrates a material particle impinging on a flat chute surface at an
angle of approach 91 and with approach velocity V1 This particle will then
rebound off the chute plate at an angel 92 and velocity V2 The wear on the
chute liners or the surface shown in Figure 21 will be a function of the vector
change in momentum of the particle One component will be normal to and the
other component parallel to the flat surface The parallel component is referred
to as the scouring component along the surface [29]
It is important to determine the radius of curvature of material within the
trajectory It is now a simple exercise to determine the chute hood radius
depending on plant constraints Firstly the material trajectory must be calculated
The optimisation of transfer chutes in the bulk materials industry
MN van Aarde
31
CHAPTER 2 ---~----------------
According to the mechanical handling engineers association in Perth Australia it
is beneficial to keep the impact angle as small as possible Impact angle less
than 20deg are recommended for most liner materials This will ensure an
acceptably small impulse force component normal to the surface The r~te at
which the material is gouging away the chute liner at the impact point will be
reduced [29]
The material trajectory is determined by equation l
(1)
Where the origin of the x and y axis is taken at the mean material height h and
the discharge point on the pulley as shown in Figure 20 The variables involved
in the calculation of the material trajectory are [30]
y =vertical position on the grid where the trajectory is determined
x = position parallel to the receiving belt line where the trajectory is determined
v = material speed
g =gravitational constant
a =inclination angle of the feeding conveyor
After the material leaves the belt a simplified assumption can be made that it
falls under gravity It is quite clear that in order to minimise the impact angle
the impact plate must follow the path of the material trajectory as far as possible
It will almost never be possible to obtain a contact point between the material and
the chute where there is a smooth contact with no impact angle
This radius of curvature of the material tr~jectory is determined as follows [30
The optimisation of transfer chutes in the bulk materials industry i 32
MN van Aarde
CHAPTER 2
[1 + ( gx )]15 R = vcos8
c (2)
vcos8
Where
g == gravitational constant
v == material speed
8 == Angle at discharge
In order to simplify the manufacturing process of a curved chute the radius must
be constant For a relatively smooth contact between the material and the chute
plate the radius of the curved chute at the point of contact is as close as
possible to the material discharge curvature radius [30] This is rarely possible
on brown field projects due to facility constraints In this case there will be higher
probability for rapid liner wear Each situation must be individually assessed to
determine the best solution
Cross sectional dimensions of the transfer chute must be sufficient to collect the
material and ensure continuous flow without causing blockages At the same
time the chute profile must not result in excessive material speed Material
speed inside the chute will be considered to be excessive when it can not be
controlled to exit the chute at approximately the same velocity to that of the
receiving conveyor Chutes may block for the following reasons [29]
bull Mechanical bridging due to large lumps locking into one another
bull Insufficient cross section causing cohesive material to choke or bridge
bull Inadequate chute inclination causing fines build-up
bull Corner effects or cohesion causing material to stick to the chute walls
The optimisation of transfer chutes in the bulk materials industry
MN van Aarde
33
CHAPTER 2
For the handling of large lumps of material field experience has shown that the
chute cross sectional area should be 25 times the major dimension of the largest
lumps To avoid possible bridging of the material in the chute the
recommendation is to make the inner chute volume as large as possible This
will be guided by the support steelwork around the transfer point [29]
Field experience has shown that it is advisable depending on the material being
transferred that the chute inclination angles be no less than 65deg to 700 Cornerbull
effects should also be avoided where material gets stuck in the inner corners of
chute plate work These angles should preferably be no less than 70 0 bull
25 FEED CHUTE GEOMETRY FOR REDUCED BELT WEAR
The design parameters to reduce both chute and belt wear are interrelated
Research done at the Phalaborwa copper mine is a good case study to prove the
concept of a curved chute profile This mine had specific problems with high belt
wear at transfer points At this facility an in-pit 60 x 89 gyratory crusher and
incline tunnel conveyor was commissioned to haul primary crushed ore A
conventional dead box chute transfers ore from the crusher to a 1800 mm wide
incline conveyor [31]
The maximum lump size handled by this section of the facility is 600 mm (60 kg)
An 18 mm thick top cover was specified for this conveyor with an X grade
rubber according to DIN (abrasion value lt 100 mm) This belt had an original
warranty of 10 years After 35 years the top cover started to show signs of
excessive wear and the tensile cords of the 18 mm thick cover were visible [31]
In April 1994 Phalaborwa commissioned the curved chute concept and a new
belt on the incline conveyor Six months after commissioning no gouging or
pitting damage was evident The material velocity through this curved chute onto
the incline conveyor is shown in Figure 22 [31]
The optimisation of transfer chutes in the bulk materials industry
MN van Aarde
34
CHAPTER 2
VELOCITY ( m I aec ) _ nm _ bull m _ 1211 _ UTI _ U16
_ IIU _ Im _ I rn _ 171-111 _ u n _ ~ l
_ 4 ~
_ 41 _ 4
141 CJ UtiI 1bull-bull 1t5
~ 1m bull UI2
Material Flow Velocity Gradient
Figure 22 Ore flow path in the curved chute onto the incline conveyor [31]
TENDENCY TO FORM STAGNANT LAYER LEADING
TO INSTABILITY IN DEPTH OF FLOW
C8middotFLOW IN CURVED CHUTES
Figure 23 Gentle deceleration of the product before impact on the receiving belt [32]
The optimisation of transfer chutes in the bulk materials industry
MN van Aarde
35
CHAPTER 2
Figure 23 illustrates the gentle deceleration of material that is achieved with the
curved chute concept This helps to reduce belt wear because it is relatively
easy to discharge the material at the same velocity as the receiving conveyor
The material speed v can be calculated at any point in the chute using equation
3 and equation 4 [33]
v 2~R [(2ue2 -l)sin(O) +3ue cos(O)] + Ke 2uB (3) 4ue +1
This equation is only applicable if the curved section of the chute has a constant
radius Rand I-Ie is assumed constant at an average value for the stream [33]
I-Ie = friction coefficient
8 = angle between the horizontal and the section of the spoon where the velocity
is determined and
(4)
The optimisation of transfer chutes in the bulk materjas industry
MN van Aarde
36
CHAPTER 2
Mass Flow Rate Omh
Figure 24 Typical feed chute discharge model [33J
The velocity Ve at the discharge of the chute can be determined from equation 3
and equation 4 The components Vey and Vex of the discharge velocity as
shown in Figure 24 can now be calculated This investigation should aid the
optimisation of the chute profile in order to [33]
bull match the horisontal component Vex of the material exit velocity as close
as possible to the belt speed
bull reduce the vertical component Vey of the material exit velocity in order to
minimize abrasive wear on the receiving conveyor
26 CONCLUSION
This section discussed the technical background necessary for the optimisation
of transfer chutes on an existing iron ore plant which will be discussed in
Chapter 4 The focus is specifically aimed at reducing impact wear on chute liner
materials and abrasive wear on receiving conveyor belts Important to note from
The optimisation oftransfer chutes in the bulk materials industry
MN van Aarde
37
CHAPTER 2
this section is the acceptable limits of dynamic chute optimisation or design
These limits aremiddot
bull a material impact angle of less than 20deg
bull a variance of less than 10 between the receiving belt velocity and the
material discharge velocity component parallel to the receiving conveyor
An important aspect of chute optimisation is to consider the facility constraints
These constraints are in some cases flexible but in most cases the chute
optimisation process must be designed within these constraints This means that
any new concept will have to be measured against what is possible within the
facility limits
It is important to note that only the most common transfer chute problems were
mentioned in this chapter Other possible problems were not addressed in this
chapter as it is normally related to detail design issues Solutions to these
problems are unique to each type of chute and will be addressed for the specific
case study in Chapter 4
The optimisafjon of transfer chutes in the bulk materials industry
MN van Aarde
38
CHAPTER 3
The optimisation of transfer chutes in the bulk materials industry
MN van Aarde
CHAPTER 3 TESTS FOR THE IDENTIFICATION OF RECURRING
PROBLEMS ON EXISTING CHUTES
39
CHAPTER 3
31 PREFACE
Since the completion of a certain iron ore handling facility it has been
experiencing recurring material transfer problems at high capacities In order to
investigate the problem it was decided that performance testing of the chutes
should be carried out The purpose of these tests was to monitor chute
performance at transfer rates of up to the design capacity of 10 000 tlh for
various grades of iron ore handled by the facility Some of the methodologies
used in testing are only applicable to this specific facility
Due to variations and surges associated with the reclaim operations at the
facility performance testing focused on reclaim side chutes This means that all
the transfer points at the exit points of the stockyard conveyors were tested
Nineteen tests were conducted on various stockyard transfers Information such
as the specific facility or conveyor numbers cannot be disclosed due to the
confidentiality of information
To analyse SCADA data the stacker reclaimer scale is used to determine the
peak surges passing through the transfer under investigation The reason for
this is that the peaks in flow due to reclaiming operations flatten out when
passing through the transfer points This is due to chute throat limitations and
small variations in belt speeds If the down stream scales are used it would give
an inaccurate indication of the amount of ore that passed through the transfer
chute
32 TEST METHODOLOGY
A CCTV camera was installed in a strategic position inside the head chute of the
stockyard conveyors These cameras provided valuable information on the
physical behaviour of the material flow inside the transfer chutes Where
possible cameras were also placed on the receiving belt in front of and behind
The optimisation of transfer chutes in the bulk materials industry
MN van Aarde
40
CHAPTER 3
the chute This was done to monitor belt tracking and spillage A high frequency
radio link between the head chute and the control tower made it possible to
monitor the cameras at all times
SCADA data was used to determine and establish the condition of the material
transfer at the time of the test Data from various scales en route were obtained
as well as confirmation of blocked chute signals In analysing the SCADA data
the stacker reclaimer scale is used to determine the peak surges passing through
the transfer being tested
Data was recorded from a sampling plant at the facility This data provides the
actual characteristics of representative samples taken and analysed by the
sampling plant during the duration of the test The data gathered consist of
moisture content of the material sample as well as the size distribution of the ore
Where possible an inspector was placed at the transfer point being tested to
observe and record the performance The inspector had a two way radio for
communication with the test co-ordinator in the central control room He would
also be responsible for the monitoring of any spillage dust emissions etc that
may not be picked up by the cameras
Prior to commencing a test on a specific conveyor route the following checks
had to be performed on all the material conveying equipment
bull Clean out all transfer chutes and remove any material build-up from the
sidewalls
bull Check that feed skirts are properly in position on the belt
bull Check that the conveyor belt is tracking properly at no load
bull Check conveyor idlers are all in position and free to rotate
bull Check blocked chute detectors are operational and in the correct location
The optimisation of transfer chutes in the bulk materials industry
MN van Aarde
CHAPTER 3
bull Change the position of the blocked chute detector if required to improve its
fUnction
bull Test and confirm that the CCTV middotsystems are functioning correctly
bull Assign persons with 2 way radios and cameras to monitor and record the I
results at each transfer point on the route
33 CHUTE PERFORMANCE ACCEPTANCE CRITERIA
A material transfer chute performs to specification if it transfers a maximum of
10 000 tlh of a specific iron are grade without experiencing any of the following
problems
bull Material build up inside the chute or blocking the chute ie material is not
exiting the chute at the same rate as it is entering
bull Material spillage encountered from the top of the transfer chute
bull Material spillage encountered where material is loaded onto the receiving
conveyor
bull Belt tracking of the receiving conveyor is significantly displaced by the
loading of material from the transfer chute onto the conveyor
Tests were conducted over a period of one month and in such a short period
visible wear is difficult to quantify Due to the sensitivity of the information no
historical data in terms of chute or belt wear were made available by the facility
Therefore it is not part of the criteria for these specific tests Should a chute
however fail to perform according to the set criteria it validates the need for
modifications or new designs
34 DISCUSSION OF PROBLEM AREAS
The major concern during the test work is material flow at the transfer points
Secondary concerns are spillage tracking of the receiving belt and material
The optimisation of transfer chutes in the bulk materials industry
MN van Aarde
42
CHAPTER 3
loading onto the receiving belt One of the external factors that playa significant
role in material flow rate is the method and process of reclaiming This section
will highlight all the problem areas observed during the test work
Figure 25 shows the layout of the stockyard area This layout will serve as a
reference when the specific test results at each transfer point are discussed The
legends for Figure 25 are as follows
c=gt Transfer points where performance tests have been done
~ Direction that the conveyors are moving in
CV4 CV3 CV2 CV1
Figure 25 Layout of conveyors for chute test work
All four stockyard conveyors have a moving head arrangement This means that
the chutes are split up into two sections A moving head discharges material
onto either conveyor (CV) 5 or CV 6 via a static transfer chute The moving
head positions are shown by A Band C in Figure 25
The optimisation of transfer chutes in the bulk materials industry
MN van Aarde
43
CHAPTER 3
Position C is the purging or dump position This position is used when the
stacker reclaimer is in stacking mode and any material left on the stockyard
conveyor gets dumped The material does not end up on the stockpiles
preventing contamination
90 de-g TRANSFBt
OfAO BOX IN MOVING HEAD
Figure 26 Configuration of the existing transfer chute
Figure 26 shows the configuration of the existing transfer chutes These chutes
capture the trajectory from the head pulley in a dead box situated in the top part
of the chute The material then cascades down a series of smaller dead boxes
onto the receiving conveyor below
Various grades of iron ore were tested during the testing period These different
grades of iron ore are shown in Table 2 Three fine grades and four coarse
grades were used The coarse material is defined as particles with a diameter of
The optimisation of transfer chutes in the bulk materials industry
MN van Aarde
44
CHAPTER 3
between 12 mm and 34 mm and the fine material with diameters of between
4 mm and 12 mm
Table 2 Iron are grades used for chute test work
Material Predominant Lump Size
Fine K 5mm
Fine N 8mm
Fine A 8mm
Coarse K 25mm
Coarse D 34mm
Coarse S 12 mm
Coarse A 20mm
The CCTV cameras were placed inside the moving head pointing down into the
static chute overlooking the receiving conveyor Figure 27 shows the camera
angle used during testing This is a view of a clear chute before testing The
legends for clarification of all the video images are as follows
Front of the chute throat opening
Top of flowing material at the chute throat opening
Flow pattern of the material
Direction of the receiving belt
The optimisation of transfer chutes in the bulk materials industry
MN van Aarde
45
CHAPTER 3
Figure 27 Clear chute indicating camera angle
341 Coarse Material vs Fine Material
Differences in transfer rates between coarse material and fine material are
evident from the data gathered during the test programme These results are
discussed later in this chapter The area between the yellow arrows and the red
line is the amount of freeboard available Freeboard is the open space available
between the top of the flowing stream of material and the chute plate work
Figure 28 and Figure 29 shows the flow of coarse ore and fine ore respectively in
the same chute at 8 000 tlh
Figure 28 Coarse material at 8 000 tlh
The optimisation of transfer chutes in the bulk materials industry
MN van Aarde
46
CHAPTER 3
Figure 29 Fine material at 8 000 tlh
The amount of freeboard with fine material is much larger than with coarse
material It is therefore obvious that coarse material is more likely to block a
chute when peak surges occur This is due to particles that interlock in the small
discharge opening of the chute
Figure 30 Blocked chute with coarse material at 8 600 tIh
Figure 30 is a snap shot of a chute blocked with coarse ore due to the material
interlocking at the discharge opening The time from material free flowing to a
blocked chute signal was approximately 10 seconds This is determined by
comparing the CCTV camera time to the blocked signal time on the SCADA
The optimisation of transfer chutes in the bulk materials industry
MN van Aarde
47
CHAPTER 3
The high clay content in finer material can also cause problems in the long run
When wet Anes are fed through the chutes a thin layer of Anes builds up and
sticks to the sides of the chute As this layer dries out it forms a new chute liner i
and the next layer builds up This process occurs gradually and will eventually
cause the chute to block
342 Cross Sectional Area
Video images of a blocked chute on the receiving belts were analysed to
determine whether the blockage was caused by material build up on the belt
underneath the chute This indicated that with the occurrence of a blocked chute
the material keeps flowing out of the chute at a constant rate without build up
From this the assumption can be made that in the case of a blocked chute the
material enters the chute at a higher rate than it is discharged at the bottom
Therefore the conclusion can be made that the chute cross sectional area at the
discharge is insufficient to handle the volume of ore at high throughput rates
Tests with a certain type of coarse material yielded a very low flow rate requiring
adjustment to the chute choke plate on the transfer between CV 3 and CV 5
The chute choke plate is basically a sliding door at the bottom of the chute to
adjust the discharge flow of material Tests with another type of coarse material
shown in the summary of test results indicates how the choke plate adjustment
can increase the throughput of material in the chute
Data of all the different types of ore at the facility are obtained at the sampling
building This data shows that the material size distribution for the two types of
coarse material used in the tests mentioned above are the same This indicates
that the test results with the second coarse material are an accurate reflection of
what will be experienced with the first type of coarse material Special care
The optimisation of transfer chutes in the bulk materials industry
MN van Aarde
48
CHAPTER 3
should be taken when adjusting the choke plate to make sure that skew loading
is not induced by the modification
343 Spillag3
During one of the first tests on the transfer between CV 2 and CV 6 spillage
was observed at one of the side skirts on the receiving belt A piece of the side
skirt had been damaged and pushed off the belt as shown by Figure 31 This
caused some of the material to be pushed off the belt when skew loading from
the chute caused the belt to miss track In this case spillage was not caused by
the skirt but by skew loading from the chute onto the receiving conveyor
Figure 31 Damaged side skirt
A greater concern is spillage on the moving head chute of CV 3 and CV 4
loading onto CV 6 It appears as if the head chute creeps during material
transfer onto CV 6 As the chute creeps the horizontal gap between the
moving head chute and the transfer chute reaches approximately 180 mm
Facility operations proposed a temporary solution by moving the head chute to
the dumping or purging position and back to CV 5 before stopping over CV 6
The reason for this creep could be attributed to slack in the moving head winch
cable
The optimisation of transfer chutes in the bulk materials industry
MN van Aarde
49
CHAPTER 3
345 Belt Tracking and Material Loading
The only belt tracking and material loading problems observed occurred on the
transfer between CV 2 and CV 5 I CV 6 A diverter plate was installed at the
bottom of the chute in order to force material flow onto the centre of the receiving conveyor belt This plate now causes material to fall to the left of the receiving
belt causing the belt to track to the right
Figure 32 View behind the chute of the receiving conveyor before loading
Figure 32 shows the view from a CCTV camera placed over the receiving
conveyor behind the chute Note the amount of the idler roller that is visible
before loading
Figure 33 View behind the chute of the receiving conveyor during loading
The optimisation of transfer chutes in the bulk materials industry
MN van Aarde
50
CHAPTER 3
Figure 33 shows the view from a CCTV camera placed over the receiving
conveyor behind the chute during loading Note the difference between the
amount of the idler roller that is visible between Figure 33 and Figure 32 This is
a clear indication of off centre belt tracking due to skew loading I
At the same transfer point it appears as if the configuration of the chute causes
the material to be dropped directly onto the receiving belt from the dead box in
the moving head This will cause high impact wear on the belt in the long run
High maintenance frequencies will be required on the impact rollers underneath
the chute and the roller bearings will have to be replaced frequently
346 Reclaiming Operations
Reclaim operations are done from the stacker reclaimer that scoops up the
material with a bucket wheel from the stockpile The machine starts at the top
bench of the stockpile and reclaims sideways until it is through the stockpile
This sideways movement is repeated while the machine moves down the
stockpile If the machine digs too deep into the stockpile small avalanches can
occur that over fill the buckets This causes peak surges in the flow on the
conveyor system
With an increase in the peak digging or reclaim rate as requested for test work it
seemed that the peak surges increased as well In normal reclaiming operations
(average reclaim rate of 6 000 tlh to 7000 tlh) the peaks in reclaim surges do not
usually exceed 1 000 tlh This is however dependent on the level of the
stockpile from where the machine is reclaiming
At a peak digging or reclaim rate of 8 000 tlh peak surges of up to 2 000 tlh were
observed as can be seen from Figure 34 All stacker reclaimers are operated
manually and the depth of the bucket wheel is determined by monitoring the
The optimisation of transfer chutes in the bulk materials industry
MN van Aarde
51
CHAPTER 3
reclaimer boom scale reading (yellow line) This makes it difficult to reclaim at a
constant rate
The reason for the high peak surges is due to avalanches on the stockpile
caused by reclaiming on the lower benches without first taking away the top
material The blue line in Figure 34 represents a conveyor scale reading after
the material has passed through a series of transfer chutes It is clear that the
peaks tend to dissipate over time as the peaks on the blue line are lower and
smoother than that on the yellow line
IlmJ
bull I _ bull It bull bull bull bull
--ErI--E--~---h--E=+[J]--EiE ~ J~~~ middot middot -~L I-~f~1-1shyt~=tt~~J~~v5 i ~ ~ ~ ~ ~ i ~ 1 ~ ~ ~ s ~ ------ ~-- - ------ - _ - -------- -- -- - _---- -- -r - --- -_shyp
C)
~ 1r =r=l[=1 -It-1 -- -~ -t= --shy~ _middotmiddot -r middotr middot middot [middot _r _ _ r- middotmiddot rmiddot middotmiddot -r- rmiddot-- middot- middotmiddot -rmiddot -r-middotmiddot middotr lXgtO middotmiddotmiddotmiddotmiddotmiddotmiddotmiddot[middotmiddotmiddotmiddotmiddotmiddotmiddotlmiddotmiddotmiddotmiddotmiddotmiddotlmiddotmiddotmiddotmiddotmiddotmiddotmiddotmiddotimiddotmiddotmiddotmiddotmiddotmiddotmiddotmiddotr-middotmiddotmiddotmiddot j middotmiddot1middotmiddotmiddotmiddotmiddot1middotmiddotmiddotmiddotmiddotmiddotmiddot1middotmiddotmiddotmiddotmiddot middotlmiddotmiddotmiddotmiddottmiddotmiddotmiddotmiddotmiddotmiddotmiddotjmiddot I~ [ bullbullbullbullbullbullbull [ bullbullbull middotmiddotmiddot1middotmiddotmiddotmiddotmiddotmiddot1middotmiddotmiddotmiddotmiddotmiddotmiddotmiddot1middotmiddotmiddotmiddotmiddotmiddotmiddotmiddot middotmiddotmiddotmiddotmiddotmiddotmiddotmiddoti~middotmiddotmiddotmiddotmiddotmiddotmiddotmiddottmiddotmiddotmiddotmiddotmiddotmiddotmiddotrmiddotmiddotmiddot middotrmiddotmiddotmiddotmiddotmiddotmiddot~middotmiddotmiddotmiddotmiddotmiddotmiddotmiddot1middotmiddotmiddotmiddotmiddotmiddotmiddotmiddotimiddotmiddotmiddot
t) cent
~ i i l i i i i i i i it ~ 8 ~ ~ S l i
~~ Ii ~ ~ g i i ~ 4 1 J yen i
s a e 11 JI as $ $ ~ IS IS e It
Time
-Con~SCO=-E___S~ SCALE
Figure 34 Peak surges experienced during reclaiming operations
347 Other Problem Areas
Some blockages on other chutes at the facility occurred while testing the
stockyard chutes These blockages are also shown in Table 3 where the test
The optimisation of transfer chutes in the bulk materials industry
MN van Aarde
52
CHAPTER 3
results are discussed and to raise awareness that the bottlenecks on site are not
only caused by problems on the tested chutes
A chute downstream from the stockyards encountered a blockage with fine I
material when the flow rate reached 11 OOb tfh Although this is higher than the
test maximum of 10 000 tfh it still raises concern as to why the chute blocked so
severely that it took approximately two hours to clear
Another bottleneck is the transfer point between the feed conveyor of CV 2 and
the discharge chute on CV 2 This transfer point blocked with fine material at a
peak just below 10 000 tfh It should be even worse with coarse are as
previously discussed Due to the configuration of the head chute spillage of
scraper dribblings is also of great concern The main stream of material
interferes with the flow path of the dribbling material Therefore the carry back
scraped off the bottom of the feeding belt cannot i~ow down the chute and is
pushed over the sides of the chute
The optimisation of transfer chutes in the bulk maferias industry
MN van Aarde
53
CHAPTER 3
35 SUMMARY OF TEST RESULTS
Table 3 Results from test programme
Transfer Point Material Tested Test No Peak Capacity Blocked Chute
CV11 CV5 Yes
Fines N 14 10000 tlh No
Fines N 15 10000tlh No
CV 11 CV6 Coarse K 20 9300 tlh No
Fines K 4 10600tlh No
Fines A 19 9633 tlh No
CV31 CV5 Yes
Yes
Yes
Coarse A 17 9427 tlh No
CV31 CV6 Coarse K 7 10195t1h Yes
Coarse K 8 11 000 tlh Yes
CV41 CV5 Coarse A 16 10307 tlh No
No (Mech trip on
CV4CV6 Fines K 10 10815 tlh downstream conveyor)
Coarse K 11 8000 tlh No
Fines A 18 10328 tlh No
No (Feed to CV 2
CV21 CV5 Fines N 13 10 000 tlh blocked)
CV21 Coarse K 1 amp 2 10 153 tlh No
No (Blocked chute on
Fines K 3 11 000 tlh downstream transfer)
The optimisation of transfer chutes in the bulk materials industry
MN van Aarde
54
CHAPTER 3
Table 3 shows the results obtained from all the tests on the stockyard conveyor
discharge chutes Where possible the same material grade was tested more
than once on the same transfer in order to confirm the repetitiveness of the test
The tests shown in red indicate the transfers that blocked at a flow rate of less
than 10000 tlh
Coarse K and Coarse 0 are noted as the critical materials for blocked chutes
caused by a peak surge Tests with Coarse K and Coarse S where a blocked
chute occurred at just over 10 000 tlh can also be considered as failed tests
This is due to the lack of a safety margin freeboard inside the chute When
analysing the video images a build up can be seen at a flow rate of less than
10000 tlh
Table 3 indicates that the fine material did not cause blocked chutes but it was
seen that it did fill up the chute throat area in some cases Although the coarse
material grades are shown as being least suitable for high flow rates the fine
material should not be underestimated for its ability to cause blockages The
finer materials normally have higher clay contents than the coarse grades and
therefore stick to the chute walls more easily_
36 CONCLUSION
At lower capacities (7 000 tlh to 8 000 tlh) the material appear to flow smoothly
inside the chutes without surging or building up in the chute This flow rate
normally does not cause spillage or skew loading on the receiving conveyor belt
On average as the flow rate approaches 9 000 tlh the material in the chute
throat area starts packing together and finally blocks up the chute
At transfer rates greater than 9 000 tlh the available area inside the chutes is
completely filled up This causes material to build up or surge inside the chute
which eventually results in the chute choking and the inlet flow becomes greater
The optimisation of transfer chutes in the bulk materials industry
MN van Aarde
55
CHAPTER 3
than the outlet flow Depending on the volume of the chute the choked state can
only be maintained for a certain period of time If the inlet flow does not
decrease it will cause a blocked chute
Peak surges of up to 10 000 tfh were recorded in most tests which involved a
material surge inside the chute but without the occurrence of a blocked chute trip
Although no blocked chute signal was given in these cases the ability of the
chutes to transfer continuously at flow rates of between 9 000 tfh and 10 000 tfh
is not very reliable
Continuous transfer at flow rates approaching 9 000 tfh seems attainable in most
cases but due to the limited freeboard available in the chute throat area the
chutes will easily become prone to blocking Due to the high peak surges at an
increased maximum reclaim rate the amount of freeboard is critical If the
design criteria of the chute were intended to accommodate these large surges
then all the chutes failed this test This can be attributed to the fact that no
freeboard is left at a maximum reclaim rate of 9 000 tfh
With the background available from the test programme it is clear that further
investigation is required to obtain a solution to these problems All the
information gathered can be integrated and utilised to provide a solution A
possible solution can then be tested against the problems found with the current
transfer chutes
The optimisation of transfer chutes in the bulk materials industry
MN van Aarde
56
CHAPTER 4
CHAPTER 4 DYNAMIC CHUTES FOR THE ELIMINATION OF
RECURRING PROBLEMS
The optimisation of transfer chutes in the bulk materials industry
MN van Aarde
57
CHAPTER 4
41 PREFACE
After completion of the chute test programme the decision was made to improve
the old transfer configuration by installing a dynamic chute The reason for the
dynamic chute is to increase the material speed and decrease the stream cross
sectional area The dead boxes in the older chute slowed the material down and
the restriction on transfer height resulted in the material not being able to gain
enough speed after impacting on the dead boxes
A dynamic chute configuration is investigated in this chapter As the new chute
is fitted within the existing steelwork there are certain constraints that determine
the new configuration All the constraints and limitations discussed in this section
are specific to the facility under discussion
The new chute design basically consists of a hood and spoon which retains the
kinetic energy in the material stream as it is transferred from one conveyor to the
other This will reduce the creation of dust in the chute and help to discharge the
material at a velocity closer to that of the receiving conveyor The new design
does however experience high wear which was not a problem with the old chutes
due to large dead boxes
In order to fit the optimum design of a dynamic chute within the existing structure
some changes are required to the positioning of the feed conveyor head pulley
These changes are necessary to accommodate the discharge trajectory from the
feeding conveyor
The radii of the hood and spoon are specified in such a way that the impact wear
is reduced significantly In addition both the hood and spoon are fitted with a
removable dead box section in the impact zones The incorporation of these
sections makes this chute revolutionary in the sense of ease of maintenance
The optimisation of transfer chutes in the bulk materials industry
MN van Aarde
58
CHAPTER 4
This new chute addresses all problems identified at the facility and aims to
eliminate most of them
Tests were carried out to identify worst case materials for flow and wear
Different liner materials were tested for both flow and wear conditions The
outcome of these tests is used as the basis for the design of a new chute As
different conditions for flow and wear inside the chute exist different liners are
investigated for each section inside the chute
42 CONSIDERATION OF THE EXISTING TRANSFER POINT CONSTRAINTS
The stockyard consists of four stacker reclaimers and several transfer points
feeding onto the two downstream conveyors resulting in a very intricate system
This system has numerous requirements which need to be addressed when
considering a new transfer chute configuration The transfers under discussion
are situated at the head end of the stockyard conveyors
MOV1NG HEAD OER MOvm poundAD OVER CVI6 CVIS
t4CLIE SECTION
PURGING POSmON
Figure 35 Stockyard head end layout
The design of a new transfer chute configuration is restricted to a certain extent
by the existing structures on site Figure 35 provides an overall view of the
existing steelwork at the head end of the stockyard conveyor This existing steel
structure can be modified to suit a new configuration but does have some fixed
The optimisation of transfer chutes in the bulk materials industry
MN van Aarde
59
CHAPTER 4
constraints A good example of these constraints is the transfer height between
the stockyard conveyor and the downstream conveyors CV 5 and 6
On both sides of the stockyard conveyor stockpiles of ore can be reclaimed and
deposited onto the conveyor This facility allows a certain travel for the stacker
reclaimer along the stockyard conveyor for the stacking and reclaiming of
material The most forward position of the stacker reclaimer is at the beginning
of the incline section of the stockyard conveyor As previously explained any
curvature in a conveyor requires a certain minimum radius When the transfer
height is raised the radius constraints on that curvature in the stockyard
conveyor will reduce stockyard space This means that the storage capacity at
the facility will be greatly diminished
I ~
j
Figure 36 Dimensional constraints on the existing transfer configuration
The ideal is to stay within the eXisting critical dimensions as shown in Figure 36
As functionality of the chute dictates the chute configuration these dimensions
can be modified within certain constraints These critical dimensions on the
existing configuration are
The optimisation of transfer chutes in the bulk materials industry
MN van Aarde
60
CHAPTER 4
bull Centre of receiving belt to centre of the head pulley 800 mm
bull Bottom of receiving belt to top of the head pulley 4048 mm
The head pulley can however be moved back a certain amount before it
becomes necessary to change the entire incline section of the stockyard
conveyor As the moving head moves forward and backward there are idler cars
trailing behind the moving head carriage as shown in Figure 35 The purpose of
these idler cars is to support the belt when the moving head is feeding onto
CV 6 or when it is standing in the purging position
43 DESIGN OF THE CHUTE PROFILE
431 Design Methodology
Proven standard methods for the functional design of the chute are used These
hand calculation methods are based on the Conveyor Equipment Manufacturers
Association (CEMA) standard as well as papers from Prof AW Roberts These
are typically calculations for determining the discharge trajectory optimal radius
of the hood and spoon as well as the velocity of material passing through the
chute
In addition to standard methods of carrying out conceptual flow design it is
supplemented by the use of Discrete Element Modelling (OEM) simulation
software This is done to visualise the flow of material through the chute
Results from standard calculation methods are compared to the outputs of the
OEM simulations to confirm both results Chapter 5 will focus on the use of
Discrete Element Modelling for the design and verification of chute concepts
The optimisation of transfer chutes in the bulk materials industry
MN van Aarde
61
CHAPTER 4 -__-----__---_----------shy
432 Design Development
Figure 37 shows the concept of the hood and spoon chute for a 90deg transfer as
required by the facility layout The decision to opt for a hood and spoon chute is
based on trying to retain the material velocity when transferring material from the
feeding conveyor to the receiving conveyors Retention of material velocity is
critical as the transfer height is restricted The overall facility constraints for
design are as follows
bull Feeding belt speed - 45 ms
bull Receiving belt speed - 45 ms
bull Transfer height - 401 m
bull Belt widths -1650 mm
bull Maximum material throughput -10000 tlh
As this is a retrofit of an existing facility some of the facility constraints cannot be
changed This forms part of the design development as it steers the design in a
certain direction Due to the fact that the transfer height cannot be changed the
chute profile will be dependent on the transfer height restriction
The optimisation of transfer chutes in the bulk matefials industry
MN van Aarde
62
CHAPTER 4
START-UP CHrrlE
DRlBBIlNG CHUTE
Figure 37 Hood and spoon configuration for the 90 transfer
The optimum solution for the correct chute profile in this situation would be to
move the head pulley back far enough This should be done so that the hood
can receive the material trajectory at a small impact angle and still discharge
centrally onto the spoon However the head pulley can only be moved back a
certain amount Any further movement will require changes to the structure of
the feeding conveyor incline section
As the stockyard conveyors feed onto two receiving conveyors the head pulley
of the stockyard conveyors is situated on a moving head rail car This enables
the conveyor to discharge either on CV 5 or CV 6 as shown in Figure 25
Taking the movement of the head pulley into account the moving head rail car
can be shortened by 1000 mm in order to move the head pulley back As stated
in the preface all changes are distinctive to this facility alone However it is
important to be aware of the consequences of every modification
The optimisation of transfer chutes in the bulk materials industry
MN van Aarde
63
CHAPTER 4 -__----- ------shy
433 Determination of the Profile
An important of the hood and spoon design is to ensure a
discharge from the hood onto the centre of the spoon The is
determined using equation (1) in section 24 Although various material
are transferred it does not have a significant effect on the calculated trajectory
the bulk properties of the materials are very similar It is however important
to the material which will transferred obtain the flow angles and wear
This information the will be
the Liner selection for this case study is discussed in Appendix A
After the trajectory has been determined the hood radius can determined by
using equation (2) As head pulley can move 1 000 mm backward the
possible hood radius was determined to 2 577 mm This hood radius is
VIU(I(1 to produce the wear on the zone in chute
The impact angle at this radius is 11 which is less than the maximum
allowable limit of 20
The hood radius is chosen to as close as possible to radius of curvature of
the material trajectory The point where the hood radius and the trajectory radius
cross is known as the impact point In to determine the velocity
point in hood the at is required on the
hood from the horizontal where the material impacts and to slide down the
hood surface
In this case the position impact hood is at 558r from the horizontal
In to determine the velocity this angle e is used as starting
point in (3) obtain a complete velocity profile angle from where
the material impacts hood is decreased in increments 5 up to the
discharge point which is normally 0
The optimisation chutes in the bulk materials industry
MN van Aarde
64
-----
CHAPTER 4
Hood Velocity Profile
70
--- --~ 6 0
5 0
40 ~_
~ 30 g --- a 20 gt
10
00
60 50 40 30 20 10 o Theta (Position inside the hood)
Figure 38 Hood velocity profile
The spoon radius is determined in such a way that the wear at the point of impact
is kept to a minimum At the same time the horizontal component of the material
exit velocity is as close as possible to the receiving belt speed Firstly the
assumption is made that the initial velocity of material in the spoon is equal to the
exit velocity of material from the hood This yields a spoon entry velocity of
633 ms and can also be seen from Figure 38
By reiterating various radii for the spoon the optimum exit velocity Ve can be
obtained These radii are selected according to the available space in which the
spoon must fit and also to produce the smallest impact angle for material
discharging from the hood This table is set up to display the different exit
velocities at various spoon radii The exit velocity is also dependent on the exit
angle which is determined by the length of the spoon arc In this case the spoon
radius is chosen as 3 575 mm An exit angle of 38deg from the horizontal yields an
exit velocity closer to the receiving belt speed
The optimisation of transfer chutes in the bulk materials industry
MN van Aarde
65
CHAPTER 4
Spoon Velocity Profile
67
66
65
S 64 amp0 g 6 3
V
v-shy ~ ~
ii ~ gt 62
61 I I 60
o 10 20 30 40 50 60
Theta (position inside the spoon)
Figure 39 Spoon velocity profile
Taken from the origin of the spoon radius the material position in the spoon at
discharge is sr The selection of this angle is guided by the geometry of the
chute and surrounding structures This angle is then used to calculate the exit
velocity as shown in Figure 39 At this point the discharge angle relative to the
conveyor angle is 38deg Ve is then determined to be 6087 ms with a velocity
component of 479 ms in the direction of the belt This value is 618 higher
than the belt speed of 4S ms which is acceptable as it is within the allowable
10 range of variation Minimal spillage and reduced wear on the receiving
conveyor is expected
Both the hood and spoon have a converged profile This is done in order to
minimise spillage and ensure a smooth transfer of material from the hood to the
spoon and from the spoon to the receiving conveyor The converged profile
starts out wide to capture any stray particles and converges to bring the material
particles closer together at the discharge This profile does not influence the
transfer rate of the chute as the stream of material through the chute is no more
The optimisation of transfer chutes in the bulk materials industry
MN van Aarde
66
CHAPTER 4
compact than the material on the conveyor belt before and after the transfer
chute
44 INCORPORATING ADEAD BOX IN THE IMPACT AREAS
In chapter 1 reference is made to a chute design utilising pipe sections with a
rounded profile The flat back plate is chosen instead of a rounded pipe type
section to house the honeycomb dead box configuration It would be possible to
fit the honeycomb into a rounded back section but manufacturing and
maintenance would be unnecessarily difficult and expensive
Furthermore the cross section profile of the chute shows three sliding surfaces
as shown in These surfaces consist of the back plate two vertical side plates
and two diagonal plates This is done in order to increase the angle between
adjoining plates so that the probability of material hanging up in the corners is
reduced This helps to alleviate the risk of experiencing blocked chutes
Figure 40 Chute cross section
The optimisation of transfer chutes in the bulk materials industry
M N van Aarde
67
CHAPTER 4
441 Honeycomb Wear Box in the Hood
A honeycomb or wear box is incorporated into this chute configuration in order to
further minimise wear in the hood and spoon The honeycomb configuration is
clearly shown in and is typical for both the hood and spoon Reduced wear will I
be achieved as impact and sliding will take place on the basis of material on
material flow Ore is captured inside the honeycomb pockets which protects the
ceramic lining in the section of the honeycomb and creates another sliding face
made of the material being transferred The ribs in the wear box do not protrude
from the sliding face of the chute and therefore do not interfere with the main
stream flow of material
Positioning of the honeycomb is critical as the point of impact on the hood needs
to be on the honeycomb This is required in order to assure that the highest
material impact is absorbed by a layer of static material inside the honeycomb
and not the chute liners All the basic steps for designing a normal hood and
spoon chute are followed Firstly the angle at impact (8e) is calculated to
determine where the trajectory of material will cross the radius of the hood This
shows the position of the impact point on the hood Figure 20 indicates where 8e
is calculated As previously stated the angle at impact for this situation is
558r This is calculated using [33]
e = tan- I ( 1 ) (5)
C Ii
And y is defined by equation 1
This gives an indication as to where the honeycomb should be situated in order
to capture the material impacting the hood fully A flow simulation package can
also be used to determine the position of this honeycomb structure shows an
opening for the honeycomb which starts at 40deg clockwise from the vertical This
The optimisation of transfer chutes in the bulk materials industry 68
MN van Aarde
CHAPTER 4
means that there are almost 16deg of free space in the honeycomb to ensure that
the material will always impact inside the wear box
There is no set specification as to the size of this free space This is just to
accommodate any surges of mat~rial on the feeding conveyor As discussed in
Chapter 3 due to avalanches while reclaiming from the stockpiles material
surges on the conveyors is a reality
Figure 41 Honeycomb wear box positioning
illustrates exactly where this wear box is situated on the back plate of the hood
This configuration is very similar to that of the spoon as both wear boxes only
cover the width of the flat back plate of the hood and spoon The reason for this
is that most of the material impact and mainstream flow strikes the back plate
The optimisation of transfer chutes in the bulk materials industry
MN van Aarde
69
CHAPTER 4
WEAR BOX
Figure 42 Wear box in the hood section
All the horizontal ribs of the honeycomb are spaced 5deg apart and there are 5
vertical ribs following the converging contour of the hood as shown in Spacing
of the ribs depends largely on the maximum lump size handled by the transfer
In this case the largest lumps are approximately 34 mm in diameter The idea is
to get as many dead boxes into the honeycomb as possible These small
cavities should however be large enough to capture a substantial amount of ore
inside
The optimisation of transfer chutes in the bulk materials industry
MN van Aarde
70
CHAPTER 4 ----_----------------shy
Figure 43 Spacing arrangement of honeycomb ribs inside the hood
The two vertical liners on the edges of the honeycomb are only 65 mm high while
the rest of the vertical liners are 120 mm high This is done so that the flat liners
in the chute surface can overlap the edge liners of the honeycomb An open
groove between the tiles along the flow of material would cause the liners to be
worn through much faster than in normal sliding abrasion conditions Due to the
high wear characteristics of the ore all openings between tiles should be kept out
of the mainstream flow
All the ribs in the honeycomb are 50 mm thick and vary in depth The vertical
ribs protrude the horizontal ribs by 30 mm in order to channel the flow These
vertical ribs are all flush with the surrounding tiles on the flat sliding surface of the
hood All the pockets of the wear box are 120 mm deep measured from the top
of the vertical ribs Again dimension is dependent on the maximum lump size
handled by the transfer There are no specifications as to the relation between
the pocket size and the lump size These dimensions were chosen to be
approximately 4 times the lump size Computer simulations can be used to test
the feasibility of this concept while commissioning of the equipment will ultimately
show whether this method works
The optimisation of transfer chutes in the bulk materials industry
MN van Aarde
71
CHAPTER 4 ------------_ -- - ---------------shy
442 Honeycomb wear box in the spoon
The honeycomb wear box in the spoon has the same configuration as in the
hood It also covers the entire width of the back plate and fully accommodates
the material impacting on the spoon from the hood The entire spoon is broken
up into three sections and the honeycomb wear box is situated in the back
section as shown in
Figure 44 Wear box in the spoon section
With almost the same configuration as the hood the spoon also has a corner
liner to ensure a continuous lined face between the flat surface liners and the
honeycomb ribs The detail of these liners and ribs are shown in A 90deg transfer
with a hood and spoon chute means that the stream received by the spoon is
narrower and longer than the stream received by the hood This is caused when
the material takes the shape of the hood before it is discharged into the spoon
The converged configuration causes the stream to flatten against the sliding
surface in the chute
The optimisation of transfer chutes in the bulk materials industry
MN van Aarde
72
CHAPTER 4
Due to the spoon honeycomb being a bit narrower than the hood there are only
three vertical ribs The number of ribs had to be reduced to be able to
accommodate the preferred cavity size of the honeycomb boxes These ribs now
form two channels in which the stream of material can be directed
Figure 45 Liner detail of the spoon honeycomb wear box
As shown in there is a 3 mm gap between the honeycomb section and the chute
plate work This is to ensure that the honeycomb section can be easily removed
for maintenance on the liners All the edges of the liners have rounded corners
to reduce stress concentrations which can cause rapid liner failure
45 DESIGNING THE CHUTE FOR INTEGRATION WITH SYSTEM REQUIREMENTS
The arc length of the spoon back plate is longer and closer to the belt in order to
ensure a smooth transfer of material from the chute to the receiving conveyor A
small gap of 75 mm is left between the bottom of the spoon and the receiving
conveyor Due to the fact that material can also be fed from another upstream
The optimisation of transfer chutes in the bulk materials industry
MN van Aarde
73
CHAPTER 4
stockyard conveyor this configuration will not be suitable This means that the
gap of 75 mm is not enough to allow material to pass underneath the chute
To accommodate this situation the spoon is split into different sections where the
bottom section lifts up to make room for material from behind In the raised
position the gap between the chute and the belt is 450 mm When the lower belt
is loaded to full capacity the material height is 380 mm This means that the
clearance to the belt in the non operational position is sufficient and show the
operational and non operational positions of the spoon
T -t t----~r_-+-wtIY1shy
Figure 46 Spoon in the operational position
The optimisation of transfer chutes in the bulk materials industry
MN van Aarde
74
CHAPTER 4
Figure 47 Spoon in the non operational position
This section is a discussion on how this new transfer chute configuration should
be operated in order to comply with the facility requirements The bottom section
of the chute can be lifted out of the way of material from behind on the receiving
conveyor Therefore a control philosophy is required for this movement
Referring to Figure 25 positions A and B indicate where these new chutes will be
installed As previously stated position C is the purging or dump position and
show the actuated spoon section in the operating and non operating positions
The conditions for these positions are explained as follows
46 CONCLUSION
With the consideration of all the facility constraints and a conceptual idea of what
the transfer configuration should look like the design can be optimised When
the feeding belt velocity is known the material trajectory and optimum chute
radius can be determined This radius and the radius of the spoon must then be
corrected to comply with the facility constraints but still deliver the required
material transfer rate
The optimisation of transfer chutes in the bulk materials industry
MN van Aarde
75
CHAPTER 4
With the high cost implications of regular maintenance intervals on chute liners
and facility downtime a honeycomb structure is incorporated into the high impact
areas The purpose of this honeycomb structure is to form small pockets similar
to dead boxes in order to promote material on material flow This increases the
lifetime of the chute liners and reduces maintenance intervals
This specific transfer chute splits up easily into separate sections and will help to
simplify maintenance The bottom section of the chute is actuated to move up
and down depending on whether the chute is in operation or not This will ensure
optimum transfer of material while in operation and provide sufficient clearance
when not in operation This is again guided by the facility requirements
In the design of all the transfer chute components the physical properties of the
ore should always be considered This determines the chute profile in terms of
flow angles and liner selection With maximum material flow ability high
resistance to sliding abrasion and reduced maintenance cost in mind 94
alumina ceramics is the liner of choice This is only in the main flow areas of the
chute For the dribbling chute a polyurethane liner is used to promote the flow of
this sticky material
The optimisation of transfer chutes in the bulk materials industry
MN van Aarde
76
CHAPTER 5
CHAPTER 5 TESTING AND VERIFICATION OF THE NEW SOLUTION
- middotSmiddotmiddotmiddotmiddotmiddotmiddotmiddotmiddotmiddot-middotl~Oi
The optimisation of transfer chutes in the bulk materials industry 77
MN van Aarde
CHAPTER 5
51 PREFACE
Although hand calculations have been a proven method of design for many
years it is important to verify any new chute concept before fabrication and
implementation Confirming the concept can save time and money as it reduces
the risk of on-site modifications Hand calculations only supply a two
dimensional solution to the problem which does not always provide accurate
material flow profiles
In recent years a few material flow simulation packages have been developed to
aid the design of material handling equipment The use of software packages
can be beneficial to the design process as it gives a three dimensional view of
the material behaviour in the chute This means that changes to the chute
concept can be made prior to fabrication
It is however important to verify that the solution obtained from the software
package is an accurate reflection of actual design model Therefore the material
being handled should be thoroughly tested to obtain the correct physical
properties required to obtain an accurate simulation result
The use of material flow simulation software does not replace the necessity for
hand calculations All the basic steps should still be done to derive a conceptual
chute configuration Material flow simulation software should be used as a
complimentary tool to analytical hand calculations in the design process
The optimisation of transfer chutes in thebulk materials industry
MN van Aarde
78
CHAPTER 5
52 SELECTING A TEST METHODOLOGY
Traditionally transfer chutes were designed by using basic analytical calculations
and relying on empirical data from past experiences with other chutes Mostly
these analytical methods only cater for the initial part of the chute such as the
parabolic discharge trajectory It is difficult to determine what happens to the
flow of material after it strikes the chute wall [34]
Two methods of verification were usually applied to evaluate a new transfer
chute configuration Trial and error can be used but obviously this is not desired
due to the high cost implications A second method is to build a small scale
model of the chute in which tests can be carried out before a final design can be
adopted This physical modelling is however time consuming and
expensive [34]
Granular or particulate materials are composed of a large number of loosely
packed individual particles or grains The flow of such granular materials forms
an intricate part of the materials handling industry Small reductions in energy
consumption or increases in production can have great financial advantages
Therefore significant efforts are put into improving the efficiency of these
facilities The important role of numerical simUlations is becoming more evident
in these optimisation procedures [35] Due to these efforts this technology is
becoming more powerful and is easy to use as a verification method for transfer
chute designs
The behaviour of bulk material particles is unique in the sense that it exhibits
some of the properties associated with the gaseous liquid and solid states of
matter The granular state of bulk materials cannot be characterised by anyone
of these states alone The research that captures the contact between individual
particles in an explicit manner is known as discrete element methods (OEM) [36]
The optimisation of transfer chutes in the bulk materials industry
MN van Aarde
79
CHAPTER 5
In basic terms OEM explicitly models the dynamic motion and mechanical
interactions of each body or particle as seen in the physical material flow It is
also possible to obtain a detailed description of the velocities position and force
acting on each particle at a discrete point during the analysis This is achieved
by focusing on the individual grain or body rather than focusing on the global
body as is the case with the finite element approach [36]
Figure 48 illustrates two examples of how this OEM software can be applied
Obviously the flow characteristics differ between the applications shown in Figure
48 This is however catered for by the mathematical simulation of each particle
collision
Figure 48 Flow analysis examples a) separation and screening b) hoppers feeders 36]
Continuous improvements in the performance of computing systems make OEM
a realistic tool for use in a wide range of process design and optimisation
applications During the last 20 years the capabilities of OEM have progressed
from small scale two dimensional simulations to much more complex 3D
applications The latest high performance desk top computers make it possible
to simulate systems containing large numbers of particles within a reasonable
time [37]
The optimisation of transfer chutes in the bulk materials industry
MN van Aarde
80
CHAPTER 5
According to the institute for conveyor technologies at the Otto-von-Guericke
University of Magdeburg in Germany using OEM for bulk solid handling
equipment provides [38]
bull A cost effective method of simulating the utility of materials handling
equipmentshy
bull Precise control over complicated problem zones eg transfer chutes
redirection stations and high wear areas
bull The possibility to integrate processes in one simulation such as mixing and
segregation
bull The possibility to involve the customer more extensively in the design
process
bull An advantage in the market due to attractive video sequences and pictures
of the simulation
bull The possibility to prevent facility damages and increase the efficiency of
conveyor systems extensively
As a good example of the advantages of the discrete element method the
University of Witwatersrand in Johannesburg did studies on rotary grinding mills
The university studies have shown that the OEM qualitatively predicts the load
motion of the mill very well The improved knowledge of the behaviour of mills
can therefore increase the profitability of mineral processing operations [39]
This material handling equipment is generally costly to operate and inefficient in
the utilisation of energy for breakage In order to understand the behaviour of
mills better the OEM method is increasingly being applied to the modelling of the
load behaviour of grinding mills These results indicate that this method can be
applied successfully in the bulk materials handling industry
The apUmisatian af transfer chutes in the bulk materials industry
MN van Aarde
81
CHAPTERS
Another example where this technology has been used with great success is with
the design of a new load out chute for the Immingham coal import terminal in
Britain By simulating the flow with a OEM package the designers were aided in
the fact that they were supplied with a quantitative description of the bulk solid
movement through the chute In the opinion of Professor Franz Kessler
(University of Leoben) the Discrete Element Method provides the engineer with
unique detailed information to assist in the design of transfer points [3]
These simulation packages are at the moment very expensive and not widely
used in transfer chute design It can be anticipated that the utilisation of these
packages will increase as the technology improves and the cost of the software
goes down [40] To get the best value out of the simulation it is important to
compare simulation packages and select the one most suitable to the complexity
of the design
Fluenttrade is a two dimensional computational fluid dynamics (CFD) software
package which can also be used as a chute design aid through the simulation of
material flow It must however be noted that this is not a OEM simulation
package This software package simulates the flow of material by considering
the material particles as a liquid substance The output of the simulation is the
same as can be seen in the example of Figure 49 The colours in the simulation
represent the average particle spacing [40] Due to the fact that this package
can at this stage only deliver two dimensional simulations it is considered
inadequate to perform detailed simulations on the intricate design piscussed in
this dissertation
The optjmisation of transfer chutes in the bulk materials industry
MN van Aarde
82
CHAPTER 5
COnroUf Votume t-~bn 01 ( 00 frlm~2 5000amp1 00) ~gtJ C3_2002 fLUENT 60 (2lt1 9 940 n 1Mgt u ody)
Figure 49 Simulations results from Fluenttrade [40]
The Overland Conveyor Company provides another alternative to the Fluent
software package Applied OEM is a technology company that provides discrete
element software to a variety of users in the bulk materials industry Bulk Flow
Analysttrade is an entry level package that they provide This package is very
powerful in the sense that it can accurately predict flow patterns depending on
the accuracy of the inputs An example of this is shown in Figure 50 It also has
the capability to show material segregation dynamic forces and velocities [41]
Figure 50 Simulation results from Bulk Flow Analysttrade [41]
The optimisation of transfer chutes in the bulk materials industry
MN van Aarde
83
CHAPTER 5
OEM Solutions is a world leader in discrete element modelling software They
recently announced the release of the latest version of their flow simulation
package called EOEM 21 This package can be used to simulate and optimise
bulk material handling and processing operations [41] Oue to the capabilities of
this software package it is a very attractive option for designing transfer chutes
With the development of EOEM 21 OEM Solutions worked in collaboration with
customers in the Bulk Handling Mining and Construction Pharmaceutical
Chemical and Agricultural sectors This enables the end users to perform more
sophisticated particle simulations specific to their unique applications Also
incorporated into this package is the ability and flexibility to customise and
personalise advanced particle properties [42]
This specific package has been proven successful by industry leaders Martin
Engineering (Neponset Illinois) is a leading global supplier of solids handling
systems This company continues to expand their use of EOEM software in
design optimisation and development of bulk materials handling products These
optimisation and development actions include all aspects of conveyor systems
and transfer points for numerous industrial sectors [43]
There are several other OEM simulation packages such as ESYS Particle
Passage-OEM and YAOE However none of these software packages seem be
major industry role players in the discipline of chute design although they might
have the capability In adjudicating the three big role players in bulk material flow
simulation packages there are a few factors taken into consideration It appears
thatthe advantages of 30 capabilities are non negotiable Therefore Fluenttrade is
not really a consideration From the literature review of the Bulk Flow Analysttrade
and the EOEM packages it seems that these two will provide more or less the
same performance It does seem however that the EOEM software is a bigger
role player in various industries Due to the possible future capabilities of EOEM The optimisation of transfer chutes in the bulk materials industry
MN van Aarde
84
CHAPTER 5
through its association with numerous industries this simulation package is the
software of choice
In order to retrofit or design a new transfer point with the aid of the selected OEM
software package there are a few steps that a designer must follow to gain the
full benefit of this tool [36]
1 An accurate 3D or CAD representation of the new or old transfer chute
must be rendered
2 Identify restrictions and limitations in terms of chute geometry and
manufacturing
3 Identify desired design goals (Le dust emissions flow restrictions etc)
4 Identify representative material properties and particle descriptions
5 In case of a retrofit make design changes to chute geometry with CAD
6 Simulate the performance of the new design using OEM software
7 Evaluate results obtained from the simulation (reiterate steps 5 6 and 7)
8 Perform and finalise detail design steps
9 Manufacture
10 Installation
The above mentioned steps found in references [6] and [36] only provides
information regarding retrofitting or designing chutes with the aid of OEM
Although it is a powerful design 1001 the design process should not discard the
use of analytical hand calculation~ Some of the most important design decisions
regarding chute profiles are made with analytical hard calculations such as
plotting the material trajectorY
53 DETERMINATION OF MATERIAL PROPERTIES
The discrete element method is a promising approach to the simUlation of
granular material interaction The accuracy of the outcome of the simulation is
The optimisation of transfer chutes in the bulk materials industry
M N van Aarde
85
CHAPTER 5
however dependent upon accurate information on the material properties and
input parameters [44] These inputs basically consist of the following
fundamental parameters size and shape factors bulk density angle of repose
cohesion and adhesion parameters and restitution coefficients [45]
The determination of most of these parameters are explained and defined in the
following paragraphs The parameters that are changed in the simulation
according to the reaction of the flow are not discussed and are typically
parameters such as the internal coefficient of friction between a number of
particles A collaborated effort by the bulk handling industry aims to find ways in
which all parameters can be accurately determined through scientific methods
This has however still not been achieved The objective is to achieve a realistic
representation and therefore some parameters are altered in the simulation
It is important to note that the computation time increases as the particle size
becomes smaller and the amount of particles increase In most granular flow
problems the characteristics of the material stream are largely determined by
particles greater than 10 - 20 mm in size [45] Therefore in order to reduce
computation time the selected particle size for simUlations should be the same
as the largest particles handled by the facility namely 34 mm diameter
Although fines have a higher internal friction coefficient and more cohesiveness
these properties can be averaged into the input parameters to obtain the same
overall effect [45] Therefore only a single particle size is used in the simulation
and the properties optimised to obtain the same result under actual operating
conditionsmiddot Some of the material properties can be easily obtained from the
facility The rest of the properties are obtained from tests carried out by expert
conSUltants in this field
The size factor and bulk density are obtained from the facility Materia tests
carried out by external consultants provide the coefficient of friction and also the The optimisation of transfer chutes in the bulk materials industry
MN van Aarde
86
CHAPTER 5
wall friction angle This is the angle at which the material will start to slide under
its own mass To determine these material properties the external consultants
normally use sophisticated and expensive equipment Data gathered from these
tests are used for the hand calculation of the chute profile The angle of repose
can normally be observed from a stockpile and is the angle that the side of the
stockpile makes with the horizontal
For the OEM simulation the coefficient of friction is one of the main determining
factors of the wall friction angle Data provided by the material tests can not be
used as a direct input into OEM In the software package the coefficient of
friction is represented by a factor between 0 and 1 The material test data can
however provide some insight into where on this scale the factor is This factor
can be derived from a few small simulation iterations as there is no method of
direct conversion between the test result data and the OEM input
To determine this factor a plate is modelled with a single layer of particles This
plate is then rotated within the simulation at approximately 2deg per second As
soon as the particles begin to slide the time is taken from which the angle can be
calculated This process is repeated with different friction coefficients until the
correct wall friction angle is obtained After the coefficient of friction factor is
determined between the particles and the chute wall the material restitution
factor and coefficient of internal friction can be obtained
The restitution factor is obtained by measurirtg the rebound height of a particle
when it is dropped from a certain height This is usually difficult to determine due
to the variation in shape of the material particles If the particle lands on a
surface it rarely bounces straight back up Therefore the test is repeated
numerous times and an average is taken to obtain the final result
Coefficient of internal friction is a property that describes the particles ability to
slide across each other A simUlation is set up to create a small stockpile of The optimisation of transfer chutes in the blJlk materials industry
MN van Aarde
87
CHAPTER 5
material particles The angle of repose can be obtained by measuring the
average apex angle of the stockpiles In this simulation the coefficient of internal
friction and restitution factors are iterated This is done in order to simulate the
accurate behaviour of particles falling onto the stockpile and forming the correct
angle of repose Figure 51 shows what this simulation typically looks like
Figure 51 Determination of material properties for an accurate angle of repose
54 VERIFICATION OF THE SELECTED TEST METHODOLOGY FOR THIS
APPLICATION
The best verification is to compare the simulation results with an actual material
flow situation Therefore a comparison is made between the actual flow in the
existing transfer configuration and the simulation of this same transfer This is
also a good test to see if the parameters changed in the simulation were done
correctly
During the chute test programme CCTV cameras were installed in the problem
transfer chutes at the facility The cameras are positioned to provide an accurate
view of the material flow behaviour inside the chutes As explained in Chapter 3
The optimisation of transfer chutes in the bulk materials industry 88
MN van Aarde
CHAPTER 5
the behaviour of the material flow inside the chutes changes with the variation of
ore type
Due to the fact that only 34 mm diameter particles are used in the simulation a
test using coarse ore was chosen for the verification of the simulation
Therefore test 12 is used as reference for the verification In this test coarse S
with the particle size distribution between 28 mm and 34 mm was used at the
transfer from CV 3 to CV 5
Figure 52 shows an image taken from the CCTV camera inside the transfer chute
between CV 3 and CV 5 The red line indicates the top of the chute throat
opening and the yellow arrows show the top of material flow This screen shot
was taken at a flow rate of 10 000 tlh It can be deduced from this view and the
chute test work that the chute is choking at a throughput rate of 10 000 tlh
Figure 52 Actual material flow with coarse S at 10000 tIh
The transfer chute from Figure 52 was modelled in CAD and the model imported
into the discrete element package EDEM All the material input parameters as
discussed in section 53 were used in the simulation 10 000 tlh was used as the
The optimisation of transfer chutes in the bulk materials industry
MN van Aarde
89
CHAPTER 5
flow rate parameter in an attempt to simulate and recreate the situation as shown
by Figure 52
Test 12 of the chute performance tests gave the following results which can be
compared to the EDEM simulation
bull Chute started to choke rapidly at 10 000 tlh
bull Slight off centre loading onto the receiving conveyor CV 5
bull A lower velocity layer of material close to the discharge of the chute
bull Material roll back on the receiving conveyor due to significant differences in
the velocity of the material flow and the receiving conveyor
Off-centre loading
L
Figure 53 Material flow pattern through the existing chute
The optimisation of transfer chutes in the bulk materials industry
MN van Aarde
90
CHAPTER 5
Flow restricted in this area
Low velocity layer
Low discharge velocity rollback
Figure 54 Cross sectional side view of material flow through the existing chute
Figure 53 shows the material flow pattern in the existing chute where the thick
red arrows indicate the direction of flow The legend on the left of the figure
indicates the material velocity in ms Slow flowing material is shown in blue and
the colour turns to red as the material velocity increases Slight off centre
loading onto the receiving conveyor CV 5 can be seen from Figure 53 This
correlates well with the actual observations during the physical testing of this
transfer point
Figure 54 shows the more determining factors for correlation between actual flow
and simulated flow where the legend on the left indicates the material velocity in
ms This is a cross sectional view through the centre of the chute From this
view a build up of material can be seen in the chute throat area The slow
flowing material on the back of the chute also helps to restrict the flow Due to
the fact that the material speed at the discharge of the chute is much slower than
the receiving belt speed a stack of turbulent flowing material is formed behind
the discharge point on the receiving conveyor
The optimisation of transfer chutes in the bulk materials industry
MN van Aarde
91
CHAPTER 5
There is a good correlation between the simulated and actual material flow
pattern The simulation method can therefore be considered as a valid alternate
or additional method to standard analytical chute design Attention should be
given though to the input of material properties in order to obtain a realistic result
55 VERIFICATION OF NEW CHUTE CONFIGURATION AND OPTIMISATION OF THE
HOOD LOCATION
After establishing that the OEM is a reliable design and verification tool the new
transfer chute configuration can be simulated Firstly this configuration is
modelled without the honeycombs inside the hood and spoon This is done in
order to verify the material flow pattern and velocity through the hood and spoon
Results obtained from this simulation can then be compared to the hand
calculation results An iterative process is followed with simulations and hand
calculations to obtain the best flow results The simulation results are shown in
Figure 55 and Figure 56
I
L
Figure 55 Material flow through hood at 10 000 tIh
The optimisation of transfer chutes in the bulk materials industry
MN van Aarde
92
CHAPTER 5
Figure 56 Material flow through spoon at 10 000 tlh
The hood velocity profile shown in Figure 38 gives the same result as obtained
from the DEM simulation The calculated hood exit velocity is 633 ms This is
the same result obtained from the simulation and shown by the red colouring in
Figure 55 As the material enters the spoon it is falling under gravity and
therefore still accelerating At impact with the chute wall it slows down and exits
the spoon with approximately the same velocity as the receiving conveyor
Figure 56 shows the material flow through the spoon section This can also be
compared to the spoon velocity profile in Figure 39 The behaviour of the
material inside the spoon as shown by the simulation correlates with the results
obtained from the hand calculations This is another indication that with accurate
input parameters the DEM can be used as a useful verification tool
The optimisation of transfer chutes in the bulk materials industry
MN van Aarde
93
CHAPTER 5
Skew loading into spoon
Slower material
L
Figure 57 Determination of the optimum hood location
The hood is supported by a shaft at the top and can be moved horizontally This
function is incorporated into the design in order to optimise the hood location
during commissioning of the transfer chute It is critical to discharge centrally into
the spoon in order to eliminate skew loading onto the receiving conveyor
Figure 57 illustrates the effect that the hood location has on material flow When
comparing the flow from Figure 55 to the flow in Figure 57 it is clear that skew
loading is a direct result of an incorrect hood position The circled area in Figure
57 illustrates how the flow reacts to the incorrect hood location
Material is discharged to the right side of the spoon which causes a slight buildshy
up of material on the left This causes the material to flow slightly from side to
side as it passes through the spoon Figure 57 indicates that the material to the
The optimisation of transfer chutes in the bulk materials industry
MN van Aarde
94
CHAPTERS ----------------- -------___ _--shy
right at the spoon discharge is slightly slower than the material on the left This is
a clear indication of skew loading onto the receiving conveyor
The material flow pattern in Figure 55 is symmetrical and therefore will not
cause skew loading The OEM can give a good indication of the required hood
setup before commissioning However adjustments can still be made during the
commissioning process The tracking of the receiving belt should give a good
indication of when the hood is in the optimum position
56 EFFECT OF THE HONEYCOMB STRUCTURE IN HIGH IMPACT ZONES
The purpose of the honeycomb dead box structure in the high impact zones is to
capture material inside the pockets and induce material on material flow This
requires that the material inside the honeycombs should be stationary while the
main stream material flow moves over the dead boxes OEM can therefore be
set up in such a way that the material velocities can be visualised inside the
chute
In Chapter 4 the logic of how this honeycomb should be structured and
positioned was discussed The simulations shown in Figure 58 and Figure 59
illustrate how a OEM pack~ge can also be used to determine the positioning of
these honeycomb structures Impact points in the hood and spoon must be
inside the honeycomb in all situations of flow inside the chute The spacing of
dead box pockets can be altered to ensure that a continuous layer of stationary
material is formed in the honeycomb area Various geometries for this
honeycomb structure can be simulated with OEM to obtain the best results
The optimisation of transfer chutes in the bulk materials industry
MN van Aarde
95
CHAPTER 5
Large radius hood
Hood honeycomb box to minimise wear in impact
Vertical discharge from hood centralising flow on
belt
L
Figure 58 Material behaviour through hood
Spoon
Spoon honeycomb box to minimise wear in impact area
Improved spoon discharge flow
Figure 59 Material behaviour through spoon
The optimisation of transfer chutes in the bulk materials industry
MN van Aarde
96
CHAPTERS
The legends on the left of Figure 58 and Figure 59 indicate the material velocity
in ms Dark blue indicates stationary material and bright red indicates a
maximum material velocity of 8 ms Using this information the functionality of
the honeycomb dead boxes can now be analysed The velocity of the material
captured by the dead boxes is indicated as dark blue This means that all the
material in the dead boxes is stationary
With the result obtained from the OEM simulation it is clear that material on
material flow will be induced by the honeycomb dead boxes The pockets of the
honeycomb capture the material and will therefore have reduced wear in the
high impact areas This material on material flow does however induce a
coarser sliding surface than the smooth ceramic liner tiles Due to the high
velocity of material through the chute the effect of the coarser sliding surface is
however minimised
58 CONCLUSION
The Discrete Element Method is proven to be a successful design and
verification tool in the bulk materials industry This method is used widely in the
global bulk materials industry The successful outcome of the OEM simulation is
however dependent on the correct material input parameters Some of these
parameters are readily available from the facility that handles the material The
rest of the parameters can be determined by setting up simple test simulations
with OEM
To verify that the OEM simulation is a correct indication of the actual condition
the simulation is compared to CCTV images taken from the same transfer chute
The results show that the OEM simulation does provide a true reflection of the
actual material flow through the transfer chute Therefore the same material
input parameters can be used to simulate the new transfer chute configuration
The optimisation of transfer chutes in the bulk materials industry
MN van Aarde
97
CHAPTER 5
From the simulations done on the new transfer chute configuration the effect of
the honeycomb dead boxes can be examined These simulation results show
that the honeycomb dead box configuration is effective in capturing material
inside the honeycomb cavities This results in material on material flow and
reduces impact abrasion on the ceramic chute liners
Results obtained from the OEM simulation of the new transfer configuration are
compared to the hand calculation results This comparison indicates that the
material velocity calculated in the hood and spoon correlates well with the
material velocity calculated by the OEM The overall results obtained from
simulating the new transfer chute configuration have been shown to provide a
true reflection of the actual flow through the chute
The optimisation of transfer chutes in the bulk materials industry
MN van Aarde
98
CHAPTER 6
CHAPTER 6 CONCLUSIONS AND RECOMMENDATIONS
The optimisation of transfer chutes in the bulk materials industry
MN van Aarde
99
CHAPTER 6
61 CONCLUSIONS AND RECOMMENDATIONS
Bulk materials handling is a key role player in the global industrial industry
Within this field the industry faces many challenges on a daily basis These
challenges as with any industry are to limit expenses and increase profit Some
of the limiting factors of achieving this goal in the bulk materials handling industry
are lost time due to unscheduled maintenance product losses due to spillage
andhigh costs incurred by increased maintenance
The focus of this study was on the optimisation of transfer chutes and
investigations were carried out to determine the core problems These
investigations were done by observing and monitoring various grades of iron ore
passing through transfer chutes known to have throughput problems The core
problems were identified as high wear on liners in the impact zones skew
loading on receiving conveyors material spillage and chute blockages
These problems cause financial losses to the facility either directly or indirectly
Direct financial losses can be attributed to the frequent replacement of chute
liners while the indirect financial losses are caused by facility down time This is
why it is imperative to optimise the manner in which the transfer of material is
approached A new transfer chute configuration addresses the problems
identified at the facility and the core concepts can be adopted at any bulk
materials handling facility
This new concept examines the utilisation of the hood and spoon concept rather
than the conventional dead box configuration By using the hood and spoon
configuration the material discharge velocity is utilised and carried through to the
discharge onto the receiving conveyor Adding to this design is a honeycomb
dead box configuration in the high impact zones of the hood and spoon This
initiates material on material flow and prolongs the lifetime of the chute liners
The optimisation of transfer chutes in the bulk materials industry
MN van Aarde
100
CHAPTER 6
The radius of the hood should be designed so that it follows the path of the
material trajectory as closely as possible Some facility constraints prohibit this
hood radius from following exactly the same path as the material The radius of
the spoon is designed in such a manner that it receives the material from the
hood and slows it down while turning it into the direction in which the belt is
running Ideally the material should be discharged from the spoon at
approximately the same velocity as the receiving conveyor
If this can be achieved then some major problems suffered by the industry will
have been resolved With the hood having almost the same radius as the
material trajectory impact wear on liners can be significantly reduced By
discharging material from the chute onto the receiving conveyor at the same
velocity as the conveyor belt excessive belt wear and material spillage will be
avoided Further optimisation is however still possible by investigating the
implementation of various skirting options to the side of the conveyor
This new transfer chute configuration also boasts an articulated bottom section in
the spoon The purpose of the adjustable bottom section is to create greater
clearance below the spoon This will allow material on the belt below to pass
unimpeded underneath the spoon In some cases there can be several chutes in
series that discharge onto the same conveyor In these cases it is beneficial to
incorporate an articulated chute in order to have the capability of having a small
drop height between the discharge point in the chute and the receiving conveyor
This low drop height also minimises turbulent flow at the chute discharge point on
the receiving conveyor
The most unique feature to the new design is the implementation of the
honeycomb dead box configuration in the high impact zones Due to these high
impact areas the liners will experience the most wear This section of the chute
is flanged and can be removed separately from the rest of the chute to aid
maintenance In most maintenance operations it may only be necessary to reline The optimisation of transfer chutes in the bulk materials industry
MN van Aarde
101
CHAPTER 6
this small section of the chute Costs are minimised by reducing the time
required for maintenance and the cost of replacing liners
Previously testing of new transfer chute configurations normally involved
implementing the chute and obseNing its ability to perform according to
specification This can however be a costly exercise as it is possible that further
modifications to the chute will be required after implementation Therefore it is
beneficial to verify the new chute configuration before implementation
This is done by simulating the material flow through the chute using Discrete
Element Method A comparison was done between the actual flow in an eXisting
chute and the simulated flow in the same chute configuration This comparison
showed the same result obtained from the simulation and the actual material
flow This method can therefore be used as an accurate simulation tool for
evaluating transfer chute performance
The mathematical calculations describing the material flow in and over the
honeycomb dead box structures are complex Therefore simulation models are
used to show the material behaviour in those areas Simulations show that the
material captured within the dead boxes remains stationary thus protecting the
ceramic liners behind it This is the desired result as it prolongs the life of the
chute liners and reduces maintenance frequencies
If the work is done efficiently it normally takes two days to remove a worn chute
of this configuration fully and replace it with a new one This is normally done
once a year due to the design lifetime of the chute With the new chute
configuration this maintenance schedule can be reduced to two hours once a
year for the replacement of the honeycomb sections only The exposed face of
the honeycomb ribs will wear through until the efficiency of the honeycomb
design is reduced
The optimisation of transfer chutes in the bulk materials industry
MN van Aarde
102
CHAPTER 6
This specific iron ore facility has approximately fifty transfer points During this
exercise only two of these transfer points were replaced with the new chute
configuration The combined annual maintenance time for replacement of these
50 chutes is 100 days If the new chute philosophy is adopted on all these
transfers the annual maintenance time can be reduced to as little as 100 hours
This excludes the unplanned work for cleaning of spillages and fixing or replacing
worn conveyors
There are significant benefits to investigating the problems at specific transfer
points before attempting a new design This gives good insight into where the
focus should be during the design process Ea~y identification and
understanding of the problem areas is essential for a new chute configuration
The new design features can provide a vast improvement and a large benefit to
the bulk materials handling industry
62 RECOMMENDATIONS FOR FURTHER STUDY
During the chute performance tests it was noted that avalanches on the
stockpiles during reclaiming of material causes peaks on the conveyor systems
These peaks in the material stream increase the probability of blockages in the
transfer chutes As a result material spillage occurs and the conveyor belts can
be easily overloaded
This occurrence creates the requirement for further studies on the reclaiming
operations All stacker reclaimers are operated manually which creates ample
room for error Investigations can be done to determine the value of automating
the reclaiming operations Manual interaction cannot be avoided but an
automated system will reduce the possibility for error
Visual inspections on the transfer chute liners indicate that the material tends to
erode the liners away quicker in the grooves between liner plates or ceramic
The optimisation of transfer chutes in the bulk materials industry
MN van Aarde
103
CHAPTER 6
tiles This occurrence seems to be worse in areas of the chute where the
material velocity is the highest
This problem was specifically noticed with ceramic liner tiles The tiles are glued
to the chute surface with an epoxy and this substance also fills the crevices
between the tiles This epoxy is however not resistant to any type of sliding or
impact abrasion If the material gains speed in such a groove between the tiles it
simply erodes the epoxy away Studies to reduce or even eliminate this problem
should be examined
In some situations the layout and configuration of the chute prohibits the tiles
from being inserted in a staggered manner Studies can be done on the
composition of this epoxy in order to increase its resistance to sliding and impact
abrasion By doing so the lifetime of the chute liners can be increased which will
result in minimised facility down time due to maintenance
It seems that it is a global industry problem to find accurate scientific methods of
determining material input parameters for OEM simulations Although most of
the material properties can be determined through testing it is still a challenge to
convert that information into a representative input parameter into OEM It is
therefore recommended that further studies be undertaken to determine a
method by which material test data can be successfully converted into OEM input
parameters
The optimisation of transfer chutes in the bulk materials industry
MN van Aarde
104
REFERENCES ------shy
REFERENCES
[1] ARNOLD P C MCLEAN A G ROBERTS A W 1978 Bulk Solids
storage flow and handling Tunra Bulk Solids Australia Jan
[2] ANON 2008 Peak (Export) OilUSD Survival Dec
httppeakoHsurvivalorgltag=finance Date of access 8 Jun 2009
[3] KESSLER F 2006 Recent developments in the field of bulk conveying
FME Transactions Vol 34 NO4
[4] ANON 2007 Specification for Troughed Belt Conveyors British
Standards BS28901989 25 Sep Date of access 8 Jun 2009
[5] CEMA (Conveyor Equipment Manufacturers Association) Belt Conveyors
6thfor Bulk Materials ed wwwcemanetorg Date of access
10 Jun 2009
[6] DEWICKI G 2003 Computer Simulation of Granular Material Flows
Overland Conveyor Co Inc Jan httpwwwpowderandbulkcom Date
of access 10 Jun 2009
[7] AMERICAN COAL COUNCIL 2009 Engineered chutes control dust for
Ameren U Es Meramec Plant httpwww clean-coal infold rupalindexphp
Date of access 12 Jun 2009
[8] KUMBA IRON ORE 2008 Annual Financial Statements 2008
httpwwwsishenironorecompanycozareportskumba afs 08pdffullpdf
Date of access 13 Jun 2009
The optimisation of transfer chutes in the bulk materials industry
MN van Aarde
105
REFERENCES
[9] METSO BACKGROUNDER 2007 Rock Crushing 22 Feb
httpWWvVmetsocom Date of access 15 Jun 2009
[10] ALTHOFF H 1977 Reclaiming and Stacking System Patent US
4037735
[11] THE SOUTH AFRICAN INSTITUTE OF MATERIALS HANDLING
Conveyor belt installations and related components Chutes Level 1
course on belt conveying technology
httpWWvVsaimhcozaeducationcourse01chuteshtm Date of access
18 Jun 2009
[12] CLARKE R 2008 Hood and spoon internal flow belt conveyor transfer
systems SACEA - seminar 22 Aug httpWWvVsaceaorgzaDate of
access 22 Jun 2009
[13] T W WOODS CONSTRUCTION 2009 Design problems in coal transfer
chutes 24 Mar httpWWvVferretcomaucTW-Woods-Constructions
Date of access 25 Jun 2009
[14] LOUGHRAN J 2009 The flow of coal through transfer chutes 20 Aug
Showcase of research excellence James Cook University Australia
[15] ONEIL M 2006 A guide to coal chute replacement Power Engineering
International Nov httpgoliathecnextcomcoms2lgi 0198-369643Ashy
guide-to-coal-chutehtml Date of access 3 Jul 2009
[16] NORDELL LK 1992 A new era in overland conveyor belt design
httpWWvVckitcozasecureconveyorpaperstroughedoverlandoverland
htm Date of access 3 Jul 2009
The optimisation of transfer chutes in the bulk materials industry
MN van Aarde
106
REFERENCES
[17] Rowland C 1992 Dust Control at Transfer Points
httpwwwckitcozasecureconveyorpapersbionic-research-2d-bri2shy
paper05htm Date of access 4 Jul 2009
[18] KRAM ENGINEERING Ceramic composite impact blocks
httpwwwkramengineeringcozacercomhtmIDate of access
5 Jul 2009
I19] BLAZEK C 2005 Kinkaid InteliFlo tradeInstallation Source for Plats
Power Atticle Oct
httpwwwbenetechusacompdf caseStudyBe neKi ncArti c pdf
Date of access 10 Aug 2009
[20] CRP Engineering Corp Modern Transfer Chute Designs for Use in
Material Handling
httpwwwcbpengineeringcompdflTransfer Chutespdf Date of access
26 Apr 2010
[21] ROZENTALS J 2008 Rational design of conveyor chutes Bionic
Research Institute South African Institute of Materials Handling
[22] ROBERTS AW SCOTT OJ 1981 Flow of bulk solids through
transfer chutes of variable geometry and profile Bulk Solids Handling
1(4) Dec
[23] CARSON JW ROYAL TA GOODWILL DJ 1986 Understanding
and Eliminating Particle Segregation Problems Bulk Solids Handling
6(1) Feb
[24] BENJAMIN CW 2004 The use of parametric modelling to design
transfer chutes and other key components Gulf Conveyor Group The optimisation of transfer chutes in the bulk materials industry
MN van Aarde
107
l25] STUART DICK D ROYAL TA 1992 Design Principles for Chutes to
Handle Bulk Solids Bulk Solids Handling 12(3) Sep
[26J REICKS AV RUDOLPHI TJ 2004 The Importance and Prediction of
Tension Distribution around the Conveyor Belt Path Bulk materials
handling by conveyor belt 5(2)
(271 RAMOS CM 1991 The real cost of degradation
institute Chute design conference 1991
Bionic research
[28] ROBERTS AW 1969 An investigation of the gravity flow of non
cohesive granular materials through discharge chutes Transactions of
the ACMEjournal of engineering for indust~ May
[29] TAYLOR HJ 1989 Guide to the design of transfer chutes and chute
linings for bulk materials
association 1989
mechanical handling engineers
[30] ROBERTS AW 1999 Chute design application transfer chute design
Design guide for chutes in bulk solids handling The University of
Newcastle Australia
[31] NORDELL LK 1994 Palabora installs Curved Transfer Chute in Hard
Rock to Minimise Belt Cover Wear Bulk Solids Handling 14 Dec
[32] ROZENTALS J 1991 Flow of Bulk Solids in Chute Design
research institute Chute design conference 1991
Bionic
The optimisation oftransfer chutes in the bulk materials industry
MN van Aarde
108
REFERENCES
[33] ROBERTS AW WICHE SJ 2007 Feed Chute Geometry for
Minimum Belt Wear (h International conference of bulk materials
handling 17 Oct
[34J POWDER HANDLING New OEM Conveyor Transfer Chute Design
Software Helix Technologies
httpvwvwpowderhandlingcomauarticesnew-dem-conveyor-transfershy
chute-design-software Date of access 12 Aug 2009
[35J SAWLEY ML CLEARY PW 1999 A Parallel Discrete Element
Method for Industrial Granular Flow SimUlations EPFL - Super
Computing Review (11)
[36] DEWICKI G 2003 Bulk Material Handling and Processing - Numerical
Techniques and Simulation of Granular Material Overland Conveyor
Company Bulk Solids Handling 23(2)
[37J FA VIER J 2009 Continuing Improvements Boost use of Discrete
Element Method Oil and Gas Engineer- Production Processing 7 Oct
[38] KRAUS E F KA TTERFELD A Usage of the Discrete Element Method in
Conveyor Technologies Institute for Conveyor Technologies (IFSL) The
Otto-von-Guericke University of Magdeburg
[39] MOYS MH VAN NIEROP MA VAN TONDER JC GLOVER G
2005 Validation of the Discrete Element Method (OEM) by Comparing
Predicted Load Behaviour of a Grinding Mill with Measured Data School
for Process and Materials Engineering University of Witwatersrand
Johannesburg The optimisation of transfer materials industry
MN van Aarde
109
REFERENCES
[40J MciLVINA P MOSSAD R 2003 Two dimensional transfer chute
analysis using a continuum method Third international conference on
CFD in the Minerals and Process Industry CSIRO Melbourne Australia
(41J Overland Conveyor Company Inc 2009 Applied DEM
httpwwwapplieddemcomDate of access 26 Apr 2010
(42] DEM SOLUTIONS 2008 Advanced Particle Simulation Capabilities with
EDEM 21 Press release 5 Nov
[43J DEM SOLUTIONS 2008 Martin Engineering Expands use of EDEMTM
Software in Design of Solids Handling Equipment Press release 20 Feb
(44] COETZEE CJ ELS DNJ 2009 Calibration of Discrete Element
Parameters and the Modelling of Silo Discharge and Bucket Filling
Computers and Electronics in Agriculture 65 Mar
[45] DAVID J KRUSES PE Conveyor Belt Transfer Chute Modelling and
Other Applications using The Discrete Element Method in the Material
Handling Industry
httpwwwckitcozasecureconveyorpaperstrouqhedconveyorconveyor
Date of access 3 Sep 2009
bulk materials industry
MN van Aarde
110
ApPENDIXA
ApPENDIX A MATERIAL TESTS AND LINER SELECTiON
The optimisation of-transfer chutes in the bulk materials industry
MN van Aarde
11-1
ApPENDIX A
MATERIAL TEST WORK AND LINER SELECTION
Material samples were taken from the stockpile area for evaluation and testing
These samples represent the worst case materials for impact wear and flow
problems Tests were conducted by external consultants as this is a speciality
field Therefore no detail information on how the tests are conducted is currently
available Results from these tests should indicate the worst case parameters for
chute design according to each specific liner type tested
The material handled by the facility varied from 4 mm to 34 mm lump size A mid
range lump size ore was identified as the preferred material to use for wear
testing This decision was based on the specific ore type maximum lump size of
15 mm as required for the wear test The wear test apparatus used cannot
provide conclusive results with the larger lump sizes of 34 mm and thus smaller
sizes are used Guidance on which ore samples to take was given by the
external consultants tasked with performing the test work
The test work is divided into two sections Firstly the flow test work is carried out
on the finer material with a higher clay content known to have bad flow angles
Included in the selection of fine materials is a sample of the scraper dribblings
This is the material scraped off the belt underneath the head pulley Secondly
the wear tests were conducted on 15 mm samples as explained above
A few common liners were selected for testing These liners are shown in
Table A Some of these liners are known for their specific purpose and
characteristics Polyurethane is known to have a very good coefficient of friction
and will therefore improve the flow of material This material does however
wear out quicker in high impact applications Therefore it is only considered for
use inside the dribbling chute
The optimisation of transfer chutes in the bulk materials industry
MN van Aarde
112
ApPENDIX A
As can be seen from Figure 37 in section 432 the dribbling chute will only see
scraper dribblings from the primary and secondary scrapers It is protected from
any main stream flow of material by the start up chute This makes the
polyurethane liner a prime candidate for lining this section of the chute
Table A Material tested vs liner type
I Flow Tests Wear Tests
Liner T
en aJ c
u
I
i
N en aJ c
u
Cf)
en aJ c
u
I en
shy OJaJ C 0 shyj -shy 0 u pound
(f) shy0
T
aJ ~ j 0 0
N aJ ~ j 0 0 i
I Chrome x x x x x
Carbide
x x x x xI VRN 500 I
x x x x x x94
Alumina
Ceramic i I
Poly x
Urethane I I I
FLOW TEST WORK
The fines 1 sample was tested at three different moisture contents of 36 41
and 47 This is 70 80 and 90 of saturation moisture respectively No
noticeable difference was observed in the wall friction angles Therefore the
fines 2 and fines 3 samples were tested at 80 of saturation which is 42 and
43 moisture content respectively
Test work showed that the minimum chute angle required for flow increased as
the impact pressure increased Chute angles were measured up to impact
pressures of about 8 kPa The worst chute angle obtained was 62deg This means
that no angle inside the chute should be less than 62deg from the horizontal
The industry 113
MN van Aarde
ApPENDIXA
The scraper dribblings were tested at a moisture content of 12 This material
possesses the most clay content and therefore has the worst flow properties
During testing of this material water was added to improve the flow At an
impact pressure of 03 kPa the minimum chute angle drops from 62deg to 56deg when
adding a fine mist spray of water
WEAR TEST WORK
As stated in chapter 4 wear tests were conducted on the chrome carbide
overlay ceramics and VRN500 The results of these tests are shown as non
dimensional wear ratios of mm wearmm travel of bulk solid sliding on the wear
liners coupon at a given force Test results shown in Table B indicate that the
chrome carbide will have about 185 times the lifetime of 94 alumina ceramics
The VRN500 liner will wear about 6 times faster than the 94 alumina ceramics
at the same force
Table B Wear ratios of liners at two different pressure ranges
lore Wall Coupon 65 kPa 163kPa -173 kPa I i
Coarse 1 on 94 Alumina Ceramic 90 E-9 37 E-8
Coarse 1 on Chrome Carbide 87 E-9 20 E-8
Coarse 1 on VRN500 91 E-8 I 24 E-7 i
Coarse 2 on 94 Alumina Ceramics 38 E-9 22 E-8
Coarse 2 on Chrome Carbide 55 E-9 15 E-8
Coarse 2 on VRN500 66 E-8 25 E-7 I
LINER SELECTION
The lifetime of the liners is not the only criteria Maintainability and cost are also
factors that must be considered Chrome carbide seems to be the liner of choice
for this application However the specific type of chrome carbide tested is not
The optimisation of transfer chutes industry 114
MN van Aarde
ApPEND[xA
manufactured locally and the imported cost is approximately three times that of
ceramics
VRN500 is slightly cheaper than ceramics and can easily be bolted to the back
plate of the chute which makes maintenance very simple Ceramics are
however widely used on the facility and the maintenance teams are well trained
for this specific liner Therefore 94 alumina ceramics is chosen for this
application
The optimisation of transfer chutes in the bulk materials industry
MN van Aarde
115
ApPENODlt B
ApPENDIX B CHUTE CONTROL PHILOSOPHY
The optfmisation of transfer chutes in the bulk materials industry
MN van Aarde
116
ApPENDIX B
SPOON IN THE OPERATING POSITION
For the spoon to be in the operating position the moving head must be over that
specific spoon and the feeding stockyard conveyor must be running This means
that material will be fed through the chute In this case the spoon needs to be in
the operating position to prevent spillage
However when the chute is in the operating position and the feeding conveyor
trips for any reason the actuated spoon section must not move to the non
operating position If the spoon position feedback fails then the system must trip
and the spoon must remain in its last position The downstream conveyor must
also fail to start with this condition
SPOON IN THE NON OPERATING POSITION
As a rule the spoon needs to be in the non operating position when the moving
head on that specific stockyard conveyor is in the purging position (position C)
The reason is that when a stacker reclaimer is in stacking mode any upstream
stacker reclaimer can be reclaiming The reclaimed material on CV 5 or CV 6
will have to pass underneath the actuated chute
ACTUATED SPOON OVER CV 5
As an example for the movement of any actuated spoon on CV 5 the following
are considered When the moving heads of any of the stockyard conveyors are
in position A and that specific stockyard conveyor is running then the rest of the
actuated spoons over CV 5 must be in the non operating position The
following scenario provides a better understanding
bull CV 4 is running
bull CV 4 moving head is in position A
The optimisation of transfer chutes in the bulk materials industry
MN van Aarde
117
ApPENDIXB
In this situation all the actuated spoons on CV 5 except underneath CV 4
must be in the non operating position
ACTUATED SPOON OVER CV 6
As an example for the movement of any actuated spoon on CV 6 the following
are considered When the moving heads of any of the stockyard conveyors are
in position B and that specific stockyard conveyor is running then the rest of the
actuated spoons over CV 6 must be in the non operating position The
following scenario is similar to 453 but explains the control philosophy for the
moving head in position B
bull CV 2 is running
bull CV 2 moving head is in position B
In this situation all the actuated spoons on CV 6 except underneath CV 2
must be in the non operating position
The optimisation of transfer chutes in bulk materials industry
MN van Aarde
118
TABLE OF CONTENTS
Chapter 4 Dynamic chutes for the elimination of recurring problems 57
41 Preface 58
42 Consideration of the existing transfer point constraints 59
43 Design of the chute profile 61
44 Incorporating a dead box in the impact areas 67
45 Designing the chute for integration with system requirements 73
46 Conclusion75
Chapter 5 Testing and verification ofthe new solution 77
51 Preface 78
52 Selecting a test methodology 79
53 Determination of material properties 85
54 Verification of the selected test methodology for this application 88
55 Verification of new chute configuration and optimisation of the hood
location 92
56 Effect of the honeycomb structure in high impact zones 95
58 Conclusion 97
Chapter 6 Conclusions and Recommendations 99
61 Conclusions and recommendations 100
62 Recommendations for further study 103
References 1 05
Appendix A Material Tests And Liner Selection 111
Appendix B Chute Control Philosophy 116
The optimisation of transfer chutes in the bulk materials industry
MN van Aarde
viii
LIST OF FIGURES
LIST OF FIGURES
Figure 1 Growth in global crude steel production from 1996 to 2006 [2] 2
Figure 2 Typical in-line transfer point [6] 4
Figure 3 90deg transfer point [7J 4
Fig ure 4 Material lump sizes through a crushing plant 6
Figure 5 Stacker Reclaimer in reclaiming mode 7
Figure 6 Typical dead box [11J9
Figure 7 Typical cascade chute [11] 9
Figure 8 Typical dynamic chute [12] 10
Figure 9 Radial door used in chutes under ore passes or silos [11] 1 0
Figure 10 Flopper gate diverting material to different receiving conveyors [11J 11
Figure 11 Ch ute liner degradation 12
Figure 12 Results of continuous belt wear at transfer points 13
Figure 1 Dust from a transfer point onto a stockpie13
Figure 14 Ceramic composite liners [18]15
Figure 15 Benetech Inteliflow J-Glide transfer chute [19] 16
Figure 16 Flow simulation of the Benetech Ineliflo chute [19] 17
Figure 17 Four step process for plant design and commissioning [1] 27
Figure 18 Vertical curve on incline conveyor 28
Figure 19 Protective roller on a transfer chute 29
Figure 20 Geometry of the impact plate and material trajectory [30J30
Figure 21 Model for the impact of a particle on a flat surface [29] 31
Figure 22 Ore flow path in the curved chute onto the incline conveyor [31] 35
Figure 23 Gentle deceleration of the product before impact on the receiving belt
[32] 35
Figure 24 Typical feed chute discharge model [33] 37
Figure 25 Layout of conveyors for chute test work 43
Figure 26 Configuration of the existing transfer chute44
Figure 27 Clear chute indicating camera angle 46
The optimisation of transfer chutes in the bulk materials industry
MN van Aarde
ix
LIST OF FIGURES
Figure 28 Coarse material at 8 000 tlh 46
Figure 29 Fine material at 8 000 tlh 47
Figure 30 Blocked chute with coarse material at 8600 tIh 47
Figure 31 Damaged side skirt 49
Figure 32 View behind the chute of the receiving conveyor before loading 50
Figure 33 View behind the chute of the receiving conveyor during loading 50
Figure 34 Peak surges experienced during reclaiming operations 52
Figure 35 Stockyard head end layout 59
Figure 36 Dimensional constraints on the existing transfer configuration 60
Figure 37 Hood and spoon configuration for the 90deg transfer 63
Figure 38 Hood velocity profile 65
Figure 39 Spoon velocity profile 66
Figure 40 Chute cross section 67
Fig ure 43 Honeycomb wear box positioning 69
Figure 44 Wear box in the hood section 70
Figure 45 Spacing arrangement of honeycomb ribs inside the hood 71
Figure 46 Wear box in the spoon section 72
Figure 47 Liner detail of the spoon honeycomb wear box 73
Figure 41 Spoon in the operational position 74
Figure 42 Spoon in the non operational position 75
Figure 48 Flow analysis examples a) separation and screening b) hoppers
feeders [36J 80
Figure 49 Simulations results from Fluenttrade [4OJ 83
Figure 50 Simulation results from Bulk Flow Analysttrade [41J83
Figure 51 Determination of material properties for an accurate angle of repose88
Figure Actual material flow with coarse Sat 10 000 tIh 89
Figure 53 Material flow pattem through the existing chute 90
Figure 54 Cross sectional side view of material flow through the existing chute91
Figure 55 Material flow through hood at 10 000 tlh 92
Figure 56 Material flow through spoon at 10 000 tlh 93
Figure 57 Determination of the optimum hood location 94
The optimisation of transfer chutes in the bulk materials industry
MN van Aarde
x
OF FIGURES
Figure 58 Material behaviour through hood 96
Figure 59 Material behaviour through spoon 96
The optimisation of transfer chutes in the bulk materials industry
MN van Aarde
xi
LIST OF TABLES
LIST OF TABLES
Table 1 Design Input Reference Requirements [24J 24
Table 2 Iron are grades used for chute test work 45
Table 3 Results from test programme 54
The optimisation of transfer chutes in the bulk materials industry
M N van Aarde
xii
---------------------------------
CV
NOMENCLATURE
NOMENCLATURE
SCADA
CCTV
CEMA
DEM
kPa
mm
MSHA
ms
mt
MW
NIOSH
OSHA
RampD
tlh
3D
Supervisory Control And Data Acquisition
Closed Circuit Television
Conveyor Equipment Manufacturers Association
Conveyor
Discrete Element Method
Kilopascal
Millimetres
Mine Safety and Health Administration
Metres per second
Metric Tons
Megawatt
National Institute for Occupational Safety and Health
Occupational Safety and Health Administration
Radius of curvature
Research and Development
Tons per hour
Three Dimensional
The optimisation of transfer chutes in the bulk materials industry
MN van Aarde
xiii
CHAPTER 1
CHAPTER 1 INTRODUCTION TO TRANSFER CHUTES IN THE BULK
MATERIALS HANDLING INDUSTRY
The optimisation of transfer chutes in the bulk materials industry
MN van Aarde
1
CHAPTER 1
11 INTRODUCTION TO TRANSFER CHUTES
111 Bulk material handling industry
In order to comprehend the utilisation of transfer chutes fully it is imperative to
first understand the industry in which it is used Transfer chutes are most
commonly used in the bulk materials handling industry Bulk materials handling
operations perform a key function in a great number and variety of industries
throughout the world as stated in 1978 by Arnold McLean and Roberts [1 J
The nature of materials handling and scale of industrial operation varies from
industry to industry and country to country These variations are based on the
industrial and economic capacity and requirements of the specific industry or
country Regardless of the variations in industry the relative costs of storing
handling and transporting bulk materials are in the majority of cases very
significant
o
Figure 1 Growth in global crude steel production from 1996 to 2006 [2J
The optimisation of transfer chutes in the bulk materials industry
MN van Aarde
2
CHAPTER 1
The chart from BHP Billiton shown in Figure 1 provides a clear indication of the
actual drivers of global materials demand Figure 1 indicates the percentage
growth in crude steel production from all the major role players between 1996
and 2006 China accounted for 65 of the 494 million tonnes of global steel
production growth between 1996 and 2006 Europe grew by 6 while the other
countries grew by 20 [2]
These figures emphasise that bulk materials handling performs a key function in
the global industry and economy [1] Because of market requirements new
products continuously evolve This is also true for the field of bulk conveying
technologies [3] It can be assumed that the evolution of new technology is due
to the requirement for more efficient and cost effective operation
The case study which will be discussed from Chapter 3 onwards is an iron ore
export facility This facility exports approximately 50 million tonnes per annum
With each hour of down time the financial losses equate to approximately
R750 000 This highlights the fact that handling systems should be designed and
operated with a view to achieving maximum efficiency and reliability
112 Function of transfer chutes
BS2890 (Specification for Troughed Belt Conveyors) gives the definition for
transfer chutes as follows A straight curved or spiral open topped or enclosed
smooth trough by which materials are directed and lowered by gravity [4] For
any belt conveyor system to operate successfully the system requires that [5]
bull the conveyor belt be loaded properly
bull the material transported by the conveyor is discharged properly
The transfer of bulk material can either be from a belt bin hopper feeder or
stockpile and occurs at a transfer point In most cases this transfer point requires
optimisation of transfer chutes in the bulk materials industry
MN van Aarde
3
CHAPTER 1 - ----~--~--------------~--------
a transfer chute [5] In industry the most common use of transfer chutes is for
transferring bulk material from one conveyor belt to another This transfer of
material can be done in any direction as simplistically explained in Figure 2 and
Figure 3
Figure 2 Typical in-line transfer point [6J
Figure 2 shows a basic in-line transfer of material from the end of one conveyor
belt onto the start of another conveyor belt Figure 3 illustrates a more intricate
design where the direction of material transport is changed by an angle of 90 0 bull
This design or any other design entailing a directional change in flow normally
requires more detailed engineering [7
The optimisation of transfer chutes in the bulk materials industry
MN van Aarde
4
CHAPTER 1
Regardless of the direction or type of transfer there are some design
requirements that always need special attention Some of these requirements
are reduced wear on chute liners correct discharge velocity minimum material
degradation and minimum belt abrasion The correct design will also eliminate
blockages shape the load correctly and minimise the creation of dust [7]
12 VARIOUS APPLICATIONS AND CONFIGURATIONS OF TRANSFER CHUTES
The application of transfer chutes is central to any operation in the bulk handling
industry Whether it is mining operations storing stacking importing or
exporting of bulk material the transfer of material is always required On the
mining side the challenges involved with materials handling are probably some of
the most extreme
This is due to the great variation in lump sizes that must be catered for At
Sishen iron ore mine seven iron ore products are produced conforming to
different chemical and physical specifications The current mining process at
Sishen entails [8]
bull Removal of topsoil and stockpiling
bull Drilling and blasting of ore
bull Loading of iron ore and transporting to the crushers
bull Crushing and screening into size fractions
bull Beneficiation of all size fractions
bull Stockpiling onto various product beds
The processes with the most intricate and complex chute arrangements are
probably crushing and screening as well as stacking and reclaiming of material
The optimisation of transfer chutes in the bulk materials industry
11 N van Aarde
5
CHAPTER 1
121 Crushing
An excavator or wheeled loader transfers the rock to be crushed into the feed
hopper of the primary crusher The primary crusher breaks the large rock
boulders or run of mine material into smaller grain sizes Some of the bigger
crushers in the industry can crack boulders that are about one cubic meter in
size All the crushed material passes over a screen to separate the different
lump sizes The material that falls through the screen is transferred via a series
of transfer chutes and conveyor belts to the stockpile area [9]
Where the material does not pass through the screen another system of transfer
chutes and conveyor belts transfers this material to a secondary crusher The
material is fed into this crusher via a transfer chute from the discharge of a
conveyor belt All the processed material is then transferred to the stockpile area
via a separate series of transfer chutes and conveyor systems [9] Throughout
this whole process the material lump size changes and with it the transfer chute
requirements
Figure 4 Material lump sizes through a crushing plant
The optimisation of transfer chutes in the bulk materials industry
MN van Aarde
6
CHAPTER 1
Figure 4 shows some spillage from a conveyor between a primary and secondary
crusher The shovel in the picture provides a good reference as to the variation
in material lump size on the walkway
122 Stacking and Recaiming
Normally the stockyard area has an elongated yard conveyor for moving bulk
material in the longitudinal direction of the stockyard Straddling the yard
conveyor transversely is the rail mounted undercarriage of the stacker reclaimer
Three main chutes transfer material through the machine [10] Figure 5 shows
this machine in action while reclaiming material from a stockpile
Figure 5 Stacker Reclaimer in reclaiming mode
The first chute will transfer material to the incline conveyor of the machine when
the material has to be stacked on the stockpile In the case where the material
must bypass the machine this chute will transfer material from the tripper back
onto the yard conveyor [10]
The optimisation of transfer chutes in the bulk materials industry
MN van Aarde
7
CHAPTER 1
The second chute transfers material from the incline conveyor onto the boom
conveyor This is normally a difficult process because the boom conveyor is
never in the same direction as the incline conveyor From the end of the boom
conveyor the material is Simply discharged onto the stockpile [10]
When reclaiming stockpile material the bucket whee at the head end of the
boom conveyor scoops up material and deposits it back onto the boom conveyor
From here it is discharged into the centre chute of the machine This chute then
discharges the material onto the yard conveyor for further processing In some
cases the bottom section of this centre chute must be moved out of the way to
allow free passage of material discharged from the tripper chute onto the yard
conveyor [10]
123 Chute configurations
Various chute configurations are used in the bulk materials handling industry
These configurations depend on the specific requirements of the system layout
or material properties There are basically two main configurations consisting of
dead box chutes and dynamic chutes Both of these configurations have their
specific applications in industry The major difference is that dead box chutes
use the material being transferred as a chute liner whereas dynamic chutes are
lined with a high wear resistant material A combination of both can also be
used
If the material being transferred is relatively dry such as goid ore dead boxes
prove to be more beneficial One of the applications of a ded box is to absorb
the direct impact of material discharged from a conveyor into a head chute as
can be seen in Figure 6 Other applications are in long or high transfer points In
these transfers the momentum of falling material must be reduced before
reaching the receiving conveyor belt in order to reduce wear of the belt [11]
The optimisation of transfer chutes in the bulk materials industry
MN van Aarde
8
CHAPTER 1
Figure 6 Typical dead box [11]
As shown in Figure 7 dead boxes are also used to accomplish changes in the
vertical flow direction by inserting angled panels This configuration where dead
boxes are used as deflection plates or impact wear plates is known as a cascade
chute In this case the deflection plate or the impact wear plate hardness is
equal to that of the feed material [11]
Figure 7 Typical cascade chute [11]
The hood and spoon chute or dynamic chute is configured so that the hood
catches and changes the material trajectory path to exit with a vertical velocity
When the material impacts the spoon it slides down the smooth spoon surface
The material flow direction is changed to the direction of the receiving conveyor
as shown in Figure 8 [12]
The optimisation of transfer chutes in the bulk materials industry
MN van Aarde
9
CHAPTER 1
Figure 8 Typical dynamic chute [12J
Ancillary equipment used with this configuration of chutes is radial doors and
flopper gates Radial doors are used successfully below ore passes or silos for
an onoff feed control as shown by Figure 9 One drawback of radial doors is the
possibility of jamming while closing In order to counteract this problem a
knocker arm between the cylinder door and the rod can be added This helps to
close the door with full force open with reduced force or hammered open [11]
Figure 9 Radial door used in chutes under ore passes or silos [11J
The optimisation of transfer chutes in the bulk materials industry
MN van Aarde
10
CHAPTER 1
The function of a f10pper gate is to divert the flow of material in a chute when one
conveyor is required to feed either of two discharge points as shown in Figure 10
For this same purpose a diverter car can also be used where a section of the
chute moves in and out of the path of material flow The critical area in the
design of a flop per gate is the hinge point In order for the gate to be self
cleaning the hinge point should be placed above the apex of the double chute
This also prevents rock traps that can jam the gate [11]
COVERED
Figure 10 Flopper gate diverling material to different receiving conveyors [11J
13 RECURRING CHUTE PROBLEMS AND COUNTERMEASURES FROM INDUSTRY
Transfer chutes are a fundamental link when conveying ore and therefore it is
important to get it right at the outset of design and fabrication Design and
fabrication issues can cause numerous problems when transferring material
Historically conveyor system design focused on the systems overall structural
integrity while ensuring that the equipment would fit within the facilitys
constraints [13] [14] [15]
The optimisation of transfer chutes in the bulk materials industry
MN van Aarde
11
CHAPTER 1
Little attention was given to design analysis or consideration for material flow
characteristics Normally the solution for controlling flow was to implement
simple rock boxes [15] This type of chute configuration is still commonly used in
industry but with more emphasis on the flow of material The most recurrent
problems on transfer chutes are [13] [14]
bull Spillage
bull Blocked chutes
bull High wear on the receiving belt due to major differences between the
material velocity and the belt velocity
bull Rapid chute wear
bull Degradation of the material being transferred
bull Excessive generation of dust and noise
bull Miss tracking of the receiving conveyor belt due to skew loading from the
transfer chute
Figure 11 Chute liner degradation
Figure 11 shows the excessive wear on ceramic tiles where the material
trajectory from the feeding belt impacts the chute These tiles are replaceable
and a maintenance schedule normally specifies the replacement intervals A
The optimisation of transfer chutes in the bulk materials industry 12
MN van Aarde
CHAPTER 1
problem arises when the frequency of these maintenance intervals is too high
due to excessive wear on the liners
Figure 12 Results of continuous belt wear at transfer points
The conveyor belt can account for up to 60 of the capital cost of a bulk
materials handling plant This means that the cost implications of constant
replacement of a conveyor belt due to wear can become significantly higher
than the original capital investment [16] Figure 12 shows the extreme damage
on a conveyor belt caused by abrasion and gouging
Figure 13 Dust from a transfer point onto a stockpile
The optimisation of transfer chutes in the bulk materials industry
MN van Aarde
13
CHAPTER 1 --~ ---------------------------shy
The presence of dust is an indisputable fact in many industries concerned with
the handling or processing of products such as coal mineral ores and many
others [17] As in the case of spillage it is easy to identify transfer systems that
cause dust clouds Environmental regulations are in place to prevent excessive I
dust emissions
Government organisations such as the Occupational Safety and Health
Administration (OSHA) the Mine Safety and Health Administration (MSHA) and
the National Institute for Occupational Safety and Health (NIOSH) closely monitor
dust levels at all coal handling facilities [13] Therefore it is imperative that the
chute design process caters for limiting dust emissions
Systems normally used in industry are enclosed skirting systems bag houses
and dust collectors This however is only treating the symptom rather than
eliminating the primary cause In order to minimise dust generation the use of
low impact angles and minimal chute contact is required (14] One of the most
successful methods of controlling dust is atomised water spray systems using a
combination of high pressure water and chemical substances
Over the years considerable research has gone into minimising wear on transfer
chutes There are currently a few different liner types to choose from depending
on the configuration and application of the chute These include ceramic tiles
chrome carbide overlay materials and typi~al hardened steel plates such as
VRN A combination of liner materials can also be used similar to the one
shown in Figure 14
The opUmisation of transfer chutes in the bulk materials industry
MN van Aarde
14
CHAPTER 1
Figure 14 Ceramic composite liners [18J
This ceramic composite liner is an example of the new technology available in
chute lining materials It is a high wear resistant surface made from cylindrical
alumina ceramic pellets bound within a resilient rubber base The purpose of this
material is to provide wear resistance through the use of ceramics while the
rubber dampens the impact forces [18]
Some innovative concepts for chute design have been implemented since the
materials handling industry started to incorporate new ideas Benetech Inc
installed a new generation hood and spoon type chute at Dominions 1200 MW
Kincaid coal powered generating station as shown in Figure 15 This chute
replaced the conventional dead box chute [19] Their innovation is to use a pipe
configuration combined with the hood and spoon concept
The optimisation of transfer chutes in the bulk materials industry
MN van Aarde
15
CHAPTER 1
Figure 15 Benetech Inteliflow J-Gide transfer chute [19J
This chute has sufficient chute wall slope and cross sectional area to prevent
material build-up and blocked chutes Reduced collision forces in the chute
minimize material degradation and the creation of excessive dust The material
velocity in the chute is controlled by the wall angles to obtain a discharge velocity
with the same horizontal component as the belt velocity [19] Figure 16 shows a
flow simulation of the Benetech concept The simulation shows that this concept
will result in lower impact forces and reduce belt abrasion
The optimisation of transfer chutes in the bulk materials industry
MN van Aarde
16
CHAPTER 1
Figure 16 Flow simulation ofthe Benetech Ineliflo chute [19J
CBP Engineering Corp also considers the concept of pipe type sections to be
the answer to most of the transfer chute problems They describe it as a curved
or half round chute The modern perception is to gently guide the material in the
required direction rather than use a square box design or deflector doors which
turns or deflects the flow [20]
The industry is striving towards developing new technology in transfer chute
design One solution is to incorporate soft loading transfer chutes to alter the
material flow direction with minimum impact on the side walls of chute and
receiving conveyor As experienced by many industries these types of chutes
can transfer material onto the receiving conveyor at almost the same velocity as
the conveyor By doing so many of the problems with material transfer can be
eliminated [13]
Most of these solutions as proposed by industry only address a few of the
numerous problems experienced with transfer chutes The dynamic hood and
The optimisation of transfer chutes in the bulk materials industry
MN van Aarde
17
CHAPTER 1
spoon chute appears to afford the best opportunity for solving most of the
problems There are still however many unanswered questions surrounding this
design
Figure 11 shows the installation of a hood type chute in the iron ore industry It is
clear from this image that liner wear in the higher impact areas is still an area of
concern Improvements can still be made to this design in order to further
enhance its performance
14 PURPOSE OF THIS RESEARCH
The bulk materials handling industry is constantly facing the challenge of
implementing transfer chutes that satisfy all the system requirements Problems
such as high wear spillage blockages and the control of material flow are just
some of the major challenges faced by the industry
The objective of this research is to identify problems experienced with transfer
chutes of an existing bulk handling system and to apply current design solutions
in eliminating these problems In doing so the research aims to introduce a new
method of minimising liner wear caused by high impact velocities
Dynamic chutes are discussed in particular where the entire design process
addresses the problems identified on chutes in brown field projects Approaching
chute design from a maintenance point of view with the focus on reducing liner I
degradation will provide a fresh approach to transfer chute design The
concepts disc~ssed in this dissertation (dynamic and dead box chutes) are
commonly used in industry However some research is done to determine
whether a combination of these concepts can solve some of the problems
experienced by industry
The optimisation of transfer chutes in the bulk materials industry 18
MN van Aarde
CHAPTER 1
At the hand of all the information provided in this dissertation its purpose is to
enable the chute designers to better understand the process of chute
optimisation and design This is achieved through the discussion of a case study
where the chutes are evaluated and re-designed to achieve the desired
performance
15 SYNOPSIS OF THIS DISSERTATION
Chapter 1 gives an introduction to the bulk materials industry and the role that
transfer chutes plays in this industry Some of the problems that the industries
have been experiencing with transfer chutes were identified and the diverse
solutions to these problems discussed These solutions were reviewed to
identify whether improvement would be possible
Chapter 2 provides a better understanding of the functionality and the
conceptualisation of transfer chutes as well as investigating the theory behind
material flow through transfer chutes This theory reviews the research and
design objectives used as a guideline when approaching a new chute
configuration The guidelines for evaluating and designing transfer chutes are
used to verify the performance of these chutes in the iron ore industry
Chapter 3 identifies some practical problems experienced on transfer chutes a~
an existing bulk transfer facility These problems are identified through a series
of tests where the actual flow inside the chutes is monitored via CCTV cameras
The results obtained from these tests are specific to this facility but can provide
insight into the cause of some problems generally experienced in the industry
These results can provide helpful information when modifying or re-designing
new transfer chutes
Chapter 4 uses the theory discussed in Chapter 2 to conceptualise a new
transfer chute configuration for the transfer points that were tested All the facility
The optimisation of transfer chutes in the bulk materials industry 19
MN van Aarde
CHAPTER 1
constraints are taken into account during the process in order to obtain an
optimum solution to the problems identified during the chute test work The old
chutes did not have major problems with liner wear due to large dead boxes
However this remains a serious consideration for the new dynamic chute design
due to its configuration where there is continuous sliding abrasion of the chute
surface A new concept for the reduction of liner degradation is introduced in this
chapter
Before manufacturing and installing this new concept it is important to verify that
it will perform according to conceptual design Chapter 5 is a discussion on the
use of the Discrete Element Method as a verification tool A simulation of the
new transfer chute concept is done to visualise the behaviour of the material as it
passes through the new transfer chute configuration
Chapter 6 discusses the benefits of the new transfer chute configuration A
conclusion is made as to what the financial implications will be with the
implementation of this new concept Recommendations are made for future
studies in the field of bulk materials handling These recommendations focus on
the optimisation of processes and the reduction of maintenance cost to the
facility
The optimisation of transfer chutes in the bulk materials industry
MN van Aarde
20
CHAPTER 2
CHAPTER 2 BASIC CONSIDERATIONS IN CHUTE DESIGN
The optimisation of transfer chutes in the bulk materials industry
MN van Aarde
21
CHAPTER 2
21 PREFACE
In an economic driven world the pressure for production is often the cause of the
loss of production This is a bold statement and is more factual than what the
industry would like to admit This is also valid in the bulk materials handling
industry Production targets seldom allow time for investigation into the root
cause of the problems The quick fix option is often adopted but is frequently the
cause of even more maintenance stoppages
Existing chutes on brown field projects often fail due to an initial disregard for the
design criteria changes in the system parameters or lack of maintenance
These transfer points are often repaired on site by adding or removing platework
and ignoring the secondary functions of a transfer chute Therefore it is
imperative to always consider the basic chute specifications when addressing a
material transfer problem [21]
22 DESIGN OBJECTIVES
In the quest to improve or design any transfer point some ground rules must be
set This can be seen as a check list when evaluating an existing chute or
designing a new chute Transfer chutes should aim to meet the following
requirements as far as possible [21] [22] [23]
bull Ensure that the required capacity can be obtained with no risk of blockage
bull Eliminate spillage
bull Minimise wear on all components and provide the optimal value life cycle
solution
bull Minimise degradation of material and generation of excessive dust
bull Accommodate and transfer primary and secondary scraper dribblings onto
the receiving conveyor
The optimisation of transfer chutes in the bulk materials industry
MN van Aarde
22
CHAPTER 2
bull Ensure that any differences between the flow of fine and coarse grades are
catered for
bull Transfer material onto the receiving conveyor so that at the feed point onto
the conveyor
bull the component of the material now (parallel to the receiving conveydr) is as
close as possible to the belt velocity (at least within 10) to minimise the
power required to accelerate the material and to minimise abrasive wear of
the belt
bull the vertical velocity component of the material flow is as low as possible so
as to minimise wear and damage to the belt as well as to minimise spillage
due to material bouncing off the belt
bull The flow is centralised on the belt and the lateral flow is minimised so as
not to affect belt tracking and avoid spillage
With the design of a new chute there are up to 46 different design inputs with 19
of these being absolutely critical to the success of the design Some of the most
critical preliminary design considerations are shown in Table 1 [24]
The optimisation of transfer chutes in the bulk materials industry
MN van Aarde
23
CHAPTER 2
Table 1 Design Input Reference Requirements [24J
Aria Unit
Feed Conveyor
Belt Speed r ms
Belt Width mm
JibHead Pulley Dia mm
Pulley Width mm
Angle to Horizontal at the Head Pulley degrees
Belt Troughing Angle degrees
Sight Height Data
Feed Conveyor Top of Belt to Roof mm
Drop Height mm
Receiving Conveyor Top of Belt to Floor mm
Receiving Conveyor
Belt Speed ms
Belt Width mm
Belt Thickness mm
Angle of Intersection degrees
Angle to Horizontal degrees
Belt Troughing Angle degrees
Material Properties
Max Oversize Lump (on top) mm
Max Oversize Lump (on top) degrees
studies done by Jenike and Johanson Inc have identified six design principles
that can serve as a guideline in chute optimisation exercises These six
principles focus on the accelerated flow in the chute which they identified as the
most critical mode [25]
Within accelerated flow the six problem areas identified by Jenike and Johanson
Inc are [25]
The optimisation of transfer chufes in the bulk materials industry
MN van Aarde
24
CHAPTER 2
bull plugging of chutes at the impact points
bull insufficient cross sectional area
bull uncontrolled flow of material
bull excessive wear on chute surfaces
bull excessive generation of dust
bull attrition or breakdown of particles
221 Plugging of chutes
In order to prevent plugging inside the chute the sliding surface inside the chute
must be sufficiently smooth to allow the material to slide and to clean off the most
frictional bulk solid that it handles This philosophy is particularly important
where the material irnpacts on a sliding surface Where material is prone to stick
to a surface the sliding angle increases proportionally to the force with which it
impacts the sliding surface In order to minimise material velocities and excessive
wear the sliding surface angle should not be steeper than required [25]
222 Insufficient cross sectional area
The cross section of the stream of material inside the chute is a function of the
velocity of flow Therefore it is critical to be able to calculate the velocity of the
stream of material particles at any point in the chute From industry experience a
good rule of thumb is that the cross section of the chute should have at least two
thirds of its cross section open at the lowest material velocity [25] When the
materialis at its lowest velocity it takes up a larger cross section of chute than at
higher velocities Therefore this cross section is used as a reference
223 Uncontrolled flow of material
Due to free falling material with high velocities excessive wear on chutes and
conveyor belt surfaces are inevitable Therefore it is more advantageous to
The optimisation of transfer chutes in the bulk materials industry
MN van Aarde
25
CHAPTER 2
have the particles impact the hood as soon as possible with a small impact
angle after discharge from the conveyor With the material flowing against the
sloped chute walls instead of free falling the material velocity can be controlled
more carefully through the chute [25]
224 Excessive wear on chute surfaces
Free flowing abrasive materials do not normally present a large wear problem
The easiest solution to this problem is to introduce rock boxes to facilitate
material on material flow Chute surfaces that are subjected to fast flowing
sticky and abrasive materials are the most difficult to design
A solution to this problem is to keep the impact pressure on the chute surface as
low as possible This is done by designing the chute profile to follow the material
trajectory path as closely as possible By doing so the material is less prone to
stick to the chute surface and the material velocity will keep the chute surface
clean [25]
225 Excessive generation of dust
Material flowing inside a transfer chute causes turbulence in the air and
excessive dust is created In order to minimise the amount of dust the stream of
material must be kept in contact with the chute surface as far as possible The
material stream must be compact and all impact angles against the chute walls
must be minimised A compact stream of material means that the material
particles are flowing tightly together At the chute discharge point the material
velocity must be as close as possible to the velocity of the receiving belt [25]
The optimisation of transfer in the bulk materials industry
M N van Aarde
26
CHAPTER 2
226 Attrition or breakdown of particles
The break up of particles is more likely to occur when large impact forces are
experienced inside a chute than on smooth sliding surfaces Therefore in most
cases the attrition of material particles can be minimised by considering the
following guidelines when designing a transfer chute minimise the material
impact angles concentrate the stream of material keep the material stream in
contact with the chute surface and keep the material velocity constant as far as
possible [25]
23 INTEGRATING A MORE APPROPRIATE CHUTE LAYOUT WITH THE PLANT
CONSTRAINTS
According to Tunra Bulk Solids in Australia the process for design and
commissioning of a new plant basically consists of four steps The entire
process is based on understanding the properties of the material to be
handled [1]
RampD CENTRE CONSULTING CONTRACTOR ENGINEERING AND PLANT
COMPANY OPERATOR r-------------- I TESTING Of CONCEPTUAl I DETAILED DESIGN CONSTRUCTION amp
I BULKSOUDS - DESIGN COMMISSIONING- I shyI Flow Proper1ies Lining Material tuet Equipment
Selection Procurement _ I I
I I
I Flow Pat1erns SSlpment Quality Control I
I IFeeder Loads amp Process Performance
I Power I Optimisation Assessment I I
L J -
I IBin Loads I I I Wear Predictions I
FEEDBACK I I I IModel Studigt L _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ J
i ~ FEEDBACK r-shyFigure 17 Four step process for plant design and commissioning [1J
The optimisation of transfer chutes in the bulk materials industry
MN van Aarde
27
CHAPTER 2
Figure 17 illustrates this four step process These steps are a good guideline in
order to incorporate a more appropriate chute layout for the plant constraints
This is an iterative process where all the possible solutions to a problem are
measured against all the possible plant constraints This section focuses more
on the second column of Figure 17 and specifically on structures and equipment
During this stage of design the utilisation of 3D parametric modelling also creates
an intimate and very accurate communication between the designer and the
project engineer or client This effective communication tool will save time and
improve the engineering process [24]
A good example of obtaining an appropriate chute layout for the plant constraints
can be explained as follows On an existing plant a transfer point will have a
specific transfer height from the top of the feed conveyor to the top of the
receiving conveyor If the feed conveyor has an incline section to obtain the
required transfer height it will also have a curve in the vertical plane of that
incline section This curve has a certain minimum radius in order to keep the belt
on the idlers at high belt tensions [26]
Figure 18 Vertical curve on incline conveyor
The optimisation of transfer chutes in the bulk materials industry
MN van Aarde
28
CHAPTER 2
If the transfer height at a transfer point is changed the path of the feeding
conveyor should always be taken into consideration With an increase in transfer
height the vertical curve radius will increase as well in order to prevent the
conveyor from lifting off the idlers in the curve This will require expensive
modifications to conveyor structures and therefore in most cases be a pointless
exercise Figure 18 shows clearly the large radius required to obtain a vertical
curve in a belt conveyor
Other considerations on brown field projects might be lift off of the receiving
conveyor at start up before or after the vertical curve This is caused by peaks
in belt tension at start up which may cause the belt to lift off the idlers and chafe
against the chute In some cases this can be solved by fitting a roller as shown
in Figure 19 to the underside of the chute to protect it from being damaged by
the belt or to protect the belt from being damaged by the chute The position of
this specific chute is just after a vertical curve where the belt tends to lift off at
start up
Figure 19 Protective roller on a transfer chute
The optimisation of transfer chutes in the bulk materials industry
MN van Aarde
29
CHAPTER 2
24 INVESTIGATING THE CORRECT CHUTE PROFILE FOR REDUCED LINER WEAR
In order to reduce chute wear the curved-profile variable chute concept is
introduced [27] This concept was originally developed by Professor Roberts for
the grain industry in 1969 [28] After many years of research and investigation
CMR Engineers and Project managers (pty) Ltd came to the following
conclusion any improvement in coal degradation dust generation and chute
wear can only be achieved by avoiding high impact forces or reducing them as
much as possible [27]
At any impact point of material in a chute or conveyor kinetic energy is
dissipated This increases material degradation and wear on liners and conveyor
belt covers Therefore it is good practise to redirect the kinetic energy in a
useful manner This action will help to reduce liner and belt wear [32]
x
Vo
- ImpactPlate
Figure 20 Geometry of the impact plate and material trajectory [30J
The optimisation of transfer chutes n the bulk materials industry
MN van Aarde
30
CHAPTER 2
The path followed by the material discharged over the end pulley of a belt
conveyor is known as its trajectory and is a function of the discharge velocity of
the material from the conveyor [29] Figure 20 shows the material trajectory as
weI as the radius and location of the impact plate In the case of dynamic chutes
this impact plate represents the back plate of the chute
The correct chute profile to reduce wear must cater for the proper location of the
chute covers and wearing plates This location depends upon the path of the
trajectory which must be predicted as accurately as possible
Figure 21 Mode for the impact of a particle on a flat surface [29]
Figure 21 illustrates a material particle impinging on a flat chute surface at an
angle of approach 91 and with approach velocity V1 This particle will then
rebound off the chute plate at an angel 92 and velocity V2 The wear on the
chute liners or the surface shown in Figure 21 will be a function of the vector
change in momentum of the particle One component will be normal to and the
other component parallel to the flat surface The parallel component is referred
to as the scouring component along the surface [29]
It is important to determine the radius of curvature of material within the
trajectory It is now a simple exercise to determine the chute hood radius
depending on plant constraints Firstly the material trajectory must be calculated
The optimisation of transfer chutes in the bulk materials industry
MN van Aarde
31
CHAPTER 2 ---~----------------
According to the mechanical handling engineers association in Perth Australia it
is beneficial to keep the impact angle as small as possible Impact angle less
than 20deg are recommended for most liner materials This will ensure an
acceptably small impulse force component normal to the surface The r~te at
which the material is gouging away the chute liner at the impact point will be
reduced [29]
The material trajectory is determined by equation l
(1)
Where the origin of the x and y axis is taken at the mean material height h and
the discharge point on the pulley as shown in Figure 20 The variables involved
in the calculation of the material trajectory are [30]
y =vertical position on the grid where the trajectory is determined
x = position parallel to the receiving belt line where the trajectory is determined
v = material speed
g =gravitational constant
a =inclination angle of the feeding conveyor
After the material leaves the belt a simplified assumption can be made that it
falls under gravity It is quite clear that in order to minimise the impact angle
the impact plate must follow the path of the material trajectory as far as possible
It will almost never be possible to obtain a contact point between the material and
the chute where there is a smooth contact with no impact angle
This radius of curvature of the material tr~jectory is determined as follows [30
The optimisation of transfer chutes in the bulk materials industry i 32
MN van Aarde
CHAPTER 2
[1 + ( gx )]15 R = vcos8
c (2)
vcos8
Where
g == gravitational constant
v == material speed
8 == Angle at discharge
In order to simplify the manufacturing process of a curved chute the radius must
be constant For a relatively smooth contact between the material and the chute
plate the radius of the curved chute at the point of contact is as close as
possible to the material discharge curvature radius [30] This is rarely possible
on brown field projects due to facility constraints In this case there will be higher
probability for rapid liner wear Each situation must be individually assessed to
determine the best solution
Cross sectional dimensions of the transfer chute must be sufficient to collect the
material and ensure continuous flow without causing blockages At the same
time the chute profile must not result in excessive material speed Material
speed inside the chute will be considered to be excessive when it can not be
controlled to exit the chute at approximately the same velocity to that of the
receiving conveyor Chutes may block for the following reasons [29]
bull Mechanical bridging due to large lumps locking into one another
bull Insufficient cross section causing cohesive material to choke or bridge
bull Inadequate chute inclination causing fines build-up
bull Corner effects or cohesion causing material to stick to the chute walls
The optimisation of transfer chutes in the bulk materials industry
MN van Aarde
33
CHAPTER 2
For the handling of large lumps of material field experience has shown that the
chute cross sectional area should be 25 times the major dimension of the largest
lumps To avoid possible bridging of the material in the chute the
recommendation is to make the inner chute volume as large as possible This
will be guided by the support steelwork around the transfer point [29]
Field experience has shown that it is advisable depending on the material being
transferred that the chute inclination angles be no less than 65deg to 700 Cornerbull
effects should also be avoided where material gets stuck in the inner corners of
chute plate work These angles should preferably be no less than 70 0 bull
25 FEED CHUTE GEOMETRY FOR REDUCED BELT WEAR
The design parameters to reduce both chute and belt wear are interrelated
Research done at the Phalaborwa copper mine is a good case study to prove the
concept of a curved chute profile This mine had specific problems with high belt
wear at transfer points At this facility an in-pit 60 x 89 gyratory crusher and
incline tunnel conveyor was commissioned to haul primary crushed ore A
conventional dead box chute transfers ore from the crusher to a 1800 mm wide
incline conveyor [31]
The maximum lump size handled by this section of the facility is 600 mm (60 kg)
An 18 mm thick top cover was specified for this conveyor with an X grade
rubber according to DIN (abrasion value lt 100 mm) This belt had an original
warranty of 10 years After 35 years the top cover started to show signs of
excessive wear and the tensile cords of the 18 mm thick cover were visible [31]
In April 1994 Phalaborwa commissioned the curved chute concept and a new
belt on the incline conveyor Six months after commissioning no gouging or
pitting damage was evident The material velocity through this curved chute onto
the incline conveyor is shown in Figure 22 [31]
The optimisation of transfer chutes in the bulk materials industry
MN van Aarde
34
CHAPTER 2
VELOCITY ( m I aec ) _ nm _ bull m _ 1211 _ UTI _ U16
_ IIU _ Im _ I rn _ 171-111 _ u n _ ~ l
_ 4 ~
_ 41 _ 4
141 CJ UtiI 1bull-bull 1t5
~ 1m bull UI2
Material Flow Velocity Gradient
Figure 22 Ore flow path in the curved chute onto the incline conveyor [31]
TENDENCY TO FORM STAGNANT LAYER LEADING
TO INSTABILITY IN DEPTH OF FLOW
C8middotFLOW IN CURVED CHUTES
Figure 23 Gentle deceleration of the product before impact on the receiving belt [32]
The optimisation of transfer chutes in the bulk materials industry
MN van Aarde
35
CHAPTER 2
Figure 23 illustrates the gentle deceleration of material that is achieved with the
curved chute concept This helps to reduce belt wear because it is relatively
easy to discharge the material at the same velocity as the receiving conveyor
The material speed v can be calculated at any point in the chute using equation
3 and equation 4 [33]
v 2~R [(2ue2 -l)sin(O) +3ue cos(O)] + Ke 2uB (3) 4ue +1
This equation is only applicable if the curved section of the chute has a constant
radius Rand I-Ie is assumed constant at an average value for the stream [33]
I-Ie = friction coefficient
8 = angle between the horizontal and the section of the spoon where the velocity
is determined and
(4)
The optimisation of transfer chutes in the bulk materjas industry
MN van Aarde
36
CHAPTER 2
Mass Flow Rate Omh
Figure 24 Typical feed chute discharge model [33J
The velocity Ve at the discharge of the chute can be determined from equation 3
and equation 4 The components Vey and Vex of the discharge velocity as
shown in Figure 24 can now be calculated This investigation should aid the
optimisation of the chute profile in order to [33]
bull match the horisontal component Vex of the material exit velocity as close
as possible to the belt speed
bull reduce the vertical component Vey of the material exit velocity in order to
minimize abrasive wear on the receiving conveyor
26 CONCLUSION
This section discussed the technical background necessary for the optimisation
of transfer chutes on an existing iron ore plant which will be discussed in
Chapter 4 The focus is specifically aimed at reducing impact wear on chute liner
materials and abrasive wear on receiving conveyor belts Important to note from
The optimisation oftransfer chutes in the bulk materials industry
MN van Aarde
37
CHAPTER 2
this section is the acceptable limits of dynamic chute optimisation or design
These limits aremiddot
bull a material impact angle of less than 20deg
bull a variance of less than 10 between the receiving belt velocity and the
material discharge velocity component parallel to the receiving conveyor
An important aspect of chute optimisation is to consider the facility constraints
These constraints are in some cases flexible but in most cases the chute
optimisation process must be designed within these constraints This means that
any new concept will have to be measured against what is possible within the
facility limits
It is important to note that only the most common transfer chute problems were
mentioned in this chapter Other possible problems were not addressed in this
chapter as it is normally related to detail design issues Solutions to these
problems are unique to each type of chute and will be addressed for the specific
case study in Chapter 4
The optimisafjon of transfer chutes in the bulk materials industry
MN van Aarde
38
CHAPTER 3
The optimisation of transfer chutes in the bulk materials industry
MN van Aarde
CHAPTER 3 TESTS FOR THE IDENTIFICATION OF RECURRING
PROBLEMS ON EXISTING CHUTES
39
CHAPTER 3
31 PREFACE
Since the completion of a certain iron ore handling facility it has been
experiencing recurring material transfer problems at high capacities In order to
investigate the problem it was decided that performance testing of the chutes
should be carried out The purpose of these tests was to monitor chute
performance at transfer rates of up to the design capacity of 10 000 tlh for
various grades of iron ore handled by the facility Some of the methodologies
used in testing are only applicable to this specific facility
Due to variations and surges associated with the reclaim operations at the
facility performance testing focused on reclaim side chutes This means that all
the transfer points at the exit points of the stockyard conveyors were tested
Nineteen tests were conducted on various stockyard transfers Information such
as the specific facility or conveyor numbers cannot be disclosed due to the
confidentiality of information
To analyse SCADA data the stacker reclaimer scale is used to determine the
peak surges passing through the transfer under investigation The reason for
this is that the peaks in flow due to reclaiming operations flatten out when
passing through the transfer points This is due to chute throat limitations and
small variations in belt speeds If the down stream scales are used it would give
an inaccurate indication of the amount of ore that passed through the transfer
chute
32 TEST METHODOLOGY
A CCTV camera was installed in a strategic position inside the head chute of the
stockyard conveyors These cameras provided valuable information on the
physical behaviour of the material flow inside the transfer chutes Where
possible cameras were also placed on the receiving belt in front of and behind
The optimisation of transfer chutes in the bulk materials industry
MN van Aarde
40
CHAPTER 3
the chute This was done to monitor belt tracking and spillage A high frequency
radio link between the head chute and the control tower made it possible to
monitor the cameras at all times
SCADA data was used to determine and establish the condition of the material
transfer at the time of the test Data from various scales en route were obtained
as well as confirmation of blocked chute signals In analysing the SCADA data
the stacker reclaimer scale is used to determine the peak surges passing through
the transfer being tested
Data was recorded from a sampling plant at the facility This data provides the
actual characteristics of representative samples taken and analysed by the
sampling plant during the duration of the test The data gathered consist of
moisture content of the material sample as well as the size distribution of the ore
Where possible an inspector was placed at the transfer point being tested to
observe and record the performance The inspector had a two way radio for
communication with the test co-ordinator in the central control room He would
also be responsible for the monitoring of any spillage dust emissions etc that
may not be picked up by the cameras
Prior to commencing a test on a specific conveyor route the following checks
had to be performed on all the material conveying equipment
bull Clean out all transfer chutes and remove any material build-up from the
sidewalls
bull Check that feed skirts are properly in position on the belt
bull Check that the conveyor belt is tracking properly at no load
bull Check conveyor idlers are all in position and free to rotate
bull Check blocked chute detectors are operational and in the correct location
The optimisation of transfer chutes in the bulk materials industry
MN van Aarde
CHAPTER 3
bull Change the position of the blocked chute detector if required to improve its
fUnction
bull Test and confirm that the CCTV middotsystems are functioning correctly
bull Assign persons with 2 way radios and cameras to monitor and record the I
results at each transfer point on the route
33 CHUTE PERFORMANCE ACCEPTANCE CRITERIA
A material transfer chute performs to specification if it transfers a maximum of
10 000 tlh of a specific iron are grade without experiencing any of the following
problems
bull Material build up inside the chute or blocking the chute ie material is not
exiting the chute at the same rate as it is entering
bull Material spillage encountered from the top of the transfer chute
bull Material spillage encountered where material is loaded onto the receiving
conveyor
bull Belt tracking of the receiving conveyor is significantly displaced by the
loading of material from the transfer chute onto the conveyor
Tests were conducted over a period of one month and in such a short period
visible wear is difficult to quantify Due to the sensitivity of the information no
historical data in terms of chute or belt wear were made available by the facility
Therefore it is not part of the criteria for these specific tests Should a chute
however fail to perform according to the set criteria it validates the need for
modifications or new designs
34 DISCUSSION OF PROBLEM AREAS
The major concern during the test work is material flow at the transfer points
Secondary concerns are spillage tracking of the receiving belt and material
The optimisation of transfer chutes in the bulk materials industry
MN van Aarde
42
CHAPTER 3
loading onto the receiving belt One of the external factors that playa significant
role in material flow rate is the method and process of reclaiming This section
will highlight all the problem areas observed during the test work
Figure 25 shows the layout of the stockyard area This layout will serve as a
reference when the specific test results at each transfer point are discussed The
legends for Figure 25 are as follows
c=gt Transfer points where performance tests have been done
~ Direction that the conveyors are moving in
CV4 CV3 CV2 CV1
Figure 25 Layout of conveyors for chute test work
All four stockyard conveyors have a moving head arrangement This means that
the chutes are split up into two sections A moving head discharges material
onto either conveyor (CV) 5 or CV 6 via a static transfer chute The moving
head positions are shown by A Band C in Figure 25
The optimisation of transfer chutes in the bulk materials industry
MN van Aarde
43
CHAPTER 3
Position C is the purging or dump position This position is used when the
stacker reclaimer is in stacking mode and any material left on the stockyard
conveyor gets dumped The material does not end up on the stockpiles
preventing contamination
90 de-g TRANSFBt
OfAO BOX IN MOVING HEAD
Figure 26 Configuration of the existing transfer chute
Figure 26 shows the configuration of the existing transfer chutes These chutes
capture the trajectory from the head pulley in a dead box situated in the top part
of the chute The material then cascades down a series of smaller dead boxes
onto the receiving conveyor below
Various grades of iron ore were tested during the testing period These different
grades of iron ore are shown in Table 2 Three fine grades and four coarse
grades were used The coarse material is defined as particles with a diameter of
The optimisation of transfer chutes in the bulk materials industry
MN van Aarde
44
CHAPTER 3
between 12 mm and 34 mm and the fine material with diameters of between
4 mm and 12 mm
Table 2 Iron are grades used for chute test work
Material Predominant Lump Size
Fine K 5mm
Fine N 8mm
Fine A 8mm
Coarse K 25mm
Coarse D 34mm
Coarse S 12 mm
Coarse A 20mm
The CCTV cameras were placed inside the moving head pointing down into the
static chute overlooking the receiving conveyor Figure 27 shows the camera
angle used during testing This is a view of a clear chute before testing The
legends for clarification of all the video images are as follows
Front of the chute throat opening
Top of flowing material at the chute throat opening
Flow pattern of the material
Direction of the receiving belt
The optimisation of transfer chutes in the bulk materials industry
MN van Aarde
45
CHAPTER 3
Figure 27 Clear chute indicating camera angle
341 Coarse Material vs Fine Material
Differences in transfer rates between coarse material and fine material are
evident from the data gathered during the test programme These results are
discussed later in this chapter The area between the yellow arrows and the red
line is the amount of freeboard available Freeboard is the open space available
between the top of the flowing stream of material and the chute plate work
Figure 28 and Figure 29 shows the flow of coarse ore and fine ore respectively in
the same chute at 8 000 tlh
Figure 28 Coarse material at 8 000 tlh
The optimisation of transfer chutes in the bulk materials industry
MN van Aarde
46
CHAPTER 3
Figure 29 Fine material at 8 000 tlh
The amount of freeboard with fine material is much larger than with coarse
material It is therefore obvious that coarse material is more likely to block a
chute when peak surges occur This is due to particles that interlock in the small
discharge opening of the chute
Figure 30 Blocked chute with coarse material at 8 600 tIh
Figure 30 is a snap shot of a chute blocked with coarse ore due to the material
interlocking at the discharge opening The time from material free flowing to a
blocked chute signal was approximately 10 seconds This is determined by
comparing the CCTV camera time to the blocked signal time on the SCADA
The optimisation of transfer chutes in the bulk materials industry
MN van Aarde
47
CHAPTER 3
The high clay content in finer material can also cause problems in the long run
When wet Anes are fed through the chutes a thin layer of Anes builds up and
sticks to the sides of the chute As this layer dries out it forms a new chute liner i
and the next layer builds up This process occurs gradually and will eventually
cause the chute to block
342 Cross Sectional Area
Video images of a blocked chute on the receiving belts were analysed to
determine whether the blockage was caused by material build up on the belt
underneath the chute This indicated that with the occurrence of a blocked chute
the material keeps flowing out of the chute at a constant rate without build up
From this the assumption can be made that in the case of a blocked chute the
material enters the chute at a higher rate than it is discharged at the bottom
Therefore the conclusion can be made that the chute cross sectional area at the
discharge is insufficient to handle the volume of ore at high throughput rates
Tests with a certain type of coarse material yielded a very low flow rate requiring
adjustment to the chute choke plate on the transfer between CV 3 and CV 5
The chute choke plate is basically a sliding door at the bottom of the chute to
adjust the discharge flow of material Tests with another type of coarse material
shown in the summary of test results indicates how the choke plate adjustment
can increase the throughput of material in the chute
Data of all the different types of ore at the facility are obtained at the sampling
building This data shows that the material size distribution for the two types of
coarse material used in the tests mentioned above are the same This indicates
that the test results with the second coarse material are an accurate reflection of
what will be experienced with the first type of coarse material Special care
The optimisation of transfer chutes in the bulk materials industry
MN van Aarde
48
CHAPTER 3
should be taken when adjusting the choke plate to make sure that skew loading
is not induced by the modification
343 Spillag3
During one of the first tests on the transfer between CV 2 and CV 6 spillage
was observed at one of the side skirts on the receiving belt A piece of the side
skirt had been damaged and pushed off the belt as shown by Figure 31 This
caused some of the material to be pushed off the belt when skew loading from
the chute caused the belt to miss track In this case spillage was not caused by
the skirt but by skew loading from the chute onto the receiving conveyor
Figure 31 Damaged side skirt
A greater concern is spillage on the moving head chute of CV 3 and CV 4
loading onto CV 6 It appears as if the head chute creeps during material
transfer onto CV 6 As the chute creeps the horizontal gap between the
moving head chute and the transfer chute reaches approximately 180 mm
Facility operations proposed a temporary solution by moving the head chute to
the dumping or purging position and back to CV 5 before stopping over CV 6
The reason for this creep could be attributed to slack in the moving head winch
cable
The optimisation of transfer chutes in the bulk materials industry
MN van Aarde
49
CHAPTER 3
345 Belt Tracking and Material Loading
The only belt tracking and material loading problems observed occurred on the
transfer between CV 2 and CV 5 I CV 6 A diverter plate was installed at the
bottom of the chute in order to force material flow onto the centre of the receiving conveyor belt This plate now causes material to fall to the left of the receiving
belt causing the belt to track to the right
Figure 32 View behind the chute of the receiving conveyor before loading
Figure 32 shows the view from a CCTV camera placed over the receiving
conveyor behind the chute Note the amount of the idler roller that is visible
before loading
Figure 33 View behind the chute of the receiving conveyor during loading
The optimisation of transfer chutes in the bulk materials industry
MN van Aarde
50
CHAPTER 3
Figure 33 shows the view from a CCTV camera placed over the receiving
conveyor behind the chute during loading Note the difference between the
amount of the idler roller that is visible between Figure 33 and Figure 32 This is
a clear indication of off centre belt tracking due to skew loading I
At the same transfer point it appears as if the configuration of the chute causes
the material to be dropped directly onto the receiving belt from the dead box in
the moving head This will cause high impact wear on the belt in the long run
High maintenance frequencies will be required on the impact rollers underneath
the chute and the roller bearings will have to be replaced frequently
346 Reclaiming Operations
Reclaim operations are done from the stacker reclaimer that scoops up the
material with a bucket wheel from the stockpile The machine starts at the top
bench of the stockpile and reclaims sideways until it is through the stockpile
This sideways movement is repeated while the machine moves down the
stockpile If the machine digs too deep into the stockpile small avalanches can
occur that over fill the buckets This causes peak surges in the flow on the
conveyor system
With an increase in the peak digging or reclaim rate as requested for test work it
seemed that the peak surges increased as well In normal reclaiming operations
(average reclaim rate of 6 000 tlh to 7000 tlh) the peaks in reclaim surges do not
usually exceed 1 000 tlh This is however dependent on the level of the
stockpile from where the machine is reclaiming
At a peak digging or reclaim rate of 8 000 tlh peak surges of up to 2 000 tlh were
observed as can be seen from Figure 34 All stacker reclaimers are operated
manually and the depth of the bucket wheel is determined by monitoring the
The optimisation of transfer chutes in the bulk materials industry
MN van Aarde
51
CHAPTER 3
reclaimer boom scale reading (yellow line) This makes it difficult to reclaim at a
constant rate
The reason for the high peak surges is due to avalanches on the stockpile
caused by reclaiming on the lower benches without first taking away the top
material The blue line in Figure 34 represents a conveyor scale reading after
the material has passed through a series of transfer chutes It is clear that the
peaks tend to dissipate over time as the peaks on the blue line are lower and
smoother than that on the yellow line
IlmJ
bull I _ bull It bull bull bull bull
--ErI--E--~---h--E=+[J]--EiE ~ J~~~ middot middot -~L I-~f~1-1shyt~=tt~~J~~v5 i ~ ~ ~ ~ ~ i ~ 1 ~ ~ ~ s ~ ------ ~-- - ------ - _ - -------- -- -- - _---- -- -r - --- -_shyp
C)
~ 1r =r=l[=1 -It-1 -- -~ -t= --shy~ _middotmiddot -r middotr middot middot [middot _r _ _ r- middotmiddot rmiddot middotmiddot -r- rmiddot-- middot- middotmiddot -rmiddot -r-middotmiddot middotr lXgtO middotmiddotmiddotmiddotmiddotmiddotmiddotmiddot[middotmiddotmiddotmiddotmiddotmiddotmiddotlmiddotmiddotmiddotmiddotmiddotmiddotlmiddotmiddotmiddotmiddotmiddotmiddotmiddotmiddotimiddotmiddotmiddotmiddotmiddotmiddotmiddotmiddotr-middotmiddotmiddotmiddot j middotmiddot1middotmiddotmiddotmiddotmiddot1middotmiddotmiddotmiddotmiddotmiddotmiddot1middotmiddotmiddotmiddotmiddot middotlmiddotmiddotmiddotmiddottmiddotmiddotmiddotmiddotmiddotmiddotmiddotjmiddot I~ [ bullbullbullbullbullbullbull [ bullbullbull middotmiddotmiddot1middotmiddotmiddotmiddotmiddotmiddot1middotmiddotmiddotmiddotmiddotmiddotmiddotmiddot1middotmiddotmiddotmiddotmiddotmiddotmiddotmiddot middotmiddotmiddotmiddotmiddotmiddotmiddotmiddoti~middotmiddotmiddotmiddotmiddotmiddotmiddotmiddottmiddotmiddotmiddotmiddotmiddotmiddotmiddotrmiddotmiddotmiddot middotrmiddotmiddotmiddotmiddotmiddotmiddot~middotmiddotmiddotmiddotmiddotmiddotmiddotmiddot1middotmiddotmiddotmiddotmiddotmiddotmiddotmiddotimiddotmiddotmiddot
t) cent
~ i i l i i i i i i i it ~ 8 ~ ~ S l i
~~ Ii ~ ~ g i i ~ 4 1 J yen i
s a e 11 JI as $ $ ~ IS IS e It
Time
-Con~SCO=-E___S~ SCALE
Figure 34 Peak surges experienced during reclaiming operations
347 Other Problem Areas
Some blockages on other chutes at the facility occurred while testing the
stockyard chutes These blockages are also shown in Table 3 where the test
The optimisation of transfer chutes in the bulk materials industry
MN van Aarde
52
CHAPTER 3
results are discussed and to raise awareness that the bottlenecks on site are not
only caused by problems on the tested chutes
A chute downstream from the stockyards encountered a blockage with fine I
material when the flow rate reached 11 OOb tfh Although this is higher than the
test maximum of 10 000 tfh it still raises concern as to why the chute blocked so
severely that it took approximately two hours to clear
Another bottleneck is the transfer point between the feed conveyor of CV 2 and
the discharge chute on CV 2 This transfer point blocked with fine material at a
peak just below 10 000 tfh It should be even worse with coarse are as
previously discussed Due to the configuration of the head chute spillage of
scraper dribblings is also of great concern The main stream of material
interferes with the flow path of the dribbling material Therefore the carry back
scraped off the bottom of the feeding belt cannot i~ow down the chute and is
pushed over the sides of the chute
The optimisation of transfer chutes in the bulk maferias industry
MN van Aarde
53
CHAPTER 3
35 SUMMARY OF TEST RESULTS
Table 3 Results from test programme
Transfer Point Material Tested Test No Peak Capacity Blocked Chute
CV11 CV5 Yes
Fines N 14 10000 tlh No
Fines N 15 10000tlh No
CV 11 CV6 Coarse K 20 9300 tlh No
Fines K 4 10600tlh No
Fines A 19 9633 tlh No
CV31 CV5 Yes
Yes
Yes
Coarse A 17 9427 tlh No
CV31 CV6 Coarse K 7 10195t1h Yes
Coarse K 8 11 000 tlh Yes
CV41 CV5 Coarse A 16 10307 tlh No
No (Mech trip on
CV4CV6 Fines K 10 10815 tlh downstream conveyor)
Coarse K 11 8000 tlh No
Fines A 18 10328 tlh No
No (Feed to CV 2
CV21 CV5 Fines N 13 10 000 tlh blocked)
CV21 Coarse K 1 amp 2 10 153 tlh No
No (Blocked chute on
Fines K 3 11 000 tlh downstream transfer)
The optimisation of transfer chutes in the bulk materials industry
MN van Aarde
54
CHAPTER 3
Table 3 shows the results obtained from all the tests on the stockyard conveyor
discharge chutes Where possible the same material grade was tested more
than once on the same transfer in order to confirm the repetitiveness of the test
The tests shown in red indicate the transfers that blocked at a flow rate of less
than 10000 tlh
Coarse K and Coarse 0 are noted as the critical materials for blocked chutes
caused by a peak surge Tests with Coarse K and Coarse S where a blocked
chute occurred at just over 10 000 tlh can also be considered as failed tests
This is due to the lack of a safety margin freeboard inside the chute When
analysing the video images a build up can be seen at a flow rate of less than
10000 tlh
Table 3 indicates that the fine material did not cause blocked chutes but it was
seen that it did fill up the chute throat area in some cases Although the coarse
material grades are shown as being least suitable for high flow rates the fine
material should not be underestimated for its ability to cause blockages The
finer materials normally have higher clay contents than the coarse grades and
therefore stick to the chute walls more easily_
36 CONCLUSION
At lower capacities (7 000 tlh to 8 000 tlh) the material appear to flow smoothly
inside the chutes without surging or building up in the chute This flow rate
normally does not cause spillage or skew loading on the receiving conveyor belt
On average as the flow rate approaches 9 000 tlh the material in the chute
throat area starts packing together and finally blocks up the chute
At transfer rates greater than 9 000 tlh the available area inside the chutes is
completely filled up This causes material to build up or surge inside the chute
which eventually results in the chute choking and the inlet flow becomes greater
The optimisation of transfer chutes in the bulk materials industry
MN van Aarde
55
CHAPTER 3
than the outlet flow Depending on the volume of the chute the choked state can
only be maintained for a certain period of time If the inlet flow does not
decrease it will cause a blocked chute
Peak surges of up to 10 000 tfh were recorded in most tests which involved a
material surge inside the chute but without the occurrence of a blocked chute trip
Although no blocked chute signal was given in these cases the ability of the
chutes to transfer continuously at flow rates of between 9 000 tfh and 10 000 tfh
is not very reliable
Continuous transfer at flow rates approaching 9 000 tfh seems attainable in most
cases but due to the limited freeboard available in the chute throat area the
chutes will easily become prone to blocking Due to the high peak surges at an
increased maximum reclaim rate the amount of freeboard is critical If the
design criteria of the chute were intended to accommodate these large surges
then all the chutes failed this test This can be attributed to the fact that no
freeboard is left at a maximum reclaim rate of 9 000 tfh
With the background available from the test programme it is clear that further
investigation is required to obtain a solution to these problems All the
information gathered can be integrated and utilised to provide a solution A
possible solution can then be tested against the problems found with the current
transfer chutes
The optimisation of transfer chutes in the bulk materials industry
MN van Aarde
56
CHAPTER 4
CHAPTER 4 DYNAMIC CHUTES FOR THE ELIMINATION OF
RECURRING PROBLEMS
The optimisation of transfer chutes in the bulk materials industry
MN van Aarde
57
CHAPTER 4
41 PREFACE
After completion of the chute test programme the decision was made to improve
the old transfer configuration by installing a dynamic chute The reason for the
dynamic chute is to increase the material speed and decrease the stream cross
sectional area The dead boxes in the older chute slowed the material down and
the restriction on transfer height resulted in the material not being able to gain
enough speed after impacting on the dead boxes
A dynamic chute configuration is investigated in this chapter As the new chute
is fitted within the existing steelwork there are certain constraints that determine
the new configuration All the constraints and limitations discussed in this section
are specific to the facility under discussion
The new chute design basically consists of a hood and spoon which retains the
kinetic energy in the material stream as it is transferred from one conveyor to the
other This will reduce the creation of dust in the chute and help to discharge the
material at a velocity closer to that of the receiving conveyor The new design
does however experience high wear which was not a problem with the old chutes
due to large dead boxes
In order to fit the optimum design of a dynamic chute within the existing structure
some changes are required to the positioning of the feed conveyor head pulley
These changes are necessary to accommodate the discharge trajectory from the
feeding conveyor
The radii of the hood and spoon are specified in such a way that the impact wear
is reduced significantly In addition both the hood and spoon are fitted with a
removable dead box section in the impact zones The incorporation of these
sections makes this chute revolutionary in the sense of ease of maintenance
The optimisation of transfer chutes in the bulk materials industry
MN van Aarde
58
CHAPTER 4
This new chute addresses all problems identified at the facility and aims to
eliminate most of them
Tests were carried out to identify worst case materials for flow and wear
Different liner materials were tested for both flow and wear conditions The
outcome of these tests is used as the basis for the design of a new chute As
different conditions for flow and wear inside the chute exist different liners are
investigated for each section inside the chute
42 CONSIDERATION OF THE EXISTING TRANSFER POINT CONSTRAINTS
The stockyard consists of four stacker reclaimers and several transfer points
feeding onto the two downstream conveyors resulting in a very intricate system
This system has numerous requirements which need to be addressed when
considering a new transfer chute configuration The transfers under discussion
are situated at the head end of the stockyard conveyors
MOV1NG HEAD OER MOvm poundAD OVER CVI6 CVIS
t4CLIE SECTION
PURGING POSmON
Figure 35 Stockyard head end layout
The design of a new transfer chute configuration is restricted to a certain extent
by the existing structures on site Figure 35 provides an overall view of the
existing steelwork at the head end of the stockyard conveyor This existing steel
structure can be modified to suit a new configuration but does have some fixed
The optimisation of transfer chutes in the bulk materials industry
MN van Aarde
59
CHAPTER 4
constraints A good example of these constraints is the transfer height between
the stockyard conveyor and the downstream conveyors CV 5 and 6
On both sides of the stockyard conveyor stockpiles of ore can be reclaimed and
deposited onto the conveyor This facility allows a certain travel for the stacker
reclaimer along the stockyard conveyor for the stacking and reclaiming of
material The most forward position of the stacker reclaimer is at the beginning
of the incline section of the stockyard conveyor As previously explained any
curvature in a conveyor requires a certain minimum radius When the transfer
height is raised the radius constraints on that curvature in the stockyard
conveyor will reduce stockyard space This means that the storage capacity at
the facility will be greatly diminished
I ~
j
Figure 36 Dimensional constraints on the existing transfer configuration
The ideal is to stay within the eXisting critical dimensions as shown in Figure 36
As functionality of the chute dictates the chute configuration these dimensions
can be modified within certain constraints These critical dimensions on the
existing configuration are
The optimisation of transfer chutes in the bulk materials industry
MN van Aarde
60
CHAPTER 4
bull Centre of receiving belt to centre of the head pulley 800 mm
bull Bottom of receiving belt to top of the head pulley 4048 mm
The head pulley can however be moved back a certain amount before it
becomes necessary to change the entire incline section of the stockyard
conveyor As the moving head moves forward and backward there are idler cars
trailing behind the moving head carriage as shown in Figure 35 The purpose of
these idler cars is to support the belt when the moving head is feeding onto
CV 6 or when it is standing in the purging position
43 DESIGN OF THE CHUTE PROFILE
431 Design Methodology
Proven standard methods for the functional design of the chute are used These
hand calculation methods are based on the Conveyor Equipment Manufacturers
Association (CEMA) standard as well as papers from Prof AW Roberts These
are typically calculations for determining the discharge trajectory optimal radius
of the hood and spoon as well as the velocity of material passing through the
chute
In addition to standard methods of carrying out conceptual flow design it is
supplemented by the use of Discrete Element Modelling (OEM) simulation
software This is done to visualise the flow of material through the chute
Results from standard calculation methods are compared to the outputs of the
OEM simulations to confirm both results Chapter 5 will focus on the use of
Discrete Element Modelling for the design and verification of chute concepts
The optimisation of transfer chutes in the bulk materials industry
MN van Aarde
61
CHAPTER 4 -__-----__---_----------shy
432 Design Development
Figure 37 shows the concept of the hood and spoon chute for a 90deg transfer as
required by the facility layout The decision to opt for a hood and spoon chute is
based on trying to retain the material velocity when transferring material from the
feeding conveyor to the receiving conveyors Retention of material velocity is
critical as the transfer height is restricted The overall facility constraints for
design are as follows
bull Feeding belt speed - 45 ms
bull Receiving belt speed - 45 ms
bull Transfer height - 401 m
bull Belt widths -1650 mm
bull Maximum material throughput -10000 tlh
As this is a retrofit of an existing facility some of the facility constraints cannot be
changed This forms part of the design development as it steers the design in a
certain direction Due to the fact that the transfer height cannot be changed the
chute profile will be dependent on the transfer height restriction
The optimisation of transfer chutes in the bulk matefials industry
MN van Aarde
62
CHAPTER 4
START-UP CHrrlE
DRlBBIlNG CHUTE
Figure 37 Hood and spoon configuration for the 90 transfer
The optimum solution for the correct chute profile in this situation would be to
move the head pulley back far enough This should be done so that the hood
can receive the material trajectory at a small impact angle and still discharge
centrally onto the spoon However the head pulley can only be moved back a
certain amount Any further movement will require changes to the structure of
the feeding conveyor incline section
As the stockyard conveyors feed onto two receiving conveyors the head pulley
of the stockyard conveyors is situated on a moving head rail car This enables
the conveyor to discharge either on CV 5 or CV 6 as shown in Figure 25
Taking the movement of the head pulley into account the moving head rail car
can be shortened by 1000 mm in order to move the head pulley back As stated
in the preface all changes are distinctive to this facility alone However it is
important to be aware of the consequences of every modification
The optimisation of transfer chutes in the bulk materials industry
MN van Aarde
63
CHAPTER 4 -__----- ------shy
433 Determination of the Profile
An important of the hood and spoon design is to ensure a
discharge from the hood onto the centre of the spoon The is
determined using equation (1) in section 24 Although various material
are transferred it does not have a significant effect on the calculated trajectory
the bulk properties of the materials are very similar It is however important
to the material which will transferred obtain the flow angles and wear
This information the will be
the Liner selection for this case study is discussed in Appendix A
After the trajectory has been determined the hood radius can determined by
using equation (2) As head pulley can move 1 000 mm backward the
possible hood radius was determined to 2 577 mm This hood radius is
VIU(I(1 to produce the wear on the zone in chute
The impact angle at this radius is 11 which is less than the maximum
allowable limit of 20
The hood radius is chosen to as close as possible to radius of curvature of
the material trajectory The point where the hood radius and the trajectory radius
cross is known as the impact point In to determine the velocity
point in hood the at is required on the
hood from the horizontal where the material impacts and to slide down the
hood surface
In this case the position impact hood is at 558r from the horizontal
In to determine the velocity this angle e is used as starting
point in (3) obtain a complete velocity profile angle from where
the material impacts hood is decreased in increments 5 up to the
discharge point which is normally 0
The optimisation chutes in the bulk materials industry
MN van Aarde
64
-----
CHAPTER 4
Hood Velocity Profile
70
--- --~ 6 0
5 0
40 ~_
~ 30 g --- a 20 gt
10
00
60 50 40 30 20 10 o Theta (Position inside the hood)
Figure 38 Hood velocity profile
The spoon radius is determined in such a way that the wear at the point of impact
is kept to a minimum At the same time the horizontal component of the material
exit velocity is as close as possible to the receiving belt speed Firstly the
assumption is made that the initial velocity of material in the spoon is equal to the
exit velocity of material from the hood This yields a spoon entry velocity of
633 ms and can also be seen from Figure 38
By reiterating various radii for the spoon the optimum exit velocity Ve can be
obtained These radii are selected according to the available space in which the
spoon must fit and also to produce the smallest impact angle for material
discharging from the hood This table is set up to display the different exit
velocities at various spoon radii The exit velocity is also dependent on the exit
angle which is determined by the length of the spoon arc In this case the spoon
radius is chosen as 3 575 mm An exit angle of 38deg from the horizontal yields an
exit velocity closer to the receiving belt speed
The optimisation of transfer chutes in the bulk materials industry
MN van Aarde
65
CHAPTER 4
Spoon Velocity Profile
67
66
65
S 64 amp0 g 6 3
V
v-shy ~ ~
ii ~ gt 62
61 I I 60
o 10 20 30 40 50 60
Theta (position inside the spoon)
Figure 39 Spoon velocity profile
Taken from the origin of the spoon radius the material position in the spoon at
discharge is sr The selection of this angle is guided by the geometry of the
chute and surrounding structures This angle is then used to calculate the exit
velocity as shown in Figure 39 At this point the discharge angle relative to the
conveyor angle is 38deg Ve is then determined to be 6087 ms with a velocity
component of 479 ms in the direction of the belt This value is 618 higher
than the belt speed of 4S ms which is acceptable as it is within the allowable
10 range of variation Minimal spillage and reduced wear on the receiving
conveyor is expected
Both the hood and spoon have a converged profile This is done in order to
minimise spillage and ensure a smooth transfer of material from the hood to the
spoon and from the spoon to the receiving conveyor The converged profile
starts out wide to capture any stray particles and converges to bring the material
particles closer together at the discharge This profile does not influence the
transfer rate of the chute as the stream of material through the chute is no more
The optimisation of transfer chutes in the bulk materials industry
MN van Aarde
66
CHAPTER 4
compact than the material on the conveyor belt before and after the transfer
chute
44 INCORPORATING ADEAD BOX IN THE IMPACT AREAS
In chapter 1 reference is made to a chute design utilising pipe sections with a
rounded profile The flat back plate is chosen instead of a rounded pipe type
section to house the honeycomb dead box configuration It would be possible to
fit the honeycomb into a rounded back section but manufacturing and
maintenance would be unnecessarily difficult and expensive
Furthermore the cross section profile of the chute shows three sliding surfaces
as shown in These surfaces consist of the back plate two vertical side plates
and two diagonal plates This is done in order to increase the angle between
adjoining plates so that the probability of material hanging up in the corners is
reduced This helps to alleviate the risk of experiencing blocked chutes
Figure 40 Chute cross section
The optimisation of transfer chutes in the bulk materials industry
M N van Aarde
67
CHAPTER 4
441 Honeycomb Wear Box in the Hood
A honeycomb or wear box is incorporated into this chute configuration in order to
further minimise wear in the hood and spoon The honeycomb configuration is
clearly shown in and is typical for both the hood and spoon Reduced wear will I
be achieved as impact and sliding will take place on the basis of material on
material flow Ore is captured inside the honeycomb pockets which protects the
ceramic lining in the section of the honeycomb and creates another sliding face
made of the material being transferred The ribs in the wear box do not protrude
from the sliding face of the chute and therefore do not interfere with the main
stream flow of material
Positioning of the honeycomb is critical as the point of impact on the hood needs
to be on the honeycomb This is required in order to assure that the highest
material impact is absorbed by a layer of static material inside the honeycomb
and not the chute liners All the basic steps for designing a normal hood and
spoon chute are followed Firstly the angle at impact (8e) is calculated to
determine where the trajectory of material will cross the radius of the hood This
shows the position of the impact point on the hood Figure 20 indicates where 8e
is calculated As previously stated the angle at impact for this situation is
558r This is calculated using [33]
e = tan- I ( 1 ) (5)
C Ii
And y is defined by equation 1
This gives an indication as to where the honeycomb should be situated in order
to capture the material impacting the hood fully A flow simulation package can
also be used to determine the position of this honeycomb structure shows an
opening for the honeycomb which starts at 40deg clockwise from the vertical This
The optimisation of transfer chutes in the bulk materials industry 68
MN van Aarde
CHAPTER 4
means that there are almost 16deg of free space in the honeycomb to ensure that
the material will always impact inside the wear box
There is no set specification as to the size of this free space This is just to
accommodate any surges of mat~rial on the feeding conveyor As discussed in
Chapter 3 due to avalanches while reclaiming from the stockpiles material
surges on the conveyors is a reality
Figure 41 Honeycomb wear box positioning
illustrates exactly where this wear box is situated on the back plate of the hood
This configuration is very similar to that of the spoon as both wear boxes only
cover the width of the flat back plate of the hood and spoon The reason for this
is that most of the material impact and mainstream flow strikes the back plate
The optimisation of transfer chutes in the bulk materials industry
MN van Aarde
69
CHAPTER 4
WEAR BOX
Figure 42 Wear box in the hood section
All the horizontal ribs of the honeycomb are spaced 5deg apart and there are 5
vertical ribs following the converging contour of the hood as shown in Spacing
of the ribs depends largely on the maximum lump size handled by the transfer
In this case the largest lumps are approximately 34 mm in diameter The idea is
to get as many dead boxes into the honeycomb as possible These small
cavities should however be large enough to capture a substantial amount of ore
inside
The optimisation of transfer chutes in the bulk materials industry
MN van Aarde
70
CHAPTER 4 ----_----------------shy
Figure 43 Spacing arrangement of honeycomb ribs inside the hood
The two vertical liners on the edges of the honeycomb are only 65 mm high while
the rest of the vertical liners are 120 mm high This is done so that the flat liners
in the chute surface can overlap the edge liners of the honeycomb An open
groove between the tiles along the flow of material would cause the liners to be
worn through much faster than in normal sliding abrasion conditions Due to the
high wear characteristics of the ore all openings between tiles should be kept out
of the mainstream flow
All the ribs in the honeycomb are 50 mm thick and vary in depth The vertical
ribs protrude the horizontal ribs by 30 mm in order to channel the flow These
vertical ribs are all flush with the surrounding tiles on the flat sliding surface of the
hood All the pockets of the wear box are 120 mm deep measured from the top
of the vertical ribs Again dimension is dependent on the maximum lump size
handled by the transfer There are no specifications as to the relation between
the pocket size and the lump size These dimensions were chosen to be
approximately 4 times the lump size Computer simulations can be used to test
the feasibility of this concept while commissioning of the equipment will ultimately
show whether this method works
The optimisation of transfer chutes in the bulk materials industry
MN van Aarde
71
CHAPTER 4 ------------_ -- - ---------------shy
442 Honeycomb wear box in the spoon
The honeycomb wear box in the spoon has the same configuration as in the
hood It also covers the entire width of the back plate and fully accommodates
the material impacting on the spoon from the hood The entire spoon is broken
up into three sections and the honeycomb wear box is situated in the back
section as shown in
Figure 44 Wear box in the spoon section
With almost the same configuration as the hood the spoon also has a corner
liner to ensure a continuous lined face between the flat surface liners and the
honeycomb ribs The detail of these liners and ribs are shown in A 90deg transfer
with a hood and spoon chute means that the stream received by the spoon is
narrower and longer than the stream received by the hood This is caused when
the material takes the shape of the hood before it is discharged into the spoon
The converged configuration causes the stream to flatten against the sliding
surface in the chute
The optimisation of transfer chutes in the bulk materials industry
MN van Aarde
72
CHAPTER 4
Due to the spoon honeycomb being a bit narrower than the hood there are only
three vertical ribs The number of ribs had to be reduced to be able to
accommodate the preferred cavity size of the honeycomb boxes These ribs now
form two channels in which the stream of material can be directed
Figure 45 Liner detail of the spoon honeycomb wear box
As shown in there is a 3 mm gap between the honeycomb section and the chute
plate work This is to ensure that the honeycomb section can be easily removed
for maintenance on the liners All the edges of the liners have rounded corners
to reduce stress concentrations which can cause rapid liner failure
45 DESIGNING THE CHUTE FOR INTEGRATION WITH SYSTEM REQUIREMENTS
The arc length of the spoon back plate is longer and closer to the belt in order to
ensure a smooth transfer of material from the chute to the receiving conveyor A
small gap of 75 mm is left between the bottom of the spoon and the receiving
conveyor Due to the fact that material can also be fed from another upstream
The optimisation of transfer chutes in the bulk materials industry
MN van Aarde
73
CHAPTER 4
stockyard conveyor this configuration will not be suitable This means that the
gap of 75 mm is not enough to allow material to pass underneath the chute
To accommodate this situation the spoon is split into different sections where the
bottom section lifts up to make room for material from behind In the raised
position the gap between the chute and the belt is 450 mm When the lower belt
is loaded to full capacity the material height is 380 mm This means that the
clearance to the belt in the non operational position is sufficient and show the
operational and non operational positions of the spoon
T -t t----~r_-+-wtIY1shy
Figure 46 Spoon in the operational position
The optimisation of transfer chutes in the bulk materials industry
MN van Aarde
74
CHAPTER 4
Figure 47 Spoon in the non operational position
This section is a discussion on how this new transfer chute configuration should
be operated in order to comply with the facility requirements The bottom section
of the chute can be lifted out of the way of material from behind on the receiving
conveyor Therefore a control philosophy is required for this movement
Referring to Figure 25 positions A and B indicate where these new chutes will be
installed As previously stated position C is the purging or dump position and
show the actuated spoon section in the operating and non operating positions
The conditions for these positions are explained as follows
46 CONCLUSION
With the consideration of all the facility constraints and a conceptual idea of what
the transfer configuration should look like the design can be optimised When
the feeding belt velocity is known the material trajectory and optimum chute
radius can be determined This radius and the radius of the spoon must then be
corrected to comply with the facility constraints but still deliver the required
material transfer rate
The optimisation of transfer chutes in the bulk materials industry
MN van Aarde
75
CHAPTER 4
With the high cost implications of regular maintenance intervals on chute liners
and facility downtime a honeycomb structure is incorporated into the high impact
areas The purpose of this honeycomb structure is to form small pockets similar
to dead boxes in order to promote material on material flow This increases the
lifetime of the chute liners and reduces maintenance intervals
This specific transfer chute splits up easily into separate sections and will help to
simplify maintenance The bottom section of the chute is actuated to move up
and down depending on whether the chute is in operation or not This will ensure
optimum transfer of material while in operation and provide sufficient clearance
when not in operation This is again guided by the facility requirements
In the design of all the transfer chute components the physical properties of the
ore should always be considered This determines the chute profile in terms of
flow angles and liner selection With maximum material flow ability high
resistance to sliding abrasion and reduced maintenance cost in mind 94
alumina ceramics is the liner of choice This is only in the main flow areas of the
chute For the dribbling chute a polyurethane liner is used to promote the flow of
this sticky material
The optimisation of transfer chutes in the bulk materials industry
MN van Aarde
76
CHAPTER 5
CHAPTER 5 TESTING AND VERIFICATION OF THE NEW SOLUTION
- middotSmiddotmiddotmiddotmiddotmiddotmiddotmiddotmiddotmiddot-middotl~Oi
The optimisation of transfer chutes in the bulk materials industry 77
MN van Aarde
CHAPTER 5
51 PREFACE
Although hand calculations have been a proven method of design for many
years it is important to verify any new chute concept before fabrication and
implementation Confirming the concept can save time and money as it reduces
the risk of on-site modifications Hand calculations only supply a two
dimensional solution to the problem which does not always provide accurate
material flow profiles
In recent years a few material flow simulation packages have been developed to
aid the design of material handling equipment The use of software packages
can be beneficial to the design process as it gives a three dimensional view of
the material behaviour in the chute This means that changes to the chute
concept can be made prior to fabrication
It is however important to verify that the solution obtained from the software
package is an accurate reflection of actual design model Therefore the material
being handled should be thoroughly tested to obtain the correct physical
properties required to obtain an accurate simulation result
The use of material flow simulation software does not replace the necessity for
hand calculations All the basic steps should still be done to derive a conceptual
chute configuration Material flow simulation software should be used as a
complimentary tool to analytical hand calculations in the design process
The optimisation of transfer chutes in thebulk materials industry
MN van Aarde
78
CHAPTER 5
52 SELECTING A TEST METHODOLOGY
Traditionally transfer chutes were designed by using basic analytical calculations
and relying on empirical data from past experiences with other chutes Mostly
these analytical methods only cater for the initial part of the chute such as the
parabolic discharge trajectory It is difficult to determine what happens to the
flow of material after it strikes the chute wall [34]
Two methods of verification were usually applied to evaluate a new transfer
chute configuration Trial and error can be used but obviously this is not desired
due to the high cost implications A second method is to build a small scale
model of the chute in which tests can be carried out before a final design can be
adopted This physical modelling is however time consuming and
expensive [34]
Granular or particulate materials are composed of a large number of loosely
packed individual particles or grains The flow of such granular materials forms
an intricate part of the materials handling industry Small reductions in energy
consumption or increases in production can have great financial advantages
Therefore significant efforts are put into improving the efficiency of these
facilities The important role of numerical simUlations is becoming more evident
in these optimisation procedures [35] Due to these efforts this technology is
becoming more powerful and is easy to use as a verification method for transfer
chute designs
The behaviour of bulk material particles is unique in the sense that it exhibits
some of the properties associated with the gaseous liquid and solid states of
matter The granular state of bulk materials cannot be characterised by anyone
of these states alone The research that captures the contact between individual
particles in an explicit manner is known as discrete element methods (OEM) [36]
The optimisation of transfer chutes in the bulk materials industry
MN van Aarde
79
CHAPTER 5
In basic terms OEM explicitly models the dynamic motion and mechanical
interactions of each body or particle as seen in the physical material flow It is
also possible to obtain a detailed description of the velocities position and force
acting on each particle at a discrete point during the analysis This is achieved
by focusing on the individual grain or body rather than focusing on the global
body as is the case with the finite element approach [36]
Figure 48 illustrates two examples of how this OEM software can be applied
Obviously the flow characteristics differ between the applications shown in Figure
48 This is however catered for by the mathematical simulation of each particle
collision
Figure 48 Flow analysis examples a) separation and screening b) hoppers feeders 36]
Continuous improvements in the performance of computing systems make OEM
a realistic tool for use in a wide range of process design and optimisation
applications During the last 20 years the capabilities of OEM have progressed
from small scale two dimensional simulations to much more complex 3D
applications The latest high performance desk top computers make it possible
to simulate systems containing large numbers of particles within a reasonable
time [37]
The optimisation of transfer chutes in the bulk materials industry
MN van Aarde
80
CHAPTER 5
According to the institute for conveyor technologies at the Otto-von-Guericke
University of Magdeburg in Germany using OEM for bulk solid handling
equipment provides [38]
bull A cost effective method of simulating the utility of materials handling
equipmentshy
bull Precise control over complicated problem zones eg transfer chutes
redirection stations and high wear areas
bull The possibility to integrate processes in one simulation such as mixing and
segregation
bull The possibility to involve the customer more extensively in the design
process
bull An advantage in the market due to attractive video sequences and pictures
of the simulation
bull The possibility to prevent facility damages and increase the efficiency of
conveyor systems extensively
As a good example of the advantages of the discrete element method the
University of Witwatersrand in Johannesburg did studies on rotary grinding mills
The university studies have shown that the OEM qualitatively predicts the load
motion of the mill very well The improved knowledge of the behaviour of mills
can therefore increase the profitability of mineral processing operations [39]
This material handling equipment is generally costly to operate and inefficient in
the utilisation of energy for breakage In order to understand the behaviour of
mills better the OEM method is increasingly being applied to the modelling of the
load behaviour of grinding mills These results indicate that this method can be
applied successfully in the bulk materials handling industry
The apUmisatian af transfer chutes in the bulk materials industry
MN van Aarde
81
CHAPTERS
Another example where this technology has been used with great success is with
the design of a new load out chute for the Immingham coal import terminal in
Britain By simulating the flow with a OEM package the designers were aided in
the fact that they were supplied with a quantitative description of the bulk solid
movement through the chute In the opinion of Professor Franz Kessler
(University of Leoben) the Discrete Element Method provides the engineer with
unique detailed information to assist in the design of transfer points [3]
These simulation packages are at the moment very expensive and not widely
used in transfer chute design It can be anticipated that the utilisation of these
packages will increase as the technology improves and the cost of the software
goes down [40] To get the best value out of the simulation it is important to
compare simulation packages and select the one most suitable to the complexity
of the design
Fluenttrade is a two dimensional computational fluid dynamics (CFD) software
package which can also be used as a chute design aid through the simulation of
material flow It must however be noted that this is not a OEM simulation
package This software package simulates the flow of material by considering
the material particles as a liquid substance The output of the simulation is the
same as can be seen in the example of Figure 49 The colours in the simulation
represent the average particle spacing [40] Due to the fact that this package
can at this stage only deliver two dimensional simulations it is considered
inadequate to perform detailed simulations on the intricate design piscussed in
this dissertation
The optjmisation of transfer chutes in the bulk materials industry
MN van Aarde
82
CHAPTER 5
COnroUf Votume t-~bn 01 ( 00 frlm~2 5000amp1 00) ~gtJ C3_2002 fLUENT 60 (2lt1 9 940 n 1Mgt u ody)
Figure 49 Simulations results from Fluenttrade [40]
The Overland Conveyor Company provides another alternative to the Fluent
software package Applied OEM is a technology company that provides discrete
element software to a variety of users in the bulk materials industry Bulk Flow
Analysttrade is an entry level package that they provide This package is very
powerful in the sense that it can accurately predict flow patterns depending on
the accuracy of the inputs An example of this is shown in Figure 50 It also has
the capability to show material segregation dynamic forces and velocities [41]
Figure 50 Simulation results from Bulk Flow Analysttrade [41]
The optimisation of transfer chutes in the bulk materials industry
MN van Aarde
83
CHAPTER 5
OEM Solutions is a world leader in discrete element modelling software They
recently announced the release of the latest version of their flow simulation
package called EOEM 21 This package can be used to simulate and optimise
bulk material handling and processing operations [41] Oue to the capabilities of
this software package it is a very attractive option for designing transfer chutes
With the development of EOEM 21 OEM Solutions worked in collaboration with
customers in the Bulk Handling Mining and Construction Pharmaceutical
Chemical and Agricultural sectors This enables the end users to perform more
sophisticated particle simulations specific to their unique applications Also
incorporated into this package is the ability and flexibility to customise and
personalise advanced particle properties [42]
This specific package has been proven successful by industry leaders Martin
Engineering (Neponset Illinois) is a leading global supplier of solids handling
systems This company continues to expand their use of EOEM software in
design optimisation and development of bulk materials handling products These
optimisation and development actions include all aspects of conveyor systems
and transfer points for numerous industrial sectors [43]
There are several other OEM simulation packages such as ESYS Particle
Passage-OEM and YAOE However none of these software packages seem be
major industry role players in the discipline of chute design although they might
have the capability In adjudicating the three big role players in bulk material flow
simulation packages there are a few factors taken into consideration It appears
thatthe advantages of 30 capabilities are non negotiable Therefore Fluenttrade is
not really a consideration From the literature review of the Bulk Flow Analysttrade
and the EOEM packages it seems that these two will provide more or less the
same performance It does seem however that the EOEM software is a bigger
role player in various industries Due to the possible future capabilities of EOEM The optimisation of transfer chutes in the bulk materials industry
MN van Aarde
84
CHAPTER 5
through its association with numerous industries this simulation package is the
software of choice
In order to retrofit or design a new transfer point with the aid of the selected OEM
software package there are a few steps that a designer must follow to gain the
full benefit of this tool [36]
1 An accurate 3D or CAD representation of the new or old transfer chute
must be rendered
2 Identify restrictions and limitations in terms of chute geometry and
manufacturing
3 Identify desired design goals (Le dust emissions flow restrictions etc)
4 Identify representative material properties and particle descriptions
5 In case of a retrofit make design changes to chute geometry with CAD
6 Simulate the performance of the new design using OEM software
7 Evaluate results obtained from the simulation (reiterate steps 5 6 and 7)
8 Perform and finalise detail design steps
9 Manufacture
10 Installation
The above mentioned steps found in references [6] and [36] only provides
information regarding retrofitting or designing chutes with the aid of OEM
Although it is a powerful design 1001 the design process should not discard the
use of analytical hand calculation~ Some of the most important design decisions
regarding chute profiles are made with analytical hard calculations such as
plotting the material trajectorY
53 DETERMINATION OF MATERIAL PROPERTIES
The discrete element method is a promising approach to the simUlation of
granular material interaction The accuracy of the outcome of the simulation is
The optimisation of transfer chutes in the bulk materials industry
M N van Aarde
85
CHAPTER 5
however dependent upon accurate information on the material properties and
input parameters [44] These inputs basically consist of the following
fundamental parameters size and shape factors bulk density angle of repose
cohesion and adhesion parameters and restitution coefficients [45]
The determination of most of these parameters are explained and defined in the
following paragraphs The parameters that are changed in the simulation
according to the reaction of the flow are not discussed and are typically
parameters such as the internal coefficient of friction between a number of
particles A collaborated effort by the bulk handling industry aims to find ways in
which all parameters can be accurately determined through scientific methods
This has however still not been achieved The objective is to achieve a realistic
representation and therefore some parameters are altered in the simulation
It is important to note that the computation time increases as the particle size
becomes smaller and the amount of particles increase In most granular flow
problems the characteristics of the material stream are largely determined by
particles greater than 10 - 20 mm in size [45] Therefore in order to reduce
computation time the selected particle size for simUlations should be the same
as the largest particles handled by the facility namely 34 mm diameter
Although fines have a higher internal friction coefficient and more cohesiveness
these properties can be averaged into the input parameters to obtain the same
overall effect [45] Therefore only a single particle size is used in the simulation
and the properties optimised to obtain the same result under actual operating
conditionsmiddot Some of the material properties can be easily obtained from the
facility The rest of the properties are obtained from tests carried out by expert
conSUltants in this field
The size factor and bulk density are obtained from the facility Materia tests
carried out by external consultants provide the coefficient of friction and also the The optimisation of transfer chutes in the bulk materials industry
MN van Aarde
86
CHAPTER 5
wall friction angle This is the angle at which the material will start to slide under
its own mass To determine these material properties the external consultants
normally use sophisticated and expensive equipment Data gathered from these
tests are used for the hand calculation of the chute profile The angle of repose
can normally be observed from a stockpile and is the angle that the side of the
stockpile makes with the horizontal
For the OEM simulation the coefficient of friction is one of the main determining
factors of the wall friction angle Data provided by the material tests can not be
used as a direct input into OEM In the software package the coefficient of
friction is represented by a factor between 0 and 1 The material test data can
however provide some insight into where on this scale the factor is This factor
can be derived from a few small simulation iterations as there is no method of
direct conversion between the test result data and the OEM input
To determine this factor a plate is modelled with a single layer of particles This
plate is then rotated within the simulation at approximately 2deg per second As
soon as the particles begin to slide the time is taken from which the angle can be
calculated This process is repeated with different friction coefficients until the
correct wall friction angle is obtained After the coefficient of friction factor is
determined between the particles and the chute wall the material restitution
factor and coefficient of internal friction can be obtained
The restitution factor is obtained by measurirtg the rebound height of a particle
when it is dropped from a certain height This is usually difficult to determine due
to the variation in shape of the material particles If the particle lands on a
surface it rarely bounces straight back up Therefore the test is repeated
numerous times and an average is taken to obtain the final result
Coefficient of internal friction is a property that describes the particles ability to
slide across each other A simUlation is set up to create a small stockpile of The optimisation of transfer chutes in the blJlk materials industry
MN van Aarde
87
CHAPTER 5
material particles The angle of repose can be obtained by measuring the
average apex angle of the stockpiles In this simulation the coefficient of internal
friction and restitution factors are iterated This is done in order to simulate the
accurate behaviour of particles falling onto the stockpile and forming the correct
angle of repose Figure 51 shows what this simulation typically looks like
Figure 51 Determination of material properties for an accurate angle of repose
54 VERIFICATION OF THE SELECTED TEST METHODOLOGY FOR THIS
APPLICATION
The best verification is to compare the simulation results with an actual material
flow situation Therefore a comparison is made between the actual flow in the
existing transfer configuration and the simulation of this same transfer This is
also a good test to see if the parameters changed in the simulation were done
correctly
During the chute test programme CCTV cameras were installed in the problem
transfer chutes at the facility The cameras are positioned to provide an accurate
view of the material flow behaviour inside the chutes As explained in Chapter 3
The optimisation of transfer chutes in the bulk materials industry 88
MN van Aarde
CHAPTER 5
the behaviour of the material flow inside the chutes changes with the variation of
ore type
Due to the fact that only 34 mm diameter particles are used in the simulation a
test using coarse ore was chosen for the verification of the simulation
Therefore test 12 is used as reference for the verification In this test coarse S
with the particle size distribution between 28 mm and 34 mm was used at the
transfer from CV 3 to CV 5
Figure 52 shows an image taken from the CCTV camera inside the transfer chute
between CV 3 and CV 5 The red line indicates the top of the chute throat
opening and the yellow arrows show the top of material flow This screen shot
was taken at a flow rate of 10 000 tlh It can be deduced from this view and the
chute test work that the chute is choking at a throughput rate of 10 000 tlh
Figure 52 Actual material flow with coarse S at 10000 tIh
The transfer chute from Figure 52 was modelled in CAD and the model imported
into the discrete element package EDEM All the material input parameters as
discussed in section 53 were used in the simulation 10 000 tlh was used as the
The optimisation of transfer chutes in the bulk materials industry
MN van Aarde
89
CHAPTER 5
flow rate parameter in an attempt to simulate and recreate the situation as shown
by Figure 52
Test 12 of the chute performance tests gave the following results which can be
compared to the EDEM simulation
bull Chute started to choke rapidly at 10 000 tlh
bull Slight off centre loading onto the receiving conveyor CV 5
bull A lower velocity layer of material close to the discharge of the chute
bull Material roll back on the receiving conveyor due to significant differences in
the velocity of the material flow and the receiving conveyor
Off-centre loading
L
Figure 53 Material flow pattern through the existing chute
The optimisation of transfer chutes in the bulk materials industry
MN van Aarde
90
CHAPTER 5
Flow restricted in this area
Low velocity layer
Low discharge velocity rollback
Figure 54 Cross sectional side view of material flow through the existing chute
Figure 53 shows the material flow pattern in the existing chute where the thick
red arrows indicate the direction of flow The legend on the left of the figure
indicates the material velocity in ms Slow flowing material is shown in blue and
the colour turns to red as the material velocity increases Slight off centre
loading onto the receiving conveyor CV 5 can be seen from Figure 53 This
correlates well with the actual observations during the physical testing of this
transfer point
Figure 54 shows the more determining factors for correlation between actual flow
and simulated flow where the legend on the left indicates the material velocity in
ms This is a cross sectional view through the centre of the chute From this
view a build up of material can be seen in the chute throat area The slow
flowing material on the back of the chute also helps to restrict the flow Due to
the fact that the material speed at the discharge of the chute is much slower than
the receiving belt speed a stack of turbulent flowing material is formed behind
the discharge point on the receiving conveyor
The optimisation of transfer chutes in the bulk materials industry
MN van Aarde
91
CHAPTER 5
There is a good correlation between the simulated and actual material flow
pattern The simulation method can therefore be considered as a valid alternate
or additional method to standard analytical chute design Attention should be
given though to the input of material properties in order to obtain a realistic result
55 VERIFICATION OF NEW CHUTE CONFIGURATION AND OPTIMISATION OF THE
HOOD LOCATION
After establishing that the OEM is a reliable design and verification tool the new
transfer chute configuration can be simulated Firstly this configuration is
modelled without the honeycombs inside the hood and spoon This is done in
order to verify the material flow pattern and velocity through the hood and spoon
Results obtained from this simulation can then be compared to the hand
calculation results An iterative process is followed with simulations and hand
calculations to obtain the best flow results The simulation results are shown in
Figure 55 and Figure 56
I
L
Figure 55 Material flow through hood at 10 000 tIh
The optimisation of transfer chutes in the bulk materials industry
MN van Aarde
92
CHAPTER 5
Figure 56 Material flow through spoon at 10 000 tlh
The hood velocity profile shown in Figure 38 gives the same result as obtained
from the DEM simulation The calculated hood exit velocity is 633 ms This is
the same result obtained from the simulation and shown by the red colouring in
Figure 55 As the material enters the spoon it is falling under gravity and
therefore still accelerating At impact with the chute wall it slows down and exits
the spoon with approximately the same velocity as the receiving conveyor
Figure 56 shows the material flow through the spoon section This can also be
compared to the spoon velocity profile in Figure 39 The behaviour of the
material inside the spoon as shown by the simulation correlates with the results
obtained from the hand calculations This is another indication that with accurate
input parameters the DEM can be used as a useful verification tool
The optimisation of transfer chutes in the bulk materials industry
MN van Aarde
93
CHAPTER 5
Skew loading into spoon
Slower material
L
Figure 57 Determination of the optimum hood location
The hood is supported by a shaft at the top and can be moved horizontally This
function is incorporated into the design in order to optimise the hood location
during commissioning of the transfer chute It is critical to discharge centrally into
the spoon in order to eliminate skew loading onto the receiving conveyor
Figure 57 illustrates the effect that the hood location has on material flow When
comparing the flow from Figure 55 to the flow in Figure 57 it is clear that skew
loading is a direct result of an incorrect hood position The circled area in Figure
57 illustrates how the flow reacts to the incorrect hood location
Material is discharged to the right side of the spoon which causes a slight buildshy
up of material on the left This causes the material to flow slightly from side to
side as it passes through the spoon Figure 57 indicates that the material to the
The optimisation of transfer chutes in the bulk materials industry
MN van Aarde
94
CHAPTERS ----------------- -------___ _--shy
right at the spoon discharge is slightly slower than the material on the left This is
a clear indication of skew loading onto the receiving conveyor
The material flow pattern in Figure 55 is symmetrical and therefore will not
cause skew loading The OEM can give a good indication of the required hood
setup before commissioning However adjustments can still be made during the
commissioning process The tracking of the receiving belt should give a good
indication of when the hood is in the optimum position
56 EFFECT OF THE HONEYCOMB STRUCTURE IN HIGH IMPACT ZONES
The purpose of the honeycomb dead box structure in the high impact zones is to
capture material inside the pockets and induce material on material flow This
requires that the material inside the honeycombs should be stationary while the
main stream material flow moves over the dead boxes OEM can therefore be
set up in such a way that the material velocities can be visualised inside the
chute
In Chapter 4 the logic of how this honeycomb should be structured and
positioned was discussed The simulations shown in Figure 58 and Figure 59
illustrate how a OEM pack~ge can also be used to determine the positioning of
these honeycomb structures Impact points in the hood and spoon must be
inside the honeycomb in all situations of flow inside the chute The spacing of
dead box pockets can be altered to ensure that a continuous layer of stationary
material is formed in the honeycomb area Various geometries for this
honeycomb structure can be simulated with OEM to obtain the best results
The optimisation of transfer chutes in the bulk materials industry
MN van Aarde
95
CHAPTER 5
Large radius hood
Hood honeycomb box to minimise wear in impact
Vertical discharge from hood centralising flow on
belt
L
Figure 58 Material behaviour through hood
Spoon
Spoon honeycomb box to minimise wear in impact area
Improved spoon discharge flow
Figure 59 Material behaviour through spoon
The optimisation of transfer chutes in the bulk materials industry
MN van Aarde
96
CHAPTERS
The legends on the left of Figure 58 and Figure 59 indicate the material velocity
in ms Dark blue indicates stationary material and bright red indicates a
maximum material velocity of 8 ms Using this information the functionality of
the honeycomb dead boxes can now be analysed The velocity of the material
captured by the dead boxes is indicated as dark blue This means that all the
material in the dead boxes is stationary
With the result obtained from the OEM simulation it is clear that material on
material flow will be induced by the honeycomb dead boxes The pockets of the
honeycomb capture the material and will therefore have reduced wear in the
high impact areas This material on material flow does however induce a
coarser sliding surface than the smooth ceramic liner tiles Due to the high
velocity of material through the chute the effect of the coarser sliding surface is
however minimised
58 CONCLUSION
The Discrete Element Method is proven to be a successful design and
verification tool in the bulk materials industry This method is used widely in the
global bulk materials industry The successful outcome of the OEM simulation is
however dependent on the correct material input parameters Some of these
parameters are readily available from the facility that handles the material The
rest of the parameters can be determined by setting up simple test simulations
with OEM
To verify that the OEM simulation is a correct indication of the actual condition
the simulation is compared to CCTV images taken from the same transfer chute
The results show that the OEM simulation does provide a true reflection of the
actual material flow through the transfer chute Therefore the same material
input parameters can be used to simulate the new transfer chute configuration
The optimisation of transfer chutes in the bulk materials industry
MN van Aarde
97
CHAPTER 5
From the simulations done on the new transfer chute configuration the effect of
the honeycomb dead boxes can be examined These simulation results show
that the honeycomb dead box configuration is effective in capturing material
inside the honeycomb cavities This results in material on material flow and
reduces impact abrasion on the ceramic chute liners
Results obtained from the OEM simulation of the new transfer configuration are
compared to the hand calculation results This comparison indicates that the
material velocity calculated in the hood and spoon correlates well with the
material velocity calculated by the OEM The overall results obtained from
simulating the new transfer chute configuration have been shown to provide a
true reflection of the actual flow through the chute
The optimisation of transfer chutes in the bulk materials industry
MN van Aarde
98
CHAPTER 6
CHAPTER 6 CONCLUSIONS AND RECOMMENDATIONS
The optimisation of transfer chutes in the bulk materials industry
MN van Aarde
99
CHAPTER 6
61 CONCLUSIONS AND RECOMMENDATIONS
Bulk materials handling is a key role player in the global industrial industry
Within this field the industry faces many challenges on a daily basis These
challenges as with any industry are to limit expenses and increase profit Some
of the limiting factors of achieving this goal in the bulk materials handling industry
are lost time due to unscheduled maintenance product losses due to spillage
andhigh costs incurred by increased maintenance
The focus of this study was on the optimisation of transfer chutes and
investigations were carried out to determine the core problems These
investigations were done by observing and monitoring various grades of iron ore
passing through transfer chutes known to have throughput problems The core
problems were identified as high wear on liners in the impact zones skew
loading on receiving conveyors material spillage and chute blockages
These problems cause financial losses to the facility either directly or indirectly
Direct financial losses can be attributed to the frequent replacement of chute
liners while the indirect financial losses are caused by facility down time This is
why it is imperative to optimise the manner in which the transfer of material is
approached A new transfer chute configuration addresses the problems
identified at the facility and the core concepts can be adopted at any bulk
materials handling facility
This new concept examines the utilisation of the hood and spoon concept rather
than the conventional dead box configuration By using the hood and spoon
configuration the material discharge velocity is utilised and carried through to the
discharge onto the receiving conveyor Adding to this design is a honeycomb
dead box configuration in the high impact zones of the hood and spoon This
initiates material on material flow and prolongs the lifetime of the chute liners
The optimisation of transfer chutes in the bulk materials industry
MN van Aarde
100
CHAPTER 6
The radius of the hood should be designed so that it follows the path of the
material trajectory as closely as possible Some facility constraints prohibit this
hood radius from following exactly the same path as the material The radius of
the spoon is designed in such a manner that it receives the material from the
hood and slows it down while turning it into the direction in which the belt is
running Ideally the material should be discharged from the spoon at
approximately the same velocity as the receiving conveyor
If this can be achieved then some major problems suffered by the industry will
have been resolved With the hood having almost the same radius as the
material trajectory impact wear on liners can be significantly reduced By
discharging material from the chute onto the receiving conveyor at the same
velocity as the conveyor belt excessive belt wear and material spillage will be
avoided Further optimisation is however still possible by investigating the
implementation of various skirting options to the side of the conveyor
This new transfer chute configuration also boasts an articulated bottom section in
the spoon The purpose of the adjustable bottom section is to create greater
clearance below the spoon This will allow material on the belt below to pass
unimpeded underneath the spoon In some cases there can be several chutes in
series that discharge onto the same conveyor In these cases it is beneficial to
incorporate an articulated chute in order to have the capability of having a small
drop height between the discharge point in the chute and the receiving conveyor
This low drop height also minimises turbulent flow at the chute discharge point on
the receiving conveyor
The most unique feature to the new design is the implementation of the
honeycomb dead box configuration in the high impact zones Due to these high
impact areas the liners will experience the most wear This section of the chute
is flanged and can be removed separately from the rest of the chute to aid
maintenance In most maintenance operations it may only be necessary to reline The optimisation of transfer chutes in the bulk materials industry
MN van Aarde
101
CHAPTER 6
this small section of the chute Costs are minimised by reducing the time
required for maintenance and the cost of replacing liners
Previously testing of new transfer chute configurations normally involved
implementing the chute and obseNing its ability to perform according to
specification This can however be a costly exercise as it is possible that further
modifications to the chute will be required after implementation Therefore it is
beneficial to verify the new chute configuration before implementation
This is done by simulating the material flow through the chute using Discrete
Element Method A comparison was done between the actual flow in an eXisting
chute and the simulated flow in the same chute configuration This comparison
showed the same result obtained from the simulation and the actual material
flow This method can therefore be used as an accurate simulation tool for
evaluating transfer chute performance
The mathematical calculations describing the material flow in and over the
honeycomb dead box structures are complex Therefore simulation models are
used to show the material behaviour in those areas Simulations show that the
material captured within the dead boxes remains stationary thus protecting the
ceramic liners behind it This is the desired result as it prolongs the life of the
chute liners and reduces maintenance frequencies
If the work is done efficiently it normally takes two days to remove a worn chute
of this configuration fully and replace it with a new one This is normally done
once a year due to the design lifetime of the chute With the new chute
configuration this maintenance schedule can be reduced to two hours once a
year for the replacement of the honeycomb sections only The exposed face of
the honeycomb ribs will wear through until the efficiency of the honeycomb
design is reduced
The optimisation of transfer chutes in the bulk materials industry
MN van Aarde
102
CHAPTER 6
This specific iron ore facility has approximately fifty transfer points During this
exercise only two of these transfer points were replaced with the new chute
configuration The combined annual maintenance time for replacement of these
50 chutes is 100 days If the new chute philosophy is adopted on all these
transfers the annual maintenance time can be reduced to as little as 100 hours
This excludes the unplanned work for cleaning of spillages and fixing or replacing
worn conveyors
There are significant benefits to investigating the problems at specific transfer
points before attempting a new design This gives good insight into where the
focus should be during the design process Ea~y identification and
understanding of the problem areas is essential for a new chute configuration
The new design features can provide a vast improvement and a large benefit to
the bulk materials handling industry
62 RECOMMENDATIONS FOR FURTHER STUDY
During the chute performance tests it was noted that avalanches on the
stockpiles during reclaiming of material causes peaks on the conveyor systems
These peaks in the material stream increase the probability of blockages in the
transfer chutes As a result material spillage occurs and the conveyor belts can
be easily overloaded
This occurrence creates the requirement for further studies on the reclaiming
operations All stacker reclaimers are operated manually which creates ample
room for error Investigations can be done to determine the value of automating
the reclaiming operations Manual interaction cannot be avoided but an
automated system will reduce the possibility for error
Visual inspections on the transfer chute liners indicate that the material tends to
erode the liners away quicker in the grooves between liner plates or ceramic
The optimisation of transfer chutes in the bulk materials industry
MN van Aarde
103
CHAPTER 6
tiles This occurrence seems to be worse in areas of the chute where the
material velocity is the highest
This problem was specifically noticed with ceramic liner tiles The tiles are glued
to the chute surface with an epoxy and this substance also fills the crevices
between the tiles This epoxy is however not resistant to any type of sliding or
impact abrasion If the material gains speed in such a groove between the tiles it
simply erodes the epoxy away Studies to reduce or even eliminate this problem
should be examined
In some situations the layout and configuration of the chute prohibits the tiles
from being inserted in a staggered manner Studies can be done on the
composition of this epoxy in order to increase its resistance to sliding and impact
abrasion By doing so the lifetime of the chute liners can be increased which will
result in minimised facility down time due to maintenance
It seems that it is a global industry problem to find accurate scientific methods of
determining material input parameters for OEM simulations Although most of
the material properties can be determined through testing it is still a challenge to
convert that information into a representative input parameter into OEM It is
therefore recommended that further studies be undertaken to determine a
method by which material test data can be successfully converted into OEM input
parameters
The optimisation of transfer chutes in the bulk materials industry
MN van Aarde
104
REFERENCES ------shy
REFERENCES
[1] ARNOLD P C MCLEAN A G ROBERTS A W 1978 Bulk Solids
storage flow and handling Tunra Bulk Solids Australia Jan
[2] ANON 2008 Peak (Export) OilUSD Survival Dec
httppeakoHsurvivalorgltag=finance Date of access 8 Jun 2009
[3] KESSLER F 2006 Recent developments in the field of bulk conveying
FME Transactions Vol 34 NO4
[4] ANON 2007 Specification for Troughed Belt Conveyors British
Standards BS28901989 25 Sep Date of access 8 Jun 2009
[5] CEMA (Conveyor Equipment Manufacturers Association) Belt Conveyors
6thfor Bulk Materials ed wwwcemanetorg Date of access
10 Jun 2009
[6] DEWICKI G 2003 Computer Simulation of Granular Material Flows
Overland Conveyor Co Inc Jan httpwwwpowderandbulkcom Date
of access 10 Jun 2009
[7] AMERICAN COAL COUNCIL 2009 Engineered chutes control dust for
Ameren U Es Meramec Plant httpwww clean-coal infold rupalindexphp
Date of access 12 Jun 2009
[8] KUMBA IRON ORE 2008 Annual Financial Statements 2008
httpwwwsishenironorecompanycozareportskumba afs 08pdffullpdf
Date of access 13 Jun 2009
The optimisation of transfer chutes in the bulk materials industry
MN van Aarde
105
REFERENCES
[9] METSO BACKGROUNDER 2007 Rock Crushing 22 Feb
httpWWvVmetsocom Date of access 15 Jun 2009
[10] ALTHOFF H 1977 Reclaiming and Stacking System Patent US
4037735
[11] THE SOUTH AFRICAN INSTITUTE OF MATERIALS HANDLING
Conveyor belt installations and related components Chutes Level 1
course on belt conveying technology
httpWWvVsaimhcozaeducationcourse01chuteshtm Date of access
18 Jun 2009
[12] CLARKE R 2008 Hood and spoon internal flow belt conveyor transfer
systems SACEA - seminar 22 Aug httpWWvVsaceaorgzaDate of
access 22 Jun 2009
[13] T W WOODS CONSTRUCTION 2009 Design problems in coal transfer
chutes 24 Mar httpWWvVferretcomaucTW-Woods-Constructions
Date of access 25 Jun 2009
[14] LOUGHRAN J 2009 The flow of coal through transfer chutes 20 Aug
Showcase of research excellence James Cook University Australia
[15] ONEIL M 2006 A guide to coal chute replacement Power Engineering
International Nov httpgoliathecnextcomcoms2lgi 0198-369643Ashy
guide-to-coal-chutehtml Date of access 3 Jul 2009
[16] NORDELL LK 1992 A new era in overland conveyor belt design
httpWWvVckitcozasecureconveyorpaperstroughedoverlandoverland
htm Date of access 3 Jul 2009
The optimisation of transfer chutes in the bulk materials industry
MN van Aarde
106
REFERENCES
[17] Rowland C 1992 Dust Control at Transfer Points
httpwwwckitcozasecureconveyorpapersbionic-research-2d-bri2shy
paper05htm Date of access 4 Jul 2009
[18] KRAM ENGINEERING Ceramic composite impact blocks
httpwwwkramengineeringcozacercomhtmIDate of access
5 Jul 2009
I19] BLAZEK C 2005 Kinkaid InteliFlo tradeInstallation Source for Plats
Power Atticle Oct
httpwwwbenetechusacompdf caseStudyBe neKi ncArti c pdf
Date of access 10 Aug 2009
[20] CRP Engineering Corp Modern Transfer Chute Designs for Use in
Material Handling
httpwwwcbpengineeringcompdflTransfer Chutespdf Date of access
26 Apr 2010
[21] ROZENTALS J 2008 Rational design of conveyor chutes Bionic
Research Institute South African Institute of Materials Handling
[22] ROBERTS AW SCOTT OJ 1981 Flow of bulk solids through
transfer chutes of variable geometry and profile Bulk Solids Handling
1(4) Dec
[23] CARSON JW ROYAL TA GOODWILL DJ 1986 Understanding
and Eliminating Particle Segregation Problems Bulk Solids Handling
6(1) Feb
[24] BENJAMIN CW 2004 The use of parametric modelling to design
transfer chutes and other key components Gulf Conveyor Group The optimisation of transfer chutes in the bulk materials industry
MN van Aarde
107
l25] STUART DICK D ROYAL TA 1992 Design Principles for Chutes to
Handle Bulk Solids Bulk Solids Handling 12(3) Sep
[26J REICKS AV RUDOLPHI TJ 2004 The Importance and Prediction of
Tension Distribution around the Conveyor Belt Path Bulk materials
handling by conveyor belt 5(2)
(271 RAMOS CM 1991 The real cost of degradation
institute Chute design conference 1991
Bionic research
[28] ROBERTS AW 1969 An investigation of the gravity flow of non
cohesive granular materials through discharge chutes Transactions of
the ACMEjournal of engineering for indust~ May
[29] TAYLOR HJ 1989 Guide to the design of transfer chutes and chute
linings for bulk materials
association 1989
mechanical handling engineers
[30] ROBERTS AW 1999 Chute design application transfer chute design
Design guide for chutes in bulk solids handling The University of
Newcastle Australia
[31] NORDELL LK 1994 Palabora installs Curved Transfer Chute in Hard
Rock to Minimise Belt Cover Wear Bulk Solids Handling 14 Dec
[32] ROZENTALS J 1991 Flow of Bulk Solids in Chute Design
research institute Chute design conference 1991
Bionic
The optimisation oftransfer chutes in the bulk materials industry
MN van Aarde
108
REFERENCES
[33] ROBERTS AW WICHE SJ 2007 Feed Chute Geometry for
Minimum Belt Wear (h International conference of bulk materials
handling 17 Oct
[34J POWDER HANDLING New OEM Conveyor Transfer Chute Design
Software Helix Technologies
httpvwvwpowderhandlingcomauarticesnew-dem-conveyor-transfershy
chute-design-software Date of access 12 Aug 2009
[35J SAWLEY ML CLEARY PW 1999 A Parallel Discrete Element
Method for Industrial Granular Flow SimUlations EPFL - Super
Computing Review (11)
[36] DEWICKI G 2003 Bulk Material Handling and Processing - Numerical
Techniques and Simulation of Granular Material Overland Conveyor
Company Bulk Solids Handling 23(2)
[37J FA VIER J 2009 Continuing Improvements Boost use of Discrete
Element Method Oil and Gas Engineer- Production Processing 7 Oct
[38] KRAUS E F KA TTERFELD A Usage of the Discrete Element Method in
Conveyor Technologies Institute for Conveyor Technologies (IFSL) The
Otto-von-Guericke University of Magdeburg
[39] MOYS MH VAN NIEROP MA VAN TONDER JC GLOVER G
2005 Validation of the Discrete Element Method (OEM) by Comparing
Predicted Load Behaviour of a Grinding Mill with Measured Data School
for Process and Materials Engineering University of Witwatersrand
Johannesburg The optimisation of transfer materials industry
MN van Aarde
109
REFERENCES
[40J MciLVINA P MOSSAD R 2003 Two dimensional transfer chute
analysis using a continuum method Third international conference on
CFD in the Minerals and Process Industry CSIRO Melbourne Australia
(41J Overland Conveyor Company Inc 2009 Applied DEM
httpwwwapplieddemcomDate of access 26 Apr 2010
(42] DEM SOLUTIONS 2008 Advanced Particle Simulation Capabilities with
EDEM 21 Press release 5 Nov
[43J DEM SOLUTIONS 2008 Martin Engineering Expands use of EDEMTM
Software in Design of Solids Handling Equipment Press release 20 Feb
(44] COETZEE CJ ELS DNJ 2009 Calibration of Discrete Element
Parameters and the Modelling of Silo Discharge and Bucket Filling
Computers and Electronics in Agriculture 65 Mar
[45] DAVID J KRUSES PE Conveyor Belt Transfer Chute Modelling and
Other Applications using The Discrete Element Method in the Material
Handling Industry
httpwwwckitcozasecureconveyorpaperstrouqhedconveyorconveyor
Date of access 3 Sep 2009
bulk materials industry
MN van Aarde
110
ApPENDIXA
ApPENDIX A MATERIAL TESTS AND LINER SELECTiON
The optimisation of-transfer chutes in the bulk materials industry
MN van Aarde
11-1
ApPENDIX A
MATERIAL TEST WORK AND LINER SELECTION
Material samples were taken from the stockpile area for evaluation and testing
These samples represent the worst case materials for impact wear and flow
problems Tests were conducted by external consultants as this is a speciality
field Therefore no detail information on how the tests are conducted is currently
available Results from these tests should indicate the worst case parameters for
chute design according to each specific liner type tested
The material handled by the facility varied from 4 mm to 34 mm lump size A mid
range lump size ore was identified as the preferred material to use for wear
testing This decision was based on the specific ore type maximum lump size of
15 mm as required for the wear test The wear test apparatus used cannot
provide conclusive results with the larger lump sizes of 34 mm and thus smaller
sizes are used Guidance on which ore samples to take was given by the
external consultants tasked with performing the test work
The test work is divided into two sections Firstly the flow test work is carried out
on the finer material with a higher clay content known to have bad flow angles
Included in the selection of fine materials is a sample of the scraper dribblings
This is the material scraped off the belt underneath the head pulley Secondly
the wear tests were conducted on 15 mm samples as explained above
A few common liners were selected for testing These liners are shown in
Table A Some of these liners are known for their specific purpose and
characteristics Polyurethane is known to have a very good coefficient of friction
and will therefore improve the flow of material This material does however
wear out quicker in high impact applications Therefore it is only considered for
use inside the dribbling chute
The optimisation of transfer chutes in the bulk materials industry
MN van Aarde
112
ApPENDIX A
As can be seen from Figure 37 in section 432 the dribbling chute will only see
scraper dribblings from the primary and secondary scrapers It is protected from
any main stream flow of material by the start up chute This makes the
polyurethane liner a prime candidate for lining this section of the chute
Table A Material tested vs liner type
I Flow Tests Wear Tests
Liner T
en aJ c
u
I
i
N en aJ c
u
Cf)
en aJ c
u
I en
shy OJaJ C 0 shyj -shy 0 u pound
(f) shy0
T
aJ ~ j 0 0
N aJ ~ j 0 0 i
I Chrome x x x x x
Carbide
x x x x xI VRN 500 I
x x x x x x94
Alumina
Ceramic i I
Poly x
Urethane I I I
FLOW TEST WORK
The fines 1 sample was tested at three different moisture contents of 36 41
and 47 This is 70 80 and 90 of saturation moisture respectively No
noticeable difference was observed in the wall friction angles Therefore the
fines 2 and fines 3 samples were tested at 80 of saturation which is 42 and
43 moisture content respectively
Test work showed that the minimum chute angle required for flow increased as
the impact pressure increased Chute angles were measured up to impact
pressures of about 8 kPa The worst chute angle obtained was 62deg This means
that no angle inside the chute should be less than 62deg from the horizontal
The industry 113
MN van Aarde
ApPENDIXA
The scraper dribblings were tested at a moisture content of 12 This material
possesses the most clay content and therefore has the worst flow properties
During testing of this material water was added to improve the flow At an
impact pressure of 03 kPa the minimum chute angle drops from 62deg to 56deg when
adding a fine mist spray of water
WEAR TEST WORK
As stated in chapter 4 wear tests were conducted on the chrome carbide
overlay ceramics and VRN500 The results of these tests are shown as non
dimensional wear ratios of mm wearmm travel of bulk solid sliding on the wear
liners coupon at a given force Test results shown in Table B indicate that the
chrome carbide will have about 185 times the lifetime of 94 alumina ceramics
The VRN500 liner will wear about 6 times faster than the 94 alumina ceramics
at the same force
Table B Wear ratios of liners at two different pressure ranges
lore Wall Coupon 65 kPa 163kPa -173 kPa I i
Coarse 1 on 94 Alumina Ceramic 90 E-9 37 E-8
Coarse 1 on Chrome Carbide 87 E-9 20 E-8
Coarse 1 on VRN500 91 E-8 I 24 E-7 i
Coarse 2 on 94 Alumina Ceramics 38 E-9 22 E-8
Coarse 2 on Chrome Carbide 55 E-9 15 E-8
Coarse 2 on VRN500 66 E-8 25 E-7 I
LINER SELECTION
The lifetime of the liners is not the only criteria Maintainability and cost are also
factors that must be considered Chrome carbide seems to be the liner of choice
for this application However the specific type of chrome carbide tested is not
The optimisation of transfer chutes industry 114
MN van Aarde
ApPEND[xA
manufactured locally and the imported cost is approximately three times that of
ceramics
VRN500 is slightly cheaper than ceramics and can easily be bolted to the back
plate of the chute which makes maintenance very simple Ceramics are
however widely used on the facility and the maintenance teams are well trained
for this specific liner Therefore 94 alumina ceramics is chosen for this
application
The optimisation of transfer chutes in the bulk materials industry
MN van Aarde
115
ApPENODlt B
ApPENDIX B CHUTE CONTROL PHILOSOPHY
The optfmisation of transfer chutes in the bulk materials industry
MN van Aarde
116
ApPENDIX B
SPOON IN THE OPERATING POSITION
For the spoon to be in the operating position the moving head must be over that
specific spoon and the feeding stockyard conveyor must be running This means
that material will be fed through the chute In this case the spoon needs to be in
the operating position to prevent spillage
However when the chute is in the operating position and the feeding conveyor
trips for any reason the actuated spoon section must not move to the non
operating position If the spoon position feedback fails then the system must trip
and the spoon must remain in its last position The downstream conveyor must
also fail to start with this condition
SPOON IN THE NON OPERATING POSITION
As a rule the spoon needs to be in the non operating position when the moving
head on that specific stockyard conveyor is in the purging position (position C)
The reason is that when a stacker reclaimer is in stacking mode any upstream
stacker reclaimer can be reclaiming The reclaimed material on CV 5 or CV 6
will have to pass underneath the actuated chute
ACTUATED SPOON OVER CV 5
As an example for the movement of any actuated spoon on CV 5 the following
are considered When the moving heads of any of the stockyard conveyors are
in position A and that specific stockyard conveyor is running then the rest of the
actuated spoons over CV 5 must be in the non operating position The
following scenario provides a better understanding
bull CV 4 is running
bull CV 4 moving head is in position A
The optimisation of transfer chutes in the bulk materials industry
MN van Aarde
117
ApPENDIXB
In this situation all the actuated spoons on CV 5 except underneath CV 4
must be in the non operating position
ACTUATED SPOON OVER CV 6
As an example for the movement of any actuated spoon on CV 6 the following
are considered When the moving heads of any of the stockyard conveyors are
in position B and that specific stockyard conveyor is running then the rest of the
actuated spoons over CV 6 must be in the non operating position The
following scenario is similar to 453 but explains the control philosophy for the
moving head in position B
bull CV 2 is running
bull CV 2 moving head is in position B
In this situation all the actuated spoons on CV 6 except underneath CV 2
must be in the non operating position
The optimisation of transfer chutes in bulk materials industry
MN van Aarde
118
LIST OF FIGURES
LIST OF FIGURES
Figure 1 Growth in global crude steel production from 1996 to 2006 [2] 2
Figure 2 Typical in-line transfer point [6] 4
Figure 3 90deg transfer point [7J 4
Fig ure 4 Material lump sizes through a crushing plant 6
Figure 5 Stacker Reclaimer in reclaiming mode 7
Figure 6 Typical dead box [11J9
Figure 7 Typical cascade chute [11] 9
Figure 8 Typical dynamic chute [12] 10
Figure 9 Radial door used in chutes under ore passes or silos [11] 1 0
Figure 10 Flopper gate diverting material to different receiving conveyors [11J 11
Figure 11 Ch ute liner degradation 12
Figure 12 Results of continuous belt wear at transfer points 13
Figure 1 Dust from a transfer point onto a stockpie13
Figure 14 Ceramic composite liners [18]15
Figure 15 Benetech Inteliflow J-Glide transfer chute [19] 16
Figure 16 Flow simulation of the Benetech Ineliflo chute [19] 17
Figure 17 Four step process for plant design and commissioning [1] 27
Figure 18 Vertical curve on incline conveyor 28
Figure 19 Protective roller on a transfer chute 29
Figure 20 Geometry of the impact plate and material trajectory [30J30
Figure 21 Model for the impact of a particle on a flat surface [29] 31
Figure 22 Ore flow path in the curved chute onto the incline conveyor [31] 35
Figure 23 Gentle deceleration of the product before impact on the receiving belt
[32] 35
Figure 24 Typical feed chute discharge model [33] 37
Figure 25 Layout of conveyors for chute test work 43
Figure 26 Configuration of the existing transfer chute44
Figure 27 Clear chute indicating camera angle 46
The optimisation of transfer chutes in the bulk materials industry
MN van Aarde
ix
LIST OF FIGURES
Figure 28 Coarse material at 8 000 tlh 46
Figure 29 Fine material at 8 000 tlh 47
Figure 30 Blocked chute with coarse material at 8600 tIh 47
Figure 31 Damaged side skirt 49
Figure 32 View behind the chute of the receiving conveyor before loading 50
Figure 33 View behind the chute of the receiving conveyor during loading 50
Figure 34 Peak surges experienced during reclaiming operations 52
Figure 35 Stockyard head end layout 59
Figure 36 Dimensional constraints on the existing transfer configuration 60
Figure 37 Hood and spoon configuration for the 90deg transfer 63
Figure 38 Hood velocity profile 65
Figure 39 Spoon velocity profile 66
Figure 40 Chute cross section 67
Fig ure 43 Honeycomb wear box positioning 69
Figure 44 Wear box in the hood section 70
Figure 45 Spacing arrangement of honeycomb ribs inside the hood 71
Figure 46 Wear box in the spoon section 72
Figure 47 Liner detail of the spoon honeycomb wear box 73
Figure 41 Spoon in the operational position 74
Figure 42 Spoon in the non operational position 75
Figure 48 Flow analysis examples a) separation and screening b) hoppers
feeders [36J 80
Figure 49 Simulations results from Fluenttrade [4OJ 83
Figure 50 Simulation results from Bulk Flow Analysttrade [41J83
Figure 51 Determination of material properties for an accurate angle of repose88
Figure Actual material flow with coarse Sat 10 000 tIh 89
Figure 53 Material flow pattem through the existing chute 90
Figure 54 Cross sectional side view of material flow through the existing chute91
Figure 55 Material flow through hood at 10 000 tlh 92
Figure 56 Material flow through spoon at 10 000 tlh 93
Figure 57 Determination of the optimum hood location 94
The optimisation of transfer chutes in the bulk materials industry
MN van Aarde
x
OF FIGURES
Figure 58 Material behaviour through hood 96
Figure 59 Material behaviour through spoon 96
The optimisation of transfer chutes in the bulk materials industry
MN van Aarde
xi
LIST OF TABLES
LIST OF TABLES
Table 1 Design Input Reference Requirements [24J 24
Table 2 Iron are grades used for chute test work 45
Table 3 Results from test programme 54
The optimisation of transfer chutes in the bulk materials industry
M N van Aarde
xii
---------------------------------
CV
NOMENCLATURE
NOMENCLATURE
SCADA
CCTV
CEMA
DEM
kPa
mm
MSHA
ms
mt
MW
NIOSH
OSHA
RampD
tlh
3D
Supervisory Control And Data Acquisition
Closed Circuit Television
Conveyor Equipment Manufacturers Association
Conveyor
Discrete Element Method
Kilopascal
Millimetres
Mine Safety and Health Administration
Metres per second
Metric Tons
Megawatt
National Institute for Occupational Safety and Health
Occupational Safety and Health Administration
Radius of curvature
Research and Development
Tons per hour
Three Dimensional
The optimisation of transfer chutes in the bulk materials industry
MN van Aarde
xiii
CHAPTER 1
CHAPTER 1 INTRODUCTION TO TRANSFER CHUTES IN THE BULK
MATERIALS HANDLING INDUSTRY
The optimisation of transfer chutes in the bulk materials industry
MN van Aarde
1
CHAPTER 1
11 INTRODUCTION TO TRANSFER CHUTES
111 Bulk material handling industry
In order to comprehend the utilisation of transfer chutes fully it is imperative to
first understand the industry in which it is used Transfer chutes are most
commonly used in the bulk materials handling industry Bulk materials handling
operations perform a key function in a great number and variety of industries
throughout the world as stated in 1978 by Arnold McLean and Roberts [1 J
The nature of materials handling and scale of industrial operation varies from
industry to industry and country to country These variations are based on the
industrial and economic capacity and requirements of the specific industry or
country Regardless of the variations in industry the relative costs of storing
handling and transporting bulk materials are in the majority of cases very
significant
o
Figure 1 Growth in global crude steel production from 1996 to 2006 [2J
The optimisation of transfer chutes in the bulk materials industry
MN van Aarde
2
CHAPTER 1
The chart from BHP Billiton shown in Figure 1 provides a clear indication of the
actual drivers of global materials demand Figure 1 indicates the percentage
growth in crude steel production from all the major role players between 1996
and 2006 China accounted for 65 of the 494 million tonnes of global steel
production growth between 1996 and 2006 Europe grew by 6 while the other
countries grew by 20 [2]
These figures emphasise that bulk materials handling performs a key function in
the global industry and economy [1] Because of market requirements new
products continuously evolve This is also true for the field of bulk conveying
technologies [3] It can be assumed that the evolution of new technology is due
to the requirement for more efficient and cost effective operation
The case study which will be discussed from Chapter 3 onwards is an iron ore
export facility This facility exports approximately 50 million tonnes per annum
With each hour of down time the financial losses equate to approximately
R750 000 This highlights the fact that handling systems should be designed and
operated with a view to achieving maximum efficiency and reliability
112 Function of transfer chutes
BS2890 (Specification for Troughed Belt Conveyors) gives the definition for
transfer chutes as follows A straight curved or spiral open topped or enclosed
smooth trough by which materials are directed and lowered by gravity [4] For
any belt conveyor system to operate successfully the system requires that [5]
bull the conveyor belt be loaded properly
bull the material transported by the conveyor is discharged properly
The transfer of bulk material can either be from a belt bin hopper feeder or
stockpile and occurs at a transfer point In most cases this transfer point requires
optimisation of transfer chutes in the bulk materials industry
MN van Aarde
3
CHAPTER 1 - ----~--~--------------~--------
a transfer chute [5] In industry the most common use of transfer chutes is for
transferring bulk material from one conveyor belt to another This transfer of
material can be done in any direction as simplistically explained in Figure 2 and
Figure 3
Figure 2 Typical in-line transfer point [6J
Figure 2 shows a basic in-line transfer of material from the end of one conveyor
belt onto the start of another conveyor belt Figure 3 illustrates a more intricate
design where the direction of material transport is changed by an angle of 90 0 bull
This design or any other design entailing a directional change in flow normally
requires more detailed engineering [7
The optimisation of transfer chutes in the bulk materials industry
MN van Aarde
4
CHAPTER 1
Regardless of the direction or type of transfer there are some design
requirements that always need special attention Some of these requirements
are reduced wear on chute liners correct discharge velocity minimum material
degradation and minimum belt abrasion The correct design will also eliminate
blockages shape the load correctly and minimise the creation of dust [7]
12 VARIOUS APPLICATIONS AND CONFIGURATIONS OF TRANSFER CHUTES
The application of transfer chutes is central to any operation in the bulk handling
industry Whether it is mining operations storing stacking importing or
exporting of bulk material the transfer of material is always required On the
mining side the challenges involved with materials handling are probably some of
the most extreme
This is due to the great variation in lump sizes that must be catered for At
Sishen iron ore mine seven iron ore products are produced conforming to
different chemical and physical specifications The current mining process at
Sishen entails [8]
bull Removal of topsoil and stockpiling
bull Drilling and blasting of ore
bull Loading of iron ore and transporting to the crushers
bull Crushing and screening into size fractions
bull Beneficiation of all size fractions
bull Stockpiling onto various product beds
The processes with the most intricate and complex chute arrangements are
probably crushing and screening as well as stacking and reclaiming of material
The optimisation of transfer chutes in the bulk materials industry
11 N van Aarde
5
CHAPTER 1
121 Crushing
An excavator or wheeled loader transfers the rock to be crushed into the feed
hopper of the primary crusher The primary crusher breaks the large rock
boulders or run of mine material into smaller grain sizes Some of the bigger
crushers in the industry can crack boulders that are about one cubic meter in
size All the crushed material passes over a screen to separate the different
lump sizes The material that falls through the screen is transferred via a series
of transfer chutes and conveyor belts to the stockpile area [9]
Where the material does not pass through the screen another system of transfer
chutes and conveyor belts transfers this material to a secondary crusher The
material is fed into this crusher via a transfer chute from the discharge of a
conveyor belt All the processed material is then transferred to the stockpile area
via a separate series of transfer chutes and conveyor systems [9] Throughout
this whole process the material lump size changes and with it the transfer chute
requirements
Figure 4 Material lump sizes through a crushing plant
The optimisation of transfer chutes in the bulk materials industry
MN van Aarde
6
CHAPTER 1
Figure 4 shows some spillage from a conveyor between a primary and secondary
crusher The shovel in the picture provides a good reference as to the variation
in material lump size on the walkway
122 Stacking and Recaiming
Normally the stockyard area has an elongated yard conveyor for moving bulk
material in the longitudinal direction of the stockyard Straddling the yard
conveyor transversely is the rail mounted undercarriage of the stacker reclaimer
Three main chutes transfer material through the machine [10] Figure 5 shows
this machine in action while reclaiming material from a stockpile
Figure 5 Stacker Reclaimer in reclaiming mode
The first chute will transfer material to the incline conveyor of the machine when
the material has to be stacked on the stockpile In the case where the material
must bypass the machine this chute will transfer material from the tripper back
onto the yard conveyor [10]
The optimisation of transfer chutes in the bulk materials industry
MN van Aarde
7
CHAPTER 1
The second chute transfers material from the incline conveyor onto the boom
conveyor This is normally a difficult process because the boom conveyor is
never in the same direction as the incline conveyor From the end of the boom
conveyor the material is Simply discharged onto the stockpile [10]
When reclaiming stockpile material the bucket whee at the head end of the
boom conveyor scoops up material and deposits it back onto the boom conveyor
From here it is discharged into the centre chute of the machine This chute then
discharges the material onto the yard conveyor for further processing In some
cases the bottom section of this centre chute must be moved out of the way to
allow free passage of material discharged from the tripper chute onto the yard
conveyor [10]
123 Chute configurations
Various chute configurations are used in the bulk materials handling industry
These configurations depend on the specific requirements of the system layout
or material properties There are basically two main configurations consisting of
dead box chutes and dynamic chutes Both of these configurations have their
specific applications in industry The major difference is that dead box chutes
use the material being transferred as a chute liner whereas dynamic chutes are
lined with a high wear resistant material A combination of both can also be
used
If the material being transferred is relatively dry such as goid ore dead boxes
prove to be more beneficial One of the applications of a ded box is to absorb
the direct impact of material discharged from a conveyor into a head chute as
can be seen in Figure 6 Other applications are in long or high transfer points In
these transfers the momentum of falling material must be reduced before
reaching the receiving conveyor belt in order to reduce wear of the belt [11]
The optimisation of transfer chutes in the bulk materials industry
MN van Aarde
8
CHAPTER 1
Figure 6 Typical dead box [11]
As shown in Figure 7 dead boxes are also used to accomplish changes in the
vertical flow direction by inserting angled panels This configuration where dead
boxes are used as deflection plates or impact wear plates is known as a cascade
chute In this case the deflection plate or the impact wear plate hardness is
equal to that of the feed material [11]
Figure 7 Typical cascade chute [11]
The hood and spoon chute or dynamic chute is configured so that the hood
catches and changes the material trajectory path to exit with a vertical velocity
When the material impacts the spoon it slides down the smooth spoon surface
The material flow direction is changed to the direction of the receiving conveyor
as shown in Figure 8 [12]
The optimisation of transfer chutes in the bulk materials industry
MN van Aarde
9
CHAPTER 1
Figure 8 Typical dynamic chute [12J
Ancillary equipment used with this configuration of chutes is radial doors and
flopper gates Radial doors are used successfully below ore passes or silos for
an onoff feed control as shown by Figure 9 One drawback of radial doors is the
possibility of jamming while closing In order to counteract this problem a
knocker arm between the cylinder door and the rod can be added This helps to
close the door with full force open with reduced force or hammered open [11]
Figure 9 Radial door used in chutes under ore passes or silos [11J
The optimisation of transfer chutes in the bulk materials industry
MN van Aarde
10
CHAPTER 1
The function of a f10pper gate is to divert the flow of material in a chute when one
conveyor is required to feed either of two discharge points as shown in Figure 10
For this same purpose a diverter car can also be used where a section of the
chute moves in and out of the path of material flow The critical area in the
design of a flop per gate is the hinge point In order for the gate to be self
cleaning the hinge point should be placed above the apex of the double chute
This also prevents rock traps that can jam the gate [11]
COVERED
Figure 10 Flopper gate diverling material to different receiving conveyors [11J
13 RECURRING CHUTE PROBLEMS AND COUNTERMEASURES FROM INDUSTRY
Transfer chutes are a fundamental link when conveying ore and therefore it is
important to get it right at the outset of design and fabrication Design and
fabrication issues can cause numerous problems when transferring material
Historically conveyor system design focused on the systems overall structural
integrity while ensuring that the equipment would fit within the facilitys
constraints [13] [14] [15]
The optimisation of transfer chutes in the bulk materials industry
MN van Aarde
11
CHAPTER 1
Little attention was given to design analysis or consideration for material flow
characteristics Normally the solution for controlling flow was to implement
simple rock boxes [15] This type of chute configuration is still commonly used in
industry but with more emphasis on the flow of material The most recurrent
problems on transfer chutes are [13] [14]
bull Spillage
bull Blocked chutes
bull High wear on the receiving belt due to major differences between the
material velocity and the belt velocity
bull Rapid chute wear
bull Degradation of the material being transferred
bull Excessive generation of dust and noise
bull Miss tracking of the receiving conveyor belt due to skew loading from the
transfer chute
Figure 11 Chute liner degradation
Figure 11 shows the excessive wear on ceramic tiles where the material
trajectory from the feeding belt impacts the chute These tiles are replaceable
and a maintenance schedule normally specifies the replacement intervals A
The optimisation of transfer chutes in the bulk materials industry 12
MN van Aarde
CHAPTER 1
problem arises when the frequency of these maintenance intervals is too high
due to excessive wear on the liners
Figure 12 Results of continuous belt wear at transfer points
The conveyor belt can account for up to 60 of the capital cost of a bulk
materials handling plant This means that the cost implications of constant
replacement of a conveyor belt due to wear can become significantly higher
than the original capital investment [16] Figure 12 shows the extreme damage
on a conveyor belt caused by abrasion and gouging
Figure 13 Dust from a transfer point onto a stockpile
The optimisation of transfer chutes in the bulk materials industry
MN van Aarde
13
CHAPTER 1 --~ ---------------------------shy
The presence of dust is an indisputable fact in many industries concerned with
the handling or processing of products such as coal mineral ores and many
others [17] As in the case of spillage it is easy to identify transfer systems that
cause dust clouds Environmental regulations are in place to prevent excessive I
dust emissions
Government organisations such as the Occupational Safety and Health
Administration (OSHA) the Mine Safety and Health Administration (MSHA) and
the National Institute for Occupational Safety and Health (NIOSH) closely monitor
dust levels at all coal handling facilities [13] Therefore it is imperative that the
chute design process caters for limiting dust emissions
Systems normally used in industry are enclosed skirting systems bag houses
and dust collectors This however is only treating the symptom rather than
eliminating the primary cause In order to minimise dust generation the use of
low impact angles and minimal chute contact is required (14] One of the most
successful methods of controlling dust is atomised water spray systems using a
combination of high pressure water and chemical substances
Over the years considerable research has gone into minimising wear on transfer
chutes There are currently a few different liner types to choose from depending
on the configuration and application of the chute These include ceramic tiles
chrome carbide overlay materials and typi~al hardened steel plates such as
VRN A combination of liner materials can also be used similar to the one
shown in Figure 14
The opUmisation of transfer chutes in the bulk materials industry
MN van Aarde
14
CHAPTER 1
Figure 14 Ceramic composite liners [18J
This ceramic composite liner is an example of the new technology available in
chute lining materials It is a high wear resistant surface made from cylindrical
alumina ceramic pellets bound within a resilient rubber base The purpose of this
material is to provide wear resistance through the use of ceramics while the
rubber dampens the impact forces [18]
Some innovative concepts for chute design have been implemented since the
materials handling industry started to incorporate new ideas Benetech Inc
installed a new generation hood and spoon type chute at Dominions 1200 MW
Kincaid coal powered generating station as shown in Figure 15 This chute
replaced the conventional dead box chute [19] Their innovation is to use a pipe
configuration combined with the hood and spoon concept
The optimisation of transfer chutes in the bulk materials industry
MN van Aarde
15
CHAPTER 1
Figure 15 Benetech Inteliflow J-Gide transfer chute [19J
This chute has sufficient chute wall slope and cross sectional area to prevent
material build-up and blocked chutes Reduced collision forces in the chute
minimize material degradation and the creation of excessive dust The material
velocity in the chute is controlled by the wall angles to obtain a discharge velocity
with the same horizontal component as the belt velocity [19] Figure 16 shows a
flow simulation of the Benetech concept The simulation shows that this concept
will result in lower impact forces and reduce belt abrasion
The optimisation of transfer chutes in the bulk materials industry
MN van Aarde
16
CHAPTER 1
Figure 16 Flow simulation ofthe Benetech Ineliflo chute [19J
CBP Engineering Corp also considers the concept of pipe type sections to be
the answer to most of the transfer chute problems They describe it as a curved
or half round chute The modern perception is to gently guide the material in the
required direction rather than use a square box design or deflector doors which
turns or deflects the flow [20]
The industry is striving towards developing new technology in transfer chute
design One solution is to incorporate soft loading transfer chutes to alter the
material flow direction with minimum impact on the side walls of chute and
receiving conveyor As experienced by many industries these types of chutes
can transfer material onto the receiving conveyor at almost the same velocity as
the conveyor By doing so many of the problems with material transfer can be
eliminated [13]
Most of these solutions as proposed by industry only address a few of the
numerous problems experienced with transfer chutes The dynamic hood and
The optimisation of transfer chutes in the bulk materials industry
MN van Aarde
17
CHAPTER 1
spoon chute appears to afford the best opportunity for solving most of the
problems There are still however many unanswered questions surrounding this
design
Figure 11 shows the installation of a hood type chute in the iron ore industry It is
clear from this image that liner wear in the higher impact areas is still an area of
concern Improvements can still be made to this design in order to further
enhance its performance
14 PURPOSE OF THIS RESEARCH
The bulk materials handling industry is constantly facing the challenge of
implementing transfer chutes that satisfy all the system requirements Problems
such as high wear spillage blockages and the control of material flow are just
some of the major challenges faced by the industry
The objective of this research is to identify problems experienced with transfer
chutes of an existing bulk handling system and to apply current design solutions
in eliminating these problems In doing so the research aims to introduce a new
method of minimising liner wear caused by high impact velocities
Dynamic chutes are discussed in particular where the entire design process
addresses the problems identified on chutes in brown field projects Approaching
chute design from a maintenance point of view with the focus on reducing liner I
degradation will provide a fresh approach to transfer chute design The
concepts disc~ssed in this dissertation (dynamic and dead box chutes) are
commonly used in industry However some research is done to determine
whether a combination of these concepts can solve some of the problems
experienced by industry
The optimisation of transfer chutes in the bulk materials industry 18
MN van Aarde
CHAPTER 1
At the hand of all the information provided in this dissertation its purpose is to
enable the chute designers to better understand the process of chute
optimisation and design This is achieved through the discussion of a case study
where the chutes are evaluated and re-designed to achieve the desired
performance
15 SYNOPSIS OF THIS DISSERTATION
Chapter 1 gives an introduction to the bulk materials industry and the role that
transfer chutes plays in this industry Some of the problems that the industries
have been experiencing with transfer chutes were identified and the diverse
solutions to these problems discussed These solutions were reviewed to
identify whether improvement would be possible
Chapter 2 provides a better understanding of the functionality and the
conceptualisation of transfer chutes as well as investigating the theory behind
material flow through transfer chutes This theory reviews the research and
design objectives used as a guideline when approaching a new chute
configuration The guidelines for evaluating and designing transfer chutes are
used to verify the performance of these chutes in the iron ore industry
Chapter 3 identifies some practical problems experienced on transfer chutes a~
an existing bulk transfer facility These problems are identified through a series
of tests where the actual flow inside the chutes is monitored via CCTV cameras
The results obtained from these tests are specific to this facility but can provide
insight into the cause of some problems generally experienced in the industry
These results can provide helpful information when modifying or re-designing
new transfer chutes
Chapter 4 uses the theory discussed in Chapter 2 to conceptualise a new
transfer chute configuration for the transfer points that were tested All the facility
The optimisation of transfer chutes in the bulk materials industry 19
MN van Aarde
CHAPTER 1
constraints are taken into account during the process in order to obtain an
optimum solution to the problems identified during the chute test work The old
chutes did not have major problems with liner wear due to large dead boxes
However this remains a serious consideration for the new dynamic chute design
due to its configuration where there is continuous sliding abrasion of the chute
surface A new concept for the reduction of liner degradation is introduced in this
chapter
Before manufacturing and installing this new concept it is important to verify that
it will perform according to conceptual design Chapter 5 is a discussion on the
use of the Discrete Element Method as a verification tool A simulation of the
new transfer chute concept is done to visualise the behaviour of the material as it
passes through the new transfer chute configuration
Chapter 6 discusses the benefits of the new transfer chute configuration A
conclusion is made as to what the financial implications will be with the
implementation of this new concept Recommendations are made for future
studies in the field of bulk materials handling These recommendations focus on
the optimisation of processes and the reduction of maintenance cost to the
facility
The optimisation of transfer chutes in the bulk materials industry
MN van Aarde
20
CHAPTER 2
CHAPTER 2 BASIC CONSIDERATIONS IN CHUTE DESIGN
The optimisation of transfer chutes in the bulk materials industry
MN van Aarde
21
CHAPTER 2
21 PREFACE
In an economic driven world the pressure for production is often the cause of the
loss of production This is a bold statement and is more factual than what the
industry would like to admit This is also valid in the bulk materials handling
industry Production targets seldom allow time for investigation into the root
cause of the problems The quick fix option is often adopted but is frequently the
cause of even more maintenance stoppages
Existing chutes on brown field projects often fail due to an initial disregard for the
design criteria changes in the system parameters or lack of maintenance
These transfer points are often repaired on site by adding or removing platework
and ignoring the secondary functions of a transfer chute Therefore it is
imperative to always consider the basic chute specifications when addressing a
material transfer problem [21]
22 DESIGN OBJECTIVES
In the quest to improve or design any transfer point some ground rules must be
set This can be seen as a check list when evaluating an existing chute or
designing a new chute Transfer chutes should aim to meet the following
requirements as far as possible [21] [22] [23]
bull Ensure that the required capacity can be obtained with no risk of blockage
bull Eliminate spillage
bull Minimise wear on all components and provide the optimal value life cycle
solution
bull Minimise degradation of material and generation of excessive dust
bull Accommodate and transfer primary and secondary scraper dribblings onto
the receiving conveyor
The optimisation of transfer chutes in the bulk materials industry
MN van Aarde
22
CHAPTER 2
bull Ensure that any differences between the flow of fine and coarse grades are
catered for
bull Transfer material onto the receiving conveyor so that at the feed point onto
the conveyor
bull the component of the material now (parallel to the receiving conveydr) is as
close as possible to the belt velocity (at least within 10) to minimise the
power required to accelerate the material and to minimise abrasive wear of
the belt
bull the vertical velocity component of the material flow is as low as possible so
as to minimise wear and damage to the belt as well as to minimise spillage
due to material bouncing off the belt
bull The flow is centralised on the belt and the lateral flow is minimised so as
not to affect belt tracking and avoid spillage
With the design of a new chute there are up to 46 different design inputs with 19
of these being absolutely critical to the success of the design Some of the most
critical preliminary design considerations are shown in Table 1 [24]
The optimisation of transfer chutes in the bulk materials industry
MN van Aarde
23
CHAPTER 2
Table 1 Design Input Reference Requirements [24J
Aria Unit
Feed Conveyor
Belt Speed r ms
Belt Width mm
JibHead Pulley Dia mm
Pulley Width mm
Angle to Horizontal at the Head Pulley degrees
Belt Troughing Angle degrees
Sight Height Data
Feed Conveyor Top of Belt to Roof mm
Drop Height mm
Receiving Conveyor Top of Belt to Floor mm
Receiving Conveyor
Belt Speed ms
Belt Width mm
Belt Thickness mm
Angle of Intersection degrees
Angle to Horizontal degrees
Belt Troughing Angle degrees
Material Properties
Max Oversize Lump (on top) mm
Max Oversize Lump (on top) degrees
studies done by Jenike and Johanson Inc have identified six design principles
that can serve as a guideline in chute optimisation exercises These six
principles focus on the accelerated flow in the chute which they identified as the
most critical mode [25]
Within accelerated flow the six problem areas identified by Jenike and Johanson
Inc are [25]
The optimisation of transfer chufes in the bulk materials industry
MN van Aarde
24
CHAPTER 2
bull plugging of chutes at the impact points
bull insufficient cross sectional area
bull uncontrolled flow of material
bull excessive wear on chute surfaces
bull excessive generation of dust
bull attrition or breakdown of particles
221 Plugging of chutes
In order to prevent plugging inside the chute the sliding surface inside the chute
must be sufficiently smooth to allow the material to slide and to clean off the most
frictional bulk solid that it handles This philosophy is particularly important
where the material irnpacts on a sliding surface Where material is prone to stick
to a surface the sliding angle increases proportionally to the force with which it
impacts the sliding surface In order to minimise material velocities and excessive
wear the sliding surface angle should not be steeper than required [25]
222 Insufficient cross sectional area
The cross section of the stream of material inside the chute is a function of the
velocity of flow Therefore it is critical to be able to calculate the velocity of the
stream of material particles at any point in the chute From industry experience a
good rule of thumb is that the cross section of the chute should have at least two
thirds of its cross section open at the lowest material velocity [25] When the
materialis at its lowest velocity it takes up a larger cross section of chute than at
higher velocities Therefore this cross section is used as a reference
223 Uncontrolled flow of material
Due to free falling material with high velocities excessive wear on chutes and
conveyor belt surfaces are inevitable Therefore it is more advantageous to
The optimisation of transfer chutes in the bulk materials industry
MN van Aarde
25
CHAPTER 2
have the particles impact the hood as soon as possible with a small impact
angle after discharge from the conveyor With the material flowing against the
sloped chute walls instead of free falling the material velocity can be controlled
more carefully through the chute [25]
224 Excessive wear on chute surfaces
Free flowing abrasive materials do not normally present a large wear problem
The easiest solution to this problem is to introduce rock boxes to facilitate
material on material flow Chute surfaces that are subjected to fast flowing
sticky and abrasive materials are the most difficult to design
A solution to this problem is to keep the impact pressure on the chute surface as
low as possible This is done by designing the chute profile to follow the material
trajectory path as closely as possible By doing so the material is less prone to
stick to the chute surface and the material velocity will keep the chute surface
clean [25]
225 Excessive generation of dust
Material flowing inside a transfer chute causes turbulence in the air and
excessive dust is created In order to minimise the amount of dust the stream of
material must be kept in contact with the chute surface as far as possible The
material stream must be compact and all impact angles against the chute walls
must be minimised A compact stream of material means that the material
particles are flowing tightly together At the chute discharge point the material
velocity must be as close as possible to the velocity of the receiving belt [25]
The optimisation of transfer in the bulk materials industry
M N van Aarde
26
CHAPTER 2
226 Attrition or breakdown of particles
The break up of particles is more likely to occur when large impact forces are
experienced inside a chute than on smooth sliding surfaces Therefore in most
cases the attrition of material particles can be minimised by considering the
following guidelines when designing a transfer chute minimise the material
impact angles concentrate the stream of material keep the material stream in
contact with the chute surface and keep the material velocity constant as far as
possible [25]
23 INTEGRATING A MORE APPROPRIATE CHUTE LAYOUT WITH THE PLANT
CONSTRAINTS
According to Tunra Bulk Solids in Australia the process for design and
commissioning of a new plant basically consists of four steps The entire
process is based on understanding the properties of the material to be
handled [1]
RampD CENTRE CONSULTING CONTRACTOR ENGINEERING AND PLANT
COMPANY OPERATOR r-------------- I TESTING Of CONCEPTUAl I DETAILED DESIGN CONSTRUCTION amp
I BULKSOUDS - DESIGN COMMISSIONING- I shyI Flow Proper1ies Lining Material tuet Equipment
Selection Procurement _ I I
I I
I Flow Pat1erns SSlpment Quality Control I
I IFeeder Loads amp Process Performance
I Power I Optimisation Assessment I I
L J -
I IBin Loads I I I Wear Predictions I
FEEDBACK I I I IModel Studigt L _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ J
i ~ FEEDBACK r-shyFigure 17 Four step process for plant design and commissioning [1J
The optimisation of transfer chutes in the bulk materials industry
MN van Aarde
27
CHAPTER 2
Figure 17 illustrates this four step process These steps are a good guideline in
order to incorporate a more appropriate chute layout for the plant constraints
This is an iterative process where all the possible solutions to a problem are
measured against all the possible plant constraints This section focuses more
on the second column of Figure 17 and specifically on structures and equipment
During this stage of design the utilisation of 3D parametric modelling also creates
an intimate and very accurate communication between the designer and the
project engineer or client This effective communication tool will save time and
improve the engineering process [24]
A good example of obtaining an appropriate chute layout for the plant constraints
can be explained as follows On an existing plant a transfer point will have a
specific transfer height from the top of the feed conveyor to the top of the
receiving conveyor If the feed conveyor has an incline section to obtain the
required transfer height it will also have a curve in the vertical plane of that
incline section This curve has a certain minimum radius in order to keep the belt
on the idlers at high belt tensions [26]
Figure 18 Vertical curve on incline conveyor
The optimisation of transfer chutes in the bulk materials industry
MN van Aarde
28
CHAPTER 2
If the transfer height at a transfer point is changed the path of the feeding
conveyor should always be taken into consideration With an increase in transfer
height the vertical curve radius will increase as well in order to prevent the
conveyor from lifting off the idlers in the curve This will require expensive
modifications to conveyor structures and therefore in most cases be a pointless
exercise Figure 18 shows clearly the large radius required to obtain a vertical
curve in a belt conveyor
Other considerations on brown field projects might be lift off of the receiving
conveyor at start up before or after the vertical curve This is caused by peaks
in belt tension at start up which may cause the belt to lift off the idlers and chafe
against the chute In some cases this can be solved by fitting a roller as shown
in Figure 19 to the underside of the chute to protect it from being damaged by
the belt or to protect the belt from being damaged by the chute The position of
this specific chute is just after a vertical curve where the belt tends to lift off at
start up
Figure 19 Protective roller on a transfer chute
The optimisation of transfer chutes in the bulk materials industry
MN van Aarde
29
CHAPTER 2
24 INVESTIGATING THE CORRECT CHUTE PROFILE FOR REDUCED LINER WEAR
In order to reduce chute wear the curved-profile variable chute concept is
introduced [27] This concept was originally developed by Professor Roberts for
the grain industry in 1969 [28] After many years of research and investigation
CMR Engineers and Project managers (pty) Ltd came to the following
conclusion any improvement in coal degradation dust generation and chute
wear can only be achieved by avoiding high impact forces or reducing them as
much as possible [27]
At any impact point of material in a chute or conveyor kinetic energy is
dissipated This increases material degradation and wear on liners and conveyor
belt covers Therefore it is good practise to redirect the kinetic energy in a
useful manner This action will help to reduce liner and belt wear [32]
x
Vo
- ImpactPlate
Figure 20 Geometry of the impact plate and material trajectory [30J
The optimisation of transfer chutes n the bulk materials industry
MN van Aarde
30
CHAPTER 2
The path followed by the material discharged over the end pulley of a belt
conveyor is known as its trajectory and is a function of the discharge velocity of
the material from the conveyor [29] Figure 20 shows the material trajectory as
weI as the radius and location of the impact plate In the case of dynamic chutes
this impact plate represents the back plate of the chute
The correct chute profile to reduce wear must cater for the proper location of the
chute covers and wearing plates This location depends upon the path of the
trajectory which must be predicted as accurately as possible
Figure 21 Mode for the impact of a particle on a flat surface [29]
Figure 21 illustrates a material particle impinging on a flat chute surface at an
angle of approach 91 and with approach velocity V1 This particle will then
rebound off the chute plate at an angel 92 and velocity V2 The wear on the
chute liners or the surface shown in Figure 21 will be a function of the vector
change in momentum of the particle One component will be normal to and the
other component parallel to the flat surface The parallel component is referred
to as the scouring component along the surface [29]
It is important to determine the radius of curvature of material within the
trajectory It is now a simple exercise to determine the chute hood radius
depending on plant constraints Firstly the material trajectory must be calculated
The optimisation of transfer chutes in the bulk materials industry
MN van Aarde
31
CHAPTER 2 ---~----------------
According to the mechanical handling engineers association in Perth Australia it
is beneficial to keep the impact angle as small as possible Impact angle less
than 20deg are recommended for most liner materials This will ensure an
acceptably small impulse force component normal to the surface The r~te at
which the material is gouging away the chute liner at the impact point will be
reduced [29]
The material trajectory is determined by equation l
(1)
Where the origin of the x and y axis is taken at the mean material height h and
the discharge point on the pulley as shown in Figure 20 The variables involved
in the calculation of the material trajectory are [30]
y =vertical position on the grid where the trajectory is determined
x = position parallel to the receiving belt line where the trajectory is determined
v = material speed
g =gravitational constant
a =inclination angle of the feeding conveyor
After the material leaves the belt a simplified assumption can be made that it
falls under gravity It is quite clear that in order to minimise the impact angle
the impact plate must follow the path of the material trajectory as far as possible
It will almost never be possible to obtain a contact point between the material and
the chute where there is a smooth contact with no impact angle
This radius of curvature of the material tr~jectory is determined as follows [30
The optimisation of transfer chutes in the bulk materials industry i 32
MN van Aarde
CHAPTER 2
[1 + ( gx )]15 R = vcos8
c (2)
vcos8
Where
g == gravitational constant
v == material speed
8 == Angle at discharge
In order to simplify the manufacturing process of a curved chute the radius must
be constant For a relatively smooth contact between the material and the chute
plate the radius of the curved chute at the point of contact is as close as
possible to the material discharge curvature radius [30] This is rarely possible
on brown field projects due to facility constraints In this case there will be higher
probability for rapid liner wear Each situation must be individually assessed to
determine the best solution
Cross sectional dimensions of the transfer chute must be sufficient to collect the
material and ensure continuous flow without causing blockages At the same
time the chute profile must not result in excessive material speed Material
speed inside the chute will be considered to be excessive when it can not be
controlled to exit the chute at approximately the same velocity to that of the
receiving conveyor Chutes may block for the following reasons [29]
bull Mechanical bridging due to large lumps locking into one another
bull Insufficient cross section causing cohesive material to choke or bridge
bull Inadequate chute inclination causing fines build-up
bull Corner effects or cohesion causing material to stick to the chute walls
The optimisation of transfer chutes in the bulk materials industry
MN van Aarde
33
CHAPTER 2
For the handling of large lumps of material field experience has shown that the
chute cross sectional area should be 25 times the major dimension of the largest
lumps To avoid possible bridging of the material in the chute the
recommendation is to make the inner chute volume as large as possible This
will be guided by the support steelwork around the transfer point [29]
Field experience has shown that it is advisable depending on the material being
transferred that the chute inclination angles be no less than 65deg to 700 Cornerbull
effects should also be avoided where material gets stuck in the inner corners of
chute plate work These angles should preferably be no less than 70 0 bull
25 FEED CHUTE GEOMETRY FOR REDUCED BELT WEAR
The design parameters to reduce both chute and belt wear are interrelated
Research done at the Phalaborwa copper mine is a good case study to prove the
concept of a curved chute profile This mine had specific problems with high belt
wear at transfer points At this facility an in-pit 60 x 89 gyratory crusher and
incline tunnel conveyor was commissioned to haul primary crushed ore A
conventional dead box chute transfers ore from the crusher to a 1800 mm wide
incline conveyor [31]
The maximum lump size handled by this section of the facility is 600 mm (60 kg)
An 18 mm thick top cover was specified for this conveyor with an X grade
rubber according to DIN (abrasion value lt 100 mm) This belt had an original
warranty of 10 years After 35 years the top cover started to show signs of
excessive wear and the tensile cords of the 18 mm thick cover were visible [31]
In April 1994 Phalaborwa commissioned the curved chute concept and a new
belt on the incline conveyor Six months after commissioning no gouging or
pitting damage was evident The material velocity through this curved chute onto
the incline conveyor is shown in Figure 22 [31]
The optimisation of transfer chutes in the bulk materials industry
MN van Aarde
34
CHAPTER 2
VELOCITY ( m I aec ) _ nm _ bull m _ 1211 _ UTI _ U16
_ IIU _ Im _ I rn _ 171-111 _ u n _ ~ l
_ 4 ~
_ 41 _ 4
141 CJ UtiI 1bull-bull 1t5
~ 1m bull UI2
Material Flow Velocity Gradient
Figure 22 Ore flow path in the curved chute onto the incline conveyor [31]
TENDENCY TO FORM STAGNANT LAYER LEADING
TO INSTABILITY IN DEPTH OF FLOW
C8middotFLOW IN CURVED CHUTES
Figure 23 Gentle deceleration of the product before impact on the receiving belt [32]
The optimisation of transfer chutes in the bulk materials industry
MN van Aarde
35
CHAPTER 2
Figure 23 illustrates the gentle deceleration of material that is achieved with the
curved chute concept This helps to reduce belt wear because it is relatively
easy to discharge the material at the same velocity as the receiving conveyor
The material speed v can be calculated at any point in the chute using equation
3 and equation 4 [33]
v 2~R [(2ue2 -l)sin(O) +3ue cos(O)] + Ke 2uB (3) 4ue +1
This equation is only applicable if the curved section of the chute has a constant
radius Rand I-Ie is assumed constant at an average value for the stream [33]
I-Ie = friction coefficient
8 = angle between the horizontal and the section of the spoon where the velocity
is determined and
(4)
The optimisation of transfer chutes in the bulk materjas industry
MN van Aarde
36
CHAPTER 2
Mass Flow Rate Omh
Figure 24 Typical feed chute discharge model [33J
The velocity Ve at the discharge of the chute can be determined from equation 3
and equation 4 The components Vey and Vex of the discharge velocity as
shown in Figure 24 can now be calculated This investigation should aid the
optimisation of the chute profile in order to [33]
bull match the horisontal component Vex of the material exit velocity as close
as possible to the belt speed
bull reduce the vertical component Vey of the material exit velocity in order to
minimize abrasive wear on the receiving conveyor
26 CONCLUSION
This section discussed the technical background necessary for the optimisation
of transfer chutes on an existing iron ore plant which will be discussed in
Chapter 4 The focus is specifically aimed at reducing impact wear on chute liner
materials and abrasive wear on receiving conveyor belts Important to note from
The optimisation oftransfer chutes in the bulk materials industry
MN van Aarde
37
CHAPTER 2
this section is the acceptable limits of dynamic chute optimisation or design
These limits aremiddot
bull a material impact angle of less than 20deg
bull a variance of less than 10 between the receiving belt velocity and the
material discharge velocity component parallel to the receiving conveyor
An important aspect of chute optimisation is to consider the facility constraints
These constraints are in some cases flexible but in most cases the chute
optimisation process must be designed within these constraints This means that
any new concept will have to be measured against what is possible within the
facility limits
It is important to note that only the most common transfer chute problems were
mentioned in this chapter Other possible problems were not addressed in this
chapter as it is normally related to detail design issues Solutions to these
problems are unique to each type of chute and will be addressed for the specific
case study in Chapter 4
The optimisafjon of transfer chutes in the bulk materials industry
MN van Aarde
38
CHAPTER 3
The optimisation of transfer chutes in the bulk materials industry
MN van Aarde
CHAPTER 3 TESTS FOR THE IDENTIFICATION OF RECURRING
PROBLEMS ON EXISTING CHUTES
39
CHAPTER 3
31 PREFACE
Since the completion of a certain iron ore handling facility it has been
experiencing recurring material transfer problems at high capacities In order to
investigate the problem it was decided that performance testing of the chutes
should be carried out The purpose of these tests was to monitor chute
performance at transfer rates of up to the design capacity of 10 000 tlh for
various grades of iron ore handled by the facility Some of the methodologies
used in testing are only applicable to this specific facility
Due to variations and surges associated with the reclaim operations at the
facility performance testing focused on reclaim side chutes This means that all
the transfer points at the exit points of the stockyard conveyors were tested
Nineteen tests were conducted on various stockyard transfers Information such
as the specific facility or conveyor numbers cannot be disclosed due to the
confidentiality of information
To analyse SCADA data the stacker reclaimer scale is used to determine the
peak surges passing through the transfer under investigation The reason for
this is that the peaks in flow due to reclaiming operations flatten out when
passing through the transfer points This is due to chute throat limitations and
small variations in belt speeds If the down stream scales are used it would give
an inaccurate indication of the amount of ore that passed through the transfer
chute
32 TEST METHODOLOGY
A CCTV camera was installed in a strategic position inside the head chute of the
stockyard conveyors These cameras provided valuable information on the
physical behaviour of the material flow inside the transfer chutes Where
possible cameras were also placed on the receiving belt in front of and behind
The optimisation of transfer chutes in the bulk materials industry
MN van Aarde
40
CHAPTER 3
the chute This was done to monitor belt tracking and spillage A high frequency
radio link between the head chute and the control tower made it possible to
monitor the cameras at all times
SCADA data was used to determine and establish the condition of the material
transfer at the time of the test Data from various scales en route were obtained
as well as confirmation of blocked chute signals In analysing the SCADA data
the stacker reclaimer scale is used to determine the peak surges passing through
the transfer being tested
Data was recorded from a sampling plant at the facility This data provides the
actual characteristics of representative samples taken and analysed by the
sampling plant during the duration of the test The data gathered consist of
moisture content of the material sample as well as the size distribution of the ore
Where possible an inspector was placed at the transfer point being tested to
observe and record the performance The inspector had a two way radio for
communication with the test co-ordinator in the central control room He would
also be responsible for the monitoring of any spillage dust emissions etc that
may not be picked up by the cameras
Prior to commencing a test on a specific conveyor route the following checks
had to be performed on all the material conveying equipment
bull Clean out all transfer chutes and remove any material build-up from the
sidewalls
bull Check that feed skirts are properly in position on the belt
bull Check that the conveyor belt is tracking properly at no load
bull Check conveyor idlers are all in position and free to rotate
bull Check blocked chute detectors are operational and in the correct location
The optimisation of transfer chutes in the bulk materials industry
MN van Aarde
CHAPTER 3
bull Change the position of the blocked chute detector if required to improve its
fUnction
bull Test and confirm that the CCTV middotsystems are functioning correctly
bull Assign persons with 2 way radios and cameras to monitor and record the I
results at each transfer point on the route
33 CHUTE PERFORMANCE ACCEPTANCE CRITERIA
A material transfer chute performs to specification if it transfers a maximum of
10 000 tlh of a specific iron are grade without experiencing any of the following
problems
bull Material build up inside the chute or blocking the chute ie material is not
exiting the chute at the same rate as it is entering
bull Material spillage encountered from the top of the transfer chute
bull Material spillage encountered where material is loaded onto the receiving
conveyor
bull Belt tracking of the receiving conveyor is significantly displaced by the
loading of material from the transfer chute onto the conveyor
Tests were conducted over a period of one month and in such a short period
visible wear is difficult to quantify Due to the sensitivity of the information no
historical data in terms of chute or belt wear were made available by the facility
Therefore it is not part of the criteria for these specific tests Should a chute
however fail to perform according to the set criteria it validates the need for
modifications or new designs
34 DISCUSSION OF PROBLEM AREAS
The major concern during the test work is material flow at the transfer points
Secondary concerns are spillage tracking of the receiving belt and material
The optimisation of transfer chutes in the bulk materials industry
MN van Aarde
42
CHAPTER 3
loading onto the receiving belt One of the external factors that playa significant
role in material flow rate is the method and process of reclaiming This section
will highlight all the problem areas observed during the test work
Figure 25 shows the layout of the stockyard area This layout will serve as a
reference when the specific test results at each transfer point are discussed The
legends for Figure 25 are as follows
c=gt Transfer points where performance tests have been done
~ Direction that the conveyors are moving in
CV4 CV3 CV2 CV1
Figure 25 Layout of conveyors for chute test work
All four stockyard conveyors have a moving head arrangement This means that
the chutes are split up into two sections A moving head discharges material
onto either conveyor (CV) 5 or CV 6 via a static transfer chute The moving
head positions are shown by A Band C in Figure 25
The optimisation of transfer chutes in the bulk materials industry
MN van Aarde
43
CHAPTER 3
Position C is the purging or dump position This position is used when the
stacker reclaimer is in stacking mode and any material left on the stockyard
conveyor gets dumped The material does not end up on the stockpiles
preventing contamination
90 de-g TRANSFBt
OfAO BOX IN MOVING HEAD
Figure 26 Configuration of the existing transfer chute
Figure 26 shows the configuration of the existing transfer chutes These chutes
capture the trajectory from the head pulley in a dead box situated in the top part
of the chute The material then cascades down a series of smaller dead boxes
onto the receiving conveyor below
Various grades of iron ore were tested during the testing period These different
grades of iron ore are shown in Table 2 Three fine grades and four coarse
grades were used The coarse material is defined as particles with a diameter of
The optimisation of transfer chutes in the bulk materials industry
MN van Aarde
44
CHAPTER 3
between 12 mm and 34 mm and the fine material with diameters of between
4 mm and 12 mm
Table 2 Iron are grades used for chute test work
Material Predominant Lump Size
Fine K 5mm
Fine N 8mm
Fine A 8mm
Coarse K 25mm
Coarse D 34mm
Coarse S 12 mm
Coarse A 20mm
The CCTV cameras were placed inside the moving head pointing down into the
static chute overlooking the receiving conveyor Figure 27 shows the camera
angle used during testing This is a view of a clear chute before testing The
legends for clarification of all the video images are as follows
Front of the chute throat opening
Top of flowing material at the chute throat opening
Flow pattern of the material
Direction of the receiving belt
The optimisation of transfer chutes in the bulk materials industry
MN van Aarde
45
CHAPTER 3
Figure 27 Clear chute indicating camera angle
341 Coarse Material vs Fine Material
Differences in transfer rates between coarse material and fine material are
evident from the data gathered during the test programme These results are
discussed later in this chapter The area between the yellow arrows and the red
line is the amount of freeboard available Freeboard is the open space available
between the top of the flowing stream of material and the chute plate work
Figure 28 and Figure 29 shows the flow of coarse ore and fine ore respectively in
the same chute at 8 000 tlh
Figure 28 Coarse material at 8 000 tlh
The optimisation of transfer chutes in the bulk materials industry
MN van Aarde
46
CHAPTER 3
Figure 29 Fine material at 8 000 tlh
The amount of freeboard with fine material is much larger than with coarse
material It is therefore obvious that coarse material is more likely to block a
chute when peak surges occur This is due to particles that interlock in the small
discharge opening of the chute
Figure 30 Blocked chute with coarse material at 8 600 tIh
Figure 30 is a snap shot of a chute blocked with coarse ore due to the material
interlocking at the discharge opening The time from material free flowing to a
blocked chute signal was approximately 10 seconds This is determined by
comparing the CCTV camera time to the blocked signal time on the SCADA
The optimisation of transfer chutes in the bulk materials industry
MN van Aarde
47
CHAPTER 3
The high clay content in finer material can also cause problems in the long run
When wet Anes are fed through the chutes a thin layer of Anes builds up and
sticks to the sides of the chute As this layer dries out it forms a new chute liner i
and the next layer builds up This process occurs gradually and will eventually
cause the chute to block
342 Cross Sectional Area
Video images of a blocked chute on the receiving belts were analysed to
determine whether the blockage was caused by material build up on the belt
underneath the chute This indicated that with the occurrence of a blocked chute
the material keeps flowing out of the chute at a constant rate without build up
From this the assumption can be made that in the case of a blocked chute the
material enters the chute at a higher rate than it is discharged at the bottom
Therefore the conclusion can be made that the chute cross sectional area at the
discharge is insufficient to handle the volume of ore at high throughput rates
Tests with a certain type of coarse material yielded a very low flow rate requiring
adjustment to the chute choke plate on the transfer between CV 3 and CV 5
The chute choke plate is basically a sliding door at the bottom of the chute to
adjust the discharge flow of material Tests with another type of coarse material
shown in the summary of test results indicates how the choke plate adjustment
can increase the throughput of material in the chute
Data of all the different types of ore at the facility are obtained at the sampling
building This data shows that the material size distribution for the two types of
coarse material used in the tests mentioned above are the same This indicates
that the test results with the second coarse material are an accurate reflection of
what will be experienced with the first type of coarse material Special care
The optimisation of transfer chutes in the bulk materials industry
MN van Aarde
48
CHAPTER 3
should be taken when adjusting the choke plate to make sure that skew loading
is not induced by the modification
343 Spillag3
During one of the first tests on the transfer between CV 2 and CV 6 spillage
was observed at one of the side skirts on the receiving belt A piece of the side
skirt had been damaged and pushed off the belt as shown by Figure 31 This
caused some of the material to be pushed off the belt when skew loading from
the chute caused the belt to miss track In this case spillage was not caused by
the skirt but by skew loading from the chute onto the receiving conveyor
Figure 31 Damaged side skirt
A greater concern is spillage on the moving head chute of CV 3 and CV 4
loading onto CV 6 It appears as if the head chute creeps during material
transfer onto CV 6 As the chute creeps the horizontal gap between the
moving head chute and the transfer chute reaches approximately 180 mm
Facility operations proposed a temporary solution by moving the head chute to
the dumping or purging position and back to CV 5 before stopping over CV 6
The reason for this creep could be attributed to slack in the moving head winch
cable
The optimisation of transfer chutes in the bulk materials industry
MN van Aarde
49
CHAPTER 3
345 Belt Tracking and Material Loading
The only belt tracking and material loading problems observed occurred on the
transfer between CV 2 and CV 5 I CV 6 A diverter plate was installed at the
bottom of the chute in order to force material flow onto the centre of the receiving conveyor belt This plate now causes material to fall to the left of the receiving
belt causing the belt to track to the right
Figure 32 View behind the chute of the receiving conveyor before loading
Figure 32 shows the view from a CCTV camera placed over the receiving
conveyor behind the chute Note the amount of the idler roller that is visible
before loading
Figure 33 View behind the chute of the receiving conveyor during loading
The optimisation of transfer chutes in the bulk materials industry
MN van Aarde
50
CHAPTER 3
Figure 33 shows the view from a CCTV camera placed over the receiving
conveyor behind the chute during loading Note the difference between the
amount of the idler roller that is visible between Figure 33 and Figure 32 This is
a clear indication of off centre belt tracking due to skew loading I
At the same transfer point it appears as if the configuration of the chute causes
the material to be dropped directly onto the receiving belt from the dead box in
the moving head This will cause high impact wear on the belt in the long run
High maintenance frequencies will be required on the impact rollers underneath
the chute and the roller bearings will have to be replaced frequently
346 Reclaiming Operations
Reclaim operations are done from the stacker reclaimer that scoops up the
material with a bucket wheel from the stockpile The machine starts at the top
bench of the stockpile and reclaims sideways until it is through the stockpile
This sideways movement is repeated while the machine moves down the
stockpile If the machine digs too deep into the stockpile small avalanches can
occur that over fill the buckets This causes peak surges in the flow on the
conveyor system
With an increase in the peak digging or reclaim rate as requested for test work it
seemed that the peak surges increased as well In normal reclaiming operations
(average reclaim rate of 6 000 tlh to 7000 tlh) the peaks in reclaim surges do not
usually exceed 1 000 tlh This is however dependent on the level of the
stockpile from where the machine is reclaiming
At a peak digging or reclaim rate of 8 000 tlh peak surges of up to 2 000 tlh were
observed as can be seen from Figure 34 All stacker reclaimers are operated
manually and the depth of the bucket wheel is determined by monitoring the
The optimisation of transfer chutes in the bulk materials industry
MN van Aarde
51
CHAPTER 3
reclaimer boom scale reading (yellow line) This makes it difficult to reclaim at a
constant rate
The reason for the high peak surges is due to avalanches on the stockpile
caused by reclaiming on the lower benches without first taking away the top
material The blue line in Figure 34 represents a conveyor scale reading after
the material has passed through a series of transfer chutes It is clear that the
peaks tend to dissipate over time as the peaks on the blue line are lower and
smoother than that on the yellow line
IlmJ
bull I _ bull It bull bull bull bull
--ErI--E--~---h--E=+[J]--EiE ~ J~~~ middot middot -~L I-~f~1-1shyt~=tt~~J~~v5 i ~ ~ ~ ~ ~ i ~ 1 ~ ~ ~ s ~ ------ ~-- - ------ - _ - -------- -- -- - _---- -- -r - --- -_shyp
C)
~ 1r =r=l[=1 -It-1 -- -~ -t= --shy~ _middotmiddot -r middotr middot middot [middot _r _ _ r- middotmiddot rmiddot middotmiddot -r- rmiddot-- middot- middotmiddot -rmiddot -r-middotmiddot middotr lXgtO middotmiddotmiddotmiddotmiddotmiddotmiddotmiddot[middotmiddotmiddotmiddotmiddotmiddotmiddotlmiddotmiddotmiddotmiddotmiddotmiddotlmiddotmiddotmiddotmiddotmiddotmiddotmiddotmiddotimiddotmiddotmiddotmiddotmiddotmiddotmiddotmiddotr-middotmiddotmiddotmiddot j middotmiddot1middotmiddotmiddotmiddotmiddot1middotmiddotmiddotmiddotmiddotmiddotmiddot1middotmiddotmiddotmiddotmiddot middotlmiddotmiddotmiddotmiddottmiddotmiddotmiddotmiddotmiddotmiddotmiddotjmiddot I~ [ bullbullbullbullbullbullbull [ bullbullbull middotmiddotmiddot1middotmiddotmiddotmiddotmiddotmiddot1middotmiddotmiddotmiddotmiddotmiddotmiddotmiddot1middotmiddotmiddotmiddotmiddotmiddotmiddotmiddot middotmiddotmiddotmiddotmiddotmiddotmiddotmiddoti~middotmiddotmiddotmiddotmiddotmiddotmiddotmiddottmiddotmiddotmiddotmiddotmiddotmiddotmiddotrmiddotmiddotmiddot middotrmiddotmiddotmiddotmiddotmiddotmiddot~middotmiddotmiddotmiddotmiddotmiddotmiddotmiddot1middotmiddotmiddotmiddotmiddotmiddotmiddotmiddotimiddotmiddotmiddot
t) cent
~ i i l i i i i i i i it ~ 8 ~ ~ S l i
~~ Ii ~ ~ g i i ~ 4 1 J yen i
s a e 11 JI as $ $ ~ IS IS e It
Time
-Con~SCO=-E___S~ SCALE
Figure 34 Peak surges experienced during reclaiming operations
347 Other Problem Areas
Some blockages on other chutes at the facility occurred while testing the
stockyard chutes These blockages are also shown in Table 3 where the test
The optimisation of transfer chutes in the bulk materials industry
MN van Aarde
52
CHAPTER 3
results are discussed and to raise awareness that the bottlenecks on site are not
only caused by problems on the tested chutes
A chute downstream from the stockyards encountered a blockage with fine I
material when the flow rate reached 11 OOb tfh Although this is higher than the
test maximum of 10 000 tfh it still raises concern as to why the chute blocked so
severely that it took approximately two hours to clear
Another bottleneck is the transfer point between the feed conveyor of CV 2 and
the discharge chute on CV 2 This transfer point blocked with fine material at a
peak just below 10 000 tfh It should be even worse with coarse are as
previously discussed Due to the configuration of the head chute spillage of
scraper dribblings is also of great concern The main stream of material
interferes with the flow path of the dribbling material Therefore the carry back
scraped off the bottom of the feeding belt cannot i~ow down the chute and is
pushed over the sides of the chute
The optimisation of transfer chutes in the bulk maferias industry
MN van Aarde
53
CHAPTER 3
35 SUMMARY OF TEST RESULTS
Table 3 Results from test programme
Transfer Point Material Tested Test No Peak Capacity Blocked Chute
CV11 CV5 Yes
Fines N 14 10000 tlh No
Fines N 15 10000tlh No
CV 11 CV6 Coarse K 20 9300 tlh No
Fines K 4 10600tlh No
Fines A 19 9633 tlh No
CV31 CV5 Yes
Yes
Yes
Coarse A 17 9427 tlh No
CV31 CV6 Coarse K 7 10195t1h Yes
Coarse K 8 11 000 tlh Yes
CV41 CV5 Coarse A 16 10307 tlh No
No (Mech trip on
CV4CV6 Fines K 10 10815 tlh downstream conveyor)
Coarse K 11 8000 tlh No
Fines A 18 10328 tlh No
No (Feed to CV 2
CV21 CV5 Fines N 13 10 000 tlh blocked)
CV21 Coarse K 1 amp 2 10 153 tlh No
No (Blocked chute on
Fines K 3 11 000 tlh downstream transfer)
The optimisation of transfer chutes in the bulk materials industry
MN van Aarde
54
CHAPTER 3
Table 3 shows the results obtained from all the tests on the stockyard conveyor
discharge chutes Where possible the same material grade was tested more
than once on the same transfer in order to confirm the repetitiveness of the test
The tests shown in red indicate the transfers that blocked at a flow rate of less
than 10000 tlh
Coarse K and Coarse 0 are noted as the critical materials for blocked chutes
caused by a peak surge Tests with Coarse K and Coarse S where a blocked
chute occurred at just over 10 000 tlh can also be considered as failed tests
This is due to the lack of a safety margin freeboard inside the chute When
analysing the video images a build up can be seen at a flow rate of less than
10000 tlh
Table 3 indicates that the fine material did not cause blocked chutes but it was
seen that it did fill up the chute throat area in some cases Although the coarse
material grades are shown as being least suitable for high flow rates the fine
material should not be underestimated for its ability to cause blockages The
finer materials normally have higher clay contents than the coarse grades and
therefore stick to the chute walls more easily_
36 CONCLUSION
At lower capacities (7 000 tlh to 8 000 tlh) the material appear to flow smoothly
inside the chutes without surging or building up in the chute This flow rate
normally does not cause spillage or skew loading on the receiving conveyor belt
On average as the flow rate approaches 9 000 tlh the material in the chute
throat area starts packing together and finally blocks up the chute
At transfer rates greater than 9 000 tlh the available area inside the chutes is
completely filled up This causes material to build up or surge inside the chute
which eventually results in the chute choking and the inlet flow becomes greater
The optimisation of transfer chutes in the bulk materials industry
MN van Aarde
55
CHAPTER 3
than the outlet flow Depending on the volume of the chute the choked state can
only be maintained for a certain period of time If the inlet flow does not
decrease it will cause a blocked chute
Peak surges of up to 10 000 tfh were recorded in most tests which involved a
material surge inside the chute but without the occurrence of a blocked chute trip
Although no blocked chute signal was given in these cases the ability of the
chutes to transfer continuously at flow rates of between 9 000 tfh and 10 000 tfh
is not very reliable
Continuous transfer at flow rates approaching 9 000 tfh seems attainable in most
cases but due to the limited freeboard available in the chute throat area the
chutes will easily become prone to blocking Due to the high peak surges at an
increased maximum reclaim rate the amount of freeboard is critical If the
design criteria of the chute were intended to accommodate these large surges
then all the chutes failed this test This can be attributed to the fact that no
freeboard is left at a maximum reclaim rate of 9 000 tfh
With the background available from the test programme it is clear that further
investigation is required to obtain a solution to these problems All the
information gathered can be integrated and utilised to provide a solution A
possible solution can then be tested against the problems found with the current
transfer chutes
The optimisation of transfer chutes in the bulk materials industry
MN van Aarde
56
CHAPTER 4
CHAPTER 4 DYNAMIC CHUTES FOR THE ELIMINATION OF
RECURRING PROBLEMS
The optimisation of transfer chutes in the bulk materials industry
MN van Aarde
57
CHAPTER 4
41 PREFACE
After completion of the chute test programme the decision was made to improve
the old transfer configuration by installing a dynamic chute The reason for the
dynamic chute is to increase the material speed and decrease the stream cross
sectional area The dead boxes in the older chute slowed the material down and
the restriction on transfer height resulted in the material not being able to gain
enough speed after impacting on the dead boxes
A dynamic chute configuration is investigated in this chapter As the new chute
is fitted within the existing steelwork there are certain constraints that determine
the new configuration All the constraints and limitations discussed in this section
are specific to the facility under discussion
The new chute design basically consists of a hood and spoon which retains the
kinetic energy in the material stream as it is transferred from one conveyor to the
other This will reduce the creation of dust in the chute and help to discharge the
material at a velocity closer to that of the receiving conveyor The new design
does however experience high wear which was not a problem with the old chutes
due to large dead boxes
In order to fit the optimum design of a dynamic chute within the existing structure
some changes are required to the positioning of the feed conveyor head pulley
These changes are necessary to accommodate the discharge trajectory from the
feeding conveyor
The radii of the hood and spoon are specified in such a way that the impact wear
is reduced significantly In addition both the hood and spoon are fitted with a
removable dead box section in the impact zones The incorporation of these
sections makes this chute revolutionary in the sense of ease of maintenance
The optimisation of transfer chutes in the bulk materials industry
MN van Aarde
58
CHAPTER 4
This new chute addresses all problems identified at the facility and aims to
eliminate most of them
Tests were carried out to identify worst case materials for flow and wear
Different liner materials were tested for both flow and wear conditions The
outcome of these tests is used as the basis for the design of a new chute As
different conditions for flow and wear inside the chute exist different liners are
investigated for each section inside the chute
42 CONSIDERATION OF THE EXISTING TRANSFER POINT CONSTRAINTS
The stockyard consists of four stacker reclaimers and several transfer points
feeding onto the two downstream conveyors resulting in a very intricate system
This system has numerous requirements which need to be addressed when
considering a new transfer chute configuration The transfers under discussion
are situated at the head end of the stockyard conveyors
MOV1NG HEAD OER MOvm poundAD OVER CVI6 CVIS
t4CLIE SECTION
PURGING POSmON
Figure 35 Stockyard head end layout
The design of a new transfer chute configuration is restricted to a certain extent
by the existing structures on site Figure 35 provides an overall view of the
existing steelwork at the head end of the stockyard conveyor This existing steel
structure can be modified to suit a new configuration but does have some fixed
The optimisation of transfer chutes in the bulk materials industry
MN van Aarde
59
CHAPTER 4
constraints A good example of these constraints is the transfer height between
the stockyard conveyor and the downstream conveyors CV 5 and 6
On both sides of the stockyard conveyor stockpiles of ore can be reclaimed and
deposited onto the conveyor This facility allows a certain travel for the stacker
reclaimer along the stockyard conveyor for the stacking and reclaiming of
material The most forward position of the stacker reclaimer is at the beginning
of the incline section of the stockyard conveyor As previously explained any
curvature in a conveyor requires a certain minimum radius When the transfer
height is raised the radius constraints on that curvature in the stockyard
conveyor will reduce stockyard space This means that the storage capacity at
the facility will be greatly diminished
I ~
j
Figure 36 Dimensional constraints on the existing transfer configuration
The ideal is to stay within the eXisting critical dimensions as shown in Figure 36
As functionality of the chute dictates the chute configuration these dimensions
can be modified within certain constraints These critical dimensions on the
existing configuration are
The optimisation of transfer chutes in the bulk materials industry
MN van Aarde
60
CHAPTER 4
bull Centre of receiving belt to centre of the head pulley 800 mm
bull Bottom of receiving belt to top of the head pulley 4048 mm
The head pulley can however be moved back a certain amount before it
becomes necessary to change the entire incline section of the stockyard
conveyor As the moving head moves forward and backward there are idler cars
trailing behind the moving head carriage as shown in Figure 35 The purpose of
these idler cars is to support the belt when the moving head is feeding onto
CV 6 or when it is standing in the purging position
43 DESIGN OF THE CHUTE PROFILE
431 Design Methodology
Proven standard methods for the functional design of the chute are used These
hand calculation methods are based on the Conveyor Equipment Manufacturers
Association (CEMA) standard as well as papers from Prof AW Roberts These
are typically calculations for determining the discharge trajectory optimal radius
of the hood and spoon as well as the velocity of material passing through the
chute
In addition to standard methods of carrying out conceptual flow design it is
supplemented by the use of Discrete Element Modelling (OEM) simulation
software This is done to visualise the flow of material through the chute
Results from standard calculation methods are compared to the outputs of the
OEM simulations to confirm both results Chapter 5 will focus on the use of
Discrete Element Modelling for the design and verification of chute concepts
The optimisation of transfer chutes in the bulk materials industry
MN van Aarde
61
CHAPTER 4 -__-----__---_----------shy
432 Design Development
Figure 37 shows the concept of the hood and spoon chute for a 90deg transfer as
required by the facility layout The decision to opt for a hood and spoon chute is
based on trying to retain the material velocity when transferring material from the
feeding conveyor to the receiving conveyors Retention of material velocity is
critical as the transfer height is restricted The overall facility constraints for
design are as follows
bull Feeding belt speed - 45 ms
bull Receiving belt speed - 45 ms
bull Transfer height - 401 m
bull Belt widths -1650 mm
bull Maximum material throughput -10000 tlh
As this is a retrofit of an existing facility some of the facility constraints cannot be
changed This forms part of the design development as it steers the design in a
certain direction Due to the fact that the transfer height cannot be changed the
chute profile will be dependent on the transfer height restriction
The optimisation of transfer chutes in the bulk matefials industry
MN van Aarde
62
CHAPTER 4
START-UP CHrrlE
DRlBBIlNG CHUTE
Figure 37 Hood and spoon configuration for the 90 transfer
The optimum solution for the correct chute profile in this situation would be to
move the head pulley back far enough This should be done so that the hood
can receive the material trajectory at a small impact angle and still discharge
centrally onto the spoon However the head pulley can only be moved back a
certain amount Any further movement will require changes to the structure of
the feeding conveyor incline section
As the stockyard conveyors feed onto two receiving conveyors the head pulley
of the stockyard conveyors is situated on a moving head rail car This enables
the conveyor to discharge either on CV 5 or CV 6 as shown in Figure 25
Taking the movement of the head pulley into account the moving head rail car
can be shortened by 1000 mm in order to move the head pulley back As stated
in the preface all changes are distinctive to this facility alone However it is
important to be aware of the consequences of every modification
The optimisation of transfer chutes in the bulk materials industry
MN van Aarde
63
CHAPTER 4 -__----- ------shy
433 Determination of the Profile
An important of the hood and spoon design is to ensure a
discharge from the hood onto the centre of the spoon The is
determined using equation (1) in section 24 Although various material
are transferred it does not have a significant effect on the calculated trajectory
the bulk properties of the materials are very similar It is however important
to the material which will transferred obtain the flow angles and wear
This information the will be
the Liner selection for this case study is discussed in Appendix A
After the trajectory has been determined the hood radius can determined by
using equation (2) As head pulley can move 1 000 mm backward the
possible hood radius was determined to 2 577 mm This hood radius is
VIU(I(1 to produce the wear on the zone in chute
The impact angle at this radius is 11 which is less than the maximum
allowable limit of 20
The hood radius is chosen to as close as possible to radius of curvature of
the material trajectory The point where the hood radius and the trajectory radius
cross is known as the impact point In to determine the velocity
point in hood the at is required on the
hood from the horizontal where the material impacts and to slide down the
hood surface
In this case the position impact hood is at 558r from the horizontal
In to determine the velocity this angle e is used as starting
point in (3) obtain a complete velocity profile angle from where
the material impacts hood is decreased in increments 5 up to the
discharge point which is normally 0
The optimisation chutes in the bulk materials industry
MN van Aarde
64
-----
CHAPTER 4
Hood Velocity Profile
70
--- --~ 6 0
5 0
40 ~_
~ 30 g --- a 20 gt
10
00
60 50 40 30 20 10 o Theta (Position inside the hood)
Figure 38 Hood velocity profile
The spoon radius is determined in such a way that the wear at the point of impact
is kept to a minimum At the same time the horizontal component of the material
exit velocity is as close as possible to the receiving belt speed Firstly the
assumption is made that the initial velocity of material in the spoon is equal to the
exit velocity of material from the hood This yields a spoon entry velocity of
633 ms and can also be seen from Figure 38
By reiterating various radii for the spoon the optimum exit velocity Ve can be
obtained These radii are selected according to the available space in which the
spoon must fit and also to produce the smallest impact angle for material
discharging from the hood This table is set up to display the different exit
velocities at various spoon radii The exit velocity is also dependent on the exit
angle which is determined by the length of the spoon arc In this case the spoon
radius is chosen as 3 575 mm An exit angle of 38deg from the horizontal yields an
exit velocity closer to the receiving belt speed
The optimisation of transfer chutes in the bulk materials industry
MN van Aarde
65
CHAPTER 4
Spoon Velocity Profile
67
66
65
S 64 amp0 g 6 3
V
v-shy ~ ~
ii ~ gt 62
61 I I 60
o 10 20 30 40 50 60
Theta (position inside the spoon)
Figure 39 Spoon velocity profile
Taken from the origin of the spoon radius the material position in the spoon at
discharge is sr The selection of this angle is guided by the geometry of the
chute and surrounding structures This angle is then used to calculate the exit
velocity as shown in Figure 39 At this point the discharge angle relative to the
conveyor angle is 38deg Ve is then determined to be 6087 ms with a velocity
component of 479 ms in the direction of the belt This value is 618 higher
than the belt speed of 4S ms which is acceptable as it is within the allowable
10 range of variation Minimal spillage and reduced wear on the receiving
conveyor is expected
Both the hood and spoon have a converged profile This is done in order to
minimise spillage and ensure a smooth transfer of material from the hood to the
spoon and from the spoon to the receiving conveyor The converged profile
starts out wide to capture any stray particles and converges to bring the material
particles closer together at the discharge This profile does not influence the
transfer rate of the chute as the stream of material through the chute is no more
The optimisation of transfer chutes in the bulk materials industry
MN van Aarde
66
CHAPTER 4
compact than the material on the conveyor belt before and after the transfer
chute
44 INCORPORATING ADEAD BOX IN THE IMPACT AREAS
In chapter 1 reference is made to a chute design utilising pipe sections with a
rounded profile The flat back plate is chosen instead of a rounded pipe type
section to house the honeycomb dead box configuration It would be possible to
fit the honeycomb into a rounded back section but manufacturing and
maintenance would be unnecessarily difficult and expensive
Furthermore the cross section profile of the chute shows three sliding surfaces
as shown in These surfaces consist of the back plate two vertical side plates
and two diagonal plates This is done in order to increase the angle between
adjoining plates so that the probability of material hanging up in the corners is
reduced This helps to alleviate the risk of experiencing blocked chutes
Figure 40 Chute cross section
The optimisation of transfer chutes in the bulk materials industry
M N van Aarde
67
CHAPTER 4
441 Honeycomb Wear Box in the Hood
A honeycomb or wear box is incorporated into this chute configuration in order to
further minimise wear in the hood and spoon The honeycomb configuration is
clearly shown in and is typical for both the hood and spoon Reduced wear will I
be achieved as impact and sliding will take place on the basis of material on
material flow Ore is captured inside the honeycomb pockets which protects the
ceramic lining in the section of the honeycomb and creates another sliding face
made of the material being transferred The ribs in the wear box do not protrude
from the sliding face of the chute and therefore do not interfere with the main
stream flow of material
Positioning of the honeycomb is critical as the point of impact on the hood needs
to be on the honeycomb This is required in order to assure that the highest
material impact is absorbed by a layer of static material inside the honeycomb
and not the chute liners All the basic steps for designing a normal hood and
spoon chute are followed Firstly the angle at impact (8e) is calculated to
determine where the trajectory of material will cross the radius of the hood This
shows the position of the impact point on the hood Figure 20 indicates where 8e
is calculated As previously stated the angle at impact for this situation is
558r This is calculated using [33]
e = tan- I ( 1 ) (5)
C Ii
And y is defined by equation 1
This gives an indication as to where the honeycomb should be situated in order
to capture the material impacting the hood fully A flow simulation package can
also be used to determine the position of this honeycomb structure shows an
opening for the honeycomb which starts at 40deg clockwise from the vertical This
The optimisation of transfer chutes in the bulk materials industry 68
MN van Aarde
CHAPTER 4
means that there are almost 16deg of free space in the honeycomb to ensure that
the material will always impact inside the wear box
There is no set specification as to the size of this free space This is just to
accommodate any surges of mat~rial on the feeding conveyor As discussed in
Chapter 3 due to avalanches while reclaiming from the stockpiles material
surges on the conveyors is a reality
Figure 41 Honeycomb wear box positioning
illustrates exactly where this wear box is situated on the back plate of the hood
This configuration is very similar to that of the spoon as both wear boxes only
cover the width of the flat back plate of the hood and spoon The reason for this
is that most of the material impact and mainstream flow strikes the back plate
The optimisation of transfer chutes in the bulk materials industry
MN van Aarde
69
CHAPTER 4
WEAR BOX
Figure 42 Wear box in the hood section
All the horizontal ribs of the honeycomb are spaced 5deg apart and there are 5
vertical ribs following the converging contour of the hood as shown in Spacing
of the ribs depends largely on the maximum lump size handled by the transfer
In this case the largest lumps are approximately 34 mm in diameter The idea is
to get as many dead boxes into the honeycomb as possible These small
cavities should however be large enough to capture a substantial amount of ore
inside
The optimisation of transfer chutes in the bulk materials industry
MN van Aarde
70
CHAPTER 4 ----_----------------shy
Figure 43 Spacing arrangement of honeycomb ribs inside the hood
The two vertical liners on the edges of the honeycomb are only 65 mm high while
the rest of the vertical liners are 120 mm high This is done so that the flat liners
in the chute surface can overlap the edge liners of the honeycomb An open
groove between the tiles along the flow of material would cause the liners to be
worn through much faster than in normal sliding abrasion conditions Due to the
high wear characteristics of the ore all openings between tiles should be kept out
of the mainstream flow
All the ribs in the honeycomb are 50 mm thick and vary in depth The vertical
ribs protrude the horizontal ribs by 30 mm in order to channel the flow These
vertical ribs are all flush with the surrounding tiles on the flat sliding surface of the
hood All the pockets of the wear box are 120 mm deep measured from the top
of the vertical ribs Again dimension is dependent on the maximum lump size
handled by the transfer There are no specifications as to the relation between
the pocket size and the lump size These dimensions were chosen to be
approximately 4 times the lump size Computer simulations can be used to test
the feasibility of this concept while commissioning of the equipment will ultimately
show whether this method works
The optimisation of transfer chutes in the bulk materials industry
MN van Aarde
71
CHAPTER 4 ------------_ -- - ---------------shy
442 Honeycomb wear box in the spoon
The honeycomb wear box in the spoon has the same configuration as in the
hood It also covers the entire width of the back plate and fully accommodates
the material impacting on the spoon from the hood The entire spoon is broken
up into three sections and the honeycomb wear box is situated in the back
section as shown in
Figure 44 Wear box in the spoon section
With almost the same configuration as the hood the spoon also has a corner
liner to ensure a continuous lined face between the flat surface liners and the
honeycomb ribs The detail of these liners and ribs are shown in A 90deg transfer
with a hood and spoon chute means that the stream received by the spoon is
narrower and longer than the stream received by the hood This is caused when
the material takes the shape of the hood before it is discharged into the spoon
The converged configuration causes the stream to flatten against the sliding
surface in the chute
The optimisation of transfer chutes in the bulk materials industry
MN van Aarde
72
CHAPTER 4
Due to the spoon honeycomb being a bit narrower than the hood there are only
three vertical ribs The number of ribs had to be reduced to be able to
accommodate the preferred cavity size of the honeycomb boxes These ribs now
form two channels in which the stream of material can be directed
Figure 45 Liner detail of the spoon honeycomb wear box
As shown in there is a 3 mm gap between the honeycomb section and the chute
plate work This is to ensure that the honeycomb section can be easily removed
for maintenance on the liners All the edges of the liners have rounded corners
to reduce stress concentrations which can cause rapid liner failure
45 DESIGNING THE CHUTE FOR INTEGRATION WITH SYSTEM REQUIREMENTS
The arc length of the spoon back plate is longer and closer to the belt in order to
ensure a smooth transfer of material from the chute to the receiving conveyor A
small gap of 75 mm is left between the bottom of the spoon and the receiving
conveyor Due to the fact that material can also be fed from another upstream
The optimisation of transfer chutes in the bulk materials industry
MN van Aarde
73
CHAPTER 4
stockyard conveyor this configuration will not be suitable This means that the
gap of 75 mm is not enough to allow material to pass underneath the chute
To accommodate this situation the spoon is split into different sections where the
bottom section lifts up to make room for material from behind In the raised
position the gap between the chute and the belt is 450 mm When the lower belt
is loaded to full capacity the material height is 380 mm This means that the
clearance to the belt in the non operational position is sufficient and show the
operational and non operational positions of the spoon
T -t t----~r_-+-wtIY1shy
Figure 46 Spoon in the operational position
The optimisation of transfer chutes in the bulk materials industry
MN van Aarde
74
CHAPTER 4
Figure 47 Spoon in the non operational position
This section is a discussion on how this new transfer chute configuration should
be operated in order to comply with the facility requirements The bottom section
of the chute can be lifted out of the way of material from behind on the receiving
conveyor Therefore a control philosophy is required for this movement
Referring to Figure 25 positions A and B indicate where these new chutes will be
installed As previously stated position C is the purging or dump position and
show the actuated spoon section in the operating and non operating positions
The conditions for these positions are explained as follows
46 CONCLUSION
With the consideration of all the facility constraints and a conceptual idea of what
the transfer configuration should look like the design can be optimised When
the feeding belt velocity is known the material trajectory and optimum chute
radius can be determined This radius and the radius of the spoon must then be
corrected to comply with the facility constraints but still deliver the required
material transfer rate
The optimisation of transfer chutes in the bulk materials industry
MN van Aarde
75
CHAPTER 4
With the high cost implications of regular maintenance intervals on chute liners
and facility downtime a honeycomb structure is incorporated into the high impact
areas The purpose of this honeycomb structure is to form small pockets similar
to dead boxes in order to promote material on material flow This increases the
lifetime of the chute liners and reduces maintenance intervals
This specific transfer chute splits up easily into separate sections and will help to
simplify maintenance The bottom section of the chute is actuated to move up
and down depending on whether the chute is in operation or not This will ensure
optimum transfer of material while in operation and provide sufficient clearance
when not in operation This is again guided by the facility requirements
In the design of all the transfer chute components the physical properties of the
ore should always be considered This determines the chute profile in terms of
flow angles and liner selection With maximum material flow ability high
resistance to sliding abrasion and reduced maintenance cost in mind 94
alumina ceramics is the liner of choice This is only in the main flow areas of the
chute For the dribbling chute a polyurethane liner is used to promote the flow of
this sticky material
The optimisation of transfer chutes in the bulk materials industry
MN van Aarde
76
CHAPTER 5
CHAPTER 5 TESTING AND VERIFICATION OF THE NEW SOLUTION
- middotSmiddotmiddotmiddotmiddotmiddotmiddotmiddotmiddotmiddot-middotl~Oi
The optimisation of transfer chutes in the bulk materials industry 77
MN van Aarde
CHAPTER 5
51 PREFACE
Although hand calculations have been a proven method of design for many
years it is important to verify any new chute concept before fabrication and
implementation Confirming the concept can save time and money as it reduces
the risk of on-site modifications Hand calculations only supply a two
dimensional solution to the problem which does not always provide accurate
material flow profiles
In recent years a few material flow simulation packages have been developed to
aid the design of material handling equipment The use of software packages
can be beneficial to the design process as it gives a three dimensional view of
the material behaviour in the chute This means that changes to the chute
concept can be made prior to fabrication
It is however important to verify that the solution obtained from the software
package is an accurate reflection of actual design model Therefore the material
being handled should be thoroughly tested to obtain the correct physical
properties required to obtain an accurate simulation result
The use of material flow simulation software does not replace the necessity for
hand calculations All the basic steps should still be done to derive a conceptual
chute configuration Material flow simulation software should be used as a
complimentary tool to analytical hand calculations in the design process
The optimisation of transfer chutes in thebulk materials industry
MN van Aarde
78
CHAPTER 5
52 SELECTING A TEST METHODOLOGY
Traditionally transfer chutes were designed by using basic analytical calculations
and relying on empirical data from past experiences with other chutes Mostly
these analytical methods only cater for the initial part of the chute such as the
parabolic discharge trajectory It is difficult to determine what happens to the
flow of material after it strikes the chute wall [34]
Two methods of verification were usually applied to evaluate a new transfer
chute configuration Trial and error can be used but obviously this is not desired
due to the high cost implications A second method is to build a small scale
model of the chute in which tests can be carried out before a final design can be
adopted This physical modelling is however time consuming and
expensive [34]
Granular or particulate materials are composed of a large number of loosely
packed individual particles or grains The flow of such granular materials forms
an intricate part of the materials handling industry Small reductions in energy
consumption or increases in production can have great financial advantages
Therefore significant efforts are put into improving the efficiency of these
facilities The important role of numerical simUlations is becoming more evident
in these optimisation procedures [35] Due to these efforts this technology is
becoming more powerful and is easy to use as a verification method for transfer
chute designs
The behaviour of bulk material particles is unique in the sense that it exhibits
some of the properties associated with the gaseous liquid and solid states of
matter The granular state of bulk materials cannot be characterised by anyone
of these states alone The research that captures the contact between individual
particles in an explicit manner is known as discrete element methods (OEM) [36]
The optimisation of transfer chutes in the bulk materials industry
MN van Aarde
79
CHAPTER 5
In basic terms OEM explicitly models the dynamic motion and mechanical
interactions of each body or particle as seen in the physical material flow It is
also possible to obtain a detailed description of the velocities position and force
acting on each particle at a discrete point during the analysis This is achieved
by focusing on the individual grain or body rather than focusing on the global
body as is the case with the finite element approach [36]
Figure 48 illustrates two examples of how this OEM software can be applied
Obviously the flow characteristics differ between the applications shown in Figure
48 This is however catered for by the mathematical simulation of each particle
collision
Figure 48 Flow analysis examples a) separation and screening b) hoppers feeders 36]
Continuous improvements in the performance of computing systems make OEM
a realistic tool for use in a wide range of process design and optimisation
applications During the last 20 years the capabilities of OEM have progressed
from small scale two dimensional simulations to much more complex 3D
applications The latest high performance desk top computers make it possible
to simulate systems containing large numbers of particles within a reasonable
time [37]
The optimisation of transfer chutes in the bulk materials industry
MN van Aarde
80
CHAPTER 5
According to the institute for conveyor technologies at the Otto-von-Guericke
University of Magdeburg in Germany using OEM for bulk solid handling
equipment provides [38]
bull A cost effective method of simulating the utility of materials handling
equipmentshy
bull Precise control over complicated problem zones eg transfer chutes
redirection stations and high wear areas
bull The possibility to integrate processes in one simulation such as mixing and
segregation
bull The possibility to involve the customer more extensively in the design
process
bull An advantage in the market due to attractive video sequences and pictures
of the simulation
bull The possibility to prevent facility damages and increase the efficiency of
conveyor systems extensively
As a good example of the advantages of the discrete element method the
University of Witwatersrand in Johannesburg did studies on rotary grinding mills
The university studies have shown that the OEM qualitatively predicts the load
motion of the mill very well The improved knowledge of the behaviour of mills
can therefore increase the profitability of mineral processing operations [39]
This material handling equipment is generally costly to operate and inefficient in
the utilisation of energy for breakage In order to understand the behaviour of
mills better the OEM method is increasingly being applied to the modelling of the
load behaviour of grinding mills These results indicate that this method can be
applied successfully in the bulk materials handling industry
The apUmisatian af transfer chutes in the bulk materials industry
MN van Aarde
81
CHAPTERS
Another example where this technology has been used with great success is with
the design of a new load out chute for the Immingham coal import terminal in
Britain By simulating the flow with a OEM package the designers were aided in
the fact that they were supplied with a quantitative description of the bulk solid
movement through the chute In the opinion of Professor Franz Kessler
(University of Leoben) the Discrete Element Method provides the engineer with
unique detailed information to assist in the design of transfer points [3]
These simulation packages are at the moment very expensive and not widely
used in transfer chute design It can be anticipated that the utilisation of these
packages will increase as the technology improves and the cost of the software
goes down [40] To get the best value out of the simulation it is important to
compare simulation packages and select the one most suitable to the complexity
of the design
Fluenttrade is a two dimensional computational fluid dynamics (CFD) software
package which can also be used as a chute design aid through the simulation of
material flow It must however be noted that this is not a OEM simulation
package This software package simulates the flow of material by considering
the material particles as a liquid substance The output of the simulation is the
same as can be seen in the example of Figure 49 The colours in the simulation
represent the average particle spacing [40] Due to the fact that this package
can at this stage only deliver two dimensional simulations it is considered
inadequate to perform detailed simulations on the intricate design piscussed in
this dissertation
The optjmisation of transfer chutes in the bulk materials industry
MN van Aarde
82
CHAPTER 5
COnroUf Votume t-~bn 01 ( 00 frlm~2 5000amp1 00) ~gtJ C3_2002 fLUENT 60 (2lt1 9 940 n 1Mgt u ody)
Figure 49 Simulations results from Fluenttrade [40]
The Overland Conveyor Company provides another alternative to the Fluent
software package Applied OEM is a technology company that provides discrete
element software to a variety of users in the bulk materials industry Bulk Flow
Analysttrade is an entry level package that they provide This package is very
powerful in the sense that it can accurately predict flow patterns depending on
the accuracy of the inputs An example of this is shown in Figure 50 It also has
the capability to show material segregation dynamic forces and velocities [41]
Figure 50 Simulation results from Bulk Flow Analysttrade [41]
The optimisation of transfer chutes in the bulk materials industry
MN van Aarde
83
CHAPTER 5
OEM Solutions is a world leader in discrete element modelling software They
recently announced the release of the latest version of their flow simulation
package called EOEM 21 This package can be used to simulate and optimise
bulk material handling and processing operations [41] Oue to the capabilities of
this software package it is a very attractive option for designing transfer chutes
With the development of EOEM 21 OEM Solutions worked in collaboration with
customers in the Bulk Handling Mining and Construction Pharmaceutical
Chemical and Agricultural sectors This enables the end users to perform more
sophisticated particle simulations specific to their unique applications Also
incorporated into this package is the ability and flexibility to customise and
personalise advanced particle properties [42]
This specific package has been proven successful by industry leaders Martin
Engineering (Neponset Illinois) is a leading global supplier of solids handling
systems This company continues to expand their use of EOEM software in
design optimisation and development of bulk materials handling products These
optimisation and development actions include all aspects of conveyor systems
and transfer points for numerous industrial sectors [43]
There are several other OEM simulation packages such as ESYS Particle
Passage-OEM and YAOE However none of these software packages seem be
major industry role players in the discipline of chute design although they might
have the capability In adjudicating the three big role players in bulk material flow
simulation packages there are a few factors taken into consideration It appears
thatthe advantages of 30 capabilities are non negotiable Therefore Fluenttrade is
not really a consideration From the literature review of the Bulk Flow Analysttrade
and the EOEM packages it seems that these two will provide more or less the
same performance It does seem however that the EOEM software is a bigger
role player in various industries Due to the possible future capabilities of EOEM The optimisation of transfer chutes in the bulk materials industry
MN van Aarde
84
CHAPTER 5
through its association with numerous industries this simulation package is the
software of choice
In order to retrofit or design a new transfer point with the aid of the selected OEM
software package there are a few steps that a designer must follow to gain the
full benefit of this tool [36]
1 An accurate 3D or CAD representation of the new or old transfer chute
must be rendered
2 Identify restrictions and limitations in terms of chute geometry and
manufacturing
3 Identify desired design goals (Le dust emissions flow restrictions etc)
4 Identify representative material properties and particle descriptions
5 In case of a retrofit make design changes to chute geometry with CAD
6 Simulate the performance of the new design using OEM software
7 Evaluate results obtained from the simulation (reiterate steps 5 6 and 7)
8 Perform and finalise detail design steps
9 Manufacture
10 Installation
The above mentioned steps found in references [6] and [36] only provides
information regarding retrofitting or designing chutes with the aid of OEM
Although it is a powerful design 1001 the design process should not discard the
use of analytical hand calculation~ Some of the most important design decisions
regarding chute profiles are made with analytical hard calculations such as
plotting the material trajectorY
53 DETERMINATION OF MATERIAL PROPERTIES
The discrete element method is a promising approach to the simUlation of
granular material interaction The accuracy of the outcome of the simulation is
The optimisation of transfer chutes in the bulk materials industry
M N van Aarde
85
CHAPTER 5
however dependent upon accurate information on the material properties and
input parameters [44] These inputs basically consist of the following
fundamental parameters size and shape factors bulk density angle of repose
cohesion and adhesion parameters and restitution coefficients [45]
The determination of most of these parameters are explained and defined in the
following paragraphs The parameters that are changed in the simulation
according to the reaction of the flow are not discussed and are typically
parameters such as the internal coefficient of friction between a number of
particles A collaborated effort by the bulk handling industry aims to find ways in
which all parameters can be accurately determined through scientific methods
This has however still not been achieved The objective is to achieve a realistic
representation and therefore some parameters are altered in the simulation
It is important to note that the computation time increases as the particle size
becomes smaller and the amount of particles increase In most granular flow
problems the characteristics of the material stream are largely determined by
particles greater than 10 - 20 mm in size [45] Therefore in order to reduce
computation time the selected particle size for simUlations should be the same
as the largest particles handled by the facility namely 34 mm diameter
Although fines have a higher internal friction coefficient and more cohesiveness
these properties can be averaged into the input parameters to obtain the same
overall effect [45] Therefore only a single particle size is used in the simulation
and the properties optimised to obtain the same result under actual operating
conditionsmiddot Some of the material properties can be easily obtained from the
facility The rest of the properties are obtained from tests carried out by expert
conSUltants in this field
The size factor and bulk density are obtained from the facility Materia tests
carried out by external consultants provide the coefficient of friction and also the The optimisation of transfer chutes in the bulk materials industry
MN van Aarde
86
CHAPTER 5
wall friction angle This is the angle at which the material will start to slide under
its own mass To determine these material properties the external consultants
normally use sophisticated and expensive equipment Data gathered from these
tests are used for the hand calculation of the chute profile The angle of repose
can normally be observed from a stockpile and is the angle that the side of the
stockpile makes with the horizontal
For the OEM simulation the coefficient of friction is one of the main determining
factors of the wall friction angle Data provided by the material tests can not be
used as a direct input into OEM In the software package the coefficient of
friction is represented by a factor between 0 and 1 The material test data can
however provide some insight into where on this scale the factor is This factor
can be derived from a few small simulation iterations as there is no method of
direct conversion between the test result data and the OEM input
To determine this factor a plate is modelled with a single layer of particles This
plate is then rotated within the simulation at approximately 2deg per second As
soon as the particles begin to slide the time is taken from which the angle can be
calculated This process is repeated with different friction coefficients until the
correct wall friction angle is obtained After the coefficient of friction factor is
determined between the particles and the chute wall the material restitution
factor and coefficient of internal friction can be obtained
The restitution factor is obtained by measurirtg the rebound height of a particle
when it is dropped from a certain height This is usually difficult to determine due
to the variation in shape of the material particles If the particle lands on a
surface it rarely bounces straight back up Therefore the test is repeated
numerous times and an average is taken to obtain the final result
Coefficient of internal friction is a property that describes the particles ability to
slide across each other A simUlation is set up to create a small stockpile of The optimisation of transfer chutes in the blJlk materials industry
MN van Aarde
87
CHAPTER 5
material particles The angle of repose can be obtained by measuring the
average apex angle of the stockpiles In this simulation the coefficient of internal
friction and restitution factors are iterated This is done in order to simulate the
accurate behaviour of particles falling onto the stockpile and forming the correct
angle of repose Figure 51 shows what this simulation typically looks like
Figure 51 Determination of material properties for an accurate angle of repose
54 VERIFICATION OF THE SELECTED TEST METHODOLOGY FOR THIS
APPLICATION
The best verification is to compare the simulation results with an actual material
flow situation Therefore a comparison is made between the actual flow in the
existing transfer configuration and the simulation of this same transfer This is
also a good test to see if the parameters changed in the simulation were done
correctly
During the chute test programme CCTV cameras were installed in the problem
transfer chutes at the facility The cameras are positioned to provide an accurate
view of the material flow behaviour inside the chutes As explained in Chapter 3
The optimisation of transfer chutes in the bulk materials industry 88
MN van Aarde
CHAPTER 5
the behaviour of the material flow inside the chutes changes with the variation of
ore type
Due to the fact that only 34 mm diameter particles are used in the simulation a
test using coarse ore was chosen for the verification of the simulation
Therefore test 12 is used as reference for the verification In this test coarse S
with the particle size distribution between 28 mm and 34 mm was used at the
transfer from CV 3 to CV 5
Figure 52 shows an image taken from the CCTV camera inside the transfer chute
between CV 3 and CV 5 The red line indicates the top of the chute throat
opening and the yellow arrows show the top of material flow This screen shot
was taken at a flow rate of 10 000 tlh It can be deduced from this view and the
chute test work that the chute is choking at a throughput rate of 10 000 tlh
Figure 52 Actual material flow with coarse S at 10000 tIh
The transfer chute from Figure 52 was modelled in CAD and the model imported
into the discrete element package EDEM All the material input parameters as
discussed in section 53 were used in the simulation 10 000 tlh was used as the
The optimisation of transfer chutes in the bulk materials industry
MN van Aarde
89
CHAPTER 5
flow rate parameter in an attempt to simulate and recreate the situation as shown
by Figure 52
Test 12 of the chute performance tests gave the following results which can be
compared to the EDEM simulation
bull Chute started to choke rapidly at 10 000 tlh
bull Slight off centre loading onto the receiving conveyor CV 5
bull A lower velocity layer of material close to the discharge of the chute
bull Material roll back on the receiving conveyor due to significant differences in
the velocity of the material flow and the receiving conveyor
Off-centre loading
L
Figure 53 Material flow pattern through the existing chute
The optimisation of transfer chutes in the bulk materials industry
MN van Aarde
90
CHAPTER 5
Flow restricted in this area
Low velocity layer
Low discharge velocity rollback
Figure 54 Cross sectional side view of material flow through the existing chute
Figure 53 shows the material flow pattern in the existing chute where the thick
red arrows indicate the direction of flow The legend on the left of the figure
indicates the material velocity in ms Slow flowing material is shown in blue and
the colour turns to red as the material velocity increases Slight off centre
loading onto the receiving conveyor CV 5 can be seen from Figure 53 This
correlates well with the actual observations during the physical testing of this
transfer point
Figure 54 shows the more determining factors for correlation between actual flow
and simulated flow where the legend on the left indicates the material velocity in
ms This is a cross sectional view through the centre of the chute From this
view a build up of material can be seen in the chute throat area The slow
flowing material on the back of the chute also helps to restrict the flow Due to
the fact that the material speed at the discharge of the chute is much slower than
the receiving belt speed a stack of turbulent flowing material is formed behind
the discharge point on the receiving conveyor
The optimisation of transfer chutes in the bulk materials industry
MN van Aarde
91
CHAPTER 5
There is a good correlation between the simulated and actual material flow
pattern The simulation method can therefore be considered as a valid alternate
or additional method to standard analytical chute design Attention should be
given though to the input of material properties in order to obtain a realistic result
55 VERIFICATION OF NEW CHUTE CONFIGURATION AND OPTIMISATION OF THE
HOOD LOCATION
After establishing that the OEM is a reliable design and verification tool the new
transfer chute configuration can be simulated Firstly this configuration is
modelled without the honeycombs inside the hood and spoon This is done in
order to verify the material flow pattern and velocity through the hood and spoon
Results obtained from this simulation can then be compared to the hand
calculation results An iterative process is followed with simulations and hand
calculations to obtain the best flow results The simulation results are shown in
Figure 55 and Figure 56
I
L
Figure 55 Material flow through hood at 10 000 tIh
The optimisation of transfer chutes in the bulk materials industry
MN van Aarde
92
CHAPTER 5
Figure 56 Material flow through spoon at 10 000 tlh
The hood velocity profile shown in Figure 38 gives the same result as obtained
from the DEM simulation The calculated hood exit velocity is 633 ms This is
the same result obtained from the simulation and shown by the red colouring in
Figure 55 As the material enters the spoon it is falling under gravity and
therefore still accelerating At impact with the chute wall it slows down and exits
the spoon with approximately the same velocity as the receiving conveyor
Figure 56 shows the material flow through the spoon section This can also be
compared to the spoon velocity profile in Figure 39 The behaviour of the
material inside the spoon as shown by the simulation correlates with the results
obtained from the hand calculations This is another indication that with accurate
input parameters the DEM can be used as a useful verification tool
The optimisation of transfer chutes in the bulk materials industry
MN van Aarde
93
CHAPTER 5
Skew loading into spoon
Slower material
L
Figure 57 Determination of the optimum hood location
The hood is supported by a shaft at the top and can be moved horizontally This
function is incorporated into the design in order to optimise the hood location
during commissioning of the transfer chute It is critical to discharge centrally into
the spoon in order to eliminate skew loading onto the receiving conveyor
Figure 57 illustrates the effect that the hood location has on material flow When
comparing the flow from Figure 55 to the flow in Figure 57 it is clear that skew
loading is a direct result of an incorrect hood position The circled area in Figure
57 illustrates how the flow reacts to the incorrect hood location
Material is discharged to the right side of the spoon which causes a slight buildshy
up of material on the left This causes the material to flow slightly from side to
side as it passes through the spoon Figure 57 indicates that the material to the
The optimisation of transfer chutes in the bulk materials industry
MN van Aarde
94
CHAPTERS ----------------- -------___ _--shy
right at the spoon discharge is slightly slower than the material on the left This is
a clear indication of skew loading onto the receiving conveyor
The material flow pattern in Figure 55 is symmetrical and therefore will not
cause skew loading The OEM can give a good indication of the required hood
setup before commissioning However adjustments can still be made during the
commissioning process The tracking of the receiving belt should give a good
indication of when the hood is in the optimum position
56 EFFECT OF THE HONEYCOMB STRUCTURE IN HIGH IMPACT ZONES
The purpose of the honeycomb dead box structure in the high impact zones is to
capture material inside the pockets and induce material on material flow This
requires that the material inside the honeycombs should be stationary while the
main stream material flow moves over the dead boxes OEM can therefore be
set up in such a way that the material velocities can be visualised inside the
chute
In Chapter 4 the logic of how this honeycomb should be structured and
positioned was discussed The simulations shown in Figure 58 and Figure 59
illustrate how a OEM pack~ge can also be used to determine the positioning of
these honeycomb structures Impact points in the hood and spoon must be
inside the honeycomb in all situations of flow inside the chute The spacing of
dead box pockets can be altered to ensure that a continuous layer of stationary
material is formed in the honeycomb area Various geometries for this
honeycomb structure can be simulated with OEM to obtain the best results
The optimisation of transfer chutes in the bulk materials industry
MN van Aarde
95
CHAPTER 5
Large radius hood
Hood honeycomb box to minimise wear in impact
Vertical discharge from hood centralising flow on
belt
L
Figure 58 Material behaviour through hood
Spoon
Spoon honeycomb box to minimise wear in impact area
Improved spoon discharge flow
Figure 59 Material behaviour through spoon
The optimisation of transfer chutes in the bulk materials industry
MN van Aarde
96
CHAPTERS
The legends on the left of Figure 58 and Figure 59 indicate the material velocity
in ms Dark blue indicates stationary material and bright red indicates a
maximum material velocity of 8 ms Using this information the functionality of
the honeycomb dead boxes can now be analysed The velocity of the material
captured by the dead boxes is indicated as dark blue This means that all the
material in the dead boxes is stationary
With the result obtained from the OEM simulation it is clear that material on
material flow will be induced by the honeycomb dead boxes The pockets of the
honeycomb capture the material and will therefore have reduced wear in the
high impact areas This material on material flow does however induce a
coarser sliding surface than the smooth ceramic liner tiles Due to the high
velocity of material through the chute the effect of the coarser sliding surface is
however minimised
58 CONCLUSION
The Discrete Element Method is proven to be a successful design and
verification tool in the bulk materials industry This method is used widely in the
global bulk materials industry The successful outcome of the OEM simulation is
however dependent on the correct material input parameters Some of these
parameters are readily available from the facility that handles the material The
rest of the parameters can be determined by setting up simple test simulations
with OEM
To verify that the OEM simulation is a correct indication of the actual condition
the simulation is compared to CCTV images taken from the same transfer chute
The results show that the OEM simulation does provide a true reflection of the
actual material flow through the transfer chute Therefore the same material
input parameters can be used to simulate the new transfer chute configuration
The optimisation of transfer chutes in the bulk materials industry
MN van Aarde
97
CHAPTER 5
From the simulations done on the new transfer chute configuration the effect of
the honeycomb dead boxes can be examined These simulation results show
that the honeycomb dead box configuration is effective in capturing material
inside the honeycomb cavities This results in material on material flow and
reduces impact abrasion on the ceramic chute liners
Results obtained from the OEM simulation of the new transfer configuration are
compared to the hand calculation results This comparison indicates that the
material velocity calculated in the hood and spoon correlates well with the
material velocity calculated by the OEM The overall results obtained from
simulating the new transfer chute configuration have been shown to provide a
true reflection of the actual flow through the chute
The optimisation of transfer chutes in the bulk materials industry
MN van Aarde
98
CHAPTER 6
CHAPTER 6 CONCLUSIONS AND RECOMMENDATIONS
The optimisation of transfer chutes in the bulk materials industry
MN van Aarde
99
CHAPTER 6
61 CONCLUSIONS AND RECOMMENDATIONS
Bulk materials handling is a key role player in the global industrial industry
Within this field the industry faces many challenges on a daily basis These
challenges as with any industry are to limit expenses and increase profit Some
of the limiting factors of achieving this goal in the bulk materials handling industry
are lost time due to unscheduled maintenance product losses due to spillage
andhigh costs incurred by increased maintenance
The focus of this study was on the optimisation of transfer chutes and
investigations were carried out to determine the core problems These
investigations were done by observing and monitoring various grades of iron ore
passing through transfer chutes known to have throughput problems The core
problems were identified as high wear on liners in the impact zones skew
loading on receiving conveyors material spillage and chute blockages
These problems cause financial losses to the facility either directly or indirectly
Direct financial losses can be attributed to the frequent replacement of chute
liners while the indirect financial losses are caused by facility down time This is
why it is imperative to optimise the manner in which the transfer of material is
approached A new transfer chute configuration addresses the problems
identified at the facility and the core concepts can be adopted at any bulk
materials handling facility
This new concept examines the utilisation of the hood and spoon concept rather
than the conventional dead box configuration By using the hood and spoon
configuration the material discharge velocity is utilised and carried through to the
discharge onto the receiving conveyor Adding to this design is a honeycomb
dead box configuration in the high impact zones of the hood and spoon This
initiates material on material flow and prolongs the lifetime of the chute liners
The optimisation of transfer chutes in the bulk materials industry
MN van Aarde
100
CHAPTER 6
The radius of the hood should be designed so that it follows the path of the
material trajectory as closely as possible Some facility constraints prohibit this
hood radius from following exactly the same path as the material The radius of
the spoon is designed in such a manner that it receives the material from the
hood and slows it down while turning it into the direction in which the belt is
running Ideally the material should be discharged from the spoon at
approximately the same velocity as the receiving conveyor
If this can be achieved then some major problems suffered by the industry will
have been resolved With the hood having almost the same radius as the
material trajectory impact wear on liners can be significantly reduced By
discharging material from the chute onto the receiving conveyor at the same
velocity as the conveyor belt excessive belt wear and material spillage will be
avoided Further optimisation is however still possible by investigating the
implementation of various skirting options to the side of the conveyor
This new transfer chute configuration also boasts an articulated bottom section in
the spoon The purpose of the adjustable bottom section is to create greater
clearance below the spoon This will allow material on the belt below to pass
unimpeded underneath the spoon In some cases there can be several chutes in
series that discharge onto the same conveyor In these cases it is beneficial to
incorporate an articulated chute in order to have the capability of having a small
drop height between the discharge point in the chute and the receiving conveyor
This low drop height also minimises turbulent flow at the chute discharge point on
the receiving conveyor
The most unique feature to the new design is the implementation of the
honeycomb dead box configuration in the high impact zones Due to these high
impact areas the liners will experience the most wear This section of the chute
is flanged and can be removed separately from the rest of the chute to aid
maintenance In most maintenance operations it may only be necessary to reline The optimisation of transfer chutes in the bulk materials industry
MN van Aarde
101
CHAPTER 6
this small section of the chute Costs are minimised by reducing the time
required for maintenance and the cost of replacing liners
Previously testing of new transfer chute configurations normally involved
implementing the chute and obseNing its ability to perform according to
specification This can however be a costly exercise as it is possible that further
modifications to the chute will be required after implementation Therefore it is
beneficial to verify the new chute configuration before implementation
This is done by simulating the material flow through the chute using Discrete
Element Method A comparison was done between the actual flow in an eXisting
chute and the simulated flow in the same chute configuration This comparison
showed the same result obtained from the simulation and the actual material
flow This method can therefore be used as an accurate simulation tool for
evaluating transfer chute performance
The mathematical calculations describing the material flow in and over the
honeycomb dead box structures are complex Therefore simulation models are
used to show the material behaviour in those areas Simulations show that the
material captured within the dead boxes remains stationary thus protecting the
ceramic liners behind it This is the desired result as it prolongs the life of the
chute liners and reduces maintenance frequencies
If the work is done efficiently it normally takes two days to remove a worn chute
of this configuration fully and replace it with a new one This is normally done
once a year due to the design lifetime of the chute With the new chute
configuration this maintenance schedule can be reduced to two hours once a
year for the replacement of the honeycomb sections only The exposed face of
the honeycomb ribs will wear through until the efficiency of the honeycomb
design is reduced
The optimisation of transfer chutes in the bulk materials industry
MN van Aarde
102
CHAPTER 6
This specific iron ore facility has approximately fifty transfer points During this
exercise only two of these transfer points were replaced with the new chute
configuration The combined annual maintenance time for replacement of these
50 chutes is 100 days If the new chute philosophy is adopted on all these
transfers the annual maintenance time can be reduced to as little as 100 hours
This excludes the unplanned work for cleaning of spillages and fixing or replacing
worn conveyors
There are significant benefits to investigating the problems at specific transfer
points before attempting a new design This gives good insight into where the
focus should be during the design process Ea~y identification and
understanding of the problem areas is essential for a new chute configuration
The new design features can provide a vast improvement and a large benefit to
the bulk materials handling industry
62 RECOMMENDATIONS FOR FURTHER STUDY
During the chute performance tests it was noted that avalanches on the
stockpiles during reclaiming of material causes peaks on the conveyor systems
These peaks in the material stream increase the probability of blockages in the
transfer chutes As a result material spillage occurs and the conveyor belts can
be easily overloaded
This occurrence creates the requirement for further studies on the reclaiming
operations All stacker reclaimers are operated manually which creates ample
room for error Investigations can be done to determine the value of automating
the reclaiming operations Manual interaction cannot be avoided but an
automated system will reduce the possibility for error
Visual inspections on the transfer chute liners indicate that the material tends to
erode the liners away quicker in the grooves between liner plates or ceramic
The optimisation of transfer chutes in the bulk materials industry
MN van Aarde
103
CHAPTER 6
tiles This occurrence seems to be worse in areas of the chute where the
material velocity is the highest
This problem was specifically noticed with ceramic liner tiles The tiles are glued
to the chute surface with an epoxy and this substance also fills the crevices
between the tiles This epoxy is however not resistant to any type of sliding or
impact abrasion If the material gains speed in such a groove between the tiles it
simply erodes the epoxy away Studies to reduce or even eliminate this problem
should be examined
In some situations the layout and configuration of the chute prohibits the tiles
from being inserted in a staggered manner Studies can be done on the
composition of this epoxy in order to increase its resistance to sliding and impact
abrasion By doing so the lifetime of the chute liners can be increased which will
result in minimised facility down time due to maintenance
It seems that it is a global industry problem to find accurate scientific methods of
determining material input parameters for OEM simulations Although most of
the material properties can be determined through testing it is still a challenge to
convert that information into a representative input parameter into OEM It is
therefore recommended that further studies be undertaken to determine a
method by which material test data can be successfully converted into OEM input
parameters
The optimisation of transfer chutes in the bulk materials industry
MN van Aarde
104
REFERENCES ------shy
REFERENCES
[1] ARNOLD P C MCLEAN A G ROBERTS A W 1978 Bulk Solids
storage flow and handling Tunra Bulk Solids Australia Jan
[2] ANON 2008 Peak (Export) OilUSD Survival Dec
httppeakoHsurvivalorgltag=finance Date of access 8 Jun 2009
[3] KESSLER F 2006 Recent developments in the field of bulk conveying
FME Transactions Vol 34 NO4
[4] ANON 2007 Specification for Troughed Belt Conveyors British
Standards BS28901989 25 Sep Date of access 8 Jun 2009
[5] CEMA (Conveyor Equipment Manufacturers Association) Belt Conveyors
6thfor Bulk Materials ed wwwcemanetorg Date of access
10 Jun 2009
[6] DEWICKI G 2003 Computer Simulation of Granular Material Flows
Overland Conveyor Co Inc Jan httpwwwpowderandbulkcom Date
of access 10 Jun 2009
[7] AMERICAN COAL COUNCIL 2009 Engineered chutes control dust for
Ameren U Es Meramec Plant httpwww clean-coal infold rupalindexphp
Date of access 12 Jun 2009
[8] KUMBA IRON ORE 2008 Annual Financial Statements 2008
httpwwwsishenironorecompanycozareportskumba afs 08pdffullpdf
Date of access 13 Jun 2009
The optimisation of transfer chutes in the bulk materials industry
MN van Aarde
105
REFERENCES
[9] METSO BACKGROUNDER 2007 Rock Crushing 22 Feb
httpWWvVmetsocom Date of access 15 Jun 2009
[10] ALTHOFF H 1977 Reclaiming and Stacking System Patent US
4037735
[11] THE SOUTH AFRICAN INSTITUTE OF MATERIALS HANDLING
Conveyor belt installations and related components Chutes Level 1
course on belt conveying technology
httpWWvVsaimhcozaeducationcourse01chuteshtm Date of access
18 Jun 2009
[12] CLARKE R 2008 Hood and spoon internal flow belt conveyor transfer
systems SACEA - seminar 22 Aug httpWWvVsaceaorgzaDate of
access 22 Jun 2009
[13] T W WOODS CONSTRUCTION 2009 Design problems in coal transfer
chutes 24 Mar httpWWvVferretcomaucTW-Woods-Constructions
Date of access 25 Jun 2009
[14] LOUGHRAN J 2009 The flow of coal through transfer chutes 20 Aug
Showcase of research excellence James Cook University Australia
[15] ONEIL M 2006 A guide to coal chute replacement Power Engineering
International Nov httpgoliathecnextcomcoms2lgi 0198-369643Ashy
guide-to-coal-chutehtml Date of access 3 Jul 2009
[16] NORDELL LK 1992 A new era in overland conveyor belt design
httpWWvVckitcozasecureconveyorpaperstroughedoverlandoverland
htm Date of access 3 Jul 2009
The optimisation of transfer chutes in the bulk materials industry
MN van Aarde
106
REFERENCES
[17] Rowland C 1992 Dust Control at Transfer Points
httpwwwckitcozasecureconveyorpapersbionic-research-2d-bri2shy
paper05htm Date of access 4 Jul 2009
[18] KRAM ENGINEERING Ceramic composite impact blocks
httpwwwkramengineeringcozacercomhtmIDate of access
5 Jul 2009
I19] BLAZEK C 2005 Kinkaid InteliFlo tradeInstallation Source for Plats
Power Atticle Oct
httpwwwbenetechusacompdf caseStudyBe neKi ncArti c pdf
Date of access 10 Aug 2009
[20] CRP Engineering Corp Modern Transfer Chute Designs for Use in
Material Handling
httpwwwcbpengineeringcompdflTransfer Chutespdf Date of access
26 Apr 2010
[21] ROZENTALS J 2008 Rational design of conveyor chutes Bionic
Research Institute South African Institute of Materials Handling
[22] ROBERTS AW SCOTT OJ 1981 Flow of bulk solids through
transfer chutes of variable geometry and profile Bulk Solids Handling
1(4) Dec
[23] CARSON JW ROYAL TA GOODWILL DJ 1986 Understanding
and Eliminating Particle Segregation Problems Bulk Solids Handling
6(1) Feb
[24] BENJAMIN CW 2004 The use of parametric modelling to design
transfer chutes and other key components Gulf Conveyor Group The optimisation of transfer chutes in the bulk materials industry
MN van Aarde
107
l25] STUART DICK D ROYAL TA 1992 Design Principles for Chutes to
Handle Bulk Solids Bulk Solids Handling 12(3) Sep
[26J REICKS AV RUDOLPHI TJ 2004 The Importance and Prediction of
Tension Distribution around the Conveyor Belt Path Bulk materials
handling by conveyor belt 5(2)
(271 RAMOS CM 1991 The real cost of degradation
institute Chute design conference 1991
Bionic research
[28] ROBERTS AW 1969 An investigation of the gravity flow of non
cohesive granular materials through discharge chutes Transactions of
the ACMEjournal of engineering for indust~ May
[29] TAYLOR HJ 1989 Guide to the design of transfer chutes and chute
linings for bulk materials
association 1989
mechanical handling engineers
[30] ROBERTS AW 1999 Chute design application transfer chute design
Design guide for chutes in bulk solids handling The University of
Newcastle Australia
[31] NORDELL LK 1994 Palabora installs Curved Transfer Chute in Hard
Rock to Minimise Belt Cover Wear Bulk Solids Handling 14 Dec
[32] ROZENTALS J 1991 Flow of Bulk Solids in Chute Design
research institute Chute design conference 1991
Bionic
The optimisation oftransfer chutes in the bulk materials industry
MN van Aarde
108
REFERENCES
[33] ROBERTS AW WICHE SJ 2007 Feed Chute Geometry for
Minimum Belt Wear (h International conference of bulk materials
handling 17 Oct
[34J POWDER HANDLING New OEM Conveyor Transfer Chute Design
Software Helix Technologies
httpvwvwpowderhandlingcomauarticesnew-dem-conveyor-transfershy
chute-design-software Date of access 12 Aug 2009
[35J SAWLEY ML CLEARY PW 1999 A Parallel Discrete Element
Method for Industrial Granular Flow SimUlations EPFL - Super
Computing Review (11)
[36] DEWICKI G 2003 Bulk Material Handling and Processing - Numerical
Techniques and Simulation of Granular Material Overland Conveyor
Company Bulk Solids Handling 23(2)
[37J FA VIER J 2009 Continuing Improvements Boost use of Discrete
Element Method Oil and Gas Engineer- Production Processing 7 Oct
[38] KRAUS E F KA TTERFELD A Usage of the Discrete Element Method in
Conveyor Technologies Institute for Conveyor Technologies (IFSL) The
Otto-von-Guericke University of Magdeburg
[39] MOYS MH VAN NIEROP MA VAN TONDER JC GLOVER G
2005 Validation of the Discrete Element Method (OEM) by Comparing
Predicted Load Behaviour of a Grinding Mill with Measured Data School
for Process and Materials Engineering University of Witwatersrand
Johannesburg The optimisation of transfer materials industry
MN van Aarde
109
REFERENCES
[40J MciLVINA P MOSSAD R 2003 Two dimensional transfer chute
analysis using a continuum method Third international conference on
CFD in the Minerals and Process Industry CSIRO Melbourne Australia
(41J Overland Conveyor Company Inc 2009 Applied DEM
httpwwwapplieddemcomDate of access 26 Apr 2010
(42] DEM SOLUTIONS 2008 Advanced Particle Simulation Capabilities with
EDEM 21 Press release 5 Nov
[43J DEM SOLUTIONS 2008 Martin Engineering Expands use of EDEMTM
Software in Design of Solids Handling Equipment Press release 20 Feb
(44] COETZEE CJ ELS DNJ 2009 Calibration of Discrete Element
Parameters and the Modelling of Silo Discharge and Bucket Filling
Computers and Electronics in Agriculture 65 Mar
[45] DAVID J KRUSES PE Conveyor Belt Transfer Chute Modelling and
Other Applications using The Discrete Element Method in the Material
Handling Industry
httpwwwckitcozasecureconveyorpaperstrouqhedconveyorconveyor
Date of access 3 Sep 2009
bulk materials industry
MN van Aarde
110
ApPENDIXA
ApPENDIX A MATERIAL TESTS AND LINER SELECTiON
The optimisation of-transfer chutes in the bulk materials industry
MN van Aarde
11-1
ApPENDIX A
MATERIAL TEST WORK AND LINER SELECTION
Material samples were taken from the stockpile area for evaluation and testing
These samples represent the worst case materials for impact wear and flow
problems Tests were conducted by external consultants as this is a speciality
field Therefore no detail information on how the tests are conducted is currently
available Results from these tests should indicate the worst case parameters for
chute design according to each specific liner type tested
The material handled by the facility varied from 4 mm to 34 mm lump size A mid
range lump size ore was identified as the preferred material to use for wear
testing This decision was based on the specific ore type maximum lump size of
15 mm as required for the wear test The wear test apparatus used cannot
provide conclusive results with the larger lump sizes of 34 mm and thus smaller
sizes are used Guidance on which ore samples to take was given by the
external consultants tasked with performing the test work
The test work is divided into two sections Firstly the flow test work is carried out
on the finer material with a higher clay content known to have bad flow angles
Included in the selection of fine materials is a sample of the scraper dribblings
This is the material scraped off the belt underneath the head pulley Secondly
the wear tests were conducted on 15 mm samples as explained above
A few common liners were selected for testing These liners are shown in
Table A Some of these liners are known for their specific purpose and
characteristics Polyurethane is known to have a very good coefficient of friction
and will therefore improve the flow of material This material does however
wear out quicker in high impact applications Therefore it is only considered for
use inside the dribbling chute
The optimisation of transfer chutes in the bulk materials industry
MN van Aarde
112
ApPENDIX A
As can be seen from Figure 37 in section 432 the dribbling chute will only see
scraper dribblings from the primary and secondary scrapers It is protected from
any main stream flow of material by the start up chute This makes the
polyurethane liner a prime candidate for lining this section of the chute
Table A Material tested vs liner type
I Flow Tests Wear Tests
Liner T
en aJ c
u
I
i
N en aJ c
u
Cf)
en aJ c
u
I en
shy OJaJ C 0 shyj -shy 0 u pound
(f) shy0
T
aJ ~ j 0 0
N aJ ~ j 0 0 i
I Chrome x x x x x
Carbide
x x x x xI VRN 500 I
x x x x x x94
Alumina
Ceramic i I
Poly x
Urethane I I I
FLOW TEST WORK
The fines 1 sample was tested at three different moisture contents of 36 41
and 47 This is 70 80 and 90 of saturation moisture respectively No
noticeable difference was observed in the wall friction angles Therefore the
fines 2 and fines 3 samples were tested at 80 of saturation which is 42 and
43 moisture content respectively
Test work showed that the minimum chute angle required for flow increased as
the impact pressure increased Chute angles were measured up to impact
pressures of about 8 kPa The worst chute angle obtained was 62deg This means
that no angle inside the chute should be less than 62deg from the horizontal
The industry 113
MN van Aarde
ApPENDIXA
The scraper dribblings were tested at a moisture content of 12 This material
possesses the most clay content and therefore has the worst flow properties
During testing of this material water was added to improve the flow At an
impact pressure of 03 kPa the minimum chute angle drops from 62deg to 56deg when
adding a fine mist spray of water
WEAR TEST WORK
As stated in chapter 4 wear tests were conducted on the chrome carbide
overlay ceramics and VRN500 The results of these tests are shown as non
dimensional wear ratios of mm wearmm travel of bulk solid sliding on the wear
liners coupon at a given force Test results shown in Table B indicate that the
chrome carbide will have about 185 times the lifetime of 94 alumina ceramics
The VRN500 liner will wear about 6 times faster than the 94 alumina ceramics
at the same force
Table B Wear ratios of liners at two different pressure ranges
lore Wall Coupon 65 kPa 163kPa -173 kPa I i
Coarse 1 on 94 Alumina Ceramic 90 E-9 37 E-8
Coarse 1 on Chrome Carbide 87 E-9 20 E-8
Coarse 1 on VRN500 91 E-8 I 24 E-7 i
Coarse 2 on 94 Alumina Ceramics 38 E-9 22 E-8
Coarse 2 on Chrome Carbide 55 E-9 15 E-8
Coarse 2 on VRN500 66 E-8 25 E-7 I
LINER SELECTION
The lifetime of the liners is not the only criteria Maintainability and cost are also
factors that must be considered Chrome carbide seems to be the liner of choice
for this application However the specific type of chrome carbide tested is not
The optimisation of transfer chutes industry 114
MN van Aarde
ApPEND[xA
manufactured locally and the imported cost is approximately three times that of
ceramics
VRN500 is slightly cheaper than ceramics and can easily be bolted to the back
plate of the chute which makes maintenance very simple Ceramics are
however widely used on the facility and the maintenance teams are well trained
for this specific liner Therefore 94 alumina ceramics is chosen for this
application
The optimisation of transfer chutes in the bulk materials industry
MN van Aarde
115
ApPENODlt B
ApPENDIX B CHUTE CONTROL PHILOSOPHY
The optfmisation of transfer chutes in the bulk materials industry
MN van Aarde
116
ApPENDIX B
SPOON IN THE OPERATING POSITION
For the spoon to be in the operating position the moving head must be over that
specific spoon and the feeding stockyard conveyor must be running This means
that material will be fed through the chute In this case the spoon needs to be in
the operating position to prevent spillage
However when the chute is in the operating position and the feeding conveyor
trips for any reason the actuated spoon section must not move to the non
operating position If the spoon position feedback fails then the system must trip
and the spoon must remain in its last position The downstream conveyor must
also fail to start with this condition
SPOON IN THE NON OPERATING POSITION
As a rule the spoon needs to be in the non operating position when the moving
head on that specific stockyard conveyor is in the purging position (position C)
The reason is that when a stacker reclaimer is in stacking mode any upstream
stacker reclaimer can be reclaiming The reclaimed material on CV 5 or CV 6
will have to pass underneath the actuated chute
ACTUATED SPOON OVER CV 5
As an example for the movement of any actuated spoon on CV 5 the following
are considered When the moving heads of any of the stockyard conveyors are
in position A and that specific stockyard conveyor is running then the rest of the
actuated spoons over CV 5 must be in the non operating position The
following scenario provides a better understanding
bull CV 4 is running
bull CV 4 moving head is in position A
The optimisation of transfer chutes in the bulk materials industry
MN van Aarde
117
ApPENDIXB
In this situation all the actuated spoons on CV 5 except underneath CV 4
must be in the non operating position
ACTUATED SPOON OVER CV 6
As an example for the movement of any actuated spoon on CV 6 the following
are considered When the moving heads of any of the stockyard conveyors are
in position B and that specific stockyard conveyor is running then the rest of the
actuated spoons over CV 6 must be in the non operating position The
following scenario is similar to 453 but explains the control philosophy for the
moving head in position B
bull CV 2 is running
bull CV 2 moving head is in position B
In this situation all the actuated spoons on CV 6 except underneath CV 2
must be in the non operating position
The optimisation of transfer chutes in bulk materials industry
MN van Aarde
118
LIST OF FIGURES
Figure 28 Coarse material at 8 000 tlh 46
Figure 29 Fine material at 8 000 tlh 47
Figure 30 Blocked chute with coarse material at 8600 tIh 47
Figure 31 Damaged side skirt 49
Figure 32 View behind the chute of the receiving conveyor before loading 50
Figure 33 View behind the chute of the receiving conveyor during loading 50
Figure 34 Peak surges experienced during reclaiming operations 52
Figure 35 Stockyard head end layout 59
Figure 36 Dimensional constraints on the existing transfer configuration 60
Figure 37 Hood and spoon configuration for the 90deg transfer 63
Figure 38 Hood velocity profile 65
Figure 39 Spoon velocity profile 66
Figure 40 Chute cross section 67
Fig ure 43 Honeycomb wear box positioning 69
Figure 44 Wear box in the hood section 70
Figure 45 Spacing arrangement of honeycomb ribs inside the hood 71
Figure 46 Wear box in the spoon section 72
Figure 47 Liner detail of the spoon honeycomb wear box 73
Figure 41 Spoon in the operational position 74
Figure 42 Spoon in the non operational position 75
Figure 48 Flow analysis examples a) separation and screening b) hoppers
feeders [36J 80
Figure 49 Simulations results from Fluenttrade [4OJ 83
Figure 50 Simulation results from Bulk Flow Analysttrade [41J83
Figure 51 Determination of material properties for an accurate angle of repose88
Figure Actual material flow with coarse Sat 10 000 tIh 89
Figure 53 Material flow pattem through the existing chute 90
Figure 54 Cross sectional side view of material flow through the existing chute91
Figure 55 Material flow through hood at 10 000 tlh 92
Figure 56 Material flow through spoon at 10 000 tlh 93
Figure 57 Determination of the optimum hood location 94
The optimisation of transfer chutes in the bulk materials industry
MN van Aarde
x
OF FIGURES
Figure 58 Material behaviour through hood 96
Figure 59 Material behaviour through spoon 96
The optimisation of transfer chutes in the bulk materials industry
MN van Aarde
xi
LIST OF TABLES
LIST OF TABLES
Table 1 Design Input Reference Requirements [24J 24
Table 2 Iron are grades used for chute test work 45
Table 3 Results from test programme 54
The optimisation of transfer chutes in the bulk materials industry
M N van Aarde
xii
---------------------------------
CV
NOMENCLATURE
NOMENCLATURE
SCADA
CCTV
CEMA
DEM
kPa
mm
MSHA
ms
mt
MW
NIOSH
OSHA
RampD
tlh
3D
Supervisory Control And Data Acquisition
Closed Circuit Television
Conveyor Equipment Manufacturers Association
Conveyor
Discrete Element Method
Kilopascal
Millimetres
Mine Safety and Health Administration
Metres per second
Metric Tons
Megawatt
National Institute for Occupational Safety and Health
Occupational Safety and Health Administration
Radius of curvature
Research and Development
Tons per hour
Three Dimensional
The optimisation of transfer chutes in the bulk materials industry
MN van Aarde
xiii
CHAPTER 1
CHAPTER 1 INTRODUCTION TO TRANSFER CHUTES IN THE BULK
MATERIALS HANDLING INDUSTRY
The optimisation of transfer chutes in the bulk materials industry
MN van Aarde
1
CHAPTER 1
11 INTRODUCTION TO TRANSFER CHUTES
111 Bulk material handling industry
In order to comprehend the utilisation of transfer chutes fully it is imperative to
first understand the industry in which it is used Transfer chutes are most
commonly used in the bulk materials handling industry Bulk materials handling
operations perform a key function in a great number and variety of industries
throughout the world as stated in 1978 by Arnold McLean and Roberts [1 J
The nature of materials handling and scale of industrial operation varies from
industry to industry and country to country These variations are based on the
industrial and economic capacity and requirements of the specific industry or
country Regardless of the variations in industry the relative costs of storing
handling and transporting bulk materials are in the majority of cases very
significant
o
Figure 1 Growth in global crude steel production from 1996 to 2006 [2J
The optimisation of transfer chutes in the bulk materials industry
MN van Aarde
2
CHAPTER 1
The chart from BHP Billiton shown in Figure 1 provides a clear indication of the
actual drivers of global materials demand Figure 1 indicates the percentage
growth in crude steel production from all the major role players between 1996
and 2006 China accounted for 65 of the 494 million tonnes of global steel
production growth between 1996 and 2006 Europe grew by 6 while the other
countries grew by 20 [2]
These figures emphasise that bulk materials handling performs a key function in
the global industry and economy [1] Because of market requirements new
products continuously evolve This is also true for the field of bulk conveying
technologies [3] It can be assumed that the evolution of new technology is due
to the requirement for more efficient and cost effective operation
The case study which will be discussed from Chapter 3 onwards is an iron ore
export facility This facility exports approximately 50 million tonnes per annum
With each hour of down time the financial losses equate to approximately
R750 000 This highlights the fact that handling systems should be designed and
operated with a view to achieving maximum efficiency and reliability
112 Function of transfer chutes
BS2890 (Specification for Troughed Belt Conveyors) gives the definition for
transfer chutes as follows A straight curved or spiral open topped or enclosed
smooth trough by which materials are directed and lowered by gravity [4] For
any belt conveyor system to operate successfully the system requires that [5]
bull the conveyor belt be loaded properly
bull the material transported by the conveyor is discharged properly
The transfer of bulk material can either be from a belt bin hopper feeder or
stockpile and occurs at a transfer point In most cases this transfer point requires
optimisation of transfer chutes in the bulk materials industry
MN van Aarde
3
CHAPTER 1 - ----~--~--------------~--------
a transfer chute [5] In industry the most common use of transfer chutes is for
transferring bulk material from one conveyor belt to another This transfer of
material can be done in any direction as simplistically explained in Figure 2 and
Figure 3
Figure 2 Typical in-line transfer point [6J
Figure 2 shows a basic in-line transfer of material from the end of one conveyor
belt onto the start of another conveyor belt Figure 3 illustrates a more intricate
design where the direction of material transport is changed by an angle of 90 0 bull
This design or any other design entailing a directional change in flow normally
requires more detailed engineering [7
The optimisation of transfer chutes in the bulk materials industry
MN van Aarde
4
CHAPTER 1
Regardless of the direction or type of transfer there are some design
requirements that always need special attention Some of these requirements
are reduced wear on chute liners correct discharge velocity minimum material
degradation and minimum belt abrasion The correct design will also eliminate
blockages shape the load correctly and minimise the creation of dust [7]
12 VARIOUS APPLICATIONS AND CONFIGURATIONS OF TRANSFER CHUTES
The application of transfer chutes is central to any operation in the bulk handling
industry Whether it is mining operations storing stacking importing or
exporting of bulk material the transfer of material is always required On the
mining side the challenges involved with materials handling are probably some of
the most extreme
This is due to the great variation in lump sizes that must be catered for At
Sishen iron ore mine seven iron ore products are produced conforming to
different chemical and physical specifications The current mining process at
Sishen entails [8]
bull Removal of topsoil and stockpiling
bull Drilling and blasting of ore
bull Loading of iron ore and transporting to the crushers
bull Crushing and screening into size fractions
bull Beneficiation of all size fractions
bull Stockpiling onto various product beds
The processes with the most intricate and complex chute arrangements are
probably crushing and screening as well as stacking and reclaiming of material
The optimisation of transfer chutes in the bulk materials industry
11 N van Aarde
5
CHAPTER 1
121 Crushing
An excavator or wheeled loader transfers the rock to be crushed into the feed
hopper of the primary crusher The primary crusher breaks the large rock
boulders or run of mine material into smaller grain sizes Some of the bigger
crushers in the industry can crack boulders that are about one cubic meter in
size All the crushed material passes over a screen to separate the different
lump sizes The material that falls through the screen is transferred via a series
of transfer chutes and conveyor belts to the stockpile area [9]
Where the material does not pass through the screen another system of transfer
chutes and conveyor belts transfers this material to a secondary crusher The
material is fed into this crusher via a transfer chute from the discharge of a
conveyor belt All the processed material is then transferred to the stockpile area
via a separate series of transfer chutes and conveyor systems [9] Throughout
this whole process the material lump size changes and with it the transfer chute
requirements
Figure 4 Material lump sizes through a crushing plant
The optimisation of transfer chutes in the bulk materials industry
MN van Aarde
6
CHAPTER 1
Figure 4 shows some spillage from a conveyor between a primary and secondary
crusher The shovel in the picture provides a good reference as to the variation
in material lump size on the walkway
122 Stacking and Recaiming
Normally the stockyard area has an elongated yard conveyor for moving bulk
material in the longitudinal direction of the stockyard Straddling the yard
conveyor transversely is the rail mounted undercarriage of the stacker reclaimer
Three main chutes transfer material through the machine [10] Figure 5 shows
this machine in action while reclaiming material from a stockpile
Figure 5 Stacker Reclaimer in reclaiming mode
The first chute will transfer material to the incline conveyor of the machine when
the material has to be stacked on the stockpile In the case where the material
must bypass the machine this chute will transfer material from the tripper back
onto the yard conveyor [10]
The optimisation of transfer chutes in the bulk materials industry
MN van Aarde
7
CHAPTER 1
The second chute transfers material from the incline conveyor onto the boom
conveyor This is normally a difficult process because the boom conveyor is
never in the same direction as the incline conveyor From the end of the boom
conveyor the material is Simply discharged onto the stockpile [10]
When reclaiming stockpile material the bucket whee at the head end of the
boom conveyor scoops up material and deposits it back onto the boom conveyor
From here it is discharged into the centre chute of the machine This chute then
discharges the material onto the yard conveyor for further processing In some
cases the bottom section of this centre chute must be moved out of the way to
allow free passage of material discharged from the tripper chute onto the yard
conveyor [10]
123 Chute configurations
Various chute configurations are used in the bulk materials handling industry
These configurations depend on the specific requirements of the system layout
or material properties There are basically two main configurations consisting of
dead box chutes and dynamic chutes Both of these configurations have their
specific applications in industry The major difference is that dead box chutes
use the material being transferred as a chute liner whereas dynamic chutes are
lined with a high wear resistant material A combination of both can also be
used
If the material being transferred is relatively dry such as goid ore dead boxes
prove to be more beneficial One of the applications of a ded box is to absorb
the direct impact of material discharged from a conveyor into a head chute as
can be seen in Figure 6 Other applications are in long or high transfer points In
these transfers the momentum of falling material must be reduced before
reaching the receiving conveyor belt in order to reduce wear of the belt [11]
The optimisation of transfer chutes in the bulk materials industry
MN van Aarde
8
CHAPTER 1
Figure 6 Typical dead box [11]
As shown in Figure 7 dead boxes are also used to accomplish changes in the
vertical flow direction by inserting angled panels This configuration where dead
boxes are used as deflection plates or impact wear plates is known as a cascade
chute In this case the deflection plate or the impact wear plate hardness is
equal to that of the feed material [11]
Figure 7 Typical cascade chute [11]
The hood and spoon chute or dynamic chute is configured so that the hood
catches and changes the material trajectory path to exit with a vertical velocity
When the material impacts the spoon it slides down the smooth spoon surface
The material flow direction is changed to the direction of the receiving conveyor
as shown in Figure 8 [12]
The optimisation of transfer chutes in the bulk materials industry
MN van Aarde
9
CHAPTER 1
Figure 8 Typical dynamic chute [12J
Ancillary equipment used with this configuration of chutes is radial doors and
flopper gates Radial doors are used successfully below ore passes or silos for
an onoff feed control as shown by Figure 9 One drawback of radial doors is the
possibility of jamming while closing In order to counteract this problem a
knocker arm between the cylinder door and the rod can be added This helps to
close the door with full force open with reduced force or hammered open [11]
Figure 9 Radial door used in chutes under ore passes or silos [11J
The optimisation of transfer chutes in the bulk materials industry
MN van Aarde
10
CHAPTER 1
The function of a f10pper gate is to divert the flow of material in a chute when one
conveyor is required to feed either of two discharge points as shown in Figure 10
For this same purpose a diverter car can also be used where a section of the
chute moves in and out of the path of material flow The critical area in the
design of a flop per gate is the hinge point In order for the gate to be self
cleaning the hinge point should be placed above the apex of the double chute
This also prevents rock traps that can jam the gate [11]
COVERED
Figure 10 Flopper gate diverling material to different receiving conveyors [11J
13 RECURRING CHUTE PROBLEMS AND COUNTERMEASURES FROM INDUSTRY
Transfer chutes are a fundamental link when conveying ore and therefore it is
important to get it right at the outset of design and fabrication Design and
fabrication issues can cause numerous problems when transferring material
Historically conveyor system design focused on the systems overall structural
integrity while ensuring that the equipment would fit within the facilitys
constraints [13] [14] [15]
The optimisation of transfer chutes in the bulk materials industry
MN van Aarde
11
CHAPTER 1
Little attention was given to design analysis or consideration for material flow
characteristics Normally the solution for controlling flow was to implement
simple rock boxes [15] This type of chute configuration is still commonly used in
industry but with more emphasis on the flow of material The most recurrent
problems on transfer chutes are [13] [14]
bull Spillage
bull Blocked chutes
bull High wear on the receiving belt due to major differences between the
material velocity and the belt velocity
bull Rapid chute wear
bull Degradation of the material being transferred
bull Excessive generation of dust and noise
bull Miss tracking of the receiving conveyor belt due to skew loading from the
transfer chute
Figure 11 Chute liner degradation
Figure 11 shows the excessive wear on ceramic tiles where the material
trajectory from the feeding belt impacts the chute These tiles are replaceable
and a maintenance schedule normally specifies the replacement intervals A
The optimisation of transfer chutes in the bulk materials industry 12
MN van Aarde
CHAPTER 1
problem arises when the frequency of these maintenance intervals is too high
due to excessive wear on the liners
Figure 12 Results of continuous belt wear at transfer points
The conveyor belt can account for up to 60 of the capital cost of a bulk
materials handling plant This means that the cost implications of constant
replacement of a conveyor belt due to wear can become significantly higher
than the original capital investment [16] Figure 12 shows the extreme damage
on a conveyor belt caused by abrasion and gouging
Figure 13 Dust from a transfer point onto a stockpile
The optimisation of transfer chutes in the bulk materials industry
MN van Aarde
13
CHAPTER 1 --~ ---------------------------shy
The presence of dust is an indisputable fact in many industries concerned with
the handling or processing of products such as coal mineral ores and many
others [17] As in the case of spillage it is easy to identify transfer systems that
cause dust clouds Environmental regulations are in place to prevent excessive I
dust emissions
Government organisations such as the Occupational Safety and Health
Administration (OSHA) the Mine Safety and Health Administration (MSHA) and
the National Institute for Occupational Safety and Health (NIOSH) closely monitor
dust levels at all coal handling facilities [13] Therefore it is imperative that the
chute design process caters for limiting dust emissions
Systems normally used in industry are enclosed skirting systems bag houses
and dust collectors This however is only treating the symptom rather than
eliminating the primary cause In order to minimise dust generation the use of
low impact angles and minimal chute contact is required (14] One of the most
successful methods of controlling dust is atomised water spray systems using a
combination of high pressure water and chemical substances
Over the years considerable research has gone into minimising wear on transfer
chutes There are currently a few different liner types to choose from depending
on the configuration and application of the chute These include ceramic tiles
chrome carbide overlay materials and typi~al hardened steel plates such as
VRN A combination of liner materials can also be used similar to the one
shown in Figure 14
The opUmisation of transfer chutes in the bulk materials industry
MN van Aarde
14
CHAPTER 1
Figure 14 Ceramic composite liners [18J
This ceramic composite liner is an example of the new technology available in
chute lining materials It is a high wear resistant surface made from cylindrical
alumina ceramic pellets bound within a resilient rubber base The purpose of this
material is to provide wear resistance through the use of ceramics while the
rubber dampens the impact forces [18]
Some innovative concepts for chute design have been implemented since the
materials handling industry started to incorporate new ideas Benetech Inc
installed a new generation hood and spoon type chute at Dominions 1200 MW
Kincaid coal powered generating station as shown in Figure 15 This chute
replaced the conventional dead box chute [19] Their innovation is to use a pipe
configuration combined with the hood and spoon concept
The optimisation of transfer chutes in the bulk materials industry
MN van Aarde
15
CHAPTER 1
Figure 15 Benetech Inteliflow J-Gide transfer chute [19J
This chute has sufficient chute wall slope and cross sectional area to prevent
material build-up and blocked chutes Reduced collision forces in the chute
minimize material degradation and the creation of excessive dust The material
velocity in the chute is controlled by the wall angles to obtain a discharge velocity
with the same horizontal component as the belt velocity [19] Figure 16 shows a
flow simulation of the Benetech concept The simulation shows that this concept
will result in lower impact forces and reduce belt abrasion
The optimisation of transfer chutes in the bulk materials industry
MN van Aarde
16
CHAPTER 1
Figure 16 Flow simulation ofthe Benetech Ineliflo chute [19J
CBP Engineering Corp also considers the concept of pipe type sections to be
the answer to most of the transfer chute problems They describe it as a curved
or half round chute The modern perception is to gently guide the material in the
required direction rather than use a square box design or deflector doors which
turns or deflects the flow [20]
The industry is striving towards developing new technology in transfer chute
design One solution is to incorporate soft loading transfer chutes to alter the
material flow direction with minimum impact on the side walls of chute and
receiving conveyor As experienced by many industries these types of chutes
can transfer material onto the receiving conveyor at almost the same velocity as
the conveyor By doing so many of the problems with material transfer can be
eliminated [13]
Most of these solutions as proposed by industry only address a few of the
numerous problems experienced with transfer chutes The dynamic hood and
The optimisation of transfer chutes in the bulk materials industry
MN van Aarde
17
CHAPTER 1
spoon chute appears to afford the best opportunity for solving most of the
problems There are still however many unanswered questions surrounding this
design
Figure 11 shows the installation of a hood type chute in the iron ore industry It is
clear from this image that liner wear in the higher impact areas is still an area of
concern Improvements can still be made to this design in order to further
enhance its performance
14 PURPOSE OF THIS RESEARCH
The bulk materials handling industry is constantly facing the challenge of
implementing transfer chutes that satisfy all the system requirements Problems
such as high wear spillage blockages and the control of material flow are just
some of the major challenges faced by the industry
The objective of this research is to identify problems experienced with transfer
chutes of an existing bulk handling system and to apply current design solutions
in eliminating these problems In doing so the research aims to introduce a new
method of minimising liner wear caused by high impact velocities
Dynamic chutes are discussed in particular where the entire design process
addresses the problems identified on chutes in brown field projects Approaching
chute design from a maintenance point of view with the focus on reducing liner I
degradation will provide a fresh approach to transfer chute design The
concepts disc~ssed in this dissertation (dynamic and dead box chutes) are
commonly used in industry However some research is done to determine
whether a combination of these concepts can solve some of the problems
experienced by industry
The optimisation of transfer chutes in the bulk materials industry 18
MN van Aarde
CHAPTER 1
At the hand of all the information provided in this dissertation its purpose is to
enable the chute designers to better understand the process of chute
optimisation and design This is achieved through the discussion of a case study
where the chutes are evaluated and re-designed to achieve the desired
performance
15 SYNOPSIS OF THIS DISSERTATION
Chapter 1 gives an introduction to the bulk materials industry and the role that
transfer chutes plays in this industry Some of the problems that the industries
have been experiencing with transfer chutes were identified and the diverse
solutions to these problems discussed These solutions were reviewed to
identify whether improvement would be possible
Chapter 2 provides a better understanding of the functionality and the
conceptualisation of transfer chutes as well as investigating the theory behind
material flow through transfer chutes This theory reviews the research and
design objectives used as a guideline when approaching a new chute
configuration The guidelines for evaluating and designing transfer chutes are
used to verify the performance of these chutes in the iron ore industry
Chapter 3 identifies some practical problems experienced on transfer chutes a~
an existing bulk transfer facility These problems are identified through a series
of tests where the actual flow inside the chutes is monitored via CCTV cameras
The results obtained from these tests are specific to this facility but can provide
insight into the cause of some problems generally experienced in the industry
These results can provide helpful information when modifying or re-designing
new transfer chutes
Chapter 4 uses the theory discussed in Chapter 2 to conceptualise a new
transfer chute configuration for the transfer points that were tested All the facility
The optimisation of transfer chutes in the bulk materials industry 19
MN van Aarde
CHAPTER 1
constraints are taken into account during the process in order to obtain an
optimum solution to the problems identified during the chute test work The old
chutes did not have major problems with liner wear due to large dead boxes
However this remains a serious consideration for the new dynamic chute design
due to its configuration where there is continuous sliding abrasion of the chute
surface A new concept for the reduction of liner degradation is introduced in this
chapter
Before manufacturing and installing this new concept it is important to verify that
it will perform according to conceptual design Chapter 5 is a discussion on the
use of the Discrete Element Method as a verification tool A simulation of the
new transfer chute concept is done to visualise the behaviour of the material as it
passes through the new transfer chute configuration
Chapter 6 discusses the benefits of the new transfer chute configuration A
conclusion is made as to what the financial implications will be with the
implementation of this new concept Recommendations are made for future
studies in the field of bulk materials handling These recommendations focus on
the optimisation of processes and the reduction of maintenance cost to the
facility
The optimisation of transfer chutes in the bulk materials industry
MN van Aarde
20
CHAPTER 2
CHAPTER 2 BASIC CONSIDERATIONS IN CHUTE DESIGN
The optimisation of transfer chutes in the bulk materials industry
MN van Aarde
21
CHAPTER 2
21 PREFACE
In an economic driven world the pressure for production is often the cause of the
loss of production This is a bold statement and is more factual than what the
industry would like to admit This is also valid in the bulk materials handling
industry Production targets seldom allow time for investigation into the root
cause of the problems The quick fix option is often adopted but is frequently the
cause of even more maintenance stoppages
Existing chutes on brown field projects often fail due to an initial disregard for the
design criteria changes in the system parameters or lack of maintenance
These transfer points are often repaired on site by adding or removing platework
and ignoring the secondary functions of a transfer chute Therefore it is
imperative to always consider the basic chute specifications when addressing a
material transfer problem [21]
22 DESIGN OBJECTIVES
In the quest to improve or design any transfer point some ground rules must be
set This can be seen as a check list when evaluating an existing chute or
designing a new chute Transfer chutes should aim to meet the following
requirements as far as possible [21] [22] [23]
bull Ensure that the required capacity can be obtained with no risk of blockage
bull Eliminate spillage
bull Minimise wear on all components and provide the optimal value life cycle
solution
bull Minimise degradation of material and generation of excessive dust
bull Accommodate and transfer primary and secondary scraper dribblings onto
the receiving conveyor
The optimisation of transfer chutes in the bulk materials industry
MN van Aarde
22
CHAPTER 2
bull Ensure that any differences between the flow of fine and coarse grades are
catered for
bull Transfer material onto the receiving conveyor so that at the feed point onto
the conveyor
bull the component of the material now (parallel to the receiving conveydr) is as
close as possible to the belt velocity (at least within 10) to minimise the
power required to accelerate the material and to minimise abrasive wear of
the belt
bull the vertical velocity component of the material flow is as low as possible so
as to minimise wear and damage to the belt as well as to minimise spillage
due to material bouncing off the belt
bull The flow is centralised on the belt and the lateral flow is minimised so as
not to affect belt tracking and avoid spillage
With the design of a new chute there are up to 46 different design inputs with 19
of these being absolutely critical to the success of the design Some of the most
critical preliminary design considerations are shown in Table 1 [24]
The optimisation of transfer chutes in the bulk materials industry
MN van Aarde
23
CHAPTER 2
Table 1 Design Input Reference Requirements [24J
Aria Unit
Feed Conveyor
Belt Speed r ms
Belt Width mm
JibHead Pulley Dia mm
Pulley Width mm
Angle to Horizontal at the Head Pulley degrees
Belt Troughing Angle degrees
Sight Height Data
Feed Conveyor Top of Belt to Roof mm
Drop Height mm
Receiving Conveyor Top of Belt to Floor mm
Receiving Conveyor
Belt Speed ms
Belt Width mm
Belt Thickness mm
Angle of Intersection degrees
Angle to Horizontal degrees
Belt Troughing Angle degrees
Material Properties
Max Oversize Lump (on top) mm
Max Oversize Lump (on top) degrees
studies done by Jenike and Johanson Inc have identified six design principles
that can serve as a guideline in chute optimisation exercises These six
principles focus on the accelerated flow in the chute which they identified as the
most critical mode [25]
Within accelerated flow the six problem areas identified by Jenike and Johanson
Inc are [25]
The optimisation of transfer chufes in the bulk materials industry
MN van Aarde
24
CHAPTER 2
bull plugging of chutes at the impact points
bull insufficient cross sectional area
bull uncontrolled flow of material
bull excessive wear on chute surfaces
bull excessive generation of dust
bull attrition or breakdown of particles
221 Plugging of chutes
In order to prevent plugging inside the chute the sliding surface inside the chute
must be sufficiently smooth to allow the material to slide and to clean off the most
frictional bulk solid that it handles This philosophy is particularly important
where the material irnpacts on a sliding surface Where material is prone to stick
to a surface the sliding angle increases proportionally to the force with which it
impacts the sliding surface In order to minimise material velocities and excessive
wear the sliding surface angle should not be steeper than required [25]
222 Insufficient cross sectional area
The cross section of the stream of material inside the chute is a function of the
velocity of flow Therefore it is critical to be able to calculate the velocity of the
stream of material particles at any point in the chute From industry experience a
good rule of thumb is that the cross section of the chute should have at least two
thirds of its cross section open at the lowest material velocity [25] When the
materialis at its lowest velocity it takes up a larger cross section of chute than at
higher velocities Therefore this cross section is used as a reference
223 Uncontrolled flow of material
Due to free falling material with high velocities excessive wear on chutes and
conveyor belt surfaces are inevitable Therefore it is more advantageous to
The optimisation of transfer chutes in the bulk materials industry
MN van Aarde
25
CHAPTER 2
have the particles impact the hood as soon as possible with a small impact
angle after discharge from the conveyor With the material flowing against the
sloped chute walls instead of free falling the material velocity can be controlled
more carefully through the chute [25]
224 Excessive wear on chute surfaces
Free flowing abrasive materials do not normally present a large wear problem
The easiest solution to this problem is to introduce rock boxes to facilitate
material on material flow Chute surfaces that are subjected to fast flowing
sticky and abrasive materials are the most difficult to design
A solution to this problem is to keep the impact pressure on the chute surface as
low as possible This is done by designing the chute profile to follow the material
trajectory path as closely as possible By doing so the material is less prone to
stick to the chute surface and the material velocity will keep the chute surface
clean [25]
225 Excessive generation of dust
Material flowing inside a transfer chute causes turbulence in the air and
excessive dust is created In order to minimise the amount of dust the stream of
material must be kept in contact with the chute surface as far as possible The
material stream must be compact and all impact angles against the chute walls
must be minimised A compact stream of material means that the material
particles are flowing tightly together At the chute discharge point the material
velocity must be as close as possible to the velocity of the receiving belt [25]
The optimisation of transfer in the bulk materials industry
M N van Aarde
26
CHAPTER 2
226 Attrition or breakdown of particles
The break up of particles is more likely to occur when large impact forces are
experienced inside a chute than on smooth sliding surfaces Therefore in most
cases the attrition of material particles can be minimised by considering the
following guidelines when designing a transfer chute minimise the material
impact angles concentrate the stream of material keep the material stream in
contact with the chute surface and keep the material velocity constant as far as
possible [25]
23 INTEGRATING A MORE APPROPRIATE CHUTE LAYOUT WITH THE PLANT
CONSTRAINTS
According to Tunra Bulk Solids in Australia the process for design and
commissioning of a new plant basically consists of four steps The entire
process is based on understanding the properties of the material to be
handled [1]
RampD CENTRE CONSULTING CONTRACTOR ENGINEERING AND PLANT
COMPANY OPERATOR r-------------- I TESTING Of CONCEPTUAl I DETAILED DESIGN CONSTRUCTION amp
I BULKSOUDS - DESIGN COMMISSIONING- I shyI Flow Proper1ies Lining Material tuet Equipment
Selection Procurement _ I I
I I
I Flow Pat1erns SSlpment Quality Control I
I IFeeder Loads amp Process Performance
I Power I Optimisation Assessment I I
L J -
I IBin Loads I I I Wear Predictions I
FEEDBACK I I I IModel Studigt L _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ J
i ~ FEEDBACK r-shyFigure 17 Four step process for plant design and commissioning [1J
The optimisation of transfer chutes in the bulk materials industry
MN van Aarde
27
CHAPTER 2
Figure 17 illustrates this four step process These steps are a good guideline in
order to incorporate a more appropriate chute layout for the plant constraints
This is an iterative process where all the possible solutions to a problem are
measured against all the possible plant constraints This section focuses more
on the second column of Figure 17 and specifically on structures and equipment
During this stage of design the utilisation of 3D parametric modelling also creates
an intimate and very accurate communication between the designer and the
project engineer or client This effective communication tool will save time and
improve the engineering process [24]
A good example of obtaining an appropriate chute layout for the plant constraints
can be explained as follows On an existing plant a transfer point will have a
specific transfer height from the top of the feed conveyor to the top of the
receiving conveyor If the feed conveyor has an incline section to obtain the
required transfer height it will also have a curve in the vertical plane of that
incline section This curve has a certain minimum radius in order to keep the belt
on the idlers at high belt tensions [26]
Figure 18 Vertical curve on incline conveyor
The optimisation of transfer chutes in the bulk materials industry
MN van Aarde
28
CHAPTER 2
If the transfer height at a transfer point is changed the path of the feeding
conveyor should always be taken into consideration With an increase in transfer
height the vertical curve radius will increase as well in order to prevent the
conveyor from lifting off the idlers in the curve This will require expensive
modifications to conveyor structures and therefore in most cases be a pointless
exercise Figure 18 shows clearly the large radius required to obtain a vertical
curve in a belt conveyor
Other considerations on brown field projects might be lift off of the receiving
conveyor at start up before or after the vertical curve This is caused by peaks
in belt tension at start up which may cause the belt to lift off the idlers and chafe
against the chute In some cases this can be solved by fitting a roller as shown
in Figure 19 to the underside of the chute to protect it from being damaged by
the belt or to protect the belt from being damaged by the chute The position of
this specific chute is just after a vertical curve where the belt tends to lift off at
start up
Figure 19 Protective roller on a transfer chute
The optimisation of transfer chutes in the bulk materials industry
MN van Aarde
29
CHAPTER 2
24 INVESTIGATING THE CORRECT CHUTE PROFILE FOR REDUCED LINER WEAR
In order to reduce chute wear the curved-profile variable chute concept is
introduced [27] This concept was originally developed by Professor Roberts for
the grain industry in 1969 [28] After many years of research and investigation
CMR Engineers and Project managers (pty) Ltd came to the following
conclusion any improvement in coal degradation dust generation and chute
wear can only be achieved by avoiding high impact forces or reducing them as
much as possible [27]
At any impact point of material in a chute or conveyor kinetic energy is
dissipated This increases material degradation and wear on liners and conveyor
belt covers Therefore it is good practise to redirect the kinetic energy in a
useful manner This action will help to reduce liner and belt wear [32]
x
Vo
- ImpactPlate
Figure 20 Geometry of the impact plate and material trajectory [30J
The optimisation of transfer chutes n the bulk materials industry
MN van Aarde
30
CHAPTER 2
The path followed by the material discharged over the end pulley of a belt
conveyor is known as its trajectory and is a function of the discharge velocity of
the material from the conveyor [29] Figure 20 shows the material trajectory as
weI as the radius and location of the impact plate In the case of dynamic chutes
this impact plate represents the back plate of the chute
The correct chute profile to reduce wear must cater for the proper location of the
chute covers and wearing plates This location depends upon the path of the
trajectory which must be predicted as accurately as possible
Figure 21 Mode for the impact of a particle on a flat surface [29]
Figure 21 illustrates a material particle impinging on a flat chute surface at an
angle of approach 91 and with approach velocity V1 This particle will then
rebound off the chute plate at an angel 92 and velocity V2 The wear on the
chute liners or the surface shown in Figure 21 will be a function of the vector
change in momentum of the particle One component will be normal to and the
other component parallel to the flat surface The parallel component is referred
to as the scouring component along the surface [29]
It is important to determine the radius of curvature of material within the
trajectory It is now a simple exercise to determine the chute hood radius
depending on plant constraints Firstly the material trajectory must be calculated
The optimisation of transfer chutes in the bulk materials industry
MN van Aarde
31
CHAPTER 2 ---~----------------
According to the mechanical handling engineers association in Perth Australia it
is beneficial to keep the impact angle as small as possible Impact angle less
than 20deg are recommended for most liner materials This will ensure an
acceptably small impulse force component normal to the surface The r~te at
which the material is gouging away the chute liner at the impact point will be
reduced [29]
The material trajectory is determined by equation l
(1)
Where the origin of the x and y axis is taken at the mean material height h and
the discharge point on the pulley as shown in Figure 20 The variables involved
in the calculation of the material trajectory are [30]
y =vertical position on the grid where the trajectory is determined
x = position parallel to the receiving belt line where the trajectory is determined
v = material speed
g =gravitational constant
a =inclination angle of the feeding conveyor
After the material leaves the belt a simplified assumption can be made that it
falls under gravity It is quite clear that in order to minimise the impact angle
the impact plate must follow the path of the material trajectory as far as possible
It will almost never be possible to obtain a contact point between the material and
the chute where there is a smooth contact with no impact angle
This radius of curvature of the material tr~jectory is determined as follows [30
The optimisation of transfer chutes in the bulk materials industry i 32
MN van Aarde
CHAPTER 2
[1 + ( gx )]15 R = vcos8
c (2)
vcos8
Where
g == gravitational constant
v == material speed
8 == Angle at discharge
In order to simplify the manufacturing process of a curved chute the radius must
be constant For a relatively smooth contact between the material and the chute
plate the radius of the curved chute at the point of contact is as close as
possible to the material discharge curvature radius [30] This is rarely possible
on brown field projects due to facility constraints In this case there will be higher
probability for rapid liner wear Each situation must be individually assessed to
determine the best solution
Cross sectional dimensions of the transfer chute must be sufficient to collect the
material and ensure continuous flow without causing blockages At the same
time the chute profile must not result in excessive material speed Material
speed inside the chute will be considered to be excessive when it can not be
controlled to exit the chute at approximately the same velocity to that of the
receiving conveyor Chutes may block for the following reasons [29]
bull Mechanical bridging due to large lumps locking into one another
bull Insufficient cross section causing cohesive material to choke or bridge
bull Inadequate chute inclination causing fines build-up
bull Corner effects or cohesion causing material to stick to the chute walls
The optimisation of transfer chutes in the bulk materials industry
MN van Aarde
33
CHAPTER 2
For the handling of large lumps of material field experience has shown that the
chute cross sectional area should be 25 times the major dimension of the largest
lumps To avoid possible bridging of the material in the chute the
recommendation is to make the inner chute volume as large as possible This
will be guided by the support steelwork around the transfer point [29]
Field experience has shown that it is advisable depending on the material being
transferred that the chute inclination angles be no less than 65deg to 700 Cornerbull
effects should also be avoided where material gets stuck in the inner corners of
chute plate work These angles should preferably be no less than 70 0 bull
25 FEED CHUTE GEOMETRY FOR REDUCED BELT WEAR
The design parameters to reduce both chute and belt wear are interrelated
Research done at the Phalaborwa copper mine is a good case study to prove the
concept of a curved chute profile This mine had specific problems with high belt
wear at transfer points At this facility an in-pit 60 x 89 gyratory crusher and
incline tunnel conveyor was commissioned to haul primary crushed ore A
conventional dead box chute transfers ore from the crusher to a 1800 mm wide
incline conveyor [31]
The maximum lump size handled by this section of the facility is 600 mm (60 kg)
An 18 mm thick top cover was specified for this conveyor with an X grade
rubber according to DIN (abrasion value lt 100 mm) This belt had an original
warranty of 10 years After 35 years the top cover started to show signs of
excessive wear and the tensile cords of the 18 mm thick cover were visible [31]
In April 1994 Phalaborwa commissioned the curved chute concept and a new
belt on the incline conveyor Six months after commissioning no gouging or
pitting damage was evident The material velocity through this curved chute onto
the incline conveyor is shown in Figure 22 [31]
The optimisation of transfer chutes in the bulk materials industry
MN van Aarde
34
CHAPTER 2
VELOCITY ( m I aec ) _ nm _ bull m _ 1211 _ UTI _ U16
_ IIU _ Im _ I rn _ 171-111 _ u n _ ~ l
_ 4 ~
_ 41 _ 4
141 CJ UtiI 1bull-bull 1t5
~ 1m bull UI2
Material Flow Velocity Gradient
Figure 22 Ore flow path in the curved chute onto the incline conveyor [31]
TENDENCY TO FORM STAGNANT LAYER LEADING
TO INSTABILITY IN DEPTH OF FLOW
C8middotFLOW IN CURVED CHUTES
Figure 23 Gentle deceleration of the product before impact on the receiving belt [32]
The optimisation of transfer chutes in the bulk materials industry
MN van Aarde
35
CHAPTER 2
Figure 23 illustrates the gentle deceleration of material that is achieved with the
curved chute concept This helps to reduce belt wear because it is relatively
easy to discharge the material at the same velocity as the receiving conveyor
The material speed v can be calculated at any point in the chute using equation
3 and equation 4 [33]
v 2~R [(2ue2 -l)sin(O) +3ue cos(O)] + Ke 2uB (3) 4ue +1
This equation is only applicable if the curved section of the chute has a constant
radius Rand I-Ie is assumed constant at an average value for the stream [33]
I-Ie = friction coefficient
8 = angle between the horizontal and the section of the spoon where the velocity
is determined and
(4)
The optimisation of transfer chutes in the bulk materjas industry
MN van Aarde
36
CHAPTER 2
Mass Flow Rate Omh
Figure 24 Typical feed chute discharge model [33J
The velocity Ve at the discharge of the chute can be determined from equation 3
and equation 4 The components Vey and Vex of the discharge velocity as
shown in Figure 24 can now be calculated This investigation should aid the
optimisation of the chute profile in order to [33]
bull match the horisontal component Vex of the material exit velocity as close
as possible to the belt speed
bull reduce the vertical component Vey of the material exit velocity in order to
minimize abrasive wear on the receiving conveyor
26 CONCLUSION
This section discussed the technical background necessary for the optimisation
of transfer chutes on an existing iron ore plant which will be discussed in
Chapter 4 The focus is specifically aimed at reducing impact wear on chute liner
materials and abrasive wear on receiving conveyor belts Important to note from
The optimisation oftransfer chutes in the bulk materials industry
MN van Aarde
37
CHAPTER 2
this section is the acceptable limits of dynamic chute optimisation or design
These limits aremiddot
bull a material impact angle of less than 20deg
bull a variance of less than 10 between the receiving belt velocity and the
material discharge velocity component parallel to the receiving conveyor
An important aspect of chute optimisation is to consider the facility constraints
These constraints are in some cases flexible but in most cases the chute
optimisation process must be designed within these constraints This means that
any new concept will have to be measured against what is possible within the
facility limits
It is important to note that only the most common transfer chute problems were
mentioned in this chapter Other possible problems were not addressed in this
chapter as it is normally related to detail design issues Solutions to these
problems are unique to each type of chute and will be addressed for the specific
case study in Chapter 4
The optimisafjon of transfer chutes in the bulk materials industry
MN van Aarde
38
CHAPTER 3
The optimisation of transfer chutes in the bulk materials industry
MN van Aarde
CHAPTER 3 TESTS FOR THE IDENTIFICATION OF RECURRING
PROBLEMS ON EXISTING CHUTES
39
CHAPTER 3
31 PREFACE
Since the completion of a certain iron ore handling facility it has been
experiencing recurring material transfer problems at high capacities In order to
investigate the problem it was decided that performance testing of the chutes
should be carried out The purpose of these tests was to monitor chute
performance at transfer rates of up to the design capacity of 10 000 tlh for
various grades of iron ore handled by the facility Some of the methodologies
used in testing are only applicable to this specific facility
Due to variations and surges associated with the reclaim operations at the
facility performance testing focused on reclaim side chutes This means that all
the transfer points at the exit points of the stockyard conveyors were tested
Nineteen tests were conducted on various stockyard transfers Information such
as the specific facility or conveyor numbers cannot be disclosed due to the
confidentiality of information
To analyse SCADA data the stacker reclaimer scale is used to determine the
peak surges passing through the transfer under investigation The reason for
this is that the peaks in flow due to reclaiming operations flatten out when
passing through the transfer points This is due to chute throat limitations and
small variations in belt speeds If the down stream scales are used it would give
an inaccurate indication of the amount of ore that passed through the transfer
chute
32 TEST METHODOLOGY
A CCTV camera was installed in a strategic position inside the head chute of the
stockyard conveyors These cameras provided valuable information on the
physical behaviour of the material flow inside the transfer chutes Where
possible cameras were also placed on the receiving belt in front of and behind
The optimisation of transfer chutes in the bulk materials industry
MN van Aarde
40
CHAPTER 3
the chute This was done to monitor belt tracking and spillage A high frequency
radio link between the head chute and the control tower made it possible to
monitor the cameras at all times
SCADA data was used to determine and establish the condition of the material
transfer at the time of the test Data from various scales en route were obtained
as well as confirmation of blocked chute signals In analysing the SCADA data
the stacker reclaimer scale is used to determine the peak surges passing through
the transfer being tested
Data was recorded from a sampling plant at the facility This data provides the
actual characteristics of representative samples taken and analysed by the
sampling plant during the duration of the test The data gathered consist of
moisture content of the material sample as well as the size distribution of the ore
Where possible an inspector was placed at the transfer point being tested to
observe and record the performance The inspector had a two way radio for
communication with the test co-ordinator in the central control room He would
also be responsible for the monitoring of any spillage dust emissions etc that
may not be picked up by the cameras
Prior to commencing a test on a specific conveyor route the following checks
had to be performed on all the material conveying equipment
bull Clean out all transfer chutes and remove any material build-up from the
sidewalls
bull Check that feed skirts are properly in position on the belt
bull Check that the conveyor belt is tracking properly at no load
bull Check conveyor idlers are all in position and free to rotate
bull Check blocked chute detectors are operational and in the correct location
The optimisation of transfer chutes in the bulk materials industry
MN van Aarde
CHAPTER 3
bull Change the position of the blocked chute detector if required to improve its
fUnction
bull Test and confirm that the CCTV middotsystems are functioning correctly
bull Assign persons with 2 way radios and cameras to monitor and record the I
results at each transfer point on the route
33 CHUTE PERFORMANCE ACCEPTANCE CRITERIA
A material transfer chute performs to specification if it transfers a maximum of
10 000 tlh of a specific iron are grade without experiencing any of the following
problems
bull Material build up inside the chute or blocking the chute ie material is not
exiting the chute at the same rate as it is entering
bull Material spillage encountered from the top of the transfer chute
bull Material spillage encountered where material is loaded onto the receiving
conveyor
bull Belt tracking of the receiving conveyor is significantly displaced by the
loading of material from the transfer chute onto the conveyor
Tests were conducted over a period of one month and in such a short period
visible wear is difficult to quantify Due to the sensitivity of the information no
historical data in terms of chute or belt wear were made available by the facility
Therefore it is not part of the criteria for these specific tests Should a chute
however fail to perform according to the set criteria it validates the need for
modifications or new designs
34 DISCUSSION OF PROBLEM AREAS
The major concern during the test work is material flow at the transfer points
Secondary concerns are spillage tracking of the receiving belt and material
The optimisation of transfer chutes in the bulk materials industry
MN van Aarde
42
CHAPTER 3
loading onto the receiving belt One of the external factors that playa significant
role in material flow rate is the method and process of reclaiming This section
will highlight all the problem areas observed during the test work
Figure 25 shows the layout of the stockyard area This layout will serve as a
reference when the specific test results at each transfer point are discussed The
legends for Figure 25 are as follows
c=gt Transfer points where performance tests have been done
~ Direction that the conveyors are moving in
CV4 CV3 CV2 CV1
Figure 25 Layout of conveyors for chute test work
All four stockyard conveyors have a moving head arrangement This means that
the chutes are split up into two sections A moving head discharges material
onto either conveyor (CV) 5 or CV 6 via a static transfer chute The moving
head positions are shown by A Band C in Figure 25
The optimisation of transfer chutes in the bulk materials industry
MN van Aarde
43
CHAPTER 3
Position C is the purging or dump position This position is used when the
stacker reclaimer is in stacking mode and any material left on the stockyard
conveyor gets dumped The material does not end up on the stockpiles
preventing contamination
90 de-g TRANSFBt
OfAO BOX IN MOVING HEAD
Figure 26 Configuration of the existing transfer chute
Figure 26 shows the configuration of the existing transfer chutes These chutes
capture the trajectory from the head pulley in a dead box situated in the top part
of the chute The material then cascades down a series of smaller dead boxes
onto the receiving conveyor below
Various grades of iron ore were tested during the testing period These different
grades of iron ore are shown in Table 2 Three fine grades and four coarse
grades were used The coarse material is defined as particles with a diameter of
The optimisation of transfer chutes in the bulk materials industry
MN van Aarde
44
CHAPTER 3
between 12 mm and 34 mm and the fine material with diameters of between
4 mm and 12 mm
Table 2 Iron are grades used for chute test work
Material Predominant Lump Size
Fine K 5mm
Fine N 8mm
Fine A 8mm
Coarse K 25mm
Coarse D 34mm
Coarse S 12 mm
Coarse A 20mm
The CCTV cameras were placed inside the moving head pointing down into the
static chute overlooking the receiving conveyor Figure 27 shows the camera
angle used during testing This is a view of a clear chute before testing The
legends for clarification of all the video images are as follows
Front of the chute throat opening
Top of flowing material at the chute throat opening
Flow pattern of the material
Direction of the receiving belt
The optimisation of transfer chutes in the bulk materials industry
MN van Aarde
45
CHAPTER 3
Figure 27 Clear chute indicating camera angle
341 Coarse Material vs Fine Material
Differences in transfer rates between coarse material and fine material are
evident from the data gathered during the test programme These results are
discussed later in this chapter The area between the yellow arrows and the red
line is the amount of freeboard available Freeboard is the open space available
between the top of the flowing stream of material and the chute plate work
Figure 28 and Figure 29 shows the flow of coarse ore and fine ore respectively in
the same chute at 8 000 tlh
Figure 28 Coarse material at 8 000 tlh
The optimisation of transfer chutes in the bulk materials industry
MN van Aarde
46
CHAPTER 3
Figure 29 Fine material at 8 000 tlh
The amount of freeboard with fine material is much larger than with coarse
material It is therefore obvious that coarse material is more likely to block a
chute when peak surges occur This is due to particles that interlock in the small
discharge opening of the chute
Figure 30 Blocked chute with coarse material at 8 600 tIh
Figure 30 is a snap shot of a chute blocked with coarse ore due to the material
interlocking at the discharge opening The time from material free flowing to a
blocked chute signal was approximately 10 seconds This is determined by
comparing the CCTV camera time to the blocked signal time on the SCADA
The optimisation of transfer chutes in the bulk materials industry
MN van Aarde
47
CHAPTER 3
The high clay content in finer material can also cause problems in the long run
When wet Anes are fed through the chutes a thin layer of Anes builds up and
sticks to the sides of the chute As this layer dries out it forms a new chute liner i
and the next layer builds up This process occurs gradually and will eventually
cause the chute to block
342 Cross Sectional Area
Video images of a blocked chute on the receiving belts were analysed to
determine whether the blockage was caused by material build up on the belt
underneath the chute This indicated that with the occurrence of a blocked chute
the material keeps flowing out of the chute at a constant rate without build up
From this the assumption can be made that in the case of a blocked chute the
material enters the chute at a higher rate than it is discharged at the bottom
Therefore the conclusion can be made that the chute cross sectional area at the
discharge is insufficient to handle the volume of ore at high throughput rates
Tests with a certain type of coarse material yielded a very low flow rate requiring
adjustment to the chute choke plate on the transfer between CV 3 and CV 5
The chute choke plate is basically a sliding door at the bottom of the chute to
adjust the discharge flow of material Tests with another type of coarse material
shown in the summary of test results indicates how the choke plate adjustment
can increase the throughput of material in the chute
Data of all the different types of ore at the facility are obtained at the sampling
building This data shows that the material size distribution for the two types of
coarse material used in the tests mentioned above are the same This indicates
that the test results with the second coarse material are an accurate reflection of
what will be experienced with the first type of coarse material Special care
The optimisation of transfer chutes in the bulk materials industry
MN van Aarde
48
CHAPTER 3
should be taken when adjusting the choke plate to make sure that skew loading
is not induced by the modification
343 Spillag3
During one of the first tests on the transfer between CV 2 and CV 6 spillage
was observed at one of the side skirts on the receiving belt A piece of the side
skirt had been damaged and pushed off the belt as shown by Figure 31 This
caused some of the material to be pushed off the belt when skew loading from
the chute caused the belt to miss track In this case spillage was not caused by
the skirt but by skew loading from the chute onto the receiving conveyor
Figure 31 Damaged side skirt
A greater concern is spillage on the moving head chute of CV 3 and CV 4
loading onto CV 6 It appears as if the head chute creeps during material
transfer onto CV 6 As the chute creeps the horizontal gap between the
moving head chute and the transfer chute reaches approximately 180 mm
Facility operations proposed a temporary solution by moving the head chute to
the dumping or purging position and back to CV 5 before stopping over CV 6
The reason for this creep could be attributed to slack in the moving head winch
cable
The optimisation of transfer chutes in the bulk materials industry
MN van Aarde
49
CHAPTER 3
345 Belt Tracking and Material Loading
The only belt tracking and material loading problems observed occurred on the
transfer between CV 2 and CV 5 I CV 6 A diverter plate was installed at the
bottom of the chute in order to force material flow onto the centre of the receiving conveyor belt This plate now causes material to fall to the left of the receiving
belt causing the belt to track to the right
Figure 32 View behind the chute of the receiving conveyor before loading
Figure 32 shows the view from a CCTV camera placed over the receiving
conveyor behind the chute Note the amount of the idler roller that is visible
before loading
Figure 33 View behind the chute of the receiving conveyor during loading
The optimisation of transfer chutes in the bulk materials industry
MN van Aarde
50
CHAPTER 3
Figure 33 shows the view from a CCTV camera placed over the receiving
conveyor behind the chute during loading Note the difference between the
amount of the idler roller that is visible between Figure 33 and Figure 32 This is
a clear indication of off centre belt tracking due to skew loading I
At the same transfer point it appears as if the configuration of the chute causes
the material to be dropped directly onto the receiving belt from the dead box in
the moving head This will cause high impact wear on the belt in the long run
High maintenance frequencies will be required on the impact rollers underneath
the chute and the roller bearings will have to be replaced frequently
346 Reclaiming Operations
Reclaim operations are done from the stacker reclaimer that scoops up the
material with a bucket wheel from the stockpile The machine starts at the top
bench of the stockpile and reclaims sideways until it is through the stockpile
This sideways movement is repeated while the machine moves down the
stockpile If the machine digs too deep into the stockpile small avalanches can
occur that over fill the buckets This causes peak surges in the flow on the
conveyor system
With an increase in the peak digging or reclaim rate as requested for test work it
seemed that the peak surges increased as well In normal reclaiming operations
(average reclaim rate of 6 000 tlh to 7000 tlh) the peaks in reclaim surges do not
usually exceed 1 000 tlh This is however dependent on the level of the
stockpile from where the machine is reclaiming
At a peak digging or reclaim rate of 8 000 tlh peak surges of up to 2 000 tlh were
observed as can be seen from Figure 34 All stacker reclaimers are operated
manually and the depth of the bucket wheel is determined by monitoring the
The optimisation of transfer chutes in the bulk materials industry
MN van Aarde
51
CHAPTER 3
reclaimer boom scale reading (yellow line) This makes it difficult to reclaim at a
constant rate
The reason for the high peak surges is due to avalanches on the stockpile
caused by reclaiming on the lower benches without first taking away the top
material The blue line in Figure 34 represents a conveyor scale reading after
the material has passed through a series of transfer chutes It is clear that the
peaks tend to dissipate over time as the peaks on the blue line are lower and
smoother than that on the yellow line
IlmJ
bull I _ bull It bull bull bull bull
--ErI--E--~---h--E=+[J]--EiE ~ J~~~ middot middot -~L I-~f~1-1shyt~=tt~~J~~v5 i ~ ~ ~ ~ ~ i ~ 1 ~ ~ ~ s ~ ------ ~-- - ------ - _ - -------- -- -- - _---- -- -r - --- -_shyp
C)
~ 1r =r=l[=1 -It-1 -- -~ -t= --shy~ _middotmiddot -r middotr middot middot [middot _r _ _ r- middotmiddot rmiddot middotmiddot -r- rmiddot-- middot- middotmiddot -rmiddot -r-middotmiddot middotr lXgtO middotmiddotmiddotmiddotmiddotmiddotmiddotmiddot[middotmiddotmiddotmiddotmiddotmiddotmiddotlmiddotmiddotmiddotmiddotmiddotmiddotlmiddotmiddotmiddotmiddotmiddotmiddotmiddotmiddotimiddotmiddotmiddotmiddotmiddotmiddotmiddotmiddotr-middotmiddotmiddotmiddot j middotmiddot1middotmiddotmiddotmiddotmiddot1middotmiddotmiddotmiddotmiddotmiddotmiddot1middotmiddotmiddotmiddotmiddot middotlmiddotmiddotmiddotmiddottmiddotmiddotmiddotmiddotmiddotmiddotmiddotjmiddot I~ [ bullbullbullbullbullbullbull [ bullbullbull middotmiddotmiddot1middotmiddotmiddotmiddotmiddotmiddot1middotmiddotmiddotmiddotmiddotmiddotmiddotmiddot1middotmiddotmiddotmiddotmiddotmiddotmiddotmiddot middotmiddotmiddotmiddotmiddotmiddotmiddotmiddoti~middotmiddotmiddotmiddotmiddotmiddotmiddotmiddottmiddotmiddotmiddotmiddotmiddotmiddotmiddotrmiddotmiddotmiddot middotrmiddotmiddotmiddotmiddotmiddotmiddot~middotmiddotmiddotmiddotmiddotmiddotmiddotmiddot1middotmiddotmiddotmiddotmiddotmiddotmiddotmiddotimiddotmiddotmiddot
t) cent
~ i i l i i i i i i i it ~ 8 ~ ~ S l i
~~ Ii ~ ~ g i i ~ 4 1 J yen i
s a e 11 JI as $ $ ~ IS IS e It
Time
-Con~SCO=-E___S~ SCALE
Figure 34 Peak surges experienced during reclaiming operations
347 Other Problem Areas
Some blockages on other chutes at the facility occurred while testing the
stockyard chutes These blockages are also shown in Table 3 where the test
The optimisation of transfer chutes in the bulk materials industry
MN van Aarde
52
CHAPTER 3
results are discussed and to raise awareness that the bottlenecks on site are not
only caused by problems on the tested chutes
A chute downstream from the stockyards encountered a blockage with fine I
material when the flow rate reached 11 OOb tfh Although this is higher than the
test maximum of 10 000 tfh it still raises concern as to why the chute blocked so
severely that it took approximately two hours to clear
Another bottleneck is the transfer point between the feed conveyor of CV 2 and
the discharge chute on CV 2 This transfer point blocked with fine material at a
peak just below 10 000 tfh It should be even worse with coarse are as
previously discussed Due to the configuration of the head chute spillage of
scraper dribblings is also of great concern The main stream of material
interferes with the flow path of the dribbling material Therefore the carry back
scraped off the bottom of the feeding belt cannot i~ow down the chute and is
pushed over the sides of the chute
The optimisation of transfer chutes in the bulk maferias industry
MN van Aarde
53
CHAPTER 3
35 SUMMARY OF TEST RESULTS
Table 3 Results from test programme
Transfer Point Material Tested Test No Peak Capacity Blocked Chute
CV11 CV5 Yes
Fines N 14 10000 tlh No
Fines N 15 10000tlh No
CV 11 CV6 Coarse K 20 9300 tlh No
Fines K 4 10600tlh No
Fines A 19 9633 tlh No
CV31 CV5 Yes
Yes
Yes
Coarse A 17 9427 tlh No
CV31 CV6 Coarse K 7 10195t1h Yes
Coarse K 8 11 000 tlh Yes
CV41 CV5 Coarse A 16 10307 tlh No
No (Mech trip on
CV4CV6 Fines K 10 10815 tlh downstream conveyor)
Coarse K 11 8000 tlh No
Fines A 18 10328 tlh No
No (Feed to CV 2
CV21 CV5 Fines N 13 10 000 tlh blocked)
CV21 Coarse K 1 amp 2 10 153 tlh No
No (Blocked chute on
Fines K 3 11 000 tlh downstream transfer)
The optimisation of transfer chutes in the bulk materials industry
MN van Aarde
54
CHAPTER 3
Table 3 shows the results obtained from all the tests on the stockyard conveyor
discharge chutes Where possible the same material grade was tested more
than once on the same transfer in order to confirm the repetitiveness of the test
The tests shown in red indicate the transfers that blocked at a flow rate of less
than 10000 tlh
Coarse K and Coarse 0 are noted as the critical materials for blocked chutes
caused by a peak surge Tests with Coarse K and Coarse S where a blocked
chute occurred at just over 10 000 tlh can also be considered as failed tests
This is due to the lack of a safety margin freeboard inside the chute When
analysing the video images a build up can be seen at a flow rate of less than
10000 tlh
Table 3 indicates that the fine material did not cause blocked chutes but it was
seen that it did fill up the chute throat area in some cases Although the coarse
material grades are shown as being least suitable for high flow rates the fine
material should not be underestimated for its ability to cause blockages The
finer materials normally have higher clay contents than the coarse grades and
therefore stick to the chute walls more easily_
36 CONCLUSION
At lower capacities (7 000 tlh to 8 000 tlh) the material appear to flow smoothly
inside the chutes without surging or building up in the chute This flow rate
normally does not cause spillage or skew loading on the receiving conveyor belt
On average as the flow rate approaches 9 000 tlh the material in the chute
throat area starts packing together and finally blocks up the chute
At transfer rates greater than 9 000 tlh the available area inside the chutes is
completely filled up This causes material to build up or surge inside the chute
which eventually results in the chute choking and the inlet flow becomes greater
The optimisation of transfer chutes in the bulk materials industry
MN van Aarde
55
CHAPTER 3
than the outlet flow Depending on the volume of the chute the choked state can
only be maintained for a certain period of time If the inlet flow does not
decrease it will cause a blocked chute
Peak surges of up to 10 000 tfh were recorded in most tests which involved a
material surge inside the chute but without the occurrence of a blocked chute trip
Although no blocked chute signal was given in these cases the ability of the
chutes to transfer continuously at flow rates of between 9 000 tfh and 10 000 tfh
is not very reliable
Continuous transfer at flow rates approaching 9 000 tfh seems attainable in most
cases but due to the limited freeboard available in the chute throat area the
chutes will easily become prone to blocking Due to the high peak surges at an
increased maximum reclaim rate the amount of freeboard is critical If the
design criteria of the chute were intended to accommodate these large surges
then all the chutes failed this test This can be attributed to the fact that no
freeboard is left at a maximum reclaim rate of 9 000 tfh
With the background available from the test programme it is clear that further
investigation is required to obtain a solution to these problems All the
information gathered can be integrated and utilised to provide a solution A
possible solution can then be tested against the problems found with the current
transfer chutes
The optimisation of transfer chutes in the bulk materials industry
MN van Aarde
56
CHAPTER 4
CHAPTER 4 DYNAMIC CHUTES FOR THE ELIMINATION OF
RECURRING PROBLEMS
The optimisation of transfer chutes in the bulk materials industry
MN van Aarde
57
CHAPTER 4
41 PREFACE
After completion of the chute test programme the decision was made to improve
the old transfer configuration by installing a dynamic chute The reason for the
dynamic chute is to increase the material speed and decrease the stream cross
sectional area The dead boxes in the older chute slowed the material down and
the restriction on transfer height resulted in the material not being able to gain
enough speed after impacting on the dead boxes
A dynamic chute configuration is investigated in this chapter As the new chute
is fitted within the existing steelwork there are certain constraints that determine
the new configuration All the constraints and limitations discussed in this section
are specific to the facility under discussion
The new chute design basically consists of a hood and spoon which retains the
kinetic energy in the material stream as it is transferred from one conveyor to the
other This will reduce the creation of dust in the chute and help to discharge the
material at a velocity closer to that of the receiving conveyor The new design
does however experience high wear which was not a problem with the old chutes
due to large dead boxes
In order to fit the optimum design of a dynamic chute within the existing structure
some changes are required to the positioning of the feed conveyor head pulley
These changes are necessary to accommodate the discharge trajectory from the
feeding conveyor
The radii of the hood and spoon are specified in such a way that the impact wear
is reduced significantly In addition both the hood and spoon are fitted with a
removable dead box section in the impact zones The incorporation of these
sections makes this chute revolutionary in the sense of ease of maintenance
The optimisation of transfer chutes in the bulk materials industry
MN van Aarde
58
CHAPTER 4
This new chute addresses all problems identified at the facility and aims to
eliminate most of them
Tests were carried out to identify worst case materials for flow and wear
Different liner materials were tested for both flow and wear conditions The
outcome of these tests is used as the basis for the design of a new chute As
different conditions for flow and wear inside the chute exist different liners are
investigated for each section inside the chute
42 CONSIDERATION OF THE EXISTING TRANSFER POINT CONSTRAINTS
The stockyard consists of four stacker reclaimers and several transfer points
feeding onto the two downstream conveyors resulting in a very intricate system
This system has numerous requirements which need to be addressed when
considering a new transfer chute configuration The transfers under discussion
are situated at the head end of the stockyard conveyors
MOV1NG HEAD OER MOvm poundAD OVER CVI6 CVIS
t4CLIE SECTION
PURGING POSmON
Figure 35 Stockyard head end layout
The design of a new transfer chute configuration is restricted to a certain extent
by the existing structures on site Figure 35 provides an overall view of the
existing steelwork at the head end of the stockyard conveyor This existing steel
structure can be modified to suit a new configuration but does have some fixed
The optimisation of transfer chutes in the bulk materials industry
MN van Aarde
59
CHAPTER 4
constraints A good example of these constraints is the transfer height between
the stockyard conveyor and the downstream conveyors CV 5 and 6
On both sides of the stockyard conveyor stockpiles of ore can be reclaimed and
deposited onto the conveyor This facility allows a certain travel for the stacker
reclaimer along the stockyard conveyor for the stacking and reclaiming of
material The most forward position of the stacker reclaimer is at the beginning
of the incline section of the stockyard conveyor As previously explained any
curvature in a conveyor requires a certain minimum radius When the transfer
height is raised the radius constraints on that curvature in the stockyard
conveyor will reduce stockyard space This means that the storage capacity at
the facility will be greatly diminished
I ~
j
Figure 36 Dimensional constraints on the existing transfer configuration
The ideal is to stay within the eXisting critical dimensions as shown in Figure 36
As functionality of the chute dictates the chute configuration these dimensions
can be modified within certain constraints These critical dimensions on the
existing configuration are
The optimisation of transfer chutes in the bulk materials industry
MN van Aarde
60
CHAPTER 4
bull Centre of receiving belt to centre of the head pulley 800 mm
bull Bottom of receiving belt to top of the head pulley 4048 mm
The head pulley can however be moved back a certain amount before it
becomes necessary to change the entire incline section of the stockyard
conveyor As the moving head moves forward and backward there are idler cars
trailing behind the moving head carriage as shown in Figure 35 The purpose of
these idler cars is to support the belt when the moving head is feeding onto
CV 6 or when it is standing in the purging position
43 DESIGN OF THE CHUTE PROFILE
431 Design Methodology
Proven standard methods for the functional design of the chute are used These
hand calculation methods are based on the Conveyor Equipment Manufacturers
Association (CEMA) standard as well as papers from Prof AW Roberts These
are typically calculations for determining the discharge trajectory optimal radius
of the hood and spoon as well as the velocity of material passing through the
chute
In addition to standard methods of carrying out conceptual flow design it is
supplemented by the use of Discrete Element Modelling (OEM) simulation
software This is done to visualise the flow of material through the chute
Results from standard calculation methods are compared to the outputs of the
OEM simulations to confirm both results Chapter 5 will focus on the use of
Discrete Element Modelling for the design and verification of chute concepts
The optimisation of transfer chutes in the bulk materials industry
MN van Aarde
61
CHAPTER 4 -__-----__---_----------shy
432 Design Development
Figure 37 shows the concept of the hood and spoon chute for a 90deg transfer as
required by the facility layout The decision to opt for a hood and spoon chute is
based on trying to retain the material velocity when transferring material from the
feeding conveyor to the receiving conveyors Retention of material velocity is
critical as the transfer height is restricted The overall facility constraints for
design are as follows
bull Feeding belt speed - 45 ms
bull Receiving belt speed - 45 ms
bull Transfer height - 401 m
bull Belt widths -1650 mm
bull Maximum material throughput -10000 tlh
As this is a retrofit of an existing facility some of the facility constraints cannot be
changed This forms part of the design development as it steers the design in a
certain direction Due to the fact that the transfer height cannot be changed the
chute profile will be dependent on the transfer height restriction
The optimisation of transfer chutes in the bulk matefials industry
MN van Aarde
62
CHAPTER 4
START-UP CHrrlE
DRlBBIlNG CHUTE
Figure 37 Hood and spoon configuration for the 90 transfer
The optimum solution for the correct chute profile in this situation would be to
move the head pulley back far enough This should be done so that the hood
can receive the material trajectory at a small impact angle and still discharge
centrally onto the spoon However the head pulley can only be moved back a
certain amount Any further movement will require changes to the structure of
the feeding conveyor incline section
As the stockyard conveyors feed onto two receiving conveyors the head pulley
of the stockyard conveyors is situated on a moving head rail car This enables
the conveyor to discharge either on CV 5 or CV 6 as shown in Figure 25
Taking the movement of the head pulley into account the moving head rail car
can be shortened by 1000 mm in order to move the head pulley back As stated
in the preface all changes are distinctive to this facility alone However it is
important to be aware of the consequences of every modification
The optimisation of transfer chutes in the bulk materials industry
MN van Aarde
63
CHAPTER 4 -__----- ------shy
433 Determination of the Profile
An important of the hood and spoon design is to ensure a
discharge from the hood onto the centre of the spoon The is
determined using equation (1) in section 24 Although various material
are transferred it does not have a significant effect on the calculated trajectory
the bulk properties of the materials are very similar It is however important
to the material which will transferred obtain the flow angles and wear
This information the will be
the Liner selection for this case study is discussed in Appendix A
After the trajectory has been determined the hood radius can determined by
using equation (2) As head pulley can move 1 000 mm backward the
possible hood radius was determined to 2 577 mm This hood radius is
VIU(I(1 to produce the wear on the zone in chute
The impact angle at this radius is 11 which is less than the maximum
allowable limit of 20
The hood radius is chosen to as close as possible to radius of curvature of
the material trajectory The point where the hood radius and the trajectory radius
cross is known as the impact point In to determine the velocity
point in hood the at is required on the
hood from the horizontal where the material impacts and to slide down the
hood surface
In this case the position impact hood is at 558r from the horizontal
In to determine the velocity this angle e is used as starting
point in (3) obtain a complete velocity profile angle from where
the material impacts hood is decreased in increments 5 up to the
discharge point which is normally 0
The optimisation chutes in the bulk materials industry
MN van Aarde
64
-----
CHAPTER 4
Hood Velocity Profile
70
--- --~ 6 0
5 0
40 ~_
~ 30 g --- a 20 gt
10
00
60 50 40 30 20 10 o Theta (Position inside the hood)
Figure 38 Hood velocity profile
The spoon radius is determined in such a way that the wear at the point of impact
is kept to a minimum At the same time the horizontal component of the material
exit velocity is as close as possible to the receiving belt speed Firstly the
assumption is made that the initial velocity of material in the spoon is equal to the
exit velocity of material from the hood This yields a spoon entry velocity of
633 ms and can also be seen from Figure 38
By reiterating various radii for the spoon the optimum exit velocity Ve can be
obtained These radii are selected according to the available space in which the
spoon must fit and also to produce the smallest impact angle for material
discharging from the hood This table is set up to display the different exit
velocities at various spoon radii The exit velocity is also dependent on the exit
angle which is determined by the length of the spoon arc In this case the spoon
radius is chosen as 3 575 mm An exit angle of 38deg from the horizontal yields an
exit velocity closer to the receiving belt speed
The optimisation of transfer chutes in the bulk materials industry
MN van Aarde
65
CHAPTER 4
Spoon Velocity Profile
67
66
65
S 64 amp0 g 6 3
V
v-shy ~ ~
ii ~ gt 62
61 I I 60
o 10 20 30 40 50 60
Theta (position inside the spoon)
Figure 39 Spoon velocity profile
Taken from the origin of the spoon radius the material position in the spoon at
discharge is sr The selection of this angle is guided by the geometry of the
chute and surrounding structures This angle is then used to calculate the exit
velocity as shown in Figure 39 At this point the discharge angle relative to the
conveyor angle is 38deg Ve is then determined to be 6087 ms with a velocity
component of 479 ms in the direction of the belt This value is 618 higher
than the belt speed of 4S ms which is acceptable as it is within the allowable
10 range of variation Minimal spillage and reduced wear on the receiving
conveyor is expected
Both the hood and spoon have a converged profile This is done in order to
minimise spillage and ensure a smooth transfer of material from the hood to the
spoon and from the spoon to the receiving conveyor The converged profile
starts out wide to capture any stray particles and converges to bring the material
particles closer together at the discharge This profile does not influence the
transfer rate of the chute as the stream of material through the chute is no more
The optimisation of transfer chutes in the bulk materials industry
MN van Aarde
66
CHAPTER 4
compact than the material on the conveyor belt before and after the transfer
chute
44 INCORPORATING ADEAD BOX IN THE IMPACT AREAS
In chapter 1 reference is made to a chute design utilising pipe sections with a
rounded profile The flat back plate is chosen instead of a rounded pipe type
section to house the honeycomb dead box configuration It would be possible to
fit the honeycomb into a rounded back section but manufacturing and
maintenance would be unnecessarily difficult and expensive
Furthermore the cross section profile of the chute shows three sliding surfaces
as shown in These surfaces consist of the back plate two vertical side plates
and two diagonal plates This is done in order to increase the angle between
adjoining plates so that the probability of material hanging up in the corners is
reduced This helps to alleviate the risk of experiencing blocked chutes
Figure 40 Chute cross section
The optimisation of transfer chutes in the bulk materials industry
M N van Aarde
67
CHAPTER 4
441 Honeycomb Wear Box in the Hood
A honeycomb or wear box is incorporated into this chute configuration in order to
further minimise wear in the hood and spoon The honeycomb configuration is
clearly shown in and is typical for both the hood and spoon Reduced wear will I
be achieved as impact and sliding will take place on the basis of material on
material flow Ore is captured inside the honeycomb pockets which protects the
ceramic lining in the section of the honeycomb and creates another sliding face
made of the material being transferred The ribs in the wear box do not protrude
from the sliding face of the chute and therefore do not interfere with the main
stream flow of material
Positioning of the honeycomb is critical as the point of impact on the hood needs
to be on the honeycomb This is required in order to assure that the highest
material impact is absorbed by a layer of static material inside the honeycomb
and not the chute liners All the basic steps for designing a normal hood and
spoon chute are followed Firstly the angle at impact (8e) is calculated to
determine where the trajectory of material will cross the radius of the hood This
shows the position of the impact point on the hood Figure 20 indicates where 8e
is calculated As previously stated the angle at impact for this situation is
558r This is calculated using [33]
e = tan- I ( 1 ) (5)
C Ii
And y is defined by equation 1
This gives an indication as to where the honeycomb should be situated in order
to capture the material impacting the hood fully A flow simulation package can
also be used to determine the position of this honeycomb structure shows an
opening for the honeycomb which starts at 40deg clockwise from the vertical This
The optimisation of transfer chutes in the bulk materials industry 68
MN van Aarde
CHAPTER 4
means that there are almost 16deg of free space in the honeycomb to ensure that
the material will always impact inside the wear box
There is no set specification as to the size of this free space This is just to
accommodate any surges of mat~rial on the feeding conveyor As discussed in
Chapter 3 due to avalanches while reclaiming from the stockpiles material
surges on the conveyors is a reality
Figure 41 Honeycomb wear box positioning
illustrates exactly where this wear box is situated on the back plate of the hood
This configuration is very similar to that of the spoon as both wear boxes only
cover the width of the flat back plate of the hood and spoon The reason for this
is that most of the material impact and mainstream flow strikes the back plate
The optimisation of transfer chutes in the bulk materials industry
MN van Aarde
69
CHAPTER 4
WEAR BOX
Figure 42 Wear box in the hood section
All the horizontal ribs of the honeycomb are spaced 5deg apart and there are 5
vertical ribs following the converging contour of the hood as shown in Spacing
of the ribs depends largely on the maximum lump size handled by the transfer
In this case the largest lumps are approximately 34 mm in diameter The idea is
to get as many dead boxes into the honeycomb as possible These small
cavities should however be large enough to capture a substantial amount of ore
inside
The optimisation of transfer chutes in the bulk materials industry
MN van Aarde
70
CHAPTER 4 ----_----------------shy
Figure 43 Spacing arrangement of honeycomb ribs inside the hood
The two vertical liners on the edges of the honeycomb are only 65 mm high while
the rest of the vertical liners are 120 mm high This is done so that the flat liners
in the chute surface can overlap the edge liners of the honeycomb An open
groove between the tiles along the flow of material would cause the liners to be
worn through much faster than in normal sliding abrasion conditions Due to the
high wear characteristics of the ore all openings between tiles should be kept out
of the mainstream flow
All the ribs in the honeycomb are 50 mm thick and vary in depth The vertical
ribs protrude the horizontal ribs by 30 mm in order to channel the flow These
vertical ribs are all flush with the surrounding tiles on the flat sliding surface of the
hood All the pockets of the wear box are 120 mm deep measured from the top
of the vertical ribs Again dimension is dependent on the maximum lump size
handled by the transfer There are no specifications as to the relation between
the pocket size and the lump size These dimensions were chosen to be
approximately 4 times the lump size Computer simulations can be used to test
the feasibility of this concept while commissioning of the equipment will ultimately
show whether this method works
The optimisation of transfer chutes in the bulk materials industry
MN van Aarde
71
CHAPTER 4 ------------_ -- - ---------------shy
442 Honeycomb wear box in the spoon
The honeycomb wear box in the spoon has the same configuration as in the
hood It also covers the entire width of the back plate and fully accommodates
the material impacting on the spoon from the hood The entire spoon is broken
up into three sections and the honeycomb wear box is situated in the back
section as shown in
Figure 44 Wear box in the spoon section
With almost the same configuration as the hood the spoon also has a corner
liner to ensure a continuous lined face between the flat surface liners and the
honeycomb ribs The detail of these liners and ribs are shown in A 90deg transfer
with a hood and spoon chute means that the stream received by the spoon is
narrower and longer than the stream received by the hood This is caused when
the material takes the shape of the hood before it is discharged into the spoon
The converged configuration causes the stream to flatten against the sliding
surface in the chute
The optimisation of transfer chutes in the bulk materials industry
MN van Aarde
72
CHAPTER 4
Due to the spoon honeycomb being a bit narrower than the hood there are only
three vertical ribs The number of ribs had to be reduced to be able to
accommodate the preferred cavity size of the honeycomb boxes These ribs now
form two channels in which the stream of material can be directed
Figure 45 Liner detail of the spoon honeycomb wear box
As shown in there is a 3 mm gap between the honeycomb section and the chute
plate work This is to ensure that the honeycomb section can be easily removed
for maintenance on the liners All the edges of the liners have rounded corners
to reduce stress concentrations which can cause rapid liner failure
45 DESIGNING THE CHUTE FOR INTEGRATION WITH SYSTEM REQUIREMENTS
The arc length of the spoon back plate is longer and closer to the belt in order to
ensure a smooth transfer of material from the chute to the receiving conveyor A
small gap of 75 mm is left between the bottom of the spoon and the receiving
conveyor Due to the fact that material can also be fed from another upstream
The optimisation of transfer chutes in the bulk materials industry
MN van Aarde
73
CHAPTER 4
stockyard conveyor this configuration will not be suitable This means that the
gap of 75 mm is not enough to allow material to pass underneath the chute
To accommodate this situation the spoon is split into different sections where the
bottom section lifts up to make room for material from behind In the raised
position the gap between the chute and the belt is 450 mm When the lower belt
is loaded to full capacity the material height is 380 mm This means that the
clearance to the belt in the non operational position is sufficient and show the
operational and non operational positions of the spoon
T -t t----~r_-+-wtIY1shy
Figure 46 Spoon in the operational position
The optimisation of transfer chutes in the bulk materials industry
MN van Aarde
74
CHAPTER 4
Figure 47 Spoon in the non operational position
This section is a discussion on how this new transfer chute configuration should
be operated in order to comply with the facility requirements The bottom section
of the chute can be lifted out of the way of material from behind on the receiving
conveyor Therefore a control philosophy is required for this movement
Referring to Figure 25 positions A and B indicate where these new chutes will be
installed As previously stated position C is the purging or dump position and
show the actuated spoon section in the operating and non operating positions
The conditions for these positions are explained as follows
46 CONCLUSION
With the consideration of all the facility constraints and a conceptual idea of what
the transfer configuration should look like the design can be optimised When
the feeding belt velocity is known the material trajectory and optimum chute
radius can be determined This radius and the radius of the spoon must then be
corrected to comply with the facility constraints but still deliver the required
material transfer rate
The optimisation of transfer chutes in the bulk materials industry
MN van Aarde
75
CHAPTER 4
With the high cost implications of regular maintenance intervals on chute liners
and facility downtime a honeycomb structure is incorporated into the high impact
areas The purpose of this honeycomb structure is to form small pockets similar
to dead boxes in order to promote material on material flow This increases the
lifetime of the chute liners and reduces maintenance intervals
This specific transfer chute splits up easily into separate sections and will help to
simplify maintenance The bottom section of the chute is actuated to move up
and down depending on whether the chute is in operation or not This will ensure
optimum transfer of material while in operation and provide sufficient clearance
when not in operation This is again guided by the facility requirements
In the design of all the transfer chute components the physical properties of the
ore should always be considered This determines the chute profile in terms of
flow angles and liner selection With maximum material flow ability high
resistance to sliding abrasion and reduced maintenance cost in mind 94
alumina ceramics is the liner of choice This is only in the main flow areas of the
chute For the dribbling chute a polyurethane liner is used to promote the flow of
this sticky material
The optimisation of transfer chutes in the bulk materials industry
MN van Aarde
76
CHAPTER 5
CHAPTER 5 TESTING AND VERIFICATION OF THE NEW SOLUTION
- middotSmiddotmiddotmiddotmiddotmiddotmiddotmiddotmiddotmiddot-middotl~Oi
The optimisation of transfer chutes in the bulk materials industry 77
MN van Aarde
CHAPTER 5
51 PREFACE
Although hand calculations have been a proven method of design for many
years it is important to verify any new chute concept before fabrication and
implementation Confirming the concept can save time and money as it reduces
the risk of on-site modifications Hand calculations only supply a two
dimensional solution to the problem which does not always provide accurate
material flow profiles
In recent years a few material flow simulation packages have been developed to
aid the design of material handling equipment The use of software packages
can be beneficial to the design process as it gives a three dimensional view of
the material behaviour in the chute This means that changes to the chute
concept can be made prior to fabrication
It is however important to verify that the solution obtained from the software
package is an accurate reflection of actual design model Therefore the material
being handled should be thoroughly tested to obtain the correct physical
properties required to obtain an accurate simulation result
The use of material flow simulation software does not replace the necessity for
hand calculations All the basic steps should still be done to derive a conceptual
chute configuration Material flow simulation software should be used as a
complimentary tool to analytical hand calculations in the design process
The optimisation of transfer chutes in thebulk materials industry
MN van Aarde
78
CHAPTER 5
52 SELECTING A TEST METHODOLOGY
Traditionally transfer chutes were designed by using basic analytical calculations
and relying on empirical data from past experiences with other chutes Mostly
these analytical methods only cater for the initial part of the chute such as the
parabolic discharge trajectory It is difficult to determine what happens to the
flow of material after it strikes the chute wall [34]
Two methods of verification were usually applied to evaluate a new transfer
chute configuration Trial and error can be used but obviously this is not desired
due to the high cost implications A second method is to build a small scale
model of the chute in which tests can be carried out before a final design can be
adopted This physical modelling is however time consuming and
expensive [34]
Granular or particulate materials are composed of a large number of loosely
packed individual particles or grains The flow of such granular materials forms
an intricate part of the materials handling industry Small reductions in energy
consumption or increases in production can have great financial advantages
Therefore significant efforts are put into improving the efficiency of these
facilities The important role of numerical simUlations is becoming more evident
in these optimisation procedures [35] Due to these efforts this technology is
becoming more powerful and is easy to use as a verification method for transfer
chute designs
The behaviour of bulk material particles is unique in the sense that it exhibits
some of the properties associated with the gaseous liquid and solid states of
matter The granular state of bulk materials cannot be characterised by anyone
of these states alone The research that captures the contact between individual
particles in an explicit manner is known as discrete element methods (OEM) [36]
The optimisation of transfer chutes in the bulk materials industry
MN van Aarde
79
CHAPTER 5
In basic terms OEM explicitly models the dynamic motion and mechanical
interactions of each body or particle as seen in the physical material flow It is
also possible to obtain a detailed description of the velocities position and force
acting on each particle at a discrete point during the analysis This is achieved
by focusing on the individual grain or body rather than focusing on the global
body as is the case with the finite element approach [36]
Figure 48 illustrates two examples of how this OEM software can be applied
Obviously the flow characteristics differ between the applications shown in Figure
48 This is however catered for by the mathematical simulation of each particle
collision
Figure 48 Flow analysis examples a) separation and screening b) hoppers feeders 36]
Continuous improvements in the performance of computing systems make OEM
a realistic tool for use in a wide range of process design and optimisation
applications During the last 20 years the capabilities of OEM have progressed
from small scale two dimensional simulations to much more complex 3D
applications The latest high performance desk top computers make it possible
to simulate systems containing large numbers of particles within a reasonable
time [37]
The optimisation of transfer chutes in the bulk materials industry
MN van Aarde
80
CHAPTER 5
According to the institute for conveyor technologies at the Otto-von-Guericke
University of Magdeburg in Germany using OEM for bulk solid handling
equipment provides [38]
bull A cost effective method of simulating the utility of materials handling
equipmentshy
bull Precise control over complicated problem zones eg transfer chutes
redirection stations and high wear areas
bull The possibility to integrate processes in one simulation such as mixing and
segregation
bull The possibility to involve the customer more extensively in the design
process
bull An advantage in the market due to attractive video sequences and pictures
of the simulation
bull The possibility to prevent facility damages and increase the efficiency of
conveyor systems extensively
As a good example of the advantages of the discrete element method the
University of Witwatersrand in Johannesburg did studies on rotary grinding mills
The university studies have shown that the OEM qualitatively predicts the load
motion of the mill very well The improved knowledge of the behaviour of mills
can therefore increase the profitability of mineral processing operations [39]
This material handling equipment is generally costly to operate and inefficient in
the utilisation of energy for breakage In order to understand the behaviour of
mills better the OEM method is increasingly being applied to the modelling of the
load behaviour of grinding mills These results indicate that this method can be
applied successfully in the bulk materials handling industry
The apUmisatian af transfer chutes in the bulk materials industry
MN van Aarde
81
CHAPTERS
Another example where this technology has been used with great success is with
the design of a new load out chute for the Immingham coal import terminal in
Britain By simulating the flow with a OEM package the designers were aided in
the fact that they were supplied with a quantitative description of the bulk solid
movement through the chute In the opinion of Professor Franz Kessler
(University of Leoben) the Discrete Element Method provides the engineer with
unique detailed information to assist in the design of transfer points [3]
These simulation packages are at the moment very expensive and not widely
used in transfer chute design It can be anticipated that the utilisation of these
packages will increase as the technology improves and the cost of the software
goes down [40] To get the best value out of the simulation it is important to
compare simulation packages and select the one most suitable to the complexity
of the design
Fluenttrade is a two dimensional computational fluid dynamics (CFD) software
package which can also be used as a chute design aid through the simulation of
material flow It must however be noted that this is not a OEM simulation
package This software package simulates the flow of material by considering
the material particles as a liquid substance The output of the simulation is the
same as can be seen in the example of Figure 49 The colours in the simulation
represent the average particle spacing [40] Due to the fact that this package
can at this stage only deliver two dimensional simulations it is considered
inadequate to perform detailed simulations on the intricate design piscussed in
this dissertation
The optjmisation of transfer chutes in the bulk materials industry
MN van Aarde
82
CHAPTER 5
COnroUf Votume t-~bn 01 ( 00 frlm~2 5000amp1 00) ~gtJ C3_2002 fLUENT 60 (2lt1 9 940 n 1Mgt u ody)
Figure 49 Simulations results from Fluenttrade [40]
The Overland Conveyor Company provides another alternative to the Fluent
software package Applied OEM is a technology company that provides discrete
element software to a variety of users in the bulk materials industry Bulk Flow
Analysttrade is an entry level package that they provide This package is very
powerful in the sense that it can accurately predict flow patterns depending on
the accuracy of the inputs An example of this is shown in Figure 50 It also has
the capability to show material segregation dynamic forces and velocities [41]
Figure 50 Simulation results from Bulk Flow Analysttrade [41]
The optimisation of transfer chutes in the bulk materials industry
MN van Aarde
83
CHAPTER 5
OEM Solutions is a world leader in discrete element modelling software They
recently announced the release of the latest version of their flow simulation
package called EOEM 21 This package can be used to simulate and optimise
bulk material handling and processing operations [41] Oue to the capabilities of
this software package it is a very attractive option for designing transfer chutes
With the development of EOEM 21 OEM Solutions worked in collaboration with
customers in the Bulk Handling Mining and Construction Pharmaceutical
Chemical and Agricultural sectors This enables the end users to perform more
sophisticated particle simulations specific to their unique applications Also
incorporated into this package is the ability and flexibility to customise and
personalise advanced particle properties [42]
This specific package has been proven successful by industry leaders Martin
Engineering (Neponset Illinois) is a leading global supplier of solids handling
systems This company continues to expand their use of EOEM software in
design optimisation and development of bulk materials handling products These
optimisation and development actions include all aspects of conveyor systems
and transfer points for numerous industrial sectors [43]
There are several other OEM simulation packages such as ESYS Particle
Passage-OEM and YAOE However none of these software packages seem be
major industry role players in the discipline of chute design although they might
have the capability In adjudicating the three big role players in bulk material flow
simulation packages there are a few factors taken into consideration It appears
thatthe advantages of 30 capabilities are non negotiable Therefore Fluenttrade is
not really a consideration From the literature review of the Bulk Flow Analysttrade
and the EOEM packages it seems that these two will provide more or less the
same performance It does seem however that the EOEM software is a bigger
role player in various industries Due to the possible future capabilities of EOEM The optimisation of transfer chutes in the bulk materials industry
MN van Aarde
84
CHAPTER 5
through its association with numerous industries this simulation package is the
software of choice
In order to retrofit or design a new transfer point with the aid of the selected OEM
software package there are a few steps that a designer must follow to gain the
full benefit of this tool [36]
1 An accurate 3D or CAD representation of the new or old transfer chute
must be rendered
2 Identify restrictions and limitations in terms of chute geometry and
manufacturing
3 Identify desired design goals (Le dust emissions flow restrictions etc)
4 Identify representative material properties and particle descriptions
5 In case of a retrofit make design changes to chute geometry with CAD
6 Simulate the performance of the new design using OEM software
7 Evaluate results obtained from the simulation (reiterate steps 5 6 and 7)
8 Perform and finalise detail design steps
9 Manufacture
10 Installation
The above mentioned steps found in references [6] and [36] only provides
information regarding retrofitting or designing chutes with the aid of OEM
Although it is a powerful design 1001 the design process should not discard the
use of analytical hand calculation~ Some of the most important design decisions
regarding chute profiles are made with analytical hard calculations such as
plotting the material trajectorY
53 DETERMINATION OF MATERIAL PROPERTIES
The discrete element method is a promising approach to the simUlation of
granular material interaction The accuracy of the outcome of the simulation is
The optimisation of transfer chutes in the bulk materials industry
M N van Aarde
85
CHAPTER 5
however dependent upon accurate information on the material properties and
input parameters [44] These inputs basically consist of the following
fundamental parameters size and shape factors bulk density angle of repose
cohesion and adhesion parameters and restitution coefficients [45]
The determination of most of these parameters are explained and defined in the
following paragraphs The parameters that are changed in the simulation
according to the reaction of the flow are not discussed and are typically
parameters such as the internal coefficient of friction between a number of
particles A collaborated effort by the bulk handling industry aims to find ways in
which all parameters can be accurately determined through scientific methods
This has however still not been achieved The objective is to achieve a realistic
representation and therefore some parameters are altered in the simulation
It is important to note that the computation time increases as the particle size
becomes smaller and the amount of particles increase In most granular flow
problems the characteristics of the material stream are largely determined by
particles greater than 10 - 20 mm in size [45] Therefore in order to reduce
computation time the selected particle size for simUlations should be the same
as the largest particles handled by the facility namely 34 mm diameter
Although fines have a higher internal friction coefficient and more cohesiveness
these properties can be averaged into the input parameters to obtain the same
overall effect [45] Therefore only a single particle size is used in the simulation
and the properties optimised to obtain the same result under actual operating
conditionsmiddot Some of the material properties can be easily obtained from the
facility The rest of the properties are obtained from tests carried out by expert
conSUltants in this field
The size factor and bulk density are obtained from the facility Materia tests
carried out by external consultants provide the coefficient of friction and also the The optimisation of transfer chutes in the bulk materials industry
MN van Aarde
86
CHAPTER 5
wall friction angle This is the angle at which the material will start to slide under
its own mass To determine these material properties the external consultants
normally use sophisticated and expensive equipment Data gathered from these
tests are used for the hand calculation of the chute profile The angle of repose
can normally be observed from a stockpile and is the angle that the side of the
stockpile makes with the horizontal
For the OEM simulation the coefficient of friction is one of the main determining
factors of the wall friction angle Data provided by the material tests can not be
used as a direct input into OEM In the software package the coefficient of
friction is represented by a factor between 0 and 1 The material test data can
however provide some insight into where on this scale the factor is This factor
can be derived from a few small simulation iterations as there is no method of
direct conversion between the test result data and the OEM input
To determine this factor a plate is modelled with a single layer of particles This
plate is then rotated within the simulation at approximately 2deg per second As
soon as the particles begin to slide the time is taken from which the angle can be
calculated This process is repeated with different friction coefficients until the
correct wall friction angle is obtained After the coefficient of friction factor is
determined between the particles and the chute wall the material restitution
factor and coefficient of internal friction can be obtained
The restitution factor is obtained by measurirtg the rebound height of a particle
when it is dropped from a certain height This is usually difficult to determine due
to the variation in shape of the material particles If the particle lands on a
surface it rarely bounces straight back up Therefore the test is repeated
numerous times and an average is taken to obtain the final result
Coefficient of internal friction is a property that describes the particles ability to
slide across each other A simUlation is set up to create a small stockpile of The optimisation of transfer chutes in the blJlk materials industry
MN van Aarde
87
CHAPTER 5
material particles The angle of repose can be obtained by measuring the
average apex angle of the stockpiles In this simulation the coefficient of internal
friction and restitution factors are iterated This is done in order to simulate the
accurate behaviour of particles falling onto the stockpile and forming the correct
angle of repose Figure 51 shows what this simulation typically looks like
Figure 51 Determination of material properties for an accurate angle of repose
54 VERIFICATION OF THE SELECTED TEST METHODOLOGY FOR THIS
APPLICATION
The best verification is to compare the simulation results with an actual material
flow situation Therefore a comparison is made between the actual flow in the
existing transfer configuration and the simulation of this same transfer This is
also a good test to see if the parameters changed in the simulation were done
correctly
During the chute test programme CCTV cameras were installed in the problem
transfer chutes at the facility The cameras are positioned to provide an accurate
view of the material flow behaviour inside the chutes As explained in Chapter 3
The optimisation of transfer chutes in the bulk materials industry 88
MN van Aarde
CHAPTER 5
the behaviour of the material flow inside the chutes changes with the variation of
ore type
Due to the fact that only 34 mm diameter particles are used in the simulation a
test using coarse ore was chosen for the verification of the simulation
Therefore test 12 is used as reference for the verification In this test coarse S
with the particle size distribution between 28 mm and 34 mm was used at the
transfer from CV 3 to CV 5
Figure 52 shows an image taken from the CCTV camera inside the transfer chute
between CV 3 and CV 5 The red line indicates the top of the chute throat
opening and the yellow arrows show the top of material flow This screen shot
was taken at a flow rate of 10 000 tlh It can be deduced from this view and the
chute test work that the chute is choking at a throughput rate of 10 000 tlh
Figure 52 Actual material flow with coarse S at 10000 tIh
The transfer chute from Figure 52 was modelled in CAD and the model imported
into the discrete element package EDEM All the material input parameters as
discussed in section 53 were used in the simulation 10 000 tlh was used as the
The optimisation of transfer chutes in the bulk materials industry
MN van Aarde
89
CHAPTER 5
flow rate parameter in an attempt to simulate and recreate the situation as shown
by Figure 52
Test 12 of the chute performance tests gave the following results which can be
compared to the EDEM simulation
bull Chute started to choke rapidly at 10 000 tlh
bull Slight off centre loading onto the receiving conveyor CV 5
bull A lower velocity layer of material close to the discharge of the chute
bull Material roll back on the receiving conveyor due to significant differences in
the velocity of the material flow and the receiving conveyor
Off-centre loading
L
Figure 53 Material flow pattern through the existing chute
The optimisation of transfer chutes in the bulk materials industry
MN van Aarde
90
CHAPTER 5
Flow restricted in this area
Low velocity layer
Low discharge velocity rollback
Figure 54 Cross sectional side view of material flow through the existing chute
Figure 53 shows the material flow pattern in the existing chute where the thick
red arrows indicate the direction of flow The legend on the left of the figure
indicates the material velocity in ms Slow flowing material is shown in blue and
the colour turns to red as the material velocity increases Slight off centre
loading onto the receiving conveyor CV 5 can be seen from Figure 53 This
correlates well with the actual observations during the physical testing of this
transfer point
Figure 54 shows the more determining factors for correlation between actual flow
and simulated flow where the legend on the left indicates the material velocity in
ms This is a cross sectional view through the centre of the chute From this
view a build up of material can be seen in the chute throat area The slow
flowing material on the back of the chute also helps to restrict the flow Due to
the fact that the material speed at the discharge of the chute is much slower than
the receiving belt speed a stack of turbulent flowing material is formed behind
the discharge point on the receiving conveyor
The optimisation of transfer chutes in the bulk materials industry
MN van Aarde
91
CHAPTER 5
There is a good correlation between the simulated and actual material flow
pattern The simulation method can therefore be considered as a valid alternate
or additional method to standard analytical chute design Attention should be
given though to the input of material properties in order to obtain a realistic result
55 VERIFICATION OF NEW CHUTE CONFIGURATION AND OPTIMISATION OF THE
HOOD LOCATION
After establishing that the OEM is a reliable design and verification tool the new
transfer chute configuration can be simulated Firstly this configuration is
modelled without the honeycombs inside the hood and spoon This is done in
order to verify the material flow pattern and velocity through the hood and spoon
Results obtained from this simulation can then be compared to the hand
calculation results An iterative process is followed with simulations and hand
calculations to obtain the best flow results The simulation results are shown in
Figure 55 and Figure 56
I
L
Figure 55 Material flow through hood at 10 000 tIh
The optimisation of transfer chutes in the bulk materials industry
MN van Aarde
92
CHAPTER 5
Figure 56 Material flow through spoon at 10 000 tlh
The hood velocity profile shown in Figure 38 gives the same result as obtained
from the DEM simulation The calculated hood exit velocity is 633 ms This is
the same result obtained from the simulation and shown by the red colouring in
Figure 55 As the material enters the spoon it is falling under gravity and
therefore still accelerating At impact with the chute wall it slows down and exits
the spoon with approximately the same velocity as the receiving conveyor
Figure 56 shows the material flow through the spoon section This can also be
compared to the spoon velocity profile in Figure 39 The behaviour of the
material inside the spoon as shown by the simulation correlates with the results
obtained from the hand calculations This is another indication that with accurate
input parameters the DEM can be used as a useful verification tool
The optimisation of transfer chutes in the bulk materials industry
MN van Aarde
93
CHAPTER 5
Skew loading into spoon
Slower material
L
Figure 57 Determination of the optimum hood location
The hood is supported by a shaft at the top and can be moved horizontally This
function is incorporated into the design in order to optimise the hood location
during commissioning of the transfer chute It is critical to discharge centrally into
the spoon in order to eliminate skew loading onto the receiving conveyor
Figure 57 illustrates the effect that the hood location has on material flow When
comparing the flow from Figure 55 to the flow in Figure 57 it is clear that skew
loading is a direct result of an incorrect hood position The circled area in Figure
57 illustrates how the flow reacts to the incorrect hood location
Material is discharged to the right side of the spoon which causes a slight buildshy
up of material on the left This causes the material to flow slightly from side to
side as it passes through the spoon Figure 57 indicates that the material to the
The optimisation of transfer chutes in the bulk materials industry
MN van Aarde
94
CHAPTERS ----------------- -------___ _--shy
right at the spoon discharge is slightly slower than the material on the left This is
a clear indication of skew loading onto the receiving conveyor
The material flow pattern in Figure 55 is symmetrical and therefore will not
cause skew loading The OEM can give a good indication of the required hood
setup before commissioning However adjustments can still be made during the
commissioning process The tracking of the receiving belt should give a good
indication of when the hood is in the optimum position
56 EFFECT OF THE HONEYCOMB STRUCTURE IN HIGH IMPACT ZONES
The purpose of the honeycomb dead box structure in the high impact zones is to
capture material inside the pockets and induce material on material flow This
requires that the material inside the honeycombs should be stationary while the
main stream material flow moves over the dead boxes OEM can therefore be
set up in such a way that the material velocities can be visualised inside the
chute
In Chapter 4 the logic of how this honeycomb should be structured and
positioned was discussed The simulations shown in Figure 58 and Figure 59
illustrate how a OEM pack~ge can also be used to determine the positioning of
these honeycomb structures Impact points in the hood and spoon must be
inside the honeycomb in all situations of flow inside the chute The spacing of
dead box pockets can be altered to ensure that a continuous layer of stationary
material is formed in the honeycomb area Various geometries for this
honeycomb structure can be simulated with OEM to obtain the best results
The optimisation of transfer chutes in the bulk materials industry
MN van Aarde
95
CHAPTER 5
Large radius hood
Hood honeycomb box to minimise wear in impact
Vertical discharge from hood centralising flow on
belt
L
Figure 58 Material behaviour through hood
Spoon
Spoon honeycomb box to minimise wear in impact area
Improved spoon discharge flow
Figure 59 Material behaviour through spoon
The optimisation of transfer chutes in the bulk materials industry
MN van Aarde
96
CHAPTERS
The legends on the left of Figure 58 and Figure 59 indicate the material velocity
in ms Dark blue indicates stationary material and bright red indicates a
maximum material velocity of 8 ms Using this information the functionality of
the honeycomb dead boxes can now be analysed The velocity of the material
captured by the dead boxes is indicated as dark blue This means that all the
material in the dead boxes is stationary
With the result obtained from the OEM simulation it is clear that material on
material flow will be induced by the honeycomb dead boxes The pockets of the
honeycomb capture the material and will therefore have reduced wear in the
high impact areas This material on material flow does however induce a
coarser sliding surface than the smooth ceramic liner tiles Due to the high
velocity of material through the chute the effect of the coarser sliding surface is
however minimised
58 CONCLUSION
The Discrete Element Method is proven to be a successful design and
verification tool in the bulk materials industry This method is used widely in the
global bulk materials industry The successful outcome of the OEM simulation is
however dependent on the correct material input parameters Some of these
parameters are readily available from the facility that handles the material The
rest of the parameters can be determined by setting up simple test simulations
with OEM
To verify that the OEM simulation is a correct indication of the actual condition
the simulation is compared to CCTV images taken from the same transfer chute
The results show that the OEM simulation does provide a true reflection of the
actual material flow through the transfer chute Therefore the same material
input parameters can be used to simulate the new transfer chute configuration
The optimisation of transfer chutes in the bulk materials industry
MN van Aarde
97
CHAPTER 5
From the simulations done on the new transfer chute configuration the effect of
the honeycomb dead boxes can be examined These simulation results show
that the honeycomb dead box configuration is effective in capturing material
inside the honeycomb cavities This results in material on material flow and
reduces impact abrasion on the ceramic chute liners
Results obtained from the OEM simulation of the new transfer configuration are
compared to the hand calculation results This comparison indicates that the
material velocity calculated in the hood and spoon correlates well with the
material velocity calculated by the OEM The overall results obtained from
simulating the new transfer chute configuration have been shown to provide a
true reflection of the actual flow through the chute
The optimisation of transfer chutes in the bulk materials industry
MN van Aarde
98
CHAPTER 6
CHAPTER 6 CONCLUSIONS AND RECOMMENDATIONS
The optimisation of transfer chutes in the bulk materials industry
MN van Aarde
99
CHAPTER 6
61 CONCLUSIONS AND RECOMMENDATIONS
Bulk materials handling is a key role player in the global industrial industry
Within this field the industry faces many challenges on a daily basis These
challenges as with any industry are to limit expenses and increase profit Some
of the limiting factors of achieving this goal in the bulk materials handling industry
are lost time due to unscheduled maintenance product losses due to spillage
andhigh costs incurred by increased maintenance
The focus of this study was on the optimisation of transfer chutes and
investigations were carried out to determine the core problems These
investigations were done by observing and monitoring various grades of iron ore
passing through transfer chutes known to have throughput problems The core
problems were identified as high wear on liners in the impact zones skew
loading on receiving conveyors material spillage and chute blockages
These problems cause financial losses to the facility either directly or indirectly
Direct financial losses can be attributed to the frequent replacement of chute
liners while the indirect financial losses are caused by facility down time This is
why it is imperative to optimise the manner in which the transfer of material is
approached A new transfer chute configuration addresses the problems
identified at the facility and the core concepts can be adopted at any bulk
materials handling facility
This new concept examines the utilisation of the hood and spoon concept rather
than the conventional dead box configuration By using the hood and spoon
configuration the material discharge velocity is utilised and carried through to the
discharge onto the receiving conveyor Adding to this design is a honeycomb
dead box configuration in the high impact zones of the hood and spoon This
initiates material on material flow and prolongs the lifetime of the chute liners
The optimisation of transfer chutes in the bulk materials industry
MN van Aarde
100
CHAPTER 6
The radius of the hood should be designed so that it follows the path of the
material trajectory as closely as possible Some facility constraints prohibit this
hood radius from following exactly the same path as the material The radius of
the spoon is designed in such a manner that it receives the material from the
hood and slows it down while turning it into the direction in which the belt is
running Ideally the material should be discharged from the spoon at
approximately the same velocity as the receiving conveyor
If this can be achieved then some major problems suffered by the industry will
have been resolved With the hood having almost the same radius as the
material trajectory impact wear on liners can be significantly reduced By
discharging material from the chute onto the receiving conveyor at the same
velocity as the conveyor belt excessive belt wear and material spillage will be
avoided Further optimisation is however still possible by investigating the
implementation of various skirting options to the side of the conveyor
This new transfer chute configuration also boasts an articulated bottom section in
the spoon The purpose of the adjustable bottom section is to create greater
clearance below the spoon This will allow material on the belt below to pass
unimpeded underneath the spoon In some cases there can be several chutes in
series that discharge onto the same conveyor In these cases it is beneficial to
incorporate an articulated chute in order to have the capability of having a small
drop height between the discharge point in the chute and the receiving conveyor
This low drop height also minimises turbulent flow at the chute discharge point on
the receiving conveyor
The most unique feature to the new design is the implementation of the
honeycomb dead box configuration in the high impact zones Due to these high
impact areas the liners will experience the most wear This section of the chute
is flanged and can be removed separately from the rest of the chute to aid
maintenance In most maintenance operations it may only be necessary to reline The optimisation of transfer chutes in the bulk materials industry
MN van Aarde
101
CHAPTER 6
this small section of the chute Costs are minimised by reducing the time
required for maintenance and the cost of replacing liners
Previously testing of new transfer chute configurations normally involved
implementing the chute and obseNing its ability to perform according to
specification This can however be a costly exercise as it is possible that further
modifications to the chute will be required after implementation Therefore it is
beneficial to verify the new chute configuration before implementation
This is done by simulating the material flow through the chute using Discrete
Element Method A comparison was done between the actual flow in an eXisting
chute and the simulated flow in the same chute configuration This comparison
showed the same result obtained from the simulation and the actual material
flow This method can therefore be used as an accurate simulation tool for
evaluating transfer chute performance
The mathematical calculations describing the material flow in and over the
honeycomb dead box structures are complex Therefore simulation models are
used to show the material behaviour in those areas Simulations show that the
material captured within the dead boxes remains stationary thus protecting the
ceramic liners behind it This is the desired result as it prolongs the life of the
chute liners and reduces maintenance frequencies
If the work is done efficiently it normally takes two days to remove a worn chute
of this configuration fully and replace it with a new one This is normally done
once a year due to the design lifetime of the chute With the new chute
configuration this maintenance schedule can be reduced to two hours once a
year for the replacement of the honeycomb sections only The exposed face of
the honeycomb ribs will wear through until the efficiency of the honeycomb
design is reduced
The optimisation of transfer chutes in the bulk materials industry
MN van Aarde
102
CHAPTER 6
This specific iron ore facility has approximately fifty transfer points During this
exercise only two of these transfer points were replaced with the new chute
configuration The combined annual maintenance time for replacement of these
50 chutes is 100 days If the new chute philosophy is adopted on all these
transfers the annual maintenance time can be reduced to as little as 100 hours
This excludes the unplanned work for cleaning of spillages and fixing or replacing
worn conveyors
There are significant benefits to investigating the problems at specific transfer
points before attempting a new design This gives good insight into where the
focus should be during the design process Ea~y identification and
understanding of the problem areas is essential for a new chute configuration
The new design features can provide a vast improvement and a large benefit to
the bulk materials handling industry
62 RECOMMENDATIONS FOR FURTHER STUDY
During the chute performance tests it was noted that avalanches on the
stockpiles during reclaiming of material causes peaks on the conveyor systems
These peaks in the material stream increase the probability of blockages in the
transfer chutes As a result material spillage occurs and the conveyor belts can
be easily overloaded
This occurrence creates the requirement for further studies on the reclaiming
operations All stacker reclaimers are operated manually which creates ample
room for error Investigations can be done to determine the value of automating
the reclaiming operations Manual interaction cannot be avoided but an
automated system will reduce the possibility for error
Visual inspections on the transfer chute liners indicate that the material tends to
erode the liners away quicker in the grooves between liner plates or ceramic
The optimisation of transfer chutes in the bulk materials industry
MN van Aarde
103
CHAPTER 6
tiles This occurrence seems to be worse in areas of the chute where the
material velocity is the highest
This problem was specifically noticed with ceramic liner tiles The tiles are glued
to the chute surface with an epoxy and this substance also fills the crevices
between the tiles This epoxy is however not resistant to any type of sliding or
impact abrasion If the material gains speed in such a groove between the tiles it
simply erodes the epoxy away Studies to reduce or even eliminate this problem
should be examined
In some situations the layout and configuration of the chute prohibits the tiles
from being inserted in a staggered manner Studies can be done on the
composition of this epoxy in order to increase its resistance to sliding and impact
abrasion By doing so the lifetime of the chute liners can be increased which will
result in minimised facility down time due to maintenance
It seems that it is a global industry problem to find accurate scientific methods of
determining material input parameters for OEM simulations Although most of
the material properties can be determined through testing it is still a challenge to
convert that information into a representative input parameter into OEM It is
therefore recommended that further studies be undertaken to determine a
method by which material test data can be successfully converted into OEM input
parameters
The optimisation of transfer chutes in the bulk materials industry
MN van Aarde
104
REFERENCES ------shy
REFERENCES
[1] ARNOLD P C MCLEAN A G ROBERTS A W 1978 Bulk Solids
storage flow and handling Tunra Bulk Solids Australia Jan
[2] ANON 2008 Peak (Export) OilUSD Survival Dec
httppeakoHsurvivalorgltag=finance Date of access 8 Jun 2009
[3] KESSLER F 2006 Recent developments in the field of bulk conveying
FME Transactions Vol 34 NO4
[4] ANON 2007 Specification for Troughed Belt Conveyors British
Standards BS28901989 25 Sep Date of access 8 Jun 2009
[5] CEMA (Conveyor Equipment Manufacturers Association) Belt Conveyors
6thfor Bulk Materials ed wwwcemanetorg Date of access
10 Jun 2009
[6] DEWICKI G 2003 Computer Simulation of Granular Material Flows
Overland Conveyor Co Inc Jan httpwwwpowderandbulkcom Date
of access 10 Jun 2009
[7] AMERICAN COAL COUNCIL 2009 Engineered chutes control dust for
Ameren U Es Meramec Plant httpwww clean-coal infold rupalindexphp
Date of access 12 Jun 2009
[8] KUMBA IRON ORE 2008 Annual Financial Statements 2008
httpwwwsishenironorecompanycozareportskumba afs 08pdffullpdf
Date of access 13 Jun 2009
The optimisation of transfer chutes in the bulk materials industry
MN van Aarde
105
REFERENCES
[9] METSO BACKGROUNDER 2007 Rock Crushing 22 Feb
httpWWvVmetsocom Date of access 15 Jun 2009
[10] ALTHOFF H 1977 Reclaiming and Stacking System Patent US
4037735
[11] THE SOUTH AFRICAN INSTITUTE OF MATERIALS HANDLING
Conveyor belt installations and related components Chutes Level 1
course on belt conveying technology
httpWWvVsaimhcozaeducationcourse01chuteshtm Date of access
18 Jun 2009
[12] CLARKE R 2008 Hood and spoon internal flow belt conveyor transfer
systems SACEA - seminar 22 Aug httpWWvVsaceaorgzaDate of
access 22 Jun 2009
[13] T W WOODS CONSTRUCTION 2009 Design problems in coal transfer
chutes 24 Mar httpWWvVferretcomaucTW-Woods-Constructions
Date of access 25 Jun 2009
[14] LOUGHRAN J 2009 The flow of coal through transfer chutes 20 Aug
Showcase of research excellence James Cook University Australia
[15] ONEIL M 2006 A guide to coal chute replacement Power Engineering
International Nov httpgoliathecnextcomcoms2lgi 0198-369643Ashy
guide-to-coal-chutehtml Date of access 3 Jul 2009
[16] NORDELL LK 1992 A new era in overland conveyor belt design
httpWWvVckitcozasecureconveyorpaperstroughedoverlandoverland
htm Date of access 3 Jul 2009
The optimisation of transfer chutes in the bulk materials industry
MN van Aarde
106
REFERENCES
[17] Rowland C 1992 Dust Control at Transfer Points
httpwwwckitcozasecureconveyorpapersbionic-research-2d-bri2shy
paper05htm Date of access 4 Jul 2009
[18] KRAM ENGINEERING Ceramic composite impact blocks
httpwwwkramengineeringcozacercomhtmIDate of access
5 Jul 2009
I19] BLAZEK C 2005 Kinkaid InteliFlo tradeInstallation Source for Plats
Power Atticle Oct
httpwwwbenetechusacompdf caseStudyBe neKi ncArti c pdf
Date of access 10 Aug 2009
[20] CRP Engineering Corp Modern Transfer Chute Designs for Use in
Material Handling
httpwwwcbpengineeringcompdflTransfer Chutespdf Date of access
26 Apr 2010
[21] ROZENTALS J 2008 Rational design of conveyor chutes Bionic
Research Institute South African Institute of Materials Handling
[22] ROBERTS AW SCOTT OJ 1981 Flow of bulk solids through
transfer chutes of variable geometry and profile Bulk Solids Handling
1(4) Dec
[23] CARSON JW ROYAL TA GOODWILL DJ 1986 Understanding
and Eliminating Particle Segregation Problems Bulk Solids Handling
6(1) Feb
[24] BENJAMIN CW 2004 The use of parametric modelling to design
transfer chutes and other key components Gulf Conveyor Group The optimisation of transfer chutes in the bulk materials industry
MN van Aarde
107
l25] STUART DICK D ROYAL TA 1992 Design Principles for Chutes to
Handle Bulk Solids Bulk Solids Handling 12(3) Sep
[26J REICKS AV RUDOLPHI TJ 2004 The Importance and Prediction of
Tension Distribution around the Conveyor Belt Path Bulk materials
handling by conveyor belt 5(2)
(271 RAMOS CM 1991 The real cost of degradation
institute Chute design conference 1991
Bionic research
[28] ROBERTS AW 1969 An investigation of the gravity flow of non
cohesive granular materials through discharge chutes Transactions of
the ACMEjournal of engineering for indust~ May
[29] TAYLOR HJ 1989 Guide to the design of transfer chutes and chute
linings for bulk materials
association 1989
mechanical handling engineers
[30] ROBERTS AW 1999 Chute design application transfer chute design
Design guide for chutes in bulk solids handling The University of
Newcastle Australia
[31] NORDELL LK 1994 Palabora installs Curved Transfer Chute in Hard
Rock to Minimise Belt Cover Wear Bulk Solids Handling 14 Dec
[32] ROZENTALS J 1991 Flow of Bulk Solids in Chute Design
research institute Chute design conference 1991
Bionic
The optimisation oftransfer chutes in the bulk materials industry
MN van Aarde
108
REFERENCES
[33] ROBERTS AW WICHE SJ 2007 Feed Chute Geometry for
Minimum Belt Wear (h International conference of bulk materials
handling 17 Oct
[34J POWDER HANDLING New OEM Conveyor Transfer Chute Design
Software Helix Technologies
httpvwvwpowderhandlingcomauarticesnew-dem-conveyor-transfershy
chute-design-software Date of access 12 Aug 2009
[35J SAWLEY ML CLEARY PW 1999 A Parallel Discrete Element
Method for Industrial Granular Flow SimUlations EPFL - Super
Computing Review (11)
[36] DEWICKI G 2003 Bulk Material Handling and Processing - Numerical
Techniques and Simulation of Granular Material Overland Conveyor
Company Bulk Solids Handling 23(2)
[37J FA VIER J 2009 Continuing Improvements Boost use of Discrete
Element Method Oil and Gas Engineer- Production Processing 7 Oct
[38] KRAUS E F KA TTERFELD A Usage of the Discrete Element Method in
Conveyor Technologies Institute for Conveyor Technologies (IFSL) The
Otto-von-Guericke University of Magdeburg
[39] MOYS MH VAN NIEROP MA VAN TONDER JC GLOVER G
2005 Validation of the Discrete Element Method (OEM) by Comparing
Predicted Load Behaviour of a Grinding Mill with Measured Data School
for Process and Materials Engineering University of Witwatersrand
Johannesburg The optimisation of transfer materials industry
MN van Aarde
109
REFERENCES
[40J MciLVINA P MOSSAD R 2003 Two dimensional transfer chute
analysis using a continuum method Third international conference on
CFD in the Minerals and Process Industry CSIRO Melbourne Australia
(41J Overland Conveyor Company Inc 2009 Applied DEM
httpwwwapplieddemcomDate of access 26 Apr 2010
(42] DEM SOLUTIONS 2008 Advanced Particle Simulation Capabilities with
EDEM 21 Press release 5 Nov
[43J DEM SOLUTIONS 2008 Martin Engineering Expands use of EDEMTM
Software in Design of Solids Handling Equipment Press release 20 Feb
(44] COETZEE CJ ELS DNJ 2009 Calibration of Discrete Element
Parameters and the Modelling of Silo Discharge and Bucket Filling
Computers and Electronics in Agriculture 65 Mar
[45] DAVID J KRUSES PE Conveyor Belt Transfer Chute Modelling and
Other Applications using The Discrete Element Method in the Material
Handling Industry
httpwwwckitcozasecureconveyorpaperstrouqhedconveyorconveyor
Date of access 3 Sep 2009
bulk materials industry
MN van Aarde
110
ApPENDIXA
ApPENDIX A MATERIAL TESTS AND LINER SELECTiON
The optimisation of-transfer chutes in the bulk materials industry
MN van Aarde
11-1
ApPENDIX A
MATERIAL TEST WORK AND LINER SELECTION
Material samples were taken from the stockpile area for evaluation and testing
These samples represent the worst case materials for impact wear and flow
problems Tests were conducted by external consultants as this is a speciality
field Therefore no detail information on how the tests are conducted is currently
available Results from these tests should indicate the worst case parameters for
chute design according to each specific liner type tested
The material handled by the facility varied from 4 mm to 34 mm lump size A mid
range lump size ore was identified as the preferred material to use for wear
testing This decision was based on the specific ore type maximum lump size of
15 mm as required for the wear test The wear test apparatus used cannot
provide conclusive results with the larger lump sizes of 34 mm and thus smaller
sizes are used Guidance on which ore samples to take was given by the
external consultants tasked with performing the test work
The test work is divided into two sections Firstly the flow test work is carried out
on the finer material with a higher clay content known to have bad flow angles
Included in the selection of fine materials is a sample of the scraper dribblings
This is the material scraped off the belt underneath the head pulley Secondly
the wear tests were conducted on 15 mm samples as explained above
A few common liners were selected for testing These liners are shown in
Table A Some of these liners are known for their specific purpose and
characteristics Polyurethane is known to have a very good coefficient of friction
and will therefore improve the flow of material This material does however
wear out quicker in high impact applications Therefore it is only considered for
use inside the dribbling chute
The optimisation of transfer chutes in the bulk materials industry
MN van Aarde
112
ApPENDIX A
As can be seen from Figure 37 in section 432 the dribbling chute will only see
scraper dribblings from the primary and secondary scrapers It is protected from
any main stream flow of material by the start up chute This makes the
polyurethane liner a prime candidate for lining this section of the chute
Table A Material tested vs liner type
I Flow Tests Wear Tests
Liner T
en aJ c
u
I
i
N en aJ c
u
Cf)
en aJ c
u
I en
shy OJaJ C 0 shyj -shy 0 u pound
(f) shy0
T
aJ ~ j 0 0
N aJ ~ j 0 0 i
I Chrome x x x x x
Carbide
x x x x xI VRN 500 I
x x x x x x94
Alumina
Ceramic i I
Poly x
Urethane I I I
FLOW TEST WORK
The fines 1 sample was tested at three different moisture contents of 36 41
and 47 This is 70 80 and 90 of saturation moisture respectively No
noticeable difference was observed in the wall friction angles Therefore the
fines 2 and fines 3 samples were tested at 80 of saturation which is 42 and
43 moisture content respectively
Test work showed that the minimum chute angle required for flow increased as
the impact pressure increased Chute angles were measured up to impact
pressures of about 8 kPa The worst chute angle obtained was 62deg This means
that no angle inside the chute should be less than 62deg from the horizontal
The industry 113
MN van Aarde
ApPENDIXA
The scraper dribblings were tested at a moisture content of 12 This material
possesses the most clay content and therefore has the worst flow properties
During testing of this material water was added to improve the flow At an
impact pressure of 03 kPa the minimum chute angle drops from 62deg to 56deg when
adding a fine mist spray of water
WEAR TEST WORK
As stated in chapter 4 wear tests were conducted on the chrome carbide
overlay ceramics and VRN500 The results of these tests are shown as non
dimensional wear ratios of mm wearmm travel of bulk solid sliding on the wear
liners coupon at a given force Test results shown in Table B indicate that the
chrome carbide will have about 185 times the lifetime of 94 alumina ceramics
The VRN500 liner will wear about 6 times faster than the 94 alumina ceramics
at the same force
Table B Wear ratios of liners at two different pressure ranges
lore Wall Coupon 65 kPa 163kPa -173 kPa I i
Coarse 1 on 94 Alumina Ceramic 90 E-9 37 E-8
Coarse 1 on Chrome Carbide 87 E-9 20 E-8
Coarse 1 on VRN500 91 E-8 I 24 E-7 i
Coarse 2 on 94 Alumina Ceramics 38 E-9 22 E-8
Coarse 2 on Chrome Carbide 55 E-9 15 E-8
Coarse 2 on VRN500 66 E-8 25 E-7 I
LINER SELECTION
The lifetime of the liners is not the only criteria Maintainability and cost are also
factors that must be considered Chrome carbide seems to be the liner of choice
for this application However the specific type of chrome carbide tested is not
The optimisation of transfer chutes industry 114
MN van Aarde
ApPEND[xA
manufactured locally and the imported cost is approximately three times that of
ceramics
VRN500 is slightly cheaper than ceramics and can easily be bolted to the back
plate of the chute which makes maintenance very simple Ceramics are
however widely used on the facility and the maintenance teams are well trained
for this specific liner Therefore 94 alumina ceramics is chosen for this
application
The optimisation of transfer chutes in the bulk materials industry
MN van Aarde
115
ApPENODlt B
ApPENDIX B CHUTE CONTROL PHILOSOPHY
The optfmisation of transfer chutes in the bulk materials industry
MN van Aarde
116
ApPENDIX B
SPOON IN THE OPERATING POSITION
For the spoon to be in the operating position the moving head must be over that
specific spoon and the feeding stockyard conveyor must be running This means
that material will be fed through the chute In this case the spoon needs to be in
the operating position to prevent spillage
However when the chute is in the operating position and the feeding conveyor
trips for any reason the actuated spoon section must not move to the non
operating position If the spoon position feedback fails then the system must trip
and the spoon must remain in its last position The downstream conveyor must
also fail to start with this condition
SPOON IN THE NON OPERATING POSITION
As a rule the spoon needs to be in the non operating position when the moving
head on that specific stockyard conveyor is in the purging position (position C)
The reason is that when a stacker reclaimer is in stacking mode any upstream
stacker reclaimer can be reclaiming The reclaimed material on CV 5 or CV 6
will have to pass underneath the actuated chute
ACTUATED SPOON OVER CV 5
As an example for the movement of any actuated spoon on CV 5 the following
are considered When the moving heads of any of the stockyard conveyors are
in position A and that specific stockyard conveyor is running then the rest of the
actuated spoons over CV 5 must be in the non operating position The
following scenario provides a better understanding
bull CV 4 is running
bull CV 4 moving head is in position A
The optimisation of transfer chutes in the bulk materials industry
MN van Aarde
117
ApPENDIXB
In this situation all the actuated spoons on CV 5 except underneath CV 4
must be in the non operating position
ACTUATED SPOON OVER CV 6
As an example for the movement of any actuated spoon on CV 6 the following
are considered When the moving heads of any of the stockyard conveyors are
in position B and that specific stockyard conveyor is running then the rest of the
actuated spoons over CV 6 must be in the non operating position The
following scenario is similar to 453 but explains the control philosophy for the
moving head in position B
bull CV 2 is running
bull CV 2 moving head is in position B
In this situation all the actuated spoons on CV 6 except underneath CV 2
must be in the non operating position
The optimisation of transfer chutes in bulk materials industry
MN van Aarde
118
OF FIGURES
Figure 58 Material behaviour through hood 96
Figure 59 Material behaviour through spoon 96
The optimisation of transfer chutes in the bulk materials industry
MN van Aarde
xi
LIST OF TABLES
LIST OF TABLES
Table 1 Design Input Reference Requirements [24J 24
Table 2 Iron are grades used for chute test work 45
Table 3 Results from test programme 54
The optimisation of transfer chutes in the bulk materials industry
M N van Aarde
xii
---------------------------------
CV
NOMENCLATURE
NOMENCLATURE
SCADA
CCTV
CEMA
DEM
kPa
mm
MSHA
ms
mt
MW
NIOSH
OSHA
RampD
tlh
3D
Supervisory Control And Data Acquisition
Closed Circuit Television
Conveyor Equipment Manufacturers Association
Conveyor
Discrete Element Method
Kilopascal
Millimetres
Mine Safety and Health Administration
Metres per second
Metric Tons
Megawatt
National Institute for Occupational Safety and Health
Occupational Safety and Health Administration
Radius of curvature
Research and Development
Tons per hour
Three Dimensional
The optimisation of transfer chutes in the bulk materials industry
MN van Aarde
xiii
CHAPTER 1
CHAPTER 1 INTRODUCTION TO TRANSFER CHUTES IN THE BULK
MATERIALS HANDLING INDUSTRY
The optimisation of transfer chutes in the bulk materials industry
MN van Aarde
1
CHAPTER 1
11 INTRODUCTION TO TRANSFER CHUTES
111 Bulk material handling industry
In order to comprehend the utilisation of transfer chutes fully it is imperative to
first understand the industry in which it is used Transfer chutes are most
commonly used in the bulk materials handling industry Bulk materials handling
operations perform a key function in a great number and variety of industries
throughout the world as stated in 1978 by Arnold McLean and Roberts [1 J
The nature of materials handling and scale of industrial operation varies from
industry to industry and country to country These variations are based on the
industrial and economic capacity and requirements of the specific industry or
country Regardless of the variations in industry the relative costs of storing
handling and transporting bulk materials are in the majority of cases very
significant
o
Figure 1 Growth in global crude steel production from 1996 to 2006 [2J
The optimisation of transfer chutes in the bulk materials industry
MN van Aarde
2
CHAPTER 1
The chart from BHP Billiton shown in Figure 1 provides a clear indication of the
actual drivers of global materials demand Figure 1 indicates the percentage
growth in crude steel production from all the major role players between 1996
and 2006 China accounted for 65 of the 494 million tonnes of global steel
production growth between 1996 and 2006 Europe grew by 6 while the other
countries grew by 20 [2]
These figures emphasise that bulk materials handling performs a key function in
the global industry and economy [1] Because of market requirements new
products continuously evolve This is also true for the field of bulk conveying
technologies [3] It can be assumed that the evolution of new technology is due
to the requirement for more efficient and cost effective operation
The case study which will be discussed from Chapter 3 onwards is an iron ore
export facility This facility exports approximately 50 million tonnes per annum
With each hour of down time the financial losses equate to approximately
R750 000 This highlights the fact that handling systems should be designed and
operated with a view to achieving maximum efficiency and reliability
112 Function of transfer chutes
BS2890 (Specification for Troughed Belt Conveyors) gives the definition for
transfer chutes as follows A straight curved or spiral open topped or enclosed
smooth trough by which materials are directed and lowered by gravity [4] For
any belt conveyor system to operate successfully the system requires that [5]
bull the conveyor belt be loaded properly
bull the material transported by the conveyor is discharged properly
The transfer of bulk material can either be from a belt bin hopper feeder or
stockpile and occurs at a transfer point In most cases this transfer point requires
optimisation of transfer chutes in the bulk materials industry
MN van Aarde
3
CHAPTER 1 - ----~--~--------------~--------
a transfer chute [5] In industry the most common use of transfer chutes is for
transferring bulk material from one conveyor belt to another This transfer of
material can be done in any direction as simplistically explained in Figure 2 and
Figure 3
Figure 2 Typical in-line transfer point [6J
Figure 2 shows a basic in-line transfer of material from the end of one conveyor
belt onto the start of another conveyor belt Figure 3 illustrates a more intricate
design where the direction of material transport is changed by an angle of 90 0 bull
This design or any other design entailing a directional change in flow normally
requires more detailed engineering [7
The optimisation of transfer chutes in the bulk materials industry
MN van Aarde
4
CHAPTER 1
Regardless of the direction or type of transfer there are some design
requirements that always need special attention Some of these requirements
are reduced wear on chute liners correct discharge velocity minimum material
degradation and minimum belt abrasion The correct design will also eliminate
blockages shape the load correctly and minimise the creation of dust [7]
12 VARIOUS APPLICATIONS AND CONFIGURATIONS OF TRANSFER CHUTES
The application of transfer chutes is central to any operation in the bulk handling
industry Whether it is mining operations storing stacking importing or
exporting of bulk material the transfer of material is always required On the
mining side the challenges involved with materials handling are probably some of
the most extreme
This is due to the great variation in lump sizes that must be catered for At
Sishen iron ore mine seven iron ore products are produced conforming to
different chemical and physical specifications The current mining process at
Sishen entails [8]
bull Removal of topsoil and stockpiling
bull Drilling and blasting of ore
bull Loading of iron ore and transporting to the crushers
bull Crushing and screening into size fractions
bull Beneficiation of all size fractions
bull Stockpiling onto various product beds
The processes with the most intricate and complex chute arrangements are
probably crushing and screening as well as stacking and reclaiming of material
The optimisation of transfer chutes in the bulk materials industry
11 N van Aarde
5
CHAPTER 1
121 Crushing
An excavator or wheeled loader transfers the rock to be crushed into the feed
hopper of the primary crusher The primary crusher breaks the large rock
boulders or run of mine material into smaller grain sizes Some of the bigger
crushers in the industry can crack boulders that are about one cubic meter in
size All the crushed material passes over a screen to separate the different
lump sizes The material that falls through the screen is transferred via a series
of transfer chutes and conveyor belts to the stockpile area [9]
Where the material does not pass through the screen another system of transfer
chutes and conveyor belts transfers this material to a secondary crusher The
material is fed into this crusher via a transfer chute from the discharge of a
conveyor belt All the processed material is then transferred to the stockpile area
via a separate series of transfer chutes and conveyor systems [9] Throughout
this whole process the material lump size changes and with it the transfer chute
requirements
Figure 4 Material lump sizes through a crushing plant
The optimisation of transfer chutes in the bulk materials industry
MN van Aarde
6
CHAPTER 1
Figure 4 shows some spillage from a conveyor between a primary and secondary
crusher The shovel in the picture provides a good reference as to the variation
in material lump size on the walkway
122 Stacking and Recaiming
Normally the stockyard area has an elongated yard conveyor for moving bulk
material in the longitudinal direction of the stockyard Straddling the yard
conveyor transversely is the rail mounted undercarriage of the stacker reclaimer
Three main chutes transfer material through the machine [10] Figure 5 shows
this machine in action while reclaiming material from a stockpile
Figure 5 Stacker Reclaimer in reclaiming mode
The first chute will transfer material to the incline conveyor of the machine when
the material has to be stacked on the stockpile In the case where the material
must bypass the machine this chute will transfer material from the tripper back
onto the yard conveyor [10]
The optimisation of transfer chutes in the bulk materials industry
MN van Aarde
7
CHAPTER 1
The second chute transfers material from the incline conveyor onto the boom
conveyor This is normally a difficult process because the boom conveyor is
never in the same direction as the incline conveyor From the end of the boom
conveyor the material is Simply discharged onto the stockpile [10]
When reclaiming stockpile material the bucket whee at the head end of the
boom conveyor scoops up material and deposits it back onto the boom conveyor
From here it is discharged into the centre chute of the machine This chute then
discharges the material onto the yard conveyor for further processing In some
cases the bottom section of this centre chute must be moved out of the way to
allow free passage of material discharged from the tripper chute onto the yard
conveyor [10]
123 Chute configurations
Various chute configurations are used in the bulk materials handling industry
These configurations depend on the specific requirements of the system layout
or material properties There are basically two main configurations consisting of
dead box chutes and dynamic chutes Both of these configurations have their
specific applications in industry The major difference is that dead box chutes
use the material being transferred as a chute liner whereas dynamic chutes are
lined with a high wear resistant material A combination of both can also be
used
If the material being transferred is relatively dry such as goid ore dead boxes
prove to be more beneficial One of the applications of a ded box is to absorb
the direct impact of material discharged from a conveyor into a head chute as
can be seen in Figure 6 Other applications are in long or high transfer points In
these transfers the momentum of falling material must be reduced before
reaching the receiving conveyor belt in order to reduce wear of the belt [11]
The optimisation of transfer chutes in the bulk materials industry
MN van Aarde
8
CHAPTER 1
Figure 6 Typical dead box [11]
As shown in Figure 7 dead boxes are also used to accomplish changes in the
vertical flow direction by inserting angled panels This configuration where dead
boxes are used as deflection plates or impact wear plates is known as a cascade
chute In this case the deflection plate or the impact wear plate hardness is
equal to that of the feed material [11]
Figure 7 Typical cascade chute [11]
The hood and spoon chute or dynamic chute is configured so that the hood
catches and changes the material trajectory path to exit with a vertical velocity
When the material impacts the spoon it slides down the smooth spoon surface
The material flow direction is changed to the direction of the receiving conveyor
as shown in Figure 8 [12]
The optimisation of transfer chutes in the bulk materials industry
MN van Aarde
9
CHAPTER 1
Figure 8 Typical dynamic chute [12J
Ancillary equipment used with this configuration of chutes is radial doors and
flopper gates Radial doors are used successfully below ore passes or silos for
an onoff feed control as shown by Figure 9 One drawback of radial doors is the
possibility of jamming while closing In order to counteract this problem a
knocker arm between the cylinder door and the rod can be added This helps to
close the door with full force open with reduced force or hammered open [11]
Figure 9 Radial door used in chutes under ore passes or silos [11J
The optimisation of transfer chutes in the bulk materials industry
MN van Aarde
10
CHAPTER 1
The function of a f10pper gate is to divert the flow of material in a chute when one
conveyor is required to feed either of two discharge points as shown in Figure 10
For this same purpose a diverter car can also be used where a section of the
chute moves in and out of the path of material flow The critical area in the
design of a flop per gate is the hinge point In order for the gate to be self
cleaning the hinge point should be placed above the apex of the double chute
This also prevents rock traps that can jam the gate [11]
COVERED
Figure 10 Flopper gate diverling material to different receiving conveyors [11J
13 RECURRING CHUTE PROBLEMS AND COUNTERMEASURES FROM INDUSTRY
Transfer chutes are a fundamental link when conveying ore and therefore it is
important to get it right at the outset of design and fabrication Design and
fabrication issues can cause numerous problems when transferring material
Historically conveyor system design focused on the systems overall structural
integrity while ensuring that the equipment would fit within the facilitys
constraints [13] [14] [15]
The optimisation of transfer chutes in the bulk materials industry
MN van Aarde
11
CHAPTER 1
Little attention was given to design analysis or consideration for material flow
characteristics Normally the solution for controlling flow was to implement
simple rock boxes [15] This type of chute configuration is still commonly used in
industry but with more emphasis on the flow of material The most recurrent
problems on transfer chutes are [13] [14]
bull Spillage
bull Blocked chutes
bull High wear on the receiving belt due to major differences between the
material velocity and the belt velocity
bull Rapid chute wear
bull Degradation of the material being transferred
bull Excessive generation of dust and noise
bull Miss tracking of the receiving conveyor belt due to skew loading from the
transfer chute
Figure 11 Chute liner degradation
Figure 11 shows the excessive wear on ceramic tiles where the material
trajectory from the feeding belt impacts the chute These tiles are replaceable
and a maintenance schedule normally specifies the replacement intervals A
The optimisation of transfer chutes in the bulk materials industry 12
MN van Aarde
CHAPTER 1
problem arises when the frequency of these maintenance intervals is too high
due to excessive wear on the liners
Figure 12 Results of continuous belt wear at transfer points
The conveyor belt can account for up to 60 of the capital cost of a bulk
materials handling plant This means that the cost implications of constant
replacement of a conveyor belt due to wear can become significantly higher
than the original capital investment [16] Figure 12 shows the extreme damage
on a conveyor belt caused by abrasion and gouging
Figure 13 Dust from a transfer point onto a stockpile
The optimisation of transfer chutes in the bulk materials industry
MN van Aarde
13
CHAPTER 1 --~ ---------------------------shy
The presence of dust is an indisputable fact in many industries concerned with
the handling or processing of products such as coal mineral ores and many
others [17] As in the case of spillage it is easy to identify transfer systems that
cause dust clouds Environmental regulations are in place to prevent excessive I
dust emissions
Government organisations such as the Occupational Safety and Health
Administration (OSHA) the Mine Safety and Health Administration (MSHA) and
the National Institute for Occupational Safety and Health (NIOSH) closely monitor
dust levels at all coal handling facilities [13] Therefore it is imperative that the
chute design process caters for limiting dust emissions
Systems normally used in industry are enclosed skirting systems bag houses
and dust collectors This however is only treating the symptom rather than
eliminating the primary cause In order to minimise dust generation the use of
low impact angles and minimal chute contact is required (14] One of the most
successful methods of controlling dust is atomised water spray systems using a
combination of high pressure water and chemical substances
Over the years considerable research has gone into minimising wear on transfer
chutes There are currently a few different liner types to choose from depending
on the configuration and application of the chute These include ceramic tiles
chrome carbide overlay materials and typi~al hardened steel plates such as
VRN A combination of liner materials can also be used similar to the one
shown in Figure 14
The opUmisation of transfer chutes in the bulk materials industry
MN van Aarde
14
CHAPTER 1
Figure 14 Ceramic composite liners [18J
This ceramic composite liner is an example of the new technology available in
chute lining materials It is a high wear resistant surface made from cylindrical
alumina ceramic pellets bound within a resilient rubber base The purpose of this
material is to provide wear resistance through the use of ceramics while the
rubber dampens the impact forces [18]
Some innovative concepts for chute design have been implemented since the
materials handling industry started to incorporate new ideas Benetech Inc
installed a new generation hood and spoon type chute at Dominions 1200 MW
Kincaid coal powered generating station as shown in Figure 15 This chute
replaced the conventional dead box chute [19] Their innovation is to use a pipe
configuration combined with the hood and spoon concept
The optimisation of transfer chutes in the bulk materials industry
MN van Aarde
15
CHAPTER 1
Figure 15 Benetech Inteliflow J-Gide transfer chute [19J
This chute has sufficient chute wall slope and cross sectional area to prevent
material build-up and blocked chutes Reduced collision forces in the chute
minimize material degradation and the creation of excessive dust The material
velocity in the chute is controlled by the wall angles to obtain a discharge velocity
with the same horizontal component as the belt velocity [19] Figure 16 shows a
flow simulation of the Benetech concept The simulation shows that this concept
will result in lower impact forces and reduce belt abrasion
The optimisation of transfer chutes in the bulk materials industry
MN van Aarde
16
CHAPTER 1
Figure 16 Flow simulation ofthe Benetech Ineliflo chute [19J
CBP Engineering Corp also considers the concept of pipe type sections to be
the answer to most of the transfer chute problems They describe it as a curved
or half round chute The modern perception is to gently guide the material in the
required direction rather than use a square box design or deflector doors which
turns or deflects the flow [20]
The industry is striving towards developing new technology in transfer chute
design One solution is to incorporate soft loading transfer chutes to alter the
material flow direction with minimum impact on the side walls of chute and
receiving conveyor As experienced by many industries these types of chutes
can transfer material onto the receiving conveyor at almost the same velocity as
the conveyor By doing so many of the problems with material transfer can be
eliminated [13]
Most of these solutions as proposed by industry only address a few of the
numerous problems experienced with transfer chutes The dynamic hood and
The optimisation of transfer chutes in the bulk materials industry
MN van Aarde
17
CHAPTER 1
spoon chute appears to afford the best opportunity for solving most of the
problems There are still however many unanswered questions surrounding this
design
Figure 11 shows the installation of a hood type chute in the iron ore industry It is
clear from this image that liner wear in the higher impact areas is still an area of
concern Improvements can still be made to this design in order to further
enhance its performance
14 PURPOSE OF THIS RESEARCH
The bulk materials handling industry is constantly facing the challenge of
implementing transfer chutes that satisfy all the system requirements Problems
such as high wear spillage blockages and the control of material flow are just
some of the major challenges faced by the industry
The objective of this research is to identify problems experienced with transfer
chutes of an existing bulk handling system and to apply current design solutions
in eliminating these problems In doing so the research aims to introduce a new
method of minimising liner wear caused by high impact velocities
Dynamic chutes are discussed in particular where the entire design process
addresses the problems identified on chutes in brown field projects Approaching
chute design from a maintenance point of view with the focus on reducing liner I
degradation will provide a fresh approach to transfer chute design The
concepts disc~ssed in this dissertation (dynamic and dead box chutes) are
commonly used in industry However some research is done to determine
whether a combination of these concepts can solve some of the problems
experienced by industry
The optimisation of transfer chutes in the bulk materials industry 18
MN van Aarde
CHAPTER 1
At the hand of all the information provided in this dissertation its purpose is to
enable the chute designers to better understand the process of chute
optimisation and design This is achieved through the discussion of a case study
where the chutes are evaluated and re-designed to achieve the desired
performance
15 SYNOPSIS OF THIS DISSERTATION
Chapter 1 gives an introduction to the bulk materials industry and the role that
transfer chutes plays in this industry Some of the problems that the industries
have been experiencing with transfer chutes were identified and the diverse
solutions to these problems discussed These solutions were reviewed to
identify whether improvement would be possible
Chapter 2 provides a better understanding of the functionality and the
conceptualisation of transfer chutes as well as investigating the theory behind
material flow through transfer chutes This theory reviews the research and
design objectives used as a guideline when approaching a new chute
configuration The guidelines for evaluating and designing transfer chutes are
used to verify the performance of these chutes in the iron ore industry
Chapter 3 identifies some practical problems experienced on transfer chutes a~
an existing bulk transfer facility These problems are identified through a series
of tests where the actual flow inside the chutes is monitored via CCTV cameras
The results obtained from these tests are specific to this facility but can provide
insight into the cause of some problems generally experienced in the industry
These results can provide helpful information when modifying or re-designing
new transfer chutes
Chapter 4 uses the theory discussed in Chapter 2 to conceptualise a new
transfer chute configuration for the transfer points that were tested All the facility
The optimisation of transfer chutes in the bulk materials industry 19
MN van Aarde
CHAPTER 1
constraints are taken into account during the process in order to obtain an
optimum solution to the problems identified during the chute test work The old
chutes did not have major problems with liner wear due to large dead boxes
However this remains a serious consideration for the new dynamic chute design
due to its configuration where there is continuous sliding abrasion of the chute
surface A new concept for the reduction of liner degradation is introduced in this
chapter
Before manufacturing and installing this new concept it is important to verify that
it will perform according to conceptual design Chapter 5 is a discussion on the
use of the Discrete Element Method as a verification tool A simulation of the
new transfer chute concept is done to visualise the behaviour of the material as it
passes through the new transfer chute configuration
Chapter 6 discusses the benefits of the new transfer chute configuration A
conclusion is made as to what the financial implications will be with the
implementation of this new concept Recommendations are made for future
studies in the field of bulk materials handling These recommendations focus on
the optimisation of processes and the reduction of maintenance cost to the
facility
The optimisation of transfer chutes in the bulk materials industry
MN van Aarde
20
CHAPTER 2
CHAPTER 2 BASIC CONSIDERATIONS IN CHUTE DESIGN
The optimisation of transfer chutes in the bulk materials industry
MN van Aarde
21
CHAPTER 2
21 PREFACE
In an economic driven world the pressure for production is often the cause of the
loss of production This is a bold statement and is more factual than what the
industry would like to admit This is also valid in the bulk materials handling
industry Production targets seldom allow time for investigation into the root
cause of the problems The quick fix option is often adopted but is frequently the
cause of even more maintenance stoppages
Existing chutes on brown field projects often fail due to an initial disregard for the
design criteria changes in the system parameters or lack of maintenance
These transfer points are often repaired on site by adding or removing platework
and ignoring the secondary functions of a transfer chute Therefore it is
imperative to always consider the basic chute specifications when addressing a
material transfer problem [21]
22 DESIGN OBJECTIVES
In the quest to improve or design any transfer point some ground rules must be
set This can be seen as a check list when evaluating an existing chute or
designing a new chute Transfer chutes should aim to meet the following
requirements as far as possible [21] [22] [23]
bull Ensure that the required capacity can be obtained with no risk of blockage
bull Eliminate spillage
bull Minimise wear on all components and provide the optimal value life cycle
solution
bull Minimise degradation of material and generation of excessive dust
bull Accommodate and transfer primary and secondary scraper dribblings onto
the receiving conveyor
The optimisation of transfer chutes in the bulk materials industry
MN van Aarde
22
CHAPTER 2
bull Ensure that any differences between the flow of fine and coarse grades are
catered for
bull Transfer material onto the receiving conveyor so that at the feed point onto
the conveyor
bull the component of the material now (parallel to the receiving conveydr) is as
close as possible to the belt velocity (at least within 10) to minimise the
power required to accelerate the material and to minimise abrasive wear of
the belt
bull the vertical velocity component of the material flow is as low as possible so
as to minimise wear and damage to the belt as well as to minimise spillage
due to material bouncing off the belt
bull The flow is centralised on the belt and the lateral flow is minimised so as
not to affect belt tracking and avoid spillage
With the design of a new chute there are up to 46 different design inputs with 19
of these being absolutely critical to the success of the design Some of the most
critical preliminary design considerations are shown in Table 1 [24]
The optimisation of transfer chutes in the bulk materials industry
MN van Aarde
23
CHAPTER 2
Table 1 Design Input Reference Requirements [24J
Aria Unit
Feed Conveyor
Belt Speed r ms
Belt Width mm
JibHead Pulley Dia mm
Pulley Width mm
Angle to Horizontal at the Head Pulley degrees
Belt Troughing Angle degrees
Sight Height Data
Feed Conveyor Top of Belt to Roof mm
Drop Height mm
Receiving Conveyor Top of Belt to Floor mm
Receiving Conveyor
Belt Speed ms
Belt Width mm
Belt Thickness mm
Angle of Intersection degrees
Angle to Horizontal degrees
Belt Troughing Angle degrees
Material Properties
Max Oversize Lump (on top) mm
Max Oversize Lump (on top) degrees
studies done by Jenike and Johanson Inc have identified six design principles
that can serve as a guideline in chute optimisation exercises These six
principles focus on the accelerated flow in the chute which they identified as the
most critical mode [25]
Within accelerated flow the six problem areas identified by Jenike and Johanson
Inc are [25]
The optimisation of transfer chufes in the bulk materials industry
MN van Aarde
24
CHAPTER 2
bull plugging of chutes at the impact points
bull insufficient cross sectional area
bull uncontrolled flow of material
bull excessive wear on chute surfaces
bull excessive generation of dust
bull attrition or breakdown of particles
221 Plugging of chutes
In order to prevent plugging inside the chute the sliding surface inside the chute
must be sufficiently smooth to allow the material to slide and to clean off the most
frictional bulk solid that it handles This philosophy is particularly important
where the material irnpacts on a sliding surface Where material is prone to stick
to a surface the sliding angle increases proportionally to the force with which it
impacts the sliding surface In order to minimise material velocities and excessive
wear the sliding surface angle should not be steeper than required [25]
222 Insufficient cross sectional area
The cross section of the stream of material inside the chute is a function of the
velocity of flow Therefore it is critical to be able to calculate the velocity of the
stream of material particles at any point in the chute From industry experience a
good rule of thumb is that the cross section of the chute should have at least two
thirds of its cross section open at the lowest material velocity [25] When the
materialis at its lowest velocity it takes up a larger cross section of chute than at
higher velocities Therefore this cross section is used as a reference
223 Uncontrolled flow of material
Due to free falling material with high velocities excessive wear on chutes and
conveyor belt surfaces are inevitable Therefore it is more advantageous to
The optimisation of transfer chutes in the bulk materials industry
MN van Aarde
25
CHAPTER 2
have the particles impact the hood as soon as possible with a small impact
angle after discharge from the conveyor With the material flowing against the
sloped chute walls instead of free falling the material velocity can be controlled
more carefully through the chute [25]
224 Excessive wear on chute surfaces
Free flowing abrasive materials do not normally present a large wear problem
The easiest solution to this problem is to introduce rock boxes to facilitate
material on material flow Chute surfaces that are subjected to fast flowing
sticky and abrasive materials are the most difficult to design
A solution to this problem is to keep the impact pressure on the chute surface as
low as possible This is done by designing the chute profile to follow the material
trajectory path as closely as possible By doing so the material is less prone to
stick to the chute surface and the material velocity will keep the chute surface
clean [25]
225 Excessive generation of dust
Material flowing inside a transfer chute causes turbulence in the air and
excessive dust is created In order to minimise the amount of dust the stream of
material must be kept in contact with the chute surface as far as possible The
material stream must be compact and all impact angles against the chute walls
must be minimised A compact stream of material means that the material
particles are flowing tightly together At the chute discharge point the material
velocity must be as close as possible to the velocity of the receiving belt [25]
The optimisation of transfer in the bulk materials industry
M N van Aarde
26
CHAPTER 2
226 Attrition or breakdown of particles
The break up of particles is more likely to occur when large impact forces are
experienced inside a chute than on smooth sliding surfaces Therefore in most
cases the attrition of material particles can be minimised by considering the
following guidelines when designing a transfer chute minimise the material
impact angles concentrate the stream of material keep the material stream in
contact with the chute surface and keep the material velocity constant as far as
possible [25]
23 INTEGRATING A MORE APPROPRIATE CHUTE LAYOUT WITH THE PLANT
CONSTRAINTS
According to Tunra Bulk Solids in Australia the process for design and
commissioning of a new plant basically consists of four steps The entire
process is based on understanding the properties of the material to be
handled [1]
RampD CENTRE CONSULTING CONTRACTOR ENGINEERING AND PLANT
COMPANY OPERATOR r-------------- I TESTING Of CONCEPTUAl I DETAILED DESIGN CONSTRUCTION amp
I BULKSOUDS - DESIGN COMMISSIONING- I shyI Flow Proper1ies Lining Material tuet Equipment
Selection Procurement _ I I
I I
I Flow Pat1erns SSlpment Quality Control I
I IFeeder Loads amp Process Performance
I Power I Optimisation Assessment I I
L J -
I IBin Loads I I I Wear Predictions I
FEEDBACK I I I IModel Studigt L _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ J
i ~ FEEDBACK r-shyFigure 17 Four step process for plant design and commissioning [1J
The optimisation of transfer chutes in the bulk materials industry
MN van Aarde
27
CHAPTER 2
Figure 17 illustrates this four step process These steps are a good guideline in
order to incorporate a more appropriate chute layout for the plant constraints
This is an iterative process where all the possible solutions to a problem are
measured against all the possible plant constraints This section focuses more
on the second column of Figure 17 and specifically on structures and equipment
During this stage of design the utilisation of 3D parametric modelling also creates
an intimate and very accurate communication between the designer and the
project engineer or client This effective communication tool will save time and
improve the engineering process [24]
A good example of obtaining an appropriate chute layout for the plant constraints
can be explained as follows On an existing plant a transfer point will have a
specific transfer height from the top of the feed conveyor to the top of the
receiving conveyor If the feed conveyor has an incline section to obtain the
required transfer height it will also have a curve in the vertical plane of that
incline section This curve has a certain minimum radius in order to keep the belt
on the idlers at high belt tensions [26]
Figure 18 Vertical curve on incline conveyor
The optimisation of transfer chutes in the bulk materials industry
MN van Aarde
28
CHAPTER 2
If the transfer height at a transfer point is changed the path of the feeding
conveyor should always be taken into consideration With an increase in transfer
height the vertical curve radius will increase as well in order to prevent the
conveyor from lifting off the idlers in the curve This will require expensive
modifications to conveyor structures and therefore in most cases be a pointless
exercise Figure 18 shows clearly the large radius required to obtain a vertical
curve in a belt conveyor
Other considerations on brown field projects might be lift off of the receiving
conveyor at start up before or after the vertical curve This is caused by peaks
in belt tension at start up which may cause the belt to lift off the idlers and chafe
against the chute In some cases this can be solved by fitting a roller as shown
in Figure 19 to the underside of the chute to protect it from being damaged by
the belt or to protect the belt from being damaged by the chute The position of
this specific chute is just after a vertical curve where the belt tends to lift off at
start up
Figure 19 Protective roller on a transfer chute
The optimisation of transfer chutes in the bulk materials industry
MN van Aarde
29
CHAPTER 2
24 INVESTIGATING THE CORRECT CHUTE PROFILE FOR REDUCED LINER WEAR
In order to reduce chute wear the curved-profile variable chute concept is
introduced [27] This concept was originally developed by Professor Roberts for
the grain industry in 1969 [28] After many years of research and investigation
CMR Engineers and Project managers (pty) Ltd came to the following
conclusion any improvement in coal degradation dust generation and chute
wear can only be achieved by avoiding high impact forces or reducing them as
much as possible [27]
At any impact point of material in a chute or conveyor kinetic energy is
dissipated This increases material degradation and wear on liners and conveyor
belt covers Therefore it is good practise to redirect the kinetic energy in a
useful manner This action will help to reduce liner and belt wear [32]
x
Vo
- ImpactPlate
Figure 20 Geometry of the impact plate and material trajectory [30J
The optimisation of transfer chutes n the bulk materials industry
MN van Aarde
30
CHAPTER 2
The path followed by the material discharged over the end pulley of a belt
conveyor is known as its trajectory and is a function of the discharge velocity of
the material from the conveyor [29] Figure 20 shows the material trajectory as
weI as the radius and location of the impact plate In the case of dynamic chutes
this impact plate represents the back plate of the chute
The correct chute profile to reduce wear must cater for the proper location of the
chute covers and wearing plates This location depends upon the path of the
trajectory which must be predicted as accurately as possible
Figure 21 Mode for the impact of a particle on a flat surface [29]
Figure 21 illustrates a material particle impinging on a flat chute surface at an
angle of approach 91 and with approach velocity V1 This particle will then
rebound off the chute plate at an angel 92 and velocity V2 The wear on the
chute liners or the surface shown in Figure 21 will be a function of the vector
change in momentum of the particle One component will be normal to and the
other component parallel to the flat surface The parallel component is referred
to as the scouring component along the surface [29]
It is important to determine the radius of curvature of material within the
trajectory It is now a simple exercise to determine the chute hood radius
depending on plant constraints Firstly the material trajectory must be calculated
The optimisation of transfer chutes in the bulk materials industry
MN van Aarde
31
CHAPTER 2 ---~----------------
According to the mechanical handling engineers association in Perth Australia it
is beneficial to keep the impact angle as small as possible Impact angle less
than 20deg are recommended for most liner materials This will ensure an
acceptably small impulse force component normal to the surface The r~te at
which the material is gouging away the chute liner at the impact point will be
reduced [29]
The material trajectory is determined by equation l
(1)
Where the origin of the x and y axis is taken at the mean material height h and
the discharge point on the pulley as shown in Figure 20 The variables involved
in the calculation of the material trajectory are [30]
y =vertical position on the grid where the trajectory is determined
x = position parallel to the receiving belt line where the trajectory is determined
v = material speed
g =gravitational constant
a =inclination angle of the feeding conveyor
After the material leaves the belt a simplified assumption can be made that it
falls under gravity It is quite clear that in order to minimise the impact angle
the impact plate must follow the path of the material trajectory as far as possible
It will almost never be possible to obtain a contact point between the material and
the chute where there is a smooth contact with no impact angle
This radius of curvature of the material tr~jectory is determined as follows [30
The optimisation of transfer chutes in the bulk materials industry i 32
MN van Aarde
CHAPTER 2
[1 + ( gx )]15 R = vcos8
c (2)
vcos8
Where
g == gravitational constant
v == material speed
8 == Angle at discharge
In order to simplify the manufacturing process of a curved chute the radius must
be constant For a relatively smooth contact between the material and the chute
plate the radius of the curved chute at the point of contact is as close as
possible to the material discharge curvature radius [30] This is rarely possible
on brown field projects due to facility constraints In this case there will be higher
probability for rapid liner wear Each situation must be individually assessed to
determine the best solution
Cross sectional dimensions of the transfer chute must be sufficient to collect the
material and ensure continuous flow without causing blockages At the same
time the chute profile must not result in excessive material speed Material
speed inside the chute will be considered to be excessive when it can not be
controlled to exit the chute at approximately the same velocity to that of the
receiving conveyor Chutes may block for the following reasons [29]
bull Mechanical bridging due to large lumps locking into one another
bull Insufficient cross section causing cohesive material to choke or bridge
bull Inadequate chute inclination causing fines build-up
bull Corner effects or cohesion causing material to stick to the chute walls
The optimisation of transfer chutes in the bulk materials industry
MN van Aarde
33
CHAPTER 2
For the handling of large lumps of material field experience has shown that the
chute cross sectional area should be 25 times the major dimension of the largest
lumps To avoid possible bridging of the material in the chute the
recommendation is to make the inner chute volume as large as possible This
will be guided by the support steelwork around the transfer point [29]
Field experience has shown that it is advisable depending on the material being
transferred that the chute inclination angles be no less than 65deg to 700 Cornerbull
effects should also be avoided where material gets stuck in the inner corners of
chute plate work These angles should preferably be no less than 70 0 bull
25 FEED CHUTE GEOMETRY FOR REDUCED BELT WEAR
The design parameters to reduce both chute and belt wear are interrelated
Research done at the Phalaborwa copper mine is a good case study to prove the
concept of a curved chute profile This mine had specific problems with high belt
wear at transfer points At this facility an in-pit 60 x 89 gyratory crusher and
incline tunnel conveyor was commissioned to haul primary crushed ore A
conventional dead box chute transfers ore from the crusher to a 1800 mm wide
incline conveyor [31]
The maximum lump size handled by this section of the facility is 600 mm (60 kg)
An 18 mm thick top cover was specified for this conveyor with an X grade
rubber according to DIN (abrasion value lt 100 mm) This belt had an original
warranty of 10 years After 35 years the top cover started to show signs of
excessive wear and the tensile cords of the 18 mm thick cover were visible [31]
In April 1994 Phalaborwa commissioned the curved chute concept and a new
belt on the incline conveyor Six months after commissioning no gouging or
pitting damage was evident The material velocity through this curved chute onto
the incline conveyor is shown in Figure 22 [31]
The optimisation of transfer chutes in the bulk materials industry
MN van Aarde
34
CHAPTER 2
VELOCITY ( m I aec ) _ nm _ bull m _ 1211 _ UTI _ U16
_ IIU _ Im _ I rn _ 171-111 _ u n _ ~ l
_ 4 ~
_ 41 _ 4
141 CJ UtiI 1bull-bull 1t5
~ 1m bull UI2
Material Flow Velocity Gradient
Figure 22 Ore flow path in the curved chute onto the incline conveyor [31]
TENDENCY TO FORM STAGNANT LAYER LEADING
TO INSTABILITY IN DEPTH OF FLOW
C8middotFLOW IN CURVED CHUTES
Figure 23 Gentle deceleration of the product before impact on the receiving belt [32]
The optimisation of transfer chutes in the bulk materials industry
MN van Aarde
35
CHAPTER 2
Figure 23 illustrates the gentle deceleration of material that is achieved with the
curved chute concept This helps to reduce belt wear because it is relatively
easy to discharge the material at the same velocity as the receiving conveyor
The material speed v can be calculated at any point in the chute using equation
3 and equation 4 [33]
v 2~R [(2ue2 -l)sin(O) +3ue cos(O)] + Ke 2uB (3) 4ue +1
This equation is only applicable if the curved section of the chute has a constant
radius Rand I-Ie is assumed constant at an average value for the stream [33]
I-Ie = friction coefficient
8 = angle between the horizontal and the section of the spoon where the velocity
is determined and
(4)
The optimisation of transfer chutes in the bulk materjas industry
MN van Aarde
36
CHAPTER 2
Mass Flow Rate Omh
Figure 24 Typical feed chute discharge model [33J
The velocity Ve at the discharge of the chute can be determined from equation 3
and equation 4 The components Vey and Vex of the discharge velocity as
shown in Figure 24 can now be calculated This investigation should aid the
optimisation of the chute profile in order to [33]
bull match the horisontal component Vex of the material exit velocity as close
as possible to the belt speed
bull reduce the vertical component Vey of the material exit velocity in order to
minimize abrasive wear on the receiving conveyor
26 CONCLUSION
This section discussed the technical background necessary for the optimisation
of transfer chutes on an existing iron ore plant which will be discussed in
Chapter 4 The focus is specifically aimed at reducing impact wear on chute liner
materials and abrasive wear on receiving conveyor belts Important to note from
The optimisation oftransfer chutes in the bulk materials industry
MN van Aarde
37
CHAPTER 2
this section is the acceptable limits of dynamic chute optimisation or design
These limits aremiddot
bull a material impact angle of less than 20deg
bull a variance of less than 10 between the receiving belt velocity and the
material discharge velocity component parallel to the receiving conveyor
An important aspect of chute optimisation is to consider the facility constraints
These constraints are in some cases flexible but in most cases the chute
optimisation process must be designed within these constraints This means that
any new concept will have to be measured against what is possible within the
facility limits
It is important to note that only the most common transfer chute problems were
mentioned in this chapter Other possible problems were not addressed in this
chapter as it is normally related to detail design issues Solutions to these
problems are unique to each type of chute and will be addressed for the specific
case study in Chapter 4
The optimisafjon of transfer chutes in the bulk materials industry
MN van Aarde
38
CHAPTER 3
The optimisation of transfer chutes in the bulk materials industry
MN van Aarde
CHAPTER 3 TESTS FOR THE IDENTIFICATION OF RECURRING
PROBLEMS ON EXISTING CHUTES
39
CHAPTER 3
31 PREFACE
Since the completion of a certain iron ore handling facility it has been
experiencing recurring material transfer problems at high capacities In order to
investigate the problem it was decided that performance testing of the chutes
should be carried out The purpose of these tests was to monitor chute
performance at transfer rates of up to the design capacity of 10 000 tlh for
various grades of iron ore handled by the facility Some of the methodologies
used in testing are only applicable to this specific facility
Due to variations and surges associated with the reclaim operations at the
facility performance testing focused on reclaim side chutes This means that all
the transfer points at the exit points of the stockyard conveyors were tested
Nineteen tests were conducted on various stockyard transfers Information such
as the specific facility or conveyor numbers cannot be disclosed due to the
confidentiality of information
To analyse SCADA data the stacker reclaimer scale is used to determine the
peak surges passing through the transfer under investigation The reason for
this is that the peaks in flow due to reclaiming operations flatten out when
passing through the transfer points This is due to chute throat limitations and
small variations in belt speeds If the down stream scales are used it would give
an inaccurate indication of the amount of ore that passed through the transfer
chute
32 TEST METHODOLOGY
A CCTV camera was installed in a strategic position inside the head chute of the
stockyard conveyors These cameras provided valuable information on the
physical behaviour of the material flow inside the transfer chutes Where
possible cameras were also placed on the receiving belt in front of and behind
The optimisation of transfer chutes in the bulk materials industry
MN van Aarde
40
CHAPTER 3
the chute This was done to monitor belt tracking and spillage A high frequency
radio link between the head chute and the control tower made it possible to
monitor the cameras at all times
SCADA data was used to determine and establish the condition of the material
transfer at the time of the test Data from various scales en route were obtained
as well as confirmation of blocked chute signals In analysing the SCADA data
the stacker reclaimer scale is used to determine the peak surges passing through
the transfer being tested
Data was recorded from a sampling plant at the facility This data provides the
actual characteristics of representative samples taken and analysed by the
sampling plant during the duration of the test The data gathered consist of
moisture content of the material sample as well as the size distribution of the ore
Where possible an inspector was placed at the transfer point being tested to
observe and record the performance The inspector had a two way radio for
communication with the test co-ordinator in the central control room He would
also be responsible for the monitoring of any spillage dust emissions etc that
may not be picked up by the cameras
Prior to commencing a test on a specific conveyor route the following checks
had to be performed on all the material conveying equipment
bull Clean out all transfer chutes and remove any material build-up from the
sidewalls
bull Check that feed skirts are properly in position on the belt
bull Check that the conveyor belt is tracking properly at no load
bull Check conveyor idlers are all in position and free to rotate
bull Check blocked chute detectors are operational and in the correct location
The optimisation of transfer chutes in the bulk materials industry
MN van Aarde
CHAPTER 3
bull Change the position of the blocked chute detector if required to improve its
fUnction
bull Test and confirm that the CCTV middotsystems are functioning correctly
bull Assign persons with 2 way radios and cameras to monitor and record the I
results at each transfer point on the route
33 CHUTE PERFORMANCE ACCEPTANCE CRITERIA
A material transfer chute performs to specification if it transfers a maximum of
10 000 tlh of a specific iron are grade without experiencing any of the following
problems
bull Material build up inside the chute or blocking the chute ie material is not
exiting the chute at the same rate as it is entering
bull Material spillage encountered from the top of the transfer chute
bull Material spillage encountered where material is loaded onto the receiving
conveyor
bull Belt tracking of the receiving conveyor is significantly displaced by the
loading of material from the transfer chute onto the conveyor
Tests were conducted over a period of one month and in such a short period
visible wear is difficult to quantify Due to the sensitivity of the information no
historical data in terms of chute or belt wear were made available by the facility
Therefore it is not part of the criteria for these specific tests Should a chute
however fail to perform according to the set criteria it validates the need for
modifications or new designs
34 DISCUSSION OF PROBLEM AREAS
The major concern during the test work is material flow at the transfer points
Secondary concerns are spillage tracking of the receiving belt and material
The optimisation of transfer chutes in the bulk materials industry
MN van Aarde
42
CHAPTER 3
loading onto the receiving belt One of the external factors that playa significant
role in material flow rate is the method and process of reclaiming This section
will highlight all the problem areas observed during the test work
Figure 25 shows the layout of the stockyard area This layout will serve as a
reference when the specific test results at each transfer point are discussed The
legends for Figure 25 are as follows
c=gt Transfer points where performance tests have been done
~ Direction that the conveyors are moving in
CV4 CV3 CV2 CV1
Figure 25 Layout of conveyors for chute test work
All four stockyard conveyors have a moving head arrangement This means that
the chutes are split up into two sections A moving head discharges material
onto either conveyor (CV) 5 or CV 6 via a static transfer chute The moving
head positions are shown by A Band C in Figure 25
The optimisation of transfer chutes in the bulk materials industry
MN van Aarde
43
CHAPTER 3
Position C is the purging or dump position This position is used when the
stacker reclaimer is in stacking mode and any material left on the stockyard
conveyor gets dumped The material does not end up on the stockpiles
preventing contamination
90 de-g TRANSFBt
OfAO BOX IN MOVING HEAD
Figure 26 Configuration of the existing transfer chute
Figure 26 shows the configuration of the existing transfer chutes These chutes
capture the trajectory from the head pulley in a dead box situated in the top part
of the chute The material then cascades down a series of smaller dead boxes
onto the receiving conveyor below
Various grades of iron ore were tested during the testing period These different
grades of iron ore are shown in Table 2 Three fine grades and four coarse
grades were used The coarse material is defined as particles with a diameter of
The optimisation of transfer chutes in the bulk materials industry
MN van Aarde
44
CHAPTER 3
between 12 mm and 34 mm and the fine material with diameters of between
4 mm and 12 mm
Table 2 Iron are grades used for chute test work
Material Predominant Lump Size
Fine K 5mm
Fine N 8mm
Fine A 8mm
Coarse K 25mm
Coarse D 34mm
Coarse S 12 mm
Coarse A 20mm
The CCTV cameras were placed inside the moving head pointing down into the
static chute overlooking the receiving conveyor Figure 27 shows the camera
angle used during testing This is a view of a clear chute before testing The
legends for clarification of all the video images are as follows
Front of the chute throat opening
Top of flowing material at the chute throat opening
Flow pattern of the material
Direction of the receiving belt
The optimisation of transfer chutes in the bulk materials industry
MN van Aarde
45
CHAPTER 3
Figure 27 Clear chute indicating camera angle
341 Coarse Material vs Fine Material
Differences in transfer rates between coarse material and fine material are
evident from the data gathered during the test programme These results are
discussed later in this chapter The area between the yellow arrows and the red
line is the amount of freeboard available Freeboard is the open space available
between the top of the flowing stream of material and the chute plate work
Figure 28 and Figure 29 shows the flow of coarse ore and fine ore respectively in
the same chute at 8 000 tlh
Figure 28 Coarse material at 8 000 tlh
The optimisation of transfer chutes in the bulk materials industry
MN van Aarde
46
CHAPTER 3
Figure 29 Fine material at 8 000 tlh
The amount of freeboard with fine material is much larger than with coarse
material It is therefore obvious that coarse material is more likely to block a
chute when peak surges occur This is due to particles that interlock in the small
discharge opening of the chute
Figure 30 Blocked chute with coarse material at 8 600 tIh
Figure 30 is a snap shot of a chute blocked with coarse ore due to the material
interlocking at the discharge opening The time from material free flowing to a
blocked chute signal was approximately 10 seconds This is determined by
comparing the CCTV camera time to the blocked signal time on the SCADA
The optimisation of transfer chutes in the bulk materials industry
MN van Aarde
47
CHAPTER 3
The high clay content in finer material can also cause problems in the long run
When wet Anes are fed through the chutes a thin layer of Anes builds up and
sticks to the sides of the chute As this layer dries out it forms a new chute liner i
and the next layer builds up This process occurs gradually and will eventually
cause the chute to block
342 Cross Sectional Area
Video images of a blocked chute on the receiving belts were analysed to
determine whether the blockage was caused by material build up on the belt
underneath the chute This indicated that with the occurrence of a blocked chute
the material keeps flowing out of the chute at a constant rate without build up
From this the assumption can be made that in the case of a blocked chute the
material enters the chute at a higher rate than it is discharged at the bottom
Therefore the conclusion can be made that the chute cross sectional area at the
discharge is insufficient to handle the volume of ore at high throughput rates
Tests with a certain type of coarse material yielded a very low flow rate requiring
adjustment to the chute choke plate on the transfer between CV 3 and CV 5
The chute choke plate is basically a sliding door at the bottom of the chute to
adjust the discharge flow of material Tests with another type of coarse material
shown in the summary of test results indicates how the choke plate adjustment
can increase the throughput of material in the chute
Data of all the different types of ore at the facility are obtained at the sampling
building This data shows that the material size distribution for the two types of
coarse material used in the tests mentioned above are the same This indicates
that the test results with the second coarse material are an accurate reflection of
what will be experienced with the first type of coarse material Special care
The optimisation of transfer chutes in the bulk materials industry
MN van Aarde
48
CHAPTER 3
should be taken when adjusting the choke plate to make sure that skew loading
is not induced by the modification
343 Spillag3
During one of the first tests on the transfer between CV 2 and CV 6 spillage
was observed at one of the side skirts on the receiving belt A piece of the side
skirt had been damaged and pushed off the belt as shown by Figure 31 This
caused some of the material to be pushed off the belt when skew loading from
the chute caused the belt to miss track In this case spillage was not caused by
the skirt but by skew loading from the chute onto the receiving conveyor
Figure 31 Damaged side skirt
A greater concern is spillage on the moving head chute of CV 3 and CV 4
loading onto CV 6 It appears as if the head chute creeps during material
transfer onto CV 6 As the chute creeps the horizontal gap between the
moving head chute and the transfer chute reaches approximately 180 mm
Facility operations proposed a temporary solution by moving the head chute to
the dumping or purging position and back to CV 5 before stopping over CV 6
The reason for this creep could be attributed to slack in the moving head winch
cable
The optimisation of transfer chutes in the bulk materials industry
MN van Aarde
49
CHAPTER 3
345 Belt Tracking and Material Loading
The only belt tracking and material loading problems observed occurred on the
transfer between CV 2 and CV 5 I CV 6 A diverter plate was installed at the
bottom of the chute in order to force material flow onto the centre of the receiving conveyor belt This plate now causes material to fall to the left of the receiving
belt causing the belt to track to the right
Figure 32 View behind the chute of the receiving conveyor before loading
Figure 32 shows the view from a CCTV camera placed over the receiving
conveyor behind the chute Note the amount of the idler roller that is visible
before loading
Figure 33 View behind the chute of the receiving conveyor during loading
The optimisation of transfer chutes in the bulk materials industry
MN van Aarde
50
CHAPTER 3
Figure 33 shows the view from a CCTV camera placed over the receiving
conveyor behind the chute during loading Note the difference between the
amount of the idler roller that is visible between Figure 33 and Figure 32 This is
a clear indication of off centre belt tracking due to skew loading I
At the same transfer point it appears as if the configuration of the chute causes
the material to be dropped directly onto the receiving belt from the dead box in
the moving head This will cause high impact wear on the belt in the long run
High maintenance frequencies will be required on the impact rollers underneath
the chute and the roller bearings will have to be replaced frequently
346 Reclaiming Operations
Reclaim operations are done from the stacker reclaimer that scoops up the
material with a bucket wheel from the stockpile The machine starts at the top
bench of the stockpile and reclaims sideways until it is through the stockpile
This sideways movement is repeated while the machine moves down the
stockpile If the machine digs too deep into the stockpile small avalanches can
occur that over fill the buckets This causes peak surges in the flow on the
conveyor system
With an increase in the peak digging or reclaim rate as requested for test work it
seemed that the peak surges increased as well In normal reclaiming operations
(average reclaim rate of 6 000 tlh to 7000 tlh) the peaks in reclaim surges do not
usually exceed 1 000 tlh This is however dependent on the level of the
stockpile from where the machine is reclaiming
At a peak digging or reclaim rate of 8 000 tlh peak surges of up to 2 000 tlh were
observed as can be seen from Figure 34 All stacker reclaimers are operated
manually and the depth of the bucket wheel is determined by monitoring the
The optimisation of transfer chutes in the bulk materials industry
MN van Aarde
51
CHAPTER 3
reclaimer boom scale reading (yellow line) This makes it difficult to reclaim at a
constant rate
The reason for the high peak surges is due to avalanches on the stockpile
caused by reclaiming on the lower benches without first taking away the top
material The blue line in Figure 34 represents a conveyor scale reading after
the material has passed through a series of transfer chutes It is clear that the
peaks tend to dissipate over time as the peaks on the blue line are lower and
smoother than that on the yellow line
IlmJ
bull I _ bull It bull bull bull bull
--ErI--E--~---h--E=+[J]--EiE ~ J~~~ middot middot -~L I-~f~1-1shyt~=tt~~J~~v5 i ~ ~ ~ ~ ~ i ~ 1 ~ ~ ~ s ~ ------ ~-- - ------ - _ - -------- -- -- - _---- -- -r - --- -_shyp
C)
~ 1r =r=l[=1 -It-1 -- -~ -t= --shy~ _middotmiddot -r middotr middot middot [middot _r _ _ r- middotmiddot rmiddot middotmiddot -r- rmiddot-- middot- middotmiddot -rmiddot -r-middotmiddot middotr lXgtO middotmiddotmiddotmiddotmiddotmiddotmiddotmiddot[middotmiddotmiddotmiddotmiddotmiddotmiddotlmiddotmiddotmiddotmiddotmiddotmiddotlmiddotmiddotmiddotmiddotmiddotmiddotmiddotmiddotimiddotmiddotmiddotmiddotmiddotmiddotmiddotmiddotr-middotmiddotmiddotmiddot j middotmiddot1middotmiddotmiddotmiddotmiddot1middotmiddotmiddotmiddotmiddotmiddotmiddot1middotmiddotmiddotmiddotmiddot middotlmiddotmiddotmiddotmiddottmiddotmiddotmiddotmiddotmiddotmiddotmiddotjmiddot I~ [ bullbullbullbullbullbullbull [ bullbullbull middotmiddotmiddot1middotmiddotmiddotmiddotmiddotmiddot1middotmiddotmiddotmiddotmiddotmiddotmiddotmiddot1middotmiddotmiddotmiddotmiddotmiddotmiddotmiddot middotmiddotmiddotmiddotmiddotmiddotmiddotmiddoti~middotmiddotmiddotmiddotmiddotmiddotmiddotmiddottmiddotmiddotmiddotmiddotmiddotmiddotmiddotrmiddotmiddotmiddot middotrmiddotmiddotmiddotmiddotmiddotmiddot~middotmiddotmiddotmiddotmiddotmiddotmiddotmiddot1middotmiddotmiddotmiddotmiddotmiddotmiddotmiddotimiddotmiddotmiddot
t) cent
~ i i l i i i i i i i it ~ 8 ~ ~ S l i
~~ Ii ~ ~ g i i ~ 4 1 J yen i
s a e 11 JI as $ $ ~ IS IS e It
Time
-Con~SCO=-E___S~ SCALE
Figure 34 Peak surges experienced during reclaiming operations
347 Other Problem Areas
Some blockages on other chutes at the facility occurred while testing the
stockyard chutes These blockages are also shown in Table 3 where the test
The optimisation of transfer chutes in the bulk materials industry
MN van Aarde
52
CHAPTER 3
results are discussed and to raise awareness that the bottlenecks on site are not
only caused by problems on the tested chutes
A chute downstream from the stockyards encountered a blockage with fine I
material when the flow rate reached 11 OOb tfh Although this is higher than the
test maximum of 10 000 tfh it still raises concern as to why the chute blocked so
severely that it took approximately two hours to clear
Another bottleneck is the transfer point between the feed conveyor of CV 2 and
the discharge chute on CV 2 This transfer point blocked with fine material at a
peak just below 10 000 tfh It should be even worse with coarse are as
previously discussed Due to the configuration of the head chute spillage of
scraper dribblings is also of great concern The main stream of material
interferes with the flow path of the dribbling material Therefore the carry back
scraped off the bottom of the feeding belt cannot i~ow down the chute and is
pushed over the sides of the chute
The optimisation of transfer chutes in the bulk maferias industry
MN van Aarde
53
CHAPTER 3
35 SUMMARY OF TEST RESULTS
Table 3 Results from test programme
Transfer Point Material Tested Test No Peak Capacity Blocked Chute
CV11 CV5 Yes
Fines N 14 10000 tlh No
Fines N 15 10000tlh No
CV 11 CV6 Coarse K 20 9300 tlh No
Fines K 4 10600tlh No
Fines A 19 9633 tlh No
CV31 CV5 Yes
Yes
Yes
Coarse A 17 9427 tlh No
CV31 CV6 Coarse K 7 10195t1h Yes
Coarse K 8 11 000 tlh Yes
CV41 CV5 Coarse A 16 10307 tlh No
No (Mech trip on
CV4CV6 Fines K 10 10815 tlh downstream conveyor)
Coarse K 11 8000 tlh No
Fines A 18 10328 tlh No
No (Feed to CV 2
CV21 CV5 Fines N 13 10 000 tlh blocked)
CV21 Coarse K 1 amp 2 10 153 tlh No
No (Blocked chute on
Fines K 3 11 000 tlh downstream transfer)
The optimisation of transfer chutes in the bulk materials industry
MN van Aarde
54
CHAPTER 3
Table 3 shows the results obtained from all the tests on the stockyard conveyor
discharge chutes Where possible the same material grade was tested more
than once on the same transfer in order to confirm the repetitiveness of the test
The tests shown in red indicate the transfers that blocked at a flow rate of less
than 10000 tlh
Coarse K and Coarse 0 are noted as the critical materials for blocked chutes
caused by a peak surge Tests with Coarse K and Coarse S where a blocked
chute occurred at just over 10 000 tlh can also be considered as failed tests
This is due to the lack of a safety margin freeboard inside the chute When
analysing the video images a build up can be seen at a flow rate of less than
10000 tlh
Table 3 indicates that the fine material did not cause blocked chutes but it was
seen that it did fill up the chute throat area in some cases Although the coarse
material grades are shown as being least suitable for high flow rates the fine
material should not be underestimated for its ability to cause blockages The
finer materials normally have higher clay contents than the coarse grades and
therefore stick to the chute walls more easily_
36 CONCLUSION
At lower capacities (7 000 tlh to 8 000 tlh) the material appear to flow smoothly
inside the chutes without surging or building up in the chute This flow rate
normally does not cause spillage or skew loading on the receiving conveyor belt
On average as the flow rate approaches 9 000 tlh the material in the chute
throat area starts packing together and finally blocks up the chute
At transfer rates greater than 9 000 tlh the available area inside the chutes is
completely filled up This causes material to build up or surge inside the chute
which eventually results in the chute choking and the inlet flow becomes greater
The optimisation of transfer chutes in the bulk materials industry
MN van Aarde
55
CHAPTER 3
than the outlet flow Depending on the volume of the chute the choked state can
only be maintained for a certain period of time If the inlet flow does not
decrease it will cause a blocked chute
Peak surges of up to 10 000 tfh were recorded in most tests which involved a
material surge inside the chute but without the occurrence of a blocked chute trip
Although no blocked chute signal was given in these cases the ability of the
chutes to transfer continuously at flow rates of between 9 000 tfh and 10 000 tfh
is not very reliable
Continuous transfer at flow rates approaching 9 000 tfh seems attainable in most
cases but due to the limited freeboard available in the chute throat area the
chutes will easily become prone to blocking Due to the high peak surges at an
increased maximum reclaim rate the amount of freeboard is critical If the
design criteria of the chute were intended to accommodate these large surges
then all the chutes failed this test This can be attributed to the fact that no
freeboard is left at a maximum reclaim rate of 9 000 tfh
With the background available from the test programme it is clear that further
investigation is required to obtain a solution to these problems All the
information gathered can be integrated and utilised to provide a solution A
possible solution can then be tested against the problems found with the current
transfer chutes
The optimisation of transfer chutes in the bulk materials industry
MN van Aarde
56
CHAPTER 4
CHAPTER 4 DYNAMIC CHUTES FOR THE ELIMINATION OF
RECURRING PROBLEMS
The optimisation of transfer chutes in the bulk materials industry
MN van Aarde
57
CHAPTER 4
41 PREFACE
After completion of the chute test programme the decision was made to improve
the old transfer configuration by installing a dynamic chute The reason for the
dynamic chute is to increase the material speed and decrease the stream cross
sectional area The dead boxes in the older chute slowed the material down and
the restriction on transfer height resulted in the material not being able to gain
enough speed after impacting on the dead boxes
A dynamic chute configuration is investigated in this chapter As the new chute
is fitted within the existing steelwork there are certain constraints that determine
the new configuration All the constraints and limitations discussed in this section
are specific to the facility under discussion
The new chute design basically consists of a hood and spoon which retains the
kinetic energy in the material stream as it is transferred from one conveyor to the
other This will reduce the creation of dust in the chute and help to discharge the
material at a velocity closer to that of the receiving conveyor The new design
does however experience high wear which was not a problem with the old chutes
due to large dead boxes
In order to fit the optimum design of a dynamic chute within the existing structure
some changes are required to the positioning of the feed conveyor head pulley
These changes are necessary to accommodate the discharge trajectory from the
feeding conveyor
The radii of the hood and spoon are specified in such a way that the impact wear
is reduced significantly In addition both the hood and spoon are fitted with a
removable dead box section in the impact zones The incorporation of these
sections makes this chute revolutionary in the sense of ease of maintenance
The optimisation of transfer chutes in the bulk materials industry
MN van Aarde
58
CHAPTER 4
This new chute addresses all problems identified at the facility and aims to
eliminate most of them
Tests were carried out to identify worst case materials for flow and wear
Different liner materials were tested for both flow and wear conditions The
outcome of these tests is used as the basis for the design of a new chute As
different conditions for flow and wear inside the chute exist different liners are
investigated for each section inside the chute
42 CONSIDERATION OF THE EXISTING TRANSFER POINT CONSTRAINTS
The stockyard consists of four stacker reclaimers and several transfer points
feeding onto the two downstream conveyors resulting in a very intricate system
This system has numerous requirements which need to be addressed when
considering a new transfer chute configuration The transfers under discussion
are situated at the head end of the stockyard conveyors
MOV1NG HEAD OER MOvm poundAD OVER CVI6 CVIS
t4CLIE SECTION
PURGING POSmON
Figure 35 Stockyard head end layout
The design of a new transfer chute configuration is restricted to a certain extent
by the existing structures on site Figure 35 provides an overall view of the
existing steelwork at the head end of the stockyard conveyor This existing steel
structure can be modified to suit a new configuration but does have some fixed
The optimisation of transfer chutes in the bulk materials industry
MN van Aarde
59
CHAPTER 4
constraints A good example of these constraints is the transfer height between
the stockyard conveyor and the downstream conveyors CV 5 and 6
On both sides of the stockyard conveyor stockpiles of ore can be reclaimed and
deposited onto the conveyor This facility allows a certain travel for the stacker
reclaimer along the stockyard conveyor for the stacking and reclaiming of
material The most forward position of the stacker reclaimer is at the beginning
of the incline section of the stockyard conveyor As previously explained any
curvature in a conveyor requires a certain minimum radius When the transfer
height is raised the radius constraints on that curvature in the stockyard
conveyor will reduce stockyard space This means that the storage capacity at
the facility will be greatly diminished
I ~
j
Figure 36 Dimensional constraints on the existing transfer configuration
The ideal is to stay within the eXisting critical dimensions as shown in Figure 36
As functionality of the chute dictates the chute configuration these dimensions
can be modified within certain constraints These critical dimensions on the
existing configuration are
The optimisation of transfer chutes in the bulk materials industry
MN van Aarde
60
CHAPTER 4
bull Centre of receiving belt to centre of the head pulley 800 mm
bull Bottom of receiving belt to top of the head pulley 4048 mm
The head pulley can however be moved back a certain amount before it
becomes necessary to change the entire incline section of the stockyard
conveyor As the moving head moves forward and backward there are idler cars
trailing behind the moving head carriage as shown in Figure 35 The purpose of
these idler cars is to support the belt when the moving head is feeding onto
CV 6 or when it is standing in the purging position
43 DESIGN OF THE CHUTE PROFILE
431 Design Methodology
Proven standard methods for the functional design of the chute are used These
hand calculation methods are based on the Conveyor Equipment Manufacturers
Association (CEMA) standard as well as papers from Prof AW Roberts These
are typically calculations for determining the discharge trajectory optimal radius
of the hood and spoon as well as the velocity of material passing through the
chute
In addition to standard methods of carrying out conceptual flow design it is
supplemented by the use of Discrete Element Modelling (OEM) simulation
software This is done to visualise the flow of material through the chute
Results from standard calculation methods are compared to the outputs of the
OEM simulations to confirm both results Chapter 5 will focus on the use of
Discrete Element Modelling for the design and verification of chute concepts
The optimisation of transfer chutes in the bulk materials industry
MN van Aarde
61
CHAPTER 4 -__-----__---_----------shy
432 Design Development
Figure 37 shows the concept of the hood and spoon chute for a 90deg transfer as
required by the facility layout The decision to opt for a hood and spoon chute is
based on trying to retain the material velocity when transferring material from the
feeding conveyor to the receiving conveyors Retention of material velocity is
critical as the transfer height is restricted The overall facility constraints for
design are as follows
bull Feeding belt speed - 45 ms
bull Receiving belt speed - 45 ms
bull Transfer height - 401 m
bull Belt widths -1650 mm
bull Maximum material throughput -10000 tlh
As this is a retrofit of an existing facility some of the facility constraints cannot be
changed This forms part of the design development as it steers the design in a
certain direction Due to the fact that the transfer height cannot be changed the
chute profile will be dependent on the transfer height restriction
The optimisation of transfer chutes in the bulk matefials industry
MN van Aarde
62
CHAPTER 4
START-UP CHrrlE
DRlBBIlNG CHUTE
Figure 37 Hood and spoon configuration for the 90 transfer
The optimum solution for the correct chute profile in this situation would be to
move the head pulley back far enough This should be done so that the hood
can receive the material trajectory at a small impact angle and still discharge
centrally onto the spoon However the head pulley can only be moved back a
certain amount Any further movement will require changes to the structure of
the feeding conveyor incline section
As the stockyard conveyors feed onto two receiving conveyors the head pulley
of the stockyard conveyors is situated on a moving head rail car This enables
the conveyor to discharge either on CV 5 or CV 6 as shown in Figure 25
Taking the movement of the head pulley into account the moving head rail car
can be shortened by 1000 mm in order to move the head pulley back As stated
in the preface all changes are distinctive to this facility alone However it is
important to be aware of the consequences of every modification
The optimisation of transfer chutes in the bulk materials industry
MN van Aarde
63
CHAPTER 4 -__----- ------shy
433 Determination of the Profile
An important of the hood and spoon design is to ensure a
discharge from the hood onto the centre of the spoon The is
determined using equation (1) in section 24 Although various material
are transferred it does not have a significant effect on the calculated trajectory
the bulk properties of the materials are very similar It is however important
to the material which will transferred obtain the flow angles and wear
This information the will be
the Liner selection for this case study is discussed in Appendix A
After the trajectory has been determined the hood radius can determined by
using equation (2) As head pulley can move 1 000 mm backward the
possible hood radius was determined to 2 577 mm This hood radius is
VIU(I(1 to produce the wear on the zone in chute
The impact angle at this radius is 11 which is less than the maximum
allowable limit of 20
The hood radius is chosen to as close as possible to radius of curvature of
the material trajectory The point where the hood radius and the trajectory radius
cross is known as the impact point In to determine the velocity
point in hood the at is required on the
hood from the horizontal where the material impacts and to slide down the
hood surface
In this case the position impact hood is at 558r from the horizontal
In to determine the velocity this angle e is used as starting
point in (3) obtain a complete velocity profile angle from where
the material impacts hood is decreased in increments 5 up to the
discharge point which is normally 0
The optimisation chutes in the bulk materials industry
MN van Aarde
64
-----
CHAPTER 4
Hood Velocity Profile
70
--- --~ 6 0
5 0
40 ~_
~ 30 g --- a 20 gt
10
00
60 50 40 30 20 10 o Theta (Position inside the hood)
Figure 38 Hood velocity profile
The spoon radius is determined in such a way that the wear at the point of impact
is kept to a minimum At the same time the horizontal component of the material
exit velocity is as close as possible to the receiving belt speed Firstly the
assumption is made that the initial velocity of material in the spoon is equal to the
exit velocity of material from the hood This yields a spoon entry velocity of
633 ms and can also be seen from Figure 38
By reiterating various radii for the spoon the optimum exit velocity Ve can be
obtained These radii are selected according to the available space in which the
spoon must fit and also to produce the smallest impact angle for material
discharging from the hood This table is set up to display the different exit
velocities at various spoon radii The exit velocity is also dependent on the exit
angle which is determined by the length of the spoon arc In this case the spoon
radius is chosen as 3 575 mm An exit angle of 38deg from the horizontal yields an
exit velocity closer to the receiving belt speed
The optimisation of transfer chutes in the bulk materials industry
MN van Aarde
65
CHAPTER 4
Spoon Velocity Profile
67
66
65
S 64 amp0 g 6 3
V
v-shy ~ ~
ii ~ gt 62
61 I I 60
o 10 20 30 40 50 60
Theta (position inside the spoon)
Figure 39 Spoon velocity profile
Taken from the origin of the spoon radius the material position in the spoon at
discharge is sr The selection of this angle is guided by the geometry of the
chute and surrounding structures This angle is then used to calculate the exit
velocity as shown in Figure 39 At this point the discharge angle relative to the
conveyor angle is 38deg Ve is then determined to be 6087 ms with a velocity
component of 479 ms in the direction of the belt This value is 618 higher
than the belt speed of 4S ms which is acceptable as it is within the allowable
10 range of variation Minimal spillage and reduced wear on the receiving
conveyor is expected
Both the hood and spoon have a converged profile This is done in order to
minimise spillage and ensure a smooth transfer of material from the hood to the
spoon and from the spoon to the receiving conveyor The converged profile
starts out wide to capture any stray particles and converges to bring the material
particles closer together at the discharge This profile does not influence the
transfer rate of the chute as the stream of material through the chute is no more
The optimisation of transfer chutes in the bulk materials industry
MN van Aarde
66
CHAPTER 4
compact than the material on the conveyor belt before and after the transfer
chute
44 INCORPORATING ADEAD BOX IN THE IMPACT AREAS
In chapter 1 reference is made to a chute design utilising pipe sections with a
rounded profile The flat back plate is chosen instead of a rounded pipe type
section to house the honeycomb dead box configuration It would be possible to
fit the honeycomb into a rounded back section but manufacturing and
maintenance would be unnecessarily difficult and expensive
Furthermore the cross section profile of the chute shows three sliding surfaces
as shown in These surfaces consist of the back plate two vertical side plates
and two diagonal plates This is done in order to increase the angle between
adjoining plates so that the probability of material hanging up in the corners is
reduced This helps to alleviate the risk of experiencing blocked chutes
Figure 40 Chute cross section
The optimisation of transfer chutes in the bulk materials industry
M N van Aarde
67
CHAPTER 4
441 Honeycomb Wear Box in the Hood
A honeycomb or wear box is incorporated into this chute configuration in order to
further minimise wear in the hood and spoon The honeycomb configuration is
clearly shown in and is typical for both the hood and spoon Reduced wear will I
be achieved as impact and sliding will take place on the basis of material on
material flow Ore is captured inside the honeycomb pockets which protects the
ceramic lining in the section of the honeycomb and creates another sliding face
made of the material being transferred The ribs in the wear box do not protrude
from the sliding face of the chute and therefore do not interfere with the main
stream flow of material
Positioning of the honeycomb is critical as the point of impact on the hood needs
to be on the honeycomb This is required in order to assure that the highest
material impact is absorbed by a layer of static material inside the honeycomb
and not the chute liners All the basic steps for designing a normal hood and
spoon chute are followed Firstly the angle at impact (8e) is calculated to
determine where the trajectory of material will cross the radius of the hood This
shows the position of the impact point on the hood Figure 20 indicates where 8e
is calculated As previously stated the angle at impact for this situation is
558r This is calculated using [33]
e = tan- I ( 1 ) (5)
C Ii
And y is defined by equation 1
This gives an indication as to where the honeycomb should be situated in order
to capture the material impacting the hood fully A flow simulation package can
also be used to determine the position of this honeycomb structure shows an
opening for the honeycomb which starts at 40deg clockwise from the vertical This
The optimisation of transfer chutes in the bulk materials industry 68
MN van Aarde
CHAPTER 4
means that there are almost 16deg of free space in the honeycomb to ensure that
the material will always impact inside the wear box
There is no set specification as to the size of this free space This is just to
accommodate any surges of mat~rial on the feeding conveyor As discussed in
Chapter 3 due to avalanches while reclaiming from the stockpiles material
surges on the conveyors is a reality
Figure 41 Honeycomb wear box positioning
illustrates exactly where this wear box is situated on the back plate of the hood
This configuration is very similar to that of the spoon as both wear boxes only
cover the width of the flat back plate of the hood and spoon The reason for this
is that most of the material impact and mainstream flow strikes the back plate
The optimisation of transfer chutes in the bulk materials industry
MN van Aarde
69
CHAPTER 4
WEAR BOX
Figure 42 Wear box in the hood section
All the horizontal ribs of the honeycomb are spaced 5deg apart and there are 5
vertical ribs following the converging contour of the hood as shown in Spacing
of the ribs depends largely on the maximum lump size handled by the transfer
In this case the largest lumps are approximately 34 mm in diameter The idea is
to get as many dead boxes into the honeycomb as possible These small
cavities should however be large enough to capture a substantial amount of ore
inside
The optimisation of transfer chutes in the bulk materials industry
MN van Aarde
70
CHAPTER 4 ----_----------------shy
Figure 43 Spacing arrangement of honeycomb ribs inside the hood
The two vertical liners on the edges of the honeycomb are only 65 mm high while
the rest of the vertical liners are 120 mm high This is done so that the flat liners
in the chute surface can overlap the edge liners of the honeycomb An open
groove between the tiles along the flow of material would cause the liners to be
worn through much faster than in normal sliding abrasion conditions Due to the
high wear characteristics of the ore all openings between tiles should be kept out
of the mainstream flow
All the ribs in the honeycomb are 50 mm thick and vary in depth The vertical
ribs protrude the horizontal ribs by 30 mm in order to channel the flow These
vertical ribs are all flush with the surrounding tiles on the flat sliding surface of the
hood All the pockets of the wear box are 120 mm deep measured from the top
of the vertical ribs Again dimension is dependent on the maximum lump size
handled by the transfer There are no specifications as to the relation between
the pocket size and the lump size These dimensions were chosen to be
approximately 4 times the lump size Computer simulations can be used to test
the feasibility of this concept while commissioning of the equipment will ultimately
show whether this method works
The optimisation of transfer chutes in the bulk materials industry
MN van Aarde
71
CHAPTER 4 ------------_ -- - ---------------shy
442 Honeycomb wear box in the spoon
The honeycomb wear box in the spoon has the same configuration as in the
hood It also covers the entire width of the back plate and fully accommodates
the material impacting on the spoon from the hood The entire spoon is broken
up into three sections and the honeycomb wear box is situated in the back
section as shown in
Figure 44 Wear box in the spoon section
With almost the same configuration as the hood the spoon also has a corner
liner to ensure a continuous lined face between the flat surface liners and the
honeycomb ribs The detail of these liners and ribs are shown in A 90deg transfer
with a hood and spoon chute means that the stream received by the spoon is
narrower and longer than the stream received by the hood This is caused when
the material takes the shape of the hood before it is discharged into the spoon
The converged configuration causes the stream to flatten against the sliding
surface in the chute
The optimisation of transfer chutes in the bulk materials industry
MN van Aarde
72
CHAPTER 4
Due to the spoon honeycomb being a bit narrower than the hood there are only
three vertical ribs The number of ribs had to be reduced to be able to
accommodate the preferred cavity size of the honeycomb boxes These ribs now
form two channels in which the stream of material can be directed
Figure 45 Liner detail of the spoon honeycomb wear box
As shown in there is a 3 mm gap between the honeycomb section and the chute
plate work This is to ensure that the honeycomb section can be easily removed
for maintenance on the liners All the edges of the liners have rounded corners
to reduce stress concentrations which can cause rapid liner failure
45 DESIGNING THE CHUTE FOR INTEGRATION WITH SYSTEM REQUIREMENTS
The arc length of the spoon back plate is longer and closer to the belt in order to
ensure a smooth transfer of material from the chute to the receiving conveyor A
small gap of 75 mm is left between the bottom of the spoon and the receiving
conveyor Due to the fact that material can also be fed from another upstream
The optimisation of transfer chutes in the bulk materials industry
MN van Aarde
73
CHAPTER 4
stockyard conveyor this configuration will not be suitable This means that the
gap of 75 mm is not enough to allow material to pass underneath the chute
To accommodate this situation the spoon is split into different sections where the
bottom section lifts up to make room for material from behind In the raised
position the gap between the chute and the belt is 450 mm When the lower belt
is loaded to full capacity the material height is 380 mm This means that the
clearance to the belt in the non operational position is sufficient and show the
operational and non operational positions of the spoon
T -t t----~r_-+-wtIY1shy
Figure 46 Spoon in the operational position
The optimisation of transfer chutes in the bulk materials industry
MN van Aarde
74
CHAPTER 4
Figure 47 Spoon in the non operational position
This section is a discussion on how this new transfer chute configuration should
be operated in order to comply with the facility requirements The bottom section
of the chute can be lifted out of the way of material from behind on the receiving
conveyor Therefore a control philosophy is required for this movement
Referring to Figure 25 positions A and B indicate where these new chutes will be
installed As previously stated position C is the purging or dump position and
show the actuated spoon section in the operating and non operating positions
The conditions for these positions are explained as follows
46 CONCLUSION
With the consideration of all the facility constraints and a conceptual idea of what
the transfer configuration should look like the design can be optimised When
the feeding belt velocity is known the material trajectory and optimum chute
radius can be determined This radius and the radius of the spoon must then be
corrected to comply with the facility constraints but still deliver the required
material transfer rate
The optimisation of transfer chutes in the bulk materials industry
MN van Aarde
75
CHAPTER 4
With the high cost implications of regular maintenance intervals on chute liners
and facility downtime a honeycomb structure is incorporated into the high impact
areas The purpose of this honeycomb structure is to form small pockets similar
to dead boxes in order to promote material on material flow This increases the
lifetime of the chute liners and reduces maintenance intervals
This specific transfer chute splits up easily into separate sections and will help to
simplify maintenance The bottom section of the chute is actuated to move up
and down depending on whether the chute is in operation or not This will ensure
optimum transfer of material while in operation and provide sufficient clearance
when not in operation This is again guided by the facility requirements
In the design of all the transfer chute components the physical properties of the
ore should always be considered This determines the chute profile in terms of
flow angles and liner selection With maximum material flow ability high
resistance to sliding abrasion and reduced maintenance cost in mind 94
alumina ceramics is the liner of choice This is only in the main flow areas of the
chute For the dribbling chute a polyurethane liner is used to promote the flow of
this sticky material
The optimisation of transfer chutes in the bulk materials industry
MN van Aarde
76
CHAPTER 5
CHAPTER 5 TESTING AND VERIFICATION OF THE NEW SOLUTION
- middotSmiddotmiddotmiddotmiddotmiddotmiddotmiddotmiddotmiddot-middotl~Oi
The optimisation of transfer chutes in the bulk materials industry 77
MN van Aarde
CHAPTER 5
51 PREFACE
Although hand calculations have been a proven method of design for many
years it is important to verify any new chute concept before fabrication and
implementation Confirming the concept can save time and money as it reduces
the risk of on-site modifications Hand calculations only supply a two
dimensional solution to the problem which does not always provide accurate
material flow profiles
In recent years a few material flow simulation packages have been developed to
aid the design of material handling equipment The use of software packages
can be beneficial to the design process as it gives a three dimensional view of
the material behaviour in the chute This means that changes to the chute
concept can be made prior to fabrication
It is however important to verify that the solution obtained from the software
package is an accurate reflection of actual design model Therefore the material
being handled should be thoroughly tested to obtain the correct physical
properties required to obtain an accurate simulation result
The use of material flow simulation software does not replace the necessity for
hand calculations All the basic steps should still be done to derive a conceptual
chute configuration Material flow simulation software should be used as a
complimentary tool to analytical hand calculations in the design process
The optimisation of transfer chutes in thebulk materials industry
MN van Aarde
78
CHAPTER 5
52 SELECTING A TEST METHODOLOGY
Traditionally transfer chutes were designed by using basic analytical calculations
and relying on empirical data from past experiences with other chutes Mostly
these analytical methods only cater for the initial part of the chute such as the
parabolic discharge trajectory It is difficult to determine what happens to the
flow of material after it strikes the chute wall [34]
Two methods of verification were usually applied to evaluate a new transfer
chute configuration Trial and error can be used but obviously this is not desired
due to the high cost implications A second method is to build a small scale
model of the chute in which tests can be carried out before a final design can be
adopted This physical modelling is however time consuming and
expensive [34]
Granular or particulate materials are composed of a large number of loosely
packed individual particles or grains The flow of such granular materials forms
an intricate part of the materials handling industry Small reductions in energy
consumption or increases in production can have great financial advantages
Therefore significant efforts are put into improving the efficiency of these
facilities The important role of numerical simUlations is becoming more evident
in these optimisation procedures [35] Due to these efforts this technology is
becoming more powerful and is easy to use as a verification method for transfer
chute designs
The behaviour of bulk material particles is unique in the sense that it exhibits
some of the properties associated with the gaseous liquid and solid states of
matter The granular state of bulk materials cannot be characterised by anyone
of these states alone The research that captures the contact between individual
particles in an explicit manner is known as discrete element methods (OEM) [36]
The optimisation of transfer chutes in the bulk materials industry
MN van Aarde
79
CHAPTER 5
In basic terms OEM explicitly models the dynamic motion and mechanical
interactions of each body or particle as seen in the physical material flow It is
also possible to obtain a detailed description of the velocities position and force
acting on each particle at a discrete point during the analysis This is achieved
by focusing on the individual grain or body rather than focusing on the global
body as is the case with the finite element approach [36]
Figure 48 illustrates two examples of how this OEM software can be applied
Obviously the flow characteristics differ between the applications shown in Figure
48 This is however catered for by the mathematical simulation of each particle
collision
Figure 48 Flow analysis examples a) separation and screening b) hoppers feeders 36]
Continuous improvements in the performance of computing systems make OEM
a realistic tool for use in a wide range of process design and optimisation
applications During the last 20 years the capabilities of OEM have progressed
from small scale two dimensional simulations to much more complex 3D
applications The latest high performance desk top computers make it possible
to simulate systems containing large numbers of particles within a reasonable
time [37]
The optimisation of transfer chutes in the bulk materials industry
MN van Aarde
80
CHAPTER 5
According to the institute for conveyor technologies at the Otto-von-Guericke
University of Magdeburg in Germany using OEM for bulk solid handling
equipment provides [38]
bull A cost effective method of simulating the utility of materials handling
equipmentshy
bull Precise control over complicated problem zones eg transfer chutes
redirection stations and high wear areas
bull The possibility to integrate processes in one simulation such as mixing and
segregation
bull The possibility to involve the customer more extensively in the design
process
bull An advantage in the market due to attractive video sequences and pictures
of the simulation
bull The possibility to prevent facility damages and increase the efficiency of
conveyor systems extensively
As a good example of the advantages of the discrete element method the
University of Witwatersrand in Johannesburg did studies on rotary grinding mills
The university studies have shown that the OEM qualitatively predicts the load
motion of the mill very well The improved knowledge of the behaviour of mills
can therefore increase the profitability of mineral processing operations [39]
This material handling equipment is generally costly to operate and inefficient in
the utilisation of energy for breakage In order to understand the behaviour of
mills better the OEM method is increasingly being applied to the modelling of the
load behaviour of grinding mills These results indicate that this method can be
applied successfully in the bulk materials handling industry
The apUmisatian af transfer chutes in the bulk materials industry
MN van Aarde
81
CHAPTERS
Another example where this technology has been used with great success is with
the design of a new load out chute for the Immingham coal import terminal in
Britain By simulating the flow with a OEM package the designers were aided in
the fact that they were supplied with a quantitative description of the bulk solid
movement through the chute In the opinion of Professor Franz Kessler
(University of Leoben) the Discrete Element Method provides the engineer with
unique detailed information to assist in the design of transfer points [3]
These simulation packages are at the moment very expensive and not widely
used in transfer chute design It can be anticipated that the utilisation of these
packages will increase as the technology improves and the cost of the software
goes down [40] To get the best value out of the simulation it is important to
compare simulation packages and select the one most suitable to the complexity
of the design
Fluenttrade is a two dimensional computational fluid dynamics (CFD) software
package which can also be used as a chute design aid through the simulation of
material flow It must however be noted that this is not a OEM simulation
package This software package simulates the flow of material by considering
the material particles as a liquid substance The output of the simulation is the
same as can be seen in the example of Figure 49 The colours in the simulation
represent the average particle spacing [40] Due to the fact that this package
can at this stage only deliver two dimensional simulations it is considered
inadequate to perform detailed simulations on the intricate design piscussed in
this dissertation
The optjmisation of transfer chutes in the bulk materials industry
MN van Aarde
82
CHAPTER 5
COnroUf Votume t-~bn 01 ( 00 frlm~2 5000amp1 00) ~gtJ C3_2002 fLUENT 60 (2lt1 9 940 n 1Mgt u ody)
Figure 49 Simulations results from Fluenttrade [40]
The Overland Conveyor Company provides another alternative to the Fluent
software package Applied OEM is a technology company that provides discrete
element software to a variety of users in the bulk materials industry Bulk Flow
Analysttrade is an entry level package that they provide This package is very
powerful in the sense that it can accurately predict flow patterns depending on
the accuracy of the inputs An example of this is shown in Figure 50 It also has
the capability to show material segregation dynamic forces and velocities [41]
Figure 50 Simulation results from Bulk Flow Analysttrade [41]
The optimisation of transfer chutes in the bulk materials industry
MN van Aarde
83
CHAPTER 5
OEM Solutions is a world leader in discrete element modelling software They
recently announced the release of the latest version of their flow simulation
package called EOEM 21 This package can be used to simulate and optimise
bulk material handling and processing operations [41] Oue to the capabilities of
this software package it is a very attractive option for designing transfer chutes
With the development of EOEM 21 OEM Solutions worked in collaboration with
customers in the Bulk Handling Mining and Construction Pharmaceutical
Chemical and Agricultural sectors This enables the end users to perform more
sophisticated particle simulations specific to their unique applications Also
incorporated into this package is the ability and flexibility to customise and
personalise advanced particle properties [42]
This specific package has been proven successful by industry leaders Martin
Engineering (Neponset Illinois) is a leading global supplier of solids handling
systems This company continues to expand their use of EOEM software in
design optimisation and development of bulk materials handling products These
optimisation and development actions include all aspects of conveyor systems
and transfer points for numerous industrial sectors [43]
There are several other OEM simulation packages such as ESYS Particle
Passage-OEM and YAOE However none of these software packages seem be
major industry role players in the discipline of chute design although they might
have the capability In adjudicating the three big role players in bulk material flow
simulation packages there are a few factors taken into consideration It appears
thatthe advantages of 30 capabilities are non negotiable Therefore Fluenttrade is
not really a consideration From the literature review of the Bulk Flow Analysttrade
and the EOEM packages it seems that these two will provide more or less the
same performance It does seem however that the EOEM software is a bigger
role player in various industries Due to the possible future capabilities of EOEM The optimisation of transfer chutes in the bulk materials industry
MN van Aarde
84
CHAPTER 5
through its association with numerous industries this simulation package is the
software of choice
In order to retrofit or design a new transfer point with the aid of the selected OEM
software package there are a few steps that a designer must follow to gain the
full benefit of this tool [36]
1 An accurate 3D or CAD representation of the new or old transfer chute
must be rendered
2 Identify restrictions and limitations in terms of chute geometry and
manufacturing
3 Identify desired design goals (Le dust emissions flow restrictions etc)
4 Identify representative material properties and particle descriptions
5 In case of a retrofit make design changes to chute geometry with CAD
6 Simulate the performance of the new design using OEM software
7 Evaluate results obtained from the simulation (reiterate steps 5 6 and 7)
8 Perform and finalise detail design steps
9 Manufacture
10 Installation
The above mentioned steps found in references [6] and [36] only provides
information regarding retrofitting or designing chutes with the aid of OEM
Although it is a powerful design 1001 the design process should not discard the
use of analytical hand calculation~ Some of the most important design decisions
regarding chute profiles are made with analytical hard calculations such as
plotting the material trajectorY
53 DETERMINATION OF MATERIAL PROPERTIES
The discrete element method is a promising approach to the simUlation of
granular material interaction The accuracy of the outcome of the simulation is
The optimisation of transfer chutes in the bulk materials industry
M N van Aarde
85
CHAPTER 5
however dependent upon accurate information on the material properties and
input parameters [44] These inputs basically consist of the following
fundamental parameters size and shape factors bulk density angle of repose
cohesion and adhesion parameters and restitution coefficients [45]
The determination of most of these parameters are explained and defined in the
following paragraphs The parameters that are changed in the simulation
according to the reaction of the flow are not discussed and are typically
parameters such as the internal coefficient of friction between a number of
particles A collaborated effort by the bulk handling industry aims to find ways in
which all parameters can be accurately determined through scientific methods
This has however still not been achieved The objective is to achieve a realistic
representation and therefore some parameters are altered in the simulation
It is important to note that the computation time increases as the particle size
becomes smaller and the amount of particles increase In most granular flow
problems the characteristics of the material stream are largely determined by
particles greater than 10 - 20 mm in size [45] Therefore in order to reduce
computation time the selected particle size for simUlations should be the same
as the largest particles handled by the facility namely 34 mm diameter
Although fines have a higher internal friction coefficient and more cohesiveness
these properties can be averaged into the input parameters to obtain the same
overall effect [45] Therefore only a single particle size is used in the simulation
and the properties optimised to obtain the same result under actual operating
conditionsmiddot Some of the material properties can be easily obtained from the
facility The rest of the properties are obtained from tests carried out by expert
conSUltants in this field
The size factor and bulk density are obtained from the facility Materia tests
carried out by external consultants provide the coefficient of friction and also the The optimisation of transfer chutes in the bulk materials industry
MN van Aarde
86
CHAPTER 5
wall friction angle This is the angle at which the material will start to slide under
its own mass To determine these material properties the external consultants
normally use sophisticated and expensive equipment Data gathered from these
tests are used for the hand calculation of the chute profile The angle of repose
can normally be observed from a stockpile and is the angle that the side of the
stockpile makes with the horizontal
For the OEM simulation the coefficient of friction is one of the main determining
factors of the wall friction angle Data provided by the material tests can not be
used as a direct input into OEM In the software package the coefficient of
friction is represented by a factor between 0 and 1 The material test data can
however provide some insight into where on this scale the factor is This factor
can be derived from a few small simulation iterations as there is no method of
direct conversion between the test result data and the OEM input
To determine this factor a plate is modelled with a single layer of particles This
plate is then rotated within the simulation at approximately 2deg per second As
soon as the particles begin to slide the time is taken from which the angle can be
calculated This process is repeated with different friction coefficients until the
correct wall friction angle is obtained After the coefficient of friction factor is
determined between the particles and the chute wall the material restitution
factor and coefficient of internal friction can be obtained
The restitution factor is obtained by measurirtg the rebound height of a particle
when it is dropped from a certain height This is usually difficult to determine due
to the variation in shape of the material particles If the particle lands on a
surface it rarely bounces straight back up Therefore the test is repeated
numerous times and an average is taken to obtain the final result
Coefficient of internal friction is a property that describes the particles ability to
slide across each other A simUlation is set up to create a small stockpile of The optimisation of transfer chutes in the blJlk materials industry
MN van Aarde
87
CHAPTER 5
material particles The angle of repose can be obtained by measuring the
average apex angle of the stockpiles In this simulation the coefficient of internal
friction and restitution factors are iterated This is done in order to simulate the
accurate behaviour of particles falling onto the stockpile and forming the correct
angle of repose Figure 51 shows what this simulation typically looks like
Figure 51 Determination of material properties for an accurate angle of repose
54 VERIFICATION OF THE SELECTED TEST METHODOLOGY FOR THIS
APPLICATION
The best verification is to compare the simulation results with an actual material
flow situation Therefore a comparison is made between the actual flow in the
existing transfer configuration and the simulation of this same transfer This is
also a good test to see if the parameters changed in the simulation were done
correctly
During the chute test programme CCTV cameras were installed in the problem
transfer chutes at the facility The cameras are positioned to provide an accurate
view of the material flow behaviour inside the chutes As explained in Chapter 3
The optimisation of transfer chutes in the bulk materials industry 88
MN van Aarde
CHAPTER 5
the behaviour of the material flow inside the chutes changes with the variation of
ore type
Due to the fact that only 34 mm diameter particles are used in the simulation a
test using coarse ore was chosen for the verification of the simulation
Therefore test 12 is used as reference for the verification In this test coarse S
with the particle size distribution between 28 mm and 34 mm was used at the
transfer from CV 3 to CV 5
Figure 52 shows an image taken from the CCTV camera inside the transfer chute
between CV 3 and CV 5 The red line indicates the top of the chute throat
opening and the yellow arrows show the top of material flow This screen shot
was taken at a flow rate of 10 000 tlh It can be deduced from this view and the
chute test work that the chute is choking at a throughput rate of 10 000 tlh
Figure 52 Actual material flow with coarse S at 10000 tIh
The transfer chute from Figure 52 was modelled in CAD and the model imported
into the discrete element package EDEM All the material input parameters as
discussed in section 53 were used in the simulation 10 000 tlh was used as the
The optimisation of transfer chutes in the bulk materials industry
MN van Aarde
89
CHAPTER 5
flow rate parameter in an attempt to simulate and recreate the situation as shown
by Figure 52
Test 12 of the chute performance tests gave the following results which can be
compared to the EDEM simulation
bull Chute started to choke rapidly at 10 000 tlh
bull Slight off centre loading onto the receiving conveyor CV 5
bull A lower velocity layer of material close to the discharge of the chute
bull Material roll back on the receiving conveyor due to significant differences in
the velocity of the material flow and the receiving conveyor
Off-centre loading
L
Figure 53 Material flow pattern through the existing chute
The optimisation of transfer chutes in the bulk materials industry
MN van Aarde
90
CHAPTER 5
Flow restricted in this area
Low velocity layer
Low discharge velocity rollback
Figure 54 Cross sectional side view of material flow through the existing chute
Figure 53 shows the material flow pattern in the existing chute where the thick
red arrows indicate the direction of flow The legend on the left of the figure
indicates the material velocity in ms Slow flowing material is shown in blue and
the colour turns to red as the material velocity increases Slight off centre
loading onto the receiving conveyor CV 5 can be seen from Figure 53 This
correlates well with the actual observations during the physical testing of this
transfer point
Figure 54 shows the more determining factors for correlation between actual flow
and simulated flow where the legend on the left indicates the material velocity in
ms This is a cross sectional view through the centre of the chute From this
view a build up of material can be seen in the chute throat area The slow
flowing material on the back of the chute also helps to restrict the flow Due to
the fact that the material speed at the discharge of the chute is much slower than
the receiving belt speed a stack of turbulent flowing material is formed behind
the discharge point on the receiving conveyor
The optimisation of transfer chutes in the bulk materials industry
MN van Aarde
91
CHAPTER 5
There is a good correlation between the simulated and actual material flow
pattern The simulation method can therefore be considered as a valid alternate
or additional method to standard analytical chute design Attention should be
given though to the input of material properties in order to obtain a realistic result
55 VERIFICATION OF NEW CHUTE CONFIGURATION AND OPTIMISATION OF THE
HOOD LOCATION
After establishing that the OEM is a reliable design and verification tool the new
transfer chute configuration can be simulated Firstly this configuration is
modelled without the honeycombs inside the hood and spoon This is done in
order to verify the material flow pattern and velocity through the hood and spoon
Results obtained from this simulation can then be compared to the hand
calculation results An iterative process is followed with simulations and hand
calculations to obtain the best flow results The simulation results are shown in
Figure 55 and Figure 56
I
L
Figure 55 Material flow through hood at 10 000 tIh
The optimisation of transfer chutes in the bulk materials industry
MN van Aarde
92
CHAPTER 5
Figure 56 Material flow through spoon at 10 000 tlh
The hood velocity profile shown in Figure 38 gives the same result as obtained
from the DEM simulation The calculated hood exit velocity is 633 ms This is
the same result obtained from the simulation and shown by the red colouring in
Figure 55 As the material enters the spoon it is falling under gravity and
therefore still accelerating At impact with the chute wall it slows down and exits
the spoon with approximately the same velocity as the receiving conveyor
Figure 56 shows the material flow through the spoon section This can also be
compared to the spoon velocity profile in Figure 39 The behaviour of the
material inside the spoon as shown by the simulation correlates with the results
obtained from the hand calculations This is another indication that with accurate
input parameters the DEM can be used as a useful verification tool
The optimisation of transfer chutes in the bulk materials industry
MN van Aarde
93
CHAPTER 5
Skew loading into spoon
Slower material
L
Figure 57 Determination of the optimum hood location
The hood is supported by a shaft at the top and can be moved horizontally This
function is incorporated into the design in order to optimise the hood location
during commissioning of the transfer chute It is critical to discharge centrally into
the spoon in order to eliminate skew loading onto the receiving conveyor
Figure 57 illustrates the effect that the hood location has on material flow When
comparing the flow from Figure 55 to the flow in Figure 57 it is clear that skew
loading is a direct result of an incorrect hood position The circled area in Figure
57 illustrates how the flow reacts to the incorrect hood location
Material is discharged to the right side of the spoon which causes a slight buildshy
up of material on the left This causes the material to flow slightly from side to
side as it passes through the spoon Figure 57 indicates that the material to the
The optimisation of transfer chutes in the bulk materials industry
MN van Aarde
94
CHAPTERS ----------------- -------___ _--shy
right at the spoon discharge is slightly slower than the material on the left This is
a clear indication of skew loading onto the receiving conveyor
The material flow pattern in Figure 55 is symmetrical and therefore will not
cause skew loading The OEM can give a good indication of the required hood
setup before commissioning However adjustments can still be made during the
commissioning process The tracking of the receiving belt should give a good
indication of when the hood is in the optimum position
56 EFFECT OF THE HONEYCOMB STRUCTURE IN HIGH IMPACT ZONES
The purpose of the honeycomb dead box structure in the high impact zones is to
capture material inside the pockets and induce material on material flow This
requires that the material inside the honeycombs should be stationary while the
main stream material flow moves over the dead boxes OEM can therefore be
set up in such a way that the material velocities can be visualised inside the
chute
In Chapter 4 the logic of how this honeycomb should be structured and
positioned was discussed The simulations shown in Figure 58 and Figure 59
illustrate how a OEM pack~ge can also be used to determine the positioning of
these honeycomb structures Impact points in the hood and spoon must be
inside the honeycomb in all situations of flow inside the chute The spacing of
dead box pockets can be altered to ensure that a continuous layer of stationary
material is formed in the honeycomb area Various geometries for this
honeycomb structure can be simulated with OEM to obtain the best results
The optimisation of transfer chutes in the bulk materials industry
MN van Aarde
95
CHAPTER 5
Large radius hood
Hood honeycomb box to minimise wear in impact
Vertical discharge from hood centralising flow on
belt
L
Figure 58 Material behaviour through hood
Spoon
Spoon honeycomb box to minimise wear in impact area
Improved spoon discharge flow
Figure 59 Material behaviour through spoon
The optimisation of transfer chutes in the bulk materials industry
MN van Aarde
96
CHAPTERS
The legends on the left of Figure 58 and Figure 59 indicate the material velocity
in ms Dark blue indicates stationary material and bright red indicates a
maximum material velocity of 8 ms Using this information the functionality of
the honeycomb dead boxes can now be analysed The velocity of the material
captured by the dead boxes is indicated as dark blue This means that all the
material in the dead boxes is stationary
With the result obtained from the OEM simulation it is clear that material on
material flow will be induced by the honeycomb dead boxes The pockets of the
honeycomb capture the material and will therefore have reduced wear in the
high impact areas This material on material flow does however induce a
coarser sliding surface than the smooth ceramic liner tiles Due to the high
velocity of material through the chute the effect of the coarser sliding surface is
however minimised
58 CONCLUSION
The Discrete Element Method is proven to be a successful design and
verification tool in the bulk materials industry This method is used widely in the
global bulk materials industry The successful outcome of the OEM simulation is
however dependent on the correct material input parameters Some of these
parameters are readily available from the facility that handles the material The
rest of the parameters can be determined by setting up simple test simulations
with OEM
To verify that the OEM simulation is a correct indication of the actual condition
the simulation is compared to CCTV images taken from the same transfer chute
The results show that the OEM simulation does provide a true reflection of the
actual material flow through the transfer chute Therefore the same material
input parameters can be used to simulate the new transfer chute configuration
The optimisation of transfer chutes in the bulk materials industry
MN van Aarde
97
CHAPTER 5
From the simulations done on the new transfer chute configuration the effect of
the honeycomb dead boxes can be examined These simulation results show
that the honeycomb dead box configuration is effective in capturing material
inside the honeycomb cavities This results in material on material flow and
reduces impact abrasion on the ceramic chute liners
Results obtained from the OEM simulation of the new transfer configuration are
compared to the hand calculation results This comparison indicates that the
material velocity calculated in the hood and spoon correlates well with the
material velocity calculated by the OEM The overall results obtained from
simulating the new transfer chute configuration have been shown to provide a
true reflection of the actual flow through the chute
The optimisation of transfer chutes in the bulk materials industry
MN van Aarde
98
CHAPTER 6
CHAPTER 6 CONCLUSIONS AND RECOMMENDATIONS
The optimisation of transfer chutes in the bulk materials industry
MN van Aarde
99
CHAPTER 6
61 CONCLUSIONS AND RECOMMENDATIONS
Bulk materials handling is a key role player in the global industrial industry
Within this field the industry faces many challenges on a daily basis These
challenges as with any industry are to limit expenses and increase profit Some
of the limiting factors of achieving this goal in the bulk materials handling industry
are lost time due to unscheduled maintenance product losses due to spillage
andhigh costs incurred by increased maintenance
The focus of this study was on the optimisation of transfer chutes and
investigations were carried out to determine the core problems These
investigations were done by observing and monitoring various grades of iron ore
passing through transfer chutes known to have throughput problems The core
problems were identified as high wear on liners in the impact zones skew
loading on receiving conveyors material spillage and chute blockages
These problems cause financial losses to the facility either directly or indirectly
Direct financial losses can be attributed to the frequent replacement of chute
liners while the indirect financial losses are caused by facility down time This is
why it is imperative to optimise the manner in which the transfer of material is
approached A new transfer chute configuration addresses the problems
identified at the facility and the core concepts can be adopted at any bulk
materials handling facility
This new concept examines the utilisation of the hood and spoon concept rather
than the conventional dead box configuration By using the hood and spoon
configuration the material discharge velocity is utilised and carried through to the
discharge onto the receiving conveyor Adding to this design is a honeycomb
dead box configuration in the high impact zones of the hood and spoon This
initiates material on material flow and prolongs the lifetime of the chute liners
The optimisation of transfer chutes in the bulk materials industry
MN van Aarde
100
CHAPTER 6
The radius of the hood should be designed so that it follows the path of the
material trajectory as closely as possible Some facility constraints prohibit this
hood radius from following exactly the same path as the material The radius of
the spoon is designed in such a manner that it receives the material from the
hood and slows it down while turning it into the direction in which the belt is
running Ideally the material should be discharged from the spoon at
approximately the same velocity as the receiving conveyor
If this can be achieved then some major problems suffered by the industry will
have been resolved With the hood having almost the same radius as the
material trajectory impact wear on liners can be significantly reduced By
discharging material from the chute onto the receiving conveyor at the same
velocity as the conveyor belt excessive belt wear and material spillage will be
avoided Further optimisation is however still possible by investigating the
implementation of various skirting options to the side of the conveyor
This new transfer chute configuration also boasts an articulated bottom section in
the spoon The purpose of the adjustable bottom section is to create greater
clearance below the spoon This will allow material on the belt below to pass
unimpeded underneath the spoon In some cases there can be several chutes in
series that discharge onto the same conveyor In these cases it is beneficial to
incorporate an articulated chute in order to have the capability of having a small
drop height between the discharge point in the chute and the receiving conveyor
This low drop height also minimises turbulent flow at the chute discharge point on
the receiving conveyor
The most unique feature to the new design is the implementation of the
honeycomb dead box configuration in the high impact zones Due to these high
impact areas the liners will experience the most wear This section of the chute
is flanged and can be removed separately from the rest of the chute to aid
maintenance In most maintenance operations it may only be necessary to reline The optimisation of transfer chutes in the bulk materials industry
MN van Aarde
101
CHAPTER 6
this small section of the chute Costs are minimised by reducing the time
required for maintenance and the cost of replacing liners
Previously testing of new transfer chute configurations normally involved
implementing the chute and obseNing its ability to perform according to
specification This can however be a costly exercise as it is possible that further
modifications to the chute will be required after implementation Therefore it is
beneficial to verify the new chute configuration before implementation
This is done by simulating the material flow through the chute using Discrete
Element Method A comparison was done between the actual flow in an eXisting
chute and the simulated flow in the same chute configuration This comparison
showed the same result obtained from the simulation and the actual material
flow This method can therefore be used as an accurate simulation tool for
evaluating transfer chute performance
The mathematical calculations describing the material flow in and over the
honeycomb dead box structures are complex Therefore simulation models are
used to show the material behaviour in those areas Simulations show that the
material captured within the dead boxes remains stationary thus protecting the
ceramic liners behind it This is the desired result as it prolongs the life of the
chute liners and reduces maintenance frequencies
If the work is done efficiently it normally takes two days to remove a worn chute
of this configuration fully and replace it with a new one This is normally done
once a year due to the design lifetime of the chute With the new chute
configuration this maintenance schedule can be reduced to two hours once a
year for the replacement of the honeycomb sections only The exposed face of
the honeycomb ribs will wear through until the efficiency of the honeycomb
design is reduced
The optimisation of transfer chutes in the bulk materials industry
MN van Aarde
102
CHAPTER 6
This specific iron ore facility has approximately fifty transfer points During this
exercise only two of these transfer points were replaced with the new chute
configuration The combined annual maintenance time for replacement of these
50 chutes is 100 days If the new chute philosophy is adopted on all these
transfers the annual maintenance time can be reduced to as little as 100 hours
This excludes the unplanned work for cleaning of spillages and fixing or replacing
worn conveyors
There are significant benefits to investigating the problems at specific transfer
points before attempting a new design This gives good insight into where the
focus should be during the design process Ea~y identification and
understanding of the problem areas is essential for a new chute configuration
The new design features can provide a vast improvement and a large benefit to
the bulk materials handling industry
62 RECOMMENDATIONS FOR FURTHER STUDY
During the chute performance tests it was noted that avalanches on the
stockpiles during reclaiming of material causes peaks on the conveyor systems
These peaks in the material stream increase the probability of blockages in the
transfer chutes As a result material spillage occurs and the conveyor belts can
be easily overloaded
This occurrence creates the requirement for further studies on the reclaiming
operations All stacker reclaimers are operated manually which creates ample
room for error Investigations can be done to determine the value of automating
the reclaiming operations Manual interaction cannot be avoided but an
automated system will reduce the possibility for error
Visual inspections on the transfer chute liners indicate that the material tends to
erode the liners away quicker in the grooves between liner plates or ceramic
The optimisation of transfer chutes in the bulk materials industry
MN van Aarde
103
CHAPTER 6
tiles This occurrence seems to be worse in areas of the chute where the
material velocity is the highest
This problem was specifically noticed with ceramic liner tiles The tiles are glued
to the chute surface with an epoxy and this substance also fills the crevices
between the tiles This epoxy is however not resistant to any type of sliding or
impact abrasion If the material gains speed in such a groove between the tiles it
simply erodes the epoxy away Studies to reduce or even eliminate this problem
should be examined
In some situations the layout and configuration of the chute prohibits the tiles
from being inserted in a staggered manner Studies can be done on the
composition of this epoxy in order to increase its resistance to sliding and impact
abrasion By doing so the lifetime of the chute liners can be increased which will
result in minimised facility down time due to maintenance
It seems that it is a global industry problem to find accurate scientific methods of
determining material input parameters for OEM simulations Although most of
the material properties can be determined through testing it is still a challenge to
convert that information into a representative input parameter into OEM It is
therefore recommended that further studies be undertaken to determine a
method by which material test data can be successfully converted into OEM input
parameters
The optimisation of transfer chutes in the bulk materials industry
MN van Aarde
104
REFERENCES ------shy
REFERENCES
[1] ARNOLD P C MCLEAN A G ROBERTS A W 1978 Bulk Solids
storage flow and handling Tunra Bulk Solids Australia Jan
[2] ANON 2008 Peak (Export) OilUSD Survival Dec
httppeakoHsurvivalorgltag=finance Date of access 8 Jun 2009
[3] KESSLER F 2006 Recent developments in the field of bulk conveying
FME Transactions Vol 34 NO4
[4] ANON 2007 Specification for Troughed Belt Conveyors British
Standards BS28901989 25 Sep Date of access 8 Jun 2009
[5] CEMA (Conveyor Equipment Manufacturers Association) Belt Conveyors
6thfor Bulk Materials ed wwwcemanetorg Date of access
10 Jun 2009
[6] DEWICKI G 2003 Computer Simulation of Granular Material Flows
Overland Conveyor Co Inc Jan httpwwwpowderandbulkcom Date
of access 10 Jun 2009
[7] AMERICAN COAL COUNCIL 2009 Engineered chutes control dust for
Ameren U Es Meramec Plant httpwww clean-coal infold rupalindexphp
Date of access 12 Jun 2009
[8] KUMBA IRON ORE 2008 Annual Financial Statements 2008
httpwwwsishenironorecompanycozareportskumba afs 08pdffullpdf
Date of access 13 Jun 2009
The optimisation of transfer chutes in the bulk materials industry
MN van Aarde
105
REFERENCES
[9] METSO BACKGROUNDER 2007 Rock Crushing 22 Feb
httpWWvVmetsocom Date of access 15 Jun 2009
[10] ALTHOFF H 1977 Reclaiming and Stacking System Patent US
4037735
[11] THE SOUTH AFRICAN INSTITUTE OF MATERIALS HANDLING
Conveyor belt installations and related components Chutes Level 1
course on belt conveying technology
httpWWvVsaimhcozaeducationcourse01chuteshtm Date of access
18 Jun 2009
[12] CLARKE R 2008 Hood and spoon internal flow belt conveyor transfer
systems SACEA - seminar 22 Aug httpWWvVsaceaorgzaDate of
access 22 Jun 2009
[13] T W WOODS CONSTRUCTION 2009 Design problems in coal transfer
chutes 24 Mar httpWWvVferretcomaucTW-Woods-Constructions
Date of access 25 Jun 2009
[14] LOUGHRAN J 2009 The flow of coal through transfer chutes 20 Aug
Showcase of research excellence James Cook University Australia
[15] ONEIL M 2006 A guide to coal chute replacement Power Engineering
International Nov httpgoliathecnextcomcoms2lgi 0198-369643Ashy
guide-to-coal-chutehtml Date of access 3 Jul 2009
[16] NORDELL LK 1992 A new era in overland conveyor belt design
httpWWvVckitcozasecureconveyorpaperstroughedoverlandoverland
htm Date of access 3 Jul 2009
The optimisation of transfer chutes in the bulk materials industry
MN van Aarde
106
REFERENCES
[17] Rowland C 1992 Dust Control at Transfer Points
httpwwwckitcozasecureconveyorpapersbionic-research-2d-bri2shy
paper05htm Date of access 4 Jul 2009
[18] KRAM ENGINEERING Ceramic composite impact blocks
httpwwwkramengineeringcozacercomhtmIDate of access
5 Jul 2009
I19] BLAZEK C 2005 Kinkaid InteliFlo tradeInstallation Source for Plats
Power Atticle Oct
httpwwwbenetechusacompdf caseStudyBe neKi ncArti c pdf
Date of access 10 Aug 2009
[20] CRP Engineering Corp Modern Transfer Chute Designs for Use in
Material Handling
httpwwwcbpengineeringcompdflTransfer Chutespdf Date of access
26 Apr 2010
[21] ROZENTALS J 2008 Rational design of conveyor chutes Bionic
Research Institute South African Institute of Materials Handling
[22] ROBERTS AW SCOTT OJ 1981 Flow of bulk solids through
transfer chutes of variable geometry and profile Bulk Solids Handling
1(4) Dec
[23] CARSON JW ROYAL TA GOODWILL DJ 1986 Understanding
and Eliminating Particle Segregation Problems Bulk Solids Handling
6(1) Feb
[24] BENJAMIN CW 2004 The use of parametric modelling to design
transfer chutes and other key components Gulf Conveyor Group The optimisation of transfer chutes in the bulk materials industry
MN van Aarde
107
l25] STUART DICK D ROYAL TA 1992 Design Principles for Chutes to
Handle Bulk Solids Bulk Solids Handling 12(3) Sep
[26J REICKS AV RUDOLPHI TJ 2004 The Importance and Prediction of
Tension Distribution around the Conveyor Belt Path Bulk materials
handling by conveyor belt 5(2)
(271 RAMOS CM 1991 The real cost of degradation
institute Chute design conference 1991
Bionic research
[28] ROBERTS AW 1969 An investigation of the gravity flow of non
cohesive granular materials through discharge chutes Transactions of
the ACMEjournal of engineering for indust~ May
[29] TAYLOR HJ 1989 Guide to the design of transfer chutes and chute
linings for bulk materials
association 1989
mechanical handling engineers
[30] ROBERTS AW 1999 Chute design application transfer chute design
Design guide for chutes in bulk solids handling The University of
Newcastle Australia
[31] NORDELL LK 1994 Palabora installs Curved Transfer Chute in Hard
Rock to Minimise Belt Cover Wear Bulk Solids Handling 14 Dec
[32] ROZENTALS J 1991 Flow of Bulk Solids in Chute Design
research institute Chute design conference 1991
Bionic
The optimisation oftransfer chutes in the bulk materials industry
MN van Aarde
108
REFERENCES
[33] ROBERTS AW WICHE SJ 2007 Feed Chute Geometry for
Minimum Belt Wear (h International conference of bulk materials
handling 17 Oct
[34J POWDER HANDLING New OEM Conveyor Transfer Chute Design
Software Helix Technologies
httpvwvwpowderhandlingcomauarticesnew-dem-conveyor-transfershy
chute-design-software Date of access 12 Aug 2009
[35J SAWLEY ML CLEARY PW 1999 A Parallel Discrete Element
Method for Industrial Granular Flow SimUlations EPFL - Super
Computing Review (11)
[36] DEWICKI G 2003 Bulk Material Handling and Processing - Numerical
Techniques and Simulation of Granular Material Overland Conveyor
Company Bulk Solids Handling 23(2)
[37J FA VIER J 2009 Continuing Improvements Boost use of Discrete
Element Method Oil and Gas Engineer- Production Processing 7 Oct
[38] KRAUS E F KA TTERFELD A Usage of the Discrete Element Method in
Conveyor Technologies Institute for Conveyor Technologies (IFSL) The
Otto-von-Guericke University of Magdeburg
[39] MOYS MH VAN NIEROP MA VAN TONDER JC GLOVER G
2005 Validation of the Discrete Element Method (OEM) by Comparing
Predicted Load Behaviour of a Grinding Mill with Measured Data School
for Process and Materials Engineering University of Witwatersrand
Johannesburg The optimisation of transfer materials industry
MN van Aarde
109
REFERENCES
[40J MciLVINA P MOSSAD R 2003 Two dimensional transfer chute
analysis using a continuum method Third international conference on
CFD in the Minerals and Process Industry CSIRO Melbourne Australia
(41J Overland Conveyor Company Inc 2009 Applied DEM
httpwwwapplieddemcomDate of access 26 Apr 2010
(42] DEM SOLUTIONS 2008 Advanced Particle Simulation Capabilities with
EDEM 21 Press release 5 Nov
[43J DEM SOLUTIONS 2008 Martin Engineering Expands use of EDEMTM
Software in Design of Solids Handling Equipment Press release 20 Feb
(44] COETZEE CJ ELS DNJ 2009 Calibration of Discrete Element
Parameters and the Modelling of Silo Discharge and Bucket Filling
Computers and Electronics in Agriculture 65 Mar
[45] DAVID J KRUSES PE Conveyor Belt Transfer Chute Modelling and
Other Applications using The Discrete Element Method in the Material
Handling Industry
httpwwwckitcozasecureconveyorpaperstrouqhedconveyorconveyor
Date of access 3 Sep 2009
bulk materials industry
MN van Aarde
110
ApPENDIXA
ApPENDIX A MATERIAL TESTS AND LINER SELECTiON
The optimisation of-transfer chutes in the bulk materials industry
MN van Aarde
11-1
ApPENDIX A
MATERIAL TEST WORK AND LINER SELECTION
Material samples were taken from the stockpile area for evaluation and testing
These samples represent the worst case materials for impact wear and flow
problems Tests were conducted by external consultants as this is a speciality
field Therefore no detail information on how the tests are conducted is currently
available Results from these tests should indicate the worst case parameters for
chute design according to each specific liner type tested
The material handled by the facility varied from 4 mm to 34 mm lump size A mid
range lump size ore was identified as the preferred material to use for wear
testing This decision was based on the specific ore type maximum lump size of
15 mm as required for the wear test The wear test apparatus used cannot
provide conclusive results with the larger lump sizes of 34 mm and thus smaller
sizes are used Guidance on which ore samples to take was given by the
external consultants tasked with performing the test work
The test work is divided into two sections Firstly the flow test work is carried out
on the finer material with a higher clay content known to have bad flow angles
Included in the selection of fine materials is a sample of the scraper dribblings
This is the material scraped off the belt underneath the head pulley Secondly
the wear tests were conducted on 15 mm samples as explained above
A few common liners were selected for testing These liners are shown in
Table A Some of these liners are known for their specific purpose and
characteristics Polyurethane is known to have a very good coefficient of friction
and will therefore improve the flow of material This material does however
wear out quicker in high impact applications Therefore it is only considered for
use inside the dribbling chute
The optimisation of transfer chutes in the bulk materials industry
MN van Aarde
112
ApPENDIX A
As can be seen from Figure 37 in section 432 the dribbling chute will only see
scraper dribblings from the primary and secondary scrapers It is protected from
any main stream flow of material by the start up chute This makes the
polyurethane liner a prime candidate for lining this section of the chute
Table A Material tested vs liner type
I Flow Tests Wear Tests
Liner T
en aJ c
u
I
i
N en aJ c
u
Cf)
en aJ c
u
I en
shy OJaJ C 0 shyj -shy 0 u pound
(f) shy0
T
aJ ~ j 0 0
N aJ ~ j 0 0 i
I Chrome x x x x x
Carbide
x x x x xI VRN 500 I
x x x x x x94
Alumina
Ceramic i I
Poly x
Urethane I I I
FLOW TEST WORK
The fines 1 sample was tested at three different moisture contents of 36 41
and 47 This is 70 80 and 90 of saturation moisture respectively No
noticeable difference was observed in the wall friction angles Therefore the
fines 2 and fines 3 samples were tested at 80 of saturation which is 42 and
43 moisture content respectively
Test work showed that the minimum chute angle required for flow increased as
the impact pressure increased Chute angles were measured up to impact
pressures of about 8 kPa The worst chute angle obtained was 62deg This means
that no angle inside the chute should be less than 62deg from the horizontal
The industry 113
MN van Aarde
ApPENDIXA
The scraper dribblings were tested at a moisture content of 12 This material
possesses the most clay content and therefore has the worst flow properties
During testing of this material water was added to improve the flow At an
impact pressure of 03 kPa the minimum chute angle drops from 62deg to 56deg when
adding a fine mist spray of water
WEAR TEST WORK
As stated in chapter 4 wear tests were conducted on the chrome carbide
overlay ceramics and VRN500 The results of these tests are shown as non
dimensional wear ratios of mm wearmm travel of bulk solid sliding on the wear
liners coupon at a given force Test results shown in Table B indicate that the
chrome carbide will have about 185 times the lifetime of 94 alumina ceramics
The VRN500 liner will wear about 6 times faster than the 94 alumina ceramics
at the same force
Table B Wear ratios of liners at two different pressure ranges
lore Wall Coupon 65 kPa 163kPa -173 kPa I i
Coarse 1 on 94 Alumina Ceramic 90 E-9 37 E-8
Coarse 1 on Chrome Carbide 87 E-9 20 E-8
Coarse 1 on VRN500 91 E-8 I 24 E-7 i
Coarse 2 on 94 Alumina Ceramics 38 E-9 22 E-8
Coarse 2 on Chrome Carbide 55 E-9 15 E-8
Coarse 2 on VRN500 66 E-8 25 E-7 I
LINER SELECTION
The lifetime of the liners is not the only criteria Maintainability and cost are also
factors that must be considered Chrome carbide seems to be the liner of choice
for this application However the specific type of chrome carbide tested is not
The optimisation of transfer chutes industry 114
MN van Aarde
ApPEND[xA
manufactured locally and the imported cost is approximately three times that of
ceramics
VRN500 is slightly cheaper than ceramics and can easily be bolted to the back
plate of the chute which makes maintenance very simple Ceramics are
however widely used on the facility and the maintenance teams are well trained
for this specific liner Therefore 94 alumina ceramics is chosen for this
application
The optimisation of transfer chutes in the bulk materials industry
MN van Aarde
115
ApPENODlt B
ApPENDIX B CHUTE CONTROL PHILOSOPHY
The optfmisation of transfer chutes in the bulk materials industry
MN van Aarde
116
ApPENDIX B
SPOON IN THE OPERATING POSITION
For the spoon to be in the operating position the moving head must be over that
specific spoon and the feeding stockyard conveyor must be running This means
that material will be fed through the chute In this case the spoon needs to be in
the operating position to prevent spillage
However when the chute is in the operating position and the feeding conveyor
trips for any reason the actuated spoon section must not move to the non
operating position If the spoon position feedback fails then the system must trip
and the spoon must remain in its last position The downstream conveyor must
also fail to start with this condition
SPOON IN THE NON OPERATING POSITION
As a rule the spoon needs to be in the non operating position when the moving
head on that specific stockyard conveyor is in the purging position (position C)
The reason is that when a stacker reclaimer is in stacking mode any upstream
stacker reclaimer can be reclaiming The reclaimed material on CV 5 or CV 6
will have to pass underneath the actuated chute
ACTUATED SPOON OVER CV 5
As an example for the movement of any actuated spoon on CV 5 the following
are considered When the moving heads of any of the stockyard conveyors are
in position A and that specific stockyard conveyor is running then the rest of the
actuated spoons over CV 5 must be in the non operating position The
following scenario provides a better understanding
bull CV 4 is running
bull CV 4 moving head is in position A
The optimisation of transfer chutes in the bulk materials industry
MN van Aarde
117
ApPENDIXB
In this situation all the actuated spoons on CV 5 except underneath CV 4
must be in the non operating position
ACTUATED SPOON OVER CV 6
As an example for the movement of any actuated spoon on CV 6 the following
are considered When the moving heads of any of the stockyard conveyors are
in position B and that specific stockyard conveyor is running then the rest of the
actuated spoons over CV 6 must be in the non operating position The
following scenario is similar to 453 but explains the control philosophy for the
moving head in position B
bull CV 2 is running
bull CV 2 moving head is in position B
In this situation all the actuated spoons on CV 6 except underneath CV 2
must be in the non operating position
The optimisation of transfer chutes in bulk materials industry
MN van Aarde
118
LIST OF TABLES
LIST OF TABLES
Table 1 Design Input Reference Requirements [24J 24
Table 2 Iron are grades used for chute test work 45
Table 3 Results from test programme 54
The optimisation of transfer chutes in the bulk materials industry
M N van Aarde
xii
---------------------------------
CV
NOMENCLATURE
NOMENCLATURE
SCADA
CCTV
CEMA
DEM
kPa
mm
MSHA
ms
mt
MW
NIOSH
OSHA
RampD
tlh
3D
Supervisory Control And Data Acquisition
Closed Circuit Television
Conveyor Equipment Manufacturers Association
Conveyor
Discrete Element Method
Kilopascal
Millimetres
Mine Safety and Health Administration
Metres per second
Metric Tons
Megawatt
National Institute for Occupational Safety and Health
Occupational Safety and Health Administration
Radius of curvature
Research and Development
Tons per hour
Three Dimensional
The optimisation of transfer chutes in the bulk materials industry
MN van Aarde
xiii
CHAPTER 1
CHAPTER 1 INTRODUCTION TO TRANSFER CHUTES IN THE BULK
MATERIALS HANDLING INDUSTRY
The optimisation of transfer chutes in the bulk materials industry
MN van Aarde
1
CHAPTER 1
11 INTRODUCTION TO TRANSFER CHUTES
111 Bulk material handling industry
In order to comprehend the utilisation of transfer chutes fully it is imperative to
first understand the industry in which it is used Transfer chutes are most
commonly used in the bulk materials handling industry Bulk materials handling
operations perform a key function in a great number and variety of industries
throughout the world as stated in 1978 by Arnold McLean and Roberts [1 J
The nature of materials handling and scale of industrial operation varies from
industry to industry and country to country These variations are based on the
industrial and economic capacity and requirements of the specific industry or
country Regardless of the variations in industry the relative costs of storing
handling and transporting bulk materials are in the majority of cases very
significant
o
Figure 1 Growth in global crude steel production from 1996 to 2006 [2J
The optimisation of transfer chutes in the bulk materials industry
MN van Aarde
2
CHAPTER 1
The chart from BHP Billiton shown in Figure 1 provides a clear indication of the
actual drivers of global materials demand Figure 1 indicates the percentage
growth in crude steel production from all the major role players between 1996
and 2006 China accounted for 65 of the 494 million tonnes of global steel
production growth between 1996 and 2006 Europe grew by 6 while the other
countries grew by 20 [2]
These figures emphasise that bulk materials handling performs a key function in
the global industry and economy [1] Because of market requirements new
products continuously evolve This is also true for the field of bulk conveying
technologies [3] It can be assumed that the evolution of new technology is due
to the requirement for more efficient and cost effective operation
The case study which will be discussed from Chapter 3 onwards is an iron ore
export facility This facility exports approximately 50 million tonnes per annum
With each hour of down time the financial losses equate to approximately
R750 000 This highlights the fact that handling systems should be designed and
operated with a view to achieving maximum efficiency and reliability
112 Function of transfer chutes
BS2890 (Specification for Troughed Belt Conveyors) gives the definition for
transfer chutes as follows A straight curved or spiral open topped or enclosed
smooth trough by which materials are directed and lowered by gravity [4] For
any belt conveyor system to operate successfully the system requires that [5]
bull the conveyor belt be loaded properly
bull the material transported by the conveyor is discharged properly
The transfer of bulk material can either be from a belt bin hopper feeder or
stockpile and occurs at a transfer point In most cases this transfer point requires
optimisation of transfer chutes in the bulk materials industry
MN van Aarde
3
CHAPTER 1 - ----~--~--------------~--------
a transfer chute [5] In industry the most common use of transfer chutes is for
transferring bulk material from one conveyor belt to another This transfer of
material can be done in any direction as simplistically explained in Figure 2 and
Figure 3
Figure 2 Typical in-line transfer point [6J
Figure 2 shows a basic in-line transfer of material from the end of one conveyor
belt onto the start of another conveyor belt Figure 3 illustrates a more intricate
design where the direction of material transport is changed by an angle of 90 0 bull
This design or any other design entailing a directional change in flow normally
requires more detailed engineering [7
The optimisation of transfer chutes in the bulk materials industry
MN van Aarde
4
CHAPTER 1
Regardless of the direction or type of transfer there are some design
requirements that always need special attention Some of these requirements
are reduced wear on chute liners correct discharge velocity minimum material
degradation and minimum belt abrasion The correct design will also eliminate
blockages shape the load correctly and minimise the creation of dust [7]
12 VARIOUS APPLICATIONS AND CONFIGURATIONS OF TRANSFER CHUTES
The application of transfer chutes is central to any operation in the bulk handling
industry Whether it is mining operations storing stacking importing or
exporting of bulk material the transfer of material is always required On the
mining side the challenges involved with materials handling are probably some of
the most extreme
This is due to the great variation in lump sizes that must be catered for At
Sishen iron ore mine seven iron ore products are produced conforming to
different chemical and physical specifications The current mining process at
Sishen entails [8]
bull Removal of topsoil and stockpiling
bull Drilling and blasting of ore
bull Loading of iron ore and transporting to the crushers
bull Crushing and screening into size fractions
bull Beneficiation of all size fractions
bull Stockpiling onto various product beds
The processes with the most intricate and complex chute arrangements are
probably crushing and screening as well as stacking and reclaiming of material
The optimisation of transfer chutes in the bulk materials industry
11 N van Aarde
5
CHAPTER 1
121 Crushing
An excavator or wheeled loader transfers the rock to be crushed into the feed
hopper of the primary crusher The primary crusher breaks the large rock
boulders or run of mine material into smaller grain sizes Some of the bigger
crushers in the industry can crack boulders that are about one cubic meter in
size All the crushed material passes over a screen to separate the different
lump sizes The material that falls through the screen is transferred via a series
of transfer chutes and conveyor belts to the stockpile area [9]
Where the material does not pass through the screen another system of transfer
chutes and conveyor belts transfers this material to a secondary crusher The
material is fed into this crusher via a transfer chute from the discharge of a
conveyor belt All the processed material is then transferred to the stockpile area
via a separate series of transfer chutes and conveyor systems [9] Throughout
this whole process the material lump size changes and with it the transfer chute
requirements
Figure 4 Material lump sizes through a crushing plant
The optimisation of transfer chutes in the bulk materials industry
MN van Aarde
6
CHAPTER 1
Figure 4 shows some spillage from a conveyor between a primary and secondary
crusher The shovel in the picture provides a good reference as to the variation
in material lump size on the walkway
122 Stacking and Recaiming
Normally the stockyard area has an elongated yard conveyor for moving bulk
material in the longitudinal direction of the stockyard Straddling the yard
conveyor transversely is the rail mounted undercarriage of the stacker reclaimer
Three main chutes transfer material through the machine [10] Figure 5 shows
this machine in action while reclaiming material from a stockpile
Figure 5 Stacker Reclaimer in reclaiming mode
The first chute will transfer material to the incline conveyor of the machine when
the material has to be stacked on the stockpile In the case where the material
must bypass the machine this chute will transfer material from the tripper back
onto the yard conveyor [10]
The optimisation of transfer chutes in the bulk materials industry
MN van Aarde
7
CHAPTER 1
The second chute transfers material from the incline conveyor onto the boom
conveyor This is normally a difficult process because the boom conveyor is
never in the same direction as the incline conveyor From the end of the boom
conveyor the material is Simply discharged onto the stockpile [10]
When reclaiming stockpile material the bucket whee at the head end of the
boom conveyor scoops up material and deposits it back onto the boom conveyor
From here it is discharged into the centre chute of the machine This chute then
discharges the material onto the yard conveyor for further processing In some
cases the bottom section of this centre chute must be moved out of the way to
allow free passage of material discharged from the tripper chute onto the yard
conveyor [10]
123 Chute configurations
Various chute configurations are used in the bulk materials handling industry
These configurations depend on the specific requirements of the system layout
or material properties There are basically two main configurations consisting of
dead box chutes and dynamic chutes Both of these configurations have their
specific applications in industry The major difference is that dead box chutes
use the material being transferred as a chute liner whereas dynamic chutes are
lined with a high wear resistant material A combination of both can also be
used
If the material being transferred is relatively dry such as goid ore dead boxes
prove to be more beneficial One of the applications of a ded box is to absorb
the direct impact of material discharged from a conveyor into a head chute as
can be seen in Figure 6 Other applications are in long or high transfer points In
these transfers the momentum of falling material must be reduced before
reaching the receiving conveyor belt in order to reduce wear of the belt [11]
The optimisation of transfer chutes in the bulk materials industry
MN van Aarde
8
CHAPTER 1
Figure 6 Typical dead box [11]
As shown in Figure 7 dead boxes are also used to accomplish changes in the
vertical flow direction by inserting angled panels This configuration where dead
boxes are used as deflection plates or impact wear plates is known as a cascade
chute In this case the deflection plate or the impact wear plate hardness is
equal to that of the feed material [11]
Figure 7 Typical cascade chute [11]
The hood and spoon chute or dynamic chute is configured so that the hood
catches and changes the material trajectory path to exit with a vertical velocity
When the material impacts the spoon it slides down the smooth spoon surface
The material flow direction is changed to the direction of the receiving conveyor
as shown in Figure 8 [12]
The optimisation of transfer chutes in the bulk materials industry
MN van Aarde
9
CHAPTER 1
Figure 8 Typical dynamic chute [12J
Ancillary equipment used with this configuration of chutes is radial doors and
flopper gates Radial doors are used successfully below ore passes or silos for
an onoff feed control as shown by Figure 9 One drawback of radial doors is the
possibility of jamming while closing In order to counteract this problem a
knocker arm between the cylinder door and the rod can be added This helps to
close the door with full force open with reduced force or hammered open [11]
Figure 9 Radial door used in chutes under ore passes or silos [11J
The optimisation of transfer chutes in the bulk materials industry
MN van Aarde
10
CHAPTER 1
The function of a f10pper gate is to divert the flow of material in a chute when one
conveyor is required to feed either of two discharge points as shown in Figure 10
For this same purpose a diverter car can also be used where a section of the
chute moves in and out of the path of material flow The critical area in the
design of a flop per gate is the hinge point In order for the gate to be self
cleaning the hinge point should be placed above the apex of the double chute
This also prevents rock traps that can jam the gate [11]
COVERED
Figure 10 Flopper gate diverling material to different receiving conveyors [11J
13 RECURRING CHUTE PROBLEMS AND COUNTERMEASURES FROM INDUSTRY
Transfer chutes are a fundamental link when conveying ore and therefore it is
important to get it right at the outset of design and fabrication Design and
fabrication issues can cause numerous problems when transferring material
Historically conveyor system design focused on the systems overall structural
integrity while ensuring that the equipment would fit within the facilitys
constraints [13] [14] [15]
The optimisation of transfer chutes in the bulk materials industry
MN van Aarde
11
CHAPTER 1
Little attention was given to design analysis or consideration for material flow
characteristics Normally the solution for controlling flow was to implement
simple rock boxes [15] This type of chute configuration is still commonly used in
industry but with more emphasis on the flow of material The most recurrent
problems on transfer chutes are [13] [14]
bull Spillage
bull Blocked chutes
bull High wear on the receiving belt due to major differences between the
material velocity and the belt velocity
bull Rapid chute wear
bull Degradation of the material being transferred
bull Excessive generation of dust and noise
bull Miss tracking of the receiving conveyor belt due to skew loading from the
transfer chute
Figure 11 Chute liner degradation
Figure 11 shows the excessive wear on ceramic tiles where the material
trajectory from the feeding belt impacts the chute These tiles are replaceable
and a maintenance schedule normally specifies the replacement intervals A
The optimisation of transfer chutes in the bulk materials industry 12
MN van Aarde
CHAPTER 1
problem arises when the frequency of these maintenance intervals is too high
due to excessive wear on the liners
Figure 12 Results of continuous belt wear at transfer points
The conveyor belt can account for up to 60 of the capital cost of a bulk
materials handling plant This means that the cost implications of constant
replacement of a conveyor belt due to wear can become significantly higher
than the original capital investment [16] Figure 12 shows the extreme damage
on a conveyor belt caused by abrasion and gouging
Figure 13 Dust from a transfer point onto a stockpile
The optimisation of transfer chutes in the bulk materials industry
MN van Aarde
13
CHAPTER 1 --~ ---------------------------shy
The presence of dust is an indisputable fact in many industries concerned with
the handling or processing of products such as coal mineral ores and many
others [17] As in the case of spillage it is easy to identify transfer systems that
cause dust clouds Environmental regulations are in place to prevent excessive I
dust emissions
Government organisations such as the Occupational Safety and Health
Administration (OSHA) the Mine Safety and Health Administration (MSHA) and
the National Institute for Occupational Safety and Health (NIOSH) closely monitor
dust levels at all coal handling facilities [13] Therefore it is imperative that the
chute design process caters for limiting dust emissions
Systems normally used in industry are enclosed skirting systems bag houses
and dust collectors This however is only treating the symptom rather than
eliminating the primary cause In order to minimise dust generation the use of
low impact angles and minimal chute contact is required (14] One of the most
successful methods of controlling dust is atomised water spray systems using a
combination of high pressure water and chemical substances
Over the years considerable research has gone into minimising wear on transfer
chutes There are currently a few different liner types to choose from depending
on the configuration and application of the chute These include ceramic tiles
chrome carbide overlay materials and typi~al hardened steel plates such as
VRN A combination of liner materials can also be used similar to the one
shown in Figure 14
The opUmisation of transfer chutes in the bulk materials industry
MN van Aarde
14
CHAPTER 1
Figure 14 Ceramic composite liners [18J
This ceramic composite liner is an example of the new technology available in
chute lining materials It is a high wear resistant surface made from cylindrical
alumina ceramic pellets bound within a resilient rubber base The purpose of this
material is to provide wear resistance through the use of ceramics while the
rubber dampens the impact forces [18]
Some innovative concepts for chute design have been implemented since the
materials handling industry started to incorporate new ideas Benetech Inc
installed a new generation hood and spoon type chute at Dominions 1200 MW
Kincaid coal powered generating station as shown in Figure 15 This chute
replaced the conventional dead box chute [19] Their innovation is to use a pipe
configuration combined with the hood and spoon concept
The optimisation of transfer chutes in the bulk materials industry
MN van Aarde
15
CHAPTER 1
Figure 15 Benetech Inteliflow J-Gide transfer chute [19J
This chute has sufficient chute wall slope and cross sectional area to prevent
material build-up and blocked chutes Reduced collision forces in the chute
minimize material degradation and the creation of excessive dust The material
velocity in the chute is controlled by the wall angles to obtain a discharge velocity
with the same horizontal component as the belt velocity [19] Figure 16 shows a
flow simulation of the Benetech concept The simulation shows that this concept
will result in lower impact forces and reduce belt abrasion
The optimisation of transfer chutes in the bulk materials industry
MN van Aarde
16
CHAPTER 1
Figure 16 Flow simulation ofthe Benetech Ineliflo chute [19J
CBP Engineering Corp also considers the concept of pipe type sections to be
the answer to most of the transfer chute problems They describe it as a curved
or half round chute The modern perception is to gently guide the material in the
required direction rather than use a square box design or deflector doors which
turns or deflects the flow [20]
The industry is striving towards developing new technology in transfer chute
design One solution is to incorporate soft loading transfer chutes to alter the
material flow direction with minimum impact on the side walls of chute and
receiving conveyor As experienced by many industries these types of chutes
can transfer material onto the receiving conveyor at almost the same velocity as
the conveyor By doing so many of the problems with material transfer can be
eliminated [13]
Most of these solutions as proposed by industry only address a few of the
numerous problems experienced with transfer chutes The dynamic hood and
The optimisation of transfer chutes in the bulk materials industry
MN van Aarde
17
CHAPTER 1
spoon chute appears to afford the best opportunity for solving most of the
problems There are still however many unanswered questions surrounding this
design
Figure 11 shows the installation of a hood type chute in the iron ore industry It is
clear from this image that liner wear in the higher impact areas is still an area of
concern Improvements can still be made to this design in order to further
enhance its performance
14 PURPOSE OF THIS RESEARCH
The bulk materials handling industry is constantly facing the challenge of
implementing transfer chutes that satisfy all the system requirements Problems
such as high wear spillage blockages and the control of material flow are just
some of the major challenges faced by the industry
The objective of this research is to identify problems experienced with transfer
chutes of an existing bulk handling system and to apply current design solutions
in eliminating these problems In doing so the research aims to introduce a new
method of minimising liner wear caused by high impact velocities
Dynamic chutes are discussed in particular where the entire design process
addresses the problems identified on chutes in brown field projects Approaching
chute design from a maintenance point of view with the focus on reducing liner I
degradation will provide a fresh approach to transfer chute design The
concepts disc~ssed in this dissertation (dynamic and dead box chutes) are
commonly used in industry However some research is done to determine
whether a combination of these concepts can solve some of the problems
experienced by industry
The optimisation of transfer chutes in the bulk materials industry 18
MN van Aarde
CHAPTER 1
At the hand of all the information provided in this dissertation its purpose is to
enable the chute designers to better understand the process of chute
optimisation and design This is achieved through the discussion of a case study
where the chutes are evaluated and re-designed to achieve the desired
performance
15 SYNOPSIS OF THIS DISSERTATION
Chapter 1 gives an introduction to the bulk materials industry and the role that
transfer chutes plays in this industry Some of the problems that the industries
have been experiencing with transfer chutes were identified and the diverse
solutions to these problems discussed These solutions were reviewed to
identify whether improvement would be possible
Chapter 2 provides a better understanding of the functionality and the
conceptualisation of transfer chutes as well as investigating the theory behind
material flow through transfer chutes This theory reviews the research and
design objectives used as a guideline when approaching a new chute
configuration The guidelines for evaluating and designing transfer chutes are
used to verify the performance of these chutes in the iron ore industry
Chapter 3 identifies some practical problems experienced on transfer chutes a~
an existing bulk transfer facility These problems are identified through a series
of tests where the actual flow inside the chutes is monitored via CCTV cameras
The results obtained from these tests are specific to this facility but can provide
insight into the cause of some problems generally experienced in the industry
These results can provide helpful information when modifying or re-designing
new transfer chutes
Chapter 4 uses the theory discussed in Chapter 2 to conceptualise a new
transfer chute configuration for the transfer points that were tested All the facility
The optimisation of transfer chutes in the bulk materials industry 19
MN van Aarde
CHAPTER 1
constraints are taken into account during the process in order to obtain an
optimum solution to the problems identified during the chute test work The old
chutes did not have major problems with liner wear due to large dead boxes
However this remains a serious consideration for the new dynamic chute design
due to its configuration where there is continuous sliding abrasion of the chute
surface A new concept for the reduction of liner degradation is introduced in this
chapter
Before manufacturing and installing this new concept it is important to verify that
it will perform according to conceptual design Chapter 5 is a discussion on the
use of the Discrete Element Method as a verification tool A simulation of the
new transfer chute concept is done to visualise the behaviour of the material as it
passes through the new transfer chute configuration
Chapter 6 discusses the benefits of the new transfer chute configuration A
conclusion is made as to what the financial implications will be with the
implementation of this new concept Recommendations are made for future
studies in the field of bulk materials handling These recommendations focus on
the optimisation of processes and the reduction of maintenance cost to the
facility
The optimisation of transfer chutes in the bulk materials industry
MN van Aarde
20
CHAPTER 2
CHAPTER 2 BASIC CONSIDERATIONS IN CHUTE DESIGN
The optimisation of transfer chutes in the bulk materials industry
MN van Aarde
21
CHAPTER 2
21 PREFACE
In an economic driven world the pressure for production is often the cause of the
loss of production This is a bold statement and is more factual than what the
industry would like to admit This is also valid in the bulk materials handling
industry Production targets seldom allow time for investigation into the root
cause of the problems The quick fix option is often adopted but is frequently the
cause of even more maintenance stoppages
Existing chutes on brown field projects often fail due to an initial disregard for the
design criteria changes in the system parameters or lack of maintenance
These transfer points are often repaired on site by adding or removing platework
and ignoring the secondary functions of a transfer chute Therefore it is
imperative to always consider the basic chute specifications when addressing a
material transfer problem [21]
22 DESIGN OBJECTIVES
In the quest to improve or design any transfer point some ground rules must be
set This can be seen as a check list when evaluating an existing chute or
designing a new chute Transfer chutes should aim to meet the following
requirements as far as possible [21] [22] [23]
bull Ensure that the required capacity can be obtained with no risk of blockage
bull Eliminate spillage
bull Minimise wear on all components and provide the optimal value life cycle
solution
bull Minimise degradation of material and generation of excessive dust
bull Accommodate and transfer primary and secondary scraper dribblings onto
the receiving conveyor
The optimisation of transfer chutes in the bulk materials industry
MN van Aarde
22
CHAPTER 2
bull Ensure that any differences between the flow of fine and coarse grades are
catered for
bull Transfer material onto the receiving conveyor so that at the feed point onto
the conveyor
bull the component of the material now (parallel to the receiving conveydr) is as
close as possible to the belt velocity (at least within 10) to minimise the
power required to accelerate the material and to minimise abrasive wear of
the belt
bull the vertical velocity component of the material flow is as low as possible so
as to minimise wear and damage to the belt as well as to minimise spillage
due to material bouncing off the belt
bull The flow is centralised on the belt and the lateral flow is minimised so as
not to affect belt tracking and avoid spillage
With the design of a new chute there are up to 46 different design inputs with 19
of these being absolutely critical to the success of the design Some of the most
critical preliminary design considerations are shown in Table 1 [24]
The optimisation of transfer chutes in the bulk materials industry
MN van Aarde
23
CHAPTER 2
Table 1 Design Input Reference Requirements [24J
Aria Unit
Feed Conveyor
Belt Speed r ms
Belt Width mm
JibHead Pulley Dia mm
Pulley Width mm
Angle to Horizontal at the Head Pulley degrees
Belt Troughing Angle degrees
Sight Height Data
Feed Conveyor Top of Belt to Roof mm
Drop Height mm
Receiving Conveyor Top of Belt to Floor mm
Receiving Conveyor
Belt Speed ms
Belt Width mm
Belt Thickness mm
Angle of Intersection degrees
Angle to Horizontal degrees
Belt Troughing Angle degrees
Material Properties
Max Oversize Lump (on top) mm
Max Oversize Lump (on top) degrees
studies done by Jenike and Johanson Inc have identified six design principles
that can serve as a guideline in chute optimisation exercises These six
principles focus on the accelerated flow in the chute which they identified as the
most critical mode [25]
Within accelerated flow the six problem areas identified by Jenike and Johanson
Inc are [25]
The optimisation of transfer chufes in the bulk materials industry
MN van Aarde
24
CHAPTER 2
bull plugging of chutes at the impact points
bull insufficient cross sectional area
bull uncontrolled flow of material
bull excessive wear on chute surfaces
bull excessive generation of dust
bull attrition or breakdown of particles
221 Plugging of chutes
In order to prevent plugging inside the chute the sliding surface inside the chute
must be sufficiently smooth to allow the material to slide and to clean off the most
frictional bulk solid that it handles This philosophy is particularly important
where the material irnpacts on a sliding surface Where material is prone to stick
to a surface the sliding angle increases proportionally to the force with which it
impacts the sliding surface In order to minimise material velocities and excessive
wear the sliding surface angle should not be steeper than required [25]
222 Insufficient cross sectional area
The cross section of the stream of material inside the chute is a function of the
velocity of flow Therefore it is critical to be able to calculate the velocity of the
stream of material particles at any point in the chute From industry experience a
good rule of thumb is that the cross section of the chute should have at least two
thirds of its cross section open at the lowest material velocity [25] When the
materialis at its lowest velocity it takes up a larger cross section of chute than at
higher velocities Therefore this cross section is used as a reference
223 Uncontrolled flow of material
Due to free falling material with high velocities excessive wear on chutes and
conveyor belt surfaces are inevitable Therefore it is more advantageous to
The optimisation of transfer chutes in the bulk materials industry
MN van Aarde
25
CHAPTER 2
have the particles impact the hood as soon as possible with a small impact
angle after discharge from the conveyor With the material flowing against the
sloped chute walls instead of free falling the material velocity can be controlled
more carefully through the chute [25]
224 Excessive wear on chute surfaces
Free flowing abrasive materials do not normally present a large wear problem
The easiest solution to this problem is to introduce rock boxes to facilitate
material on material flow Chute surfaces that are subjected to fast flowing
sticky and abrasive materials are the most difficult to design
A solution to this problem is to keep the impact pressure on the chute surface as
low as possible This is done by designing the chute profile to follow the material
trajectory path as closely as possible By doing so the material is less prone to
stick to the chute surface and the material velocity will keep the chute surface
clean [25]
225 Excessive generation of dust
Material flowing inside a transfer chute causes turbulence in the air and
excessive dust is created In order to minimise the amount of dust the stream of
material must be kept in contact with the chute surface as far as possible The
material stream must be compact and all impact angles against the chute walls
must be minimised A compact stream of material means that the material
particles are flowing tightly together At the chute discharge point the material
velocity must be as close as possible to the velocity of the receiving belt [25]
The optimisation of transfer in the bulk materials industry
M N van Aarde
26
CHAPTER 2
226 Attrition or breakdown of particles
The break up of particles is more likely to occur when large impact forces are
experienced inside a chute than on smooth sliding surfaces Therefore in most
cases the attrition of material particles can be minimised by considering the
following guidelines when designing a transfer chute minimise the material
impact angles concentrate the stream of material keep the material stream in
contact with the chute surface and keep the material velocity constant as far as
possible [25]
23 INTEGRATING A MORE APPROPRIATE CHUTE LAYOUT WITH THE PLANT
CONSTRAINTS
According to Tunra Bulk Solids in Australia the process for design and
commissioning of a new plant basically consists of four steps The entire
process is based on understanding the properties of the material to be
handled [1]
RampD CENTRE CONSULTING CONTRACTOR ENGINEERING AND PLANT
COMPANY OPERATOR r-------------- I TESTING Of CONCEPTUAl I DETAILED DESIGN CONSTRUCTION amp
I BULKSOUDS - DESIGN COMMISSIONING- I shyI Flow Proper1ies Lining Material tuet Equipment
Selection Procurement _ I I
I I
I Flow Pat1erns SSlpment Quality Control I
I IFeeder Loads amp Process Performance
I Power I Optimisation Assessment I I
L J -
I IBin Loads I I I Wear Predictions I
FEEDBACK I I I IModel Studigt L _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ J
i ~ FEEDBACK r-shyFigure 17 Four step process for plant design and commissioning [1J
The optimisation of transfer chutes in the bulk materials industry
MN van Aarde
27
CHAPTER 2
Figure 17 illustrates this four step process These steps are a good guideline in
order to incorporate a more appropriate chute layout for the plant constraints
This is an iterative process where all the possible solutions to a problem are
measured against all the possible plant constraints This section focuses more
on the second column of Figure 17 and specifically on structures and equipment
During this stage of design the utilisation of 3D parametric modelling also creates
an intimate and very accurate communication between the designer and the
project engineer or client This effective communication tool will save time and
improve the engineering process [24]
A good example of obtaining an appropriate chute layout for the plant constraints
can be explained as follows On an existing plant a transfer point will have a
specific transfer height from the top of the feed conveyor to the top of the
receiving conveyor If the feed conveyor has an incline section to obtain the
required transfer height it will also have a curve in the vertical plane of that
incline section This curve has a certain minimum radius in order to keep the belt
on the idlers at high belt tensions [26]
Figure 18 Vertical curve on incline conveyor
The optimisation of transfer chutes in the bulk materials industry
MN van Aarde
28
CHAPTER 2
If the transfer height at a transfer point is changed the path of the feeding
conveyor should always be taken into consideration With an increase in transfer
height the vertical curve radius will increase as well in order to prevent the
conveyor from lifting off the idlers in the curve This will require expensive
modifications to conveyor structures and therefore in most cases be a pointless
exercise Figure 18 shows clearly the large radius required to obtain a vertical
curve in a belt conveyor
Other considerations on brown field projects might be lift off of the receiving
conveyor at start up before or after the vertical curve This is caused by peaks
in belt tension at start up which may cause the belt to lift off the idlers and chafe
against the chute In some cases this can be solved by fitting a roller as shown
in Figure 19 to the underside of the chute to protect it from being damaged by
the belt or to protect the belt from being damaged by the chute The position of
this specific chute is just after a vertical curve where the belt tends to lift off at
start up
Figure 19 Protective roller on a transfer chute
The optimisation of transfer chutes in the bulk materials industry
MN van Aarde
29
CHAPTER 2
24 INVESTIGATING THE CORRECT CHUTE PROFILE FOR REDUCED LINER WEAR
In order to reduce chute wear the curved-profile variable chute concept is
introduced [27] This concept was originally developed by Professor Roberts for
the grain industry in 1969 [28] After many years of research and investigation
CMR Engineers and Project managers (pty) Ltd came to the following
conclusion any improvement in coal degradation dust generation and chute
wear can only be achieved by avoiding high impact forces or reducing them as
much as possible [27]
At any impact point of material in a chute or conveyor kinetic energy is
dissipated This increases material degradation and wear on liners and conveyor
belt covers Therefore it is good practise to redirect the kinetic energy in a
useful manner This action will help to reduce liner and belt wear [32]
x
Vo
- ImpactPlate
Figure 20 Geometry of the impact plate and material trajectory [30J
The optimisation of transfer chutes n the bulk materials industry
MN van Aarde
30
CHAPTER 2
The path followed by the material discharged over the end pulley of a belt
conveyor is known as its trajectory and is a function of the discharge velocity of
the material from the conveyor [29] Figure 20 shows the material trajectory as
weI as the radius and location of the impact plate In the case of dynamic chutes
this impact plate represents the back plate of the chute
The correct chute profile to reduce wear must cater for the proper location of the
chute covers and wearing plates This location depends upon the path of the
trajectory which must be predicted as accurately as possible
Figure 21 Mode for the impact of a particle on a flat surface [29]
Figure 21 illustrates a material particle impinging on a flat chute surface at an
angle of approach 91 and with approach velocity V1 This particle will then
rebound off the chute plate at an angel 92 and velocity V2 The wear on the
chute liners or the surface shown in Figure 21 will be a function of the vector
change in momentum of the particle One component will be normal to and the
other component parallel to the flat surface The parallel component is referred
to as the scouring component along the surface [29]
It is important to determine the radius of curvature of material within the
trajectory It is now a simple exercise to determine the chute hood radius
depending on plant constraints Firstly the material trajectory must be calculated
The optimisation of transfer chutes in the bulk materials industry
MN van Aarde
31
CHAPTER 2 ---~----------------
According to the mechanical handling engineers association in Perth Australia it
is beneficial to keep the impact angle as small as possible Impact angle less
than 20deg are recommended for most liner materials This will ensure an
acceptably small impulse force component normal to the surface The r~te at
which the material is gouging away the chute liner at the impact point will be
reduced [29]
The material trajectory is determined by equation l
(1)
Where the origin of the x and y axis is taken at the mean material height h and
the discharge point on the pulley as shown in Figure 20 The variables involved
in the calculation of the material trajectory are [30]
y =vertical position on the grid where the trajectory is determined
x = position parallel to the receiving belt line where the trajectory is determined
v = material speed
g =gravitational constant
a =inclination angle of the feeding conveyor
After the material leaves the belt a simplified assumption can be made that it
falls under gravity It is quite clear that in order to minimise the impact angle
the impact plate must follow the path of the material trajectory as far as possible
It will almost never be possible to obtain a contact point between the material and
the chute where there is a smooth contact with no impact angle
This radius of curvature of the material tr~jectory is determined as follows [30
The optimisation of transfer chutes in the bulk materials industry i 32
MN van Aarde
CHAPTER 2
[1 + ( gx )]15 R = vcos8
c (2)
vcos8
Where
g == gravitational constant
v == material speed
8 == Angle at discharge
In order to simplify the manufacturing process of a curved chute the radius must
be constant For a relatively smooth contact between the material and the chute
plate the radius of the curved chute at the point of contact is as close as
possible to the material discharge curvature radius [30] This is rarely possible
on brown field projects due to facility constraints In this case there will be higher
probability for rapid liner wear Each situation must be individually assessed to
determine the best solution
Cross sectional dimensions of the transfer chute must be sufficient to collect the
material and ensure continuous flow without causing blockages At the same
time the chute profile must not result in excessive material speed Material
speed inside the chute will be considered to be excessive when it can not be
controlled to exit the chute at approximately the same velocity to that of the
receiving conveyor Chutes may block for the following reasons [29]
bull Mechanical bridging due to large lumps locking into one another
bull Insufficient cross section causing cohesive material to choke or bridge
bull Inadequate chute inclination causing fines build-up
bull Corner effects or cohesion causing material to stick to the chute walls
The optimisation of transfer chutes in the bulk materials industry
MN van Aarde
33
CHAPTER 2
For the handling of large lumps of material field experience has shown that the
chute cross sectional area should be 25 times the major dimension of the largest
lumps To avoid possible bridging of the material in the chute the
recommendation is to make the inner chute volume as large as possible This
will be guided by the support steelwork around the transfer point [29]
Field experience has shown that it is advisable depending on the material being
transferred that the chute inclination angles be no less than 65deg to 700 Cornerbull
effects should also be avoided where material gets stuck in the inner corners of
chute plate work These angles should preferably be no less than 70 0 bull
25 FEED CHUTE GEOMETRY FOR REDUCED BELT WEAR
The design parameters to reduce both chute and belt wear are interrelated
Research done at the Phalaborwa copper mine is a good case study to prove the
concept of a curved chute profile This mine had specific problems with high belt
wear at transfer points At this facility an in-pit 60 x 89 gyratory crusher and
incline tunnel conveyor was commissioned to haul primary crushed ore A
conventional dead box chute transfers ore from the crusher to a 1800 mm wide
incline conveyor [31]
The maximum lump size handled by this section of the facility is 600 mm (60 kg)
An 18 mm thick top cover was specified for this conveyor with an X grade
rubber according to DIN (abrasion value lt 100 mm) This belt had an original
warranty of 10 years After 35 years the top cover started to show signs of
excessive wear and the tensile cords of the 18 mm thick cover were visible [31]
In April 1994 Phalaborwa commissioned the curved chute concept and a new
belt on the incline conveyor Six months after commissioning no gouging or
pitting damage was evident The material velocity through this curved chute onto
the incline conveyor is shown in Figure 22 [31]
The optimisation of transfer chutes in the bulk materials industry
MN van Aarde
34
CHAPTER 2
VELOCITY ( m I aec ) _ nm _ bull m _ 1211 _ UTI _ U16
_ IIU _ Im _ I rn _ 171-111 _ u n _ ~ l
_ 4 ~
_ 41 _ 4
141 CJ UtiI 1bull-bull 1t5
~ 1m bull UI2
Material Flow Velocity Gradient
Figure 22 Ore flow path in the curved chute onto the incline conveyor [31]
TENDENCY TO FORM STAGNANT LAYER LEADING
TO INSTABILITY IN DEPTH OF FLOW
C8middotFLOW IN CURVED CHUTES
Figure 23 Gentle deceleration of the product before impact on the receiving belt [32]
The optimisation of transfer chutes in the bulk materials industry
MN van Aarde
35
CHAPTER 2
Figure 23 illustrates the gentle deceleration of material that is achieved with the
curved chute concept This helps to reduce belt wear because it is relatively
easy to discharge the material at the same velocity as the receiving conveyor
The material speed v can be calculated at any point in the chute using equation
3 and equation 4 [33]
v 2~R [(2ue2 -l)sin(O) +3ue cos(O)] + Ke 2uB (3) 4ue +1
This equation is only applicable if the curved section of the chute has a constant
radius Rand I-Ie is assumed constant at an average value for the stream [33]
I-Ie = friction coefficient
8 = angle between the horizontal and the section of the spoon where the velocity
is determined and
(4)
The optimisation of transfer chutes in the bulk materjas industry
MN van Aarde
36
CHAPTER 2
Mass Flow Rate Omh
Figure 24 Typical feed chute discharge model [33J
The velocity Ve at the discharge of the chute can be determined from equation 3
and equation 4 The components Vey and Vex of the discharge velocity as
shown in Figure 24 can now be calculated This investigation should aid the
optimisation of the chute profile in order to [33]
bull match the horisontal component Vex of the material exit velocity as close
as possible to the belt speed
bull reduce the vertical component Vey of the material exit velocity in order to
minimize abrasive wear on the receiving conveyor
26 CONCLUSION
This section discussed the technical background necessary for the optimisation
of transfer chutes on an existing iron ore plant which will be discussed in
Chapter 4 The focus is specifically aimed at reducing impact wear on chute liner
materials and abrasive wear on receiving conveyor belts Important to note from
The optimisation oftransfer chutes in the bulk materials industry
MN van Aarde
37
CHAPTER 2
this section is the acceptable limits of dynamic chute optimisation or design
These limits aremiddot
bull a material impact angle of less than 20deg
bull a variance of less than 10 between the receiving belt velocity and the
material discharge velocity component parallel to the receiving conveyor
An important aspect of chute optimisation is to consider the facility constraints
These constraints are in some cases flexible but in most cases the chute
optimisation process must be designed within these constraints This means that
any new concept will have to be measured against what is possible within the
facility limits
It is important to note that only the most common transfer chute problems were
mentioned in this chapter Other possible problems were not addressed in this
chapter as it is normally related to detail design issues Solutions to these
problems are unique to each type of chute and will be addressed for the specific
case study in Chapter 4
The optimisafjon of transfer chutes in the bulk materials industry
MN van Aarde
38
CHAPTER 3
The optimisation of transfer chutes in the bulk materials industry
MN van Aarde
CHAPTER 3 TESTS FOR THE IDENTIFICATION OF RECURRING
PROBLEMS ON EXISTING CHUTES
39
CHAPTER 3
31 PREFACE
Since the completion of a certain iron ore handling facility it has been
experiencing recurring material transfer problems at high capacities In order to
investigate the problem it was decided that performance testing of the chutes
should be carried out The purpose of these tests was to monitor chute
performance at transfer rates of up to the design capacity of 10 000 tlh for
various grades of iron ore handled by the facility Some of the methodologies
used in testing are only applicable to this specific facility
Due to variations and surges associated with the reclaim operations at the
facility performance testing focused on reclaim side chutes This means that all
the transfer points at the exit points of the stockyard conveyors were tested
Nineteen tests were conducted on various stockyard transfers Information such
as the specific facility or conveyor numbers cannot be disclosed due to the
confidentiality of information
To analyse SCADA data the stacker reclaimer scale is used to determine the
peak surges passing through the transfer under investigation The reason for
this is that the peaks in flow due to reclaiming operations flatten out when
passing through the transfer points This is due to chute throat limitations and
small variations in belt speeds If the down stream scales are used it would give
an inaccurate indication of the amount of ore that passed through the transfer
chute
32 TEST METHODOLOGY
A CCTV camera was installed in a strategic position inside the head chute of the
stockyard conveyors These cameras provided valuable information on the
physical behaviour of the material flow inside the transfer chutes Where
possible cameras were also placed on the receiving belt in front of and behind
The optimisation of transfer chutes in the bulk materials industry
MN van Aarde
40
CHAPTER 3
the chute This was done to monitor belt tracking and spillage A high frequency
radio link between the head chute and the control tower made it possible to
monitor the cameras at all times
SCADA data was used to determine and establish the condition of the material
transfer at the time of the test Data from various scales en route were obtained
as well as confirmation of blocked chute signals In analysing the SCADA data
the stacker reclaimer scale is used to determine the peak surges passing through
the transfer being tested
Data was recorded from a sampling plant at the facility This data provides the
actual characteristics of representative samples taken and analysed by the
sampling plant during the duration of the test The data gathered consist of
moisture content of the material sample as well as the size distribution of the ore
Where possible an inspector was placed at the transfer point being tested to
observe and record the performance The inspector had a two way radio for
communication with the test co-ordinator in the central control room He would
also be responsible for the monitoring of any spillage dust emissions etc that
may not be picked up by the cameras
Prior to commencing a test on a specific conveyor route the following checks
had to be performed on all the material conveying equipment
bull Clean out all transfer chutes and remove any material build-up from the
sidewalls
bull Check that feed skirts are properly in position on the belt
bull Check that the conveyor belt is tracking properly at no load
bull Check conveyor idlers are all in position and free to rotate
bull Check blocked chute detectors are operational and in the correct location
The optimisation of transfer chutes in the bulk materials industry
MN van Aarde
CHAPTER 3
bull Change the position of the blocked chute detector if required to improve its
fUnction
bull Test and confirm that the CCTV middotsystems are functioning correctly
bull Assign persons with 2 way radios and cameras to monitor and record the I
results at each transfer point on the route
33 CHUTE PERFORMANCE ACCEPTANCE CRITERIA
A material transfer chute performs to specification if it transfers a maximum of
10 000 tlh of a specific iron are grade without experiencing any of the following
problems
bull Material build up inside the chute or blocking the chute ie material is not
exiting the chute at the same rate as it is entering
bull Material spillage encountered from the top of the transfer chute
bull Material spillage encountered where material is loaded onto the receiving
conveyor
bull Belt tracking of the receiving conveyor is significantly displaced by the
loading of material from the transfer chute onto the conveyor
Tests were conducted over a period of one month and in such a short period
visible wear is difficult to quantify Due to the sensitivity of the information no
historical data in terms of chute or belt wear were made available by the facility
Therefore it is not part of the criteria for these specific tests Should a chute
however fail to perform according to the set criteria it validates the need for
modifications or new designs
34 DISCUSSION OF PROBLEM AREAS
The major concern during the test work is material flow at the transfer points
Secondary concerns are spillage tracking of the receiving belt and material
The optimisation of transfer chutes in the bulk materials industry
MN van Aarde
42
CHAPTER 3
loading onto the receiving belt One of the external factors that playa significant
role in material flow rate is the method and process of reclaiming This section
will highlight all the problem areas observed during the test work
Figure 25 shows the layout of the stockyard area This layout will serve as a
reference when the specific test results at each transfer point are discussed The
legends for Figure 25 are as follows
c=gt Transfer points where performance tests have been done
~ Direction that the conveyors are moving in
CV4 CV3 CV2 CV1
Figure 25 Layout of conveyors for chute test work
All four stockyard conveyors have a moving head arrangement This means that
the chutes are split up into two sections A moving head discharges material
onto either conveyor (CV) 5 or CV 6 via a static transfer chute The moving
head positions are shown by A Band C in Figure 25
The optimisation of transfer chutes in the bulk materials industry
MN van Aarde
43
CHAPTER 3
Position C is the purging or dump position This position is used when the
stacker reclaimer is in stacking mode and any material left on the stockyard
conveyor gets dumped The material does not end up on the stockpiles
preventing contamination
90 de-g TRANSFBt
OfAO BOX IN MOVING HEAD
Figure 26 Configuration of the existing transfer chute
Figure 26 shows the configuration of the existing transfer chutes These chutes
capture the trajectory from the head pulley in a dead box situated in the top part
of the chute The material then cascades down a series of smaller dead boxes
onto the receiving conveyor below
Various grades of iron ore were tested during the testing period These different
grades of iron ore are shown in Table 2 Three fine grades and four coarse
grades were used The coarse material is defined as particles with a diameter of
The optimisation of transfer chutes in the bulk materials industry
MN van Aarde
44
CHAPTER 3
between 12 mm and 34 mm and the fine material with diameters of between
4 mm and 12 mm
Table 2 Iron are grades used for chute test work
Material Predominant Lump Size
Fine K 5mm
Fine N 8mm
Fine A 8mm
Coarse K 25mm
Coarse D 34mm
Coarse S 12 mm
Coarse A 20mm
The CCTV cameras were placed inside the moving head pointing down into the
static chute overlooking the receiving conveyor Figure 27 shows the camera
angle used during testing This is a view of a clear chute before testing The
legends for clarification of all the video images are as follows
Front of the chute throat opening
Top of flowing material at the chute throat opening
Flow pattern of the material
Direction of the receiving belt
The optimisation of transfer chutes in the bulk materials industry
MN van Aarde
45
CHAPTER 3
Figure 27 Clear chute indicating camera angle
341 Coarse Material vs Fine Material
Differences in transfer rates between coarse material and fine material are
evident from the data gathered during the test programme These results are
discussed later in this chapter The area between the yellow arrows and the red
line is the amount of freeboard available Freeboard is the open space available
between the top of the flowing stream of material and the chute plate work
Figure 28 and Figure 29 shows the flow of coarse ore and fine ore respectively in
the same chute at 8 000 tlh
Figure 28 Coarse material at 8 000 tlh
The optimisation of transfer chutes in the bulk materials industry
MN van Aarde
46
CHAPTER 3
Figure 29 Fine material at 8 000 tlh
The amount of freeboard with fine material is much larger than with coarse
material It is therefore obvious that coarse material is more likely to block a
chute when peak surges occur This is due to particles that interlock in the small
discharge opening of the chute
Figure 30 Blocked chute with coarse material at 8 600 tIh
Figure 30 is a snap shot of a chute blocked with coarse ore due to the material
interlocking at the discharge opening The time from material free flowing to a
blocked chute signal was approximately 10 seconds This is determined by
comparing the CCTV camera time to the blocked signal time on the SCADA
The optimisation of transfer chutes in the bulk materials industry
MN van Aarde
47
CHAPTER 3
The high clay content in finer material can also cause problems in the long run
When wet Anes are fed through the chutes a thin layer of Anes builds up and
sticks to the sides of the chute As this layer dries out it forms a new chute liner i
and the next layer builds up This process occurs gradually and will eventually
cause the chute to block
342 Cross Sectional Area
Video images of a blocked chute on the receiving belts were analysed to
determine whether the blockage was caused by material build up on the belt
underneath the chute This indicated that with the occurrence of a blocked chute
the material keeps flowing out of the chute at a constant rate without build up
From this the assumption can be made that in the case of a blocked chute the
material enters the chute at a higher rate than it is discharged at the bottom
Therefore the conclusion can be made that the chute cross sectional area at the
discharge is insufficient to handle the volume of ore at high throughput rates
Tests with a certain type of coarse material yielded a very low flow rate requiring
adjustment to the chute choke plate on the transfer between CV 3 and CV 5
The chute choke plate is basically a sliding door at the bottom of the chute to
adjust the discharge flow of material Tests with another type of coarse material
shown in the summary of test results indicates how the choke plate adjustment
can increase the throughput of material in the chute
Data of all the different types of ore at the facility are obtained at the sampling
building This data shows that the material size distribution for the two types of
coarse material used in the tests mentioned above are the same This indicates
that the test results with the second coarse material are an accurate reflection of
what will be experienced with the first type of coarse material Special care
The optimisation of transfer chutes in the bulk materials industry
MN van Aarde
48
CHAPTER 3
should be taken when adjusting the choke plate to make sure that skew loading
is not induced by the modification
343 Spillag3
During one of the first tests on the transfer between CV 2 and CV 6 spillage
was observed at one of the side skirts on the receiving belt A piece of the side
skirt had been damaged and pushed off the belt as shown by Figure 31 This
caused some of the material to be pushed off the belt when skew loading from
the chute caused the belt to miss track In this case spillage was not caused by
the skirt but by skew loading from the chute onto the receiving conveyor
Figure 31 Damaged side skirt
A greater concern is spillage on the moving head chute of CV 3 and CV 4
loading onto CV 6 It appears as if the head chute creeps during material
transfer onto CV 6 As the chute creeps the horizontal gap between the
moving head chute and the transfer chute reaches approximately 180 mm
Facility operations proposed a temporary solution by moving the head chute to
the dumping or purging position and back to CV 5 before stopping over CV 6
The reason for this creep could be attributed to slack in the moving head winch
cable
The optimisation of transfer chutes in the bulk materials industry
MN van Aarde
49
CHAPTER 3
345 Belt Tracking and Material Loading
The only belt tracking and material loading problems observed occurred on the
transfer between CV 2 and CV 5 I CV 6 A diverter plate was installed at the
bottom of the chute in order to force material flow onto the centre of the receiving conveyor belt This plate now causes material to fall to the left of the receiving
belt causing the belt to track to the right
Figure 32 View behind the chute of the receiving conveyor before loading
Figure 32 shows the view from a CCTV camera placed over the receiving
conveyor behind the chute Note the amount of the idler roller that is visible
before loading
Figure 33 View behind the chute of the receiving conveyor during loading
The optimisation of transfer chutes in the bulk materials industry
MN van Aarde
50
CHAPTER 3
Figure 33 shows the view from a CCTV camera placed over the receiving
conveyor behind the chute during loading Note the difference between the
amount of the idler roller that is visible between Figure 33 and Figure 32 This is
a clear indication of off centre belt tracking due to skew loading I
At the same transfer point it appears as if the configuration of the chute causes
the material to be dropped directly onto the receiving belt from the dead box in
the moving head This will cause high impact wear on the belt in the long run
High maintenance frequencies will be required on the impact rollers underneath
the chute and the roller bearings will have to be replaced frequently
346 Reclaiming Operations
Reclaim operations are done from the stacker reclaimer that scoops up the
material with a bucket wheel from the stockpile The machine starts at the top
bench of the stockpile and reclaims sideways until it is through the stockpile
This sideways movement is repeated while the machine moves down the
stockpile If the machine digs too deep into the stockpile small avalanches can
occur that over fill the buckets This causes peak surges in the flow on the
conveyor system
With an increase in the peak digging or reclaim rate as requested for test work it
seemed that the peak surges increased as well In normal reclaiming operations
(average reclaim rate of 6 000 tlh to 7000 tlh) the peaks in reclaim surges do not
usually exceed 1 000 tlh This is however dependent on the level of the
stockpile from where the machine is reclaiming
At a peak digging or reclaim rate of 8 000 tlh peak surges of up to 2 000 tlh were
observed as can be seen from Figure 34 All stacker reclaimers are operated
manually and the depth of the bucket wheel is determined by monitoring the
The optimisation of transfer chutes in the bulk materials industry
MN van Aarde
51
CHAPTER 3
reclaimer boom scale reading (yellow line) This makes it difficult to reclaim at a
constant rate
The reason for the high peak surges is due to avalanches on the stockpile
caused by reclaiming on the lower benches without first taking away the top
material The blue line in Figure 34 represents a conveyor scale reading after
the material has passed through a series of transfer chutes It is clear that the
peaks tend to dissipate over time as the peaks on the blue line are lower and
smoother than that on the yellow line
IlmJ
bull I _ bull It bull bull bull bull
--ErI--E--~---h--E=+[J]--EiE ~ J~~~ middot middot -~L I-~f~1-1shyt~=tt~~J~~v5 i ~ ~ ~ ~ ~ i ~ 1 ~ ~ ~ s ~ ------ ~-- - ------ - _ - -------- -- -- - _---- -- -r - --- -_shyp
C)
~ 1r =r=l[=1 -It-1 -- -~ -t= --shy~ _middotmiddot -r middotr middot middot [middot _r _ _ r- middotmiddot rmiddot middotmiddot -r- rmiddot-- middot- middotmiddot -rmiddot -r-middotmiddot middotr lXgtO middotmiddotmiddotmiddotmiddotmiddotmiddotmiddot[middotmiddotmiddotmiddotmiddotmiddotmiddotlmiddotmiddotmiddotmiddotmiddotmiddotlmiddotmiddotmiddotmiddotmiddotmiddotmiddotmiddotimiddotmiddotmiddotmiddotmiddotmiddotmiddotmiddotr-middotmiddotmiddotmiddot j middotmiddot1middotmiddotmiddotmiddotmiddot1middotmiddotmiddotmiddotmiddotmiddotmiddot1middotmiddotmiddotmiddotmiddot middotlmiddotmiddotmiddotmiddottmiddotmiddotmiddotmiddotmiddotmiddotmiddotjmiddot I~ [ bullbullbullbullbullbullbull [ bullbullbull middotmiddotmiddot1middotmiddotmiddotmiddotmiddotmiddot1middotmiddotmiddotmiddotmiddotmiddotmiddotmiddot1middotmiddotmiddotmiddotmiddotmiddotmiddotmiddot middotmiddotmiddotmiddotmiddotmiddotmiddotmiddoti~middotmiddotmiddotmiddotmiddotmiddotmiddotmiddottmiddotmiddotmiddotmiddotmiddotmiddotmiddotrmiddotmiddotmiddot middotrmiddotmiddotmiddotmiddotmiddotmiddot~middotmiddotmiddotmiddotmiddotmiddotmiddotmiddot1middotmiddotmiddotmiddotmiddotmiddotmiddotmiddotimiddotmiddotmiddot
t) cent
~ i i l i i i i i i i it ~ 8 ~ ~ S l i
~~ Ii ~ ~ g i i ~ 4 1 J yen i
s a e 11 JI as $ $ ~ IS IS e It
Time
-Con~SCO=-E___S~ SCALE
Figure 34 Peak surges experienced during reclaiming operations
347 Other Problem Areas
Some blockages on other chutes at the facility occurred while testing the
stockyard chutes These blockages are also shown in Table 3 where the test
The optimisation of transfer chutes in the bulk materials industry
MN van Aarde
52
CHAPTER 3
results are discussed and to raise awareness that the bottlenecks on site are not
only caused by problems on the tested chutes
A chute downstream from the stockyards encountered a blockage with fine I
material when the flow rate reached 11 OOb tfh Although this is higher than the
test maximum of 10 000 tfh it still raises concern as to why the chute blocked so
severely that it took approximately two hours to clear
Another bottleneck is the transfer point between the feed conveyor of CV 2 and
the discharge chute on CV 2 This transfer point blocked with fine material at a
peak just below 10 000 tfh It should be even worse with coarse are as
previously discussed Due to the configuration of the head chute spillage of
scraper dribblings is also of great concern The main stream of material
interferes with the flow path of the dribbling material Therefore the carry back
scraped off the bottom of the feeding belt cannot i~ow down the chute and is
pushed over the sides of the chute
The optimisation of transfer chutes in the bulk maferias industry
MN van Aarde
53
CHAPTER 3
35 SUMMARY OF TEST RESULTS
Table 3 Results from test programme
Transfer Point Material Tested Test No Peak Capacity Blocked Chute
CV11 CV5 Yes
Fines N 14 10000 tlh No
Fines N 15 10000tlh No
CV 11 CV6 Coarse K 20 9300 tlh No
Fines K 4 10600tlh No
Fines A 19 9633 tlh No
CV31 CV5 Yes
Yes
Yes
Coarse A 17 9427 tlh No
CV31 CV6 Coarse K 7 10195t1h Yes
Coarse K 8 11 000 tlh Yes
CV41 CV5 Coarse A 16 10307 tlh No
No (Mech trip on
CV4CV6 Fines K 10 10815 tlh downstream conveyor)
Coarse K 11 8000 tlh No
Fines A 18 10328 tlh No
No (Feed to CV 2
CV21 CV5 Fines N 13 10 000 tlh blocked)
CV21 Coarse K 1 amp 2 10 153 tlh No
No (Blocked chute on
Fines K 3 11 000 tlh downstream transfer)
The optimisation of transfer chutes in the bulk materials industry
MN van Aarde
54
CHAPTER 3
Table 3 shows the results obtained from all the tests on the stockyard conveyor
discharge chutes Where possible the same material grade was tested more
than once on the same transfer in order to confirm the repetitiveness of the test
The tests shown in red indicate the transfers that blocked at a flow rate of less
than 10000 tlh
Coarse K and Coarse 0 are noted as the critical materials for blocked chutes
caused by a peak surge Tests with Coarse K and Coarse S where a blocked
chute occurred at just over 10 000 tlh can also be considered as failed tests
This is due to the lack of a safety margin freeboard inside the chute When
analysing the video images a build up can be seen at a flow rate of less than
10000 tlh
Table 3 indicates that the fine material did not cause blocked chutes but it was
seen that it did fill up the chute throat area in some cases Although the coarse
material grades are shown as being least suitable for high flow rates the fine
material should not be underestimated for its ability to cause blockages The
finer materials normally have higher clay contents than the coarse grades and
therefore stick to the chute walls more easily_
36 CONCLUSION
At lower capacities (7 000 tlh to 8 000 tlh) the material appear to flow smoothly
inside the chutes without surging or building up in the chute This flow rate
normally does not cause spillage or skew loading on the receiving conveyor belt
On average as the flow rate approaches 9 000 tlh the material in the chute
throat area starts packing together and finally blocks up the chute
At transfer rates greater than 9 000 tlh the available area inside the chutes is
completely filled up This causes material to build up or surge inside the chute
which eventually results in the chute choking and the inlet flow becomes greater
The optimisation of transfer chutes in the bulk materials industry
MN van Aarde
55
CHAPTER 3
than the outlet flow Depending on the volume of the chute the choked state can
only be maintained for a certain period of time If the inlet flow does not
decrease it will cause a blocked chute
Peak surges of up to 10 000 tfh were recorded in most tests which involved a
material surge inside the chute but without the occurrence of a blocked chute trip
Although no blocked chute signal was given in these cases the ability of the
chutes to transfer continuously at flow rates of between 9 000 tfh and 10 000 tfh
is not very reliable
Continuous transfer at flow rates approaching 9 000 tfh seems attainable in most
cases but due to the limited freeboard available in the chute throat area the
chutes will easily become prone to blocking Due to the high peak surges at an
increased maximum reclaim rate the amount of freeboard is critical If the
design criteria of the chute were intended to accommodate these large surges
then all the chutes failed this test This can be attributed to the fact that no
freeboard is left at a maximum reclaim rate of 9 000 tfh
With the background available from the test programme it is clear that further
investigation is required to obtain a solution to these problems All the
information gathered can be integrated and utilised to provide a solution A
possible solution can then be tested against the problems found with the current
transfer chutes
The optimisation of transfer chutes in the bulk materials industry
MN van Aarde
56
CHAPTER 4
CHAPTER 4 DYNAMIC CHUTES FOR THE ELIMINATION OF
RECURRING PROBLEMS
The optimisation of transfer chutes in the bulk materials industry
MN van Aarde
57
CHAPTER 4
41 PREFACE
After completion of the chute test programme the decision was made to improve
the old transfer configuration by installing a dynamic chute The reason for the
dynamic chute is to increase the material speed and decrease the stream cross
sectional area The dead boxes in the older chute slowed the material down and
the restriction on transfer height resulted in the material not being able to gain
enough speed after impacting on the dead boxes
A dynamic chute configuration is investigated in this chapter As the new chute
is fitted within the existing steelwork there are certain constraints that determine
the new configuration All the constraints and limitations discussed in this section
are specific to the facility under discussion
The new chute design basically consists of a hood and spoon which retains the
kinetic energy in the material stream as it is transferred from one conveyor to the
other This will reduce the creation of dust in the chute and help to discharge the
material at a velocity closer to that of the receiving conveyor The new design
does however experience high wear which was not a problem with the old chutes
due to large dead boxes
In order to fit the optimum design of a dynamic chute within the existing structure
some changes are required to the positioning of the feed conveyor head pulley
These changes are necessary to accommodate the discharge trajectory from the
feeding conveyor
The radii of the hood and spoon are specified in such a way that the impact wear
is reduced significantly In addition both the hood and spoon are fitted with a
removable dead box section in the impact zones The incorporation of these
sections makes this chute revolutionary in the sense of ease of maintenance
The optimisation of transfer chutes in the bulk materials industry
MN van Aarde
58
CHAPTER 4
This new chute addresses all problems identified at the facility and aims to
eliminate most of them
Tests were carried out to identify worst case materials for flow and wear
Different liner materials were tested for both flow and wear conditions The
outcome of these tests is used as the basis for the design of a new chute As
different conditions for flow and wear inside the chute exist different liners are
investigated for each section inside the chute
42 CONSIDERATION OF THE EXISTING TRANSFER POINT CONSTRAINTS
The stockyard consists of four stacker reclaimers and several transfer points
feeding onto the two downstream conveyors resulting in a very intricate system
This system has numerous requirements which need to be addressed when
considering a new transfer chute configuration The transfers under discussion
are situated at the head end of the stockyard conveyors
MOV1NG HEAD OER MOvm poundAD OVER CVI6 CVIS
t4CLIE SECTION
PURGING POSmON
Figure 35 Stockyard head end layout
The design of a new transfer chute configuration is restricted to a certain extent
by the existing structures on site Figure 35 provides an overall view of the
existing steelwork at the head end of the stockyard conveyor This existing steel
structure can be modified to suit a new configuration but does have some fixed
The optimisation of transfer chutes in the bulk materials industry
MN van Aarde
59
CHAPTER 4
constraints A good example of these constraints is the transfer height between
the stockyard conveyor and the downstream conveyors CV 5 and 6
On both sides of the stockyard conveyor stockpiles of ore can be reclaimed and
deposited onto the conveyor This facility allows a certain travel for the stacker
reclaimer along the stockyard conveyor for the stacking and reclaiming of
material The most forward position of the stacker reclaimer is at the beginning
of the incline section of the stockyard conveyor As previously explained any
curvature in a conveyor requires a certain minimum radius When the transfer
height is raised the radius constraints on that curvature in the stockyard
conveyor will reduce stockyard space This means that the storage capacity at
the facility will be greatly diminished
I ~
j
Figure 36 Dimensional constraints on the existing transfer configuration
The ideal is to stay within the eXisting critical dimensions as shown in Figure 36
As functionality of the chute dictates the chute configuration these dimensions
can be modified within certain constraints These critical dimensions on the
existing configuration are
The optimisation of transfer chutes in the bulk materials industry
MN van Aarde
60
CHAPTER 4
bull Centre of receiving belt to centre of the head pulley 800 mm
bull Bottom of receiving belt to top of the head pulley 4048 mm
The head pulley can however be moved back a certain amount before it
becomes necessary to change the entire incline section of the stockyard
conveyor As the moving head moves forward and backward there are idler cars
trailing behind the moving head carriage as shown in Figure 35 The purpose of
these idler cars is to support the belt when the moving head is feeding onto
CV 6 or when it is standing in the purging position
43 DESIGN OF THE CHUTE PROFILE
431 Design Methodology
Proven standard methods for the functional design of the chute are used These
hand calculation methods are based on the Conveyor Equipment Manufacturers
Association (CEMA) standard as well as papers from Prof AW Roberts These
are typically calculations for determining the discharge trajectory optimal radius
of the hood and spoon as well as the velocity of material passing through the
chute
In addition to standard methods of carrying out conceptual flow design it is
supplemented by the use of Discrete Element Modelling (OEM) simulation
software This is done to visualise the flow of material through the chute
Results from standard calculation methods are compared to the outputs of the
OEM simulations to confirm both results Chapter 5 will focus on the use of
Discrete Element Modelling for the design and verification of chute concepts
The optimisation of transfer chutes in the bulk materials industry
MN van Aarde
61
CHAPTER 4 -__-----__---_----------shy
432 Design Development
Figure 37 shows the concept of the hood and spoon chute for a 90deg transfer as
required by the facility layout The decision to opt for a hood and spoon chute is
based on trying to retain the material velocity when transferring material from the
feeding conveyor to the receiving conveyors Retention of material velocity is
critical as the transfer height is restricted The overall facility constraints for
design are as follows
bull Feeding belt speed - 45 ms
bull Receiving belt speed - 45 ms
bull Transfer height - 401 m
bull Belt widths -1650 mm
bull Maximum material throughput -10000 tlh
As this is a retrofit of an existing facility some of the facility constraints cannot be
changed This forms part of the design development as it steers the design in a
certain direction Due to the fact that the transfer height cannot be changed the
chute profile will be dependent on the transfer height restriction
The optimisation of transfer chutes in the bulk matefials industry
MN van Aarde
62
CHAPTER 4
START-UP CHrrlE
DRlBBIlNG CHUTE
Figure 37 Hood and spoon configuration for the 90 transfer
The optimum solution for the correct chute profile in this situation would be to
move the head pulley back far enough This should be done so that the hood
can receive the material trajectory at a small impact angle and still discharge
centrally onto the spoon However the head pulley can only be moved back a
certain amount Any further movement will require changes to the structure of
the feeding conveyor incline section
As the stockyard conveyors feed onto two receiving conveyors the head pulley
of the stockyard conveyors is situated on a moving head rail car This enables
the conveyor to discharge either on CV 5 or CV 6 as shown in Figure 25
Taking the movement of the head pulley into account the moving head rail car
can be shortened by 1000 mm in order to move the head pulley back As stated
in the preface all changes are distinctive to this facility alone However it is
important to be aware of the consequences of every modification
The optimisation of transfer chutes in the bulk materials industry
MN van Aarde
63
CHAPTER 4 -__----- ------shy
433 Determination of the Profile
An important of the hood and spoon design is to ensure a
discharge from the hood onto the centre of the spoon The is
determined using equation (1) in section 24 Although various material
are transferred it does not have a significant effect on the calculated trajectory
the bulk properties of the materials are very similar It is however important
to the material which will transferred obtain the flow angles and wear
This information the will be
the Liner selection for this case study is discussed in Appendix A
After the trajectory has been determined the hood radius can determined by
using equation (2) As head pulley can move 1 000 mm backward the
possible hood radius was determined to 2 577 mm This hood radius is
VIU(I(1 to produce the wear on the zone in chute
The impact angle at this radius is 11 which is less than the maximum
allowable limit of 20
The hood radius is chosen to as close as possible to radius of curvature of
the material trajectory The point where the hood radius and the trajectory radius
cross is known as the impact point In to determine the velocity
point in hood the at is required on the
hood from the horizontal where the material impacts and to slide down the
hood surface
In this case the position impact hood is at 558r from the horizontal
In to determine the velocity this angle e is used as starting
point in (3) obtain a complete velocity profile angle from where
the material impacts hood is decreased in increments 5 up to the
discharge point which is normally 0
The optimisation chutes in the bulk materials industry
MN van Aarde
64
-----
CHAPTER 4
Hood Velocity Profile
70
--- --~ 6 0
5 0
40 ~_
~ 30 g --- a 20 gt
10
00
60 50 40 30 20 10 o Theta (Position inside the hood)
Figure 38 Hood velocity profile
The spoon radius is determined in such a way that the wear at the point of impact
is kept to a minimum At the same time the horizontal component of the material
exit velocity is as close as possible to the receiving belt speed Firstly the
assumption is made that the initial velocity of material in the spoon is equal to the
exit velocity of material from the hood This yields a spoon entry velocity of
633 ms and can also be seen from Figure 38
By reiterating various radii for the spoon the optimum exit velocity Ve can be
obtained These radii are selected according to the available space in which the
spoon must fit and also to produce the smallest impact angle for material
discharging from the hood This table is set up to display the different exit
velocities at various spoon radii The exit velocity is also dependent on the exit
angle which is determined by the length of the spoon arc In this case the spoon
radius is chosen as 3 575 mm An exit angle of 38deg from the horizontal yields an
exit velocity closer to the receiving belt speed
The optimisation of transfer chutes in the bulk materials industry
MN van Aarde
65
CHAPTER 4
Spoon Velocity Profile
67
66
65
S 64 amp0 g 6 3
V
v-shy ~ ~
ii ~ gt 62
61 I I 60
o 10 20 30 40 50 60
Theta (position inside the spoon)
Figure 39 Spoon velocity profile
Taken from the origin of the spoon radius the material position in the spoon at
discharge is sr The selection of this angle is guided by the geometry of the
chute and surrounding structures This angle is then used to calculate the exit
velocity as shown in Figure 39 At this point the discharge angle relative to the
conveyor angle is 38deg Ve is then determined to be 6087 ms with a velocity
component of 479 ms in the direction of the belt This value is 618 higher
than the belt speed of 4S ms which is acceptable as it is within the allowable
10 range of variation Minimal spillage and reduced wear on the receiving
conveyor is expected
Both the hood and spoon have a converged profile This is done in order to
minimise spillage and ensure a smooth transfer of material from the hood to the
spoon and from the spoon to the receiving conveyor The converged profile
starts out wide to capture any stray particles and converges to bring the material
particles closer together at the discharge This profile does not influence the
transfer rate of the chute as the stream of material through the chute is no more
The optimisation of transfer chutes in the bulk materials industry
MN van Aarde
66
CHAPTER 4
compact than the material on the conveyor belt before and after the transfer
chute
44 INCORPORATING ADEAD BOX IN THE IMPACT AREAS
In chapter 1 reference is made to a chute design utilising pipe sections with a
rounded profile The flat back plate is chosen instead of a rounded pipe type
section to house the honeycomb dead box configuration It would be possible to
fit the honeycomb into a rounded back section but manufacturing and
maintenance would be unnecessarily difficult and expensive
Furthermore the cross section profile of the chute shows three sliding surfaces
as shown in These surfaces consist of the back plate two vertical side plates
and two diagonal plates This is done in order to increase the angle between
adjoining plates so that the probability of material hanging up in the corners is
reduced This helps to alleviate the risk of experiencing blocked chutes
Figure 40 Chute cross section
The optimisation of transfer chutes in the bulk materials industry
M N van Aarde
67
CHAPTER 4
441 Honeycomb Wear Box in the Hood
A honeycomb or wear box is incorporated into this chute configuration in order to
further minimise wear in the hood and spoon The honeycomb configuration is
clearly shown in and is typical for both the hood and spoon Reduced wear will I
be achieved as impact and sliding will take place on the basis of material on
material flow Ore is captured inside the honeycomb pockets which protects the
ceramic lining in the section of the honeycomb and creates another sliding face
made of the material being transferred The ribs in the wear box do not protrude
from the sliding face of the chute and therefore do not interfere with the main
stream flow of material
Positioning of the honeycomb is critical as the point of impact on the hood needs
to be on the honeycomb This is required in order to assure that the highest
material impact is absorbed by a layer of static material inside the honeycomb
and not the chute liners All the basic steps for designing a normal hood and
spoon chute are followed Firstly the angle at impact (8e) is calculated to
determine where the trajectory of material will cross the radius of the hood This
shows the position of the impact point on the hood Figure 20 indicates where 8e
is calculated As previously stated the angle at impact for this situation is
558r This is calculated using [33]
e = tan- I ( 1 ) (5)
C Ii
And y is defined by equation 1
This gives an indication as to where the honeycomb should be situated in order
to capture the material impacting the hood fully A flow simulation package can
also be used to determine the position of this honeycomb structure shows an
opening for the honeycomb which starts at 40deg clockwise from the vertical This
The optimisation of transfer chutes in the bulk materials industry 68
MN van Aarde
CHAPTER 4
means that there are almost 16deg of free space in the honeycomb to ensure that
the material will always impact inside the wear box
There is no set specification as to the size of this free space This is just to
accommodate any surges of mat~rial on the feeding conveyor As discussed in
Chapter 3 due to avalanches while reclaiming from the stockpiles material
surges on the conveyors is a reality
Figure 41 Honeycomb wear box positioning
illustrates exactly where this wear box is situated on the back plate of the hood
This configuration is very similar to that of the spoon as both wear boxes only
cover the width of the flat back plate of the hood and spoon The reason for this
is that most of the material impact and mainstream flow strikes the back plate
The optimisation of transfer chutes in the bulk materials industry
MN van Aarde
69
CHAPTER 4
WEAR BOX
Figure 42 Wear box in the hood section
All the horizontal ribs of the honeycomb are spaced 5deg apart and there are 5
vertical ribs following the converging contour of the hood as shown in Spacing
of the ribs depends largely on the maximum lump size handled by the transfer
In this case the largest lumps are approximately 34 mm in diameter The idea is
to get as many dead boxes into the honeycomb as possible These small
cavities should however be large enough to capture a substantial amount of ore
inside
The optimisation of transfer chutes in the bulk materials industry
MN van Aarde
70
CHAPTER 4 ----_----------------shy
Figure 43 Spacing arrangement of honeycomb ribs inside the hood
The two vertical liners on the edges of the honeycomb are only 65 mm high while
the rest of the vertical liners are 120 mm high This is done so that the flat liners
in the chute surface can overlap the edge liners of the honeycomb An open
groove between the tiles along the flow of material would cause the liners to be
worn through much faster than in normal sliding abrasion conditions Due to the
high wear characteristics of the ore all openings between tiles should be kept out
of the mainstream flow
All the ribs in the honeycomb are 50 mm thick and vary in depth The vertical
ribs protrude the horizontal ribs by 30 mm in order to channel the flow These
vertical ribs are all flush with the surrounding tiles on the flat sliding surface of the
hood All the pockets of the wear box are 120 mm deep measured from the top
of the vertical ribs Again dimension is dependent on the maximum lump size
handled by the transfer There are no specifications as to the relation between
the pocket size and the lump size These dimensions were chosen to be
approximately 4 times the lump size Computer simulations can be used to test
the feasibility of this concept while commissioning of the equipment will ultimately
show whether this method works
The optimisation of transfer chutes in the bulk materials industry
MN van Aarde
71
CHAPTER 4 ------------_ -- - ---------------shy
442 Honeycomb wear box in the spoon
The honeycomb wear box in the spoon has the same configuration as in the
hood It also covers the entire width of the back plate and fully accommodates
the material impacting on the spoon from the hood The entire spoon is broken
up into three sections and the honeycomb wear box is situated in the back
section as shown in
Figure 44 Wear box in the spoon section
With almost the same configuration as the hood the spoon also has a corner
liner to ensure a continuous lined face between the flat surface liners and the
honeycomb ribs The detail of these liners and ribs are shown in A 90deg transfer
with a hood and spoon chute means that the stream received by the spoon is
narrower and longer than the stream received by the hood This is caused when
the material takes the shape of the hood before it is discharged into the spoon
The converged configuration causes the stream to flatten against the sliding
surface in the chute
The optimisation of transfer chutes in the bulk materials industry
MN van Aarde
72
CHAPTER 4
Due to the spoon honeycomb being a bit narrower than the hood there are only
three vertical ribs The number of ribs had to be reduced to be able to
accommodate the preferred cavity size of the honeycomb boxes These ribs now
form two channels in which the stream of material can be directed
Figure 45 Liner detail of the spoon honeycomb wear box
As shown in there is a 3 mm gap between the honeycomb section and the chute
plate work This is to ensure that the honeycomb section can be easily removed
for maintenance on the liners All the edges of the liners have rounded corners
to reduce stress concentrations which can cause rapid liner failure
45 DESIGNING THE CHUTE FOR INTEGRATION WITH SYSTEM REQUIREMENTS
The arc length of the spoon back plate is longer and closer to the belt in order to
ensure a smooth transfer of material from the chute to the receiving conveyor A
small gap of 75 mm is left between the bottom of the spoon and the receiving
conveyor Due to the fact that material can also be fed from another upstream
The optimisation of transfer chutes in the bulk materials industry
MN van Aarde
73
CHAPTER 4
stockyard conveyor this configuration will not be suitable This means that the
gap of 75 mm is not enough to allow material to pass underneath the chute
To accommodate this situation the spoon is split into different sections where the
bottom section lifts up to make room for material from behind In the raised
position the gap between the chute and the belt is 450 mm When the lower belt
is loaded to full capacity the material height is 380 mm This means that the
clearance to the belt in the non operational position is sufficient and show the
operational and non operational positions of the spoon
T -t t----~r_-+-wtIY1shy
Figure 46 Spoon in the operational position
The optimisation of transfer chutes in the bulk materials industry
MN van Aarde
74
CHAPTER 4
Figure 47 Spoon in the non operational position
This section is a discussion on how this new transfer chute configuration should
be operated in order to comply with the facility requirements The bottom section
of the chute can be lifted out of the way of material from behind on the receiving
conveyor Therefore a control philosophy is required for this movement
Referring to Figure 25 positions A and B indicate where these new chutes will be
installed As previously stated position C is the purging or dump position and
show the actuated spoon section in the operating and non operating positions
The conditions for these positions are explained as follows
46 CONCLUSION
With the consideration of all the facility constraints and a conceptual idea of what
the transfer configuration should look like the design can be optimised When
the feeding belt velocity is known the material trajectory and optimum chute
radius can be determined This radius and the radius of the spoon must then be
corrected to comply with the facility constraints but still deliver the required
material transfer rate
The optimisation of transfer chutes in the bulk materials industry
MN van Aarde
75
CHAPTER 4
With the high cost implications of regular maintenance intervals on chute liners
and facility downtime a honeycomb structure is incorporated into the high impact
areas The purpose of this honeycomb structure is to form small pockets similar
to dead boxes in order to promote material on material flow This increases the
lifetime of the chute liners and reduces maintenance intervals
This specific transfer chute splits up easily into separate sections and will help to
simplify maintenance The bottom section of the chute is actuated to move up
and down depending on whether the chute is in operation or not This will ensure
optimum transfer of material while in operation and provide sufficient clearance
when not in operation This is again guided by the facility requirements
In the design of all the transfer chute components the physical properties of the
ore should always be considered This determines the chute profile in terms of
flow angles and liner selection With maximum material flow ability high
resistance to sliding abrasion and reduced maintenance cost in mind 94
alumina ceramics is the liner of choice This is only in the main flow areas of the
chute For the dribbling chute a polyurethane liner is used to promote the flow of
this sticky material
The optimisation of transfer chutes in the bulk materials industry
MN van Aarde
76
CHAPTER 5
CHAPTER 5 TESTING AND VERIFICATION OF THE NEW SOLUTION
- middotSmiddotmiddotmiddotmiddotmiddotmiddotmiddotmiddotmiddot-middotl~Oi
The optimisation of transfer chutes in the bulk materials industry 77
MN van Aarde
CHAPTER 5
51 PREFACE
Although hand calculations have been a proven method of design for many
years it is important to verify any new chute concept before fabrication and
implementation Confirming the concept can save time and money as it reduces
the risk of on-site modifications Hand calculations only supply a two
dimensional solution to the problem which does not always provide accurate
material flow profiles
In recent years a few material flow simulation packages have been developed to
aid the design of material handling equipment The use of software packages
can be beneficial to the design process as it gives a three dimensional view of
the material behaviour in the chute This means that changes to the chute
concept can be made prior to fabrication
It is however important to verify that the solution obtained from the software
package is an accurate reflection of actual design model Therefore the material
being handled should be thoroughly tested to obtain the correct physical
properties required to obtain an accurate simulation result
The use of material flow simulation software does not replace the necessity for
hand calculations All the basic steps should still be done to derive a conceptual
chute configuration Material flow simulation software should be used as a
complimentary tool to analytical hand calculations in the design process
The optimisation of transfer chutes in thebulk materials industry
MN van Aarde
78
CHAPTER 5
52 SELECTING A TEST METHODOLOGY
Traditionally transfer chutes were designed by using basic analytical calculations
and relying on empirical data from past experiences with other chutes Mostly
these analytical methods only cater for the initial part of the chute such as the
parabolic discharge trajectory It is difficult to determine what happens to the
flow of material after it strikes the chute wall [34]
Two methods of verification were usually applied to evaluate a new transfer
chute configuration Trial and error can be used but obviously this is not desired
due to the high cost implications A second method is to build a small scale
model of the chute in which tests can be carried out before a final design can be
adopted This physical modelling is however time consuming and
expensive [34]
Granular or particulate materials are composed of a large number of loosely
packed individual particles or grains The flow of such granular materials forms
an intricate part of the materials handling industry Small reductions in energy
consumption or increases in production can have great financial advantages
Therefore significant efforts are put into improving the efficiency of these
facilities The important role of numerical simUlations is becoming more evident
in these optimisation procedures [35] Due to these efforts this technology is
becoming more powerful and is easy to use as a verification method for transfer
chute designs
The behaviour of bulk material particles is unique in the sense that it exhibits
some of the properties associated with the gaseous liquid and solid states of
matter The granular state of bulk materials cannot be characterised by anyone
of these states alone The research that captures the contact between individual
particles in an explicit manner is known as discrete element methods (OEM) [36]
The optimisation of transfer chutes in the bulk materials industry
MN van Aarde
79
CHAPTER 5
In basic terms OEM explicitly models the dynamic motion and mechanical
interactions of each body or particle as seen in the physical material flow It is
also possible to obtain a detailed description of the velocities position and force
acting on each particle at a discrete point during the analysis This is achieved
by focusing on the individual grain or body rather than focusing on the global
body as is the case with the finite element approach [36]
Figure 48 illustrates two examples of how this OEM software can be applied
Obviously the flow characteristics differ between the applications shown in Figure
48 This is however catered for by the mathematical simulation of each particle
collision
Figure 48 Flow analysis examples a) separation and screening b) hoppers feeders 36]
Continuous improvements in the performance of computing systems make OEM
a realistic tool for use in a wide range of process design and optimisation
applications During the last 20 years the capabilities of OEM have progressed
from small scale two dimensional simulations to much more complex 3D
applications The latest high performance desk top computers make it possible
to simulate systems containing large numbers of particles within a reasonable
time [37]
The optimisation of transfer chutes in the bulk materials industry
MN van Aarde
80
CHAPTER 5
According to the institute for conveyor technologies at the Otto-von-Guericke
University of Magdeburg in Germany using OEM for bulk solid handling
equipment provides [38]
bull A cost effective method of simulating the utility of materials handling
equipmentshy
bull Precise control over complicated problem zones eg transfer chutes
redirection stations and high wear areas
bull The possibility to integrate processes in one simulation such as mixing and
segregation
bull The possibility to involve the customer more extensively in the design
process
bull An advantage in the market due to attractive video sequences and pictures
of the simulation
bull The possibility to prevent facility damages and increase the efficiency of
conveyor systems extensively
As a good example of the advantages of the discrete element method the
University of Witwatersrand in Johannesburg did studies on rotary grinding mills
The university studies have shown that the OEM qualitatively predicts the load
motion of the mill very well The improved knowledge of the behaviour of mills
can therefore increase the profitability of mineral processing operations [39]
This material handling equipment is generally costly to operate and inefficient in
the utilisation of energy for breakage In order to understand the behaviour of
mills better the OEM method is increasingly being applied to the modelling of the
load behaviour of grinding mills These results indicate that this method can be
applied successfully in the bulk materials handling industry
The apUmisatian af transfer chutes in the bulk materials industry
MN van Aarde
81
CHAPTERS
Another example where this technology has been used with great success is with
the design of a new load out chute for the Immingham coal import terminal in
Britain By simulating the flow with a OEM package the designers were aided in
the fact that they were supplied with a quantitative description of the bulk solid
movement through the chute In the opinion of Professor Franz Kessler
(University of Leoben) the Discrete Element Method provides the engineer with
unique detailed information to assist in the design of transfer points [3]
These simulation packages are at the moment very expensive and not widely
used in transfer chute design It can be anticipated that the utilisation of these
packages will increase as the technology improves and the cost of the software
goes down [40] To get the best value out of the simulation it is important to
compare simulation packages and select the one most suitable to the complexity
of the design
Fluenttrade is a two dimensional computational fluid dynamics (CFD) software
package which can also be used as a chute design aid through the simulation of
material flow It must however be noted that this is not a OEM simulation
package This software package simulates the flow of material by considering
the material particles as a liquid substance The output of the simulation is the
same as can be seen in the example of Figure 49 The colours in the simulation
represent the average particle spacing [40] Due to the fact that this package
can at this stage only deliver two dimensional simulations it is considered
inadequate to perform detailed simulations on the intricate design piscussed in
this dissertation
The optjmisation of transfer chutes in the bulk materials industry
MN van Aarde
82
CHAPTER 5
COnroUf Votume t-~bn 01 ( 00 frlm~2 5000amp1 00) ~gtJ C3_2002 fLUENT 60 (2lt1 9 940 n 1Mgt u ody)
Figure 49 Simulations results from Fluenttrade [40]
The Overland Conveyor Company provides another alternative to the Fluent
software package Applied OEM is a technology company that provides discrete
element software to a variety of users in the bulk materials industry Bulk Flow
Analysttrade is an entry level package that they provide This package is very
powerful in the sense that it can accurately predict flow patterns depending on
the accuracy of the inputs An example of this is shown in Figure 50 It also has
the capability to show material segregation dynamic forces and velocities [41]
Figure 50 Simulation results from Bulk Flow Analysttrade [41]
The optimisation of transfer chutes in the bulk materials industry
MN van Aarde
83
CHAPTER 5
OEM Solutions is a world leader in discrete element modelling software They
recently announced the release of the latest version of their flow simulation
package called EOEM 21 This package can be used to simulate and optimise
bulk material handling and processing operations [41] Oue to the capabilities of
this software package it is a very attractive option for designing transfer chutes
With the development of EOEM 21 OEM Solutions worked in collaboration with
customers in the Bulk Handling Mining and Construction Pharmaceutical
Chemical and Agricultural sectors This enables the end users to perform more
sophisticated particle simulations specific to their unique applications Also
incorporated into this package is the ability and flexibility to customise and
personalise advanced particle properties [42]
This specific package has been proven successful by industry leaders Martin
Engineering (Neponset Illinois) is a leading global supplier of solids handling
systems This company continues to expand their use of EOEM software in
design optimisation and development of bulk materials handling products These
optimisation and development actions include all aspects of conveyor systems
and transfer points for numerous industrial sectors [43]
There are several other OEM simulation packages such as ESYS Particle
Passage-OEM and YAOE However none of these software packages seem be
major industry role players in the discipline of chute design although they might
have the capability In adjudicating the three big role players in bulk material flow
simulation packages there are a few factors taken into consideration It appears
thatthe advantages of 30 capabilities are non negotiable Therefore Fluenttrade is
not really a consideration From the literature review of the Bulk Flow Analysttrade
and the EOEM packages it seems that these two will provide more or less the
same performance It does seem however that the EOEM software is a bigger
role player in various industries Due to the possible future capabilities of EOEM The optimisation of transfer chutes in the bulk materials industry
MN van Aarde
84
CHAPTER 5
through its association with numerous industries this simulation package is the
software of choice
In order to retrofit or design a new transfer point with the aid of the selected OEM
software package there are a few steps that a designer must follow to gain the
full benefit of this tool [36]
1 An accurate 3D or CAD representation of the new or old transfer chute
must be rendered
2 Identify restrictions and limitations in terms of chute geometry and
manufacturing
3 Identify desired design goals (Le dust emissions flow restrictions etc)
4 Identify representative material properties and particle descriptions
5 In case of a retrofit make design changes to chute geometry with CAD
6 Simulate the performance of the new design using OEM software
7 Evaluate results obtained from the simulation (reiterate steps 5 6 and 7)
8 Perform and finalise detail design steps
9 Manufacture
10 Installation
The above mentioned steps found in references [6] and [36] only provides
information regarding retrofitting or designing chutes with the aid of OEM
Although it is a powerful design 1001 the design process should not discard the
use of analytical hand calculation~ Some of the most important design decisions
regarding chute profiles are made with analytical hard calculations such as
plotting the material trajectorY
53 DETERMINATION OF MATERIAL PROPERTIES
The discrete element method is a promising approach to the simUlation of
granular material interaction The accuracy of the outcome of the simulation is
The optimisation of transfer chutes in the bulk materials industry
M N van Aarde
85
CHAPTER 5
however dependent upon accurate information on the material properties and
input parameters [44] These inputs basically consist of the following
fundamental parameters size and shape factors bulk density angle of repose
cohesion and adhesion parameters and restitution coefficients [45]
The determination of most of these parameters are explained and defined in the
following paragraphs The parameters that are changed in the simulation
according to the reaction of the flow are not discussed and are typically
parameters such as the internal coefficient of friction between a number of
particles A collaborated effort by the bulk handling industry aims to find ways in
which all parameters can be accurately determined through scientific methods
This has however still not been achieved The objective is to achieve a realistic
representation and therefore some parameters are altered in the simulation
It is important to note that the computation time increases as the particle size
becomes smaller and the amount of particles increase In most granular flow
problems the characteristics of the material stream are largely determined by
particles greater than 10 - 20 mm in size [45] Therefore in order to reduce
computation time the selected particle size for simUlations should be the same
as the largest particles handled by the facility namely 34 mm diameter
Although fines have a higher internal friction coefficient and more cohesiveness
these properties can be averaged into the input parameters to obtain the same
overall effect [45] Therefore only a single particle size is used in the simulation
and the properties optimised to obtain the same result under actual operating
conditionsmiddot Some of the material properties can be easily obtained from the
facility The rest of the properties are obtained from tests carried out by expert
conSUltants in this field
The size factor and bulk density are obtained from the facility Materia tests
carried out by external consultants provide the coefficient of friction and also the The optimisation of transfer chutes in the bulk materials industry
MN van Aarde
86
CHAPTER 5
wall friction angle This is the angle at which the material will start to slide under
its own mass To determine these material properties the external consultants
normally use sophisticated and expensive equipment Data gathered from these
tests are used for the hand calculation of the chute profile The angle of repose
can normally be observed from a stockpile and is the angle that the side of the
stockpile makes with the horizontal
For the OEM simulation the coefficient of friction is one of the main determining
factors of the wall friction angle Data provided by the material tests can not be
used as a direct input into OEM In the software package the coefficient of
friction is represented by a factor between 0 and 1 The material test data can
however provide some insight into where on this scale the factor is This factor
can be derived from a few small simulation iterations as there is no method of
direct conversion between the test result data and the OEM input
To determine this factor a plate is modelled with a single layer of particles This
plate is then rotated within the simulation at approximately 2deg per second As
soon as the particles begin to slide the time is taken from which the angle can be
calculated This process is repeated with different friction coefficients until the
correct wall friction angle is obtained After the coefficient of friction factor is
determined between the particles and the chute wall the material restitution
factor and coefficient of internal friction can be obtained
The restitution factor is obtained by measurirtg the rebound height of a particle
when it is dropped from a certain height This is usually difficult to determine due
to the variation in shape of the material particles If the particle lands on a
surface it rarely bounces straight back up Therefore the test is repeated
numerous times and an average is taken to obtain the final result
Coefficient of internal friction is a property that describes the particles ability to
slide across each other A simUlation is set up to create a small stockpile of The optimisation of transfer chutes in the blJlk materials industry
MN van Aarde
87
CHAPTER 5
material particles The angle of repose can be obtained by measuring the
average apex angle of the stockpiles In this simulation the coefficient of internal
friction and restitution factors are iterated This is done in order to simulate the
accurate behaviour of particles falling onto the stockpile and forming the correct
angle of repose Figure 51 shows what this simulation typically looks like
Figure 51 Determination of material properties for an accurate angle of repose
54 VERIFICATION OF THE SELECTED TEST METHODOLOGY FOR THIS
APPLICATION
The best verification is to compare the simulation results with an actual material
flow situation Therefore a comparison is made between the actual flow in the
existing transfer configuration and the simulation of this same transfer This is
also a good test to see if the parameters changed in the simulation were done
correctly
During the chute test programme CCTV cameras were installed in the problem
transfer chutes at the facility The cameras are positioned to provide an accurate
view of the material flow behaviour inside the chutes As explained in Chapter 3
The optimisation of transfer chutes in the bulk materials industry 88
MN van Aarde
CHAPTER 5
the behaviour of the material flow inside the chutes changes with the variation of
ore type
Due to the fact that only 34 mm diameter particles are used in the simulation a
test using coarse ore was chosen for the verification of the simulation
Therefore test 12 is used as reference for the verification In this test coarse S
with the particle size distribution between 28 mm and 34 mm was used at the
transfer from CV 3 to CV 5
Figure 52 shows an image taken from the CCTV camera inside the transfer chute
between CV 3 and CV 5 The red line indicates the top of the chute throat
opening and the yellow arrows show the top of material flow This screen shot
was taken at a flow rate of 10 000 tlh It can be deduced from this view and the
chute test work that the chute is choking at a throughput rate of 10 000 tlh
Figure 52 Actual material flow with coarse S at 10000 tIh
The transfer chute from Figure 52 was modelled in CAD and the model imported
into the discrete element package EDEM All the material input parameters as
discussed in section 53 were used in the simulation 10 000 tlh was used as the
The optimisation of transfer chutes in the bulk materials industry
MN van Aarde
89
CHAPTER 5
flow rate parameter in an attempt to simulate and recreate the situation as shown
by Figure 52
Test 12 of the chute performance tests gave the following results which can be
compared to the EDEM simulation
bull Chute started to choke rapidly at 10 000 tlh
bull Slight off centre loading onto the receiving conveyor CV 5
bull A lower velocity layer of material close to the discharge of the chute
bull Material roll back on the receiving conveyor due to significant differences in
the velocity of the material flow and the receiving conveyor
Off-centre loading
L
Figure 53 Material flow pattern through the existing chute
The optimisation of transfer chutes in the bulk materials industry
MN van Aarde
90
CHAPTER 5
Flow restricted in this area
Low velocity layer
Low discharge velocity rollback
Figure 54 Cross sectional side view of material flow through the existing chute
Figure 53 shows the material flow pattern in the existing chute where the thick
red arrows indicate the direction of flow The legend on the left of the figure
indicates the material velocity in ms Slow flowing material is shown in blue and
the colour turns to red as the material velocity increases Slight off centre
loading onto the receiving conveyor CV 5 can be seen from Figure 53 This
correlates well with the actual observations during the physical testing of this
transfer point
Figure 54 shows the more determining factors for correlation between actual flow
and simulated flow where the legend on the left indicates the material velocity in
ms This is a cross sectional view through the centre of the chute From this
view a build up of material can be seen in the chute throat area The slow
flowing material on the back of the chute also helps to restrict the flow Due to
the fact that the material speed at the discharge of the chute is much slower than
the receiving belt speed a stack of turbulent flowing material is formed behind
the discharge point on the receiving conveyor
The optimisation of transfer chutes in the bulk materials industry
MN van Aarde
91
CHAPTER 5
There is a good correlation between the simulated and actual material flow
pattern The simulation method can therefore be considered as a valid alternate
or additional method to standard analytical chute design Attention should be
given though to the input of material properties in order to obtain a realistic result
55 VERIFICATION OF NEW CHUTE CONFIGURATION AND OPTIMISATION OF THE
HOOD LOCATION
After establishing that the OEM is a reliable design and verification tool the new
transfer chute configuration can be simulated Firstly this configuration is
modelled without the honeycombs inside the hood and spoon This is done in
order to verify the material flow pattern and velocity through the hood and spoon
Results obtained from this simulation can then be compared to the hand
calculation results An iterative process is followed with simulations and hand
calculations to obtain the best flow results The simulation results are shown in
Figure 55 and Figure 56
I
L
Figure 55 Material flow through hood at 10 000 tIh
The optimisation of transfer chutes in the bulk materials industry
MN van Aarde
92
CHAPTER 5
Figure 56 Material flow through spoon at 10 000 tlh
The hood velocity profile shown in Figure 38 gives the same result as obtained
from the DEM simulation The calculated hood exit velocity is 633 ms This is
the same result obtained from the simulation and shown by the red colouring in
Figure 55 As the material enters the spoon it is falling under gravity and
therefore still accelerating At impact with the chute wall it slows down and exits
the spoon with approximately the same velocity as the receiving conveyor
Figure 56 shows the material flow through the spoon section This can also be
compared to the spoon velocity profile in Figure 39 The behaviour of the
material inside the spoon as shown by the simulation correlates with the results
obtained from the hand calculations This is another indication that with accurate
input parameters the DEM can be used as a useful verification tool
The optimisation of transfer chutes in the bulk materials industry
MN van Aarde
93
CHAPTER 5
Skew loading into spoon
Slower material
L
Figure 57 Determination of the optimum hood location
The hood is supported by a shaft at the top and can be moved horizontally This
function is incorporated into the design in order to optimise the hood location
during commissioning of the transfer chute It is critical to discharge centrally into
the spoon in order to eliminate skew loading onto the receiving conveyor
Figure 57 illustrates the effect that the hood location has on material flow When
comparing the flow from Figure 55 to the flow in Figure 57 it is clear that skew
loading is a direct result of an incorrect hood position The circled area in Figure
57 illustrates how the flow reacts to the incorrect hood location
Material is discharged to the right side of the spoon which causes a slight buildshy
up of material on the left This causes the material to flow slightly from side to
side as it passes through the spoon Figure 57 indicates that the material to the
The optimisation of transfer chutes in the bulk materials industry
MN van Aarde
94
CHAPTERS ----------------- -------___ _--shy
right at the spoon discharge is slightly slower than the material on the left This is
a clear indication of skew loading onto the receiving conveyor
The material flow pattern in Figure 55 is symmetrical and therefore will not
cause skew loading The OEM can give a good indication of the required hood
setup before commissioning However adjustments can still be made during the
commissioning process The tracking of the receiving belt should give a good
indication of when the hood is in the optimum position
56 EFFECT OF THE HONEYCOMB STRUCTURE IN HIGH IMPACT ZONES
The purpose of the honeycomb dead box structure in the high impact zones is to
capture material inside the pockets and induce material on material flow This
requires that the material inside the honeycombs should be stationary while the
main stream material flow moves over the dead boxes OEM can therefore be
set up in such a way that the material velocities can be visualised inside the
chute
In Chapter 4 the logic of how this honeycomb should be structured and
positioned was discussed The simulations shown in Figure 58 and Figure 59
illustrate how a OEM pack~ge can also be used to determine the positioning of
these honeycomb structures Impact points in the hood and spoon must be
inside the honeycomb in all situations of flow inside the chute The spacing of
dead box pockets can be altered to ensure that a continuous layer of stationary
material is formed in the honeycomb area Various geometries for this
honeycomb structure can be simulated with OEM to obtain the best results
The optimisation of transfer chutes in the bulk materials industry
MN van Aarde
95
CHAPTER 5
Large radius hood
Hood honeycomb box to minimise wear in impact
Vertical discharge from hood centralising flow on
belt
L
Figure 58 Material behaviour through hood
Spoon
Spoon honeycomb box to minimise wear in impact area
Improved spoon discharge flow
Figure 59 Material behaviour through spoon
The optimisation of transfer chutes in the bulk materials industry
MN van Aarde
96
CHAPTERS
The legends on the left of Figure 58 and Figure 59 indicate the material velocity
in ms Dark blue indicates stationary material and bright red indicates a
maximum material velocity of 8 ms Using this information the functionality of
the honeycomb dead boxes can now be analysed The velocity of the material
captured by the dead boxes is indicated as dark blue This means that all the
material in the dead boxes is stationary
With the result obtained from the OEM simulation it is clear that material on
material flow will be induced by the honeycomb dead boxes The pockets of the
honeycomb capture the material and will therefore have reduced wear in the
high impact areas This material on material flow does however induce a
coarser sliding surface than the smooth ceramic liner tiles Due to the high
velocity of material through the chute the effect of the coarser sliding surface is
however minimised
58 CONCLUSION
The Discrete Element Method is proven to be a successful design and
verification tool in the bulk materials industry This method is used widely in the
global bulk materials industry The successful outcome of the OEM simulation is
however dependent on the correct material input parameters Some of these
parameters are readily available from the facility that handles the material The
rest of the parameters can be determined by setting up simple test simulations
with OEM
To verify that the OEM simulation is a correct indication of the actual condition
the simulation is compared to CCTV images taken from the same transfer chute
The results show that the OEM simulation does provide a true reflection of the
actual material flow through the transfer chute Therefore the same material
input parameters can be used to simulate the new transfer chute configuration
The optimisation of transfer chutes in the bulk materials industry
MN van Aarde
97
CHAPTER 5
From the simulations done on the new transfer chute configuration the effect of
the honeycomb dead boxes can be examined These simulation results show
that the honeycomb dead box configuration is effective in capturing material
inside the honeycomb cavities This results in material on material flow and
reduces impact abrasion on the ceramic chute liners
Results obtained from the OEM simulation of the new transfer configuration are
compared to the hand calculation results This comparison indicates that the
material velocity calculated in the hood and spoon correlates well with the
material velocity calculated by the OEM The overall results obtained from
simulating the new transfer chute configuration have been shown to provide a
true reflection of the actual flow through the chute
The optimisation of transfer chutes in the bulk materials industry
MN van Aarde
98
CHAPTER 6
CHAPTER 6 CONCLUSIONS AND RECOMMENDATIONS
The optimisation of transfer chutes in the bulk materials industry
MN van Aarde
99
CHAPTER 6
61 CONCLUSIONS AND RECOMMENDATIONS
Bulk materials handling is a key role player in the global industrial industry
Within this field the industry faces many challenges on a daily basis These
challenges as with any industry are to limit expenses and increase profit Some
of the limiting factors of achieving this goal in the bulk materials handling industry
are lost time due to unscheduled maintenance product losses due to spillage
andhigh costs incurred by increased maintenance
The focus of this study was on the optimisation of transfer chutes and
investigations were carried out to determine the core problems These
investigations were done by observing and monitoring various grades of iron ore
passing through transfer chutes known to have throughput problems The core
problems were identified as high wear on liners in the impact zones skew
loading on receiving conveyors material spillage and chute blockages
These problems cause financial losses to the facility either directly or indirectly
Direct financial losses can be attributed to the frequent replacement of chute
liners while the indirect financial losses are caused by facility down time This is
why it is imperative to optimise the manner in which the transfer of material is
approached A new transfer chute configuration addresses the problems
identified at the facility and the core concepts can be adopted at any bulk
materials handling facility
This new concept examines the utilisation of the hood and spoon concept rather
than the conventional dead box configuration By using the hood and spoon
configuration the material discharge velocity is utilised and carried through to the
discharge onto the receiving conveyor Adding to this design is a honeycomb
dead box configuration in the high impact zones of the hood and spoon This
initiates material on material flow and prolongs the lifetime of the chute liners
The optimisation of transfer chutes in the bulk materials industry
MN van Aarde
100
CHAPTER 6
The radius of the hood should be designed so that it follows the path of the
material trajectory as closely as possible Some facility constraints prohibit this
hood radius from following exactly the same path as the material The radius of
the spoon is designed in such a manner that it receives the material from the
hood and slows it down while turning it into the direction in which the belt is
running Ideally the material should be discharged from the spoon at
approximately the same velocity as the receiving conveyor
If this can be achieved then some major problems suffered by the industry will
have been resolved With the hood having almost the same radius as the
material trajectory impact wear on liners can be significantly reduced By
discharging material from the chute onto the receiving conveyor at the same
velocity as the conveyor belt excessive belt wear and material spillage will be
avoided Further optimisation is however still possible by investigating the
implementation of various skirting options to the side of the conveyor
This new transfer chute configuration also boasts an articulated bottom section in
the spoon The purpose of the adjustable bottom section is to create greater
clearance below the spoon This will allow material on the belt below to pass
unimpeded underneath the spoon In some cases there can be several chutes in
series that discharge onto the same conveyor In these cases it is beneficial to
incorporate an articulated chute in order to have the capability of having a small
drop height between the discharge point in the chute and the receiving conveyor
This low drop height also minimises turbulent flow at the chute discharge point on
the receiving conveyor
The most unique feature to the new design is the implementation of the
honeycomb dead box configuration in the high impact zones Due to these high
impact areas the liners will experience the most wear This section of the chute
is flanged and can be removed separately from the rest of the chute to aid
maintenance In most maintenance operations it may only be necessary to reline The optimisation of transfer chutes in the bulk materials industry
MN van Aarde
101
CHAPTER 6
this small section of the chute Costs are minimised by reducing the time
required for maintenance and the cost of replacing liners
Previously testing of new transfer chute configurations normally involved
implementing the chute and obseNing its ability to perform according to
specification This can however be a costly exercise as it is possible that further
modifications to the chute will be required after implementation Therefore it is
beneficial to verify the new chute configuration before implementation
This is done by simulating the material flow through the chute using Discrete
Element Method A comparison was done between the actual flow in an eXisting
chute and the simulated flow in the same chute configuration This comparison
showed the same result obtained from the simulation and the actual material
flow This method can therefore be used as an accurate simulation tool for
evaluating transfer chute performance
The mathematical calculations describing the material flow in and over the
honeycomb dead box structures are complex Therefore simulation models are
used to show the material behaviour in those areas Simulations show that the
material captured within the dead boxes remains stationary thus protecting the
ceramic liners behind it This is the desired result as it prolongs the life of the
chute liners and reduces maintenance frequencies
If the work is done efficiently it normally takes two days to remove a worn chute
of this configuration fully and replace it with a new one This is normally done
once a year due to the design lifetime of the chute With the new chute
configuration this maintenance schedule can be reduced to two hours once a
year for the replacement of the honeycomb sections only The exposed face of
the honeycomb ribs will wear through until the efficiency of the honeycomb
design is reduced
The optimisation of transfer chutes in the bulk materials industry
MN van Aarde
102
CHAPTER 6
This specific iron ore facility has approximately fifty transfer points During this
exercise only two of these transfer points were replaced with the new chute
configuration The combined annual maintenance time for replacement of these
50 chutes is 100 days If the new chute philosophy is adopted on all these
transfers the annual maintenance time can be reduced to as little as 100 hours
This excludes the unplanned work for cleaning of spillages and fixing or replacing
worn conveyors
There are significant benefits to investigating the problems at specific transfer
points before attempting a new design This gives good insight into where the
focus should be during the design process Ea~y identification and
understanding of the problem areas is essential for a new chute configuration
The new design features can provide a vast improvement and a large benefit to
the bulk materials handling industry
62 RECOMMENDATIONS FOR FURTHER STUDY
During the chute performance tests it was noted that avalanches on the
stockpiles during reclaiming of material causes peaks on the conveyor systems
These peaks in the material stream increase the probability of blockages in the
transfer chutes As a result material spillage occurs and the conveyor belts can
be easily overloaded
This occurrence creates the requirement for further studies on the reclaiming
operations All stacker reclaimers are operated manually which creates ample
room for error Investigations can be done to determine the value of automating
the reclaiming operations Manual interaction cannot be avoided but an
automated system will reduce the possibility for error
Visual inspections on the transfer chute liners indicate that the material tends to
erode the liners away quicker in the grooves between liner plates or ceramic
The optimisation of transfer chutes in the bulk materials industry
MN van Aarde
103
CHAPTER 6
tiles This occurrence seems to be worse in areas of the chute where the
material velocity is the highest
This problem was specifically noticed with ceramic liner tiles The tiles are glued
to the chute surface with an epoxy and this substance also fills the crevices
between the tiles This epoxy is however not resistant to any type of sliding or
impact abrasion If the material gains speed in such a groove between the tiles it
simply erodes the epoxy away Studies to reduce or even eliminate this problem
should be examined
In some situations the layout and configuration of the chute prohibits the tiles
from being inserted in a staggered manner Studies can be done on the
composition of this epoxy in order to increase its resistance to sliding and impact
abrasion By doing so the lifetime of the chute liners can be increased which will
result in minimised facility down time due to maintenance
It seems that it is a global industry problem to find accurate scientific methods of
determining material input parameters for OEM simulations Although most of
the material properties can be determined through testing it is still a challenge to
convert that information into a representative input parameter into OEM It is
therefore recommended that further studies be undertaken to determine a
method by which material test data can be successfully converted into OEM input
parameters
The optimisation of transfer chutes in the bulk materials industry
MN van Aarde
104
REFERENCES ------shy
REFERENCES
[1] ARNOLD P C MCLEAN A G ROBERTS A W 1978 Bulk Solids
storage flow and handling Tunra Bulk Solids Australia Jan
[2] ANON 2008 Peak (Export) OilUSD Survival Dec
httppeakoHsurvivalorgltag=finance Date of access 8 Jun 2009
[3] KESSLER F 2006 Recent developments in the field of bulk conveying
FME Transactions Vol 34 NO4
[4] ANON 2007 Specification for Troughed Belt Conveyors British
Standards BS28901989 25 Sep Date of access 8 Jun 2009
[5] CEMA (Conveyor Equipment Manufacturers Association) Belt Conveyors
6thfor Bulk Materials ed wwwcemanetorg Date of access
10 Jun 2009
[6] DEWICKI G 2003 Computer Simulation of Granular Material Flows
Overland Conveyor Co Inc Jan httpwwwpowderandbulkcom Date
of access 10 Jun 2009
[7] AMERICAN COAL COUNCIL 2009 Engineered chutes control dust for
Ameren U Es Meramec Plant httpwww clean-coal infold rupalindexphp
Date of access 12 Jun 2009
[8] KUMBA IRON ORE 2008 Annual Financial Statements 2008
httpwwwsishenironorecompanycozareportskumba afs 08pdffullpdf
Date of access 13 Jun 2009
The optimisation of transfer chutes in the bulk materials industry
MN van Aarde
105
REFERENCES
[9] METSO BACKGROUNDER 2007 Rock Crushing 22 Feb
httpWWvVmetsocom Date of access 15 Jun 2009
[10] ALTHOFF H 1977 Reclaiming and Stacking System Patent US
4037735
[11] THE SOUTH AFRICAN INSTITUTE OF MATERIALS HANDLING
Conveyor belt installations and related components Chutes Level 1
course on belt conveying technology
httpWWvVsaimhcozaeducationcourse01chuteshtm Date of access
18 Jun 2009
[12] CLARKE R 2008 Hood and spoon internal flow belt conveyor transfer
systems SACEA - seminar 22 Aug httpWWvVsaceaorgzaDate of
access 22 Jun 2009
[13] T W WOODS CONSTRUCTION 2009 Design problems in coal transfer
chutes 24 Mar httpWWvVferretcomaucTW-Woods-Constructions
Date of access 25 Jun 2009
[14] LOUGHRAN J 2009 The flow of coal through transfer chutes 20 Aug
Showcase of research excellence James Cook University Australia
[15] ONEIL M 2006 A guide to coal chute replacement Power Engineering
International Nov httpgoliathecnextcomcoms2lgi 0198-369643Ashy
guide-to-coal-chutehtml Date of access 3 Jul 2009
[16] NORDELL LK 1992 A new era in overland conveyor belt design
httpWWvVckitcozasecureconveyorpaperstroughedoverlandoverland
htm Date of access 3 Jul 2009
The optimisation of transfer chutes in the bulk materials industry
MN van Aarde
106
REFERENCES
[17] Rowland C 1992 Dust Control at Transfer Points
httpwwwckitcozasecureconveyorpapersbionic-research-2d-bri2shy
paper05htm Date of access 4 Jul 2009
[18] KRAM ENGINEERING Ceramic composite impact blocks
httpwwwkramengineeringcozacercomhtmIDate of access
5 Jul 2009
I19] BLAZEK C 2005 Kinkaid InteliFlo tradeInstallation Source for Plats
Power Atticle Oct
httpwwwbenetechusacompdf caseStudyBe neKi ncArti c pdf
Date of access 10 Aug 2009
[20] CRP Engineering Corp Modern Transfer Chute Designs for Use in
Material Handling
httpwwwcbpengineeringcompdflTransfer Chutespdf Date of access
26 Apr 2010
[21] ROZENTALS J 2008 Rational design of conveyor chutes Bionic
Research Institute South African Institute of Materials Handling
[22] ROBERTS AW SCOTT OJ 1981 Flow of bulk solids through
transfer chutes of variable geometry and profile Bulk Solids Handling
1(4) Dec
[23] CARSON JW ROYAL TA GOODWILL DJ 1986 Understanding
and Eliminating Particle Segregation Problems Bulk Solids Handling
6(1) Feb
[24] BENJAMIN CW 2004 The use of parametric modelling to design
transfer chutes and other key components Gulf Conveyor Group The optimisation of transfer chutes in the bulk materials industry
MN van Aarde
107
l25] STUART DICK D ROYAL TA 1992 Design Principles for Chutes to
Handle Bulk Solids Bulk Solids Handling 12(3) Sep
[26J REICKS AV RUDOLPHI TJ 2004 The Importance and Prediction of
Tension Distribution around the Conveyor Belt Path Bulk materials
handling by conveyor belt 5(2)
(271 RAMOS CM 1991 The real cost of degradation
institute Chute design conference 1991
Bionic research
[28] ROBERTS AW 1969 An investigation of the gravity flow of non
cohesive granular materials through discharge chutes Transactions of
the ACMEjournal of engineering for indust~ May
[29] TAYLOR HJ 1989 Guide to the design of transfer chutes and chute
linings for bulk materials
association 1989
mechanical handling engineers
[30] ROBERTS AW 1999 Chute design application transfer chute design
Design guide for chutes in bulk solids handling The University of
Newcastle Australia
[31] NORDELL LK 1994 Palabora installs Curved Transfer Chute in Hard
Rock to Minimise Belt Cover Wear Bulk Solids Handling 14 Dec
[32] ROZENTALS J 1991 Flow of Bulk Solids in Chute Design
research institute Chute design conference 1991
Bionic
The optimisation oftransfer chutes in the bulk materials industry
MN van Aarde
108
REFERENCES
[33] ROBERTS AW WICHE SJ 2007 Feed Chute Geometry for
Minimum Belt Wear (h International conference of bulk materials
handling 17 Oct
[34J POWDER HANDLING New OEM Conveyor Transfer Chute Design
Software Helix Technologies
httpvwvwpowderhandlingcomauarticesnew-dem-conveyor-transfershy
chute-design-software Date of access 12 Aug 2009
[35J SAWLEY ML CLEARY PW 1999 A Parallel Discrete Element
Method for Industrial Granular Flow SimUlations EPFL - Super
Computing Review (11)
[36] DEWICKI G 2003 Bulk Material Handling and Processing - Numerical
Techniques and Simulation of Granular Material Overland Conveyor
Company Bulk Solids Handling 23(2)
[37J FA VIER J 2009 Continuing Improvements Boost use of Discrete
Element Method Oil and Gas Engineer- Production Processing 7 Oct
[38] KRAUS E F KA TTERFELD A Usage of the Discrete Element Method in
Conveyor Technologies Institute for Conveyor Technologies (IFSL) The
Otto-von-Guericke University of Magdeburg
[39] MOYS MH VAN NIEROP MA VAN TONDER JC GLOVER G
2005 Validation of the Discrete Element Method (OEM) by Comparing
Predicted Load Behaviour of a Grinding Mill with Measured Data School
for Process and Materials Engineering University of Witwatersrand
Johannesburg The optimisation of transfer materials industry
MN van Aarde
109
REFERENCES
[40J MciLVINA P MOSSAD R 2003 Two dimensional transfer chute
analysis using a continuum method Third international conference on
CFD in the Minerals and Process Industry CSIRO Melbourne Australia
(41J Overland Conveyor Company Inc 2009 Applied DEM
httpwwwapplieddemcomDate of access 26 Apr 2010
(42] DEM SOLUTIONS 2008 Advanced Particle Simulation Capabilities with
EDEM 21 Press release 5 Nov
[43J DEM SOLUTIONS 2008 Martin Engineering Expands use of EDEMTM
Software in Design of Solids Handling Equipment Press release 20 Feb
(44] COETZEE CJ ELS DNJ 2009 Calibration of Discrete Element
Parameters and the Modelling of Silo Discharge and Bucket Filling
Computers and Electronics in Agriculture 65 Mar
[45] DAVID J KRUSES PE Conveyor Belt Transfer Chute Modelling and
Other Applications using The Discrete Element Method in the Material
Handling Industry
httpwwwckitcozasecureconveyorpaperstrouqhedconveyorconveyor
Date of access 3 Sep 2009
bulk materials industry
MN van Aarde
110
ApPENDIXA
ApPENDIX A MATERIAL TESTS AND LINER SELECTiON
The optimisation of-transfer chutes in the bulk materials industry
MN van Aarde
11-1
ApPENDIX A
MATERIAL TEST WORK AND LINER SELECTION
Material samples were taken from the stockpile area for evaluation and testing
These samples represent the worst case materials for impact wear and flow
problems Tests were conducted by external consultants as this is a speciality
field Therefore no detail information on how the tests are conducted is currently
available Results from these tests should indicate the worst case parameters for
chute design according to each specific liner type tested
The material handled by the facility varied from 4 mm to 34 mm lump size A mid
range lump size ore was identified as the preferred material to use for wear
testing This decision was based on the specific ore type maximum lump size of
15 mm as required for the wear test The wear test apparatus used cannot
provide conclusive results with the larger lump sizes of 34 mm and thus smaller
sizes are used Guidance on which ore samples to take was given by the
external consultants tasked with performing the test work
The test work is divided into two sections Firstly the flow test work is carried out
on the finer material with a higher clay content known to have bad flow angles
Included in the selection of fine materials is a sample of the scraper dribblings
This is the material scraped off the belt underneath the head pulley Secondly
the wear tests were conducted on 15 mm samples as explained above
A few common liners were selected for testing These liners are shown in
Table A Some of these liners are known for their specific purpose and
characteristics Polyurethane is known to have a very good coefficient of friction
and will therefore improve the flow of material This material does however
wear out quicker in high impact applications Therefore it is only considered for
use inside the dribbling chute
The optimisation of transfer chutes in the bulk materials industry
MN van Aarde
112
ApPENDIX A
As can be seen from Figure 37 in section 432 the dribbling chute will only see
scraper dribblings from the primary and secondary scrapers It is protected from
any main stream flow of material by the start up chute This makes the
polyurethane liner a prime candidate for lining this section of the chute
Table A Material tested vs liner type
I Flow Tests Wear Tests
Liner T
en aJ c
u
I
i
N en aJ c
u
Cf)
en aJ c
u
I en
shy OJaJ C 0 shyj -shy 0 u pound
(f) shy0
T
aJ ~ j 0 0
N aJ ~ j 0 0 i
I Chrome x x x x x
Carbide
x x x x xI VRN 500 I
x x x x x x94
Alumina
Ceramic i I
Poly x
Urethane I I I
FLOW TEST WORK
The fines 1 sample was tested at three different moisture contents of 36 41
and 47 This is 70 80 and 90 of saturation moisture respectively No
noticeable difference was observed in the wall friction angles Therefore the
fines 2 and fines 3 samples were tested at 80 of saturation which is 42 and
43 moisture content respectively
Test work showed that the minimum chute angle required for flow increased as
the impact pressure increased Chute angles were measured up to impact
pressures of about 8 kPa The worst chute angle obtained was 62deg This means
that no angle inside the chute should be less than 62deg from the horizontal
The industry 113
MN van Aarde
ApPENDIXA
The scraper dribblings were tested at a moisture content of 12 This material
possesses the most clay content and therefore has the worst flow properties
During testing of this material water was added to improve the flow At an
impact pressure of 03 kPa the minimum chute angle drops from 62deg to 56deg when
adding a fine mist spray of water
WEAR TEST WORK
As stated in chapter 4 wear tests were conducted on the chrome carbide
overlay ceramics and VRN500 The results of these tests are shown as non
dimensional wear ratios of mm wearmm travel of bulk solid sliding on the wear
liners coupon at a given force Test results shown in Table B indicate that the
chrome carbide will have about 185 times the lifetime of 94 alumina ceramics
The VRN500 liner will wear about 6 times faster than the 94 alumina ceramics
at the same force
Table B Wear ratios of liners at two different pressure ranges
lore Wall Coupon 65 kPa 163kPa -173 kPa I i
Coarse 1 on 94 Alumina Ceramic 90 E-9 37 E-8
Coarse 1 on Chrome Carbide 87 E-9 20 E-8
Coarse 1 on VRN500 91 E-8 I 24 E-7 i
Coarse 2 on 94 Alumina Ceramics 38 E-9 22 E-8
Coarse 2 on Chrome Carbide 55 E-9 15 E-8
Coarse 2 on VRN500 66 E-8 25 E-7 I
LINER SELECTION
The lifetime of the liners is not the only criteria Maintainability and cost are also
factors that must be considered Chrome carbide seems to be the liner of choice
for this application However the specific type of chrome carbide tested is not
The optimisation of transfer chutes industry 114
MN van Aarde
ApPEND[xA
manufactured locally and the imported cost is approximately three times that of
ceramics
VRN500 is slightly cheaper than ceramics and can easily be bolted to the back
plate of the chute which makes maintenance very simple Ceramics are
however widely used on the facility and the maintenance teams are well trained
for this specific liner Therefore 94 alumina ceramics is chosen for this
application
The optimisation of transfer chutes in the bulk materials industry
MN van Aarde
115
ApPENODlt B
ApPENDIX B CHUTE CONTROL PHILOSOPHY
The optfmisation of transfer chutes in the bulk materials industry
MN van Aarde
116
ApPENDIX B
SPOON IN THE OPERATING POSITION
For the spoon to be in the operating position the moving head must be over that
specific spoon and the feeding stockyard conveyor must be running This means
that material will be fed through the chute In this case the spoon needs to be in
the operating position to prevent spillage
However when the chute is in the operating position and the feeding conveyor
trips for any reason the actuated spoon section must not move to the non
operating position If the spoon position feedback fails then the system must trip
and the spoon must remain in its last position The downstream conveyor must
also fail to start with this condition
SPOON IN THE NON OPERATING POSITION
As a rule the spoon needs to be in the non operating position when the moving
head on that specific stockyard conveyor is in the purging position (position C)
The reason is that when a stacker reclaimer is in stacking mode any upstream
stacker reclaimer can be reclaiming The reclaimed material on CV 5 or CV 6
will have to pass underneath the actuated chute
ACTUATED SPOON OVER CV 5
As an example for the movement of any actuated spoon on CV 5 the following
are considered When the moving heads of any of the stockyard conveyors are
in position A and that specific stockyard conveyor is running then the rest of the
actuated spoons over CV 5 must be in the non operating position The
following scenario provides a better understanding
bull CV 4 is running
bull CV 4 moving head is in position A
The optimisation of transfer chutes in the bulk materials industry
MN van Aarde
117
ApPENDIXB
In this situation all the actuated spoons on CV 5 except underneath CV 4
must be in the non operating position
ACTUATED SPOON OVER CV 6
As an example for the movement of any actuated spoon on CV 6 the following
are considered When the moving heads of any of the stockyard conveyors are
in position B and that specific stockyard conveyor is running then the rest of the
actuated spoons over CV 6 must be in the non operating position The
following scenario is similar to 453 but explains the control philosophy for the
moving head in position B
bull CV 2 is running
bull CV 2 moving head is in position B
In this situation all the actuated spoons on CV 6 except underneath CV 2
must be in the non operating position
The optimisation of transfer chutes in bulk materials industry
MN van Aarde
118